Manual Collection

SIMATIC
This document contains a
compilation of all manuals for
the ET 200SP system family.
Use the bookmarks on the
left edge of the screen to ET 200SP
navigate.
ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Edition 01/2019 support.industry.siemens.com

 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Guide to documentation 1
___________________
New properties/functions 2
SIMATIC ___________________
System overview 3
___________________
Application planning 4
ET 200SP
Distributed I/O system ___________________
Installation 5
___________________
Wiring 6
System Manual ___________________
Configuring 7
___________________
Basics of program execution 8
___________________
Protection 9
Configuration control (option
___________________
handling) 10
___________________
Commissioning 11
___________________
SIMATIC memory card 12
___________________
Maintenance 13
Test functions and
___________________
eliminating problems 14
___________________
Technical specifications 15
___________________
Dimension drawings A
___________________
Accessories/spare parts B
Calculating the leakage
___________________
resistance C
___________________
Safety-relevant symbols D

02/2018
A5E03576849-AH
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03576849-AH Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 02/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This documentation provides important information on configuring, installing, wiring and
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Basic knowledge required

A basic knowledge of automation technology is required to understand the documentation.

Validity of the documentation

This documentation applies to the distributed I/O system, ET 200SP.

Definition
In this document, " motor starter" always refers to all variants of the ET 200SP motor
starters.

Conventions
Please pay particular attention to notes highlighted as follows:

Note
Notes contain important information on the product, handling the product or on part of the
documentation to which you should pay particular attention.

Standards
You can find a dated reference to the relevant standards or EU declaration of conformity on
the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 3
Preface

Special information

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage.
Proper use of hardware products
This equipment is only allowed to be used for the applications described in the catalog and
in the technical description, and only in conjunction with non-Siemens equipment and
components recommended by Siemens.
Correct transport, storage, installation and assembly, as well as careful operation and
maintenance, are required to ensure that the product operates safely and without faults.
EU note: Start-up/commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been ensured that the
machine in which the component described here is to be installed fulfills the
regulations/specifications of Directive 2006/42/EC.

Note
Important note for maintaining operational safety of your plant
Plants with safety-related features are subject to special operational safety requirements on
the part of the operator. Even suppliers are required to observe special measures during
product monitoring. For this reason, we inform you in the form of personal notifications about
product developments and features that are (or could be) relevant to operation of systems
from a safety perspective.
By subscribing to the appropriate notifications, you will ensure that you are always up-to-date
and able to make changes to your system, when necessary.
Log onto Industry Online Support. Go to the following links and, on the side, right click on
"email on update":
• SIMATIC S7-300/S7-300F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13751)
• SIMATIC S7-400/S7-400H/S7-400F/FH
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13828)
• SIMATIC WinAC RTX (F) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13915)
• SIMATIC S7-1500/SIMATIC S7-1500F
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13716)
• SIMATIC S7-1200/SIMATIC S7-1200F
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13683)
• Distributed I/O (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14029)
• STEP 7 (TIA Portal) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14667)

Note
When using F-CPUs in safety mode and fail-safe modules, observe the description of the
SIMATIC Industrial Software SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) fail-safe system.

Distributed I/O system

4 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Preface

Recycling and disposal

For ecologically sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certified
disposal service for electronic scrap and dispose of the device in accordance with the
regulations in your country.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 5
Preface

Siemens Industry Online Support

You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here:
● Product support
All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications,
FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals.
● Application examples
Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks – as well as function blocks,
performance information and videos.
● Services
Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and
training offers.
● Forums
For answers and solutions concerning automation technology.
● mySupport
Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries,
and configurable documents.
This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet.

See also
Industry Mall (https://mall.industry.siemens.com)

Distributed I/O system

6 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide to documentation ........................................................................................................................ 12
2 New properties/functions ....................................................................................................................... 17
3 System overview ................................................................................................................................... 19
3.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system? .......................................................19
3.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules? .............................................22
3.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP? ..........................................23
3.4 Components ............................................................................................................................27
4 Application planning .............................................................................................................................. 36
4.1 Selecting the BaseUnit for I/O modules ..................................................................................40
4.1.1 Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without temperature
measurement ..........................................................................................................................40
4.1.2 Analog modules with temperature measurement ...................................................................41
4.2 Selecting motor starters with a suitable BaseUnit ..................................................................42
4.2.1 Selecting a BaseUnit for motor starters ..................................................................................42
4.2.2 Selecting the motor starter ......................................................................................................43
4.2.3 Selecting accessories for motor starters.................................................................................44
4.3 Selecting potential distributor modules ...................................................................................45
4.3.1 Selecting a PotDis-BaseUnit ...................................................................................................45
4.3.2 Selecting a PotDis-TerminalBlock ..........................................................................................46
4.4 Hardware configuration ...........................................................................................................48
4.5 Forming potential groups ........................................................................................................50
4.5.1 Basics......................................................................................................................................50
4.5.2 Forming potential groups with BaseUnit type B1 ....................................................................55
4.5.3 Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules ....................................................................56
4.5.4 Forming potential groups with motor starters .........................................................................58
4.6 Configuration examples for potential groups ..........................................................................60
4.6.1 Configuration examples with BaseUnits .................................................................................60
4.6.2 Configuration examples with potential distributor modules ....................................................61
5 Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 64
5.1 Basics......................................................................................................................................64
5.2 Installation conditions for motor starters .................................................................................68
5.3 Mounting the CPU/interface module .......................................................................................70
5.4 Installing the CM DP communication module .........................................................................72
5.5 Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules ......................................................................................74
5.6 Mounting and dismantling BaseUnits for motor starters .........................................................77

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 7
Table of contents

5.7 Installing potential distributor modules ................................................................................... 79

5.8 Installing the server module ................................................................................................... 80
5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters .................................................................... 81
5.9.1 Mounting the cover for the 500 V AC infeed bus ................................................................... 81
5.9.2 Mounting the mechanical bracket for the BaseUnit ............................................................... 83
5.9.3 Mounting the BU cover .......................................................................................................... 86
6 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 87
6.1 Rules and regulations for operation ....................................................................................... 87
6.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe
modules .................................................................................................................................. 90
6.2.1 Safety extra-low voltage (SELV, PELV) for failsafe modules and failsafe motor starters ..... 90
6.2.2 Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor
starters ................................................................................................................................... 91
6.2.3 Crosstalk of digital input/output signals ................................................................................. 93
6.3 Additional rules and instructions for operation with motor starters ........................................ 93
6.3.1 Protection against short circuit ............................................................................................... 93
6.4 Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply ....................................................... 94
6.5 Electrical configuration of the ET 200SP ............................................................................... 97
6.6 Wiring rules ............................................................................................................................ 99
6.7 Wiring BaseUnits for I/O modules ........................................................................................ 102
6.8 Connecting cable shields for I/O modules ........................................................................... 105
6.9 Wiring BaseUnits for motor starters ..................................................................................... 107
6.10 Connecting the 3DI/LC module for the motor starter ........................................................... 111
6.11 Connecting the supply voltage to the CPU/interface module .............................................. 113
6.12 Connecting interfaces for communication ............................................................................ 115
6.12.1 Connecting PROFINET IO (port P3) to the CPU ................................................................. 115
6.12.2 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface module/communications
module CM DP ..................................................................................................................... 117
6.13 Inserting I/O modules / motor starters and BU covers ......................................................... 118
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters .............................................................................. 120
6.14.1 Mounting the fan .................................................................................................................. 120
6.14.2 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters .............................................................................. 121
6.14.3 3DI/LC module ..................................................................................................................... 123
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP .............................................................................................................. 127
6.15.1 Factory markings.................................................................................................................. 127
6.15.2 Optional markings ................................................................................................................ 128
6.15.3 Applying color identification labels ....................................................................................... 130
6.15.4 Applying labeling strips ........................................................................................................ 132
6.15.5 Applying reference identification labels ............................................................................... 133
7 Configuring ..........................................................................................................................................134
7.1 Configuring ET 200SP ......................................................................................................... 134

Distributed I/O system

8 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Table of contents

7.2 Configuring the CPU .............................................................................................................137

7.2.1 Reading out the configuration ...............................................................................................137
7.2.2 Addressing ............................................................................................................................139
7.2.3 Process images and process image partitions .....................................................................142
7.2.3.1 Process image - overview .....................................................................................................142
7.2.3.2 Automatically updating process image partitions .................................................................142
7.2.3.3 Update process image partitions in the user program ..........................................................143
7.3 Configuring the interface module ..........................................................................................145
8 Basics of program execution ............................................................................................................... 146
8.1 Events and OBs ....................................................................................................................146
8.2 CPU overload behavior .........................................................................................................149
8.3 Asynchronous instructions ....................................................................................................151
9 Protection ........................................................................................................................................... 161
9.1 Overview of the protective functions of the CPU ..................................................................161
9.2 Configuring access protection for the CPU...........................................................................162
9.3 Using the user program to set additional access protection .................................................165
9.4 Know-how protection ............................................................................................................166
9.5 Copy protection .....................................................................................................................170
10 Configuration control (option handling) ................................................................................................ 172
10.1 Configuring ............................................................................................................................175
10.2 Creating the control data record ...........................................................................................177
10.2.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................177
10.2.2 Control data record for an ET 200SP CPU ...........................................................................179
10.2.3 Control data record for an interface module .........................................................................181
10.2.4 Feedback data record for interface modules ........................................................................185
10.2.5 Data records and functions ...................................................................................................187
10.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU ....................................188
10.4 Behavior during operation .....................................................................................................193
10.5 Examples of configuration control .........................................................................................194
11 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................... 199
11.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................199
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO ................................................................200
11.2.1 ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller ......................................................................................201
11.2.2 ET 200SP CPU as an I-device .............................................................................................203
11.2.3 ET 200SP as an IO device ...................................................................................................205
11.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP ...............................................................207
11.3.1 ET 200SP as a DP master ....................................................................................................207
11.3.2 ET 200SP as I-slave .............................................................................................................209
11.3.3 ET 200SP as a DP slave ......................................................................................................211
11.4 Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots ............................................................................212
11.5 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU...................................................213

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 9
Table of contents

11.6 Operating modes of the CPU ............................................................................................... 214

11.6.1 STARTUP mode .................................................................................................................. 214
11.6.2 STOP mode ......................................................................................................................... 217
11.6.3 RUN mode ........................................................................................................................... 217
11.6.4 Operating mode transitions .................................................................................................. 218
11.7 CPU memory reset .............................................................................................................. 221
11.7.1 Automatic memory reset ...................................................................................................... 222
11.7.2 Manual memory reset .......................................................................................................... 222
11.8 Reassigning parameters during operation ........................................................................... 224
11.9 Identification and maintenance data .................................................................................... 225
11.9.1 Reading out and entering I&M data ..................................................................................... 225
11.9.2 Data record structure for I&M data....................................................................................... 227
11.9.3 Example: Read out firmware version of the CPU with Get_IM_Data ................................... 229
11.10 Shared commissioning of projects ....................................................................................... 231
11.11 Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration ................................................................. 231
11.11.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 231
11.12 Time synchronization ........................................................................................................... 234
11.12.1 Example: Configuring and changing NTP server ................................................................. 236
12 SIMATIC memory card.........................................................................................................................240
12.1 SIMATIC memory card - overview ....................................................................................... 240
12.2 Setting the card type ............................................................................................................ 245
12.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards ......................................................................... 246
13 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................247
13.1 Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor starters (hot swapping) ................................... 247
13.2 Changing the type of an I/O module .................................................................................... 251
13.3 Replacing an I/O module ..................................................................................................... 253
13.4 Replacing a motor starter ..................................................................................................... 254
13.5 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit ........................................................................ 255
13.6 Firmware update .................................................................................................................. 257
13.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings ...................................... 264
13.7.1 Resetting the CPU to factory settings .................................................................................. 264
13.7.2 Resetting interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings .......................................... 267
13.7.3 Resetting the interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a RESET
button ................................................................................................................................... 268
13.8 Reaction to faults in fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor starters ..................................... 270
13.9 Maintenance and repair ....................................................................................................... 272
13.10 Warranty ............................................................................................................................... 272
14 Test functions and eliminating problems ...............................................................................................273
14.1 Test functions ....................................................................................................................... 273
14.2 Reading out/saving service data .......................................................................................... 280

Distributed I/O system

10 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Table of contents

15 Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................... 282

15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes ................................................................................282
15.2 Electromagnetic compatibility ...............................................................................................289
15.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules ...............................................................292
15.4 Shipping and storage conditions ...........................................................................................295
15.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions ...............................................................296
15.6 Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage ....................................298
15.7 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres .....................................299
A Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................................ 300
A.1 Shield connector ...................................................................................................................300
A.2 Labeling strip .........................................................................................................................300
A.3 Reference identification labels ..............................................................................................301
B Accessories/spare parts ...................................................................................................................... 302
B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules .................................306
C Calculating the leakage resistance ...................................................................................................... 307
D Safety-relevant symbols ...................................................................................................................... 309
D.1 Safety-related symbols for devices without Ex protection ....................................................309
D.2 Safety-related symbols for devices with Ex protection .........................................................310
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 312
Index................................................................................................................................................... 328

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 11
Guide to documentation 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Distributed I/O system

12 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Guide to documentation

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 13
Guide to documentation

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Distributed I/O system

14 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Guide to documentation

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 15
Guide to documentation

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Distributed I/O system

16 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
New properties/functions 2
What's new in the system manual ET 200SP, edition 02/2018 compared to edition 12/2016

What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find information?
New contents Potential distributor Potential distributor modules are a space- Starting from section System
modules saving replacement for standard potential overview (Page 19)
distributors or potential distributor terminals.
You can set up potential groups much faster,
in a more compact design and with fewer
components than with standard potential
distributor systems.
One application is, for example, the design of
digital input modules with 16 channels and 3-
wire connection. By using the potential dis-
tributor modules, you are reserving the un-
used signal lines of antivalent sensors.
Another application is the supply of potentials
for external components.
Password provider As an alternative to manual password input Section Know-how protection
you can connect a password provider to (Page 166)
STEP 7. A password provider offers the fol-
lowing advantages:
• Convenient handling of passwords.
STEP 7 reads the password automatically
for the blocks. This saves you time.
• Optimal block protection because the
operators do not know the actual pass-
word.
GetSMCinfo instruction With the help of the GetSMCinfo instruction Section SIMATIC memory card
you can respond to information provided by - overview (Page 240)
the memory card in the user program and if
required, replace the memory card as a pre-
cautionary measure. This makes sense in
particular if you write to the card often in your
application, for example if you use data logs.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 17
New properties/functions

What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find information?
Testing with breakpoints When testing with breakpoints, you execute a Section Test functions
program from one breakpoint to another. (Page 273)
Testing with breakpoints provides you with
the following advantages:
• Testing SCL and STL program code with
the help of breakpoints
• Localization of logic errors step by step
• Simple and quick analysis of complex
programs prior to actual commissioning
• Recording of current values within individ-
ual executed loops
• Use of breakpoints for program validation
also possible in SCL/STL networks within
LAD/FBD blocks
Changed Reading out the identifi- With the Get_IM_Data instruction you can Section Reading out and
contents cation and maintenance read out the identification and maintenance entering I&M data (Page 225)
data using the data of the modules without much program-
Get_IM_Data instruction ming work.
With the Get_IM_Data instruction, you can
access the identification and maintenance
data (I&M) of a module in the user program.
I&M data is information saved in a module.
This allows you to
• check the system configurations
• react to hardware changes
• react to hardware faults in the user pro-
gram.
Finding and elimination of hardware errors is
made easier.
Time synchronization For all applications that need the exact time, Section Time synchronization
you update the CPU time using the NTP (Page 234)
process. This also automatically sets the
CPU time beyond subnet limits.
Firmware update via You are given information on fast firmware Section Firmware update
accessible devices updates via accessible devices in the net- (Page 257)
work.

Distributed I/O system

18 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
System overview 3
3.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system?

SIMATIC ET 200SP
SIMATIC ET 200SP is a scalable and highly flexible distributed I/O system for connecting
process signals to a higher-level controller via a fieldbus.

Customer benefits of the system

Figure 3-1 SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system - Customer benefits

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 19
System overview
3.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system?

Area of application
Thanks to its multifunctionality, the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for
a wide range of applications. Its scalable design allows you to tailor your configuration to
local requirements. Different CPUs/interface modules are available for connection to
PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP.
SIMATIC ET 200SP with CPU allows intelligent pre-processing to relieve the higher-level
controller. The CPU can also be used as standalone device.
By using fail-safe CPUs, you can implement applications for safety engineering.
Configuration and programming of your safety program takes place the same way as for
standard CPUs.
A wide range of I/O modules rounds off the product range.
SIMATIC ET 200SP is designed with degree of protection IP20 and is intended for
installation in a control cabinet.

Configuration
The SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is installed on a mounting rail. It consists of:
● CPU/interface module
● Up to 64 I/O modules, which can be plugged into BaseUnits in any combination
● Up to 31 motor starters
● A server module that completes the configuration of the ET 200SP.

Distributed I/O system

20 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 System overview
3.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system?

Configuration example

① CPU/interface module
② Light-colored BaseUnit BU..D with infeed of supply voltage
③ Dark-colored BaseUnits BU..B for extending the potential group
④ BaseUnit for motor starter
⑤ Server module (included in the scope of delivery of the CPU/interface module)
⑥ ET 200SP motor starter
⑦ I/O module
⑧ BusAdapter
⑨ Mounting rail
⑩ Reference identification label
Figure 3-2 Configuration example of the ET 200SP

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 21
System overview
3.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules?

3.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules?

Fail-safe automation systems

Fail-safe automation systems (F-systems) are used in systems with higher safety
requirements. F-systems control processes and ensure that they are in a safe state
immediately after shutdown. In other words, F-systems control processes in which an
immediate shutdown does not endanger persons or the environment.

Safety Integrated
Safety Integrated is the integrated safety concept for automation and drive technology from
Siemens.
Proven technologies and systems from automation technology are used for safety systems.
Safety Integrated includes the complete safety sequence, ranging from sensor, actuator and
fail-safe modules right through to the controller, including safety-related communication via
standard fieldbuses. Drives and controllers handle safety tasks in addition to their actual
functions.

Fail-safe modules
The key difference between fail-safe modules (F-modules) and standard modules is that they
have an internal two-channel design. This means the two integrated processors monitor
each other, automatically test the input and output circuits, and switch the fail-safe module to
a safe state in the event of a fault.
The F-CPU communicates with a fail-safe module via the safety-related PROFIsafe bus
profile.

Fail-safe motor starters

Fail-safe motor starters enable safety-related tripping of motor loads. Fail-safe motor starters
are not PROFIsafe nodes. Motor starters operate together with the fail-safe modules of the
ET 200SP system.

Area of application of ET 200SP with fail-safe I/O modules

By using the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with fail-safe I/O modules, you are replacing
conventional safety engineering configurations. This includes the replacement of switching
devices for emergency STOP, protective door monitors, two-hand operation, etc.

Distributed I/O system

22 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 System overview
3.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?

3.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?

SIMATIC Safety F-system with ET 200SP

The figure below shows an example of a configuration for a SIMATIC Safety F-system with
ET 200SP distributed I/O system and PROFINET IO. The PROFINET IO lines can be set up
with copper cable, fiber-optic cable or WLAN.
Fail-safe I/O modules and non-fail-safe I/O modules can be combined in an ET 200SP
configuration.
The fail-safe IO controller (F-CPU) exchanges safety-related and non-safety-related data
with fail-safe and non-fail-safe ET 200SP modules.

Figure 3-3 Fail-safe SIMATIC Safety automation system (sample configuration)

Fail-safe ET 200SP I/O modules

The following fail-safe I/O modules are available for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system:
● Fail-safe power modules are used to supply the potential group load voltage and for the
safety-related tripping of the load voltage for non-fail-safe output modules.
● Fail-safe digital input modules detect the signal states of safety-related sensors and send
the relevant safety frames to the F-CPU.
● Fail-safe digital output modules are suitable for safety-related shutdown procedures with
short circuit and cross-circuit protection up to the actuator.

ET 200SP fail-safe motor starters

Fail-safe motor starters are suitable for safety-related tripping of motor loads.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 23
System overview
3.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?

Example of a configuration with fail-safe I/O modules

① Interface module
② Light-colored BaseUnit BU..D with infeed of supply voltage
③ Dark-colored BaseUnits BU..B for conducting the potential group further
④ I/O module
⑤ Server module (ships with the interface module)
⑥ Fail-safe I/O modules
⑦ BusAdapter
⑧ Mounting rail
⑨ Reference identification label

Figure 3-4 Example of a configuration of the ET 200SP with fail-safe I/O modules

Distributed I/O system

24 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 System overview
3.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?

Hardware and software requirements

Fail-safe modules ET 200SP are supported by IM155-6PN ST interface modules as of
firmware V1.1.1, IM155-6PN HF as of firmware V2.0, IM155-6PN HS as of firmware V4.0
and IM155-6DP HF as of firmware V1.0.
You require the STEP 7 Safety Advanced option package, V12 or higher including HSP 54,
for configuration and programming of the ET 200SP fail-safe modules with the SIMATIC
Safety fail-safe system.
You require the F-Configuration Pack V5.5 SP10 or later for configuring and programming
the ET 200SP failsafe modules with the Distributed Safety failsafe system.
You require the F-Configuration Pack V5.5 SP12 or later for configuring and programming
the ET 200SP failsafe modules with the F/FH Systems failsafe system.

ET 200SP fail-safe motor starters are supported by interface modules IM155-6PN BA,
firmware V3.2 or higher, IM155-6PN ST, firmware V3.1 or higher, IM155-6PN HF, firmware
V3.1 or higher and IM155-6DP HF firmware V3.0 or higher.
You require SIMATIC Step 7 V14 or higher for configuration and programming of ET 200SP
fail-safe motor starters. The F-Configuration Pack is not needed for configuration and
programming of the ET 200SP fail-safe motor starter.

Note
Configuration of ET 200SP motor starters, SIMATIC Step 7 V13 or higher, is possible with a
GSD file (GSDML).

Use in safety mode only

Safety mode is the F-I/O operating mode that allows safety-related communication using
safety frames.
Safety mode of motor starters is characterized by the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) and
availability of the 24 V power supply.
You can only use the ET 200SP fail-safe I/O modules in safety mode. They cannot be used
in non-fail-safe mode.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 25
System overview
3.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?

Achievable safety classes

The fail-safe modules are equipped with integrated safety functions for safety mode.
You can achieve the safety classes of the table below:
● With the appropriate parameter assignment of the safety functions in STEP 7
● With a specific combination of fail-safe and non-fail-safe I/O modules
● With a special arrangement and wiring of the sensors and actuators

Table 3- 1 Safety classes that can be achieved with ET 200SP in safety mode

Safety class in safety mode

According to IEC 61508 In accordance with ISO 13849-1
SIL2 Category 3 (PL) Performance Level d
SIL3 Category 3 (PL) Performance Level e
SIL3 Category 4 (PL) Performance Level e

Additional information
You will find the use cases and wiring for the relevant safety class in the manuals of the
fail-safe I/Os and the fail-safe motor starters.

Distributed I/O system

26 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 System overview
3.4 Components

3.4 Components

Basic components of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Table 3- 2 Basic components of the ET 200SP

Basic component Function Figure

Mounting rail in The mounting rail is the rack of the ET 200SP.
accordance with The ET 200SP is installed on the mounting rail.
EN 60715 The mounting rail is 35 mm high.

CPU/Fail-safe CPU The (F) CPU:

• Runs the user program. The F-CPU also
runs the safety program.
• Can be used as an IO controller or I-Device
on PROFINET IO or as a standalone CPU
• Links the ET 200SP to the IO devices or the
IO controller
• Exchanges data with the I/O modules via the
backplane bus.
Additional CPU functions:
• Communication via PROFIBUS DP (the
CPU can be used as a DP master or DP
slave in combination with the CM DP com-
munication module)
• Integrated Web server
• Integrated technology
• Integrated trace functionality
• Integrated system diagnostics
• Integrated safety
• Safety mode (when using fail-safe CPUs)

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 27
System overview
3.4 Components

Basic component Function Figure

Communication module The communication module CM DP
CM DP
• Connects the CPU with PROFIBUS DP
• The bus connection is an RS485 interface

Interface module for The interface module:

PROFINET IO
• Can be used as IO device on PROFINET IO
• Links the ET 200SP with the IO controller
• Exchanges data with the I/O modules via the
backplane bus.

The interface module:

Interface module for
• Can be used as DP slave on PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP
• Links the ET 200SP with the DP master
• Exchanges data with the I/O modules via the
backplane bus.

Distributed I/O system

28 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 System overview
3.4 Components

Basic component Function Figure

BusAdapter The BusAdapters allow free selection of the
connection technology for PROFINET IO. The
following versions are available for PROFINET
CPU/interface modules:
• For standard RJ45 connector (BA 2×RJ45)
①
• For direct connection of the bus cable
(BA 2×FC) ②
• For POF/PCF fiber-optic cable (BA 2xSCRJ)
③
• As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic
cable ⇔ standard RJ45 plug (BA
SCRJ/RJ45) ④
• As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic
cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus cable
(BA SCRJ/FC) ⑤
• For glass fiber-optic cable (BA 2xLC) ⑥
• As media converter for glass fiber-optic
cable ⇔ standard RJ45 plug (BA LC/RJ45)
⑦
• As media converter for glass fiber-optic
cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus cable
(BA LC/FC) ⑧

For mixed ET 200SP/ET 200AL configuration,

you require the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC ①
(plugged into the BaseUnit BU-Send). Connect
the bus cable for ET-Connection to the
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 29
System overview
3.4 Components

Basic component Function Figure

BaseUnit The BaseUnits provide the electrical and me-
chanical connection of the ET 200SP modules.
Place the I/O modules or the motor starter onto
the BaseUnits.
Suitable BaseUnits are available in each case
for the different requirements. You can find
additional information in section Selecting the
BaseUnit for I/O modules (Page 40).

PotDis-BaseUnit You use the potential distributor module to dis-

potential distributor mod- tribute a variety of potentials (P1, P2). This
ule allows you to implement a multi-cable connec-
tion without external terminals with 16-channel
digital modules.
The assembly has two parts:
• If you need additional potential terminals,
plug a PotDis-TerminalBlock in the
PotDis-BaseUnit.
• Alternatively, plug a BU cover (15 mm) on
the PotDis-BaseUnit.
With potential distributor modules, you may only
connect to the PotDis-TB versions BR-W and
n.c.-G potential, which exceed the voltage level
of SELV/PELV. Other SELV/PELV potential
groups should be separated with light-colored
PotDis BUs.
Suitable PotDis-BaseUnits are available in each
case for the different requirements. You can find
additional information in section Selecting a
PotDis-BaseUnit (Page 45).
PotDis-TerminalBlock If you need additional potential terminals for a
PotDis-BaseUnit, plug a PotDis-TerminalBlock
in the PotDis-BaseUnit.
Voltages greater than SELV/PELV are only
permitted for the PO PotDis-TBs BR (bridged)
and NC (not connected). The same applies to
PE. Voltages at the terminals of the PotDis
modules connected to the P1/P2 rails must not
be greater than SELV/PELV.
Suitable PotDis-TerminalBlocks are available in
each case for the different requirements. You
can find additional information in section Select-
ing a PotDis-TerminalBlock (Page 46).

Distributed I/O system

30 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 System overview
3.4 Components

Basic component Function Figure

Fail-safe power module The fail-safe power module allows the safety-
related shutdown of digital output modules / fail-
safe digital output modules.

I/O module / fail-safe I/O The I/O module determines the function at the
module terminals. The controller detects the current
process state via the connected sensors and
actuators, and triggers the corresponding reac-
tions. I/O modules are divided into the following
module types:
• Digital input (DI, F-DI)
• Digital output (DQ, F-DQ PM, F-DQ PP,
F-RQ)
• Analog input (AI)
• Analog output (AQ)
• Technology module (TM)
• Communication module (CM)
Motor starter/fail-safe The motor starter is a switching and protection
motor starter device for 1-phase and 3-phase loads.
The motor starter is available as a direct-on-line
and reversing starter.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 31
System overview
3.4 Components

Basic component Function Figure

Vale terminal AirLINE SP Basic component:
type 8647 (Bürkert GmbH Valve terminal AirLINE SP type 8647 (Bürkert).
& Co. KG) 1) 2) For more information on the AirLINE SP, type
8647 (e.g. data sheet and operating instruc-
tions), please contact Bürkert
(https://www.burkert.co.uk/en/type/8647)
directly.
Function:
Valve terminals are common in industrial auto-
mation and are used as pilot valves for control-
ling pneumatic actuators, for example in areas
of the food, pharmaceutical and water treatment
industries. The ET 200SP in combination with
the AirLINE SP, type 8647 from Bürkert pro-
vides a universal interface between process and
plant control that enables the flexible, modular
configuration of pilot valves and I/O modules.
The valve terminal can also be fitted to the base
of the control cabinet with the help of the Air-
LINE Quick Adapter. This further reduces the
space required in the control cabinet and con-
siderably simplifies installation of the pneumatic
system. 1) 2)
BU cover Insert the BU cover on the BaseUnits:
• Whose slots are not equipped with I/O mod-
ules/ motor starters//
PotDis-TerminalBlocks.
• Whose slots have been reserved for future
expansion (as empty slots).
You can keep a reference identification label for
the planned I/O module inside the BU cover.
There are three versions:
• For BaseUnits with a width of 15 mm ①
• For BaseUnits with a width of 20 mm ②
• For BaseUnits of motor starters with a width
of 30 mm ③

Distributed I/O system

32 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 System overview
3.4 Components

Basic component Function Figure

Server module The server module completes the configuration
of the ET 200SP. The server module includes
holders for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm).
The server module ships with the CPU/interface
module.

Coding element The coding element codes the I/O module with
the BaseUnit.
There are two versions:
• Mechanical coding element ①: Ensures the
coding
• Electronic coding element ②: This version
also has an electronic, rewritable memory
for module-specific configuration data (such
as the F-destination address for fail-safe
modules, parameter data for the IO link mas-
ter).

1) Note: The description contains non-binding information on supplementary products that are manufactured and marketed
not by Siemens but by third-parties outside the Siemens group ("third-party firms"). These third parties organize the manu-
facture, sale and delivery of their products independently and their terms and conditions apply.
Responsibility for these supplementary products and for the information relating to them that is provided here thus lies
solely with the third parties in question. Unless bound to do so by statutory requirements, Siemens shall not accept any li-
ability or provide any guarantee for the supplementary products of third-party firms. Please also note the information "Dis-
claimer/Use of hyperlinks".
2) Disclaimer/Use of hyperlinks: Siemens has put together this description with great care. However, Siemens is unable to
check whether the data provided by third-party firms is complete, accurate and up to date. Certain items of information
may therefore potentially be incorrect, incomplete or no longer up to date. Siemens shall not accept any liability should
this be the case, nor shall it accept liability for the usability of the data or of the product for the user unless it has a statuto-
ry obligation to do so.
This entry contains the addresses of third-party websites. Siemens is not responsible for and shall not be liable for these
websites or their content, as Siemens has not checked the information contained therein and is not responsible for the
content or information they provide. The use of such websites is at the user's own risk.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 33
System overview
3.4 Components

Accessories of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Table 3- 3 Accessories of the ET 200SP

Accessories Function Figure

24 V DC connector Applying the 24 V DC supply at the connector
and connection with the CPU/interface module,
for example.

Shield connection The shield connection allows the low-impedance

contacting of cable shields with minimum
installation times.

Labeling strips Attach the labeling strips to the modules for

system-specific labeling of the ET 200SP. The
labeling strips can be printed.
The labeling strips can be ordered as accesso-
ries (Page 302) on a roll for thermal transfer
printers or as DIN A4 format sheets for laser
printers.
Reference identification The labels enable the reference identification
labels labeling of the ET 200SP components.
The labels can be ordered on a mat for thermal
transfer and inkjet printers as accessories
(Page 302).
Color identification labels The color identification labels are module-
specific and can be ordered for the process
terminals, AUX terminals and additional
terminals as accessories (Page 302).

Distributed I/O system

34 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 System overview
3.4 Components

Accessories of the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters

Table 3- 4 SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter accessories

Accessories Function Figure

3DI/LC module The optional 3DI/LC module has three digital inputs
and one LC input. For reasons of operational
safety, input LC is permanently set to manual local
mode. By parameterizing the inputs DI1 - DI3 with
motor CLOCKWISE or motor COUNTER-
CLOCKWISE, you can control the motor in manual
local mode.
The functions of the 3DI/LC module are not rele-
vant to functional safety.
Detailed information on the functions when using a
3DI/LC module can be found in the Manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/vie
w/109479973).
Mechanical bracket for Use the mechanical bracket for additional fixing of
BaseUnit the motor starter. You can use the mechanical
bracket on 7.5 mm and 15 mm mounting rails.

Infeed bus cover For finger-safe termination of the infeed bus, use
the cover.

Fan You can use the motor starter at higher ambient

temperatures if a fan is installed.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 35
Application planning 4
Overview
The BaseUnits (BU) are classified according to different types. Every BaseUnit type is
distinguished by characteristics that match certain I/O modules and motor starters (see the
following table and graphics).
You recognize the BU type for an I/O module by the last two digits of an I/O module's article
number.
The BU type onto which you can plug the respective I/O module is printed on the I/O
modules. You can therefore read which BU type you need straight from the I/O module (see
Factory labels (Page 127) (page 122)).
Example: On the output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST with article number 6ES7132-
6BH01-0BA0 the information "BU: A0" is printed. This means you can plug this I/O module to
a BaseUnit of the BU type "A0", which means on any BaseUnit whose article number ends in
"A0". I/O modules that are suitable for two BU types are labeled accordingly, for example
"BU: A0, A1".

Note
You will find a complete overview of the possibilities of combining BaseUnits and I/O
modules /motor starters in the Product information for documentation of the ET 200SP I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864).

Distributed I/O system

36 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning

Table 4- 1 Selecting a suitable BaseUnit for I/O modules

Selecting a BaseUnit I/O module Examples of suitable I/O modules for BU types
(example) I/O module (example) BaseUnit
BU type A0 Digital, fail-safe, DI 16×24VDC ST BU15-P16+A0+2D
See Digital, fail-safe, technology or com- (6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0) (6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0)
communication, tech- munication module
nology or analog • 6ES7...A0
modules without tem-
• 24 V DC
perature measure-
ment (Page 40) • 15 mm wide
Analog module with- AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST
out temperature (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)
measurement**
• 6ES7...A1
• 24 V DC
• 15 mm wide
BU type A1 Analog module with AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4- BU15-
See Analog modules temperature meas- wire HF P16+A0+2D/T(6ES7193-
with temperature urement* (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 6BP00-0DA1)
measurement • 6ES7...A1
(Page 41)
• 24 V DC
• 15 mm wide
BU type B0 Digital output module RQ 4×120VDC- BU20-P12+A4+0B
(BU..B, dark-colored with relay 230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7193-6BP20-0BB0)
BaseUnit) • 6ES7...B0 (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0)
• Up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type B1 Digital modules DI 4×120..230VAC ST BU20-P12+A0+4B
(BU..B, dark-colored (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1) (6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1)
• 6ES7...B1
BaseUnit)
• up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type C0 Fail-safe power mod- CM AS-i Master ST BU20-P6+A2+4D
(BU..D, light-colored ule (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) (6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0)
BaseUnit) • 6ES7...C0
• 24 V DC
• 20 mm wide
CM AS-
i Master ST/F-
CM AS-i Safety ST
• 6ES7...C1
• Up to 30 V DC
• 20 mm wide

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 37
Application planning

Selecting a BaseUnit I/O module Examples of suitable I/O modules for BU types
(example) I/O module (example) BaseUnit
BU type C1 F-CM AS-i Safety ST F-CM AS-i Safety ST BU20-P6+A2+4B
(BU..B, dark-colored (3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1) (6ES7193-6BP20-0BC1)
BaseUnit) • 6ES7...C1
• Up to 30 V DC
• 20 mm wide
BU type D0 AI Energy Meter AI Energy Meter 480VAC BU20-P12+A0+0B
ST (6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0)
• 6ES7...D0
(6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0)
• Up to 400 V AC/
480 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type F0 F- F- BU20-P8+A4+0B
RQ 1×24VDC/24..230 RQ 1×24VDC/24..230VA (6E7193-6BP20-0BF0)
VAC/5A C/5A
(6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0)
• 6ES7...F0
• Up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type U0 DQ 4×24...230VAC/2 DQ 4×24...230VAC/2A HF BU20-P16+A0+2D
A HF (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) (6E7193-6BP00-0BU0)
• 6ES7...U0
• Up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide

* For compensation of the reference junction temperature for thermocouples. The BU type A1 is re-
quired if measuring the reference junction temperature with an internal temperature sensor or if
you need the 2×5 additional terminals.
** Analog modules with temperature measurement can be plugged on BU type A0.

Distributed I/O system

38 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning

Table 4- 2 BaseUnit for motor starters

Selecting the BaseUnit

BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30-
MS1 MS2 MS3 MS4 MS5 MS6
24 V infeed x x
500 V infeed x x x
F-DI terminals x x
Motor starters
DS 0.3 - 1A HF 3RK1308-0AB00-0CP0 x x x x x* x*
DS 0.9 - 3A HF 3RK1308-0AC00-0CP0 x x x x x* x*
DS 2.8 - 9A HF 3RK1308-0AD00-0CP0 x x x x x* x*
DS 4.0 - 12A 3RK1308-0AE00-0CP0 x x x x x* x*
HF
RS 0.3 - 1A HF 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0 x x x x x* x*
RS 0.9 - 3A HF 3RK1308-0BC00-0CP0 x x x x x* x*
RS 2.8 - 9A HF 3RK1308-0BD00-0CP0 x x x x x* x*
RS 4.0 - 12A 3RK1308-0BE00-0CP0 x x x x x* x*
HF
F-DS 0.3 - 1A 3RK1308-0CB00-0CP0 x x x x x x
HF
F-DS 0.9 - 3A 3RK1308-0CC00-0CP0 x x x x x x
HF
F-DS 2.8 - 9A 3RK1308-0CD00-0CP0 x x x x x x
HF
F-DS 4.0 - 12A 3RK1308-0CE00-0CP0 x x x x x x
HF
F-RS 0.3 - 1A 3RK1308-0DB00-0CP0 x x x x x x
HF
F-RS 0.9 - 3A 3RK1308-0DC00-0CP0 x x x x x x
HF
F-RS 2.8 - 9A 3RK1308-0DD00-0CP0 x x x x x x
HF
F-RS 4.0 - 12A 3RK1308-0DE00-0CP0 x x x x x x
HF

* The F-DI terminals have no function with this combination.

Additional information
Additional information on the functional assignment of the terminals and on the associated
BaseUnits can be found in one of the following manuals:
● Manual for the relevant I/O module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)
● Manual BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)
● Motor starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973) manual

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 39
Application planning
4.1 Selecting the BaseUnit for I/O modules

4.1 Selecting the BaseUnit for I/O modules

4.1.1 Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without

temperature measurement

Selection of a suitable BaseUnit

① Light-colored BaseUnit: Configuration of a new potential group, electrical isolation from adja-
cent module on the left. The first BaseUnit of the ET 200SP is usually a light-colored BaseUnit
for feeding the supply voltage L+.
Exception: If you insert an AC I/O module or an AI Energy Meter as the first I/O module, the
first BaseUnit in the ET 200SP configuration can be a dark-colored BaseUnit. The requirement
is that you use a CPU or IM 155-6 (as of V3.0).
Dark-colored BaseUnit: Conduction of the internal power and AUX buses from the adjacent
module on the left.
② AUX terminal: 10 internally bridged terminals for individual use up to 24 V DC/10 A or as pro-
tective conductors.
Example: Multiple cable connection for DI 8×24VDC ST

Figure 4-1 Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without temperature
measurement

Distributed I/O system

40 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.1 Selecting the BaseUnit for I/O modules

4.1.2 Analog modules with temperature measurement

Selection of a suitable BaseUnit

① Light-colored BaseUnit: Configuration of a new potential group, electrical isolation from adja-
cent module on the left. The first BaseUnit of the ET 200SP is usually a light -colored BaseUnit
for feeding the supply voltage L+.
Dark-coloredBaseUnit: Continuation of the internal power and AUX buses from the adjacent
module on the left.
② Additional terminals: 2×5 internally bridged terminals for individual use up to 24 V DC/2 A
Example: Sensor supply for AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST

Figure 4-2 Analog modules with temperature measurement

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 41
Application planning
4.2 Selecting motor starters with a suitable BaseUnit

4.2 Selecting motor starters with a suitable BaseUnit

4.2.1 Selecting a BaseUnit for motor starters

The motor starter BaseUnits "BU30-MS1", "BU30-MS2", "BU30-MS3" and "BU30-MS4" are
compatible with all non-fail-safe motor starters. The motor starter BaseUnits "BU30-MS1",
"BU30-MS2", "BU30-MS3", "BU30-MS4", "BU30-MS5" and "BU30-MS6" are compatible with
all fail-safe motor starters. You will find an overview of available BaseUnits for motor starters
here (Page 36). With the different BaseUnits, you can form different potential groups for the
24 V DC electronics supply (L+/M) and for the AC infeed.

Voltage range
The voltage range of the AC infeed is between 48 V AC and 500 V AC.

Selection criteria for the BaseUnit

The figure below shows the criteria you use to select the appropriate BaseUnit:

Form separate potential groups on the infeed bus for single-phase (L, N, PE) and three-
phase (L1, L2, L3, PE) operation.

Distributed I/O system

42 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.2 Selecting motor starters with a suitable BaseUnit

4.2.2 Selecting the motor starter

You select the suitable motor starter using the load type according to the following scheme:

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 43
Application planning
4.2 Selecting motor starters with a suitable BaseUnit

4.2.3 Selecting accessories for motor starters

Observe the installation conditions of the station with ET 200SP motor starters. The figure
below shows the criteria the station must meet:

Distributed I/O system

44 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.3 Selecting potential distributor modules

4.3 Selecting potential distributor modules

4.3.1 Selecting a PotDis-BaseUnit

Selection of a suitable PotDis-BaseUnit potential distributor module

① Light-colored PotDis-BaseUnit: Configuration of a new potential group, electrical isolation from

adjacent module on the left. The first BaseUnit of the ET 200SP is usually a light-colored Ba-
seUnit for the incoming supply voltage.
② P1 terminal: 16 internally bridged terminals for individual use up to 48 V DC/10 A
Example: Multiple cable connection for DI 16×24VDC ST

Figure 4-3 PotDis-BaseUnits

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 45
Application planning
4.3 Selecting potential distributor modules

Please note:
● The potential groups opened with a light-colored PotDis-BU must not contain any I/O
modules. You can integrate any dark-colored PotDis-BUs into I/O module potential
groups provided they are based on an SELV/PELV supply.
● If you do not need the additional terminals of the PotDis-TB in a potential distributor
module, replace the PotDis-TB with a BU cover. You may only connect one potential
group within a combination of PotDis-BU and PotDis-TB.
● Only SELV/PELV potentials are permitted on PotDis-BUs. Separate different SELV/PELV
potential groups using light-colored PotDis-BUs.
● With potential distributor modules, you may only connect to the PotDis-TB versions BR-W
and n.c.-G potential, which exceed the voltage level of SELV/PELV.
● PotDis terminals are not directly configurable as PotDis via GSD/GSDML. When
configuring with GSD, always use an dummy module; with GSDML, integrate a free
space.

Additional information
Additional information on the potential distributor modules (PotDis-BaseUnits and PotDis-
TerminalBlocks) is available in the BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) manual.

4.3.2 Selecting a PotDis-TerminalBlock

Selection of a suitable PotDis-TerminalBlock

With a PotDis-TerminalBlock you are expanding a PotDis-BaseUnit potential distributor
module by an additional 18 potential terminals.
You can freely combine PotDis-TerminalBlocks and PotDis-BaseUnits.
The following PotDis-TerminalBlocks are available:

Table 4- 3 Selection of TerminalBlock PotDis-TB

PotDis-TerminalBlocks
TerminalBlock Explanation Application
PotDis-TB-P1-R Terminal block with 18 terminals with red spring Provision of 18 x P1 potential, e.g. for P1 sensor
releases with connection to the supply voltage P1 supply with 3-wire connection for 16-channel digital
of the PotDis-BaseUnit with SELV/PELV. input modules
PotDis-TB-P2-B Terminal block with 18 terminals with blue spring Provision of 18 x P2 potential, e.g. for ground of
releases with connection to ground (P2) of the the sensor supply with 2-wire connection for 16-
PotDis-BaseUnit channel digital output modules

Distributed I/O system

46 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.3 Selecting potential distributor modules

PotDis-TerminalBlocks
PotDis-TB-n.c.-G Terminal block with 18 terminals with gray spring Provision of 18 x n.c. (not connected), for reserving
releases without connection to each other or to a ("parking") unused signals/lines, e.g. for antivalent
voltage bus of the PotDis-BaseUnit sensors in the same potential group
PotDis-TB-BR-W Terminal block with 18 terminals connected to Provision of 17 terminals with shared potential (the
each other with white spring releases without 18th terminal is used for infeed) for supply of ex-
connection to a voltage bus of the ternal consumers
PotDis-BaseUnit

Additional information
Additional information on the potential distributor modules (PotDis-BaseUnits and
PotDis-TerminalBlocks) is available in the BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) manual.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 47
Application planning
4.4 Hardware configuration

4.4 Hardware configuration

Maximum mechanical configuration

As soon as one of the following rules applies, the maximum configuration of the ET 200SP
has been reached:

Table 4- 4 Maximum mechanical configuration

Properties Rule
Number of modules Maximum of 12/30/32/64 I/O modules (depending on the CPU
used/the interface module used; see CPU
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/9046643
9/133300) and interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/5568331
6/133300) manuals)
For every 6 F-modules F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
(6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0), the maximum configuration is
reduced by 1 module.
Number of motor starters Maximum of 31 motor starters
Backplane bus length of the maximum 1 m mounting width (without CPU/interface module,
ET 200SP including server module)

Electrical maximum configuration for I/O modules

The number of operable I/O modules of a potential group is limited by the following factors:
● Power consumption of the I/O modules
● Power consumption of the components supplied via these I/O modules
The maximum current carrying capacity of the terminals on the BaseUnit L+/M is 10 A.
Current carrying capacity refers to the current load via the power bus and the infeed bus of
the ET 200SP station. Consider the current carrying capacity when using a motor starter.

Maximum electrical configuration for motor starter power bus (24 V DC)
To determine the current requirement of an individual motor starter via the power bus, take
account of the following parameters:
● Current consumption via DC infeed in the ON state
● Current consumption via DC infeed when switching on (40 ms peak load)
● Increased power consumption through fan operation
● Current requirement via encoder supply of the connected DI module
The maximum current carrying capacity of the 24 V potential group is 7 A across the entire
permissible temperature range.

Distributed I/O system

48 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.4 Hardware configuration

Maximum electrical configuration for motor starter infeed bus (500 V AC)
To determine the current requirement of an individual motor starter via the infeed bus,
proceed as follows:
Calculate the current requirement via the main current paths of the individual motor starter.
In doing so, take into account the parameter Ie (set rated operational current of the motor
starter). The permissible overload characteristics of the motor feeder for motors are
determined with the thermal motor model. You calculate the current value (Iinfeed bus) for the
infeed bus of the ET 200SP system according to the following formula:
Iinfeed bus = ∑n(Ie * 1.125)
n = number of motor starters of a potential group on the infeed bus
Refer to the Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973) for
details of how to assign the basic rated operational current Ie parameter.
The following values apply for the potential group of the AC infeed:
● The maximum current carrying capacity is 32 A at an ambient temperature of up to 50 °C.
● The maximum current carrying capacity is 27 A at an ambient temperature of up to 60 °C.
● The maximum current carrying capacity for applications according to UL requirements is
24 A at an ambient temperature of up to 60 °C.

Address space
The address space depends on the CPU/interface module (see CPU
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90466439/133300) Manual) and the
interface module used (see Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300) Manual):
● For PROFINET IO: Dependent on the IO controller/IO device used
● For PROFIBUS DP: Dependent on the DP master used

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 49
Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

4.5 Forming potential groups

4.5.1 Basics

Introduction
Potential groups for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are formed by systematically
arranging the BaseUnits.

Requirements
For formation of potential groups, the ET 200SP distinguishes between the
following BaseUnits:
● BaseUnits BU...D (recognizable by the light-colored terminal box and the light-colored
mounting rail release button):
– Opening of a new potential group (power busbar and AUX bus are interrupted to the
left)
– Infeed of the supply voltage L+ up to an infeed current of 10 A
● BaseUnits BU...B (recognizable by the dark-colored terminal box and the dark-colored
mounting rail release button):
– Conduction of the potential group (power busbar and AUX bus continued)
– Pick up of the supply voltage L+ for external components or loop-through with a
maximum total current of 10 A
● BaseUnits BU30-MSx (BaseUnit for the motor starter only)
Depending on the version, the BaseUnits in the "BU30-MSx" model series possess the
following properties:
– Opening a new potential group or continuing an existing one
– Feeding in the supply voltage L+ up to an infeed current of 7 A DC
– Opening a new load group or continuing an existing one by means of 500 V AC infeed
bus
– Feeding in the line voltage up to an infeed current of 32 A AC

Distributed I/O system

50 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

Placement and grouping of I/O modules

Each BaseUnit BU...D that you install in the ET 200SP configuration opens a new potential
group and supplies all subsequent I/O modules (on BaseUnits BU...B) with the necessary
supply voltage. The first 24 V DC I/O module to the right of the CPU/interface module must
be installed on a light-colored BaseUnit BU...D. Exception: If you insert an AC I/O module or
an AI Energy Meter as the first I/O module, the first BaseUnit in the ET 200SP configuration
can be a dark-colored BaseUnit. The requirement is that you use a CPU or IM 155-6 (as of
V3.0).
If you want to place another BaseUnit BU...B after a BaseUnit BU...D, disconnect the power
and AUX buses and open a new potential group at the same time. This allows individual
grouping of the supply voltages.

Note
All BaseUnits placed in a load group must match the infeed potential of the corresponding
light-colored BaseUnits.

Do not connect any BaseUnit of the "BU...B" type on the right of a motor starter's BaseUnit
(BU30-MSxx).

Placing and connecting potential distributor modules

Potential distributor modules provide potential distributors integrated into the system that you
can use to configure a rapid, space-saving customized replacement for standard potential
distribution systems.
You can place potential distributor modules at any location within the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system. To do so, you must observe the same design rules as for placing and connecting
I/O modules. Potential distributor modules are only suitable for SELV/PELV.
A potential distributor module consists of a potential distributor BaseUnit (PotDis-BU) and (if
necessary) a potential distributor TerminalBlock (PotDis-TB) plugged onto it. If you do not
need the additional terminals of the PotDis-TB, install a BU cover (15 mm) on the
PotDis-BaseUnit.
You must not place a BaseUnit for I/O modules in a PotDis potential group formed with a
light-colored PotDis-BaseUnit.

Note
Identical voltages with potential distributor modules
You can only connect identical (supplied) voltages with to the terminals of a potential
distributor module or PotDis potential group. Example: You only connect 24 V DC.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 51
Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

Placement and grouping of I/O modules and motor starters

For the potential group (L+/M), the following slot rules apply within the motor starter modules
and other I/O modules of the ET 200SP:
● An unassembled BaseUnit (BaseUnit with BU cover) must be inserted between the CPU,
an interface module or an I/O module and the motor starter. This is not necessary
between the motor starters.
● The empty slot can take on the potential (24 V DC) of the potential group on the left of it
(L+, M), i.e. I/O modules and motor starters can be operated in the same potential group.
● If you would like to insert an I/O module on the right of a motor starter, then use only one
BaseUnit of the BU...D Typ A0 type (light terminal box).
● The BaseUnits BU30-MS2, BU30-MS4, BU30-MS5 and BU30-MS6 can take on the
potential groups of other BaseUnit types.
However, pay attention to the following exceptions:
– Only a BaseUnit of type BU30-MS1 or BU30-MS3 may follow an AS-i module
(AS-i potential group).
– Only BaseUnits with fail-safe motor starters can be connected together in the same
potential group of an F-PM-E.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage.
Hazardous electrical voltage can cause electric shock, burns and property damage.
Disconnect your system and devices from the power supply before starting any assembly
tasks.

Distributed I/O system

52 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

AUX bus (AUX(iliary) bus)

BaseUnits with additional AUX terminals (e.g. BU15-P16+A10+2D) enable the additional
connection of a potential (up to the maximum supply voltage of the module), which is applied
via the AUX bus.
In the case of light-colored BaseUnits, the AUX bus is interrupted to the left. In the case of
BaseUnits of motor starters, the AUX bus is interrupted to the left.
The AUX bus can be used individually:
● You can plug a maximum of 8 I/O modules into the corresponding potential group as a
PE bar.
● For additionally required voltage

NOTICE
AUX bus as PE bar
If you use an AUX bus as a protective conductor bar, attach the yellow-green color
identification labels to the AUX terminals, and establish a functional connection to the
central protective conductor connection.
If you stop using the AUX bus as a protective conductor bar, make sure you remove the
yellow-green color identification labels and remove the connection to the central protective
conductor connection again.

The AUX bus is designed as follows:

● Maximum current carrying capacity (at 60 °C ambient air temperature): 10 A
● Permissible voltage: Depending on the BaseUnit type (see BaseUnit manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521))

Self-assembling voltage buses

You must feed in the supply voltage L+ via the BaseUnit BU...D, BU30-MS1 or BU30-MS3 .
Each BaseUnit BU...B allows access to the supply voltage L+ via terminals (red/blue). The
motor starter BaseUnits "BU30-MS1", "BU30-MS2", "BU30-MS3", "BU30-MS4", "BU30-MS5"
and "BU30-MS6" do not have this access.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 53
Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

Operating principle

1 CPU/interface module 14 Server module

2 BaseUnit BU...D 15 Self-assembling voltage buses P1/P2
3 BaseUnit BU...B 16 AUX bus
4 Potential group 1 17 Infeed bus 500 V AC (L1, L2(N), L3, PE)
5 Potential group 2 18 Supply voltage L+
6 Potential group 3 19 Supply voltage L+ (3)
7 BaseUnit BU...B with dummy module 20 Additionally required voltage
8 BaseUnit BU30-MS2 21 Supply voltage L+ (2)
9 BaseUnit BU30-MS4 22 Protective conductor (green/yellow)
10 BaseUnit BU30-MS1 23 Supply voltage L+ (1)
11 Potential group 4 24 Supply voltage 1L+
12 BaseUnit BU30-MS4
13 Backplane bus
Figure 4-4 Placing the BaseUnits

Connecting different potentials to the power or AUX bus

Note
If you apply different potentials to the power or AUX bus within an ET 200SP station, you
need to separate the potential groups with a BaseUnit BU...D.

Distributed I/O system

54 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

4.5.2 Forming potential groups with BaseUnit type B1

Introduction
The AC I/O modules of the ET 200SP are required to connect sensors/actuators with
alternating voltage 24 to 230 V AC.

Requirements
BaseUnits BU20-P12+A0+4B (BU type B1) and
● DI 4x120..230VAC ST digital input module
● DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module

Operating principle
Connect the required alternating voltage for the AC I/O modules directly at the BaseUnits
BU20-P12+A0+4B (terminals 1L, 2L/1N, 2N). Insert the AC I/O modules on the BaseUnits.

Note
Placing the BaseUnits for AC I/O modules
If you insert an AC I/O module as the first I/O module, a BaseUnit BU20-P12+A0+4B can be
the first BaseUnit to the right of the CPU/interface module in the ET 200SP configuration.
The requirement is that you use a CPU as of V3.0 or IM 155-6 (as of V3.0).
• The BaseUnits BU20-P12+A0+4B do not monitor the connected alternating voltage.
Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O
module manuals.
• Remember to take the BaseUnit type into account during configuration.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 55
Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

① CPU/interface module
② 24 V DC potential group
③ BaseUnits with DC I/O modules
④ BaseUnits BU 20-P12+A0+4B with AC I/O modules
⑤ Direct voltage
⑥ Alternating voltage

Figure 4-5 Placing the BaseUnits for the AC I/O modules

4.5.3 Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules

Introduction
ET 200SP distributed I/O systems can be configured using fail-safe and non-fail-safe
modules. This chapter provides an example of a mixed configuration comprising fail-safe and
non-fail-safe modules.

Distributed I/O system

56 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

Example of an ET 200SP configuration with fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules

In principle, it is not necessary to operate fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules in separate
potential groups. You can divide the modules into fail-safe and non-fail-safe potential groups
and install them.
The figure below shows an example of a configuration with fail-safe and non-fail-safe
modules within a single ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

① IM 155-6 PN HF interface module

② F-module
③ Non-fail-safe module
④ Power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST
⑤ Mixed fail-safe and non-fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU15..D and BU15..B.
You achieve SIL3/Cat. 4/PLe for the fail-safe modules. No safety category can be achieved
with the non-fail-safe motor starter.
⑥ Non-fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU15..D and BU15..B
⑦ Fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU20..D, BU15..B and BU30-MSx.
Up to SIL2/Cat. 3/PLd is possible if you disconnect the self-assembling voltage bus and thus
the non-failsafe modules.
⑧ Server module
⑨ Self-assembling voltage buses P1/P2
⑩ Fail-safe motor starter F-DS HF

Figure 4-6 ET 200SP - example of a configuration with fail-safe modules

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 57
Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

4.5.4 Forming potential groups with motor starters

Properties of the 500 V AC infeed bus

The infeed bus has the following properties:
● The infeed bus is assembled by lining up the motor starter BaseUnits "BU30-MSx".
● The infeed bus distributes the energy to the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter within one
load group.
● You can open load groups by inserting a 500 V infeed BaseUnit (BU30-MS1, BU30-MS2
or BU30-MS5). With the BaseUnits BU30-MS3, BU30-MS4 or BU30-MS6, you can take
over the infeed bus from the left-hand BaseUnit.
● Via the infeed bus, you have the option of supplying three-phase load groups via L1, L2
and L3 or with single-phase load groups via L and N.
● The permissible voltage range is between 48 and 500 V AC.
● The maximum current carrying capacity is up 32 A (3-phase) at 50 °C and 500 V. Pay
attention to the derating values depending on the configuration.

Properties of the self-assembling voltage bus (L+)

Self-assembling voltage buses have the following properties:
● Maximum current: 7 A
● Rated voltage: 24 V
Pay attention to the derating values depending on the configuration.
The AUX1 bus is not supported in the BaseUnits of the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters.

WARNING
Electric shock when operating the infeed bus without touch protection cover
There is a risk of electric shock when touching the infeed bus if you have not fitted a touch
protection cover on the infeed bus on the right.
Always fit a touch protection cover on the infeed bus on the right (article number: 3RK1908-
1DA00-2BP0).

WARNING
Electric shock when operating a BaseUnit without an inserted motor starter
If you fit a BaseUnit for motor starters without cover (e.g. option handling), there is a risk of
an electric shock when touching the BaseUnit.
Always fit a cover on the BaseUnit (article number: 3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0).

Distributed I/O system

58 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.5 Forming potential groups

Requirements
Use the following devices to form potential groups with motor starters:
● BaseUnits BU30-MSx
● 3RK1308-0xx00-0CP0 motor starters

Operating principle
Feed in the supply voltage L+ via the BaseUnit BU30-MS1 and BU30-MS3 at the 24V DC
and M terminals.
You can operate the motor starter on a single-phase (L1, N, PE) or a three-phase (L1, L2,
L3, PE) AC voltage system. You connect the required AC voltage directly to the BaseUnits
BU30-MSx (terminals L1, L2(N), L3, PE). You plug the motor starter onto the BaseUnits.

Note
The motor starters' AC power supply is not connected to the AC power supply for the AC I/O
modules (see Chapter "Forming potential groups with BaseUnit type B1 (Page 55)").

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 59
Application planning
4.6 Configuration examples for potential groups

4.6 Configuration examples for potential groups

4.6.1 Configuration examples with BaseUnits

Table 4- 5 Configuration examples with BaseUnits

BaseUnits Configuration
BU15-P16+A0+2D
BU15-P16+A0+2B

BU15-P16+A0+2D
BU15-P16+A0+2B
BU20-P12+A0+0B

Distributed I/O system

60 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.6 Configuration examples for potential groups

BaseUnits Configuration
BU15-P16+A10+2D
BU15-P16+A10+2B

4.6.2 Configuration examples with potential distributor modules

3-wire connection
The potential distributor modules allow for a space-saving design. For a 3-wire connection,
you can, for example, replace two digital input modules with 8 channels on a 141 mm long
BaseUnit with a digital input module with 16 channels and a potential distributor module,
each of which is only 117 mm long.

Note
You must not place a BaseUnit for I/O modules in a PotDis potential group formed with a
light-colored PotDis-BaseUnit.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 61
Application planning
4.6 Configuration examples for potential groups

The figure below shows a configuration example with a DI 16×24VDC ST digital input
module on a BU15-P16+A0+2B BaseUnit and a PotDis-TerminalBlock PotDis-TB-P1-R on a
PotDis-BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P2/B-B.

Figure 4-7 Example: 3-wire connection

Distributed I/O system

62 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Application planning
4.6 Configuration examples for potential groups

Supply of external components

Another application of the potential distributor modules is the supply of potentials for external
components. Potential distributor modules enable simple, compact, integrated and clear
design.
Observe the current carrying capacity of each terminal: max. 10 A.

Figure 4-8 Example: Supply of external components

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 63
Installation 5
5.1 Basics

Introduction
All modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are open equipment. This means you
may only set up the distributed I/O system ET 200SP in enclosures, cabinets or electrical
equipment rooms and in a dry environment (IP20 degree of protection). The housings,
cabinets and electrical operating rooms must guarantee protection against electric shock and
spread of fire. The requirements regarding mechanical strength must also be observed. The
housings, cabinets, and electrical operating rooms must not be accessible without a key or
tool. Access must only be possible for personnel instructed or authorized to work with such
equipment.

Installation location
Install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system into a suitable housing/control cabinet with
sufficient mechanical strength, fire protection and at least IP54 degree of protection
according to EN 60529, and take into consideration the ambient conditions for operating the
devices.

Installation position
You can mount the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in any position. The preferred mounting
position is horizontal mounting on a vertical wall.
The ambient temperature may be restricted in certain installation positions. You will find
more information in the section Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
(Page 296).
Pay attention to chapter "Installation conditions for motor starters (Page 68)" when using
motor starters.

Distributed I/O system

64 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.1 Basics

Mounting rail
Mount the ET 200SP distributed I/O system on a mounting rail in accordance with EN 60715
(35 × 7.5 mm or 35 × 15 mm).
You need to ground the mounting rail separately in the control cabinet. Exception: If you
install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground the rail
separately.

Note
If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to vibration and shock loads, both ends of
the ET 200SP system assembly must be mechanically fixed to the mounting rail (e.g using
8WA1010-1PH01 ground terminals). This measure prevents the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system from shifting to the side.

Note
If the ET 200SP distributed IO system is exposed to increased vibrations and shock, we
recommend that you screw the mounting rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approx.
200 mm.

The following are suitable surfaces for the mounting rails:

● Steel strip in accordance with Appendix A of EN 60715 or
● Tinned steel strip. We recommend these in conjunction with the mounting rails in the
section Accessories/spare parts (Page 302).

Note
If you use mounting rails from other manufacturers, make sure that they have the
required properties for your ambient climatic conditions.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 65
Installation
5.1 Basics

Minimum clearances
The figure below shows the minimum clearances you must observe when installing or
dismantling the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Figure 5-1 Minimum clearances

General rules for installation

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage.
Hazardous electrical voltage can cause electric shock, burns and property damage.
Disconnect your system and devices from the power supply before starting any assembly
tasks.

Distributed I/O system

66 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.1 Basics

Observe the following rules:

● Installation starts on the left-hand side with the CPU/interface module.
● A light-colored BaseUnit BU..D0, BU30-MS1 or BU30-MS3 with infeed of the supply
voltage L+ follows the CPU/the interface module or is placed at the start of each potential
group.
If you fit an AC I/O module or an AI Energy Meter as the first I/O module, then the first
BaseUnit in the structure of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP may be a dark-colored
BaseUnit. The requirement is that you use a CPU or IM 155-6 (as of V3.0).
● This is followed by BaseUnits BU..B, BU30-MS2 or BU30-MS4 (with a dark-colored
terminal box).
● The matching I/O modules / motor starters can be plugged onto the BaseUnits. You will
find matching combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules / motor starters in Application
planning (Page 36).
● The server module completes the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Note
Mount the ET 200SP distributed I/O system only with disconnected supply voltage.

WARNING
Protection from conductive contamination
Taking into account the environmental conditions, the devices must be protected from
conductive contamination.
This can be achieved, for example, by installing the devices in a control cabinet with the
appropriate degree of protection.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 67
Installation
5.2 Installation conditions for motor starters

5.2 Installation conditions for motor starters

Observe the following installation conditions when using an ET 200SP motor starter:
● Installation position
You can fit the motor starter vertically or horizontally. The mounting position refers to the
alignment of the mounting rail The maximum permissible ambient temperature range
depends on the mounting position:
– Up to 60° C: Horizontal mounting position
– Up to 50° C: Vertical installation position
You also need to consider the current carrying capacity of the ET 200SP components.
In the case of a vertical mounting position, use end retainers "8WA1808" at both ends of
the ET 200SP station:
● Mounting rail
Use one of the following mounting rails:
– 35x15 mm DIN rail in accordance with DIN EN 60715
– 35x7.5 mm DIN rail in accordance with DIN EN 60715
– SIMATIC S7 mounting rail
● Current carrying capacity of the ET 200SP station
Current carrying capacity refers to the current load via the power bus and the infeed bus
of the ET 200SP station.
Depending on the ambient conditions and mounting position, you have to take account of the
fan unit or additional mechanical fixings.

Mechanical brackets
Use the mechanical brackets in the following situations:
● When using a 15 mm mounting rail
● With a vertical mounting position
● For applications according to shipbuilding standards in all mounting positions with 7.5 mm
and 15 mm mounting rails

Designing interference-free motor starters

For interference-free operation of the ET 200SP station in accordance with standard
IEC 60947-4-2, use a dummy module before the first motor starter. No dummy module is
required to the right of the motor starter.
Note the following mounting rules:
Use the following dummy module on the standard mounting rail between the previous
module and the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter:
BU cover 15 mm: 6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0 with BaseUnit 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0

Distributed I/O system

68 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.2 Installation conditions for motor starters

For operation of the ET 200SP station with an unused BaseUnit, a cover must be provided
for the open BaseUnit plug contacts (power connector, power bus connector, and backplane
bus connector).
The cover protects the plug contacts against dirt. The BU cover can be ordered as an
accessory.

Mount the dummy module

The figure below provides a schematic representation of how to implement measures for
improving interference immunity.

① Interface module ⑥ Motor starter

② Digital input module ⑦ Motor starter
③ Digital output module ⑧ Server module
④ Dummy module ⑨ Infeed bus cover
⑤ Motor starter

NOTICE
Ensure interference immunity
You must not plug any other module into the BaseUnit of the dummy module, otherwise
interference immunity is no longer ensured.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 69
Installation
5.3 Mounting the CPU/interface module

5.3 Mounting the CPU/interface module

Introduction
The CPU/the interface module connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to the fieldbus
and exchanges the data between the higher-level control system and the I/O modules /
motor starters.

Requirement
The mounting rail is fitted.

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for mounting and removing the BusAdapter)

Mounting the CPU/interface module

Watch the video sequence (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
To install a CPU/interface module, follow these steps:
1. Install the CPU/interface module on the mounting rail.
2. Swivel the CPU/interface module towards the back until you hear the mounting rail
release button click into place.

Figure 5-2 Mounting the CPU/interface module

Distributed I/O system

70 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.3 Mounting the CPU/interface module

Dismantling the CPU/interface module

The CPU/interface module is wired and BaseUnits are located to its right.
To remove the CPU/interface module, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU/interface module. Remove the 24 V DC
connector from the CPU/interface module.
2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit. At the same time, shift the
CPU/interface module parallel to the left until it detaches from the rest of the module
group.
Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the CPU/interface module or
BaseUnit.
3. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CPU/interface module, swivel the
CPU/interface module off of the mounting rail.

Note
It is not necessary to remove the BusAdapter from the CPU/interface module.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 71
Installation
5.4 Installing the CM DP communication module

5.4 Installing the CM DP communication module

Introduction
You need the CM DP communication module to use the CPU with a DP master or DP slave.

Requirements
● The mounting rail is fitted.
● The CPU is installed.

Installing CM DP
To install the CM DP communication module, follow these steps:
1. Install the CM DP to the right of the CPU.
2. Swivel the CM DP towards the back until you hear the mounting rail release button click
into place.
3. Slide the CM DP to the left until you hear it click into the CPU.

Figure 5-3 Installing CM DP

Distributed I/O system

72 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.4 Installing the CM DP communication module

Removing a CM DP
The CPU and the CM DP are wired and BaseUnits are located to its right.
To remove the CM DP communication module, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU.
2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit and, at the same time, move
the CPU and the CM DP parallel to the left until they detach from the rest of the module
group (clearance about 16 mm).
3. Press the mounting rail release button on the CM DP and move it to the right until it
detaches from the CPU (clearance about 8 mm).
4. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CM DP, swivel the CM DP off of
the mounting rail.

Note
It is not necessary to remove the bus connector from the CM DP unless you have to replace
the CM DP.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 73
Installation
5.5 Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules

5.5 Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules

Introduction
The BaseUnits are used for electromechanical connection between the individual ET 200SP
components. They also provide terminals for connecting external sensors, actuators and
other devices.

Requirements
The mounting rail is fitted.

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for dismantling the terminal box and the encoding element)

Installing a BaseUnit
Watch "Install configuration" video sequence
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
To install a BaseUnit, follow these steps:
1. Install the BaseUnit on the mounting rail.
2. Swivel the BaseUnit backwards until you hear it click into the mounting rail.
3. Slide the BaseUnit parallel to the left until you hear it click into the preceding
CPU/interface module or BaseUnit.

Figure 5-4 Installing a BaseUnit

Distributed I/O system

74 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.5 Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules

Removing a BaseUnit

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
Hazardous electrical voltage can cause electric shock, burns and property damage.
Disconnect your system and devices from the power supply before starting any assembly
tasks.

To remove a BaseUnit, follow these steps:

The BaseUnit is wired and there are other BaseUnits to its right and left.
To remove a specific BaseUnit, move the neighboring modules. As soon as you have
created a clearance of about 8 mm from the neighboring BaseUnits, you can remove the
BaseUnit.

Note
The terminal box can be replaced without removing the BaseUnit. Refer to section Replacing
the terminal box on the BaseUnit (Page 255).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 75
Installation
5.5 Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules

To remove a BaseUnit, follow these steps:

1. If present, turn off the supply voltage on the BaseUnit.
2. Loosen the wiring on the BaseUnit (with a 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver).
3. Removing (from the right):
Press the mounting rail release button on the corresponding BaseUnit. Move the
BaseUnit parallel to the right and swivel the BaseUnit off of the mounting rail while
pressing the mounting rail release button.
Removing (from the left):
Press the mounting rail release button on the corresponding BaseUnit and on the
BaseUnit to the right of this. Move the BaseUnit parallel to the left and swivel it out of the
mounting rail while pressing the mounting rail release button.
Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the BaseUnit.

Figure 5-5 Removing the BaseUnit (removing from the right)

Distributed I/O system

76 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.6 Mounting and dismantling BaseUnits for motor starters

5.6 Mounting and dismantling BaseUnits for motor starters

Requirements
● The mounting rail is fitted.
● When using a 15 mm mounting rail, the mechanical bracket (3RK1908-1EA00-1BP0)
must be mounted.

Note
Mechanical bracket for BaseUnit
You will find out how to mount the mechanical bracket for the BaseUnit in chapter
"Mounting the mechanical bracket for the BaseUnit (Page 83)".

CAUTION
Protection against electrostatic charge
When handling and installing the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, ensure protection
against electrostatic charging of the components. Changes to the system configuration and
wiring are only permissible after disconnection from the power supply.

Mounting a BaseUnit
Proceed as follows to mount a BaseUnit for motor starters:
1. Hook the BaseUnit into the DIN rail from above.
2. Swing the BaseUnit to the rear until the BaseUnit audibly engages.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 77
Installation
5.6 Mounting and dismantling BaseUnits for motor starters

3. Slide the individual BaseUnits to the left to the previous BaseUnit until they audibly
engage.
Assemble the BaseUnits only on the DIN rail.

Note
The BaseUnits for motor starters can be plugged together with the BaseUnits for I/O
modules.

Disassembling the BaseUnit

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
Hazardous electrical voltage can cause electric shock, burns and property damage.
Disconnect your system and devices from the power supply before starting any assembly
tasks.

To disassemble the BaseUnit, proceed as follows:

1. Disconnect the main power supply and the control current supply of the SIMATIC ET
200SP motor starter.
2. Actuate the DIN rail release on the BaseUnit of the motor starter.
3. Move the BaseUnit to the left. As soon as there is a clearance of approximately 8 mm to
the neighboring BaseUnits, you can disassemble the BaseUnit of the motor starter.
4. Swing the BaseUnit away from the DIN rail while pressing the DIN rail release.

Distributed I/O system

78 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.7 Installing potential distributor modules

5.7 Installing potential distributor modules

Introduction
You use the potential distributor module to distribute a variety of potentials (P1, P2).

Requirements
The mounting rail is installed.

Installing and uninstalling PotDis-BaseUnit

You install/uninstall PotDis-BaseUnits as you would the BaseUnits for I/O modules. You can
find additional information in section Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules (Page 74).

Installing and uninstalling PotDis-TerminalBlock

Installing
Plug the PotDis-TerminalBlock in die PotDis-BaseUnit. Proceed exactly as described in
Section Inserting I/O modules / motor starters and BU covers (Page 118).

Uninstalling
To remove a PotDis-TerminalBlock, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the supply voltage at the PotDis-BaseUnit.
2. Simultaneously press the top and bottom release buttons of the PotDis-TerminalBlock.
3. Remove the PotDis-TerminalBlock from the front of the PotDis-BaseUnit.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 79
Installation
5.8 Installing the server module

5.8 Installing the server module

Introduction
The server module on the far right of the assembly/line completes the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system.

Requirement
The last BaseUnit is mounted.

Installing the server module

Watch "Install configuration" video sequence
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
Proceed as follows to install a server module:
1. Install the server module on the mounting rail on the right next to the last BaseUnit.
2. Swivel the server module backwards on the mounting rail.
3. Move the server module parallel to the left until you hear it click into the last preceding
BaseUnit.

Figure 5-6 Installing the server module

Removing the server module

Proceed as follows to remove a server module:
1. Press the mounting rail release button on the server module.
2. Move the server module parallel to the right.
3. While pressing the mounting rail release button, swivel the server module off the
mounting rail.

Distributed I/O system

80 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters

5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters

5.9.1 Mounting the cover for the 500 V AC infeed bus

Introduction
The 500 V infeed bus connects all SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters. For finger-safe
termination of the infeed bus, you must use the cover.

DANGER
Hazardous Voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage.
Hazardous electrical voltage causes electric shock, burns and property damage.
Disconnect your system and devices from the power supply before starting any assembly
tasks.

DANGER
Infeed bus - electric shock
You must provide the infeed bus with a touch protection cover on the right (Article No.:
3RK1308-1DA00-2BP0).
Failure to do so will result in the danger of electric shock.

WARNING
Personal injury may occur
On the last plugged-in BaseUnit of a motor starter, place a cover on the opening of the
contacts of the infeed bus.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 81
Installation
5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters

Procedure
Proceed as follows to mount the infeed bus cover on a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter:
1. Press the cover onto the opening of the BaseUnit on the right until it audibly engages.

The cover can be removed again using 2 fingers and without tools.

Distributed I/O system

82 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters

5.9.2 Mounting the mechanical bracket for the BaseUnit

Introduction
To achieve higher stability, you can use a mechanical bracket on 7.5 mm and 15 mm
mounting rails.

You must use the mechanical bracket in the following situations:

● When using a 15 mm mounting rail
● With a vertical mounting position
● For applications according to shipbuilding standards in all mounting positions with 7.5 mm
and 15 mm mounting rails
You can find further information on the mechanical bracket in chapter "Installation conditions
for motor starters (Page 68)".

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 83
Installation
5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters

Procedure
To mount the mechanical bracket, proceed as follows:
1. Insert the mechanical bracket into the opening at the bottom of the BaseUnit.
You use the same mechanical bracket for both mounting rails, rotated through 180°
respectively.

2. Hook the BaseUnit into the mounting rail.

3. Insert the mechanical bracket into the BaseUnit.
4. Screw the mechanical bracket securely onto the mounting panel. Use an M4 screw and a
suitable washer.

Distributed I/O system

84 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Installation
5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters

The figures below show the mechanical bracket after installation on a 7.5 mm or 15 mm
mounting rail.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 85
Installation
5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters

5.9.3 Mounting the BU cover

Introduction
BU covers are plugged onto BaseUnits whose slots have been reserved for future expansion
(as empty slots). The BU covers for motor starters serve as touch protection covers for
unoccupied slots.

DANGER
Hazardous Voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage.
Hazardous electrical voltage causes electric shock, burns and property damage.
Disconnect your system and devices from the power supply before starting any assembly
tasks.

DANGER
BaseUnit without motor starter - electric shock
If you install a BaseUnit without motor starter in the ET 200SP system (e.g. options
handling), you must provide the BaseUnit with a BU cover (Article No: 3RK1908-1CA00-
0BP0).
Failure to do so will result in the danger of electric shock.

Procedure
To mount the BU cover onto a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, insert the BU cover in the
BaseUnit in parallel until both interlocks audibly engage.

Distributed I/O system

86 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
Wiring 6
6.1 Rules and regulations for operation

Introduction
When installing the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as part of a plant or system, special
rules and regulations need to be adhered to depending on the area of application.
This section provides an overview of the most important rules that must be observed for the
integration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in a plant or system.

Specific application
Adhere to the safety and accident prevention regulations applying to specific applications,
for example machine protection guidelines.

EMERGENCY STOP devices

EMERGENCY STOP devices in accordance with IEC 60204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 0113)
must remain effective in all operating modes of the plant or system.

Excluding hazardous plant states

Hazardous operating states must not occur when
● the plant restarts after a voltage dip or power failure.
● Bus communication is reestablished following a fault.
If necessary, EMERGENCY STOP must be forced!
An uncontrolled or undefined startup must not occur after the EMERGENCY STOP is
unlocked.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 87
Wiring
6.1 Rules and regulations for operation

Line voltage
Below, everything you need to consider in terms of line voltage is described (refer to section
Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage (Page 298)):
● For fixed plants or systems without an all-pole mains disconnection switch, a mains
disconnection device (all-pole) must be available in the building installation.
● For load power supplies, the configured rated voltage range must correspond to the local
line voltage.
● For all power circuits of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the fluctuation/deviation of
the line voltage from the rated value must be within the permitted tolerance.

24 V DC supply
Below you will find a description of what you need to pay attention to with 24 V DC supply:
● For buildings: In the event of danger through overload, you must provide lightning
protection measures for external lightning protection (e.g. lightning protection elements).
● For 24 V DC supply lines and signal lines: If there is a risk of overvoltages, you need to
take precautions to ensure internal lightning protection (e.g. lightning protection
 elements,
refer to section Accessories/spare parts (Page 302)).
● For 24 V DC supply: Make sure there is safe (electrical) isolation and separate cable
routing or increased insulation of the low voltage (SELV/PELV) to electric circuits with
dangerous potentials in accordance with IEC61131-2 / IEC 61010-2-201.

Requirements for power supplies in the event of voltage interruption

Note
To ensure adherence to IEC 61131-2 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21, only use power
packs/power supply units (230 V AC → 24 V DC) with a mains buffering time of at least
20 ms. Observe the relevant requirement in your product standards (e.g. 30 ms for "burners"
pursuant to EN 298) as regards possible voltage interruptions. The latest information on PS
components is available on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com).
These requirements, of course, also apply to power packs/power supply units not
constructed using ET 200SP or S7-300-/400-/1500 technology.

Distributed I/O system

88 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.1 Rules and regulations for operation

Protection against outside electrical influences

Below is a description of what you must pay attention to in terms of protection against
electrical impacts and/or faults:
● Make sure that the system for discharging electromagnetic interference is connected to a
functional earth or to protective conductor with a sufficient cross-section for all plants with
an ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
● For supply, signal and bus lines, you must ensure that the laying of the lines and the
installation is correct.
● For signal and bus lines, you must ensure that a wire/cable break or a cross-circuit does
not lead to undefined states of the plant or system.

Reference
You can find more information in the Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 89
Wiring
6.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules

6.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP
with fail-safe modules

6.2.1 Safety extra-low voltage (SELV, PELV) for failsafe modules and failsafe motor
starters

WARNING

The failsafe modules must be operated with safety extra-low voltage (SELV, PELV).
You can find more information on safety extra-low voltage (SELV, PELV) in the data sheets
of the applicable power supplies, for example.
The fail-safe modules operate with the 24 V DC rated voltage. The tolerance range is
19.2 V DC to 28.8 V DC.
The fail-safe motor starters operate with the 24 V DC rated voltage. The tolerance range is
20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC.
Within the overvoltage range from 32 V DC to 36 V DC, the F-modules react in a fail-safe
manner and the inputs and outputs are passivated. For overvoltages greater than 36 V DC,
the F-modules are permanently de-energized.
Use a power supply unit that does not exceed Um = 36 V DC even in the event of a fault.
For more on this, refer to the information in the data sheet on overvoltage protection in the
case of an internal error. Or implement appropriate measures to limit the voltage, e.g. use
of an overvoltage protector.
All system components that can supply electrical energy in any form whatsoever must fulfill
this condition.
Each additional circuit (24 V DC) used in the system must have a safety extra-low voltage
(SELV, PELV). Refer to the relevant data sheets or contact the manufacturer.
Sensors and actuators with an external power supply can also be connected to F-modules.
Make sure that power is supplied to these components from safety extra-low voltage
(SELV, PELV) as well. The process signal of a 24 V DC digital module may not exceed a
fault voltage Um in the event of a fault.

WARNING

Even when a fault occurs, the permissible potential difference between the supply of the
interface module (bus voltage) and the load voltage must not be exceeded.
An external direct electrical connection is one way to meet this requirement. This also
prevents potential differences from causing voltage additions at the individual voltage
sources, which would cause the fault voltage Um to be exceeded.

Distributed I/O system

90 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules

6.2.2 Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules and fail-safe
motor starters

General requirements for sensors and actuators

Note the following important warning regarding safety-related use of sensors and actuators:

WARNING

Note that instrumentation with sensors and actuators bears a considerable safety
responsibility. Also bear in mind that sensors and actuators generally do not have proof-test
intervals of 20 years as defined in IEC 61508:2010 without considerable loss of safety.
The probability of hazardous faults and the rate of hazardous faults of safety functions must
comply with an SIL-defined high limit. A listing of values achieved by F-modules in the
technical specifications of the F-modules is available under "Fail-safe performance
characteristics".
To achieve the required safety class, suitably qualified sensors and actuators are
necessary.

Additional sensor requirements

General rule: To achieve SIL3/Cat. 3/PLe, a single-channel sensor is adequate. However, to
achieve SIL3/Cat. 3/PLe with a single-channel sensor, the sensor itself must be
SIL3/Cat. 3/PLe-capable; otherwise the sensor must be connected by two channels to
achieve this safety level.
To achieve SIL3/Cat. 4/PLe, sensors must be connected by two channels.

WARNING

In the case of fail-safe input modules, the value "0" is output to the F-CPU after detection of
faults. You therefore need to make sure that the sensors are implemented in such a way as
to ensure the reliable reaction of the safety program when the sensor is in the "0" state.
Example: In its safety program, an EMERGENCY-STOP sensor must achieve the
shutdown of the relevant actuator when it is in the "0" state (EMERGENCY-STOP button
pressed).

Additional requirements for sensors for fail-safe motor starters

Only single-channel sensors that fulfill the required safety category themselves may be
connected to the fail-safe motor starter's F-DI. Fail-safe laying must be observed in
accordance with the required safety category.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 91
Wiring
6.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules

Duration requirements for sensor signals

WARNING

Observe the following requirements for sensor signals:

• To ensure the correct detection of the sensor signals via fail-safe modules with inputs,
you need to make sure that the sensor signals are output for a minimum duration.
• For pulses to be detected with certainty, the time between two signal changes (pulse
duration) must be greater than the PROFIsafe monitoring time.

Reliable detection by F-modules with inputs

The minimum duration of sensor signals for F-modules with inputs depends on the
configured input delay, the parameters of the short circuit test of the sensor supplies, and the
configured discrepancy behavior for 1oo2 evaluation. The signal must be greater than the
maximum response time of the configured application. Information on calculating the
maximum response time can be found in the section "Response times" of the relevant F-
module.
The maximum permitted switching frequency of the sensor signals results from the minimum
duration.

Additional requirements for actuators

The fail-safe output modules test the outputs at regular intervals. The F-module briefly
switches off the activated outputs and, if necessary, switches on the deactivated outputs.
You can assign the maximum duration of the test pulses (dark and light period) with
parameters.
Fast reacting actuators may briefly drop out or be activated during the test. If your process
does not tolerate this, set the pulse duration of the light or dark test correspondingly or use
actuators that have sufficient lag.

WARNING

If the actuators switch voltages higher than 24 V DC (e.g. 230 V DC), safe galvanic
isolation must be ensured between the outputs of a fail-safe output module and the parts
carrying a higher voltage (in compliance with the IEC 60664-1 standard).
This is generally the case for relays and contactors. Particular attention must be paid to this
with semiconductor switching devices.

Technical specifications of sensors and actuators

Refer to the manuals of the fail-safe modules for technical specifications to assist you in
selecting sensors and actuators.

Distributed I/O system

92 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.3 Additional rules and instructions for operation with motor starters

6.2.3 Crosstalk of digital input/output signals

When fail-safe digital output and input signals are in a single cable, F-DQ modules and
F-PM-E modules may experience readback errors.
Cause: capacitive crosstalk
During the bit pattern test of the outputs or the sensor supply of the inputs, the steep
switching edge of the output drivers caused by the coupling capacitance of the line may
result in crosstalk to other non-activated output or input channels. This may then lead to a
response of the readback circuit in these channels. A cross circuit/short-circuit is detected,
which leads to safety-related tripping.
Remedy:
● Separate cables for F-DI modules, F-DQ modules, and F-PM-E modules or non-fail-safe
DQ modules
● Separate cables for F-DQ channel and F-DI channels for the F-PM-E module
● Coupling relay or diodes in the outputs
● Disable the sensor supply test if safety class requirements allow it.
Cause: magnetic crosstalk
Note that an inductive load connected to the F-DQ channels can induce coupling of a strong
magnetic field.
Remedy:
● Separate the inductive loads spatially or shield against the magnetic field.
● Configure the readback time to 50 ms or higher.

6.3 Additional rules and instructions for operation with motor starters

6.3.1 Protection against short circuit

The motor starter complies with type of coordination 1. Secure the feeder cable for the infeed
bus according to current, country-specific rules for conductor protection.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage at the Motor
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage.
Following a short-circuit, the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter is defective. Replace the
motor starter following a short-circuit.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 93
Wiring
6.4 Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply

6.4 Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply

Introduction
Below you will find information on the overall configuration of an ET 200SP distributed I/O
system on a grounded incoming supply (e.g. TN-S network). The specific subjects discussed
are:
● Disconnecting devices and short-circuit and overload protection according to IEC 60364
(corresponds to DIN VDE 0100) and IEC 60204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 0113)
● Load power supplies and load circuits.

Grounded incoming supply

In the case of grounded incoming supplies (TN-S system) the neutral conductor (N) and the
protective conductor (PE) are each grounded. Both conductors form a part of the overvoltage
concept. When a plant is in operation, the current flows across the neutral conductor. When
a fault occurs, for example, a single ground fault between a live conductor and ground, the
current flows through the protective conductor.

Safe electrical isolation (SELV/PELV in accordance with IEC 61131-2 or 61010-2-201)

Load current / power supply modules with safe electrical isolation are required for the
operation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. In accordance with IEC 61131-2 / 61010-
2-201, this protection is referred to as SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage)/PELV (Protective
Extra Low Voltage).
The wiring of SELV/PELV circuits must either be isolated from the wiring of other circuits that
are not SELV/PELV or the insulation of all conductors must be dimensioned for the higher
voltage.

Configuration of ET 200SP with ungrounded reference potential

To conduct interference currents, the reference potential of the CPU/interface module and
the BaseUnits BU15...D is connected internally via an RC combination (IM/CPU:
R = 10 MΩ / C = 100 nF, BU15...D: R = 10 MΩ / C = 4 nF) with the mounting rail (functional
grounding).
● This configuration conducts high-frequency interference currents and prevents static
charges.
● It is always possible to configure an ungrounded setup of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system as the ET 200SP distributed I/O system has no fixed ground connection. The
power pack/power supply module for 24 V DC must also be ungrounded and electrically
isolated.
If you want to configure the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with grounded reference
potential, connect the 1M connection of the CPU/interface module electrically with the
protective conductor.

Distributed I/O system

94 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.4 Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply

Short-circuit / overload protection

Various measures as protection against short-circuits and overloads are required for setting
up a full installation. The type of components and the binding protective measures depend
on which IEC (DIN VDE) regulation applies to your system configuration. The table refers to
the figure below and compares the IEC (DIN VDE) regulations.

Table 6- 1 Components and protective measures

Refer to figure IEC 60364 (DIN VDE 0100) IEC 60204 (DIN VDE 0113)
Disconnecting device for controller, ① Main switch Disconnector
sensors, and actuators
Short-circuit / overload protection: ② Single-pole protection of With grounded secondary
In groups for sensors and actuators circuits circuit: single-pole protection
otherwise: all-pole protection

③
Load current supply for AC load cir- ② Galvanic isolation by Galvanic isolation by
cuits with more than five items of transformer recommended transformer recommended
electromagnetic equipment

Cable temperature measurement threshold

Note
Cable temperature measurement threshold
When choosing a cable, remember that the cable temperature in operation can be up to
30 °C higher than the ambient temperature of the ET200SP system (example: at an ambient
temperature of 60 °C, a connection conductor must be dimensioned for a temperature range
of at least 90 °C).
You should specify other connection types and material requirements based on the electrical
characteristics of the circuits you use and the installation environment.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 95
Wiring
6.4 Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply

ET 200SP in the overall configuration

The figure below shows the overall configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(load current supply and grounding concept) with supply from a TN-S network.

① Main switch
② Short-circuit / overload protection
③ The load current supply (galvanic isolation)
Figure 6-1 ET 200SP in the overall configuration

Distributed I/O system

96 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.5 Electrical configuration of the ET 200SP

6.5 Electrical configuration of the ET 200SP

Electrical isolation

Electrical relationships
With the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, there is electrical isolation between:
● The load circuits/process and all other circuit components of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.
● The communication interfaces of the CPU (PROFINET) or of the interface module
(PROFINET/PROFIBUS) and all other circuit components.
The figures below show the electrical relationships of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
with the CPU and the interface module. Only the most important components are
represented in the figures.

Figure 6-2 Electrical relationships for ET 200SP with CPU

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 97
Wiring
6.5 Electrical configuration of the ET 200SP

Figure 6-3 Electrical relationships for ET 200SP with interface module (using IM 155-6 PN ST as an example)

Distributed I/O system

98 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.6 Wiring rules

6.6 Wiring rules

Wiring rules for the CPU/interface module and BaseUnits for I/O modules

Wiring rules for ... CPU/interface module BaseUnits

(supply voltage) (push-in terminal)
Permitted cable cross-sections of solid cables (Cu) 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
AWG*: 24 to 13
Permitted cable Without end sleeve 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
cross-sections of AWG*: 24 to 13 AWG*: 24 to 14
flexible cables (Cu)
With end sleeve 0.25 mm to 1.5 mm2** 0.14 mm to 1.5 mm2
(with plastic sleeve)*** AWG*: 24 to 16 AWG*: 26 to 16
With TWIN end sleeve*** 0.5 mm to 1 mm2 0.5 to 0.75 mm2 (see below)
AWG*: 20 to 17 AWG*: 20 to 18
Stripping length of the wires 8 to 10 mm
End sleeves in accordance with DIN 46228 with plastic 8 and 10 mm long
sleeve***

* AWG: American Wire Gauge

** End sleeves without plastic sleeve: 0.25 to 2.5 mm2/AWG: 24 to 13
*** See note on end sleeves

Note
End sleeves
Optimum results with respect to a high-quality and permanent electrical connection with
maximum conductor pull forces at the same time can be achieved by using crimping dies,
preferably with smooth surfaces, which are provided, for example, with rectangular and
trapezoidal crimp cross-sections.
Crimping dies with a pronounced wave profile are unsuitable.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 99
Wiring
6.6 Wiring rules

TWIN end sleeves for the cables of the I/O modules' push-in terminals
Due to the space required by TWIN end sleeves with 0.75 mm2 cross-section, you must
ensure a correct angle for the cable arrangement when crimping the TWIN end sleeve
so that the cables are optimally arranged.

① Cross-section of the terminal compartment

② Crimping TWIN end sleeves at the correct angle

Figure 6-4 TWIN end sleeves

Wiring rules for motor starters

Wiring rules for ... L1(L), L2(N), L3, T1, T2, T3, PE, 24 V DC, F-DI, DI1 ... DI3, LC, M, 24 V
PE M OUT
Permitted cable cross-sections of solid 1 to 6 mm2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0.2 to 1.5 mm2
cables (Cu) AWG: 18 to 10 AWG: 20 to 12 AWG: 24 to 16
Permitted cable Without end 1 to 6 mm2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0.2 to 1.5 mm2
cross-sections of sleeve AWG: 18 to 10 AWG: 20 to 12 AWG: 24 to 16
flexible cables (Cu)
With end sleeve 1 to 6 mm2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0.25 to 1.5 mm2
AWG: 18 to 10 AWG: 20 to 12 AWG: 24 to 16
With end sleeve 1 to 4 mm2 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 0.75 mm2
(with plastic AWG: 18 to 11 AWG: 20 to 16 AWG: 24 to 18
sleeve)
Stripping length of the wires 15 mm 10 mm 8 mm
End sleeves according to DIN 46228 15 mm long 10 mm long 8 mm long
with plastic sleeve

Distributed I/O system

100 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.6 Wiring rules

Safety standards for fail-safe motor starters

Fail-safe motor starters fulfill the following standards under certain conditions:
● PL e/Cat. 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1
● Safety Integrity Level SILCL3 acc. to IEC 62061
To fulfill both standards, lay cross-circuit proof and P-cross-circuit proof control cables from
the safe output of a sensor or F-DQ to the safe input of the motor starter, e.g. as a
separately sheathed cable or in a separate cable duct.

Line protection
The line protection of the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter is provided for the motor
outgoing feeder cable when the following condition is met:
The cross-section of the motor outgoing feeder cable must be dimensioned for the load
ratios of the motor and for the cable-laying method.
Comply with national regulations. The user is responsible for the correct selection and
dimensioning of the motor connection cable to DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0298-4 and/or
UL 508.
The conductor protection for the incoming feeders must be ensured by the owner of the
installation depending on the cross-section.

Cable temperature measurement threshold

Note
Cable temperature measurement threshold
When choosing a cable, remember that the cable temperature in operation can be up to
30 °C higher than the ambient temperature of the ET200SP system (example: at an ambient
temperature of 60 °C, a connection conductor must be dimensioned for a temperature range
of at least 90 °C).
You should specify other connection types and material requirements based on the electrical
characteristics of the circuits you use and the installation environment.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 101
Wiring
6.7 Wiring BaseUnits for I/O modules

6.7 Wiring BaseUnits for I/O modules

Introduction
The BaseUnits connect the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to the process. The following
versions of the BaseUnits can be used:
● BaseUnits (with light-colored terminal box) for opening a potential group: BU..D
● BaseUnits (with dark-colored terminal box) for extending the potential group: BU..B
● BaseUnits with additional AUX terminals or additional terminals: BU..+10..
● BaseUnits with integrated thermal resistor for compensation of the reference junction
temperature when connecting thermocouples: BU..T

Distributed I/O system

102 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.7 Wiring BaseUnits for I/O modules

● PotDis-BaseUnits (with light-colored terminal box) for opening a PotDis potential group:
PotDis-BU..D
● PotDis-BaseUnits (with dark-colored terminal box) for extending the potential group:
PotDis-BU..B

① Push-in terminal
② Spring release
③ Measuring probe (suitable probes: 1 mm diameter, length ≥ 10 mm while observing the
permitted voltage category)
④ Holder for shield connection
Figure 6-5 View of the BaseUnit

Note
The pin assignment of the BaseUnit depends on the connected I/O module. Information
on the BaseUnits and I/O modules can be found in the associated manuals.
Replacement of the terminal box on the BaseUnit is described in the section Replacing
the terminal box on the BaseUnit (Page 255).

Note
Special terminal designations in the wiring and block diagrams of the I/O
modules/BaseUnits
• RES: Reserve, these terminals must remain unconnected so that they can be used for
future expansions
• n.c.: Not connected, these terminals have no function. However, they can be
connected to potentials specifically defined for a module, for example, for the laying
unused wires.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 103
Wiring
6.7 Wiring BaseUnits for I/O modules

Requirements
● The supply voltages are turned off.
● Follow the wiring rules.
● Color identification labels (Page 130) (optional) have been applied.

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver

Tool-free connection of cables: single-wire without wire end ferrule, multi-wire (stranded) with wire
end ferrule or ultrasonically sealed
Watch the video sequence (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
To connect a wire without tools, follow these steps:
1. Strip 8 to 10 mm of the wires.
2. Only in the case of stranded conductors (except for 2.5 mm² cross-section):
Seal or crimp the wire with wire end ferrules.
3. Insert the wire into the push-in terminal as far as it will go.

Connection of cables: multi-wire (stranded), without wire end ferrule, unprocessed

To connect a wire without a wire end ferrule, follow these steps:
1. Strip 8 to 10 mm of the wires.
2. Push with the screwdriver into the spring release.
3. Insert the wire into the push-in terminal as far as it will go.
4. Pull the screwdriver out of the spring release.

Removing wires
Using the screwdriver, press the spring release of the terminal as far as it will go and pull out
the wire.

Note
When you press the spring release, you should not pull on the wire/cable at the same time.
This prevents you from damaging the terminal.

Distributed I/O system

104 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.8 Connecting cable shields for I/O modules

6.8 Connecting cable shields for I/O modules

Introduction
● You need the shield connector to contact cable shields (e.g. for analog modules). The
shield connector conducts interference currents on cable shields to ground via the
mounting rail. It is not necessary to contact the shield at where the cable enters the
cabinet.
● Attach the shield connector to the BaseUnit.
● The shield connector consists of a shield contact and a shield terminal.
● The shield connector is automatically connected to the functional ground (FG) of the
mounting rail after installation.

Requirements
● BaseUnit with a width of 15 mm
● The shield terminal is suitable for cables with max. ∅ 7 mm each.

Figure 6-6 Shield terminal

Required tools
● Stripping tool

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 105
Wiring
6.8 Connecting cable shields for I/O modules

Procedure
Watch the "Wiring BaseUnits" video sequence
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
To connect the cable shield, follow these steps:
1. If necessary, connect the supply voltage L+ and ground to the BaseUnit.
2. Press the shield contact up into the mount until you hear it click into place.
3. Remove the cable insulation material around the shield terminal.
Connect the cable to the BaseUnit and place the cable in the shield contact.
4. Insert the shield terminal into the shield contact.
5. Tighten the shield terminal with approximately 0.5 Nm.

① Mount ⑤ Insulation material removed (approx. 20

mm)
② Supply voltage L+, ground ⑥ Cable to the encoder
③ Shield contact ⑦ Shield terminal
④ Flat connector for push-on contacts
(6.3 × 0.8 mm)
Figure 6-7 Mounting the shield contact

Distributed I/O system

106 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.9 Wiring BaseUnits for motor starters

6.9 Wiring BaseUnits for motor starters

Introduction
The following versions of BaseUnits can be used:
● BU30-MS1 (with 500 V and 24 V infeed)
● BU30-MS2 (with 500 V infeed and 24 V forwarding)
● BU30-MS3 (with 24 V infeed and 500 V forwarding)
● BU30-MS4 (with 500 V and 24 V forwarding)
● BU30-MS5 (with 500 V infeed, 24 V and F-DI forwarding)
● BU30-MS6 (with 500 V, 24 V and F-DI forwarding)
The following figure shows an example of a BaseUnit BU30-MS1 (with the maximum number
of terminals):

① Push-in terminal
② Spring release

Figure 6-8 Terminals on a BaseUnit BU30-MS1

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 107
Wiring
6.9 Wiring BaseUnits for motor starters

The following figure shows an example of a BaseUnit BU30-MS5 (with the maximum number
of terminals):

① Push-in terminal
② Spring release

Figure 6-9 Terminals on a BaseUnit BU30-MS5

DANGER
Hazardous Voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage.
Hazardous electrical voltage can cause electric shock, burns and property damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

For wiring finely-stranded or stranded conductors without end sleeves on push-in

connections, a screwdriver is required.

Distributed I/O system

108 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.9 Wiring BaseUnits for motor starters

Requirements
● The supply voltages are switched off
● Observe the wiring rules

NOTICE
Wire the F-DI inputs of the BaseUnits BU-30-MS5 and BU-30-MS6 to surge filters
If your system requires overvoltage protection, you must wire the F-DI inputs of the
BaseUnits BU-30-MS5 and BU-30-MS6 to surge filters.
Please see "Electromagnetic Compatibility" in the technical specifications.

Required tools
Use the screwdriver "SZF 1-0.6x3.5" (for finely-stranded cables only).

Connecting conductors: Solid without end sleeve, stranded (stranded wire) with end sleeve
To connect a cable, proceed as follows:
1. Insulate the cables in accordance with the table in chapter "Electromagnetic compatibility
of fail-safe modules (Page 292)".
2. Only in the case of stranded conductors:
Crimp the cable with end sleeves.
3. Insert the cable into the push-in terminal as far as it will go.
4. Pull on the cable to ensure it is tight.

Connecting conductors: multi-wire (stranded), without end sleeve, unfinished

To connect a cable, proceed as follows:
1. Insulate the cables in accordance with the table in chapter "Wiring rules (Page 99)".
2. Press the screwdriver into the spring release.
3. Insert the conductor into the push-in terminal until it engages.
4. Pull the screwdriver out of the spring release.
5. Check whether or not the conductor is firmly connected by pulling on the cable.

Video sequence
At the following Internet link, you can see a video about connecting conductors: Wire
BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 109
Wiring
6.9 Wiring BaseUnits for motor starters

Releasing conductors
To release a conductor, proceed as follows:
1. Press the screwdriver into the spring release of the terminal until it engages.
2. Pull the conductor out.

Note
When pressing the spring release, you must not pull on the wire/cable at the same time. In
this way, you avoid damaging the terminal.

Distributed I/O system

110 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.10 Connecting the 3DI/LC module for the motor starter

6.10 Connecting the 3DI/LC module for the motor starter

You will find further information on the 3DI/LC module in the ET 200SP motor starter
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973) manual.

Procedure
The figure below shows the connections of the 3DI/LC module.

① Digital input 3
② Digital input 2
③ Digital input 1
④ Local control (manual local)
⑤ Ground
⑥ 24 V DC/ 100 mA output

Note
The digital inputs (1 to 4) are not isolated. The reference potential is M (5). Control the digital
inputs only via a unit supplied from the 24 V DC output (6).
Connect only cables of a width not exceeding 30 m to the 3DI/LC module.
The supply (5 and 6) is protected against short-circuits.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 111
Wiring
6.10 Connecting the 3DI/LC module for the motor starter

Terminal sketch of the 3DI/LC module

The following diagram shows a terminal sketch of the 3DI/LC module:

Figure 6-10 Connection example of inputs

Distributed I/O system

112 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.11 Connecting the supply voltage to the CPU/interface module

6.11 Connecting the supply voltage to the CPU/interface module

Introduction
The supply voltage of the CPU/interface module is supplied by means of a 4-pin connector
plug located on the front of the CPU/interface module.

Power supply unit

Only use power supply units of type SELV/PELV with safe electrically isolated functional
extra low voltage (≤ 28.8 V DC).

Connection for supply voltage (X80)

The connections have the following meaning:

① Ground of the supply voltage

② Ground of the supply voltage for looping through (permitted value 10 A)
③ + 24 V DC of the supply voltage for looping through (permitted value 10 A)
④ Spring release
⑤ + 24 V DC of the supply voltage
1L+ and 2L+ and 1M and 2M are internally jumpered.

Figure 6-11 Supply voltage connection

The maximum cross-section of the connection is 2.5 mm2 without wire-end ferrule or 1.5
mm2 with wire-end ferrule. A strain relief is not present. The connector plugs provide you with
the option of looping the supply voltage through without interruption, even when it is
unplugged.

Requirements
● Only wire up the connector plug when the supply voltage is turned off.
● Follow the wiring rules (Page 99).

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 113
Wiring
6.11 Connecting the supply voltage to the CPU/interface module

Tool-free connection of cables: single-wire without end sleeve, multi-wire (stranded) with end sleeve
or ultrasonically sealed
Watch video sequence: "Connect BusAdapter to the interface module"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
To connect a wire without tools, follow these steps:
1. Strip 8 to 10 mm of the wires.
2. Only in the case of stranded conductors:
Seal or crimp the wire with end sleeves.
3. Insert the cable into the push-in terminal as far as it will go.
4. Push the wired connector plug into the plug socket of the interface module.

Connection of cables: multi-wire (stranded), without end sleeve, unfinished

To connect a wire without an end sleeve, follow these steps:
1. Strip 8 to 10 mm of the wires.
2. Using a screwdriver, press the spring release and insert the wire into the push-in terminal
as far as it will go.
3. Pull the screwdriver out of the spring release.
4. Push the wired connector plug into the socket in the interface module.

Removing a wire
Using the screwdriver, press the spring release as far as it will go and pull out the wire.

Distributed I/O system

114 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.12 Connecting interfaces for communication

6.12 Connecting interfaces for communication

Connect the communication interfaces of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system using the
standardized connector or directly. If you want to prepare communication cables yourself,
the interface assignment is specified in the manuals of the corresponding modules. Observe
the mounting instructions for the connectors.
Detailed information on the available BusAdapters and the procedure for connecting
PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module is available in the BusAdapter
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751716) manual.

6.12.1 Connecting PROFINET IO (port P3) to the CPU

Introduction
You use the RJ-45 bus connector to connect PROFINET IO (port P3) directly to the CPU.

Required accessories
● Cable ties with standard width of 2.5 mm or 3.6 mm for strain relief
● Please observe the specifications in the PROFINET Installation Guide
(http://www.profibus.com).

Mounting the bus connector

Mount the PROFINET connector in accordance with the instructions in the PROFINET
Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 115
Wiring
6.12 Connecting interfaces for communication

Procedure
Insert the RJ45 bus connector into the PROFINET port (port P3) on the CPU.

Note
Cable support and strain relief
If you are using a FastConnect RJ-45 bus connector with 90° cable outlet (6GK1901-1BB20-
2AA0), we recommend you provide strain relief for the PROFINET connecting cable. To do
so, you need a cable tie with a standard width of 2.5 mm or 3.6 mm.
Use it to fasten the PROFINET connecting cable directly after it exits the bus connector to
the intended cable support on the CPU (on the front directly below the PROFINET interface
X1P3).

① CPU
② PROFINET connecting cable
③ Strain relief (cable tie)
④ Cable support
⑤ FastConnect RJ45 bus connector with 90° cable outlet
⑥ PROFINET connector (port P3)

Figure 6-12 Connecting PROFINET IO (port P3) to the CPU

Distributed I/O system

116 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.12 Connecting interfaces for communication

6.12.2 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface

module/communications module CM DP

Introduction
Using the bus connector (RS485), connect the PROFIBUS DP to the interface
module/communications module CM DP.

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver

Procedure
To connect the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface module / DP communication module
CM DP, follow these steps:
1. Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the bus connector.
2. Plug the bus connector into the PROFIBUS DP connector.
3. Securely tighten the fixing screws of the bus connector (0.3 Nm).

① Interface module
② PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector
③ PROFIBUS connecting cable
④ Communications module CM DP
Figure 6-13 Connect PROFIBUS DP to the interface module/communications module CM DP

Reference
You can find additional information on the PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector in the
corresponding product information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58648998).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 117
Wiring
6.13 Inserting I/O modules / motor starters and BU covers

6.13 Inserting I/O modules / motor starters and BU covers

Introduction
● You insert the I/O modules on the BaseUnits. The I/O modules are self-coding and type-
coded.
● You insert the PotDis-TerminalBlocks on the PotDis-BaseUnits.
● You insert the BU covers on BaseUnits whose slots are not equipped with I/O
modules/PotDis-TerminalBlocks.
● You insert the BU covers on BaseUnits whose slots have been reserved for future
expansion (as empty slots).
● The BU covers for motor starters serve as touch protection covers for unoccupied slots.
The BU covers have a holder for the reference identification label on the inside. For future
expansion of the ET 200SP, remove the reference identification label from the holder and
insert it into the final I/O module.
It is not possible to attach a reference identification label to the BU cover itself.
There are three versions:
– BU cover with a width of 15 mm
– BU cover with a width of 20 mm
– BU cover with a width of 30 mm (for motor starters)

Requirement
Refer to chapter "Application planning (Page 36)".

Distributed I/O system

118 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.13 Inserting I/O modules / motor starters and BU covers

Plugging in I/O modules and BU covers

Watch video sequence: "Insert I/O modules"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
Insert the I/O module or BU cover parallel into the BaseUnit until you hear both latches click
into place.

Figure 6-14 Plugging in I/O modules or BU covers (using an I/O module as example)

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 119
Wiring
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters

6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters

6.14.1 Mounting the fan

Procedure
Proceed as follows to mount a fan on a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter:
1. Slide the fan onto the motor starter until you can hear the fan engage.
Observe the blowing direction of the fan when mounting. The air stream must be directed
to the inside of the motor starter. The correct blowing direction is indicated by arrows on
the bottom of the fan.
2. Insert the connection plug into the opening above the fan.

3. Secure the fan cable to the fixing eyes on the right-hand side of the fan cover.

Note
Specified ambient temperatures are not reached if the fan is incorrectly installed
If you do not observe the blowing direction of the fan when mounting, the specified ambient
temperatures will not be reached. The device shuts down prematurely due to excessively
high temperature.

Distributed I/O system

120 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters

6.14.2 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters

Procedure

CAUTION
Protection against electrostatic charge
When handling and installing the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, ensure protection
against electrostatic charging of the components. Changes to the system configuration and
wiring are only permissible after disconnection from the power supply.

To assemble a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, proceed as follows:

● Position the mechanical interlock of the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter in the
assembly/disassembly position ②
● Place the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter onto the BaseUnit.
● Turn the mechanical interlock clockwise to the parking position ③
● Turn the mechanical interlock counterclockwise to the operating position (= end
position) ①
① ② ③

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 121
Wiring
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters

① Operating position/READY
The motor starter is firmly locked in the BaseUnit, and all electrical contacts are connected.
② Assembly/disassembly position
All electrical contacts are open, and you can use the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter in the
BaseUnit, or you can remove it from the BaseUnit.
③ Parking position/OFF
In this position, you cannot remove the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter
from the BaseUnit, but all electrical contacts are open. In addition, you can
open the locking lever on the mechanical rotary interlock in this position,
and fix the position with a padlock (shackle diameter 3 mm). This ensures
the isolating function in accordance with IEC 60947-1.
In the parking position, the motor starter counts as a disconnected element
for the head module. During operation, the parking position is therefore a
hot swapping state. See also Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor
starters (hot swapping) (Page 247)

Note
Parking position/OFF
This position is only permissible for maintenance purposes and not for continuous operation.
In this position, dust protection and mechanical durability are not ensured.
If you do not use the motor starter for an extended period, remove it and attach the BU cover
(3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0).

Distributed I/O system

122 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters

Mount the touch protection cover for the infeed bus on the last BaseUnit.

Note
Touch protection cover for the infeed bus
You will find out how to mount the touch protection cover of the infeed bus on a SIMATIC
ET 200SP motor starter in chapter "Mounting the cover for the 500 V AC infeed bus
(Page 81)".

To connect the assembly, mount the server module after the last BaseUnit.

Note
Server module
You can find out how to assemble/disassemble the server module in chapter "Installing the
server module (Page 80)".

Note
Removing the motor starter
You will find out how to remove the motor starter in chapter "Replacing a motor starter
(Page 254)".

6.14.3 3DI/LC module

Introduction
The optional 3DI/LC module with three inputs and one further LC input can be connected to
the motor starter. The status of the inputs of the 3DI/LC module can be seen via the process
image input (PII) of the motor starter.

Note
The 3DI/LC module can be used for the motor starter and the fail-safe motor starter.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 123
Wiring
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters

The input actions can be parameterized. For reasons of operational safety, the LC input is
permanently set to manual local mode. For example, by parameterizing the inputs DI1 - DI3
with motor CLOCKWISE or motor COUNTER-CLOCKWISE, you can control the motor in
manual local mode.
The figure below shows the 3DI/LC module.

Assembly

WARNING
Risk of injury from automatic restart
When you mount the the 3DI/LC module, the motor starter can switch on autonomously if
an ON command (DI1 to DI3) is active. This can result in property damage or serious injury
caused by connected devices that are automatically started up.
Revoke the ON commands at DI1 to DI3 before mounting the 3DI/LC module.

Proceed as follows to mount a 3DI/LC module onto a motor starter:

1. Wire the 3DI/LC module according to the connection diagram.

Note
Connecting the 3DI/LC module
You will find out how to connect the 3DI/LC module in chapter "Connecting the 3DI/LC
module for the motor starter (Page 111)".

Distributed I/O system

124 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters

2. Slide the 3DI/LC module into the motor starter until the 3DI/LC module engages.

The figure below shows a motor starter with a mounted 3DI/LC module.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 125
Wiring
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters

Disassembly
Proceed as follows to remove a 3DI/LC module from a motor starter:
1. Push the release lever on the rear of the 3DI/LC module.

① Release lever
2. Remove the 3DI/LC module from the motor starter while pressing the release lever.

Distributed I/O system

126 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP

6.15 Labeling ET 200SP

6.15.1 Factory markings

Introduction
For better orientation, the ET 200SP is equipped with various markings ex factory, which
help in the configuration and connection of the modules.

Factory markings
● Module labeling
● Color coding of the module classes
– Digital input modules: white
– Digital output modules: black
– Analog input modules: light blue
– Analog output modules: dark blue
– Technology module: turquoise
– Communication module: light gray
– Special module: mint green
● Module information
– Functional version of the module, e.g. "X/2/3/4" (= functional version 1)
– Firmware version of the module at delivery, e.g. "V1.0.0"
– Color code for usable color identification label, e.g. "CC0"
– Usable BaseUnit type, e.g. "BU: A0"
● Color coding of the potential group
– Opening the potential group: Light-colored terminal box and light-colored mounting rail
release button
– Further conduction of the potential group: Dark-colored terminal box and dark-colored
mounting rail release button

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 127
Wiring
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP

● Color coding of the spring releases

– Process terminals: gray, white
– AUX terminals: turquoise
– Additional terminals: red, blue
– Terminals for self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2: red, blue

① Module labeling
② Color coding of the module classes
③ Module information
④ Color coding of the potential group
⑤ Color coding of the spring releases (by group)
Figure 6-15 Factory markings

6.15.2 Optional markings

Introduction
In addition to the factory markings, there are also other options for labeling and/or marking
terminals, BaseUnits and I/O modules for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Distributed I/O system

128 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP

Optional markings

Color identification labels

The color identification labels are module-specific labels for color coding the potentials of the
I/O modules. A color code (e.g. 01) is printed on each color identification label and I/O
module. The color code allows you to read which color identification label is required for the
terminals of the associated BaseUnit directly from the I/O module.
The following versions of color coded labels are available:
● Module-specific color combinations for the process terminals (see the device manuals I/O
modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)).
The different colors have the following meaning: Gray = input or output signal, red =
potential +, blue = ground.
● For the AUX terminals in the colors yellow-green, blue or red
● For the add-on terminals in the colors blue-red
● For the potential distributor modules (see manual BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)):
– For PotDis-BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P1/x-R: red
For PotDis-BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P2/x-B: blue
– For PotDis-TB-P1-R: red or gray
For PotDis-TB-P2-B: blue or gray
For PotDis-TB-BR-W: depending on application, yellow/green, blue, red or gray
For PotDis-TB-n.c.-G: gray

Reference identification labels

The reference identification labels (in accordance with EN 81346) can be inserted onto each
CPU/interface module, BusAdapter, BaseUnit, I/O module and PotDis-TerminalBlock. This
makes it possible to create a fixed assignment between the reference identification label of
the BaseUnit and the I/O module/PotDis-TerminalBlock.
With the standard plotter setting, the reference identification label is suitable for automatic
labeling with E-CAD systems.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 129
Wiring
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP

Labeling strips
The labeling strips can be inserted in the CPU/interface module, I/O module and BU cover
and allow identification of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The labeling strips can be
ordered on a roll for thermal transfer printers or as DIN A4 format sheets for laser printers.

① Reference identification labels

② Labeling strips
③ Color identification labels

Figure 6-16 Optional markings

6.15.3 Applying color identification labels

Requirements
The BaseUnits must not be wired when you apply the color identification labels.

Required tools
3 mm screwdriver (only for removing the color identification labels)

Distributed I/O system

130 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP

Applying color identification labels

Press color identification labels into the terminal box of the BaseUnit.

Note
To remove the color identification labels, you must first disconnect the wiring on the
BaseUnit and then carefully lever the color identification labels out of the holder using a
screwdriver.

① Module-specific color identification labels (15 mm) for the process terminals. You can find addi-
tional information in the I/O Module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual.
② Color identification labels (15 mm) for the 10 AUX terminals
③ Color identification label (15 mm) for the 10 add-on terminals
④ Color identification labels (20 mm) for the 4 AUX terminals
⑤ Color identification labels (20 mm) for the 2 AUX terminals

Figure 6-17 Applying color identification labels (example)

NOTICE
AUX bus as PE bar
If you use an AUX bus as a protective conductor (PE), attach the yellow-green color
identification labels to the AUX terminals.
If you stop using the AUX terminals as a protective conductor bar, remove the yellow-green
color identification labels and make sure that the system is still protected.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 131
Wiring
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP

NOTICE
Supply of incorrect potential possible
Check that the color-coded labels/wiring is correct before commissioning the plant.

6.15.4 Applying labeling strips

Procedure
Watch video sequence: "Labeling"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
Proceed as follows to install a labeling strip:
1. Label the strips.
2. Insert the labeling strip into the interface module or I/O module.

Distributed I/O system

132 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Wiring
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP

6.15.5 Applying reference identification labels

Procedure
Watch video sequence: "Labeling"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
Proceed as follows to install a reference identification label:
3. Break off the reference identification labels from the sheet.
4. Insert the reference identification labels into the opening on the CPU/interface module,
BusAdapter, BaseUnit, I/O module and PotDis-TerminalBlock. The insertion opening is
located on top of the BaseUnit or the I/O module/PotDis-TerminalBlock.

Note
Reference identification label
The printable side of the reference identification label must be facing forward.

① Reference identification labels

② Opening for label
Figure 6-18 Applying reference identification labels

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 133
Configuring 7
7.1 Configuring ET 200SP

Introduction
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is configured and assigned parameters with STEP 7
(CPU/interface module, I/O modules, motor starter and server module) or using configuration
software of a third-party manufacturer (interface module, I/O modules, motor starter and
server module).
"Configuring" is understood to mean the arranging, setup and networking of devices and
modules within the device view or network view. STEP 7 graphically represents modules and
racks. Just like "real" module racks, the device view allows the insertion of a defined number
of modules.
When the modules are inserted, STEP 7 automatically assigns the addresses and a unique
hardware identifier (HW identifier). You can change the addresses later. The hardware
identifiers cannot be changed.
When the automation system is started, the CPU/interface module compares the configured
planned configuration with the system's actual configuration. You can make parameter
settings to control the response of the CPU/interface module to errors in the hardware
configuration.
"Parameterizing" the components used signifies setting their properties. During parameter
assignment, the hardware parameters are set and the settings for data exchange are made:
● Properties of the modules to which parameters can be assigned
● Settings for data exchange between components
STEP 7 compiles the hardware configuration (result of "configuring" and "assigning
parameters") and downloads it to the CPU/interface module. The CPU/interface module then
connects to the configured components and transfers their configuration and parameters.
Modules can be replaced very easily because STEP 7 transfers the configuration and
parameters when a new module is inserted.

Distributed I/O system

134 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuring
7.1 Configuring ET 200SP

Requirements for configuration of the CPU

Table 7- 1 Requirement for installing the CPU

Configuration software Requirements Installation information

CPU 151xSP-1 PN: • PROFINET IO STEP 7 online help
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 • PROFIBUS DP (optional): With the
Update 3 communication module CM DP
CPU 151xSP F-1 PN:
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 SP1
CPU 151xSP-1PN (as of FW version V1.8),
CPU 151xSP F-1 PN (as of FW version V1.8):
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 SP1 Update 4

Requirements for configuration of the interface module

Table 7- 2 Requirement for installing the interface module

Configuration software Requirements Installation information

STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of • PROFINET IO: As of Support Package HSP0024 STEP 7 online help
V11 SP2*
STEP 7 as of V5.5 SP2 • PROFINET IO: GSD file GSDML-Vx.y-siemens-
Software of third-party et200sp-"Date in format yyyymmdd".xml Manufacturer documentation
manufacturer (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/e
n/19698639/130000)
• PROFIBUS DP: GSD file SI0xxxxx.gsx
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/e
n/10805317/14280)

* The TIA Portal supports GSDML specification V2.25. The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is delivered with a GSD file
based on specification V2.3. The GSD file can be installed in the TIA Portal and used without restrictions.

Configuring a motor starter

You configure SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters in exactly the same way as the I/O
modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The GSD files can be used with STEP 7
V5.5 SP4 and higher, and TIA Portal V13 SP1 and higher.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 135
Configuring
7.1 Configuring ET 200SP

Configuration of the ET 200SP

See the STEP 7 online help or the documentation of the configuration software
manufacturer.

Note
For I/O modules that are installed on a BaseUnit BU..D (light-colored BaseUnit), you always
have to set the parameter "Potential group" to "Enable new potential group". If you do not set
this parameter correctly, the CPU/interface module goes to STOP and generates a
parameter error.

Note
For PROFIBUS with configuration via GSD file
In the configuration software, you must set for the BU covers whether these are on a light-
colored or dark-colored BaseUnit.

Distributed I/O system

136 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuring
7.2 Configuring the CPU

7.2 Configuring the CPU

7.2.1 Reading out the configuration

Introduction
When a connection exists to a physically present CPU, you can load the configuration of this
CPU (including centrally present modules) from the device into your project using the
"Hardware detection" function. You do not need to manually configure the CPU and the
centrally present modules, as the physical configuration is read out automatically.
If you have already configured a CPU and the centrally present modules and you want to
load the current configuration and parameters in a new project, it is advisable to use the
"Upload device as new station" function. For additional information about this function, refer
to section Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration (Page 231).

Procedure for reading out an existing configuration

5. Create a new project and configure an "Unspecified CPU".

Figure 7-1 Unspecified CPU in the device view

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 137
Configuring
7.2 Configuring the CPU

6. In the device view (or in the network view), select the "Hardware detection" command in
the "Online" menu.

Figure 7-2 Hardware detection in the Online menu

You can also double-click the CPU and click "Detect" in the message.

Figure 7-3 Hardware detection message in the device view

7. In the "Hardware detection for PLC_x" dialog box, click "Refresh". Then, select the CPU
and the PG/PC interface and click "Detect".
STEP 7 downloads the hardware configuration including the modules from the CPU to
your project.

Figure 7-4 Result of the hardware detection in the device view

Distributed I/O system

138 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuring
7.2 Configuring the CPU

STEP 7 assigns a valid default parameter assignment for all modules. You can change the
parameter assignment subsequently.

Note
If you want to go online after the hardware detection, you have to first download the detected
configuration to the CPU; otherwise, an error may occur due to inconsistent configurations.

Properties of central modules

The properties of the CPUs have special significance for system behavior. You can set the
following for a CPU using STEP 7:
● Startup behavior
● Parameter assignment of the interface(s), for example, IP address, subnet mask
● Web server, e.g. activation, user administration, and languages
● OPC UA server
● Global Security Certificate Manager
● Cycle times, e.g. maximum cycle time
● System and clock memory
● Protection level for access protection with assigned password parameter
● Time and day settings (daylight saving/standard)
The properties that can be set and the corresponding value ranges are specified by STEP 7.
Fields that cannot be edited are grayed out.

Reference
Information about the individual settings can be found in the online help and in the manuals
of the relevant CPUs.

7.2.2 Addressing

Introduction
In order to address the automation components or I/O modules, they have to have unique
addresses. The following section explains the various address areas.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 139
Configuring
7.2 Configuring the CPU

I/O address
I/O addresses (input/output addresses) are required in the user program to read inputs and
set outputs.
STEP 7 automatically assigns input and output addresses when you connect the modules.
Each module uses a continuous area in the input and/or output addresses corresponding to
its volume of input and output data.

Figure 7-5 Example with input / output addresses from STEP 7

STEP 7 assigns the address areas of the modules by default to the process image partition 0
("Automatic updating"). This process image partition is updated in the main cycle of the CPU.

Device address (e.g. Ethernet address)

Device addresses are addresses of programmable modules with interfaces to a subnet (e.g.,
IP address or PROFIBUS address). They are required to address the various devices on a
subnet, for example, to download a user program.

Distributed I/O system

140 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuring
7.2 Configuring the CPU

Hardware identifier
STEP 7 automatically assigns a hardware identifier to identify and address modules and
submodules. You use the hardware identifier in the case of diagnostic messages or
operations, for example, to identify a defective module or the module addressed.

Figure 7-6 Example of a hardware identifier from STEP 7

In the "System constants" tab, you will find all hardware identifiers and their symbolic
names (of the hardware identifier) for the selected module.
You can also find the hardware identifiers and names for all modules of a device in the
default tag table of the "System constants" tab.

Figure 7-7 Example of an excerpt from a default tag table in STEP 7

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 141
Configuring
7.2 Configuring the CPU

7.2.3 Process images and process image partitions

7.2.3.1 Process image - overview

Process image of the inputs and outputs

The process image is a memory area of the CPU and includes an image of the signal states
of the input/output modules. At the start of the cyclic program, the CPU transfers the signal
states of the input modules to the process image of the inputs. At the end of the cyclic
program, the CPU transfers the process image of the outputs as a signal state to the output
modules. You access this process image memory area in the user program by addressing
the operand areas inputs (I) and outputs (O).

Advantages of the process image

A process image offers the advantage that you can access a consistent image of the
process signals during cyclic program execution. If a signal state at an input module changes
during program processing, the signal state is retained in the process image. The CPU does
not update the process image until the next cycle.
You can only assign the addresses of a module to a single process image partition.

32 process image partitions

By means of process image partitions, the CPU synchronizes the updated inputs/outputs of
particular modules with defined user program sections.
The overall process image is subdivided into up to 32 process image partitions (PIP).
The CPU updates PIP 0 in each program cycle (automatic update) and assigns it to OB 1.
You can assign the process image partitions PIP 1 to PIP 31 to the other OBs during
configuration of the input/output modules in STEP 7.
After the OB has been started, the CPU updates the assigned process image partition for
inputs and reads in the process signals. At the end of the OB the CPU writes the outputs of
the assigned process image partition directly to the peripheral outputs without having to wait
for the completion of the cyclic program processing.

7.2.3.2 Automatically updating process image partitions

You can assign one process image partition to each organization block. In this case, the user
program automatically updates the process image partition. The exceptions are PIP 0 and
isochronous OBs.

Distributed I/O system

142 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuring
7.2 Configuring the CPU

Updating the process image partition

The process image partition is divided into two parts:
● Process image partition of the inputs (PIPI)
● Process image partition of the outputs (PIPQ)
The CPU always updates/reads the process image partition of the inputs (PIPI) before
processing of the associated OB. The CPU outputs the process image of the outputs (PIPQ)
at the end of the OB.
The figure below illustrates the updating of the process image partitions.

Figure 7-8 Updating process image partitions

7.2.3.3 Update process image partitions in the user program

Requirements
As an alternative to the automatic updating of process image partitions, you can update
process images with the "UPDAT_PI" instruction or the "UPDAT_PO" instruction. In STEP 7,
these instructions are available on the "Instructions" task card under "Extended instructions".
They can be called from any point in the program.
Requirements for updating process image partitions with the "UPDAT_PI" and "UPDAT_PO"
instructions:
● The process image partitions are not allowed to be assigned to any OB, which means
they are not allowed to be automatically updated.

Note
Update of PPI 0
PIP 0 (automatic update) cannot be updated with the "UPDAT_PI" and "UPDAT_PO"
instructions.

UPDAT_PI: updates the process image partition of the inputs

With this instruction you read the signal states from the input modules into the process
image partition of the inputs (PIPI).

UPDAT_PO: updates the process image partition of the outputs

With this instruction you transfer the process image partition of the outputs to the output
modules.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 143
Configuring
7.2 Configuring the CPU

Synchronous cycle interrupt OB

In the synchronous cycle interrupt OBs, you use the "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" operations
to update the process image partitions of the operations. For additional information on the
synchronous cycle interrupt OBs, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help.

Direct I/O access to the inputs and outputs of the module

You also have direct read and write access to the I/O, as an alternative to access via the
process image, should direct access be required for programming reasons. This prevents a
subsequent output of the process image from again overwriting the value written by direct
access.

Reference
Additional information on process image partitions is available in the function manual, Cycle
and response times (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193558).

Distributed I/O system

144 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuring
7.3 Configuring the interface module

7.3 Configuring the interface module

Configuring
Read the STEP 7 online help and/or the documentation of the configuration software
manufacturer when configuring the interface module.
The F-destination address is saved permanently on the coding element of the ET 200SP
fail-safe modules. Fail-safe motor starters do not need an F-destination address or a coding
element.

Note
The supply voltage L+ must be applied to the F-module when the F-destination address is
assigned.

Note
Note the following in conjunction with configuration control:
Before you can use configuration control together with F-modules, you must assign the
F-destination address to the F-modules at the designated slots. For this, each F-module
must be inserted in the slot configured for it. The actual configuration can then differ from
the specified configuration.

For additional information on assigning the F-destination address, refer to the SIMATIC
Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) Programming and
Operating Manual and to the online help for the S7 Configuration Pack.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 145
Basics of program execution 8
8.1 Events and OBs

Response to triggers
The occurrence of a start event results in the following reaction:
● If the event comes from an event source to which you have assigned an OB, this event
triggers the execution of the assigned OB. The event enters the queue according to its
priority.
● If the event comes from an event source to which you have not assigned an OB, the CPU
executes the default system reaction.

Note
Some event sources, such as startup, pull/plug, exist even if you do not configure them.

Start events
The table below provides an overview of:
● Possible event sources
● Possible values for the OB priority
● Possible OB numbers
● Default system reaction
● Number of OBs

Table 8- 1 Start events

Types of event sources Possible priorities Possible OB numbers Default system Number of
(default priority) response 1) OBs
Starting 2) 1 100, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 100
Cyclic program 2) 1 1, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 100
Time-of-day interrupt 2) 2 to 24 (2) 10 to 17, ≥ 123 Not applicable 0 to 20
Time-delay interrupt 2) 2 to 24 (3) 20 to 23, ≥ 123 Not applicable 0 to 20
Cyclic interrupt 2) 2 to 24 (8 to 17, frequency de- 30 to 38, ≥ 123 Not applicable 0 to 20
pendent)
Hardware interrupt 2) 2 to 26 (18) 40 to 47, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 50
Status interrupt 2 to 24 (4) 55 Ignore 0 or 1
Update interrupt 2 to 24 (4) 56 Ignore 0 or 1
Manufacturer-specific or 2 to 24 (4) 57 Ignore 0 or 1
profile-specific interrupt

Distributed I/O system

146 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Basics of program execution
8.1 Events and OBs

Types of event sources Possible priorities Possible OB numbers Default system Number of
(default priority) response 1) OBs
Synchronous cycle interrupt 16 to 26 (21) 61 to 64, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 2
Time error 3) 22 80 Ignore 0 or 1
Cycle monitoring time STOP
exceeded once
Diagnostics interrupt 2 to 26 (5) 82 Ignore 0 or 1
Pull/plug interrupt for 2 to 26 (6) 83 Ignore 0 or 1
modules
Rack error 2 to 26 (6) 86 Ignore 0 or 1
MC-servo 4) 17 to 26 (25) 91 Not applicable 0 or 1
MC-PreServo 4) 17 to 26 (25) 67 Not applicable 0 or 1
MC-PostServo 4) 17 to 26 (25) 95 Not applicable 0 or 1
MC-Interpolator 4) 16 to 26 (24) 92 Not applicable 0 or 1
Programming error (only for 2 to 26 (7) 121 STOP 0 or 1
global error handling)
I/O access error (only for 2 to 26 (7) 122 Ignore 0 or 1
global error handling)
1) If you have not configured the OB.
2) In the case of these event sources, besides the permanently assigned OB numbers (see column: Possible OB numbers)
in STEP 7 you can assign OB numbers from the range ≥ 123.
3) If the maximum cycle time has been exceeded twice within one cycle, the CPU always assumes the STOP state, regard-
less of whether you have configured OB 80.
4) You will find more information on these event sources and the starting behavior in the S7-1500 Motion Control function
manual.

Assignment between event source and OBs

The type of OB determines where you make the assignment between OB and event source:
● With hardware interrupts and isochronous mode interrupts, the assignment is made
during the configuration of the hardware or when the OB is created.
● In the case of the MC-Servo, MC-PreServo, MC-PostServo and MC-Interpolator, STEP 7
automatically assigns the OBs 91/92 as soon as you add a technology object.
● For all other types of OB, the assignment is made when the OB is created, where
applicable after you have configured the event source.
For hardware interrupts, you can change an assignment which has already been made
during runtime with the instructions ATTACH and DETACH. In this case, only the actually
effective assignment changes, and not the configured assignment. The configured
assignment takes effect after loading, and at startup.
The CPU ignores hardware interrupts to which you did not assign an OB in your
configuration or which occur after the DETACH instruction. The CPU does not check
whether an OB is assigned to this event when an event arrives, but only prior to the actual
processing of the hardware interrupt.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 147
Basics of program execution
8.1 Events and OBs

OB priority and runtime behavior

If you have assigned an OB to the event, the OB has the priority of the event. The CPU
supports the priority classes 1 (lowest priority) to 26 (highest priority). The following items are
essential to the processing of an event:
● Calling and processing of the assigned OB
● The update of the process image partition of the assigned OB
The user program processes the OBs exclusively on a priority basis. This means the
program processes the OB with the highest priority first when multiple OB requests occur at
the same time. If an event occurs that has a higher priority than the currently active OB, this
OB is interrupted. The user program processes events of the same priority in order of
occurrence.

Note
Communication
Communication (e.g. test functions with the PG) always works permanently with the priority
15. So as not to unnecessarily prolong program runtime in the case of time-critical
applications, these OBs should not be interrupted by communication. Assign a priority >15
for these OBs.

Reference
You can find more information on organization blocks in the STEP 7 online help.

Distributed I/O system

148 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Basics of program execution
8.2 CPU overload behavior

8.2 CPU overload behavior

Requirement
For the event scenarios considered in the following section, we assume that you have
assigned an OB to each event source and that these OBs have the same priority. The
second condition, in particular, is only for the sake of a simplified representation.

Principle of CPU overload behavior

An occurring event triggers the execution of the associated OB. Depending on the OB
priority and the current processor load, a time delay may occur before the OB is executed
when there is an overload. The same event can therefore occur once or several times before
the user program processes the OB belonging to the preceding event. The CPU treats such
a situation as follows: The operating system positions the events in the order of their
occurrence into the queue for their priority level.
To cope with temporary overload situations, you can limit the number of pending events
originating from one and the same source. The next event is discarded as soon as the
maximum number of pending start events of a specific cyclic interrupt OB, for example, is
reached.
An overload occurs when events which originate from the same source occur faster than
they can be processed by the CPU.
More detailed information is available in the following sections.

Discarding similar events or handling them later

Below, the term "similar events" refers to events from a single source, such as triggers for a
specific cyclic interrupt OB.
The OB parameter "Events to be queued" is used to specify how many similar events the
operating system places in the associated queue and therefore post-processes. If this
parameter has the value 1, for example, exactly one event is stored temporarily.

Note
The post-processing of cyclic events is often undesirable, as this can lead to an overload
with OBs of the same or lower priority. Therefore, it is generally advantageous to discard
similar events and to react to the overload situation during the next scheduled OB
processing. If the value of the "Events to be queued" parameter is low, this ensures that an
overload situation is defused rather than aggravated.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 149
Basics of program execution
8.2 CPU overload behavior

If the maximum number of start events is reached in the queue for a cyclic interrupt OB
(Cyclic interrupt), for example, each additional start event is only counted and subsequently
discarded. During the next scheduled execution of the OB, the CPU provides the number of
discarded start events in the "Event_Count" input parameter (in the start information). You
can then react appropriately to the overload situation. The CPU then sets the counter for lost
events to zero.
If the CPU discards a start event for a cyclic interrupt OB the first time, its further behavior
depends on the OB parameter "Report event overflow into diagnostics buffer": If the check
box is selected, the CPU enters the event DW#16#0002:3507 once in the diagnostics buffer
for the overload situation at this event source. The CPU suppresses additional diagnostics
buffer entries of the event DW#16#0002:3507 that refer to this event source until all events
from this source have been post-processed.

Threshold mechanism for time error OB request

The cyclic interrupt OB parameter "Enable time error" is used to specify whether the time
error interrupt should be called when a specific overload level is reached for similar events.
You can find the OB parameter "Enable time error" in the properties of the OB in the
"Attributes" category.
If you enable the time error OB (option box set), you define, with the "Event threshold for
time error" OB parameter, the number of similar events in the queue that cause the user
program to call the time error OB. If this parameter has the value 1, for example, the CPU
enters the event DW#16#0002:3502 once in the diagnostics buffer and requests the time
error OB when the second event occurs. The CPU suppresses additional diagnostics buffer
entries of the event DW#16#0002:3502 until all events from this source have been post-
processed.
In the event of an overload, you therefore have the option of programming a reaction well
before the limit is reached for similar events and thus before the events are discarded.
The following value range applies to the "Event threshold for time error" parameter: 1 ≤
"Event threshold for time error" ≤ "Events to be queued".

Distributed I/O system

150 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

8.3 Asynchronous instructions

Difference between synchronous/asynchronous instructions

In program processing, a differentiation is made between synchronous and asynchronous
instructions.
The "synchronous" and "asynchronous" properties relate to the temporal relationship
between the call and execution of the instruction.
The following applies to synchronous instructions: When the call of a synchronous instruction
is ended, the execution is also ended.
This is different in the case of asynchronous instructions: When the call of an asynchronous
instruction is ended, the execution of the asynchronous instruction is not necessarily ended
yet. This means the execution of an asynchronous instruction can extend over multiple calls.
The CPU processes asynchronous instructions in parallel with the cyclic user program.
Asynchronous instructions generate jobs in the CPU for their processing.
Asynchronous instructions are usually instructions for transferring data (data records for
modules, communication data, diagnostics data).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 151
Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

Processing of asynchronous instructions

The figure below shows the difference between processing an asynchronous instruction and
processing a synchronous instruction. In this figure the asynchronous instruction is called
five times before the execution is completed, for example, a data record is completely
transferred.

① First call of the asynchronous instruction, start of processing

② Intermediate call of asynchronous instruction, continuation of processing
③ Last call of the asynchronous instruction, termination of processing
④ The synchronous instruction is completely processed at each call
Duration of the complete processing

Figure 8-1 Difference between synchronous and asynchronous instructions

Distributed I/O system

152 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

Parallel processing of asynchronous instruction jobs

A CPU can process several asynchronous instruction jobs in parallel. The CPU processes
the jobs in parallel under the following conditions:
● Several asynchronous instruction jobs are called at the same time.
● The maximum number of concurrently running jobs for the instruction is not exceeded.
The figure below shows the parallel processing of two jobs of the instruction WRREC. The
two instructions are processed in parallel for a specific period here.

Figure 8-2 Parallel processing of the asynchronous instruction WRREC

Assignment of call to job of the instruction

To execute an instruction over multiple calls, the CPU must be able to uniquely assign a
subsequent call to a running job of the instruction.
To assign a call to a job, the CPU uses one of the following two mechanisms, depending on
the type of the instruction:
● Via the instance data block of the instruction (in the case of the "SFB" type)
● The input parameters of the instruction identifying the job. These input parameters must
match in each call during processing of the asynchronous instruction.
Example: A "Create_DB" instruction job is identified by the input parameters LOW_LIMIT,
UP_LIMIT, COUNT, ATTRIB and SRCBLK.
The following table shows which instruction you can identify with which input parameters.

Instruction Job is identified by

DPSYC_FR LADDR, GROUP, MODE
D_ACT_DP LADDR
DPNRM_DG LADDR
WR_DPARM LADDR, RECNUM
WR_REC LADDR, RECNUM
RD_REC LADDR, RECNUM
CREATE_DB LOW_LIMIT, UP_LIMIT, COUNT, ATTRIB,
SRCBLK
READ_DBL SRCBLK, DSTBLK
WRIT_DBL SRCBLK, DSTBLK
RD_DPARA LADDR, RECNUM
DP_TOPOL DP_ID

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 153
Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

Status of an asynchronous instruction

An asynchronous instruction shows its status via the block parameters STATUS/RET_VAL
and BUSY. Many asynchronous instructions also use the block parameters DONE and
ERROR.
The figure below shows the two asynchronous instructions WRREC and CREATE_DB.

① The input parameter REQ starts the job to execute the asynchronous instruction.
② The output parameter DONE indicates that the job was completed without error.
③ The output parameter BUSY indicates whether the job is currently being processed. When
BUSY =1, a resource is assigned for the asynchronous instruction. If BUSY = 0, then the re-
source is free.
④ The output parameter ERROR indicates that an error has occurred.
⑤ The output parameter STATUS/RET_VAL provides information on the status of the job execu-
tion. The output parameter STATUS/RET_VAL receives the error information after the occur-
rence of an error.

Figure 8-3 Block parameters of asynchronous instructions using the instructions WRREC and
CREATE_DB as examples.

Summary
The table below provides you with an overview of the relationships described above. It
shows in particular the possible values of the output parameters if processing is not
completed after a call.

Note
Following every call, you must evaluate the relevant output parameters in your program.

Distributed I/O system

154 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

Relationship between REQ, STATUS/RET_VAL, BUSY and DONE during a "running" job.

Seq. no. Type of call REQ STATUS/RET_VAL BUSY DONE ERROR

of the
call
1 First call 1 W#16#7001 1 0 0
Error code (for example, 0 0 1
W#16#80C3 for lack of
resources)
2 to (n - 1) Intermediate Not relevant W#16#7002 1 0 0
call
n Last call Not relevant W#16#0000, if no errors 0 1 0
have occurred.
Error code, if errors have 0 0 1
occurred

Consumption of resources
Asynchronous instructions occupy resources in the CPU while they are being processed.
The resources are limited depending on the type of CPU and instruction; the CPU can only
process a maximum number of asynchronous instruction jobs simultaneously. The resources
are available again after a job has been successfully completed or processed with an error.
Example: For the RDREC instruction, a 1512SP-1 PN CPU can process up to 20 jobs in
parallel.
If the maximum number of simultaneous jobs for an instruction is exceeded, the instruction
returns the error code 80C3 (lack of resources) in the block parameter STATUS. The
execution of the job is stopped until a resource becomes free again.

Note
Lower-level asynchronous instructions
Several asynchronous instructions use one or more lower-level asynchronous instructions
for their processing. This dependence is shown in the tables below.
Please note that, if there are several lower-level instructions, typically only one lower-level
instruction is occupied at one time.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 155
Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

Extended instructions: maximum number of concurrently running jobs

The table below shows the maximum number of concurrently running jobs for asynchronous
extended instructions.

Extended instructions CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
Distributed I/O
RDREC 20
RD_REC 10
WRREC 20
WR_REC 10
D_ACT_DP 8
ReconfigIOSystem uses RDREC, WRREC, D_ACT_DP,
DPSYC_FR 2
DPNRM_DG 8
DP_TOPOL 1
ASI_CTRL uses RDREC, WRREC
PROFIenergy
PE_START_END uses RDREC, WRREC
PE_CMD uses RDREC, WRREC
PE_DS3_Write_ET200S uses RDREC, WRREC
PE_WOL uses RDREC, WRREC, TUSEND, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
Module parameter assignment
RD_DPAR 10
RD_DPARA 10
RD_DPARM 10
WR_DPARM 10
Diagnostics
Get_IM_Data 10
GetStationInfo 10
Recipes and data logging
RecipeExport 10
RecipeImport 10
DataLogCreate 10
DataLogOpen 10
DataLogWrite 10
DataLogClear 10
DataLogClose 10
DataLogDelete 10
DataLogNewFile 10
Data block functions
CREATE_DB 10
READ_DBL 10

Distributed I/O system

156 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

Extended instructions CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
WRIT_DBL 10
DELETE_DB 10
File handling
FileReadC 10
FileWriteC 10

Basic instructions: maximum number of concurrently running jobs

The table below shows the maximum number of concurrently running jobs for asynchronous
basic instructions.

Basic instructions CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
Array DB
ReadFromArrayDBL uses READ_DBL (see Extended instructions)
WriteToArrayDBL uses READ_DBL, WRIT_DBL (see Extended instructions)

Communication: maximum number of concurrently running jobs

The following table shows the maximum number of simultaneously running jobs for
asynchronous instructions (Open User Communication) for the various CPUs.

Open User Communication CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
TSEND 64 88
TUSEND
TRCV 64 88
TURCV
TCON 64 88
TDISCON 64 88
T_RESET 64 88
T_DIAG 64 88
T_CONFIG 1
TSEND_C uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TCON, TDISCON
TRCV_C uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
TMAIL_C uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 157
Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

The following table shows the maximum number of simultaneously running jobs for
asynchronous instructions (MODBUS TCP) for the various CPUs.

MODBUS TCP CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510P F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
MB_CLIENT uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
MB_SERVER uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON

The table below shows the maximum number of simultaneously running jobs for
asynchronous instructions (S7 communication) for the various CPUs. The S7 communication
instructions use a common pool of resources.

S7 communication CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
PUT 192 264
GET
USEND
URCV
BSEND
BRCV

The following table shows the maximum number of simultaneously running jobs for
asynchronous instructions (communication processors) for the various CPUs.

Communications processors CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
PtP communication
Port_Config uses RDDEC, WRREC
Send_Config uses RDDEC, WRREC
Receive_Config uses RDDEC, WRREC
Send_P2P uses RDDEC, WRREC
Receive_P2P uses RDDEC, WRREC
Receive_Reset uses RDDEC, WRREC
Signal_Get uses RDDEC, WRREC
Signal_Set uses RDDEC, WRREC
Get_Features uses RDDEC, WRREC
Set_Features uses RDDEC, WRREC
USS communication
USS_Port_Scan uses RDDEC, WRREC
MODBUS (RTU)
Modbus_Comm_Load uses RDDEC, WRREC
ET 200S serial interface
S_USSI uses CREATE_DB
SIMATIC NET
FTP_CMD uses TSEND, TRCV, TCON, TDISCON

Distributed I/O system

158 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

The following table shows the maximum number of simultaneously running jobs for
asynchronous instructions (OPC UA) for the various CPUs.

OPC_UA CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
OPC_UA_Connect 10
OPC_UA_Disconnect 10
OPC_UA_NamespaceGetIndexList 10
OPC_UA_NodeGetHandleList 10
OPC_UA_NodeReleaseHandleList 10
OPC_UA_TranslatePathList 10
OPC_UA_Browse 10
OPC_UA_ReadList 10
OPC_UA_WriteList 10
OPC_UA_MethodGetHandleList 10
OPC_UA_MethodReleaseHandleList 10
OPC_UA_MethodCall 10
OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre 10
OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost 10
OPC_UA_ConnectionGetStatus 10

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 159
Basics of program execution
8.3 Asynchronous instructions

Technology: maximum number of concurrently running jobs

The following table shows the maximum number of simultaneously running jobs for
asynchronous instructions (Technology).

Technology CPU 1510SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN
CPU 1512SP-1 PN
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
Motion Control
MC_Power 300
MC_Reset
MC_Home
MC_Halt
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_MoveJog
MC_GearIn
MC_MoveSuperimposed
MC_MeasuringInput
MC_MeasuringInputCyclic
MC_AbortMeasuringInput
MC_OutputCam
MC_CamTrack
MC_TorqueLimiting

Additional information
You can find additional information on block parameter assignment in the STEP 7
online help.

Distributed I/O system

160 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
Protection 9
9.1 Overview of the protective functions of the CPU

Introduction
This chapter describes the following functions for protecting the ET 200SP against
unauthorized access:
● Access protection
● Know-how protection
● Copy protection

Further measures for protecting the CPU

The following measures additionally increase the protection against unauthorized access to
functions and data of the CPU from external sources and via the network:
● Deactivation of the Web server
● Deactivation of the OPC UA server (you will find further information on the security
mechanisms for OPC UA servers in the Communication
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192925) function manual)
● Deactivation of time synchronization via an NTP server
● Deactivation of PUT/GET communication
When using the Web server, you protect your ET 200SP distributed I/O system against
unauthorized access
● By setting password-protected access rights for certain users in user management.
● By using the default "Allow access via HTTPS only" option.
This option allows access to the Web server with the secure Hypertext transfer protocol
HTTPS only.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 161
Protection
9.2 Configuring access protection for the CPU

9.2 Configuring access protection for the CPU

Introduction
The CPU offers four access levels to limit access to specific functions.
By setting up the access levels and the passwords for a CPU, you limit the functions and
memory areas that are accessible without entering a password. You specify the individual
access levels as well as the entry of their associated passwords in the object properties of
the CPU.

Access levels of the CPU

Table 9- 1 Access levels and access restrictions

Access levels Access restrictions

Full access (no Any user can read and change the hardware configuration and the blocks.
protection)
Read access With this access level, read-only access to the hardware configuration and the
blocks is possible without entering a password, which means you can download
the hardware configuration and blocks to the programming device. In addition, HMI
access and access to diagnostics data is possible.
Without entering the password, you cannot load any blocks or hardware configura-
tion into the CPU. Additionally, the following are not possible without the pass-
word:
• Writing test functions
• Firmware update (online)
HMI access With this access level only HMI access and access to diagnostics data are possi-
ble without entering the password.
Without entering the password, you can neither load blocks nor the hardware
configuration into the CPU, nor load blocks and hardware configuration from the
CPU into the programming device. Additionally, the following are not possible
without the password:
• Writing test functions
• Changing the mode (RUN/STOP)
• Firmware update (online)
• Display of the online/offline comparison status
No access When the CPU has complete protection, no read or write access to the hardware
(complete pro- configuration and the blocks is possible (without access authorization in the form
tection) of a password). HMI access is also not possible. The server function for PUT/GET
communication is disabled in this access level (cannot be changed).
Authentication with the password will again provide you full access to the CPU.

You can find a list of which functions are possible in the various protection levels in the
STEP 7 online help under the entry "Setting options for the protection".

Distributed I/O system

162 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Protection
9.2 Configuring access protection for the CPU

Properties of the access levels

Each access level allows unrestricted access to certain functions without entering a
password, for example, identification using the "Accessible devices" function.
The CPU's default setting is "No restriction" and "No password protection". In order to protect
access to a CPU, you need to edit the properties of the CPU and set up a password. In the
default access level "Full access (no protection)" every user can read and change the
hardware configuration and the blocks. A password is not set and is also not required for
online access.
Communication between the CPUs (via the communication functions in the blocks) is not
restricted by the access level of the CPU, unless PUT/GET communication is deactivated in
the "No access" (complete protection) access level.
Entry of the right password allows access to all the functions that are allowed in the
corresponding level.

Note
Configuring an access level does not replace know-how protection
Configuring access levels offers a high degree of protection against unauthorized changes to
the CPU by restricting the rights to download the hardware and software configuration to the
CPU. However, blocks on the SIMATIC memory card are not write- or read-protected. Use
know-how protection to protect the code of blocks on the SIMATIC memory card.

Behavior of functions with different access levels

The STEP 7 online help includes a table which lists the online functions that are available in
the different access levels.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 163
Protection
9.2 Configuring access protection for the CPU

Selecting the access levels

To configure the access levels of a CPU, follow these steps:
1. Open the properties of the CPU in the Inspector window.
2. Open the "Protection" entry in the area navigation.
A table with the possible access levels is available in the Inspector window.

Figure 9-1 Possible access levels

3. Activate the desired protection level in the first column of the table. The green check
marks in the columns to the right of the access level show you which operations are still
available without entering the password. In the example (see above), read access and
HMI access are still possible without a password.
4. In the "Enter password" column, specify a password for the access level "Full access" in
the first row. In the "Confirm password" column, enter the selected password again to
guard against incorrect entries.
Ensure that the password is sufficiently secure, i.e. does not follow a pattern that can be
recognized by a machine.
5. Assign additional passwords as needed to other access levels if the selected access level
allows you to do so.
6. Download the hardware configuration for the access level to take effect.
The CPU logs the entry of the correct or incorrect password and any changes in the
configuration of the access levels by a corresponding entry in the diagnostics buffer.

Distributed I/O system

164 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Protection
9.3 Using the user program to set additional access protection

Behavior of a password-protected CPU during operation

The CPU protection takes effect after you have downloaded the settings to the CPU.
Before an online function is executed, the CPU checks the necessary permission and, if
necessary, prompts the user to enter a password. You can only execute password-protected
functions from one programming device/PC at any time. Another programming device/PC
cannot log on.
Access authorization to the protected data is in effect for the duration of the online
connection or until you rescind the access authorization manually with "Online > Delete
access rights".

Access levels for F-CPUs

For the fail-safe CPUs, there is an additional access level in addition to the four described
access levels. For additional information on this access level, refer to the description of the
fail-safe system SIMATIC Safety Programming and Operating Manual SIMATIC Safety -
Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126).

9.3 Using the user program to set additional access protection

Access protection via user program

You can also restrict access to a password-protected CPU in STEP 7 via the ENDIS_PW
operation. You can find a description of this block in the online help under the keyword
"ENDIS_PW: Limit and enable password legitimation".

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 165
Protection
9.4 Know-how protection

9.4 Know-how protection

Application
You can use know-how protection to protect one or more OB, FB or FC blocks as well as
global data blocks in your program from unauthorized access. Enter a password to restrict
access to a block. The password offers high-level protection against unauthorized reading or
manipulation of the block.

Password provider
As an alternative to manual entry of password, you can connect a password provider to
STEP 7. When using a password provider, you select a password from a list of available
passwords. When a protected block is opened, STEP 7 connects to the password provider
and retrieves the corresponding password.
To connect a password provider you have to install and activate it. A settings file in which
you define the use of a password provider is also required.
A password provider offers the following advantages:
● The password provider defines and manages the passwords. When know-how protected
blocks are opened, you work with symbolic names for passwords. A password is marked,
for example, with the symbolic name "Machine_1" n the password provider. The actual
password behind "Machine1" remains hidden from you.
A password provider therefore offers you optimum block protection as the users do not
know the password themselves.
● STEP 7 automatically opens know-how protected blocks without the direct entry of a
password. This saves you time.
You will find more information on connecting a password provider in the STEP 7 online help.

Readable data
If a block is know-how protected, only the following data is readable without the correct
password:
● Block title, comments and block properties
● Block parameters (INPUT, OUTPUT, IN, OUT, RETURN)
● Call structure of the program
● Global tags without information on the point of use

Distributed I/O system

166 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Protection
9.4 Know-how protection

Further actions
Further actions that can be carried out with a know-how protected block:
● Copying and deleting
● Calling in a program
● Online/offline comparison
● Load

Global data blocks and array data blocks

You can provide global data blocks (global DBs) with know-how protection. Users who do
not possess the valid password can read the global data block but not change it.
You cannot provide array data blocks (array DBs) with know-how protection.

Setting up block know-how protection

To set up block know-how protection, follow these steps:
1. Open the properties of the block in question.
2. Select the "Protection" option under "General".

Figure 9-2 Setting up block know-how protection (1)

3. Click the "Protection" button to display the "Know-how protection" dialog.

Figure 9-3 Setting up block know-how protection (2)

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 167
Protection
9.4 Know-how protection

4. Click the "Define" button to open the "Define Password" dialog.

Figure 9-4 Setting up block know-how protection (3)

5. Enter the new password in the "New password" box. Enter the same password in the
"Confirm password" box.
6. Click "OK" to confirm your entry.
7. Close the "Know-how protection" dialog by clicking "OK".
Result: The selected blocks are now know-how protected. Know-how protected blocks are
marked with a lock in the project tree. The password entered applies to all blocks selected.

Note
Password provider
Alternatively, you can set up know-how protection for blocks with a password provider.

Opening know-how protected blocks

To open a know-how protected block, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the block to open the "Access protection" dialog.
2. Enter the password for the know-how protected block.
3. Click "OK" to confirm your entry.
Result: The know-how-protected block is open.
Once you have opened the block, you can edit the program code and the block interface of
the block for as long as the block or STEP 7 is open. You must enter the password again the
next time you open the block. If you close the "Access protection" dialog with "Cancel", you
will be able to open the block but you cannot display the block code or edit the block.
If you copy the block or add it to a library, for example, this does not cancel the know-how
protection of the block. The copies will also be know-how-protected.

Distributed I/O system

168 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Protection
9.4 Know-how protection

Removing block know-how protection

To remove block know-how protection, follow these steps:
1. Select the block from which you want to remove know-how protection. The protected
block must not be open in the program editor.
2. In the "Edit" menu, select the "Know-how protection" command to open the "Know-how
protection" dialog.
3. Clear the "Hide code (Know-how protection)" check box.

Figure 9-5 Removing block know-how protection (1)

4. Enter the password.

Figure 9-6 Removing block know-how protection (2)

5. Click "OK" to confirm your entry.

Result: Know-how protection is removed from the selected block.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 169
Protection
9.5 Copy protection

9.5 Copy protection

Application
The copy protection allows you to protect your program against unauthorized duplication.
With copy protection you associate the blocks with a specific SIMATIC memory card or CPU.
Through the linking of the serial number of a SIMATIC memory card or of a CPU the use of
this program or of this block is only possible in conjunction with a specific SIMATIC memory
card or CPU.

Copy and know-how protection

Recommendation: to prevent unauthorized reset of copy protection, additionally apply
know-how protection to a copy-protected block. To do this, first set up copy protection and
then apply know-how protection for the block.

Setting up copy protection

To set up copy protection, follow these steps:
1. Open the properties of the block in question.
2. Select the "Protection" option under "General".

Figure 9-7 Setting up copy protection (1)

3. In the "Copy protection" area, select either the "Bind to serial number of the CPU" entry or
the "Bind to serial number of the memory card" entry from the drop-down list.

Figure 9-8 Setting up copy protection (2)

Distributed I/O system

170 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Protection
9.5 Copy protection

4. Activate the option "Serial number is inserted when downloading to a device or a memory
card" if the serial number is to be inserted automatically during the uploading process
(dynamic binding). Assign a password using the "Define password" button to link the use
of a block additionally to the input of a password.
Activate the option "Enter serial number" if you want to manually bind the serial number of
the CPU or the SIMATIC memory card to a block (static binding).
5. You can now set up the know-how protection for the block in the "Know-how protection"
area.

Note
If you download a copy-protected block to a device that does not match the specified
serial number, the entire download operation will be rejected. This means that blocks
without copy protection will also not be downloaded.

Removing copy protection

To remove copy protection, follow these steps:
1. Remove any existing know-how protection.
2. Open the properties of the block in question.
3. Select the "Protection" option under "General".
4. In the "Copy protection" area, select the "No binding" entry from the drop-down list.

Figure 9-9 Removing copy protection

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 171
Configuration control (option handling) 10
Introduction
Configuration control (option handling) is used to operate various standard machine
configuration levels in one project without changing the configuration or the user program.

Operating principle of configuration control

You can use configuration control to operate different standard machine configurations with
a single configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
● A station master is configured in a project (maximum configuration). The station master
comprises all modules needed for all possible plant parts of a modular standard machine.
● The project's user program provides for several station options for various standard
machine configuration levels as well as selection of a station option. A station option
uses, for example, only some of the configured modules of the station master and these
modules are inserted in the slots in a different order.
● The standard machine manufacturer selects a station option for a configuration of the
standard machine. To do this, the project need not be modified, and it is not necessary to
load a modified configuration.
You use a control data record you have programmed to notify the CPU/interface module as
to which modules are missing or located on different slots in a station option as compared to
the station master. The configuration control does not have an impact on the parameter
assignment of the modules.
Configuration control allows you to flexibly vary the centralized/distributed configuration. This
is only possible if the station option can be derived from the station master.
The following figure shows three configurations of a standard machine with the
corresponding station options of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Distributed I/O system

172 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)

Figure 10-1 Various configuration levels of a standard machine with the corresponding station
options of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Advantages
● Simple project management and commissioning by using a single STEP 7 project for all
station options.
● Simple handling for maintenance, versioning and upgrade:
● Hardware savings: Only those I/O modules are installed that are required for the
machine's current station option.
● Savings potential in the creation, commissioning and the documentation for standard
machines.
● Simple station expansion by using pre-wired empty slots. To expand, you simply
exchange the BU cover for the new model.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 173
Configuration control (option handling)

Procedure
To set up the configuration control, follow these steps:

Step Procedure See...

1 Enable configuration control in STEP 7 Section Configuring (Page 175)
2 Create control data record Section Creating the control data record
(Page 177)
3 Transfer control data record Section Transferring the control data
record in the startup program of the CPU
(Page 188)

Block library "OH_S71x00_Library"

The block library OH_S71x00_Library
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/#document/29430270?lc=en-WW) is available for
download from the Internet. The block library contains data types with the structure of the
control data records for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. You can implement your
flexible automation solution inexpensively with the help of these data types.

Note
Configuration control in the case of motor starters
"Manual local" mode is possible in the case of motor starters when configuration control is
active. The motor starter works with the last valid parameters. Do not change the
parameterization while "manual local" mode is active.

Distributed I/O system

174 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.1 Configuring

10.1 Configuring

Requirements
Configuration control is supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with both an ET
200SP CPU and with interface modules via PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP.
Centrally for ET 200SP CPU:
● STEP 7 Professional V13 Update 3 or higher
● CPU 1510SP-1 PN/CPU 1512SP-1 PN
● Firmware version V1.6 or higher
● All modules of the CPU must be able to start up even with different configurations.
– The startup parameter "Comparison preset to actual configuration" of the CPU is set to
"Startup CPU even if mismatch" (default setting) and the module parameter
"Comparison preset to actual module" of the module is set to "From CPU" (default
setting).
or
– The module parameter "Comparison preset to actual module" for the module is set to
"Startup CPU even if mismatch".
Distributed via PROFINET IO:
● Engineering Tool (e.g. STEP 7)
● IM 155-6 PN BA/ST/HF/HS
● You have assigned the interface module to an IO controller.
Distributed via PROFIBUS DP:
● Engineering Tool (e.g. STEP 7)
● IM 155-6 DP HF
● You have assigned the interface module to a DP master.
● The startup parameter is set to "Operate if preset configuration does not match actual
configuration"

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 175
Configuration control (option handling)
10.1 Configuring

Required steps
Enable the "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter when
configuring the CPU/interface module in STEP 7 (TIA Portal).
● The "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter is located in the
"Configuration control" area for an ET 200SP CPU.
● The "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter is located in the
"Module parameter" area under "General" for an IM 155-6 PN interface module.

Figure 10-2 Enabling configuration control using an IM 155-6 PN HF as an example

Distributed I/O system

176 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

10.2 Creating the control data record

10.2.1 Introduction

Required steps
To create a control data record for the configuration control, follow these steps:
1. Create a PLC data type which contains the structure of the control data record.
The following figure shows a PLC data type "CTR_REC", which contains the structure of
the control data record for an ET 200SP interface module.

Figure 10-3 Creating control data record 196 using an IM 155-6 PN HF as an example

2. Create a global data block.

3. In the data block, create an array that is based on the created PLC data type.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 177
Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

4. In the control data records, enter the slot assignments in the "Start value" column.
The figure below shows the global data block "ConfDB". The data block "ConfDB"
contains an array [0..5] of the PLC_DataType "CTR_REC".

Figure 10-4 Data block for configuration control

Rules
Observe the following rules:
● Slot entries in the control data record outside the station master are ignored by the
CPU/interface module.
● The control data record must contain the entries up to the last slot of the station option.
● Multiple configured slots may not be assigned to the same actual slot. In other words,
each station option slot may be present only once in the control data record.

Distributed I/O system

178 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

10.2.2 Control data record for an ET 200SP CPU

Slot assignment
The following table shows the possible slots for the various modules for an ET 200SP CPU:

Table 10- 1 Slot assignment

Modules Possible slots Comment

CPU 1 Slot 1 is always the CPU
I/O modules 2 - 65 Downstream of CPU
Server module 2 - 66 The server module completes the configuration of the
ET 200SP station after the CPU/the last I/O module.

Control data record

For the configuration control of an ET 200SP CPU, you define a control data record 196
V2.0, which includes a slot assignment. The maximum slot corresponds to the slot of the
server module.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 179
Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

The table below shows the structure of a control data record with explanations of the
individual elements.

Table 10- 2 Configuration control: Structure of control data record 196

Byte Element Code Explanation

0 Block length 4 + (number of slots × 2) Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 of the station master Slot assignment 1 in the Control element
station option Contains the information on which mod-
(always 1, because the ule is inserted in which slot.
CPU is always in slot 1) The value that you need to enter in the
5 Additional function for slot 1 corresponding byte depends on the fol-
6 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the lowing rule:
station option • If the module exists in the station
7 Additional function for slot 2 option, enter the slot number of the
8 Slot 3 of the station master Slot assignment in the module.
station option • If the module exists as empty slot
9 Additional function for slot 3 (with BU cover), enter the slot number
of the module + 128. (Example: mod-
: : :
ule as empty slot on slot 3: Enter 131
4 + ((max. slot - Server module slot Server module slot as- in the control element)
1) × 2) signment in the station
option* • If the module does not exist in the
station option, enter 0.
4 + ((max. slot - Additional function for server module slot
1)× 2) + 1 Additional function
Contains information on whether a new
potential group will be opened in the
station option - by replacing a dark-
colored BaseUnit with a light-colored
BaseUnit.
• If you replace a dark-colored Ba-
seUnit with a light-colored BaseUnit,
enter 1 as additional function.
• If you accept the BaseUnit from the
station master, enter 0 as additional
function.

* The server module must be present in the station option and must not be marked as empty slot (BU cover).

Distributed I/O system

180 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

10.2.3 Control data record for an interface module

Slot assignment
The following table shows the possible slots for the various modules for an
ET 200SP interface module:

Table 10- 3 Slot assignment

Modules Possible slots Comment

Interface module 0 The interface module (slot 0) is not an element of the configu-
ration control, but instead controls this.
Station extension 1 For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules, BA-Send is
BA-Send always on slot 1.
ET 200SP I/O module 1 - 12 for IM 155-6 PN BA Downstream from the interface module
1 - 30 for IM 155-6 PN HS
1 - 32 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 64 for IM 155-5 PN HF
Server module 1 - 13 for IM 155-6 PN BA The server module completes the configuration of the
1 - 31 for IM 155-6 PN HS ET 200SP station after the last I/O module.

1 - 33 for IM 155-6 PN ST,

IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 65 for IM 155-5 PN HF
ET 200AL I/O module 34 - 49 for IM 155-6 DP HF For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules
66 - 81 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 PN HF

Simplified control data record (V1)

For the configuration control of interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system,
you define a control data record 196 V1.0, which includes a slot assignment. The maximum
slot of the configuration corresponds to the slot of the server module or ET 200AL I/O
module (in a mixed ET 200SP / ET 200AL configuration).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 181
Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

The table below shows the structure of a control data record with explanations of the
individual elements.

Table 10- 4 Structure of the simplified control data record V1.0

Byte Element Code Explanation

0 Block length 4 + maximum slot Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 1
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 of the station master Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200SP
station option Contains the information on which
5 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the ET 200SP module is inserted in which
station option slot.
: : : The value that you need to enter in the
4 + (slot server Server module slot Server module slot as- corresponding byte depends on the fol-
lowing rule:
module - 1) signment in the station
option* • If the module exists in the station
option, enter the slot number of the
module.
• If the module exists as empty slot
(with BU cover), enter the slot number
of the module + 128. (Example: mod-
ule as empty slot on slot 3: Enter 131
in the control element)
• If the module does not exist in the
station option, enter 0.
: : : :
4 + (first slot ET First slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200AL
200AL - 1) station option Contains information on which ET 200AL
: : : module is inserted in which slot.
4 + (last slot ET Last slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the The value that you need to enter in the
200AL - 1) station option corresponding byte depends on the fol-
lowing rule:
• If the module exists in the station
option, enter the slot number of the
module.
• If the module does not exist in the
station option, enter 0.

* The server module must be present in the station option and must not be marked as empty slot (BU cover).

Control data record (V2)

If you change the potential groups in the station option compared to the station master,
define a control data record 196 V2.0 for the ET 200SP interface module which contains a
slot assignment. The maximum slot of the configuration corresponds to the slot of the server
module or ET 200AL I/O module (in a mixed ET 200SP / ET 200AL configuration).

Distributed I/O system

182 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

The table below shows the structure of a control data record with explanations of the
individual elements.

Table 10- 5 Structure of control data record 196 V2.0

Byte Element Code Explanation

0 Block length 4 + (maximum slot x 2) Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 of the station master Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200SP
station option Contains the information on which
5 Additional function for slot 1 ET 200SP module is inserted in which
6 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the slot.
station option The value that you need to enter in the
7 Additional function for slot 2 corresponding byte depends on the fol-
lowing rule:
8 Slot 3 of the station master Slot assignment in the
station option • If the module exists in the station
option, enter the slot number of the
9 Additional function for slot 3
module.
: : :
• If the module exists as empty slot
4 + ((server module Server module slot Server module slot as- (with BU cover), enter the slot number
slot - 1) × 2) signment in the station
of the module + 128. (Example: mod-
option*
ule as empty slot on slot 3: Enter 131
4 + ((server module Additional function for server module slot in the control element)
slot - 1) × 2) + 1
• If the module does not exist in the
station option, enter 0.
Additional function
Contains information on whether a new
potential group will be opened in the
station option - by replacing a dark-
colored BaseUnit with a light-colored
BaseUnit.
• If you replace a dark-colored Ba-
seUnit with a light-colored BaseUnit,
enter 1 as additional function.
• If you accept the BaseUnit from the
station master, enter 0 as additional
function.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 183
Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

Byte Element Code Explanation

: : : :
4 + ((first slot First slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200AL
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) station option Contains information on which ET 200AL
4 + ((first slot Reserved module is inserted in which slot.
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) The value that you need to enter in the
+1 corresponding byte depends on the fol-
: : : lowing rule:
4 + ((last slot Last slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the • If the module exists in the station
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) station option option, enter the slot number of the
4 + ((last slot Reserved module.
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) • If the module does not exist in the
+1 station option, enter 0.

* The server module must be present in the station option and must not be marked as empty slot (BU cover).

Note
If a BU cover or no I/O module is plugged on a light-colored BaseUnit, you should enter 1 in
the additional function for the slot.
The function "Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+" requires proper assignment of
the slots to a shared supply voltage L+ (potential group). All light-colored BaseUnits must be
known to the interface module. By entering 1 in the additional function, you make a light-
colored BaseUnit known to the interface module, even if an I/O module is not inserted.

Combination of configuration control and shared device (for PROFINET)

The configuration control function in a shared device is therefore only for the I/O modules of
the IO controller to which the interface module has subscribed. I/O modules that are
assigned to no controller or a different controller behave like a station without activated
configuration control.
You cannot make any change to the slot assignment for modules that are assigned to
another IO controller or are not assigned to an IO controller (shared device on module level).
The CPU assumes a one-to-one assignment for the modules.
If additional IO controllers subscribe to a module intended for configuration control (shared
device on submodule level), only one-to-one assignment is permitted for this module. It is not
possible to deselect such a module using the control data record (code 0 for this slot in the
control data record). This means the combination of "Configuration control" and "Shared
device on submodule level" is only possible to a limited extent.
Please note that all modules affected by the configuration control including all assigned
submodules are reset when you change the module assignment. Submodules that are
assigned to a second IO controller are affected as well.

Distributed I/O system

184 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

10.2.4 Feedback data record for interface modules

Operating principle
The feedback data record informs you about the accuracy of the module assignment and
gives you the option of detecting assignment errors in the control data record. The feedback
data record is mapped via a separate data record 197 V2.0. The feedback data record exists
only with configured configuration control.

Slot assignment
The feedback data record refers to the configured station configuration and always includes
the maximum configuration limits. The maximum configuration limits comprise 13/49/81 slots
depending on the interface module in use. Partial reading of the feedback data record is
possible.
The following table shows the slot assignment of the modules:

Table 10- 6 Slot assignment

Modules Possible slots Comment

Station extension 1 For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules, BA-Send is
BA-Send always on slot 1.
ET 200SP I/O module 1 - 12 for IM 155-6 PN BA Downstream from the interface module
1 - 30 for IM 155-6 PN HS
1 - 32 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 64 for IM 155-5 PN HF
Server module 1 - 13 for IM 155-6 PN BA The server module completes the configuration of the
1 - 31 for IM 155-6 PN HS ET 200SP station after the last I/O module.

1 - 33 for IM 155-6 PN ST,

IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 65 for IM 155-5 PN HF
ET 200AL I/O module 34 - 49 for IM 155-6 DP HF For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules
66 - 81 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 PN HF

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 185
Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

Feedback data record

Table 10- 7 Feedback data record

Byte Element Code Explanation

0 Block length 4 + (number of slots x 2) Header
1 Block ID 197
2 Version 2
3 0
4 Slot 1 status 0/1 Status = 1:
5 Reserved 0 • Module from station master is
6 Slot 2 status 0/1 inserted in the station option
7 Reserved 0 • Slot is marked as not availa-
: : : ble in the control data record
4 + ((max. slot - 1) × 2) Max. slot status 0/1 Status = 0:

4 + ((max. slot - 1) × 2) + 1 Reserved 0 • Module pulled

• Incorrect module is inserted in
the station option*

* Not possible if the slot is marked as not available.

Note
The data in the feedback data record is always mapped for all modules. In a shared device
configuration, it is therefore irrelevant which IO controller the respective modules are
assigned to.
As long as no control data record has been sent, a one-to-one module assignment is
assumed for the compilation of data record 197 (station master → station option).

Distributed I/O system

186 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.2 Creating the control data record

Error messages
In case of error, the RDREC instruction returns the following error messages via the
STATUS block parameter while reading the feedback data record:

Table 10- 8 Error messages

Error code Meaning

80B1H Invalid length; the length information in data record 197 is not
correct.
80B5H Configuration control not configured
80B8H Parameter error
The following events cause a parameter error:
• Incorrect block ID in the header (not equal to 197)
• Invalid version identifier in the header
• A reserved bit has been set
• The same slot in the station option has been assigned to more
than one slot in the station master

10.2.5 Data records and functions

Supported data records and functions

The table below shows a comparison of the supported data records and functions depending
on the CPU/interface module used.

CPU... Interface module (IM...)

Supported data rec- 1510SP-1 PN 1512SP-1 PN 155-6 PN 155-6 PN 155-6 PN 155-6 PN 155-6 DP
ords and functions 1510SP F-1 PN 1512SP F-1 PN HS HF ST BA HF
Control data record ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(V2)
Simplified control data -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --
record (V1)
Read back control data ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
record *
Read feedback data -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
record

* You can read back the control data record with the RDREC instruction.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 187
Configuration control (option handling)
10.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU

10.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU

Required steps
Transfer the created control data record 196 to the CPU/the interface module using the
instruction WRREC (Write data record) instruction.

Parameters of the instruction WRREC

Below, you will find explanations of individual parameters of the WRREC instruction which
you must supply with specific values in the configuration control context. You can find
additional information on the WRREC instruction in the STEP 7 online help.

ID Hardware identifier
• Use the HW identifier of the CPU for the configuration control for centrally ar-
ranged modules.
If you have selected the CPU in the network view or device view, the HW identifier
is available in the System constants tab of the Inspector window.
Use the value of the system constant "Local~Configuration".
• Use the HW identifier of the interface module for the configuration control for dis-
tributed I/O.
If you have selected the interface module in the network view or device view, the
HW identifier is available in the System constants tab of the Inspector window.
Use the value of the system constant "<Name_of_the_interface_module>~Head".
INDEX Data record number: 196 (decimal)
RECORD Control data record to be transferred.
See the section Creating the control data record (Page 177) for the structure of the
control data record.

Distributed I/O system

188 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU

Error messages
In case of error, the instruction WRREC returns the following error messages via the
STATUS block parameter:

Table 10- 9 Error messages

Error code Meaning

80B1H Invalid length; the length information in data record 196 is not
correct.
80B5H Configuration control parameters not assigned.
80E2H Data record was transferred in the wrong OB context. The data
record must be transferred in the startup program.
80B8H Parameter error
A parameter error is caused by:
• Incorrect block ID in the header (not equal to 196)
• Invalid version identifier in the header
• A reserved bit was set
• A station master slot was assigned an invalid slot in the station
option
• Multiple slots in the station master are assigned to the same
slot in the station option
• For shared device on submodule level: Violation of defined
restrictions

Selection of the station option in the user program

In order for the CPU to know which station option you want to operate, you must set up a
selection option between the various control data records in the user program. You can
implement the selection, for example, via an Int tag which references an array element.
Note that the tag for selecting the control data record must be located in the retentive
memory area. If the tag is not retentive it will be initialized during the startup of the CPU and
thus be unavailable for selection of the station option.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 189
Configuration control (option handling)
10.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU

Special aspects relating to the transfer of the control data record to the CPU
● If you have enabled configuration control, the CPU is not ready for operation without a
control data record. The CPU returns from startup to STOP if a valid control data record is
not transferred in the startup OB. The central I/O is not initialized in this case. The cause
for the STOP mode is entered in the diagnostics buffer.

Note
If an incorrect control data record is transferred to the CPU in the startup OB, the startup
of the CPU may be prevented.
In this case, perform a reset to factory settings of the CPU and then transfer a correct
control data record.

● The CPU processes the WRREC instruction for transfer of the control data record
asynchronously. For this reason, you must call WRREC in the startup OB repeatedly in a
loop until the output parameters "BUSY" or "DONE" indicate that the data record has
been transferred.
– Tip: To program the loop, use the SCL programming language with the REPEAT ...
UNTIL instruction.
REPEAT

"WRREC_DB"(REQ := "start_config_control",

ID := "Local~Configuration",

INDEX := 196,

LEN := "conf_LEN",

DONE => "conf_DONE",

BUSY => "conf_BUSY",

RECORD := "ConfDB".ConfigControl["ConfDB".Option],

//Selection of control data record

ERROR => "conf_ERROR",

STATUS => "conf_STATUS");

UNTIL NOT "conf_BUSY"

END_REPEAT;

– In the graphical programming languages, you implement the loop using instructions for
program control.

Distributed I/O system

190 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU

Example in FBD: Use the LABEL (jump label) and JMP (jump at RLO=1) instructions
to program a loop.

Figure 10-5 WRREC

● The control data record is stored retentively in the CPU. Note:

– The retentivity of the control data record is independent of the retentivity settings in the
STEP 7 memory area. This means that the memory area in which the control data
record is configured does not have to be configured as retentive for this purpose.
– If you write a control data record with modified configuration, the original data record
196 is deleted and the new data record 196 is saved retentively. The CPU will then
restart with the modified configuration.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 191
Configuration control (option handling)
10.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU

Special aspects relating to the transfer of the control data record to the interface module
● If you have enabled configuration control, the ET 200SP station is not ready for operation
without a control data record. As long as no valid control data record has been
transferred, the I/O modules are considered as failed by the CPU and exhibit substitute
value behavior. The interface module continues to exchange data.
● The control data record is stored retentively in the interface module. Note:
– If there have been no changes to the configuration, you do not need to rewrite the
control data record 196 during restart.
– If you write a control data record with modified configuration to the interface module, it
will result in a station failure in the distributed I/O system. The original data record 196
is deleted and the new data record 196 is saved retentively. The station will then
restart with the modified configuration.

Distributed I/O system

192 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.4 Behavior during operation

10.4 Behavior during operation

Effect of discrepancy between station master and station option

For the online display and for the display in the diagnostics buffer (module OK or module
faulty), the station master is always used and not the differing station option.
Example: A module supplies diagnostic information. This module is configured in slot 4 in the
station master, but is inserted in slot 3 in the station option (missing module; see example in
the next section). The online view (station master) shows a faulty module in slot 4. In the real
configuration, the module in slot 3 indicates an error via an LED display.

Response when modules are missing

If modules are entered as not present in the control data record, the automation system
behaves as follows:
● Modules designated as not present in the control data record do not supply diagnostics
and their status is always OK. The value status is OK.
● Direct write access to the outputs that are not present or write access to the process
image of the outputs that are not present: Remains without effect; no access error is
signaled.
● Direct read access to the inputs that are not present or read access to the process image
of the inputs that are not present: Value "0" is supplied; no access error is signaled.
● Write data record to module that is not present: Remains without effect; no error is
signaled.
● Read data record from module that is not present: An error is signaled because a valid
data record cannot be returned.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 193
Configuration control (option handling)
10.5 Examples of configuration control

10.5 Examples of configuration control

A station master consisting of an interface module, three I/O modules and the server module
is configured in STEP 7 in the following section.
Four station options are derived from the station master with the configuration control:
● Station option 1 with module that is not present
● Station option 2 with modified order of modules
● Station option 3 with empty slot
● Station option 4: Opening a new potential group

Distributed I/O system

194 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.5 Examples of configuration control

Station option 1 with module that is not present

The module that is located in slot 3 in the station master is not present in the station option 1.
Slot 3 must be designated in the control data record accordingly with 0 (= not present). The
server module is located in slot 3 in the station option.

Figure 10-6 Example: Hardware configuration of station option 1 with the associated control data
record in STEP 7

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 195
Configuration control (option handling)
10.5 Examples of configuration control

Station option 2 with modified order of modules

The order of the modules at slots 2 and 3 is interchanged.

Figure 10-7 Example: Hardware configuration of station option 2 with the associated control data
record in STEP 7

Distributed I/O system

196 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Configuration control (option handling)
10.5 Examples of configuration control

Station option 3 with empty slot

The module that is located in slot 3 in the station master occupies an empty slot with
BU cover in the station option. Enter the value 130 in slot 3 in the control data record.

Figure 10-8 Example: Hardware configuration of station option 3 with the associated control data
record in STEP 7

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 197
Configuration control (option handling)
10.5 Examples of configuration control

Station option 4: Opening a new potential group

A new potential group is opened at slot 3 of station option 4. Compared to the station master,
a dark-colored BaseUnit is replaced by a light-colored BaseUnit. Enter the value 1 as
additional function.

Figure 10-9 Example: Hardware configuration of station option 4 with the associated control data
record in STEP 7

Distributed I/O system

198 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
Commissioning 11
11.1 Overview

Introduction
This section includes information on the following topics:
● Commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system on the PROFINET IO
● Commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system on the PROFIBUS DP
● Startup of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with empty slots
● Removing/inserting the SIMATIC memory card
● Operating modes of the CPU
● CPU memory reset
● Reassigning parameters during operation
● Identification and maintenance data

Commissioning requirements

Note
Performing tests
You must ensure the safety of your plant. You therefore need to run a complete functional
test and make the necessary safety checks before the final commissioning of a plant.
Also allow for any possible foreseeable errors in the tests. This avoids endangering persons
or equipment during operation.

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the system network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/67460624).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 199
Commissioning
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance
activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of
the TIA Portal.
General function overview:
● Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network.
● Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device
● Loading addresses (IP, subnet, gateway) into a device
● Loading the PROFINET name (station name) into a device name
● Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode
● Setting the time in a CPU to the current time of your programming device/PC
● Downloading a new program to a CPU or an HMI device
● Downloading from CPU, downloading to CPU or deleting recipe data from a CPU
● Downloading from CPU or deleting data log data from a CPU
● Backup/restore of data from/to a backup file for CPUs and HMI devices
● Downloading service data from a CPU
● Reading the diagnostics buffer of a CPU
● General reset of a CPU's memory
● Resetting devices to factory settings
● Downloading a firmware update to a device
● ...
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/98161300).

11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO

Requirements
● The CPU/interface module is in the "Factory settings" status or has been reset to factory
settings (see section Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300)).
● For CPU: The SIMATIC memory card is as delivered or has been formatted.

Distributed I/O system

200 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO

11.2.1 ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller

Configuration example
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an IO controller, you require the
CPU 151xSP-1 PN.

Figure 11-1 ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller

Commissioning procedure
To commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system CPU as an IO controller for
PROFINET IO, we recommend the following procedure:

Table 11- 1 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller for PROFINET IO

Step Procedure See ...

1 Installing ET 200SP Section Installation (Page 64)
2 Connecting ET 200SP Section Wiring (Page 87)
• Supply voltages
• PROFINET IO
• Sensors and actuators
3 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the Section Removing/inserting a
IO controller SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
(Page 213)
4 Configuring the IO controller1 Section Configuring (Page 134)
5 Checking the protective measures -

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 201
Commissioning
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO

Step Procedure See ...

6 Switching on supply voltages for the IO controller CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
7 Switching on supply voltages for IO devices Documentation of the IO device
8 Downloading the configuration to the IO controller STEP 7 online help
9 Switching IO controller to RUN mode CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
10 Checking LEDs CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
11 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful:
Monitoring and modifying tags,
testing with program status, forc-
ing, controlling the outputs. See
section Test functions and elimi-
nating problems (Page 273)
1 The IO devices are configured with the IO controller.

Distributed I/O system

202 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO

11.2.2 ET 200SP CPU as an I-device

Configuration example
You need the CPU 151xSP-1 PN to use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an I-device.

Figure 11-2 ET 200SP CPU as an I-device

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 203
Commissioning
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO

Commissioning procedure
For commissioning of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an I-device on the
PROFINET IO, we recommend the following procedure:

Table 11- 2 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as an I-device on the PROFINET IO

Step Procedure See ...

1 Installing ET 200SP Section Installation (Page 64)
2 Connecting ET 200SP Section Wiring (Page 87)
• Supply voltages
• PROFINET IO
• Sensors and actuators
3 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the I-device Section Removing/inserting a
SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
(Page 213)
4 Configuring the I-device Section Configuring (Page 134)
5 Checking the protective measures -
6 Switching on supply voltages for the IO controller Documentation of the IO controller
7 Switching on supply voltages for I-device and IO CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
devices (http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual and documentation of
the IO devices
8 Download configuration to the I-device STEP 7 online help
9 Switching IO controller and I-device to RUN Documentation of the IO controller
mode and CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
10 Checking LEDs CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
11 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful:
Monitoring and modifying tags,
testing with program status, forc-
ing, controlling the outputs. See
section Test functions and elimi-
nating problems (Page 273)

Distributed I/O system

204 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO

11.2.3 ET 200SP as an IO device

Configuration example
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an IO device, you need the IM 155-6 PNxx
interface module.

Figure 11-3 ET 200SP as an IO device

Commissioning procedure
For commissioning of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an IO device on the
PROFINET IO, we recommend the following procedure:

Table 11- 3 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as an IO device for PROFINET IO

Step Procedure See ...

1 Installing ET 200SP Section Installation (Page 64)
2 Connecting ET 200SP Section Wiring (Page 87)
• Supply voltages
• PROFINET IO
• Sensors and actuators
4 Configuring IO controller Documentation of the IO controller
5 Checking the protective measures -
6 Switching on supply voltages for the IO controller Documentation of the IO controller
7 Switching on supply voltages for IO devices Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/55683316/1333
00) Manual
8 Downloading the configuration to the IO controller STEP 7 online help
9 Switching IO controller to RUN mode Documentation of the IO controller

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 205
Commissioning
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO

Step Procedure See ...

10 Checking LEDs Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/55683316/1333
00) Manual
11 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful:
Monitoring and modifying tags,
testing with program status, forc-
ing, controlling the outputs. Refer
to section Test functions and elimi-
nating problems (Page 273)

Distributed I/O system

206 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP

11.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP

Requirements
● The CPU/interface module is in the "Factory settings" status or has been reset to factory
settings (see section Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300)).
● For CPU: The SIMATIC memory card is as delivered or has been formatted.

11.3.1 ET 200SP as a DP master

Configuration example
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP master, you need the
CPU 151xSP-1 PN and the CM DP communication module.

Figure 11-4 ET 200SP as a DP master

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 207
Commissioning
11.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning procedure
To commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP master on PROFIBUS DP, we
recommend the following procedure:

Table 11- 4 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as a DP master on the PROFIBUS DP

Step Procedure See ...

1 Installing ET 200SP (with CPU and CM DP) Section Installation (Page 64)
2 Connecting ET 200SP Section Wiring (Page 87)
• Supply voltages
• PROFIBUS DP
• Sensors and actuators
3 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the Section Removing/inserting a
DP master (CPU) SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
(Page 213)
4 Configuring DP master (including PROFIBUS CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
address) (http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) and CM DP manual
5 Switching on supply voltages for DP master CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
6 Switching on supply voltages for DP slaves Documentation of the DP slave
7 Download configuration to the DP master STEP 7 online help
8 Switching DP master to RUN CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
9 Checking LEDs CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
10 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful:
Monitoring and modifying tags,
testing with program status, forc-
ing, controlling the outputs. See
section Test functions and elimi-
nating problems (Page 273)

Distributed I/O system

208 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP

11.3.2 ET 200SP as I-slave

Configuration example
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as I-slave, you need the CPU 151xSP-1 PN and
the CM DP communication module.

Figure 11-5 ET 200SP as I-slave

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 209
Commissioning
11.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning procedure
For commissioning of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an I-slave on the
PROFIBUS DP, we recommend the following procedure:

Table 11- 5 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as an I-slave for PROFIBUS DP

Step Procedure See ...

1 Installing ET 200SP (with CPU and CM DP) Section Installation (Page 64)
2 Connecting ET 200SP Section Wiring (Page 87)
• Supply voltages
• PROFIBUS DP
• Sensors and actuators
3 Configuring DP master (including PROFIBUS Documentation of the DP master
address)
4 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the I-slave Section Removing/inserting a
(CPU) SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
(Page 213)
5 Configuring I-slave (including PROFIBUS ad- CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
dress) (http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) and CM DP manual
6 Switching on supply voltages for DP master Documentation of the DP master
7 Switching on supply voltages for I-slaves CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
8 Loading configuration in the DP master and STEP 7 online help
I-slaves
9 Switching DP master and I-slaves to RUN Documentation of the DP master
and CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
10 Checking LEDs CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
11 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful:
Monitoring and modifying tags,
testing with program status, forc-
ing, controlling the outputs. See
the Test functions and fault resolu-
tion
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) section

Distributed I/O system

210 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP

11.3.3 ET 200SP as a DP slave

Configuration example
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP slave, you need the IM 155-6 DP HF.

Figure 11-6 ET 200SP as a DP slave

Commissioning procedure
To commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP slave on PROFIBUS DP, we
recommend the following procedure:

Table 11- 6 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as a DP master for PROFIBUS DP

Step Procedure See ...

1 Installing ET 200SP (with IM 155-6 DP HF) Section Installation (Page 64)
2 Setting the PROFIBUS address on the interface Section Interface module
module (http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/55683316/1333
00)
3 Connecting ET 200SP Section Wiring (Page 87)
• Supply voltages
• PROFIBUS DP
• Sensors and actuators
4 Configuring DP master (including PROFIBUS Documentation of the DP master
address)
5 Switching on supply voltages for DP master Documentation of the DP master
6 Switching on supply voltages for DP slaves Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/55683316/1333
00) Manual
7 Download configuration to the DP master STEP 7 online help

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 211
Commissioning
11.4 Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots

Step Procedure See ...

8 Switching DP master to RUN Documentation of the DP master
9 Checking LEDs Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/55683316/1333
00) Manual
10 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful:
Monitoring and modifying tags,
testing with program status, forc-
ing, controlling the outputs. Refer
to section Test functions and elimi-
nating problems (Page 273)

11.4 Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots

Procedure
You can configure the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with any number of empty slots.
To build the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with any number of empty slots, follow these
steps:
1. Cover all empty slots with BU covers.
2. Finish the configuration with a server module.
Special consideration: A "Module missing in slot x" diagnostic message is generated by the
CPU/interface module for empty slots in which I/O modules are configured.

Distributed I/O system

212 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.5 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU

11.5 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU

Requirement
The CPU only supports pre-formatted SIMATIC memory cards. If necessary, delete all
previously stored data before using the SIMATIC memory card. Additional information about
deleting the contents of the SIMATIC memory card can be found in the section, SIMATIC
memory card - overview (Page 240).
In order to work with the SIMATIC memory card, first ensure that the SIMATIC memory card
is not write-protected. If it is, move the slider out of the lock position.

Inserting the SIMATIC memory card

To insert a SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Ensure that the CPU is either switched off or in STOP mode.
2. Insert the SIMATIC memory card, as depicted on the CPU, into the slot for the SIMATIC
memory card.

Figure 11-7 Slot for the SIMATIC memory card

3. Insert the SIMATIC memory card with light pressure into the CPU, until the SIMATIC
memory card latches.

Removal of the SIMATIC memory card

To remove a SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Switch the CPU to STOP mode.
2. Press the SIMATIC memory card into the CPU with light pressure. After audible
unlatching of the SIMATIC memory card, remove it.
Only remove the SIMATIC memory card in POWER OFF or STOP mode of the CPU. Ensure
that no writing functions (online functions with the programming device, e.g. loading/deleting
a block, test functions) are active in STOP mode or were active before POWER OFF.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 213
Commissioning
11.6 Operating modes of the CPU

Reactions after removing/inserting the SIMATIC memory card

Inserting and removing the SIMATIC memory card in STOP, STARTUP or RUN mode
triggers a re-evaluation of the SIMATIC memory card. The CPU hereby compares the
content of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card with the backed-up retentive data.
If the backed-up retentive data matches the data of the configuration on the SIMATIC
memory card, the retentive data is retained. If the data differs, the CPU automatically
performs a memory reset (which means the retentive data is deleted) and then goes to
STOP.
The CPU evaluates the SIMATIC memory card, and this is indicated by the RUN/STOP LED
flashing.

Reference
Additional information on the SIMATIC memory card can be found in the SIMATIC memory
card (Page 240) section.

11.6 Operating modes of the CPU

Introduction
Operating modes describe the status of the CPU. The following operating modes are
possible using the mode selector:
● STARTUP
● RUN
● STOP
In these operating modes, the CPU can communicate, for example, via the PROFINET
interface.
The status LEDs on the front of the CPU indicate the current operating mode.

11.6.1 STARTUP mode

Function
Before the CPU starts to execute the cyclic user program, a startup program is executed.
By suitably programming startup OBs, you can specify initialization tags for your cyclic
program in the startup program. You have the option of programming no, one or several
startup OBs.

Distributed I/O system

214 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.6 Operating modes of the CPU

Special features during startup

Note the following points regarding the STARTUP mode:
● All outputs are disabled or react according to the parameter settings for the particular I/O
module: They provide a substitute value as set in the parameters or retain the last value
output and bring the controlled process to a safe operational status.
● The process image is initialized.
The process image is not updated.
In order to read the current state from inputs during STARTUP, you can access inputs
directly via I/O access.
In order to initialize outputs during STARTUP, values can be written via the process
image or via direct I/O access. The values are output at the outputs during the transition
to the RUN mode.
● The CPU always starts up in warm restart mode.
– The non-retentive bit memory, timers and counters are initialized.
– The non-retentive tags in data blocks are initialized.
● During startup, cycle time monitoring is not yet running
● The startup OBs are executed in the order of the startup OB numbers. All startup OBs
that you have programmed are executed, regardless of the selected startup mode.
● The following OBs can be started during startup, if a corresponding event occurs:
– OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt
– OB 83: Pull/plug interrupt for modules
– OB 86: Rack error
– OB 121: Programming error (only for global error handling)
– OB 122: I/O access error (only for global error handling)
You can find a description of how to use global and local error handling in the STEP 7
online help.
No other OBs can be started until after the transition to RUN mode.

Response when expected and actual configurations do not match

The configuration downloaded to the CPU represents the expected configuration. The actual
configuration is the actual configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. If the
expected configuration and the actual configuration do not match, the setting of the
"Comparison preset to actual configuration" parameter determines the reaction of the CPU
(see section Operating mode transitions (Page 218)).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 215
Commissioning
11.6 Operating modes of the CPU

Canceling a startup
If errors occur during startup, the CPU cancels the startup and returns to STOP mode.
The CPU does not execute a startup or cancels a startup under the following conditions:
● If no SIMATIC memory card is inserted or an invalid SIMATIC memory card is inserted.
● If no hardware configuration has been downloaded.

Setting the startup behavior

To set the startup behavior, follow these steps:
1. In the device view of the STEP 7 hardware network editor, select the CPU.
2. In the properties under "General" select the "Startup" area.

Figure 11-8 Setting the startup behavior

① Sets the startup type after POWER ON

② Defines the startup behavior when a module in a slot does not correspond to the config-
ured module. You can set this parameter centrally, on the CPU or for each module.
When you change the setting for a module, the setting made centrally for this module no
longer applies.
• Startup CPU only if compatible: In this setting a module on a configured slot has to be
compatible with the configured module. Compatible means that the module matches
in terms of the number of inputs and outputs and with respect to its electrical and
functional properties.
• Startup CPU even if mismatch: With this setting the CPU starts up regardless of the
type of module plugged in.
③ Specifies a maximum period (default: 60000 ms) in which the I/O must be ready for op-
eration. The CPU changes to RUN.
If the central and distributed I/O is not ready for operation within the configuration time,
the startup characteristics of the CPU depends on the setting of the "Comparison preset
to actual configuration" parameter.

Distributed I/O system

216 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.6 Operating modes of the CPU

Example for the "Comparison preset to actual configuration" parameter

"Startup CPU only if compatible":
The input module DI 16x24VDC ST with 16 digital inputs is a compatible replacement for the
input module DI 8x24VDC ST with 8 digital inputs, because the pin assignment and all the
electrical and functional properties match.
"Startup CPU even if mismatch":
Instead of a configured digital input module, you insert an analog output module or no
module is present in this slot and thus in all subsequent slots. Although the configured inputs
cannot be accessed, the CPU starts up.
Note that the user program cannot function correctly in this case and take the appropriate
measures.

11.6.2 STOP mode

Function
The CPU does not execute the user program in STOP mode.
All outputs are disabled or react according to the parameter settings for the particular I/O
module: They provide a substitute value as set in the parameters or retain the last value
output keeping the controlled process in a safe operating status.
In STOP mode, the motor starter responds according to how it was parameterized for the
CPU STOP state. The CPU STOP state can be circumvented with the manual local control
(Local Control) function. If the CPU is switched off, a motor can be switched on in the motor
starter's commissioning mode.
You will find additional information in the Motor starter
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973) manual.

11.6.3 RUN mode

Function
In "RUN" mode the cyclic, time-driven, and interrupt-driven program is executed. Addresses
that are in the "Automatic Update" process image are automatically updated in each program
cycle. See also the section Process images and process image partitions (Page 142).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 217
Commissioning
11.6 Operating modes of the CPU

Execution of the user program

Once the CPU has read the inputs, the cyclic program is executed from the first instruction to
the last instruction.
If you have configured a minimum cycle time, the CPU will not end the cycle until this
minimum cycle time is finished even if the user program is completed sooner.
A cycle monitoring time is set to ensure that the cyclic program is completed within a
specified time. You can change the cycle monitoring time to suit your requirements. If the
cyclic program has not finished running within this time, the system responds with a time
error.
Further events such as hardware interrupts and diagnostics interrupts can interrupt the cyclic
program flow and prolong the cycle time.

Reference
Further information about cycle and response times is available in the Function Manual
Cycle and response times (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193558).

11.6.4 Operating mode transitions

Operating modes and operating mode transitions

The following figure shows the operating modes and the operating mode transitions:

Figure 11-9 Operating modes and operating mode transitions

Distributed I/O system

218 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.6 Operating modes of the CPU

The table below shows the effects of the operating mode transitions:

Table 11- 7 Operating mode transitions

No. Operating mode transitions Effects

① POWER ON → After switching on, the CPU switches to "STARTUP" The CPU clears the non-retentive
STARTUP mode if: memory, and resets the content
of non-retentive DBs to the start
• The hardware configuration and program blocks are
values of the load memory. Re-
consistent.
tentive memory and retentive DB
• Startup type "Warm restart - RUN" is set. contents are retained.
Or The 500 newest entries in the
diagnostics buffer are retained.
• Startup type "Warm restart mode before POWER
OFF" is set and the CPU was in RUN mode before
POWER OFF.

② POWER ON → After switching on, the CPU goes to "STOP" mode if: The CPU clears the non-retentive
STOP memory, and resets the content
• The hardware configuration and program blocks are
of non-retentive DBs to the start
inconsistent.
values of the load memory. Re-
Or tentive memory and retentive DB
contents are retained.
• The "No restart" startup type is set.
The 500 newest entries in the
Or diagnostics buffer are retained.
• Startup type "Warm restart mode before POWER
OFF" is set and the CPU was in STOP mode before
POWER OFF.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 219
Commissioning
11.6 Operating modes of the CPU

No. Operating mode transitions Effects

③ STOP → STARTUP The CPU switches to "STARTUP" mode if: The CPU clears the non-retentive
memory, and resets the content
• The hardware configuration and program blocks are
of non-retentive DBs to the start
consistent.
values of the load memory. Re-
• You set the CPU to "RUN" mode via the program- tentive memory and retentive DB
ming device and the mode switch in is RUN contents are retained.
position. The 500 newest entries in the
diagnostics buffer are retained.
Or
• You set the mode switch from STOP to RUN.

④ STARTUP → STOP The CPU returns to the "STOP" mode in the following These operating mode transitions
cases of "STARTUP": have no effect on data.
• The CPU detects an error during startup.
• You set the CPU to "STOP" via the programming
device or mode switch.
• The CPU executes a STOP command in the
Startup OB.

⑤ STARTUP → RUN The CPU goes to the "RUN" mode in the following
cases of "START-UP":
• The CPU has initialized the PLC tags.
• The CPU has executed the startup blocks
successfully.

⑥ RUN → STOP The CPU returns to the "STOP" mode in the following
cases of "RUN":
• The CPU detects an error which prevents further
work.
• The CPU executes a STOP command in the user
program.
• You set the CPU to "STOP" via the programming
device or mode switch.

Distributed I/O system

220 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.7 CPU memory reset

11.7 CPU memory reset

Basics of a memory reset

A memory reset on the CPU is possible only in the STOP mode.

When memory is reset, the CPU is changed to a so-called "initial status".
This means that:
● An existing online connection between your programming device/PC and the CPU is
terminated.
● The content of the work memory and the retentive and non-retentive data (applies only to
manual memory reset by the user) are deleted.
● The diagnostics buffer, time of day, IP address and the device name are retained.
● Subsequently the CPU is initialized with the loaded project data (hardware configuration,
code and data blocks, force jobs). The CPU copies this data from the load memory to the
work memory.
Result:
– If you set an IP address in the hardware configuration ("Set IP address in the project"
option) and a SIMATIC memory card with the project is in the CPU, this IP address is
valid after the memory reset.
– Data blocks no longer have current values but rather their configured start values.
– Force jobs remain active.

How can I tell if the CPU is performing a memory reset?

The RUN/STOP LED flashes yellow at 2 Hz. After completion the CPU goes into STOP
mode, and the RUN/STOP LED is switched on (permanently lit yellow).

Result after memory reset

The following table provides an overview of the contents of the memory objects after
memory reset.

Table 11- 8 Result after memory reset

Memory object Content

Actual values of the data blocks, instance data blocks Initialized
Bit memory, timers and counters Initialized
Retentive tags from technology objects Retained
(for example, adjustment values of absolute encoders)*
Diagnostics buffer entries Retained
IP address Retained
Device name Retained
Counter readings of the runtime meters Retained
Time of day Retained

* The retentive tags from technology objects are retained but the content of specific tags is partly re-
initialized.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 221
Commissioning
11.7 CPU memory reset

11.7.1 Automatic memory reset

Possible cause of an automatic memory reset

The CPU executes an automatic memory reset if an error occurs that prevents normal
further processing.
Causes for such errors can be:
● User program is too large, and cannot be completely loaded into work memory.
● The project data on the SIMATIC memory card is corrupt, for example, because a file was
deleted.
● If you remove or insert the SIMATIC memory card and the backed-up retentive data
differs in structure from that of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card.

11.7.2 Manual memory reset

Reason for a manual memory reset

CPU memory reset is required to reset the CPU to its "original state".

CPU memory reset

There are two options for performing a CPU memory reset:
● Using the mode selector
● Using STEP 7

Procedure using the mode selector

Note
Memory reset ↔ Reset to factory settings
The operation described below also reflects the procedure for resetting to factory settings:
• Selector operation with inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes a memory reset
• Selector operation without inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes reset to factory
settings

Distributed I/O system

222 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.7 CPU memory reset

To reset the CPU memory using the mode selector, proceed as follows:
1. Set the mode selector to the STOP position.
Result: The RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow.
2. Set the mode selector to the MRES position. Hold the selector in this position until the
RUN/STOP LED lights up for the 2nd time and remains continuously lit (this takes three
seconds). After this, release the switch.
3. Within the next three seconds, switch the mode selector back to the MRES position, and
then back to STOP again.
Result: The CPU executes memory reset.
For information on resetting the CPU to factory settings, refer to the section Resetting the
CPU to factory settings (Page 264).

Procedure using STEP 7

For a memory reset of the CPU using STEP 7 proceed as follows:
1. Open the "Online Tools" task card of the CPU.
2. Click the "MRES" button in the "CPU control panel" pane.
3. Click "OK" in response to the confirmation prompt.
Result: The CPU switches to STOP mode and performs a memory reset.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 223
Commissioning
11.8 Reassigning parameters during operation

11.8 Reassigning parameters during operation

Introduction
You have the option of reassigning the parameters for the ET 200SP I/O modules during
operation.

Changing parameters during operation

You make the parameter settings of the I/O modules using data records. Each I/O module
has a separate data record. The instruction "WRREC" applies the changed parameters to
the I/O module.
If you are using the CPU as an I-device, you reassign the parameters of the I/O modules via
the I-device.

Note
If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make
sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can evaluate OB83 for this
purpose. After inserting a module, the CPU does not call OB83 until the module has started
up and its parameters are assigned. This ensures the execution of the data record
operations without errors.

Note
You need to transfer the new parameters with the "WRREC" instruction after a POWER
OFF/POWER ON of the ET 200SP.

Instruction for parameter assignment

The following instruction is provided for assigning parameters to the I/O module in the user
program:

Instruction Application
"WRREC" Transfer the modifiable parameters to the addressed ET 200SP module.

Error message
In the event of an error, the following return values are reported:

Table 11- 9 Error message

Error code Meaning

80E0H Error in header information
80E1H Parameter error

Reference
You will find the setup of the parameter data record in the manuals of the I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/55679691/133300).

Distributed I/O system

224 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.9 Identification and maintenance data

11.9 Identification and maintenance data

11.9.1 Reading out and entering I&M data

I&M data
I&M identification data is information which is stored on the module either as read-only data
(I-data) or read/write data (M-data).
Identification data (I&M0): Manufacturer information about the module that can only be read
and is in part also printed on the housing of the module, for example, article number and
serial number.
Maintenance data (I&M1, 2, 3): Plant-dependent information, e.g. installation location.
Maintenance data is created during configuration and written to the module.
All modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system support identification data (I&M0 to
I&M3).
The I&M identification data supports you in the following activities:
● Checking the plant configuration
● Locating hardware changes in a plant
● Correcting errors in a plant
Modules can be clearly identified online using the I&M identification data.
STEP 7 allows you to read the identification I&M data (see STEP 7 online help).

Note
The BusAdapter and the interface module IM 155-6 PN HF support the identification data
I&M0 to I&M4 (signature).

Options for reading out I&M data

● Via the user program
● Via STEP 7 or HMI devices
● Via the CPU web server

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 225
Commissioning
11.9 Identification and maintenance data

Procedure for reading I&M data by means of the user program

You have the following options to read the modules' I&M data in the user program:
● using the RDREC instruction
The record structure for distributed modules that are accessible via
PROFINET IO/PROFIBUS DP, is described in the chapter Record structure for I&M data
(Page 227).
● using the Get_IM_Data instruction

Reference
The description of the instructions can be found in the STEP 7 online help.

Procedure for reading the I&M data via STEP 7

Requirements: There must be an online connection to the CPU/interface module.
To read I&M data using STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. In the project tree, under "Distributed I/O" select the IO device IM 155-6 PN ST (for
example).
2. Select > IO device > Online & diagnostics > Identification & Maintenance.

Procedure for entering maintenance data via STEP 7

STEP 7 assigns a default module name. You can enter the following information:
● Plant designation (I&M1)
● Location identifier (I&M1)
● Installation date (I&M2)
● Additional information (I&M3)
To enter maintenance data via STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. In the device view of the STEP 7 hardware network editor, select the interface module, for
example.
2. In the properties under "General", select the "Identification & Maintenance" area and
enter the data.
During the loading of the hardware configuration, the I&M data is also loaded.

Procedure for reading I&M data via the Web server

The procedure is described in detail in the Web server
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) Function Manual.

Distributed I/O system

226 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.9 Identification and maintenance data

11.9.2 Data record structure for I&M data

Reading I&M data records (distributed via PROFINET IO)

You can directly access specific identification data by selecting Read data record (RDREC
instruction). You obtain the corresponding part of the identification data under the relevant
data record index.
The data records are structured as follows:

Table 11- 10 Basic structure of data records with I&M identification data

Content Length (bytes) Coding (hex)

Header information
BlockType 2 I&M0: 0020H
I&M1: 0021H
I&M2: 0022H
I&M3: 0023H
BlockLength 2 I&M0: 0038H
I&M1: 0038H
I&M2: 0012H
I&M3: 0038H
BlockVersionHigh 1 01
BlockVersionLow 1 00
Identification data
Identification data I&M0/index AFF0H: 54
(see table below) I&M1/index AFF1H: 54
I&M2/index AFF2H: 16
I&M3/index AFF3H: 54

Table 11- 11 Data record structure for I&M identification data

Identification data Access Default Explanation

Identification data 0: (data record index AFF0 hex)
VendorIDHigh Read (1 byte) 00H This is where the name of the manufac-
VendorIDLow Read (1 byte) 2 AH turer is stored (42D = SIEMENS AG).
Order_ID Read (20 bytes) 6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0 Article number of the module (e.g. of the
interface module)
IM_SERIAL_NUMBER Read (16 bytes) - Serial number (device-specific)
IM_HARDWARE_REVISION Read (2 bytes) 1 Corresponding HW version
IM_SOFTWARE_REVISION Read Firmware version Provides information about the firmware
(1 byte) V version of the module
• SWRevisionPrefix

• IM_SWRevision_Functional_ (1 byte) 00 - FFH

Enhancement

• IM_SWRevision_Bug_Fix (1 byte) 00 - FFH

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 227
Commissioning
11.9 Identification and maintenance data

Identification data Access Default Explanation

• IM_SWRevision_Internal_ (1 byte) 00 - FFH
Change
IM_REVISION_COUNTER Read (2 bytes) 0000H Provides information about parameter
changes on the module
(not used)
IM_PROFILE_ID Read (2 bytes) 0000H Generic Device
IM_PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE Read (2 bytes) 0005H Interface modules/BusAdapters
0003H I/O modules and motor starters
0001H CPU
IM_VERSION Read 0101H Provides information on the version of
(1 byte) the identification data
• IM_Version_Major
(0101H = Version 1.1)
• IM_Version_Minor (1 byte)

IM_SUPPORTED Read (2 bytes) 000EH Provides information about the available

identification data (I&M1 to I&M3)
Maintenance data 1: (data record index AFF1 hex)
IM_TAG_FUNCTION Read/write (32 - Enter a module identifier here that is
bytes) unique plant-wide.
IM_TAG_LOCATION Read/write (22 - Enter the installation location of the mod-
bytes) ule here.
Maintenance data 2: (data record index AFF2 hex)
IM_DATE Read/write (16 YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM Enter the installation date of the module
bytes) here.
Maintenance data 3: (data record index AFF3 hex)
IM_DESCRIPTOR Read/write (54 - Enter a comment describing the module.
bytes)

Reading I&M data records with data record 255 (distributed via PROFIBUS DP)
The modules support standardized access to identification data via DS 255 (index 65000 to
65003). For further information on the DS 255 data structure, refer to the specifications of the
Profile Guidelines Part 1: Identification & Maintenance Functions, Order No.: 3.502,
Version 2.1, May 2016

Distributed I/O system

228 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.9 Identification and maintenance data

11.9.3 Example: Read out firmware version of the CPU with Get_IM_Data

Automation task
You want to check whether the modules in your automation system have the current
firmware. The firmware version of the modules can be found in the I&M 0 data. The IM 0
data are the basic information of a device and contain information such as the manufacturer
ID, order number, serial number and the hardware and firmware version.
To read out the I&M 0 data, use the "Get_IM_Data" instruction. You read the I&M 0 data of
all the modules in the user program of the CPU via "Get_IM_Data" instructions and store
them in a data block.

Conditions and parameters

To read out the I&M data of the CPU, use the following block parameters of the
"Get_IM_Data" instruction:
● LADDR: Enter the HW ID of the module at the block parameter "LADDR".
● IM_TYPE: Enter the I&M data number (e.g. "0" for I&M 0 data) at the "IM_TYPE" block
parameter.
● DATA: Area for storing the read I&M data (for example. in a global data block). Store the
I&M 0 data in an area of the data type "IM0_Data".
This example shows you how to read out the I&M 0 data of an ET 200SP CPU. To read out
the I&M 0 data of a different module, simply use the HW ID of the module at the parameter
LADDR.

Solution
To read out the I&M 0 data of the CPU, follow these steps:
1. Create a global data block to store the I&M 0 data.
2. Create a structure of the data type "IM0_Data" in the global data block. You can assign
any name to the structure ("imData") in this case.

Figure 11-10 Example: Data block for I&M data

3. Create the "Get_IM_Data" instruction in the user program, e.g. in OB 1.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 229
Commissioning
11.9 Identification and maintenance data

4. Connect the "Get_IM_Data" instruction as follows:

Figure 11-11 Example: Calling the "Get_IM_Data" instruction

5. Call the "Get_IM_Data" instruction in the user program.

Result
The "Get_IM_Data" instruction has stored the I&M 0 data in the data block.
You can view the I&M 0 data online in STEP 7, for example, in the data block with the
"Monitor all" button. The CPU in the example is a 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AK0)
with the firmware version V2.5.

Figure 11-12 Example: I&M 0 data of an ET 200SP CPU

Distributed I/O system

230 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.10 Shared commissioning of projects

11.10 Shared commissioning of projects

Team Engineering
In Team Engineering several users from various engineering systems work on a project at
the same time and access one ET 200SP CPU.
The users can edit separate parts of a master project independently of one another at the
same time. The changes of the other editors are displayed in a synchronization dialog during
the loading of the configuration in the CPU and synchronized automatically, if possible.
Certain online functions can also be executed at the same time from several engineering
systems on a shared CPU, such as:
● Monitoring blocks on the CPU
● Modifying blocks on the CPU
● Trace functions
You can find detailed information on the topic of Team Engineering in the STEP 7 online
help.

11.11 Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration

11.11.1 Overview

Backup from online device

You will make a number of changes to your plant over time, for example, add new devices,
replace existing devices or adapt the user program. If these changes result in undesirable
behavior, you can restore the plant to an earlier state. Before you load a changed
configuration to the CPU, first use the option "Backup from online device" to create a
complete backup of the current device status.

Upload from device (software)

With the option "Upload from device (software)", you load the software project data from the
CPU to an existing CPU in the project.

Upload device as new station

If you are operating a new programming device/PC in the plant, the STEP 7 project that was
used to create the plant configuration might not be available. In this case you can use the
option "Upload device as new station" to load the device's data into a project in your PG/PC.

Snapshot of the monitor values

You can use the option "Snapshot of the monitor values" to backup the current values of the
data block, in order to be able to restore the current values if necessary at a later date.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 231
Commissioning
11.11 Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration

Overview of backup types

The table below shows the backup of CPU data depending on the selected type of backup
and its specific characteristics:

Backup from online Upload from device Upload device as Snapshot of the
device (software) new station monitor values
Current values of all DBs ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(global and instance data blocks) 1)
Blocks of the type OB, FC, FB and ✓ ✓ ✓ --
DB
PLC tags ✓ ✓ ✓ --
(tag names and constant names)
Technology objects ✓ ✓ ✓ --
Hardware configuration ✓ -- ✓ --
Actual values (bit memories, tim- ✓ -- -- --
ers, counters)*
Contents of the SIMATIC memory ✓ -- -- --
card
Archives, recipes ✓ -- -- --
Entries in the diagnostics buffer -- -- -- --
Current time -- -- -- --
Properties of the type of backup
Backup possible for fail-safe CPUs ✓ ✓ 2) -- ✓
Backup can be edited -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Backup possible in operating mode STOP RUN, STOP RUN, STOP RUN, STOP
1) Only the values of the tags that are set as retentive are saved.
2) Only possible in the STOP operating state and for individual fail-safe blocks.

Reference
You can find more information on the different backup types in the STEP 7 online help.

Distributed I/O system

232 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.11 Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration

Emergency address (emergency IP)

The emergency address (emergency IP address) of a CPU was conceived for diagnostic and
downloading functions, e.g. if the CPU can no longer be reached via the IP protocol due to
loading of an incorrect project. You can find information on the emergency address in the
following FAQ on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/97649773).

Archiving multilingual project texts

When you configure a CPU, different categories of texts come into being, e.g.
● Object names (names of blocks, modules, tags, etc.)
● Comments (for blocks, networks, watch tables, etc.)
● Messages and diagnostic texts
Texts are provided by the system (e.g. diagnostic buffer texts) or are created during
configuration (e.g. messages).
In a project, texts exist in one single language or in several languages after a translation
process. You can maintain project texts in all languages, which are at your disposal in the
project navigator (Languages & Resources > Project Texts). The texts arising during
configuration can be loaded into the CPU.
The following texts containing the project data are loaded into the CPU in the chosen
languages and are also used by the Web server:
● Diagnostic buffer texts (not editable)
● Module status texts (not editable)
● Message texts with associated text lists
● Tag comments and step comments for S7 GRAPH and PLC Code Viewer
● Comments in watch tables
The following texts containing the project languages are also loaded into the CPU in the
chosen languages, but are not used by the Web server:
● Comments in tag tables (for tags and constants)
● Comments in global data blocks
● Comments of elements in block interfaces of FBs, FCs, DBs and UDTs
● Network titles in data blocks that are written in ladder logic (LAD), function block diagram
(FBD) or statement list (STL)
● Block comments
● Network comments
● Comments of LAD and FBD elements

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 233
Commissioning
11.12 Time synchronization

The CPUs support archiving of multilingual project texts in up to three different project
languages. If the project texts belonging to a specific project language nevertheless exceed
the memory space reserved for them, it is not possible to load the project into the CPU. The
operation is canceled with a message indicating that not enough free storage space is
available. In such a case, take measures to reduce the required storage space, for example
by shortening comments.

Note
Size of the SIMATIC memory card
If the storage space needed to load projects exceeds the storage space available on the
SIMATIC memory card in use, loading into the CPU is canceled with an error message.
Therefore, make sure that there is enough available storage space on your SIMATIC
memory card for loading projects.

You will find information on reading out the storage space capacity utilization of the CPU and
the SIMATIC memory card in the Structure and use of the CPU memory
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/59193101/en) function manual.
You will find information on parameterization of multilingual project texts in STEP 7 in the
STEP 7 online help.

11.12 Time synchronization

NTP procedure
All CPUs are equipped with an internal clock. The clock always shows the time-of-day with a
resolution of 1 millisecond and the date including the day of the week. The time adjustment
for daylight saving time is also taken into account.
You can synchronize the time of the CPUs with an NTP server in NTP mode (NTP: Network
Time Protocol).
In NTP mode, the device sends time queries at regular intervals (in client mode) to the NTP
server in the subnet (LAN). Based on the replies from the server, the most reliable and most
accurate time is calculated and the time on the CPU is synchronized. The advantage of this
mode is that it allows the time to be synchronized across subnets. You can configure the IP
addresses of up to a maximum of four NTP servers. You address a communications
processor or an HMI device, for example, as sources for time synchronization via the IP
addresses.
The update interval defines the interval between the time queries (in seconds). The value of
the interval ranges between 10 seconds and one day. In NTP mode, it is generally UTC
(Universal Time Coordinated) that is transferred; this corresponds to GMT (Greenwich Mean
Time).

Distributed I/O system

234 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.12 Time synchronization

NTP server for the ET 200SP CPU

You can assign an ET 200SP CPU to up to 4 NTP servers.
In STEP 7 you enable the time synchronization in NTP mode. You can configure up to four
NTP servers for the ET 200SP CPU in STEP 7.
If you have enabled time synchronization via NTP for the CPU, then you can enter the IP
addresses of up to four NTP servers in the user program. For this, use the "T_CONFIG"
instruction.

Enabling time synchronization via NTP server

To enable the time synchronization for the ET 200SP CPU via NTP servers, follow these
steps:
1. In the Inspector window, navigate in the properties of the CPU to "General" > "PROFINET
interface" > Time synchronization".
2. Enable the option "Enable time synchronization via NTP server".

Configuring NTP server in STEP 7

To configure one or more NTP servers for the ET 200SP CPU, follow these steps:
1. In the Inspector window, navigate in the properties of the CPU to "General" > "PROFINET
interface" > Time synchronization".
2. Enter the IP addresses of up to four NTP servers at the parameters "Server 1" to "Server
4".
3. Set the interval of the time queries at the "Update interval" parameter. Set the update
interval to between 10 s and 86400 s.

Changing the IP addresses of the NTP servers with the "T_CONFIG" instruction
Requirements:
Before using the instruction you have to specify to the hardware configuration that the IP
address is assigned via the user program:
1. For this purpose, open the properties of the PROFINET interface in the device view.
2. Select the following option in the "Time synchronization" dialog: Select "Enable time
synchronization via NTP server" and specify the IP address of at least one NTP server.
T_CONFIG instruction:
You store the IP addresses for the NTP time synchronization at the CONF_DATA parameter
in the system data type.

Reference
For additional information on time synchronization in the automation environment, refer to
the following FAQ on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/86535497).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 235
Commissioning
11.12 Time synchronization

11.12.1 Example: Configuring and changing NTP server

Configuring time synchronization with your own NTP server

Automation task
You use your own server in your network. Your own server provides you with the following
advantages:
● Protection against unauthorized accesses from outside
● Every device that you synchronize with your own NTP server uses the same time.
You want to synchronize the ET 200SP CPU with this NTP server.

Conditions and parameters

You have your own NTP server in your network with the IP address 192.168.1.15.
They are located in STEP 7 in the Inspector window in the properties of the PROFINET
interface X1.

Solution
1. Navigate to "Properties > General > PROFINET interface > Time synchronization > NTP
mode".
2. For "Server 1" enter the IP address of the NTP server: 192.168.1.15.

Figure 11-13 Example: Configuring the NTP server

3. Download the hardware configuration to the CPU.

Result
The ET 200SP CPU synchronizes the time with the NTP server 192.168.1.15.

Distributed I/O system

236 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.12 Time synchronization

Changing the IP address of an NTP server in the user program

Automation task
You change the NTP server in your network. The new NTP server has the address
"192.168.1.10".
You want to change the IP address of the NTP server with which your ET 200SP CPU
synchronizes via the user program.
The example shows how you change the IP address of the NTP server to "192.168.1.10"via
the user program with the instruction "T_CONFIG".

Conditions and parameters

Requirements:
● You have enabled the option "Enable time synchronization via NTP server" for your CPU
in STEP 7.
● You have configured the following NTP servers in STEP 7: Server 1 "192.168.1.15"
To change the IP addressed for NTP servers, use the following block parameter of the
"T_CONFIG" instruction:
● Req: A positive edge at the block parameter "Req" starts a job of the "T_CONFIG"
instruction.
● Interface: Enter the hardware identifier of the PROFINET interface 1 of the CPU at the
"Interface" block parameter. In this example, the HW ID is "64".
● Conf_Data: Area in which you save the IP addresses of the NTP server. Use the data
type "IF_CONF_NTP" for this purpose.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 237
Commissioning
11.12 Time synchronization

Solution
To change the IP address of the NTP server in the user program to "192.168.1.10", follow
these steps:
1. Create a global data block in the project tree under "Program blocks > Add new block".
Name the global data block "NTP".
2. Create a tag of the data type "IF_CONF_NTP" in the global data block "NTP".

Figure 11-14 Example: Data block with IF_CONF_NTP

3. Create a "T_CONFIG" instruction in the user program.

4. Connect the "T_CONFIG" instruction as follows.

Figure 11-15 Example T_CONFIG: Changing the NTP server

Distributed I/O system

238 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Commissioning
11.12 Time synchronization

5. In the user program, assign the IP address 192.168.1.10 to the data type
"IF_CONF_NTP":
"NTP".NTP_Server.NTP_IP[1].ADDR[1] := 192;

"NTP".NTP_Server.NTP_IP[1].ADDR[2] := 168;

"NTP".NTP_Server.NTP_IP[1].ADDR[3] := 1;

"NTP".NTP_Server.NTP_IP[1].ADDR[4] := 10;

6. You change the IP address of the NTP server by generating a positive edge for the tag
"change_NTP-Server" in the user program.
"NTP"."change_NTP-Server" := true;

Result
The ET 200SP CPU synchronizes the time with the NTP server 192.168.1.10.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 239
SIMATIC memory card 12
12.1 SIMATIC memory card - overview

Introduction
The CPU uses a SIMATIC memory card as a memory module. The SIMATIC memory card
is a preformatted memory card compatible with the Windows file system. The memory card
is available in different memory sizes and can be used for the following purposes:
● Transportable data carrier
● Program card
● Firmware update card
● Service data card
If you transfer the user program to the CPU via an online connection, it is written to the
SIMATIC memory card, which must be in the card slot of the CPU for this to work.
You can also write the SIMATIC memory card in the PG/PC. A commercially available SD
card reader is required to write / read the SIMATIC memory card with the programming
device / PC. This is used to copy files directly to the SIMATIC memory card using the
Windows Explorer, for example.
A SIMATIC memory card is absolutely required in order to operate the CPU.

Distributed I/O system

240 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 SIMATIC memory card
12.1 SIMATIC memory card - overview

Labeling of the SIMATIC memory card

① Article number
② Serial number
③ Production version
④ Memory size
⑤ Slider for enabling write protection:
• Slider up: Not write-protected
• Slider down: Write-protected

Figure 12-1 Labeling of the SIMATIC memory card

Folders and files on the SIMATIC memory card

The following folders and files can be found on the SIMATIC memory card:

Table 12- 1 Folder structure

Folder Description
FWUPDATE.S7S Firmware update files for CPU and I/O modules
SIMATIC.S7S User program, i.e. all blocks (OBs, FCs, FBs, DBs) and system
blocks, project data of the CPU
SIMATIC.HMI HMI-relevant data
DataLogs DataLog files
Recipes Recipe files
Backups Files for backing up and restoring via the display

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 241
SIMATIC memory card
12.1 SIMATIC memory card - overview

Table 12- 2 File structure

File type Description

S7_JOB.S7S Job file
SIMATIC.HMI\Backup\*.psb Panel backup files
SIMATICHMI_Backups_DMS. Protected file (required to use panel backup files in STEP 7)
bin
__LOG__ Protected system file (required in order to use the card)
crdinfo.bin Protected system file (required in order to use the card)
DUMP.S7S Service data file
*.pdf, *.txt, *.csv, etc. Further files with different formats that you can also store in folders
of the SIMATIC memory card

Use the serial number for copy protection

You can set up copy protection for CPUs which binds execution of the block to a specific
SIMATIC memory card. Configuration is carried out in STEP 7 in the properties of the block
"Bind to serial number of the SIMATIC memory card".
You can only execute the block if it is on the SIMATIC memory card with the specified serial
number (see section Copy protection (Page 170)).

Removing a SIMATIC memory card

Only remove the SIMATIC memory card in POWER OFF or STOP mode of the CPU. Make
sure that no writing functions (e.g. loading/deleting a block) are active in STOP mode, or
were active at POWER OFF. To do this, disconnect the communication connections.
If you remove the SIMATIC memory card during a write process, the following problems can
occur:
● The data contents of a file are incomplete.
● The file is no longer readable, or no longer exists.
● The entire content of the card is corrupted.
Inserting the SIMATIC memory card in the CPU in STOP mode triggers a re-evaluation of
the SIMATIC memory card. The CPU hereby compares the content of the configuration on
the SIMATIC memory card with the backed-up retentive data. If the backed-up retentive data
matches the data of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card, the retentive data is
retained. If the data differs, the CPU automatically performs a memory reset (which means
the retentive data is deleted) and then goes to STOP.
Also note the following FAQ on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59457183) in connection with the
removal of the SIMATIC memory card.

Distributed I/O system

242 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 SIMATIC memory card
12.1 SIMATIC memory card - overview

Removing a SIMATIC memory card from Windows computers

If you are using the card in a commercially available card reader under Windows, use the
"Eject" function before you remove the card from the card reader. If you remove the card
without using the "Eject" function, you may lose data.

Deleting the contents of the SIMATIC memory card

You have the following options for deleting the content of the SIMATIC memory card:
● Delete files using Windows Explorer
● Format with STEP 7

Note
If you format the card with Windows utilities, you will render the SIMATIC memory card
unusable as a storage medium for a CPU.
Deletion of files and folders is permitted, with the exception of the "__LOG__" and
"crdinfo.bin" system files. The CPU needs these system files. If you delete the files, you will
no longer be able to use the SIMATIC memory card with the CPU.
If you have deleted the "__LOG__" and "crdinfo.bin" system files, format the SIMATIC
memory card as described in the following section.

Formatting the SIMATIC memory card

Note
You may only format a SIMATIC memory card in the CPU; otherwise, the SIMATIC memory
card cannot be used in the CPU.

If you want to format the SIMATIC memory card using STEP 7, an online connection to the
relevant CPU must exist. The CPU is in STOP mode.
Follow these steps to format a SIMATIC memory card with inserted SIMATIC memory card:
1. Open the Online and Diagnostics view of the CPU (either from the project context or via
"Accessible devices").
2. In the "Functions" folder, select the "Format memory card" group.
3. Click the "Format" button.
4. Click "Yes" in response to the confirmation prompt.
Result:
● The SIMATIC memory card is formatted for use in the CPU.
● The data on the CPU is deleted with the exception of the IP address.
You will find information on how to repair an inconsistently or incorrectly formatted card in
the following FAQ on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/69063974).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 243
SIMATIC memory card
12.1 SIMATIC memory card - overview

Service life of a SIMATIC memory card

The service life of a SIMATIC memory card depends essentially on the following factors:
● Number of delete or write operations per memory block
● Number of bytes written
● External influences such as ambient temperature

Reference
You will find further information on the service life of the SIMATIC memory card and also
storage space capacity utilization, and on the memory areas used, in the Structure and use
of the CPU memory (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/59193101/en)
function manual.

GetSMCinfo instruction
In the TIA Portal, you have the option of reading out the inserted SIMATIC memory card with
the GetSMCinfo instruction. The following information can be read via the instruction:
● Memory size in KB
● Assigned memory space in KB
● Maintenance information: Previously used up portion of the service life in %
● Set proportion of the service life as a percentage after which the CPU creates a
diagnostics buffer entry and the maintenance LED switches on.
You can find additional information on the GetSMCinfo instruction in the STEP 7 online help.

Distributed I/O system

244 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 SIMATIC memory card
12.2 Setting the card type

12.2 Setting the card type

Introduction
You can use the SIMATIC memory card as a program card or as a firmware update card.

Procedure
1. To set the card type, insert the SIMATIC memory card into the card reader of the
programming device.
2. Select the "SIMATIC Card Reader" folder in the project navigator.
3. In the properties of the selected SIMATIC memory card, specify the card type:
● Program card
You use a program card as an external load memory for the CPU. It contains the entire
user program for the CPU. The CPU transfers the user program from the load memory
into the work memory. The user program runs in the work memory.
The following folder is created on the SIMATIC memory card: SIMATIC.S7
● Firmware update card
You can save firmware for CPUs and for I/O modules on a SIMATIC memory card. It is
thus possible to perform a firmware update with the help of a specifically prepared
SIMATIC memory card.
The following folder is created on the SIMATIC memory card: FWUPDATE.S7S

Reference
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 245
SIMATIC memory card
12.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards

12.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards

Transferring objects from the project to a SIMATIC memory card

When the SIMATIC memory card is inserted into the programming device or into an external
card reader, you can transfer objects from the project tree (STEP 7) to the SIMATIC memory
card as follows:
● Individual blocks (multiple selection possible)
In this case, the transfer is consistent, i.e. the function takes dependencies between
blocks due to block calls into account.
● CPU folder
In this case, all runtime-relevant objects including blocks and the hardware configuration
are transferred onto the SIMATIC memory card - just as when downloading.
● Service data
In this case, the service data previously saved (see chapter Reading out/saving service
data (Page 280)) is transferred to the SIMATIC memory card.
To perform a transfer, you can transfer the objects by dragging and dropping, or use the
"Card Reader/USB memory > Write to memory card" command in the "Project" menu.

Firmware update using a SIMATIC memory card

You can find information on how to perform a firmware update using a SIMATIC memory
card in the section Firmware update (Page 257).

Reference
For additional information about the SIMATIC memory card, refer to the STEP 7 online help.

Distributed I/O system

246 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
Maintenance 13
13.1 Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor starters (hot swapping)

Introduction
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports removal and insertion of I/O modules and
motor starters (hot swapping) during operation (RUN mode):
● CPU/interface module HF, HS: You can remove and insert any number of I/O
modules/motor starters.
● ST, BA interface module: You can only remove and insert one I/O module/motor starter.
This section provides further information on removing and inserting I/O modules/motor
starters.
I/O modules/motor starters must not be removed or inserted during operation (RUN
operating state) in hazardous areas.

Requirements
The following table describes which modules you may insert and remove under which
conditions:

Table 13- 1 Removal and insertion of modules

Modules Removal and insertion Conditions

CPU No ---
BusAdapter No ---
CM DP module No ---
Interface module No ---
I/O modules Yes • Digital output modules: Only when load is switched off
• Digital modules: For load voltage above the safe extra-low
voltage: Only with switched off load voltage supply
• Technology modules: Only with switched off supply voltage L+
• AI Energy Meter ST:
– Only when measuring voltage on primary side is switched
off, or
– Without the special current transformer terminal, measuring
voltage and load current must be through the converters,
which means the machine or the load must be switched off
in the process. With the special terminal, the process can
continue because the current transformer is isolated safely.
However, the measuring voltage on the module, at connec-
tions UL1-UL3, still needs to be isolated.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 247
Maintenance
13.1 Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor starters (hot swapping)

Modules Removal and insertion Conditions

PotDis-TerminalBlock Yes Only in de-energized state.
Motor starter Yes 1) Only when the load is disconnected; when switched on, the motor
starter switches off automatically when the rotary interlock is oper-
ated.
Server module No ---

1) The motor starter also counts as removed in the parking position

NOTICE
Risk of hazardous system states
If you remove and insert digital output modules with the load switched on or technology
modules with the supply voltage switched on, this can result in hazardous system states.
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system or the connected sensors may be damaged as a
result.
Therefore, a digital output module may only be inserted and removed when the load is
switched off and a technology module may only be inserted and removed when the supply
voltage is switched off.

NOTICE
Risk of hazardous system states
If you remove and insert the AI Energy Meter ST with the primary-side voltage switched on
at the current transformer, this can result in hazardous system states.
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system may be damaged as a result.
For this reason, remove and insert the AI Energy Meter ST
• Only when measuring voltage on primary side is switched off, or
• Only when a special current transformer terminal is used which short-circuits the
secondary end of the transformer when a module is removed.
Do not remove or insert the AI Energy Meter ST until you have removed this current
transformer terminal. With the special terminal, the process can continue because the
current transformer is isolated safely. However, the measuring voltage on the module at the
connections UL1-UL3 still needs to be isolated.

WARNING
Risk of injury from automatic restart
Inserting a motor starter can result in dangerous system states. The motor starter can
restart again autonomously if an ON command is active.
This can result in serious injury caused by connected devices that are automatically started
up.
Withdraw and insert a motor starter only after disconnecting the load.

Distributed I/O system

248 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.1 Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor starters (hot swapping)

Removing and inserting I/O module or motor starter with CPU/interface module HF, HS
You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules/motor starters during operation. The
CPU/interface module and the inserted I/O modules/motor starters remain in operation.

NOTICE
Reaction of the CPU to removal and insertion of the ET 200SP server module
Please note that the backplane bus is deactivated when you remove the server module,
regardless of the CPU operating state. Also note that the outputs do not adopt their
configured substitute value behavior when you remove the server module.
This means you should not remove the server module in the CPU operating states
STARTUP, RUN and STOP. If you have nevertheless removed the server module, perform
a POWER OFF/POWER ON after you have inserted the server module again.

Removing and inserting BusAdapter or CM DP module

Do not remove or insert the BusAdapter or CM DP module when the supply voltage is
switched on. If you remove the BusAdapter or CM DP module after CPU startup, the supply
voltage of the BusAdapter or CM DP module is switched off automatically. To switch on the
supply voltage again, you need to perform a POWER OFF/POWER ON after inserting the
BusAdapter/CM DP module.

Removing and inserting I/O module or motor starter with interface module ST, BA
1. You can remove one I/O module/one motor starter during operation. If you remove
another I/O module/motor starter, this results in a station stop of the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system:
– All I/O modules/motor starters of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail → Substitute
value behavior.
– The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller and report
diagnostics.

Note
If you want to replace several I/O modules/motor starters during operation, you must
replace them one after the other.

2. If you insert all but one of the I/O modules/motor starters withdrawn during operation, all
I/O modules will start up again.

Note
I/O modules/motor starters inserted in empty slots and then removed are also regarded
as withdrawn during operation.

3. After a POWER OFF/POWER ON of the supply voltage 1L+ of the interface module, all
available I/O modules/motor starters start up again in line with the configuration.
Evaluation of the I/O modules/motor starters removed during operation starts again (see
1).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 249
Maintenance
13.1 Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor starters (hot swapping)

Removing I/O modules

To remove an I/O module, follow these steps:
1. Simultaneously press the top and bottom release buttons of the I/O module.
2. Pull the I/O module out of the BaseUnit, parallel in a forward direction.

Figure 13-1 Removing I/O modules

See also
Interface modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300)

Distributed I/O system

250 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.2 Changing the type of an I/O module

13.2 Changing the type of an I/O module

Introduction
The coding element is a two-part element. When shipped from the factory, both parts are in
the I/O module. When an I/O module is installed for the first time, a part of the coding
element clicks into the BaseUnit. This mechanically prevents the insertion of a different
module type.
There are two versions of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system:
● Mechanical coding element: Ensures the mechanical coding described above.
● Electronic coding element: In addition to the above-mentioned mechanical coding, this
version also has an electronic, rewritable memory for module-specific configuration data
(such as the F-destination address for fail-safe modules, parameter data for IO link
master).

Requirement
Refer to section Application planning (Page 36).

NOTICE
Do not manipulate the coding element
Making changes to the coding element may cause dangerous conditions in your plant
and/or result in damage to the outputs of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
To avoid physical damage, do not manipulate the coding.

Changing the type of an I/O module

You have already removed the I/O module.
To make a type change for an I/O module, follow these steps:
1. Push the coding element out of the BaseUnit using a screwdriver.
2. Put the coding element back onto the removed I/O module.
3. Insert the new I/O module (other module type) into the BaseUnit until
you hear it click into place.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 251
Maintenance
13.2 Changing the type of an I/O module

4. Label the new I/O module.

① Coding element
Figure 13-2 Changing the type of an I/O module

Distributed I/O system

252 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.3 Replacing an I/O module

13.3 Replacing an I/O module

Introduction
When an I/O module is installed for the first time, a part of the coding element clicks into the
BaseUnit. When you replace an I/O module with the same type of module, the correct coding
element is already present in the BaseUnit.

Requirement
Refer to section Application planning (Page 36).

Replacing an I/O module

You have already removed the I/O module.
To replace an I/O module, follow these steps:
1. Remove the coding element (part) from the underside of the new I/O module.
2. Insert the new I/O module (same module type) into the BaseUnit until you hear it click into
place.
3. Mark the new I/O module (labeling strip, equipment labeling plate).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 253
Maintenance
13.4 Replacing a motor starter

13.4 Replacing a motor starter

The SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter is wired.
To replace a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, proceed as follows:
1. Turn the mechanical rotary interlock counter-clockwise to the assembly/disassembly
position.

Note
Operating position/READY
Turn the mechanical rotary interlock out of the READY position only in the current-free
state (motor off).

2. Remove the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter from the BaseUnit.

3. Assemble the new motor starter as described.

Note
Mounting the motor starter
You will find out how to mount the motor starter in chapter "Mounting/disassembly of
motor starters (Page 120)".

WARNING
Risk of injury from automatic restart
When you replace the motor starter, the motor starter can restart again autonomously if an
ON command is active. This can result in property damage or serious injury caused by
connected devices that are automatically started up.
Revoke the ON commands on the motor starter before replacing the motor starter.

CAUTION
Protection against electrostatic charge
When handling and installing the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, ensure protection
against electrostatic charging of the components. Changes to the system configuration and
wiring are only permissible after disconnection from the power supply.

Distributed I/O system

254 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.5 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit

13.5 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit

Introduction
The terminal box is part of the BaseUnit. You can replace the terminal box if necessary. You
do not need to dismantle the BaseUnit to do this.
The power and AUX buses of the potential group are not interrupted when you replace the
terminal box.

Requirements
● The BaseUnit is mounted, wired and fitted with an I/O module.
● The terminal may only be replaced when the supply voltage is switched off.

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver

Procedure
Watch the video sequence: "Replace terminal box on BaseUnit"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
Proceed as follows to replace the terminal box on a BaseUnit:
1. If present, turn off the supply voltage on the BaseUnit.
2. Simultaneously press the top and bottom release buttons of the I/O module and pull the
module out of the BaseUnit.
3. Disconnect the wiring on the BaseUnit.
4. The release button of the terminal box is located on the underside of the BaseUnit. Use a
screwdriver to push in the small opening at an angle from above.
5. Swivel the screwdriver slightly upwards to loosen the locking mechanism of the terminal
box and lever the terminal box up out of the BaseUnit at the same time.
6. Remove the coding element (part) from the terminal box and press it onto the coding
element (part) of the I/O module that you removed in step 2.
7. Insert the new terminal box into the BaseUnit at the top and swivel it downwards until it
clips into the BaseUnit.
8. Wire up the BaseUnit.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 255
Maintenance
13.5 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit

9. Insert the I/O module into the BaseUnit.

10.Switch on a supply voltage on the BaseUnit.

Figure 13-3 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit

Distributed I/O system

256 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.6 Firmware update

13.6 Firmware update

Introduction
During operation it may be necessary to update the firmware (e.g. to extend the available
functions).
Update the firmware of the CPU/interface module and the I/O modules using firmware files.
The retentive data is retained after the firmware has been updated.

Requirement
● You have downloaded the file(s) for the firmware update from the Product Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps) web page.
On this web page, select:
– Automation Technology > Automation Systems > Industrial Automation Systems
SIMATIC > SIMATIC ET 200 I/O Systems > ET 200 systems for the cabinet >
ET 200SP.

Figure 13-4 ET 200SP in the product tree

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 257
Maintenance
13.6 Firmware update

From there, navigate to the specific type of module that you want to update. To continue,
click on the "Software downloads" link under "Support". Save the desired firmware update
files.

Figure 13-5 Selecting the software downloads

● Before installing the firmware update, make sure that the modules are not being used.

Note
Firmware update of I/O modules
The L+ supply voltage must be present on the module at the start of and during the firmware
update.

Additional requirement for fail-safe modules

WARNING
Check the firmware version
When using a new firmware version, always check that the version is approved for use in
the module in question.
The attachments of the certificate
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/134200) for SIMATIC
Safety specify the firmware version that is approved.

Distributed I/O system

258 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.6 Firmware update

Options for the firmware update

The following options are available for updating firmware:
● Online in STEP 7 via Online & Diagnostics
● Online in STEP 7 via accessible devices (PROFINET)
● Using a SIMATIC memory card (possible for CPU and central I/O modules)
● Via the integrated Web server (possible for CPU as well as centralized and distributed I/O
modules)
● Online via the SIMATIC Automation Tool

Note
Firmware files of the CPU
If you perform a CPU update with STEP 7, you require STEP 7 (TIA Portal as of V13 Update
3).

The table below provides an overview of the media that can be used to update the firmware
of a specific module.

Table 13- 2 Overview of firmware update options

Firmware update CPU Interface module I/O module

STEP 7 (TIA Portal) ✓ 1) ✓ ✓
STEP 7 (V5.5 SP2 or higher) 2) -- ✓ ✓
Accessible devices ✓ ✓ ✓
SIMATIC memory card ✓ -- ✓
Web server of the CPU ✓ -- ✓
SIMATIC Automation Tool ✓ ✓ ✓
1) V13 update 3 or higher
2) If the firmware files are only available in this format, you can also install the files using STEP 7
(TIA Portal) but not the SIMATIC memory card or the Web server.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 259
Maintenance
13.6 Firmware update

Firmware update for the motor starter

The following options are available for updating firmware for the motor starter.
● Online via PROFINET IO/PROFIBUS DP (with STEP 7)
● Via the integrated Web server (possible for CPU as well as centralized and distributed I/O
modules)
● With the TIA Portal:
– As of SIMATIC STEP 7 V13 SP1 with installed HSP for the ET 200SP motor starter
– SIMATIC STEP 7 V14 and higher
Over a SIMATIC memory card
● With SIMATIC STEP 7 version V5.5 SP4 and higher
● For fail-safe motor starters with the TIA Portal Version V14 SP1 or higher and installed
HSP.

Note
The firmware update for fail-safe motor starters must take place in a separate ET 200SP
system in which only the fail-safe motor starter that is to be updated is inserted.

Installation of the firmware update

WARNING
Risk of impermissible system states
The CPU switches to STOP mode or the interface module to "station failure" as a result of
the firmware update being installed. STOP or station failure can have an adverse effect on
the operation of an online process or a machine.
Unexpected operation of a process or a machine can lead to fatal or severe injuries and/or
to material damages.
Make sure that the CPU/interface module is not executing any active process before
installing the firmware update.

Distributed I/O system

260 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.6 Firmware update

Procedure online in STEP 7 via Online & Diagnostics

Proceed as follows to perform an online firmware update via STEP 7:
1. Select the module in the device view.
2. Select the "Online & diagnostics" command from the shortcut menu.
3. Select the "Firmware update" group in the "Functions" folder.
4. Click the "Browse" button to select the path to the firmware update files in the "Firmware
update" area.
5. Select the suitable firmware file. The table in the firmware update area lists all modules
for which an update is possible with the selected firmware file.
6. Click the "Run update" button. If the module can interpret the selected file, the file is
downloaded to the module.
Updating the firmware
The "Run firmware after update" check box is always selected.
When the loading process is complete, the CPU adopts the firmware and then operates with
this new firmware.

Note
If a firmware update is interrupted, you need to remove and insert the module before starting
the firmware update again.

Procedure online in STEP 7 via accessible devices

To perform a firmware update online via accessible devices, follow these steps:
1. From the "Online" menu, select the "Accessible devices" menu item.
2. In the "Accessible devices" dialog, search for the accessible devices for the selected
PROFINET interface.
3. To go to a device in the project tree, select the desired device from the list of accessible
devices and click the "Show" button.
4. In the project tree, select the "Online & diagnostics" option of the relevant device and
perform the firmware update under the category "Functions/Firmware Update" (CPU,
Local modules).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 261
Maintenance
13.6 Firmware update

Procedure using the SIMATIC memory card

To perform a firmware update using the SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Insert a SIMATIC memory card into the SD card reader of your programming
device/computer.
2. To store the update file on the SIMATIC memory card, select the SIMATIC memory card
in the "Card Reader/USB memory" folder in the project tree.
3. Select the "Card Reader/USB memory > Create firmware update memory card"
command in the "Project" menu.
4. Use a file selection dialog to navigate to the firmware update file. In a further step you can
decide whether you want to delete the content of the SIMATIC memory card or whether
you want to add the firmware update files to the SIMATIC memory card.
5. Insert the SIMATIC memory card with the firmware update files into the CPU.

Point to note when updating firmware for analog modules and the IO-Link Master
CM 4xIO-Link communication module
If you want to update firmware for analog modules or the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link
communication module, you must supply a load current of 24 V DC to the modules through
the infeed element.

Procedure
1. Remove any inserted SIMATIC memory card.
2. Insert the SIMATIC memory card with the firmware update files into the CPU.
3. The firmware update begins shortly after the SIMATIC memory card has been inserted.
4. Remove the SIMATIC memory card after the firmware update has been completed.
The RUN LED on the CPU lights up yellow, the MAINT LED flashes yellow.
If you want to use the SIMATIC memory card later as a program card, delete the firmware
update files manually.

Note
If your hardware configuration contains several modules, the CPU updates all affected
modules in the slot sequence, which means in ascending order of the module position in the
STEP 7 device configuration.

Distributed I/O system

262 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.6 Firmware update

Note
Memory size of the SIMATIC memory card
If you perform a firmware update via the SIMATIC memory card, you must use a large
enough card based on the CPU used and the associated I/O modules.
Therefore, be sure to note the file size of the update files when downloading them from the
Product Support website. The file size information is especially important when you perform
the firmware update not only for the CPU but also for the associated I/O modules,
communication modules, etc. The total size of the update files must not exceed the available
memory size of your SIMATIC memory card.

Procedure: via the integrated Web server

The procedure is described in the Web server
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) function manual.

Procedure: online via the SIMATIC Automation Tool

The procedure is described in the SIMATIC Automation Tool
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300) manual (included in the
SIMATIC Automation Tool).

Behavior during the firmware update

Note the following behavior of the relevant I/O module when carrying out a firmware update:
● The DIAG LED display flashes red.
● The I/O module retains its current diagnostic status.
● Diagnostics alarm: Channel temporarily unavailable (error code 31D/1FH)
● All outputs are in a current-free/voltage-free state
Note the following behavior when carrying out the firmware update of the motor starter:
● RN flashes green and ER flashes red.
● ST/OL flashes green and MAN flashes yellow.
● The motor starter powers up after completion of the firmware update. Diagnoses are
reset. The firmware update does not affect the TMM and the cooling time.
● The sensor supply of the DI module remains active.

Behavior after the firmware update

After the firmware update, check the firmware version of the updated module.

Reference
You will find more information on these procedures in the STEP 7 online help.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 263
Maintenance
13.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings

13.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings

13.7.1 Resetting the CPU to factory settings

Function
The CPU can be reset to its delivery state using "Reset to factory settings". The function
deletes all information saved internally on the CPU.
Recommendation:
If you want to remove a PROFINET CPU and use it elsewhere with a different program, or
put it into storage, we recommend that you reset the CPU to its factory settings. When
restoring the factory settings, remember that you also delete the IP address parameters.

Options for resetting a CPU to factory settings

The following options are available for resetting the CPU to its factory settings:
● Using the mode selector
● Using STEP 7
● Using the SIMATIC Automation Tool

Procedure using the mode selector

Make sure that there is no SIMATIC memory card in the CPU and that the CPU is in STOP
mode (the RUN/STOP LED is lit yellow).

Note
Reset to factory settings ↔ Memory reset
The procedure described below also corresponds to the procedure for a memory reset:
• Selector operation with inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes a memory reset
• Selector operation without inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes reset to factory
settings

Distributed I/O system

264 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings

Perform a reset to factory settings when there is no SIMATIC memory card inserted as
follows:
1. Set the mode selector to the STOP position.
Result: The RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow.
2. Set the mode selector to the MRES position. Hold the mode selector in this position until
the RUN/STOP LED lights up for the 2nd time and remains continuously lit (after three
seconds). After this, release the switch.
3. Within the next three seconds, switch the mode selector back to the MRES position, and
then back to STOP again.
Result: The CPU executes the "Reset to factory settings", during which time the RUN/STOP
LED flashes yellow. When the RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow, the CPU has been reset to
factory settings and is in the STOP mode. The "Reset to factory settings" event is entered in
the diagnostics buffer.

Note
The IP address of the CPU is also deleted when the CPU is reset to the factory settings
through the mode selector.

For information on the memory reset of the CPU, refer to the section CPU memory reset
(Page 221).

Procedure using STEP 7

Make sure that an online connection to the CPU exists.
To reset a CPU to factory settings using STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. Open the Online and Diagnostics view of the CPU.
2. In the "Functions" folder, select the "Reset to factory settings" group.
3. If you want to keep the IP address, select the "Retain IP address" option button. If you
want to delete the IP address, select the "Reset IP address" option button.

Note
The "Delete IP address" option deletes all IP addresses. This applies regardless of how
you established the online connection.
If a SIMATIC memory card is inserted, the "Delete IP address" option deletes the IP
addresses and resets the CPU to factory settings. Then, the configuration (including IP
address) that is stored on the SIMATIC memory card is transferred to the CPU (see
below). If you formatted the memory card before the reset to factory settings or if the
memory card is empty, no IP address is transferred to the CPU.

4. Click the "Reset" button.

5. Click "OK" in response to the confirmation prompts.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 265
Maintenance
13.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings

Result: The CPU executes the "Reset to factory settings", during which time the RUN/STOP
LED flashes yellow. When the RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow, the CPU has been reset to
factory settings and is in the STOP mode. The "Reset to factory settings" event is entered in
the diagnostics buffer.

Procedure using the SIMATIC Automation Tool

The procedure is described in the SIMATIC Automation Tool
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300) manual (included in the
SIMATIC Automation Tool).

Result after resetting to factory settings

The following table provides an overview of the contents of the memory objects after the
reset to factory settings.

Table 13- 3 Result after resetting to factory settings

Memory object Content

Actual values of the data blocks, instance data blocks Initialized
Bit memory, timers and counters Initialized
Certain retentive tags from technology objects Initialized
(e.g. adjustment values of absolute encoders)
Diagnostics buffer entries Initialized
IP address Depends on the procedure:
• Using mode switch: is deleted
• Using STEP 7: Depending on the setting of the
"Keep IP address"/"Delete IP address" option
buttons
Device name Initialized
Counter readings of the runtime meters Initialized
Time of day Initialized

If a SIMATIC memory card was inserted prior to the factory reset, the CPU downloads the
configuration contained on the SIMATIC memory card (hardware and software). A
configured IP address then becomes valid again.

Reference
Additional information on the topic "Resetting to factory settings" can be found in the
Structure and use of the CPU memory
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193101) function manual, section on
memory areas and retentivity, and in the STEP 7 online help.

Distributed I/O system

266 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings

13.7.2 Resetting interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings

Function
The "Reset to factory settings" function returns the interface module (PROFINET) to its
delivery state.

Reset options
● Using STEP 7 (online via PROFINET IO)
● Using a reset button on the interface module (on rear). Exception: The IM 155-6 PN BA
does not possess this reset button. See section Resetting the interface module
(PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a RESET button (Page 268).

Procedure using STEP 7

To reset an interface module to factory settings using STEP 7, follow these steps:
Make sure that an online connection to the interface module exists.
1. Open the online and diagnostics view of the interface module.
2. In the "Functions" folder, select the "Reset to factory settings" group.
3. Click the "Reset" button.
4. Click "OK" in response to the confirmation prompt.
Result: The interface module then performs "Reset to factory settings".

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 267
Maintenance
13.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings

Result after resetting to factory settings

The following table shows the values of the interface module properties after a factory reset:

Table 13- 4 Properties of the interface module as shipped

Properties Value
Parameters Default setting
IP address Not available
Device name Not available
MAC address Available
I&M data Identification data (I&M0) available
Maintenance data (I&M1, 2, 3, 4) reset *
Firmware version Available

* Can be selected with STEP 7 V14 or higher: "Keep I&M data"/"Delete I&M data"

Note
Failure of downstream stations is possible
Downstream stations on a bus segment can fail when the factory settings are restored on an
interface module.

Note
Behavior of the installed I/O modules during reset to factory settings
When "Resetting to factory settings", the I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system take on the non-configured state, which means input data are not entered and output
data are not output.

Reference
You will find more information on the procedure in the STEP 7 online help.

13.7.3 Resetting the interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a
RESET button

Requirement
The supply voltage to the interface module is turned on.

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (for resetting with a RESET button)

Distributed I/O system

268 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings

Procedure
Proceed as follows to reset an interface module to factory settings by means of the RESET
button:
1. Remove the interface module from the mounting rail (see Mounting the CPU/interface
module (Page 70)) and swivel it downwards.
2. The RESET button is located on the rear of the interface module behind a small opening:
Press a screwdriver into the small opening for at least 3 seconds to activate the RESET
button.
3. Install the interface module back on the mounting rail (see Mounting the CPU/interface
module (Page 70)).
4. Assign parameters to the interface module again.

① Rear of the interface module

② RESET button
Figure 13-6 RESET button

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 269
Maintenance
13.8 Reaction to faults in fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor starters

13.8 Reaction to faults in fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor starters

Safe state (safety concept)

The basic principle behind the safety concept is the existence of a safe state for all process
variables.

Note
For digital F-modules, this safe state is the value "0". This applies to both sensors and
actuators. In the case of the fail-safe motor starters, the load is shut down in a fail-safe
manner.

Fault reactions and startup of the F-system

The safety function means that fail-safe modules use substitute values (safe state) instead of
process values (passivation of the fail-safe module) in the following situations:
● When the F-system is started up
● If errors are detected during safety-related communication between the F-CPU and the
F-module via the PROFIsafe safety protocol (communication error)
● If F-I/O faults or channel faults are detected (e.g. crossover or discrepancy errors)
Detected faults are written to the diagnostic buffer of the F-CPU and communicated to the
safety program in the F-CPU.
F-modules cannot save errors as retentive data. After a POWER OFF / POWER ON, any
faults still existing are detected again during startup. However, you have the option of saving
faults in your safety program.

WARNING

For channels that you set to "deactivated" in STEP 7, no diagnostic response or error
handling is triggered when a channel fault occurs, not even when such a channel is
affected indirectly by a channel group fault ("Channel activated/deactivated" parameter).

Remedying faults in the F-system

To remedy faults in your F-system, follow the procedure described in IEC 61508-1:2010
section 7.15.2.4 and IEC 61508-2:2010 section 7.6.2.1 e.
The following steps must be performed:
1. Diagnosing and repairing the fault
2. Revalidation of the safety function
3. Recording in the service report

Distributed I/O system

270 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Maintenance
13.8 Reaction to faults in fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor starters

Substitute value output for fail-safe modules

In the case of F-modules with inputs, if there is passivation, the F-system provides substitute
values (0) for the safety program instead of the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs.
In the case of F-modules with outputs, if there is passivation, the F-system transfers
substitute values (0) to the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values provided by the
safety program. The output channels are de-energized. This also applies when the F-CPU
goes into STOP mode. Assignment of substitute values is not possible.
Depending on which F-system you are using and the type of fault that occurred (F-I/O fault,
channel fault or communication error), substitute values are used either for the relevant
channel only or for all channels of the relevant fail-safe module.

Reintegration of a fail-safe module

The system changes from fail-safe to process values (reintegration of an F-module) either
automatically or only after user acknowledgment in the safety program. If channel faults
occur, it may be necessary to remove and reinsert the F-module. A detailed listing of faults
requiring removal and insertion of the F-module can be found in the section Diagnostic
messages of the respective F-module.
After reintegration, the following occurs:
● In the case of an F-module with inputs, the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs is
made available to the safety program again
● In the case of an F-module with outputs, the output values provided in the safety program
are transferred to the fail-safe outputs again

Additional information on passivation and reintegration

For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O, refer to the SIMATIC
Safety, Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual.

Behavior of the fail-safe module with inputs in the event of a communication disruption
F-modules with inputs respond differently to communication errors compared to other errors.
If a communication error is detected, the current process values remain set at the inputs of
the F-module. There is no passivation of the channels. The current process values are
passivated in the F-CPU.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 271
Maintenance
13.9 Maintenance and repair

13.9 Maintenance and repair

The components of the SIMATIC ET 200SP system are maintenance-free.

Note
Repairs to a SIMATIC ET 200SP system may only be carried out by the manufacturer.

13.10 Warranty
To meet the conditions of the warranty, you must observe the safety and commissioning
instructions.

Distributed I/O system

272 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
Test functions and eliminating problems 14
14.1 Test functions

Introduction
You have the option of testing the operation of your user program on the CPU. You can then
monitor signal states and values of tags and can assign values to tags to simulate specific
situations in the running of the program.

Note
Using test functions
The use of test functions can influence the program execution time and thus the cycle and
response times of the controller to a slight extent (a few milliseconds).

Requirements
● There is an online connection to the relevant CPU.
● An executable program is in the CPU.

Test options
● Testing with program status
● Testing with breakpoints
● Testing with a watch table
● Testing with a force table
● Testing with PLC tag table
● Testing with data block editor
● Testing with the LED flash test
● Testing with trace function

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 273
Test functions and eliminating problems
14.1 Test functions

Testing with program status

The program status allows you to monitor the execution of the program. You can display the
values of operands and the results of logic operations (RLO) allowing you to recognize and
fix logical errors in your program.

Note
Restrictions for the "Program status" function
Monitoring loops can clearly increase the cycle time, depending on the number of tags
monitored and depending on the actual number of loops run through.

WARNING
Testing with program status
A test with the "Program status" function can produce serious property damage and
personal injury in the event of malfunctions or program errors.
Make sure that you take appropriate measures to exclude the risk of hazardous conditions
occurring before running a test with the "Program status" function.

Testing with breakpoints

With this test option, you set breakpoints in your program, establish an online connection,
and enable the breakpoints on the CPU. You then execute a program from one breakpoint to
another.
Requirements:
● Setting breakpoints is possible in the programming language SCL or STL.
Testing with breakpoints provides you with the following advantages:
● Localization of logic errors step by step
● Simple and quick analysis of complex programs prior to actual commissioning
● Recording of current values within individual executed loops
● Use of breakpoints for program validation also possible in SCL/STL networks within
LAD/FBD blocks

Note
Restriction during testing with breakpoints
When you test with breakpoints, there is a risk of overwriting the cycle time of the CPU.

Distributed I/O system

274 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Test functions and eliminating problems
14.1 Test functions

Note
F-System SIMATIC Safety
Setting breakpoints in the standard user program results in errors in the
security program:
• Sequence of F cycle time monitoring
• Error in communication with the fail-safe I/O
• Error during safety-oriented CPU-CPU communication
• internal CPU error
If you still wish to use breakpoints for testing, you must deactivate
the safety mode beforehand. This will result in the following errors:
• Error in communication with the fail-safe I/O
• Error during safety-oriented CPU-CPU communication

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 275
Test functions and eliminating problems
14.1 Test functions

Testing with watch tables

The following functions are available in the watch table:
● Monitoring of tags
With watch tables, you can monitor the current values of individual tags of a user program
or a CPU on the PG/PC and Web server. For the Web server to be able to display the
value of tags, you must specify a symbolic name for each tag in the "Name" column of the
watch table.
You can monitor the following operand areas:
– Inputs and outputs (process image) and bit memory
– Contents of data blocks
– Peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs
– Timers and counters
● Modifying tags
Use this function to assign fixed values to the individual tags of a user program or CPU.
Modifying is also possible for testing with program status.
You can control the following operand areas:
– Inputs and outputs (process image) and bit memory
– Contents of data blocks
– Peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs (for example, %I0.0:P, %Q0.0:P)
– Timers and counters
● "Enable peripheral outputs" and "Control immediately"
These two functions enable you to assign fixed values to individual peripheral outputs of
a CPU in the STOP mode. You can also use them to check your wiring.

Distributed I/O system

276 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Test functions and eliminating problems
14.1 Test functions

Testing with the force table

The following functions are available in the force table.
● Monitoring of tags
With force tables, you can display the current values of individual tags of a user program
or a CPU on the PG/PC and Web server. You can monitor the table with or without a
trigger condition. For the Web server to be able to display the value of tags, you must
specify a symbolic name for each tag in the "Name" column of the force table.
You can monitor the following tags:
– Bit memory
– Contents of data blocks
– Peripheral inputs (e.g. %I0.0:P)
● Modifying tags
With this function, you assign fixed values to the individual tags of a user program or a
CPU on the PG/PC and Web server. Modifying is also possible for testing with program
status.
You can control the following tags:
– Bit memories
– Contents of data blocks
– Peripheral inputs (e.g. %I0.0:P)
● Forcing of peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs
You can force individual peripheral inputs or peripheral outputs.
– Peripheral inputs: Forcing of peripheral inputs (for example %I0.0:P) represents the
"bypassing" of sensors/inputs by specifying fixed values to the program. Instead of the
actual input value (via process image or via direct access) the program receives the
force value.
– Peripheral outputs: Forcing of peripheral outputs (for example %Q0.0:P) represents
the "bypassing" of the complete program by setting fixed values for the actuators.
The force table offers the advantage both of being able to simulate different test
environments and also of being able to overwrite tags in the CPU with a fixed value. Thus,
you have a possibility of intervening in the ongoing process to regulate it.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 277
Test functions and eliminating problems
14.1 Test functions

Difference between modifying and forcing

The fundamental difference between the modifying and forcing functions consists in the
storage behavior:
● Modifying: Modifying of tags is an online function and is not stored in the CPU. You can
end modifying of tags in the watch table or by disconnecting the online connection.
● Forcing: A force job is written to the SIMATIC memory card and is retained after a
POWER OFF. You can only end the forcing of peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs in
the force table.

Testing with PLC tag table

You can monitor the data values that tags currently assume in the CPU directly in the PLC
tag table. To do this, open the PLC tag table and start monitoring.
Additionally, you have a possibility of copying PLC tags to a monitoring or force table and of
monitoring, controlling or forcing them there.

Testing with data block editor

Various possibilities of monitoring and controlling tags are at your disposal in the data block
editor. These functions directly access the current values of the tags in the online program.
Current values are the values that the tags assume at the current time during program
execution in the CPU's work memory. The following functions for monitoring and control are
possible via the data block editor:
● Monitoring tags online
● Controlling individual actual values
● Creating a snapshot of the actual values
● Overwriting actual values with a snapshot

Note
Setting data values during commissioning
During commissioning of a system, data values often have to be adjusted to optimally adapt
the program to the general conditions prevailing locally. To this end, the declaration table
offers a few functions for data blocks.

Distributed I/O system

278 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Test functions and eliminating problems
14.2 Reading out/saving service data

Testing with the LED flash test

In many online dialogs, you can perform an LED flash test. This function is useful, for
example, when you are not sure which device in the hardware configuration corresponds to
the device currently selected in the software.
When you click the "Flash LED" button, an LED flashes on the currently selected device. In
the case of the CPU, the RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash. They flash until you
cancel the flashing test.

Testing with trace function

The trace function is used to record the CPU tags, depending on the settable trigger
conditions. Tags are, for example, the drive parameters or system and user tags of a CPU.
The CPU saves the recordings. You can display and evaluate the recordings with STEP 7,
if necessary.
The trace function can be called from the CPU's folder in the project tree, under the name
"Traces".
In connection with trace functions, also pay attention to the following FAQ on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/102781176).

Simulation
With STEP 7 you can run and test the hardware and software of the project in a simulated
environment. Start the simulation using the menu command "Online" > "Simulation" > "Start".

Reference
You can find more information on test functions in the STEP 7 online help.
Further information about testing with trace and logic analyzer functions is available in the
Function Manual Using the trace and logic analyzer function
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/64897128).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 279
Test functions and eliminating problems
14.2 Reading out/saving service data

14.2 Reading out/saving service data

Service data
In addition to the contents of the diagnostics buffer, the service data contains a wide range of
extra information about the internal status of the CPU. If a problem occurs the CPU that
cannot be solved with other methods, send the service data to our Service & Support team.
The service data allows Service & Support to run fast analysis of the problems that have
occurred.

Note
You cannot simultaneously execute a download to the device while reading out the service
data of the CPU.

Methods of reading service data

You can read service data with:
● The Web server
● STEP 7
● the SIMATIC memory card

Procedure using the Web server

To read service data using the Web server, follow these steps:
1. Open a Web browser that is suitable for communication with the CPU.
2. Enter the following address in the address bar of the web browser:
https://<CPU IP address>/save_service_data, e.g. https://172.23.15.3/save_service_data
3. The service data page will appear on your screen, with a button for saving the service
data.

Figure 14-1 Reading out service data with the Web server

4. Save the service data locally on your PC/programming device, by clicking "Save
ServiceData".

Distributed I/O system

280 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Test functions and eliminating problems
14.2 Reading out/saving service data

Result: The CPU stores the data in a .dmp file with the following naming convention:
"<Article number> <Serial number> <Time stamp>.dmp". The file name cannot be changed.

Note
If you have defined your user page as the Web server's home page, direct access to the
service data by entering the CPU's IP address is not possible. You will find further
information on reading out service data via a user-defined page in the Web server
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) function manual.

Procedure using STEP 7

A description of how to save service data is available under the keyword "Save service data"
in STEP 7 online help.

Procedure via the SIMATIC memory card

Use the SIMATIC memory card to read out the service data only if you are no longer able to
communicate with the CPU via Ethernet. In all other cases it is preferable to read out the
service data via the Web server or STEP 7.
The procedure using the SIMATIC memory card is more time-consuming than the other
options for reading out the service data. You must also ensure before reading out that there
is sufficient memory space on the SIMATIC memory card.
To read service data using the SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Insert the SIMATIC memory card into the card reader of your PC / programming device.
2. Open the job file S7_JOB.S7S in an editor.
3. Overwrite the entry PROGRAM with the string DUMP in the editor.
Do not use any spaces/line breaks/quotation marks to ensure that the file size is exactly
4 bytes.
4. Save the file under the existing file name.
5. Ensure that the SIMATIC memory card is not write protected and insert it in the card slot
of the CPU. Pay attention to the procedure described in Removing/inserting the SIMATIC
memory card on the CPU (Page 213).
Result: The CPU writes the service data file DUMP.S7S to the SIMATIC memory card and
remains in STOP mode.
The transfer of the service data has been completed as soon as the STOP LED stops
flashing and lights up continuously. If the transfer was successful, only the STOP LED lights
up. If transfer was not successful, the STOP LED and the ERROR LED flash. In case of an
error, the CPU stores a text file with a note on the error that occurred in the DUMP.S7S
folder.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 281
Technical specifications 15
Introduction
This chapter lists the technical specifications of the system:
● The standards and test values that the ET 200SP distributed I/O system complies with
and fulfills.
● The test criteria according to which the ET 200SP distributed I/O system was tested.

Technical specifications for the modules

The technical specifications of the individual modules can be found in the manuals of the
modules themselves. In the event of deviations between the statements in this document
and the manuals, the statements in the manuals take priority.

15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes

Currently valid markings and approvals

Note
Information on the components of the ET 200SP
The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the components of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.

Distributed I/O system

282 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Technical specifications
15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes

Safety information

WARNING
Personal injury and damage to property may occur
In hazardous areas, personal injury and damage to property may occur if you disconnect
plug-in connections during operation of an ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Always switch off the power to the ET 200SP distributed I/O system when disconnecting
plug-in connections in hazardous areas.

WARNING
Explosion hazard
If you replace components, compliance with Class I, Div. 2 or zone 2 may become invalid.

WARNING
Area of application
This device is only suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D; Class I, zone 2,
Group IIC, or in non-hazardous areas.

Five safety rules for work in or on electrical installations

A set of rules, which are summarized in DIN VDE 0105 as the "five safety rules", are defined
for work in or on electrical installations as a preventative measure against electrical
accidents:
1. Isolate
2. Secure against switching on again
3. Verify that the equipment is not live
4. Ground and short-circuit
5. Erect barriers around or cover adjacent live parts
These five safety rules must be applied in the above order prior to starting work on an
electrical system. After completing the work, proceed in the reverse order.
It is assumed that every electrician is familiar with these rules.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 283
Technical specifications
15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes

CE marking
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the general and safety-related requirements of
the following directives and conforms to the harmonized standards (EN) for programmable
controllers published in the official journals of the European Union:
● 2014/35/EU "Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits" (Low
Voltage Directive)
● 2014/30/EU "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● 2014/34/EU "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
● 2011/65/EU "Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and
electronic equipment" (RoHS Directive)
● 2006/42/EC "Machinery Directive" for ET 200SP fail-safe modules
The EC declarations of conformity are available for the responsible authorities at:
Siemens AG
Digital Factory
Factory Automation
DF FA AS SYS
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
They are also available for download on the Siemens Industry Online Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/) website, keyword "Declaration of
Conformity".

cULus approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
OR

Distributed I/O system

284 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Technical specifications
15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes

cULus HAZ. LOC. approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
● CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Installation Instructions for cULus haz.loc.
● WARNING – Explosion Hazard – Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is
known to be non-hazardous.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
● This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I,
Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations.
WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS.
OR

CSA

CSA C22.2 (Industrial Control Equipment Motor Controllers)

OR

UL

UL 60947-4-2 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear

OR

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 285
Technical specifications
15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes

FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
ANSI/ISA 82.02.01 (IEC 61010-1)
CSA C22.2 No. 213
CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Installation Instructions for FM
● WARNING – Explosion Hazard – Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is
known to be non-hazardous.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
● This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I,
Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations.
WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS.
OR

ATEX approval
According to EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type
of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements)

OR

IECEx approval
According to IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type
of protection "n") and IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General
requirements)

Distributed I/O system

286 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Technical specifications
15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes

RCM (C-Tick) Declaration of conformity for Australia/New Zealand

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements of the standards
● EN 61000-6-4.

Korea Certificate KCC-REM-S49-ET200SP

Note that this device corresponds to limit class A in terms of the emission of radio frequency
interference. This device can be used in all areas, except residential areas.
이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기
바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.

Marking for the Eurasian Customs Union

EAC (Eurasian Conformity)
Customs Union of Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan
Declaration of conformity with the technical requirements of the Customs Union (TR CU).

IEC 61131
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the requirements and criteria of the standard
IEC 61131-2 (Programmable logic controllers, part 2: Equipment requirements and tests).

IEC 60947
The motor starters belonging to the ET 200SP distributed I/O system meet the requirements
and criteria of the IEC 60947 standard.

PROFINET standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158 Type 10.

PROFIBUS standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158 Type 3.

IO-Link standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61131-9.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 287
Technical specifications
15.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes

Shipbuilding approval
Classification societies:
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV-GL (Det Norske Veritas - Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
● KR (Korean Register of Shipping)
● CCS (China Classification Society)

Use in industrial environments

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for use in industrial environments. It meets
the following standards for this type of use:
● Requirements on interference emission EN 61000-6-4: 2007 + A1: 2011
● Requirements on immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005

Use in mixed areas

Under specific prerequisites you can use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in a mixed
area. A mixed area is used for residential purposes and for commercial operations that do
not significantly impact the residential purpose.
If you want to use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in residential areas, you must ensure
that its radio frequency interference emission complies with limit class B in accordance with
EN 61000-6-3. Suitable measures for observing these limits for use in a mixed area are, for
example:
● Installation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in grounded control cabinets
● Use of filters in the supply lines
An additional individual acceptance test is also required.

Use in residential areas

Note
ET 200SP distributed I/O system is not intended for use in residential areas
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is not intended for use in residential areas. If you are
using the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in residential areas, radio and TV reception may
be affected.

Reference
The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under
Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

Distributed I/O system

288 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Technical specifications
15.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

15.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment.
Among other things, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system also meets the requirements of the
EMC legislation for the European single market. The prerequisite is that the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system complies with the requirements and guidelines relating to electrical
equipment.

EMC in accordance with NE21

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the EMC specifications of the NAMUR
recommendation NE21.

Pulse-shaped disturbance variables of the ET 200SP system

The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system with regard to pulse-shaped disturbance variables.

Table 15- 1 Pulse-shaped disturbance variables

Pulse-shaped disturbance variable Tested with Equivalent to

severity
Electrostatic discharge in accordance Air discharge ±8 kV 3
with IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: ±6 kV 3
Burst pulses (fast transients) in ±2 kV (power supply line) 3
accordance with IEC 61000-4-4 ±2 kV (signal line >30 m) 3
±1 kV (signal cable <30 m)
High-energy single pulse (surge) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (see Function manual Designing interference-
free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566))
• Asymmetric coupling ±2 kV (power supply lines)
DC with protective elements
3
±2 kV (signal lines/data lines only >30 m)
with protective elements if necessary
• Symmetric coupling ±1 kV (power supply line) DC with pro-
tective elements
±1 kV (signal line/data line only >30 m)
with protective elements if necessary

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 289
Technical specifications
15.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Pulse-shaped disturbance variables of motor starters

The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP motor starters
with regard to pulse-shaped interference.

Table 15- 2 Pulse-shaped disturbance variables

Pulse-shaped disturbance variable Tested with Equivalent to

severity
Burst pulses (fast transients) in ±2 kV (24 V supply cables) 3
accordance with IEC 61000-4-4, ±2 kV (500 V AC infeed*)
tested with 5 kHz.
±1 kV (signal cable <30 m)
If you mount the motor starter to the right of a 15 mm or 20 mm I/O module or immediately next to a
head module, use a dummy module. You will find further information in "Selecting motor starters with
a suitable BaseUnit (Page 42)."
High-energy single pulse (surge) in 500 V AC infeed 3
accordance with IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV conducted interference - phase to
ground
±1 kV conducted interference - phase to phase

24 V supply cable:
±1 kV conducted interference - phase to
ground **)
±0.5 kV conducted interference - phase to
phase **)
**) An RC circuit is not required for hybrid switching devices.
If higher values (2 kV (phase to ground) or 1 kV (phase to phase) are required, you will need an addi-
tional external protective circuit (see Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual).

Sinusoidal disturbance variables

The tables below show the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system with regard to sinusoidal disturbance variables.
● RF radiation

Table 15- 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF radiation

RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3/NAMUR 21 Corresponds to degree

Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated of severity
80 to 1000 MHz; 1.0 to 2.0 GHz 2.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz 3
10 V/m 3 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)

● RF coupling

Distributed I/O system

290 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Technical specifications
15.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Table 15- 4 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF coupling

RF coupling in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6 Corresponds to degree

of severity
(10 kHz) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3
10 Vrms unmodulated
80% AM (1 kHz)
150 Ω source impedance

Emission of radio frequency interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55016 (measured at a
distance of 10 m).

Table 15- 5 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields

Frequency Interference emission

30 MHz to 230 MHz <40 dB (µV/m) Q
230 MHz to 1000 MHz <47 dB (µV/m) Q
1 GHz to 3 GHz <66 dB (µV/m) P
3 GHz to 6 GHz <70 dB (µV/m) P

Interference emission via the AC power supply according to EN 55016.

Table 15- 6 Interference emission via the AC power supply

Frequency Interference emission

0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz < 79 dB (µV/m)Q
< 66 dB (µV/m) M
0.5 MHz to 30 MHz < 73 dB (µV/m)Q
< 60 dB (µV/m) M

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 291
Technical specifications
15.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules

15.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules

Protecting ET 200SP with fail-safe modules against overvoltages

If your equipment requires protection from overvoltage, we recommend that you use an
external protective circuit (surge filter) between the load voltage power supply and the load
voltage input of the BaseUnits to ensure surge immunity for the ET 200SP with fail-safe
modules.

Note
Overvoltage protection measures always require a case-by-case examination of the entire
plant. Almost complete protection from overvoltages, however, can only be achieved if the
entire building surroundings have been designed for overvoltage protection. In particular, this
involves structural measures in the building design phase.
For detailed information regarding overvoltage protection, we recommend that you contact
your Siemens representative or a company specializing in lightning protection.

Distributed I/O system

292 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Technical specifications
15.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules

The following figure shows an example configuration with fail-safe modules. Voltage is
supplied by one power supply unit. Note, however, that the total current of the modules fed
by the power supply unit must not exceed the permissible limits. You can also use multiple
power supply units.

Figure 15-1 External protective circuit (surge filter) for ET 200SP with failsafe modules

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 293
Technical specifications
15.4 Shipping and storage conditions

Figure 15-2 External protective circuit (surge filter) for ET 200SP with fail-safe modules

Name Part number of Dehn Co.

A = BVT AVD 24 918 422
B = DCO RK D 5 24 919 986
C = The external protective circuit required at the outputs of the modules F-PM-E power module load
group can be found in the Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual.

Distributed I/O system

294 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Technical specifications
15.4 Shipping and storage conditions

15.4 Shipping and storage conditions

Introduction
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system exceeds requirements in terms of shipping and
storage conditions according to IEC 61131-2. The following information applies to modules
that are shipped and/or stored in their original packaging.

Table 15- 7 Shipping and storage conditions for modules

Type of condition Permissible range

Free fall (in shipping package) ≤1 m
Temperature From -40 °C to +70 °C
Barometric pressure from 1140 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an elevation
of -1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 5% to 95%, without condensation
Sinusoidal oscillations according to 5 - 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 8.4 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Impact acc. to IEC 60068-2-271) 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

1) Not applicable to motor starters

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 295
Technical specifications
15.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

15.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

Operating conditions
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for use in weather-proof, fixed locations.
The operating conditions are based on the requirements of DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
You will find the permissible ambient conditions for the motor starter in the Technical data of
the motor starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/21859/td).

Mechanical environmental conditions

The following table shows the mechanical environmental conditions in the form of sinusoidal
vibrations.

Table 15- 8 Mechanical environmental conditions

Frequency band ET 200SP with IM 155- ET 200SP with ET 200SP with ET 200SP with digital
6 DP HF, BusAdapters BusAdapters BA 2×RJ45, IM 155-6 PN BA output module F-RQ
BA 2×FC, BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45 and BA 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5
BA SCRJ/FC, BA 2xLC LC/RJ45 A
and BA LC/FC
5 ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude
8.4 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration
10 ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude --- --- ---
60 ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz 5 g constant acceleration

Distributed I/O system

296 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Technical specifications
15.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

Tests of mechanical environmental conditions

The following table provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the
tests of environmental mechanical conditions.

Table 15- 9 Tests of mechanical environmental conditions

Condition tested Test standard Comment

Vibrations 2) Vibration test accord- Type of vibration: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 oc-
ing to IEC 60068-2-6 tave/minute.
(sinusoidal) BA 2×RJ45, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA LC/RJ45, IM 155-6 PN BA, digital output
module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
• 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude
• 8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration
IM 155-6 DP HF, BA 2×FC, BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/FC, BA 2xLC, BA
LC/FC
• 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz, 0.35 mm constant amplitude
• 60 Hz ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz, 5 g constant acceleration
Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis at each of three verti-
cally aligned axes
Shock 2) Shock, tested accord- Type of shock: Half-sine
ing to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three verti-
cally aligned axes
Repetitive shock 1) 2) Shock, tested accord- Type of shock: Half-sine
ing to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 25 g peak value, 6 ms duration
Direction of shock: 1000 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three
vertically aligned axes
1) Not applicable in the case of the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
2) Not applicable for motor starters

Climatic environmental conditions

The table below shows the permissible climatic environmental conditions for the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system:

Table 15- 10 Climatic environmental conditions

Environmental conditions Permissible range Comments
Temperature: -
horiz. mounting position: 0 to 60 °C
vertical mounting position: 0 to 50 °C
Permitted temperature 10 K/h -
change
Relative humidity from 10 to 95% Without condensation
Barometric pressure from 1140 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to
2000 m
Pollutant concentration ANSI/ISA-71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 -

SIPLUS products based on ET 200SP are offered for reliable operation under heavy to
extreme operating conditions.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 297
Technical specifications
15.6 Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage

15.6 Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage

Insulation
The insulation for the I/O modules is designed in accordance with the requirements of
EN 61131-2:2007. The insulation for the motor starters is designed in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 60947-1.

Note
In the case of modules with 24 V DC (SELV/PELV) supply voltage, galvanic isolations are
tested with 707 V DC (type test).

Pollution degree/overvoltage category according to IEC 61131

● Pollution degree 2
● Overvoltage category: II

Pollution degree/overvoltage category according to IEC 60947

● Pollution degree 2
● Overvoltage category: III

Protection class according to IEC 61131-2:2007

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets protection class I and includes parts of
protection classes II and III.
The grounding of the mounting rail must meet the requirements for a functional earth FE.
Recommendation: For a configuration immune to interference, the line for the ground should
have a cross-section > 6 mm2.
The installation location (e.g. enclosure, control cabinet) must have a protective conductor
connection that meets the standard to maintain protection class I.

Distributed I/O system

298 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Technical specifications
15.7 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres

Degree of protection IP20

Degree of protection IP20 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all modules of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system, which means:
● Protection against contact with standard probes
● Protection against foreign objects with diameters in excess of 12.5 mm
● No protection against water

Note
Use a BU cover
To meet the requirements of the degree of protection "IP20", fit a BU cover onto unfitted
BaseUnits.
To ensure touch safety, fit a cover onto the opening of the infeed bus contacts belonging to
the last plugged-in motor starter BaseUnit.

Rated voltage for operation

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system works with the rated voltage and corresponding
tolerances listed in the following table.
Note the supply voltage of each module when selecting the rated voltage.

Table 15- 11 Rated voltage for operation

Rated voltage Tolerance range

24 V DC 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 1)
18.5 to 30.2 V DC 2)
120 V AC 93 to 132 V AC
230 V AC 187 to 264 V AC
400 V AC 3) 48 to 500 V AC
1) Static value: Creation as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation according to
IEC 60364-4-41
2) Dynamic value: Including ripple, e.g. as in the case of three-phase bridge power rectification
3) Valid for the infeed bus of the modules and BaseUnits of motor starters only

15.7 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres

See product information "Use of subassemblies/modules in Zone 2 Hazardous Area"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19692172).

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 299
Dimension drawings A
A.1 Shield connector

Dimensional diagram of the shield connector

Figure A-1 Dimensional diagram of the shield connector

A.2 Labeling strip

Dimension drawing of the labeling strips (roll)

Figure A-2 Dimension drawing of the labeling strips (roll)

Dimension drawing of the labeling strips (DIN A4 sheet)

The product information for the labeling strips (DIN A4 sheets) is available for download on
the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/de/Catalog/Product/6ES7193-6LA10-
0AA0).

Distributed I/O system

300 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Dimension drawings
A.3 Reference identification labels

A.3 Reference identification labels

Dimensional diagram of reference identification label and sheet

Figure A-3 Dimensional diagram of reference identification label and sheet

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 301
Accessories/spare parts B
Accessories for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Table B- 1 Accessories, general

Accessories, general Packing unit Article number

Cover for the BusAdapter interface 5 units 6ES7591-3AA00-0AA0
PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector 1 unit 6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0
Server module (spare part) 1 unit 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
BU cover
• 15 mm wide 5 units 6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0

• 20 mm wide 5 units 6ES7133-6CV20-1AM0

24 V DC connector (spare part) 10 units 6ES7193-4JB00-0AA0

Shield connection for BaseUnit (shield contacts and shield 5 units 6ES7193-6SC00-1AM0
terminals)
Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels 10 units 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0
Labeling strips (for labeling the I/O modules)
• Roll, light gray labeling strips (with a total of 500 1 unit 6ES7193-6LR10-0AA0
strips), film, for labeling with thermal transfer roll printer

• Roll, yellow labeling strips (with a total of 500 strips), 1 unit 6ES7193-6LR10-0AG0
film, for labeling with thermal transfer roll printer

• DIN A4 sheets, light gray labeling strips (with a total of 10 units 6ES7193-6LA10-0AA0
1000 labels), paper, perforated, for labeling with laser
printer

• DIN A4 sheets, yellow labeling strips (with a total of 10 units 6ES7193-6LA10-0AG0

1000 labels), paper, perforated, for labeling with laser
printer
Electronic coding element (type H) (spare part) 5 units 6ES7193-6EH00-1AA0
Electronic coding element (type F, for fail-safe modules) 5 units 6ES7193-6EF00-1AA0
(spare part)
Mounting rails, tinned steel strip
• Length: 483 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA11

• Length: 530 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA21

• Length: 830 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA31

• Length: 2000 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA41

Distributed I/O system

302 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Accessories/spare parts

Table B- 2 Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 15 mm wide

Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), Packing unit Article number
15 mm wide
16 process terminals (see I/O module manual)
• Gray (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC00 10 units 6ES7193-6CP00-2MA0

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 16); color 10 units 6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0

code CC01

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 16); color 50 units 6ES7193-6CP01-4MA0

code CC01

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 16); color 10 units 6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0

code CC02

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 16); color 50 units 6ES7193-6CP02-4MA0

code CC02

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), gray 10 units 6ES7193-6CP03-2MA0

(terminals 13 to 16); color code CC03

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), blue 10 units 6ES7193-6CP04-2MA0

(terminals 13 to 16); color code CC04

• Gray (terminals 1 to 12), red (terminals 13 and 14), 10 units 6ES7193-6CP05-2MA0

blue (terminals 15 and 16)
10 AUX terminals (for BU15-P16+A10+2D, BU15-P16+A10+2B)
• Yellow-green (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC71 10 units 6ES7193-6CP71-2AA0

• Red (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC72 10 units 6ES7193-6CP72-2AA0

• Blue (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC73 10 units 6ES7193-6CP73-2AA0

• Blue (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC73 50 units 6ES7193-6CP73-4AA0

10 add-on terminals (for BU15-P16+A0+12D/T, BU15-P16+A0+12B/T)

• Red (terminals 1B to 5B), blue (terminals 1 to 5C); 10 units 6ES7193-6CP74-2AA0
color code CC74
16 potential terminals (for PotDis-BU-P1/x-R)
• Red (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC62 10 units 6ES7193-6CP62-2MA0

16 potential terminals (for PotDis-BU-P2/x-B)

• Blue (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC63 10 units 6ES7193-6CP63-2MA0

18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-P1-R)

• Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 10 units 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0

• Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 10 units 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0

18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-P2-B)

• Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 10 units 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0

• Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 10 units 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0

18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-BR-W)

• Yellow/green (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC11 10 units 6ES7193-6CP11-2MT0

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 303
Accessories/spare parts

Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), Packing unit Article number
15 mm wide
• Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 10 units 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0

• Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 10 units 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0

• Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 10 units 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0

18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-n.c.-G)

• Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 10 units 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0

Table B- 3 Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 20 mm wide

Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), Packing unit Article number
20 mm wide
12 process terminals (see I/O module manual)
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminals 5 to 8), blue 10 units 6ES7193-6CP41-2MB0
(terminals 9 to 12); color code CC41

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 and 10), blue 10 units 6ES7193-6CP42-2MB0
(terminals 11 and 12), color code CC42
6 process terminals (see I/O module manual)
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminal 5), blue (terminal 10 units 6ES7193-6CP51-2MC0
6); color code CC51

• Gray (terminals 1, 2 and 5), red (terminals 3 and 4), 10 units 6ES7193-6CP52-2MC0
blue (terminal 6); color code CC52
4 AUX terminals (for BU20-P12+A4+0B)
• Yellow-green (terminals 1 A to 4 A); color code CC81 10 units 6ES7193-6CP81-2AB0

• Red (terminals 1 A to 4 A); color code CC82 10 units 6ES7193-6CP82-2AB0

• Blue (terminals 1 A to 4 A); color code CC83 10 units 6ES7193-6CP83-2AB0

2 AUX terminals (for BU20-P6+A2+4D, BU20-P6+A2+4B)

• Yellow-green (terminals 1 A and 2 A); color code 10 units 6ES7193-6CP84-2AC0
CC84

• Red (terminals 1 A and 2 A); color code CC85 10 units 6ES7193-6CP85-2AC0

• Blue (terminals 1 A and 2 A); color code CC86 10 units 6ES7193-6CP86-2AC0

Table B- 4 SIMATIC memory card accessories

Capacity Packing unit Article number

4 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LCxx-0AA0
12 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LExx-0AA0
24 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LFxx-0AA0
256 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LL02-0AA0

Distributed I/O system

304 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Accessories/spare parts

Capacity Packing unit Article number

2 GB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LPxx-0AA0
32 GB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LTxx-0AA0

Table B- 5 Accessories for motor starters

Short designation Packing unit Article number

3DI/LC module (connecting terminal) 1 unit 3RK1908-1AA00-0BP0
Fan 1 unit 3RW4928-8VB00
BU cover 30 1 unit 3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0
Touch protection cover for the infeed bus 10 units 3RK1908-1DA00-2BP0
Mechanical bracket for BaseUnit 5 units 3RK1908-1EA00-1BP0

Components for lightning protection (lightning protection zone transition 0B to 1, 1 to 2 and 2 to 3)

You must install overvoltage protection devices in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system for
lightning protection purposes. You can find more information in the Designing interference-
free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function
manual.

Online catalog
Additional article numbers for ET 200SP can be found on the Internet
(http://mall.industry.siemens.com) in the online catalog and online ordering system.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 305
Accessories/spare parts
B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules

B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules

Overvoltage arrestors for fail-safe modules

Note
This section only lists the overvoltage arrestors that may be used to protect the fail-safe
modules.
Be sure to observe the detailed information on lightning protection and overvoltage
protection of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-
safe modules (Page 292).

Components for overvoltage protection of fail-safe modules (lightning protection zone transition
0B to 1)
The overvoltage arrestors are only required for unshielded cables. The Configuring
interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566)
Function Manual lists the overvoltage arrestors which you may use for fail-safe modules.

Distributed I/O system

306 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
Calculating the leakage resistance C
Introduction
If you wish to protect the ET 200SP using a ground-fault detector or a residual current circuit
breaker, then you need the leakage resistance to select the correct safety components.

Ohmic resistance
When determining the leakage resistance of the ET 200SP, you must take into account the
ohmic resistance from the RC combination of the module in question:

Table C- 1 Ohmic resistance

Module Ohmic resistance from RC network

CPU/interface module 10 MΩ (±5 %)
BaseUnit BU15...D 10 MΩ (±5 %)
BaseUnit BU30-MSx 10 MΩ (±5 %)

Formula
You can calculate the leakage resistance of the ET 200SP using the following formula if you
protect all of the modules listed above with one ground-fault detector:

RET200SP = Rmodule / N
RET200SP = Leakage resistance of the ET 200SP
Rmodule = Leakage resistance of a module
N = Number of BaseUnits BU15...D and interface module in the ET 200SP
RCPU/IM = RBU15...D = RModule = 9.5 MΩ
RCPU/IM = Leakage resistance of CP/interface module
RBU15...D = Leakage resistance of the BaseUnit BU15...D

If you protect the modules listed above within an ET 200SP with several ground-fault
detectors, you must determine the leakage resistance for each individual ground-fault
detector.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 307
Calculating the leakage resistance

Example
The structure of an ET 200SP system consists of an IM 155-6 PN ST, two BaseUnits
BU15...D and various input and output modules. The entire ET 200SP is protected with one
ground-fault detector:

Figure C-1 Calculation example for leakage resistance

Distributed I/O system

308 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
Safety-relevant symbols D
D.1 Safety-related symbols for devices without Ex protection
The following table contains an explanation of the symbols located in your SIMATIC device,
its packaging or the accompanying documentation.

Symbol Meaning
General warning sign Caution/Notice
You must read the product documentation. The product documentation contains
information about the potential risks and enable you to recognize risks and im-
plement countermeasures.
Read the information provided by the product documentation.
ISO 7010 M002
Ensure the device is only installed by electrically skilled person.
IEC 60417 No. 6182
Note that connected mains lines must be designed according to the expected
minimum and maximum ambient temperature.

Note that the device must be constructed and connected in accordance with EMC
regulations.

Note that a 230 V device can be exposed to electrical voltages which can be dan-
gerous.
ANSI Z535.2

Note that a device of Protection Class III may only be supplied with a protective
low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV.
IEC 60417-1-5180 "Class III equipment"

Be aware that the device is only approved for the industrial field and only for in-
door use.

Note that an enclosure is required for installing the device. Enclosures are con-
sidered:
• Standing control cabinet
• Serial control cabinet
• Terminal boxes
• Wall enclosure

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 309
Safety-relevant symbols
D.2 Safety-related symbols for devices with Ex protection

D.2 Safety-related symbols for devices with Ex protection

The following table contains an explanation of the symbols located in your SIMATIC device,
its packaging or the accompanying documentation.

Symbol Meaning
The assigned safety symbols apply to devices with Ex approval.
You must read the product documentation. The product documentation contains
information about the potential risks and enable you to recognize risks and im-
plement countermeasures.

Read the information provided by the product documentation.

ISO 7010 M002
Ensure the device is only installed by electrically skilled person.
IEC 60417 No. 6182
Observe the mechanical rating of the device.

Note that connected mains lines must be designed according to the expected
minimum and maximum ambient temperature.

Note that the device must be constructed and connected in accordance with EMC
regulations.

When the device is under voltage, note that it may not be installed or removed, or
plugged or pulled.

Note that a 230 V device can be exposed to electrical voltages which can be dan-
gerous.
ANSI Z535.2

Note that a device of Protection Class III may only be supplied with a protective
low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV.
IEC 60417-1-5180 "Class III equipment"

Be aware that the device is only approved for the industrial field and only for in-
door use.

Distributed I/O system

310 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Safety-relevant symbols
D.2 Safety-related symbols for devices with Ex protection

Symbol Meaning
For Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, be aware that the device may only
be used when it is installed in an enclosure with a degree of protection ≥ IP54.

For Zone 22 potentially explosive atmospheres, be aware that the device may
only be used when it is installed in an enclosure with a degree of protection ≥
IP6x.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 311
Glossary

1oo1 evaluation
Type of → sensor evaluation – in the case of the 1oo1 evaluation, there → is one sensor with
a 1-channel connection to the F module.

1oo2 evaluation
Type of → sensor evaluation – in the case of 1oo2 evaluation , two input channels are
assigned one two-channel sensor or two one-channel sensors. The input signals are
compared internally for equivalence or nonequivalence.

Acknowledgment time
During the acknowledgment time, the → F-I/O acknowledge the sign of life specified by the →
F-CPU. The acknowledgment time is included in the calculation of the → monitoring time and
→ response time of the overall fail-safe system.

Actuator
Actuators are, for example, power relays or contactors for switching on load devices or load
devices themselves (e.g. directly controlled solenoid valves).

Automation system
Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process
sequences of the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The
automation system consists of different components and integrated system functions
depending on the automation task.

AUX bus
Self-assembling bus, can be used individually, for example, as a protective conductor bus or
for additional required voltage.

Availability
Availability is the probability that a system is functional at a specific point in time. Availability
can be increased by redundancy, e.g., by using multiple -> sensors at the
same measuring
point.

Distributed I/O system

312 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Glossary

AWG (American Wire Gauge)

A standard measure for conductors used in the USA, which is assigned to a specific cross-
sectional area of a conductor or wire. Each AWG number represents a jump of 26% in the
cross-sectional area. The thicker the wire, the smaller the AWG number.

BaseUnit
BaseUnits realize the electrical and mechanical connection of the I/O modules with the
interface module and the server module.
The inserted I/O module determines the signals at the terminals of the BaseUnits.
Depending on the selected BaseUnit, only certain terminals are available.

BaseUnit, dark-colored
Conduction of the internal power and AUX buses from the left adjacent module to the
subsequent modules on the right.

BaseUnit, light-colored
Inserted as first BaseUnit and opens a new potential group with electrical isolation. The
power and AUX buses are separate from the adjacent module on the left. It feeds the supply
voltage.

Baud rate
Speed at which data is transferred, indicating the number of transmitted bits per second
(baud rate = bit rate).

BU cover
Cover for unused slots on the BaseUnit or placeholder for planned I/O modules. For a future
expansion, the reference identification label of the planned I/O module can be kept here.

Bus
Joint transmission path to which all participants of a fieldbus system are connected; has two
defined ends.

BusAdapter
Enables free selection of the connection technology for the PROFINET fieldbus.

Channel fault
Channel-specific fault, such as a wire break or short circuit.
In channel-specific passivation, the affected channel is either automatically reintegrated or
the fail-safe module must be removed and reinserted after the fault has been eliminated.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 313
Glossary

Channel group
The channels of a module are grouped together in a channel group. Certain parameters in
STEP 7 can only be assigned to channel groups, rather than to individual channels.

Channel number
Channel numbers are used to uniquely identify the inputs and outputs of a module and to
assign channel-specific diagnostic messages.

Channel-specific passivation
With this type of passivation, only the affected channel is passivated in the event of a →
channel fault. In the event of a → module fault, all channels of the → fail-safe module are
passivated.

Configuration
Systematic arrangement of the individual modules.

Configuration control
Function that enables a flexible adjustment of the actual configuration based on a configured
maximum configuration via the user program. Input, output and diagnostics addresses
remain unchanged.

Connecting to common potential

Configuring a new potential group for which a new infeed is set up for the supply voltage.

Connection plug
Physical connection between device and cable.

CPU
The CPU uses the integrated system power supply to supply the electronics of the modules
via the backplane bus. The CPU contains the operating system and executes the user
program. The user program is located on the SIMATIC memory card and is processed in the
work memory of the CPU. The PROFINET interfaces of the CPU establish an Industrial
Ethernet connection. The CPUs of the ET 200SP support operation as an IO controller, I-
device or standalone CPU.

CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check

Distributed I/O system

314 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Glossary

CRC signature
The validity of the process values in the safety frame, the accuracy of the assigned address
references, and the safety-related parameters are validated by means of the CRC signature
in the safety frame.

Crimping
Procedure in which two components, e.g. end sleeve and cable, are connected with each
other by plastic strain.

Dark period
Dark periods occur during shutdown tests and complete bit pattern tests. The fail-safe output
module switches test-related zero signals to the active output. This output is then briefly
disabled (= dark period). An adequate carrier → actuator will not respond to this and will
remain activated.

Derating
Derating allows devices to be used even in harsh operating conditions by selectively
restricting the output capacity. In the case of motor starters, this usually refers to operation at
high ambient temperatures.

Device name
Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name.
An IO device is delivered without a device name. An IO device can only be addressed by the
IO controller after it has been assigned a device name via the PG/PC or via the topology,
e.g. for the transfer of configuration data (such as IP address) during startup or for the
exchange of user data during cyclic operation.

Diagnostics
Monitoring functions for the recognition, localization, classification, display and further
evaluation of errors, faults and alarms. They run automatically during plant operation. This
increases the availability of plants because commissioning times and downtimes are
reduced.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 315
Glossary

Discrepancy analysis
The discrepancy analysis for equivalence/non-equivalence is used for fail-safe applications
to prevent errors from time differences between two signals for the same function. The
discrepancy analysis is initiated when different levels are detected in two associated input
signals (when testing for non-equivalence: the same levels). A check is performed to
determine whether the difference (for nonequivalence testing: the same levels) has
disappeared after an assignable time period, the so-called discrepancy time. If not, this
means that a discrepancy error exists.
The discrepancy analysis compares the two input signals of the 1oo2 sensor evaluation in
the fail-safe input module.

Discrepancy time
Configurable time for the → discrepancy analysis. If the discrepancy time is set too high, the
fault detection time and → fault reaction time 
are extended unnecessarily. If the discrepancy
time is set too low, availability is decreased unnecessarily since a discrepancy error is
detected when, in reality, no error exists.

Distributed I/O system

System with input and output modules that are configured on a distributed basis, far away
from the CPU controlling them.

DP
→ Distributed I/O system

Earth
Conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.

Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (potential equalization conductor) that brings the bodies of electrical
equipment and other conductive bodies to the same or almost the same potential, in order to
prevent disruptive or dangerous voltages between these bodies.

Explosion protection
Requirement for the use of electrical equipment in hazardous areas in accordance with DIN
EN 60079-0.

Fail-safe modules
ET 200SP modules with integrated safety functions that can be used for safety-related
operation (safety mode).

Distributed I/O system

316 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Glossary

Fail-safe systems
Fail-safe systems (F-systems) remain in a safe state or immediately assume another safe
state as soon as particular failures occur.

Fault reaction time

The maximum fault reaction time of an F-system defines the interval between the occurrence
of any fault and a safe reaction at all affected fail-safe outputs.
For → F-system overall: The maximum fault reaction time defines the
 interval between the
occurrence of any fault in any → F-I/O and a safe response at the relevant fail-safe output.
For digital inputs: The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the
occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction on the backplane bus.
For digital outputs: The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the
occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction at the digital output.

Fault tolerance time

The fault tolerance time of a process is the time a process can be left unattended without risk
to life and limb of the operating personnel, or damage to the environment.
Any type of F-system control is tolerated within this fault tolerance time, i.e. the → F-system
can control its processes incorrectly or even not at all. The fault tolerance time depends on
the type of process and must be determined on a case-by-case basis.

F-CPU
An F-CPU is a central processing unit with fail-safe capability that is permitted for use in
SIMATIC Safety. A standard user program can also be run on the F-CPU.

F-I/O
Collective name for fail-safe inputs and outputs available in SIMATIC S7 for integration into
the SIMATIC Safety F-system. Available F-I/O modules:
● Fail-safe I/O module for ET 200eco
● Fail-safe signal modules S7-300 (F-SMs)
● Fail-safe modules for ET 200S
● Fail-safe modules for ET 200SP
● Fail-safe modules for ET 200MP
● Fail-safe DP standard slaves
● Fail-safe PA field devices
● Fail-safe IO devices

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 317
Glossary

Firmware update
Upgrade of firmware for modules (interface modules, I/O modules etc.), e.g. after function
extensions, to the newest firmware version (update).

F-monitoring time
→ PROFIsafe monitoring time

F-Systems
→ fail-safe systems

Functional ground
Functional ground is a low-impedance current path between electric circuits and ground. It is
not designed as a safety measure but instead, for example, as a measure to improve
interference immunity.

Ground
All interconnected, inactive parts of a piece of equipment that cannot accept any dangerous
contact voltage, even in the event of a fault.

Grounding
Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to a grounding electrode by
means of a grounding system.

GSD file
As a Generic Station Description, this file contains all properties of a PROFINET or
PROFIBUS device that are necessary for its configuration in XML format.

I/O modules
All modules, with the exception of the motor starters, that can be operated with a CPU or an
interface module.

Identification data
Information that is saved in modules and that supports the user in checking the plant
configuration and locating hardware changes.

Infeed system
The infeed system with the terminals L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE enables several SIMATIC ET
200SP motor starters to be supplied using a single infeed terminal.

Distributed I/O system

318 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Glossary

Interface module
Module in the distributed I/O system. The interface module connects the distributed I/O
system via a fieldbus to the CPU (IO controller) and prepares the data for and from I/O
modules.

IO-Link
IO-Link is a point-to-point connection to conventional and intelligent sensors/actuators by
unshielded standard cables in proven 3-wire technology. IO-Link is downward compatible to
all DI/DQ sensors/actuators. Switching status channel and data channel are designed in
proven 24 V DC technology.

Line
All the modules attached to a mounting rail.

Load current supply

Supply of modules like the interface module, power supply modules, I/O modules, and (if
applicable) sensors and actuators.

MAC address
Device identification unique worldwide, which is already assigned to each PROFINET device
in the factory. Its 6 bytes are divided into 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and 3 bytes for the
device ID (serial number). The MAC address is usually legible on the device.

Main switch
Every industrial machine that falls under the scope of DIN EN 60204 Part 1 (VDE 0113,
Part 1) must be equipped with a main switch that disconnects all electrical equipment from
the network while cleaning, maintenance, and repair work is being carried out, as well as
during long periods of downtime. Usually a switch which can be operated by hand that is
stipulated for electrical or mechanical prevention of a hazard. The main switch can also
function as an EMERGENCY-OFF device.
The main switch must meet the following requirements:
● Externally accessible mechanical rotary lock.
● Only one OFF position and one ON position with allocated stops.
● Two positions labeled "0" and "I". 4th lockable OFF position.
● Cover for the power supply terminals to protect against accidental contact.
● The switching capacity must correspond to AC-23 for motor switches and AC-22 for load-
break switches (utilization category).
● Switch position displayed automatically.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 319
Glossary

Module fault
Module faults can be external faults (e.g. missing load voltage) or internal faults (e.g.
processor failure). Internal faults always require module replacement.

Monitoring time
→ PROFIsafe monitoring time

Motor starter
Motor starter is the generic term for direct-on-line and reversing starters.

M-switch
Each fail-safe digital output of ET 200SP F-modules consists of a P-switch DO-Px (current
sourcing) and an M-switch DO-Mx (current sinking). The load is connected between the P-
switch and M-switch. The two switches are always activated so that voltage is applied to the
load.

Node
Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. IO device via PROFINET IO.

Nonequivalent sensor
A nonequivalent → sensor is a two-way switch that is connected to two inputs of an → F-I/O
(via 2 channels) in → fail-safe systems (for → 1oo2 evaluation of sensor signals).

Overload release
Overcurrent release that provides protection against overload.

Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment is the transfer of parameters from the IO controller/DP master to the
IO device/DP slave.

Passivation
If an → F-I/O module detects a fault it switches either the affected channel or all channels to
a → safe state, i.e. the channels of this F-I/O module are passivated. The F-I/O module
signals the detected faults to the → F-CPU.
When passivating channels at F-I/O with inputs, the → F-System provides fail-safe values for
the → safety program instead of the process values pending at the fail-safe inputs.
When passivating channels at F-I/O with outputs, the F-system returns fail-safe values (0) to
the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values provided by the safety program.

Distributed I/O system

320 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Glossary

PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage

Performance Level
Performance Level (PL) in accordance with ISO 13849-1 or EN ISO 13849-1

Potential group
Group of I/O modules that are jointly supplied with voltage.

Prewiring
Wiring the electrics on a mounting rail before the I/O modules are connected.

Process image (I/O)

The CPU transfers the values from the input and output modules to this memory area. At the
start of the cyclic program, the signal states of the input modules are transmitted to the
process image input. At the end of the cyclic program, the process image output is
transmitted as signal state to the output modules.

Product version (ES) = Functional status (FS)

The product version or functional status provides information on the hardware version of the
module.

PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, process and fieldbus standard that is specified in IEC 61158 Type 3. It
specifies functional, electrical and mechanical properties for a bit-serial fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is available with the following protocols: DP (= Distributed Periphery), FMS (=
Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation) or TF (= Technological
Functions).

PROFINET
PROcess FIeld NETwork, open industrial Ethernet standard which continues PROFIBUS
and Industrial Ethernet. A cross-manufacturer communication, automation and engineering
model by PROFIBUS International e.V., defined as an automation standard.

PROFINET IO controller
Device used to address connected I/O devices (e.g. distributed I/O systems). This means:
The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned I/O devices. The IO
controller often corresponds to the CPU in which the automation program is running.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 321
Glossary

PROFINET IO
Communication concept for the realization of modular, distributed applications within the
scope of PROFINET.

PROFINET IO device
Distributed field device that can be assigned to one or more IO controllers (e.g. distributed
I/O system, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches).

PROFIsafe
Safety-oriented PROFINET I/O bus profile for communication between the → safety program
and the → F-I/O module in a → fail-safe system.

PROFIsafe address
The PROFIsafe address (code name according to IEC 61784-3-3: 2010) is used to protect
standard addressing mechanisms such as IP addresses. The PROFIsafe address consists
of the F-source address and F-destination address. Every → fail-safe module therefore has
two address portions, the F-source address and the F-destination address.
The PROFIsafe address must be configured in the hardware and network editor.

PROFIsafe monitoring time

Monitoring time for safety-related communication between the F-CPU and F-I/O

Proof-test interval
Period after which a component must be forced to fail-safe state, that is, it is either replaced
with an unused component, or is proven faultless.

Provider-Consumer principle
Principle of data communication on the PROFINET IO: in contrast to PROFIBUS, both
parties are independent providers when sending data.

P-switch
→ M-switch

Push-in terminal
Push-in connections are a form of spring-loaded terminals allowing wiring without tools for
rigid conductors or conductors equipped with end sleeves.

Distributed I/O system

322 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Glossary

Redundancy, availability-enhancing
Multiple instances of components with the objective of maintaining component functionality in
the event of hardware faults.

Redundancy, safety-enhancing
Multiple availability of components with the aim of exposing hardware faults based on
comparison; such as → 1oo2 evaluation in → fail-safe modules.

Reference identification
In accordance with EN 81346, a specific object is clearly referenced in relation to the system
to whose components the object belongs. Thus, unique identification of the modules in the
entire system is possible.

Reference potential
Potential from which the voltages of the participating circuits are considered and/or
measured.

Reintegration
After the elimination of a fault, it is necessary to ensure the reintegration (depassivation) of
the → F-I/O. Reintegration (switchover from fail-safe values to process values) occurs either
automatically or only after a user acknowledgment in the safety program.
In the case of a fail-safe input module, the process values pending at the fail-
safe inputs are
made available to the
safety program again after reintegration. In the case of a fail-safe
output module, the → fail-safe system transfers the output values in the safety program to the
fail-safe outputs again.

RIOforFA-Safety
Remote IO for Factory Automation with PROFIsafe; Profile for F-I/O

RoHS
EC Directive 2011/65/EU concerning the restriction of certain dangerous substances in
electrical and electronic devices regulates the use of hazardous substances in devices and
components. The English abbreviation RoHS is used to refer to this directive: (Restriction of
the use of certain hazardous substances), as well as all related measures for implementing it
into national legislation.

Safe state
The basic principle of the safety concept in F-systems is the existence of a safe state for all
process variables. For the digital F-I/O, for example, the safe state is the value "0".

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 323
Glossary

Safety class
Safety level (Safety Integrity Level) SIL according to IEC 61508:2010. The higher the Safety
Integrity Level, the more rigid the measures for prevention of systematic faults and for
management of systematic faults and hardware failures.
The fail-safe modules support operation in safety mode up to safety class SIL3.

Safety frame
In safety mode, data are transferred between the → F-CPU and → F-I/O in a safety frame.

Safety function
A mechanism integrated in the → F-CPU and → F-I/O that enables their use in → the fail-safe
system SIMATIC Safety.
According to IEC 61508:2010: A safety function is implemented by a safety system in order
to maintain or force a system safe state in the event of a specific fault.

Safety mode
Operating mode of → F-I/O that enables → safety-related communication via → safety frames.
→ ET 200SP fail-safe modules can only used in safety mode.

Safety program
Safety-related user program

Safety-related communication
Communication used to exchange fail-safe data.

Self-assembling voltage buses

Three internal, self-assembling buses (P1, P2 and AUX) that supply the I/O modules with
power.

SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage

Sensor evaluation
There are two types of sensor evaluation:
→ 1oo1 evaluation – sensor signal is read once
→ 1oo2 evaluation – sensor signal is read in twice by the same F-module and compared
internally

Distributed I/O system

324 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Glossary

Sensors
Sensors are used for the accurate detection of routes, positions, velocities, rotational
speeds, masses, etc. in the form of digital and analog signals.

Server module
The server module completes the configuration of the ET 200SP.

Service life
Period of time for which the switching device will work properly under normal operating
conditions. This is specified as the number of operating cycles, the electrical durability (e.g.
contact erosion), and the mechanical durability (e.g. operating cycles without load).

SIL (Safety Integrity Level)

Discrete level (one of three possibilities) for defining safety integrity specifications of safety-
related control functions. Safety integrity level 3 is the highest possible level, level 1 the
lowest.

Slave station
A slave can only exchange data after being requested to do so by the master.

SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is the standardized protocol for diagnosing
and also configuring the Ethernet infrastructure.
In the office area and in automation technology, devices support a wide range of
manufacturers on the Ethernet SNMP.
SNMP-based applications can be operated on the same network in parallel to applications
with PROFINET.

Standard mode
Operating mode of F-I/O in which standard communication is possible by means of → safety
frames, but not → safety-related communication.
Fail-safe ET 200SP modules can only be operated in safety mode.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 325
Glossary

Switch
PROFIBUS is a linear network. The communication nodes are linked by means of a passive
cable - the bus.
By contrast, Industrial Ethernet consists of point-to-point connections: each communication
node is interconnected directly with precisely one other communication node.
If a communication node is linked to several communication nodes, this communication node
is connected to the port of an active network component - the switch. Other communications
devices (including switches) can then be connected to the other ports of the switch. The
connection between a communication node and the switch remains a point-to-point
connection.
The task of a switch is thus to regenerate and distribute received signals. The switch "learns"
the Ethernet address(es) of a connected PROFINET device or additional switches and only
forwards those signals that are intended for the connected PROFINET device or switch.
A switch has a specific number of connections (ports). You connect at most one PROFINET
device or additional switch to each port.

Technology object
A technology object supports you in the configuration and commissioning of a technological
function.
The properties of real objects are represented by the technology objects in the controller.
Real objects can be, for example, controlled systems or drives.
The technology object includes all data of the real object that is required for its open-loop or
closed-loop control, and it signals the status information.

TIA Portal
Totally Integrated Automation Portal
The TIA Portal is the key to the full performance capability of Totally Integrated Automation.
The software optimizes all operating, machine and process sequences.

Total current
Sum of the currents of all output channels of a digital output module.

TWIN end sleeve

End sleeve for two cables

Type of coordination 1
The motor starter may be non-operational after a short circuit has been cleared. Damage to
the motor starter is permissible.

Distributed I/O system

326 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Glossary

Types of coordination
The IEC 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) standard distinguishes between two types of
coordination referred to as coordination type "1" and coordination type "2". The short circuit
that needs to be dealt with is cleared reliably and safely with both types of coordination; the
only differences are in the extent of the damage sustained by the device following a short
circuit.

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 327
Index

Wiring, 107
Wiring rules, 99
2 BU cover
Assembling, 86
24 V DC supply, 88
Description, 32
Installation, 118
BusAdapter, 29
3
3DI/LC module, 35, 123
Assembling, 124 C
Connections, 111
Cable shield, 105
Disassembling, 126
Changes
Functions, 111
Compared to previous version, 17
3-wire connection, 61
Changing type
Coding element, 251
I/O module, 251
A
Climatic environmental conditions, 297
Accessible devices Color identification label, 128
Firmware update, 261 Description, 34
Accessories, 302 Installing, 130
Addressing, 139 Commissioning, 199, 200, 207
Basics, 139 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card, 213
Application Reset to factory settings, 268
in industrial environments, 288 Startup, 212
in mixed areas, 288 Components
in residential areas, 288 ET 200SP at a glance, 27
Approvals, 282 In accordance with DIN VDE regulation, 95
Assembling, 77 Configuration, 20
3DI/LC module, 123 Basics, Error! Bookmark not defined.
BU cover, 86 Electrical, 97
Infeed bus, 81 On grounded reference potential, 94
Assembly/disassembly position, 122 Configuration control, 172
AUX bus (AUX(iliary) bus), 53 Configuration example, 201, 203, 205, 207, 209, 211
Configuration software, 134
Configuring, 134
B Properties of the CPUs, 139
Connecting
BaseUnit, 30, 36
Cable shield, 105
Assembling, 77, 121
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the
Disassembling, 254
interface module, 117
Modules with temperature measurement, 41
Control data record, 181
Modules without temperature measurement, 40
S7-1500, 179
Mounting, dismantling, 74
CPU
Potential group, 50, 55
Backup/restore contents, 232
Replacing the terminal box, 255
Reading out service data, 280
Types, 36
Reset to factory settings, 264
wiring, 102
Synchronizing the time, 234

Distributed I/O system

328 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Index

D G
Degree of protection, 299 Grounding
Dimensional diagram Configuration on grounded reference potential, 94
Labeling strip, 300 Graphical overview of ET 200SP, 96
Reference identification label, 301
Shield connector, 300
Disassembling, 254 I
Dummy module
I/O module, 31
mounting, 69
Changing type, 251
Inserting or removing, 247
Installation, 118
E
replace, 253
Electrical isolation, 97 Identification data, 225
Electrical relationships, 97 Incoming supply, grounded, 94
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 289 Infeed bus
EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility), 289 Assembling, 82
EMERGENCY STOP devices, 87 Cover, 35
Environmental conditions Infeed bus cover, 35
Climatic, 297 Installation
Mechanical, 296 BaseUnit, 74
ET 200SP BU cover, 118
Area of application, 20 I/O module, 118, 247
Commissioning, 199 Installation position, 64
Components, 27 Interface module, 70
Configuration example, 21, 24 Minimum clearances, 66
Configuring, 134 Mounting rail, 65
Overall configuration, 96 Rules, 66
Rules and regulations for operation, 87 Server module, 80
Selecting a BaseUnit, 36 Installation position, 64
Short-circuit / overload protection, 95 Insulation, 298
Example Interface module, 28
ET 200SP configuration, 21, 24 Connecting the supply voltage, 113
Leakage resistance, 308 Mounting, dismantling, 70
Potential group, configuration, 60 RESET, 268
Reset to factory settings, 268
Wiring rules, 99
F Interference-free design, 68
Factory settings, 264
Fan, 35
L
Mounting, 120
FAQ Labeling strip
Emergency address, 233 Dimensional diagram, 300
Removing a SIMATIC memory card, 242 Labeling strips, 34
Repairing the SIMATIC memory card, 243 Installing, 132
Trace function, 279 Leakage resistance, 307
Firmware update, 257 Lightning protection, 88
Line voltage, 88

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 329
Index

M RUN, 217
Setting the startup behavior, 216
Maintenance, 247
STARTUP, 215
Changing type, 251
STOP, 217
Firmware update, 257
Operating position, 122
Reading out service data, 280
Option handling, (See configuration control)
Removal and insertion, 247
Overall configuration, 96
Replacing modules, 253
Overload behavior, 149
Replacing the terminal box, 255
Overview, graphic
Reset to factory settings, 264
Grounding the ET 200SP, 96
Test functions, 273
Marking, 127
Color coding, factory setting, 127
P
Optional, 128
Maximum configuration, 48 Parking position/OFF, 122
Maximum cycle time, (Cycle monitoring time) Password provider, 166
Mechanical bracket, 35 PELV, 94
Mounting, 84 Potential distributor module, 30
Mechanical environmental conditions, 296 Installing, 79
Memory reset Selecting a PotDis-BaseUnit, 45
Automatic, 222 Selecting a PotDis-TerminalBlock, 46
Basics, 221 Potential group
Manual, 222 Configuration example, 60
Minimum clearances, 66 Forming, 50, 55
Motor starter, 31 Operating principle, graphical overview, 54, 55
Assembling, 77, 121 Process image
Disassembling, 121, 254 Inputs and outputs, 142
Mounting, 52, 66, 81, 86 Process image partition
Dummy module, 69 Updating in the user program, 143
Mechanical bracket, 83 updating, automatically, 143
Mounting rail, 27, 65 PROFINET IO, 199
Protection, 162, 167, 170
Access levels, 162
N Behavior of a password-protected CPU, 165
Copy protection, 170
Network Time Protocol, 234
Know-how protection, 167
NTP procedure, 234
Protection against short circuit, 93
Protection class, 298, 298
O
OBs, 146 R
Event source, 147
Radio interference, 288, 291
Events, 149
Rated voltage, 299
Overload behavior, 149
Reading out service data, 280
Priorities, 146
Reassigning parameters, 224
Priorities and runtime behavior, 148
Reference identification label, 34, 128
Queue, 146
Dimensional diagram, 301
Start events, 146
Installing, 133
Threshold mechanism, 150
Remove, 247
Time error OB, 150
Replacement
Operating modes
Coding element, 253
Basics, 214
Operating mode transitions, 218

Distributed I/O system

330 System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH
 Index

I/O module, 253 V

Terminal box on the BaseUnit, 255
Video sequence, 109
Replacing the terminal box, 255
RESET, 268
Reset to factory settings, 268
W
with RESET button, 268
Wiring
BaseUnit, 107
S BaseUnits, 102
General rules for ET 200SP, 87
Safe electrical isolation, 94
Rules, 99
Safety rules, 283
Server module, 33
Mounting, dismantling, 80
Z
Shield connection
Description, 34 Zone 2 potentially explosive atmosphere, 299
Shield connector
Dimensional diagram, 300
Shipping conditions, 295
Short-circuit and overload protection according to
DIN VDE regulation, 95
Short-circuit protection, 93
SIMATIC ET 200SP, 19
SIMATIC Memory Card, 240, 245, 246
Basics, 240
Firmware card, 245
Possible applications, 246
Program card, 245
repairing, 243
Updating firmware, 246
Spare parts, 302
Standards, 282
Starting up the ET 200SP, 212
Storage conditions, 295
Supply of external components, 63
Supply voltage, 113
Connecting, 113
Potential group, 50, 55
Synchronizing the time, 234

T
Technical specifications
Climatic environmental conditions, 297
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 289
Mechanical environmental conditions, 296
Shipping and storage conditions, 295
Standards and approvals, 282
Test functions, 273
Test voltage, 298

Distributed I/O system

System Manual, 02/2018, A5E03576849-AH 331
 Preface
___________________
Module overview of
ET 200SP 1
Supplements to ET 200SP
documentation 2
SIMATIC

ET 200SP
Product information on the
documentation of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system
Product Information

01/2019
A5E03799595-BB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03799595-BB Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2019.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 01/2019 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Validity
This product information supplements the documentation for the ET 200SP and takes
precedence over our system manuals, function manuals and product manuals.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that can be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 3
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Module overview of ET 200SP ................................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules ............................................................ 5
1.2 CPUs ...................................................................................................................................... 12
1.3 Interface modules................................................................................................................... 13
1.4 BaseUnits ............................................................................................................................... 15
1.5 I/O modules ............................................................................................................................ 17
1.6 Motor starters ......................................................................................................................... 19
1.7 Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 20
2 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation ............................................................................................ 25
2.1 System manual ...................................................................................................................... 25
2.2 BaseUnits manual .................................................................................................................. 27
2.2.1 Special consideration for BaseUnits with functional versions < 04........................................ 27
2.2.2 Terminal labeling of the PotDis-TB ........................................................................................ 28
2.3 CPU manuals ......................................................................................................................... 29
2.4 Interface module manuals ...................................................................................................... 30
2.5 I/O module manuals ............................................................................................................... 35
2.5.1 Digital module device manuals .............................................................................................. 37
2.5.2 Analog module device manuals ............................................................................................. 41
2.5.3 Communications module manuals ......................................................................................... 45
2.5.4 Device manuals Technology modules ................................................................................... 47

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

4 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
Module overview of ET 200SP 1
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules
Contents
This product information includes amendments and corrections to the documentation of the
ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).

Which I/O modules / motor starters fit on a BaseUnit?

The following table provides an overview of the I/O modules / motor starters that fit on the
corresponding compatible BaseUnits:

Table 1- 1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules

I/O module BaseUnit BU15- BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label

for process
BU type A0 BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type
terminals
P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0

P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+

0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
2B
Digital I/O modules
DI 16x24VDC ST ✓ CC00

DI 8x24VDC ST ✓ CC01

DI 8x24VDC HF ✓ CC01

DI 8x24VDC HS ✓ CC01

DI 8x24VDC BA ✓ CC01

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

5 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules

I/O module BaseUnit BU15- BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label

for process
BU type A0 BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type
terminals
P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0

P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+

0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
2B
DI 8x24VDC SRC BA ✓ CC02

DI 8xNAMUR HF ✓ CC01

DI 4x120..230VAC ✓ CC41
ST

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ✓ CC00
ST

DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST ✓ CC02

DQ 8x24VDC/0.5 ST ✓ CC02

DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ✓ CC02
HF

DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ✓ CC02
BA

DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ✓ CC01
SNK BA

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

6 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Module overview of ET 200SP
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules

I/O module BaseUnit BU15- BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label

for process
BU type A0 BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type
terminals
P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0

P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+

0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
2B
DQ ✓ CC41
4x24..230VAC/2A ST

DQ ✓ CC20
4x24..230VAC/2A HF

DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF ✓ CC02

DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS ✓ CC00

RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ✓ CC00
ST

RQ 4x120VDC- ✓ ✓ --- ---

230VAC/5A NO ST
RQ 4x120VDC- ✓ ✓ --- ---
230VAC/5A NO MA
ST
Analog I/O modules
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4- ✓ ✓ CC00
wire HF

AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire ✓ ✓ CC00

HF

AI 8xU BA ✓ ✓ CC02

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 7
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules

I/O module BaseUnit BU15- BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label

for process
BU type A0 BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type
terminals
P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0

P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+

0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
2B
AI 2xU ST ✓ ✓ CC00

AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST ✓ ✓ CC05

AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST ✓ ✓ CC03

AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF ✓ ✓ CC05

AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS ✓ ✓ CC00

AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA ✓ ✓ CC01

AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST ✓ ✓ CC03

AI 4xI 2-wire ✓ ✓ CC03

4...20mA HART

AQ 2xU ST ✓ ✓ CC00

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

8 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Module overview of ET 200SP
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules

I/O module BaseUnit BU15- BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label

for process
BU type A0 BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type
terminals
P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0

P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+

0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
2B
AQ 2xI ST ✓ ✓ CC00

AQ 4xU/I ST ✓ ✓ CC00

AQ 2xU/I HS ✓ ✓ CC00

AQ 2xU/I HF ✓ ✓ CC00

AI Energy Meter ✓ --- ---

400VAC ST
AI Energy Meter ✓ --- ---
480VAC ST
AI Energy Meter ✓ CC20
480VAC/CT HF

AI Energy Meter ✓ CC20

480VAC/RC HF

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 9
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules

I/O module BaseUnit BU15- BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded label

for process
BU type A0 BU type A1 BU type BU type BU BU BU type BU type BU type
terminals
P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T B0 B1 type C0 type C1 D0 F0 U0

P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P12+A4+ P12+A0 P6+A2 P6+A2 P12+A0 P8+A4+ P16+A0+

0B +4B +4D +4B +0B 0B 2D
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
2B
Fail-safe modules
F-PM-E 24VDC/8A ✓ CC52
PPM ST

F-DI 8x24VDC HF ✓ CC01

F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A ✓ CC02

PM HF

F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ✓ CC02

PP HF

F-RQ ✓ CC42
1x24VDC/24..230VA
C/5A

F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA ✓ ✓ CC00

2-/4-wire HF

Communication modules
CM 4xIO-Link ✓ CC04

CM AS-i Master ST ✓ --- ---

F-CM AS-i Safety ST ✓ ✓ --- ---
CM PtP ✓ --- ---
Technology modules
TM Count 1x24V ✓ --- ---
TM PosInput 1 ✓ --- ---
TM Timer DIDQ ✓ --- ---
10x24V
TM Pulse 2x24V ✓ --- ---
SIWAREX WP321 ✓ --- ---

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

10 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Module overview of ET 200SP
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules

Table 1- 2 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and motor starters

Motor starters BaseUnit BU30- Color-coded

MS1 MS2 MS3 MS4 MS5 MS6 label for process
terminals
with infeed with infeed with infeed without in- with in- without
24 V DC and 500 V AC 24 V DC feed feed 500 infeed
500 V AC V AC and with F-DI
F-DI ter- terminals
minals
Direct starter
DS 0.3 - 1 A HF ✓ ✓* --- ---
DS 0.9 - 3 A HF ✓ ✓* --- ---
DS 2.8 - 9 A HF ✓ ✓* --- ---
DS 4.0 - 12 A HF ✓ ✓* --- ---
Reversing starter
RS 0.3 - 1 A HF ✓ ✓* --- ---
RS 0.9 - 3 A HF ✓ ✓* --- ---
RS 2.8 - 9 A HF ✓ ✓* --- ---
RS 4.0 - 12 A HF ✓ ✓*
Failsafe direct starter
F-DS 0.3 - 1 A HF ✓ ✓ --- ---
F-DS 0.9 - 3 A HF ✓ ✓ --- ---
F-DS 2.8 - 9 A HF ✓ ✓ --- ---
F-DS 4.0 - 12 A HF ✓ ✓ --- ---
Fail-safe reversing starter
F-RS 0.3 - 1 A HF ✓ ✓ --- ---
F-RS 0.9 - 3 A HF ✓ ✓ --- ---
F-RS 2.8 - 9 A HF ✓ ✓ --- ---
F-RS 4.0 - 12 A HF ✓ ✓ --- ---

* The F-DI terminals do not have a function in this combination.

Table 1- 3 Combination possibilities between potential distributor BaseUnit and potential distributor terminal block

Potential distributor Potential distributor BaseUnit

terminal block PotDis-BU-P1/D-R PotDis-BU-P1/B-R PotDis-BU-P2/D-B PotDis-BU-P2/B-B

PotDis-TB-P1-R ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PotDis-TB-P2-B ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PotDis-TB-n.c.-G ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PotDis-TB-BR-W ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 11
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.2 CPUs

1.2 CPUs

CPUs

CPU Number in pack Article number

CPU 1510SP-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7510-1DJ0x-0AB0
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7510-1SJ0x-0AB0
CPU 1512SP-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7512-1DK0x-0AB0
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7512-1SK0x-0AB0
CPU 1515SP PC with server module Pack of 1 6ES7677-2AAxx-0xx0

Important differences between CPUs...PN

Features CPU 1510SP-1 CPU 1510SP F-1 CPU 1512SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
PN PN
Bus connection PROFINET: PROFINET:
BusAdapter (port 1, 2) BusAdapter (port 1, 2)
• BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware version • BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware version 1.6)
1.6) • BA 2xFC (as of firmware version V1.6)
• BA 2xFC (as of firmware version • BA 2xSCRJ (as of firmware V1.8)1
V1.6)
• BA SCRJ/RJ45 (as of firmware V1.8)1
RJ45, integrated (port 3)
• BA SCRJ/FC (as of firmware V1.8)1
• BA 2xLC (as of firmware V2.0)1
• BA LC/RJ45 (as of firmware V2.0)1
• BA LC/FC (as of firmware V2.0)1
RJ45, integrated (port 3)
PROFIBUS:
PROFIBUS DP connection socket via CM DP communication module
Number of modules 64
Data work memory 750 KB 750 KB 1 MB 1 MB
Code work memory 100 KB 150 KB 200 KB 300 KB
Address space 1280 bytes/2560 bytes2
Multi hot-swapping Yes
Can be used for safety No Yes No Yes
applications (supports
PROFIsafe V2.0)
1 Only with article numbers 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 and 6ES7512-1SK01-0AB0
2 Only 6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0, 6ES7512-1SJ01-0AB0, 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 and 6ES7512-1SK01-0AB0 with FW
version V2.0

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

12 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Module overview of ET 200SP
1.3 Interface modules

Note
The CM AS-i Master ST and F-CM AS-i Safety ST communication modules are supported as
of firmware V1.8 of the CPUs. Note the following additional requirements:
CM AS-i Master ST:
• Firmware version of the CM AS-i Master ST: V1.1
• STEP 7 (TIA Portal): V13 SP1 Update 4 or higher
F-CM AS-i Safety ST
• Firmware version of the CM AS-i Safety ST: V1.0
• STEP 7 (TIA Portal): as of V13 SP1 Update 4 and HSP0070 V3.0

1.3 Interface modules

Interface modules

Interface modules Number in pack Article number

Interface module IM 155-6 PN BA Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0
Interface module IM 155-6 PN ST
• with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 and server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AA01-0BN0

• with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0
Interface module IM 155-6 PN HS with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0
Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF with PROFIBUS FastConnect Pack of 1 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0
bus connector (6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0) and server module

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 13
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.3 Interface modules

Important differences between the interface modules

Features IM 155-6 PN IM 155-6 PN ST IM 155-6 PN/2 HF IM 155-6 PN HS IM 155-6 DP HF
BA IM 155-6 PN/3 HF
Bus connection PROFINET: PROFINET: PROFINET: PROFINET: PROFIBUS:
2xRJ45, BusAdapter BusAdapter BusAdapter PROFIBUS DP
integrated connection socket
• BA 2xRJ45 (as • BA 2xRJ45 (as of • BA 2xRJ45 (as of
of firmware firmware V2.0) firmware V4.0)
V1.0) • BA 2xFC (as of • BA 2xFC (as of
• BA 2xFC (as of firmware V2.0) firmware V4.0)
firmware V1.0) • BA 2xSCRJ (as of • BA 2xSCRJ (as of
firmware V2.2) firmware V4.0)
• BA SCRJ/RJ45 (as • BA SCRJ/RJ45 (as
of firmware V3.1) of firmware V4.0)
• BA SCRJ/FC (as of • BA SCRJ/FC (as of
firmware V3.1) firmware V4.0)
• BA 2xLC (as of • BA 2xLC (as of
firmware V3.3) firmware V4.0)
• BA LC/RJ45 (as of • BA LC/RJ45 (as of
firmware V3.3) firmware V4.0)
• BA LC/FC (as of • BA LC/FC (as of
firmware V3.3) firmware V4.0)
Number of mod- 12 32 64 30 32
ules
RESET button No Yes IM 155-6 PN/2 HF: Yes Yes Not necessary
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF: No
Address space 32 bytes 798 bytes 1440 bytes 968 bytes 244 bytes
(I/O data)
Multi hot- No No Yes Yes Yes
swapping

Table 1- 4 Station expansion via ET-Connection (mixed configuration ET 200SP/ET 200AL)

Modules Number in pack Article number

BU-Send Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0
BA-Send 1xFC Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

14 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Module overview of ET 200SP
1.4 BaseUnits

1.4 BaseUnits

BaseUnits

Table 1- 5 BaseUnits for I/O modules

BU BaseUnits (short name) Color-coded labels* Packaging unit Article number

type
A0 BU15-P16+A10+2D P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0DA0
A10: CC71 to CC73 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP20-2DA0
A0 BU15-P16+A0+2D P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0
Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2DA0
A0 BU15-P16+A10+2B P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BA0
A10: CC71 to CC73 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP20-2BA0
A0 BU15-P16+A0+2B P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2BA0
A1 BU15-P16+A0+12D/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP40-0DA1
12D: CC74
A1 BU15-P16+A0+2D/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA1
A1 BU15-P16+A0+12B/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP40-0BA1
12B: CC74
A1 BU15-P16+A0+2B/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA1
B0 BU20-P12+A4+0B A4: CC81 to CC83 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB0
Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP20-2BB0
B1 BU20-P12+A0+4B P12: CC41 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1
C0 BU20-P6+A2+4D P6: CC51, CC52 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0
A2: CC84 to CC86
C1 BU20-P6+A2+4B P6: CC51 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BC1
A2: CC84 to CC86
D0 BU20-P12+A0+0B --- Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0
F0 BU20-P8+A4+0B P8: CC42 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BF0
U0 BU20-P16+A0+2D P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BU0
Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2BU0
U0 BU20-P16+A0+2B P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0DU0
Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2DU0

* not included in the scope of delivery of the BaseUnit

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 15
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.4 BaseUnits

Table 1- 6 BaseUnit PotDis

PotDis Potential distributor Color coded labels Packaging Article number

type (short name) unit
P1 PotDis-BU-P1/D-R CC62 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP1
P1 PotDis-BU-P1/B-R CC62 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP1
P2 PotDis-BU-P2/D-B CC63 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6UP00-0DP2
P2 PotDis-BU-P2/B-B CC63 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6UP00-0BP2

Table 1- 7 BaseUnit PotDis-TB

Termi- Terminal block (short Color coded labels Packaging Article number
nal name) unit
block
type
P1 PotDis-TB-P1-R CC12 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP1
P2 PotDis-TB-P2-B CC13 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP2
N0 PotDis-TB-n.c.-G CC10 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6TP00-0TN0
P0 PotDis-TB-BR-W CC10 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6TP00-0TP0

Table 1- 8 BaseUnits for motor starters

BU BaseUnits (short Color-coded labels Packaging Article number

type name) unit
MS1 BU30-MS1 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0AP0
MS2 BU30-MS2 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0CP0
MS3 BU30-MS3 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0BP0
MS4 BU30-MS4 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0DP0
MS5 BU30-MS5 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0EP0
MS6 BU30-MS6 - Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0FP0

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

16 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Module overview of ET 200SP
1.5 I/O modules

1.5 I/O modules

I/O modules

Digital I/O modules Number in pack Article number

DI 16x24VDC ST Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7131-6BH01-2BA0
DI 8x24VDC ST Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7131-6BF01-2BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
10 units 6ES7131-6BF00-2CA0
DI 8x24VDC HS Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0
DI 8xNAMUR HF Pack of 1 6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0
DI 8x24VDC BA Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0
Pack of 10 6ES7131-6BF01-2AA0
DI 8x24VDC SRC BA Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0
DI 4x120..230VAC ST Pack of 1 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BH01-2BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BF01-2BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
10 units 6ES7132-6BF00-2CA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BF01-2AA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BD20-2BA0
DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6FD00-2BB1
DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF Pack of 1 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0
RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6HD01-2BB1
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 17
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.5 I/O modules

Analog I/O modules Number in pack Article number

AI 8xU BA Pack of 1 6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1
AI 2xU ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1
Pack of 10 6ES7134-6HD01-2BA1
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS Pack of 1 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA Pack of 1 6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1
10 units 6ES7134-6GD01-2BA1
AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1
Pack of 10 6ES7134-6JF00-2CA1
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1
Pack of 10 6ES7134-6JD00-2CA1
AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Pack of 1 6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1
AQ 2xU ST Pack of 1 6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1
AQ 2xI ST Pack of 1 6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1
AQ 4xU/I ST Pack of 1 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1
AQ 2xU/I HF Pack of 1 6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1
AQ 2xU/I HS Pack of 1 6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1
AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0
AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0
AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0
AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA20-0CU0

Fail-safe modules Number in pack Article number

F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Pack of 1 6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0
F-DI 8x24VDC HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0
F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0
F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0
F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Pack of 1 6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0
F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1

Communication modules Number in pack Article number

CM 4xIO-Link Pack of 1 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0
CM AS-i Master ST Pack of 1 3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1
F-CM AS-i Safety ST Pack of 1 3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1
CM PtP Pack of 1 6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0
CM DP (for CPU) Pack of 1 6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

18 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Module overview of ET 200SP
1.6 Motor starters

Technology modules Number in pack Article number

TM Count 1x24V Pack of 1 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0
TM PosInput 1 Pack of 1 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0
TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V Pack of 1 6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0
TM Pulse 2x24V Pack of 1 6ES7138-6DB00-0BB1
SIWAREX WP321 Pack of 1 7MH4138-6AA00-0BA0

1.6 Motor starters

Motor starters

Direct starter Packaging unit Article number

DS 0.3 - 1 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AB00-0CP0
DS 0.9 - 3 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AC00-0CP0
DS 2.8 - 9 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AD00-0CP0
DS 4.0 - 12 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AE00-0CP0

Reversing starter Packaging unit Article number

RS 0.3 - 1 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0
RS 0.9 - 3 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BC00-0CP0
RS 2.8 - 9 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BD00-0CP0
RS 4.0 - 12 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BE00-0CP0

Failsafe direct starter Number in pack Article number

F-DS 0.3 - 1 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0CB00-0CP0
F-DS 0.9 - 3 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0CC00-0CP0
F-DS 2.8 - 9 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0CD00-0CP0
F-DS 4.0 - 12 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0CE00-0CP0

Fail-safe reversing starter Number in pack Article number

F-RS 0.3 - 1 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0DB00-0CP0
F-RS 0.9 - 3 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0DC00-0CP0
F-RS 2.8 - 9 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0DD00-0CP0
F-RS 4.0 - 12 A HF Pack of 1 3RK1308-0DE00-0CP0

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 19
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.7 Accessories

1.7 Accessories

Accessories

General accessories Packaging Article number

unit
BusAdapter
• BA 2×RJ45 (PROFINET BusAdapter with standard Ethernet socket) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0

• BA 2×FC (PROFINET BusAdapter with FastConnect Ethernet connection) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0

• BA 2xSCRJ (PROFINET BusAdapter with POF/PCF fiber-optic cable connec- Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0
tion)

• BA SCRJ/RJ45 (media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter with fiber-optic Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0

cable FOC ⇔ standard RJ45 connector)

• BA SCRJ/FC (media converter, PROFINET bus adapter with fiber-optic cable Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0
FOC ⇔ direct connection of bus cable)

• BA 2xLC (PROFINET BusAdapter with glass fiber-optic cable connection) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0

• BA LC/RJ45 (media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter with glass fiber-optic Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0
cable ⇔ standard RJ45 connector)

• BA LC/FC (Media converter, PROFINET bus adapter with glass fiber-optic Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0
cable ⇔ direct connection of bus cable)
PROFIBUS FastConnect bus Pack of 1 6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0
connector
Server module (spare part) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
BU cover
• 15 mm wide Pack of 5 6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0

• 20 mm wide Pack of 5 6ES7133-6CV20-1AM0

Shield connector for BaseUnit (shield contacts and shield terminals) Pack of 5 6ES7193-6SC00-1AM0
Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels Pack of 10 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0
Labeling strips (for labeling the I/O modules)
• Roll, light gray (with a total of 500 labeling strips) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6LR10-0AA0

• Roll, yellow (with a total of 500 labeling strips) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6LR10-0AG0

• DIN A4 sheets, light gray (with a total of 1000 labeling strips) Pack of 10 6ES7193-6LA10-0AA0

• DIN A4 sheets, yellow (with a total of 1000 labeling strips) Pack of 10 6ES7193-6LA10-0AG0

Mounting rails, tin-plated steel strip

• Length: 483 mm Pack of 1 6ES5710-8MA11

• Length: 530 mm Pack of 1 6ES5710-8MA21

• Length: 830 mm Pack of 1 6ES5710-8MA31

• Length: 2000 mm Pack of 1 6ES5710-8MA41

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

20 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Module overview of ET 200SP
1.7 Accessories

Accessories, color identification labels (push- Packaging unit Article number

in terminals), 15 mm wide
16 process terminals (you can find additional information in the I/O Module manual)
• Gray (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC00 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP00-2MA0

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0

16); color code CC01

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0

16); color code CC02

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP03-2MA0

12), gray (terminals 13 to 16); color code
CC03

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP04-2MA0

12), blue (terminals 13 to 16); color code
CC04

• Gray (terminals 1 to 12), red (terminals 13 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP05-2MA0

and 14), blue (terminals 15 and 16);
color code CC05

10 AUX terminals (for BU15-P16+A10+2D, BU15-P16+A10+2B)

• Yellow-green (terminals 1A to 10A); color Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP71-2AA0
code CC71

• Red (terminals 1A to 10A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP72-2AA0

CC72

• Blue (terminals 1A to 10A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP73-2AA0

CC73

10 add-on terminals (for BU15-P16+A0+12D/T, BU15-P16+A0+12B/T)

• Red (terminals 1B to 5B), blue (terminals 1 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP74-2AA0
to 5C); color code CC74

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 21
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.7 Accessories

Accessories, color identification labels (push- Packaging unit Article number

in terminals), 20 mm wide
12 process terminals (you can find additional information in the I/O Module manual)
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminals 5 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP41-2MB0
8), blue (terminals 9 to 12); color code
CC41

• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP42-2MB0

and 10), blue (terminals 11 and 12), color
code CC42

6 process terminals (you can find additional information in the I/O Module manual)
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminal 5), Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP51-2MC0
blue (terminal 6); color code CC51

• Gray (terminals 1, 2 and 5), red (terminals Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP52-2MC0

3 and 4), blue (terminal 6); color code
CC52
4 AUX terminals (for BU20-P12+A4+0B)
• Yellow-green (terminals 1A to 4A); color Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP81-2AB0
code CC81

• Red (terminals 1A to 4A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP82-2AB0

CC82

• Blue (terminals 1A to 4A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP83-2AB0

CC83
2 AUX terminals (for BU20-P6+A2+4D, BU20-P6+A2+4B)
• Yellow-green (terminals 1A and 2A); color Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP84-2AC0
code CC84

• Red (terminals 1A and 2A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP85-2AC0

CC85

• Blue (terminals 1A and 2A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP86-2AC0

CC86

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

22 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Module overview of ET 200SP
1.7 Accessories

Accessories, color identification labels (push- Packaging unit Article number

in terminals) PotDis
PotDis-BU, 16 potential terminals
• Red for PotDis-BU-P1/x-R (terminals 1 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP62-2MA0
16); color code CC62

• Blue for PotDis-BU-P2/x-B (terminals 1 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP63-2MA0

16), color code CC63

PotDis-TB-P1-R, 18 potential terminals

• Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0

• Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0

PotDis-TB-P2-B, 18 potential terminals

• Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0

• Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 23
Module overview of ET 200SP
1.7 Accessories

Accessories, color identification labels (push- Packaging unit Article number

in terminals) PotDis
PotDis-TB-BR-W, 18 potential terminals
• Yellow/green (terminals 1 to 18); color Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP11-2MT0
code CC11

• Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0

• Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0

• Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0

PotDis-TB-n.c.-G, 18 potential terminals

• Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0

Accessories for motor starter Packaging unit Article number

3DI / LC module Pack of 1 3RK1908-1AA00-0BP0
Fan Pack of 1 3RW4928-8VB00
Additional mechanical bracket for BaseUnit Pack of 1 3RK1908-1EA00-1BP0
Cover for an empty BaseUnit Pack of 1 3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0
Touch protection cover for infeed bus Pack of 1 3RK1908-1DA00-2BP0

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

24 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2
2.1 System manual

System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O system, Edition 02/2018

Section 10.2 Creating the control data record
For the configuration control (option handling) you can plug the following communication
modules:
● CM DP
● CP 1542SP-1
● CP 1543SP-1
● CP 1542SP-1 IRC
● BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
For the communication modules listed above special slot rules apply for use with the
ET 200SP CPUs applies:
If you plug the communication modules in the central configuration control as mentioned
above (e.g. CM DP), then these modules cannot be influenced by the configuration control.
You must therefore leave these modules in the slots preassigned in the station master and
enter the slot numbers from the station master in the control data record ("Station option slot
= Station master slot").
In a station option, all slots up to the module furthest from the CPU (see list above) must be
present in the control data record.

Section 13.6 Firmware update

Modules with firmware version V0.0.0 do not support the "firmware update" function.

Section 15.5 Climatic ambient conditions

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

25 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.1 System manual

The following table shows the permissible climatic ambient conditions for the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system:

Table 2- 1 Climatic ambient conditions

Ambient conditions Permitted range Comments

Temperature: Information on extended temperature
Horizontal mounting From 0 °C to 60 °C ranges are defined in the respective
position: From 0 °C to 50 °C product data sheet.
Vertical mounting
position:
Permitted temperature 10 K/h -
change
Relative humidity From 10% to 95% Without condensation or icing.
Air pressure From 1140 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -
1000 m to 2000 m
Pollutant concentration ANSI/ISA-71.04 severity level G1; -
G2; G3

SIPLUS products based on ET 200SP are offered for reliable operation under heavy to
extreme operating conditions.

Using the distributed IO system ET 200SP over 2000 m above sea level.
The maximum "operating elevation in relation to sea level" depends on the module and is
described in the technical specifications of the respective module.
For altitudes > 2000 m the following constraints apply for the maximum specified ambient
temperature:

Restrictions of the maximum ambient temperature specified with regard to the operating
altitude

Operating altitude Derating factor for ambient temperature 1)

-1000 m to 2000 m 1.0
2000 m to 3000 m 0.9
3000 m to 4000 m 0.8
4000 m to 5000 m 0.7
1) Base value for application of the derating factor is the maximum permissible ambient temperature
in °C for 2000 m.

Note
• Linear interpolation between altitudes is permissible.
• The derating factors compensate for the decreasing cooling effect of air in higher
altitudes due to lower density.
• Note the mounting position of the respective module in the technical specifications. The
basis is the standard IEC 61131-2:2017.

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

26 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.2 BaseUnits manual

Note
Power supplies
Make sure that the power supplies you use are rated for altitudes > 2000 m.

Details about certification on the components of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP
Fail-safe modules are certified for operation in safety mode up to the maximum altitude listed
in the product data sheet (in accordance with IEC 61508-1: 2010, EN ISO 13849-1: 2015
and EN 62061:2005/ A2:2015).
All other markings and certifications are currently based on an altitude of up to 2000 m.

Effects on the availability of modules

The higher cosmic radiation present during operation at altitudes above 2000 m will also
start to have an effect on the failure rate of electronic components (the so-called soft error
rate). In rare cases this can result in a transition of the module into the safe state, especially
for fail-safe modules. However, the functional safety of the module is fully retained.

2.2 BaseUnits manual

2.2.1 Special consideration for BaseUnits with functional versions < 04

The following BaseUnits with functional version < 04 can only be used in potential groups
with rated voltages ≤ 48 V DC or 24 V AC:
● BaseUnit BU20-P12+A0+4B (6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1).
● BaseUnit BU20-P12+A0+0B (6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0).

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 27
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.2 BaseUnits manual

2.2.2 Terminal labeling of the PotDis-TB

New specification of the terminal labeling

New specification offers the following advantages:
● Unique terminal numbering per slot, even though the same reference identifier is used for
the PotDis-BU and the PotDis-TB of a slot.
● Best possible readability
● Shortest possible designation to keep the work for conductor labeling as low as possible
● Compliant with ECAD rules
● Complies with the previous ET 200SP Logic
● You can continue using the color identification label CC00

① Terminal labeling of the B1 to B18. To save space the preceding character "B" is printed
PotDis-TB once at the top and may not be covered by the color identification
labels.
② Terminal labeling of the 1 to 16, the supply terminals P1 and P2.
PotDis-BU

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

28 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.3 CPU manuals

2.3 CPU manuals

Manual CPU 1512SP-1 PN, Edition 09/2016

Section 4.1 Status and error display of the CPU

MT1/MT2 LEDs on BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA SCRJ/FC

Table 2- 2 Status and error displays of MT1/MT2 LEDs

LED Meaning Solution

MT1/MT2*
No error ---
Off
• Fiber-optic error Causes and measures for the transmission route:
On • Maintenance demanded: Attenuation • Replacement of fiber-optic cable if damaged or
through the fiber-optic cable is so high aged
that operation will soon no longer be • Correct installation of the PROFINET connect-
possible. or/PROFINET connections
• Adherence to maximum length of 50 m for POF
cable or 100 m for PCF cable
• Secure fit of the FOC connector.

* Only available on BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ

Section 6 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapters BA 2×SCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA SCRJ/FC
The maximum length of the PCF-GI fiber-optic cable is 250 m.

Device manuals CPU 1510SP-1 PN and CPU 1512SP-1 PN, Edition 09/2016
"LED" instruction
You can read the status (e.g. "On" or "Off") of LEDs of a CPU or a module using the "LED"
instruction. Note, however, that is not possible to read the LED status of the LINK RX/TX
LEDs of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN and CPU 1512SP-1 PN.
You can find additional information on the "LED" instruction in the STEP 7 online help.

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 29
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.4 Interface module manuals

2.4 Interface module manuals

Configuration notes on interface modules depending on the I/O modules

Module IM IM 155-6 PN ST IM 155-6 PN HF IM IM 155-DP HF

155- IM 155-6 PN/2 HF V4.2 and higher 155-
6 PN 6
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF V4.2 and higher
BA PN
HS

Firm- V3.2 V1.0 V1.1 V3.1 V3.3 V4.1 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V3.0 V3.1 V3.3 V4.2 V4.0 V1.0 V1.1 V3.0 V3.1 V4.2
ware
version
AI 2xI V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
2-/4-
wire ST
AI 2xU V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
ST
AI 2xU/I V2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2-/4-
wire HF
AI 8xI V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2-/4-
wire BA
AI 8xU V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
BA
AI V3.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Energy
Meter
400VA
C ST
AI V4.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
Energy
Meter
480VA
C ST
AI V6.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Energy
Meter
480VA
C/CT
HF
AI V6.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Energy
Meter
480VA
C/RC
HF
AQ 2xI V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
ST
AQ 2xU V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
ST
DI V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8x24VD
C BA
DI V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8x24VD
C HS
DI V2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8x24VD
C HF

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

30 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.4 Interface module manuals

Module IM IM 155-6 PN ST IM 155-6 PN HF IM IM 155-DP HF

155- IM 155-6 PN/2 HF V4.2 and higher 155-
6 PN 6
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF V4.2 and higher
BA PN
HS

Firm- V3.2 V1.0 V1.1 V3.1 V3.3 V4.1 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V3.0 V3.1 V3.3 V4.2 V4.0 V1.0 V1.1 V3.0 V3.1 V4.2
ware
version
DI V1.1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
16x24V
DC ST
DQ V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
4x24VD
C/2A
HS
DQ V2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
4x24VD
C/2A
HF
DQ V1.0 ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
4x24 …
230VA
C/2A
HF
RQ V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
4x120V
DC-
230VA
C/5A
NO MA
ST
DQ V2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8x24VD
C/0.5A
HF
DQ V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
8x24VD
C/0.5A
BA
DQ V0.0 ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
16x24V
DC/0.5
A BA
DQ V1.1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
16x24V
DC/0.5
A ST
PotDis- - ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
TB-P1-
R
PotDis- - ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
TB-P2-
B
PotDis- - ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
TB-n.c.-
G
PotDis- - ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓
TB-BR-
W

--- This combination is not permitted in the configuration

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 31
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.4 Interface module manuals

Compilation error with IM 155-6 PN HF as of V2.1, IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0

Affected components:
● IM 155-6 PN HF as of V2.1
● IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0
A compilation error can occur in isochronous mode of the ET200SP (IM 155-6 PN HF as of
V2.1, IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0) with the setting "From OB" even if the settings are valid. The
typical error message is: "The specific Ti value is invalid" or "The specific To value is invalid".
But other error messages are possible as well.
Solution:
Upgrade the module description of the IM in this case. You can upgrade the module
description of the IM in the network view or in the device view of the inspector window with
the function "Update module description". The error can still occur with the current module
description after the first compilation. If you have selected valid settings, the error will no
longer occur with the subsequent compilation.

IM 155-6 PN ST Manual, Edition 04/2017

Response times
The response time of the IM 155-6 PN ST is made up of:
● Backplane bus cycle time
● Operating system processing

Note
Validity of the formula
The following formula applies to the ET 200SP backplane bus.
The formula does not apply to the ET-Connection bus.

Backplane bus cycle time

The backplane bus cycle time is the time the interface module requires to output new output
data, read new input data and then copy the data to the PROFINET send buffer.
The backplane bus cycle time is the result of the update time configured for the interface
module as IO device and amounts to at least 1 ms.
● If the configured update time ≥ 1 ms, the backplane bus cycle time is equal to the
configured update time.
● If the configured update time < 1 ms, the backplane bus cycle time is the product of an
integer multiple of the configured update time.

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

32 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.4 Interface module manuals

Table 2- 3 Example calculation

Configured update time Backplane bus cycle time (integer multiple, minimum 1 ms)
250 µs 4 x 250 μs = 1000 μs
750 μs 2 x 750 μs = 1500 μs
1000 μs 1000 μs
2000 μs 2000 μs

Operating system processing time

The operating system processing time is calculated based on the following formula:
Operating system processing time output
Operating system processing time_output[μs] = 147 + 3.775 number_m + 0.275 bytes_out
Operating system processing time input
Operating system processing time_input[μs] = 158.3 + 2.325 number_m + 0.325 bytes_in

Explanation of the parameters:

Number_m: Total number of all modules (incl. server module)
Bytes_out: Sum of all output bytes
Bytes_in: Sum of all input bytes

Calculating the response time

Response time output
The response time output of the IM 155-6 PN ST is made up of:
● Backplane bus cycle time
● Operating system processing time_output.
Response time input
The response time input of the IM 155-6 PN ST is made up of:
● Backplane bus cycle time
● Operating system processing time_input.

IM 155-6 PN HF manual, Edition 12/2015

Section 3.1 Pin assignment
PROFINET interface X1 Port 2:
If autonegotiation is disabled, the RJ-45 socket (X1 Port 2) has the switch assignment
(MDI-X).

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 33
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.4 Interface module manuals

IM 155-6 PN HS manual, Edition 09/2016

Section 3.1 Pin assignment
PROFINET interface X1 Port 2:
If autonegotiation is disabled, the RJ-45 socket (X1 Port 2) has the switch assignment (MDI-
X).

Section 7 Technical specifications

● The PROFINET certification of network Class 3 is in preparation.
● Technical specifications of the BusAdapters BA 2×SCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA SCRJ/FC:
The maximum length of the PCF-GI fiber-optic cable is 250 m.

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

34 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

2.5 I/O module manuals

Configuration notes on the I/O modules

(supplement to Product overview section in the manual)

I/O module Article number Firmware STEP 7 (TIA STEP 7 V5.5

version Portal) SP3
Digital input modules DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00- V1.1.0 HSP0162 HSP0229 V6.0
0BA0 V13 SP1 or
higher
DI 8x24VDC BA 6ES7131-6BF00- V1.0.0 HSP0126 HSP0229 V5.0
0AA0
DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0229 V4.0
0BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00- V2.0.0 HSP0163 HSP0229 V6.0
0CA0 V13 SP1 Up-
date 4 or higher
DI 8x24VDC HS 6ES7131-6BF00- V1.0.2 Integrated as of HSP0229 V5.0
0DA0 V14
Digital output modules DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA 6ES7132-6BF00- V1.0.0 HSP0162 HSP0230 V6.0
0AA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0230 V4.0
0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0230 V4.0
0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 6ES7132-6BH00- V1.1.0 HSP0162 HSP0230 V6.0
ST 0BA0 V13 SP1 or
higher
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00- V2.0.0 HSP0163 HSP0230 V6.0
0CA0 V13 SP1 Up-
date 4 or higher
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF 6ES7132-6BD20- V2.0.0 HSP0163 HSP0230 V6.0
0CA0 V13 SP1 Up-
date 4 or higher
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS 6ES7132-6BD20- V1.0.2 Integrated as of HSP0230 V5.0
0DA0 V14
DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A 6ES7132-6FD00- V1.0 as of V13 HSP0230 V3.0
ST 0BB1
DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A 6ES7132-6FD00- V1.0.0 as of V14 with HSP 0230 as of
HF 0CU0 HSP0240 V8.0
RQ 4x120VDC- 6ES7132-6HD00- V1.0.0 HSP0128 HSP0232 V5.0
230VAC/5A NO ST 0BB1
RQ 4x120VDC- 6ES7132-6MD00- V1.0.0 HSP0162 HSP0232 V6.0
230VAC/5A NO MA 0BB1 V13 SP1 or
ST higher

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 35
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

I/O module Article number Firmware STEP 7 (TIA STEP 7 V5.5

version Portal) SP3
Analog input modules AI 8xU BA 6ES7134-6FF00- V1.0.0 HSP0126 HSP0227 V5.0
0AA1
AI 2xU ST 6ES7134-6FB00- V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0227 V6.0
0BA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA 6ES7134- V1.0.0 HSP0126 HSP0227 V5.0
6GF000AA1
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GD00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0227 V4.0
0BA1
AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GB00- V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0227 V6.0
0BA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST 6ES7134-6HD00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0227 V4.0
0BA1
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF 6ES7134-6HB00- V2.0.0 HSP0161 HSP0227 V6.0
0CA1 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP4 HF7
higher or higher
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS 6ES7134-6HB00- V2.0.1 Integrated as of HSP0227 V5.0
0DA1 V14
AI Energy Meter 6ES7134-6PA01- V3.0.0 V13 SP1 Up- HSP0227 V6.0
400VAC ST 0BD0 date 4
HSP0159
AI Energy Meter 6ES7134-6PA20- V4.0.0 V13 SP1 Up- HSP0227 V6.0
480VAC ST 0BD0 date 4 V5.5 SP4 HF7
HSP0159 or higher
AI Energy Meter 6ES7134-6PA00- V6.0.0 V15 or higher V5.5 SP3 or
480VAC/CT HF 0CU0 with HSP0253 higher
AI Energy Meter 6ES7134-6PA20- V6.0.0 V15 or higher V5.5 SP3 or
480VAC/RC HF 0CU0 with HSP0253 higher
Analog output mod- AQ 2xU ST 6ES7135-6FB00- V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0228 V6.0
ules 0BA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
AQ 2xI ST 6ES7135-6GB00- V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0228 V6.0
0BA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
AQ 4xU/I ST 6ES7135-6HD00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0228 V4.0
0BA1
AQ 2xU/I HS 6ES7135-6HB00- V2.0.1 Integrated as of HSP0228 V5.0
0DA1 V14

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

36 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

2.5.1 Digital module device manuals

Manuals for I/O modules ST, BA

When you have deactivated all channels of the I/O module, a diagnostics alarm is still
generated in the case of a fault if the "Missing supply voltage L+" diagnostics is enabled. For
the following I/O modules, this behavior is corrected as of firmware version > V1.1.0:
● DI 16x24VDC ST
● DI 8x24VDC ST
● DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST
● DQ 8x24VDC/0.5 A ST
● DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A ST

Manuals for digital input modules with wire-break detection

When wire-break detection is configured the module requires a low quiescent current at the
digital input in case of "0" signal for the monitoring. The parallel connection of a resistor with
25 kΩ to 45 kΩ is required in order that this quiescent current can flow when encoder
contacts are open.
If wire-break detection is disabled in the configuration, no parallel connection of the resistor
is required.
If wire-break detection is configured, connect a resistor with 25 kΩ to 45 kΩ parallel to each
mechanical encoder contact.

Figure 2-1 Connect mechanical encoder contact with resistor

Manuals DI 4x120...230VAC ST, Edition 02/2014; DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A ST, Edition 02/2014

Section 4.3 Address space
If you have enabled value status, the module returns value status 1, regardless of the state
of the connected supply voltage.

Manual DI 8x24VDC HF, Edition 02/2014

Section 6.1 Technical specifications
● 24 V encoder supply
– Output current, max.: 700 mA, total current

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 37
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

Manual DI 8xNAMUR HF, Edition 02/2014

Section A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
With data records 0 to 7, you can configure individual channels.
When the interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (PROFIBUS DP) is used and data records 0
and 1 are read, the module returns the diagnostics data records and not the parameter data
records of the DI 8xNAMUR HF.

DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS manual, Edition 09/2016

Section 6.1 Technical specifications
For this module, the marine approval for the bridge and deck zone is valid from a bus cycle
time of at least 250 µs.

Manual DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module, Edition 03/2015

Section 3.1 Pin assignment; Supply voltage fuse protection
The module has neither short-circuit protection nor overload protection. Protect the module
from being destroyed by impermissible high current and install a fine fuse in the supply line.
The maximum rated current of the fine fuse depends on the hardware function status (FS) of
the module.

HW functional status of the module Max. rated current of fuse Tripping characteristic
FS ≤ 3 8A Quick response
FS ≥ 4 10 A Quick response

Section 6.1 Technical specifications, Switching frequency with inductive load

The switching frequency of the outputs with inductive loads is max. 0.5 Hz.
Higher switching frequency is possible in spite of this, and depends on the alternating
voltage and switched inductors or the power factor of the electric motor used.

Alternating voltage Condition Max. switching fre-

quency
200 VAC or lower --- 10 Hz
200 VAC or higher • Power factor of the electric motor cos φ > 0.35 10 Hz
• Electric motor must only be turned off after
startup (no jogging mode).
Electric motors which are turned off during
startup could create inductive shutoff voltages
> 600 V , which could destroy the output elec-
tronics (Triac).

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

38 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST manual, Edition 07/2014

Section 4.2 Explanation of the parameters (as of functional version FS-05 of
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST)
Diagnostics: Wire break:
The module responds to a wire break as follows:
● Disabled:
– Channel status LED lit green
– Output voltage present at channel
● Enabled:
– Channel status LED is off
– Output is switched off
– In addition, the wire break diagnostics is signaled and the DIAG LED on the module
flashes red

Note
If one of the two parameters "Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+" or "Diagnostics: Wire break" is
enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off. This
prevents undefined load switching and supports detection of a faulty channel for module
diagnostics.

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 39
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF Manual, Edition 02/2018

Section 3.1.1. und 4.1.1 Wiring and block diagram
The following figure shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type U0 (3-wire connection) in
combination with a potential distribution module and terminal block.
For a 3-wire connection you connect the protective earth (PE) of the actuator to the terminal
block.

Figure 2-2 3-wire connection of actuators with potential distribution module at the digital output
module DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A HF

RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST manual, Edition 03/2015 and

RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST manual, Edition 12/2015
Section 3.1 Wiring and block diagram
The AUX terminals of the self-assembling voltage bus can be used for the connection of the
protective conductor (PE) or for voltages up to a maximum of 24 V DC.

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

40 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

2.5.2 Analog module device manuals

Manuals for analog input modules

Manual Edition
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA 03/2015
AI 8xU BA 03/2015
AI 2xU ST 12/2015
AI 4xI 2-wire 4..20mA HART 11/2014
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF 12/2015

Section 5.2 Parameters

Note
Please note that the settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a
direct effect on the cycle time of the module. The analog value is therefore also affected by
additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter.

Manuals AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, Edition 12/2015; AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST, Edition 12/2015
For configuration with STEP 7 V13 or higher (TIA Portal), real values between -7x1028 and
+7x1028 can be input. This is true for configuration via HSP and via GSD file (PROFINET).
For configuration with STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 as of HF7, configuration by means of GSD file
(PROFINET) with REAL values of -1.175x1038 to +3.402x1038 is possible.
With STEP 7 SP4 to HF6, parameter assignment of REAL values is not possible. Functions
that require REAL values are not available in this case.

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 41
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT HF, Edition 07/2018, and AI Energy Meter 480VAC/RC HF,
Edition 07/2018 device manuals
Section A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module
Module parameter block

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

42 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

Section D.5 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data
Table D7 - Total energy L1L2L3 (ID249 or F9h)

Table 2- 4 Total energy L1L2L3

Byte Allocation Data Unit Value range Meas-

type ured
value
ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 249 (F9H) -
1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit qq xx xx xx -
string
2 Reserved BYTE - - -
3 Reserved BYTE - - -
4 ... 7 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 220
8 ... 11 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 to 2147483647 221
11 ... 15 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 222
16 ... 19 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 to 2147483647 223
20 ... 23 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 to 2147483647 224
24 Reserved BYTE - - -
25 Scaling active energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
26 Scaling active energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
27 Scaling reactive energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
28 Scaling reactive energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
29 Scaling apparent energy USINT - 0 ... 255 -
30 Reserved BYTE - - -
31 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 … 100 66037

Manuals AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST, Edition 12/2015; AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST,
Edition 12/2015
Requirements for the operation of the AI Energy Meter on slot 1 of the ET 200SP:

Interface module / CPU AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST

(6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0)
IM 155-6 PN BA (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) Can be operated on slot 1 for all IM 155-6 PN BA
IM 155-6 PN ST (6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0) Can be operated on slot 1 for IM 155-6 PN ST from firmware ver-
sion V3.1 and higher and functional status FS 07
IM 155-6 PN HF (6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0) Can be operated on slot 1 for IM 155-6 PN HF from firmware ver-
sion V3.0 and higher and functional status FS 05
IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7 155-6BU00-0CN0) Can be operated on slot 1 for IM 155-6 DP HF from firmware ver-
sion V3.0 and higher
CPU 1510SP-1 PN, CPU 1512SP-1 PN, Can be operated on slot 1 for all CPUs
CPU 1515SP PC

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 43
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

In the manual for Energy Meter 480VAC ST, Edition 12/2015

In the device manual for Energy Meter 480VAC ST, the measured value ID and the
associated measured variables for the complete performance are reversed. The correct
association is shown in the table below:

Measured value Measured variables Unit

ID
34 Total active power L1L2L3 W
35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 var
36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 VA
65 Max. total active power W
66 Max. total reactive power var
67 Max. total apparent power VA
95 Min. total active power W
96 Min. total reactive power var
97 Min. total apparent power VA

If you use the user-data mapping via data record DS 130, please note that the texts for the
measured variables are also displayed incorrectly during configuration.
During configuration of the measured variables for the total active, reactive, and apparent
power, select the following texts:

Desired measured variable for the user-data Text to select during configuration
mapping
Total active power L1L2L3 Total apparent power L1L2L3 (ID00034)
Total reactive power L1L2L3 Total active power L1L2L3 (ID00035)
Total apparent power L1L2L3 Total reactive power L1L2L3 (ID00036)
Max. total active power Max. total apparent power (ID00065)
Max. total reactive power Max. total active power (ID00066)
Max. total apparent power Max. total reactive power (ID00067)
Min. total active power Min. total apparent power (ID00095)
Min. total reactive power Min. total active power (ID00096)
Min. total apparent power Min. total reactive power (ID00097)

The project configuration modification described above is no longer required if the following
tools and GSD files are used:
● STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V14
● STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V5.5 SP4 with HSP 0227
● GSD file GSDML-V2.32-ET200SP-20160706

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

44 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

Manual for AQ 2xU/I HF, Edition 02/2014

Section 3.1 Wiring and block diagram, pin assignment
You can now also use the 3-wire connection in addition to the 2-wire and 4-wire connection
for the analog module AQ 2xU/I HF.

Pin assignment for AQ 2xU/I HF Explanation

Voltage 2-wire connec- Voltage 3-wire connec- Voltage 4-wire connec- • Qn+: Analog output voltage/current
tion tion tion (positive), channel n
• Qn-: Analog output voltage/current
(negative), channel n
• Sn+: Sensor line positive, channel n
• Sn-: Sensor line negative, channel n

The 3-wire connection and 4-wire connection make compensation for line impedance
possible. The compensation is not possible for 2-wire connections due to the missing sensor
cable.

2.5.3 Communications module manuals

Communications module CM DP, Edition 12/2014

The communications module CM DP supports the PROFIsafe protocol V2.
Exception: Fail-safe modules that only support PROFIsafe V1 mode.

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 45
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

Communications module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link, Edition 10/2017

Section Connecting, Wiring and block diagram
Connection: 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DQ operating mode:

① 2-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals

② 3-wire connection PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
③ Color-coded labels with color code CC04 and P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
CC71 (optional) Connection to the left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to the left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
④ Filter connection supply voltage (only when Cn Communication signal, DI, DQ
light-colored BaseUnit is present)
24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored RES Reserved, must not be assigned
BaseUnit only)
M Ground USn Supply voltage (positive)
Figure 2-3 Terminal assignment for 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DQ operating mode

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

46 Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB
 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.5 I/O module manuals

2.5.4 Device manuals Technology modules

Technology module TM Pulse 2x24V, Edition 09/2015

Supplement in the section Preface
Please read the information about Open Source Software on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740777).

Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 01/2019, A5E03799595-BB 47
PROFIenergy product information PROFIenergy 1
___________________

SIMATIC

ET 200SP
PROFIenergy product information

Product Information

12/2015
A5E03871936-AH
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03871936-AH Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 11/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 PROFIenergy .......................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Principle of operation ................................................................................................................ 6
1.3 Parameter assignment .............................................................................................................. 9
1.4 PROFIenergy control data records .........................................................................................11
1.5 I/O modules .............................................................................................................................12
1.5.1 Digital input module ................................................................................................................12
1.5.2 Digital output modules ............................................................................................................14
1.5.3 Analog input modules .............................................................................................................15
1.5.4 Analog output module .............................................................................................................17
1.5.5 IO-Link Master ........................................................................................................................19
1.5.5.1 DI operating mode ..................................................................................................................19
1.5.5.2 DQ operating mode.................................................................................................................21
1.5.5.3 IO-Link operating mode ..........................................................................................................22

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 3
PROFIenergy 1
Security information
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

1.1 Introduction

Introduction
PROFIenergy is a data interface based on PROFINET for switching off consumers centrally
and in a coordinated manner during idle times, regardless of the manufacturer or device
type. The goal is that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
The majority of the energy is saved by the process itself; the PROFINET device itself only
contributes a few watts of saving potential. This operating mode is termed "pause" in
PROFIenergy.
The PROFINET devices are turned off by special commands in the user program of the
PROFINET IO controller. No additional hardware is required; the PROFIenergy commands
are directly interpreted by the PROFINET devices.
The device which provides the PROFIenergy interface and supports the required control
data record has the so-called PE-Entity, the access point for these control data records. This
PE-Entity is located on the interface module as a substitute for I/O modules that do not have
their own PE-Entity. I/O modules that have their own PE-Entity are always addressed
directly.

PROFIenergy product information

4 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.1 Introduction

Requirements
● Interface module IM 155-6 PN ST
● Interface module IM 155-6 PN HF
● ET 200SP I/O modules which support PROFIenergy
– Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0)
– Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)
– Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR HF (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)
– Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)
– Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)
– Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0)
– Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)
– Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0)
– Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)
– Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0)
– Digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
– Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0)
– Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0)
– Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-
0BB1)
– Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)
– Analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)
– Analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1)
– Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)
– Analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)
– Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA0)
– Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1)
– Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1)
– Analog output module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1)
– Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1)
– Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1)
– Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0)
● User program for sending the parameter data record, index 3
● User program with the function blocks for controlling the PROFIenergy commands
("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816).

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 5
PROFIenergy
1.2 Principle of operation

Procedure
1. Create the parameter data record, Index 3 in STEP 7
2. Transfer the parameter data record to the interface module with the instruction "WRREC"
- SFB 53.
3. Create the user program with the FBs for controlling the PROFIenergy commands
("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816 ).
4. Transfer the user program to the CPU.

Additional information
● System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
● Device manual Interface Module
● Device manuals Digital and Analog I/O Modules
● System manual PROFINET System Description
● You will find additional information on PROFIenergy services, parameters of the service
IDs on the Internet under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical
Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802.
● Additional information on PROFIenergy FBs ("PE_START_END" - FB 815,
"PE_CMD" - FB 816 ) is available in the online help for STEP 7 V5.5 as of SP2 "Help on
System Functions/System Function Blocks".

1.2 Principle of operation

"Pause" control and "Pause" behavior

At the beginning and end of pauses, you enable or disable the pause function of the system;
the IO controller then sends the PROFIenergy command "Start_Pause" or "End_Pause" to
the PROFINET devices. The device then interprets the contents of the PROFIenergy
command and switches on or off. The interface module is the PE-Entity for I/O modules with
PROFIenergy capability of the ET 200SP.
Other PROFIenergy commands allow device information to be accessed during the pauses.
You can use these commands to transfer the "Start_Pause" / "End_Pause" command in
good time.

Note
A complete PROFIenergy sequence consists of the commands "Start_Pause" and
"End_Pause". Always observe this sequence during programming.

PROFIenergy product information

6 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.2 Principle of operation

LED displays
In general, PROFIenergy does not have an effect on the LED display. Please see the device
manuals of the relevant I/O modules for exceptions.

Response to error detection

All channels whose pause mode is set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" report errors as in
productive operation.
The following rules apply to channels which switch to a pause mode other than
"PE_MODE_PROCEED":
● All errors that are unrelated to the switch to "Pause" are reported.
● If error recognition is possible during "Pause", these errors continue to be reported.
● All error messages which are caused by the switch to "Pause" are suppressed.
● The following applies if error recognition is not possible during the "Pause":
– The status of errors already pending before the "Pause" is retained.
– Incoming and outgoing errors are reported once the "pause" has ended.

Note
Switching to "Pause" and out of "Pause" may cause an error to be reported.

Additional information
Additional information on diagnostics can be found in the I/O module device manuals.

Hardware interrupt
No hardware interrupts are triggered within the "pause". The hardware interrupts are re-
evaluated when the "pause" ends.

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 7
PROFIenergy
1.2 Principle of operation

"Pause" behavior under certain operating conditions

A "Pause" is ended in the following cases:

Table 1- 1 Ending a "pause"

Ending a "pause" Explanation

The supply voltage 1L+ of the interface The "pause" is exited and can be re-activated by re-
module has failed sending the PROFIenergy parameter assignment fol-
lowed by the "Start_Pause" command.
• Controller stop1
• Controller failure (connection interrupt-
ed)1
• Firmware update
• Reset to factory settings
• Deactivation of the IO device1
The I/O module is pulled and plugged
Station stop1 The "pause" is exited , the PROFIenergy parameter
assignment is still on the I/O module and the "pause"
• Removal of more than one I/O module
can be re-activated by the "Start_Pause" command.
(depending on the interface module
used)
• Dismounting of the server module
Failure of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O
module.
Modification of the parameter settings of the
I/O module during operation using data
record 128
1 The substitute value behavior is activated.

PROFIenergy product information

8 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.3 Parameter assignment

1.3 Parameter assignment

Parameter assignment
● Parameter assignment of PROFIenergy takes place by means of the user program and
parameter data record (version2), index 3. The interface module distributes the
PROFIenergy parameters to the I/O modules.
● The parameter assignment of an additional pause behavior is possible immediately after
the start of the previous "Pause". The required state for the following pause is activated
with a new "Start_Pause" command.
● The parameter assignment can be written as often as necessary.
● The interface module checks the distribution of the parameters to the I/O modules and
returns the result of the write job by means of return value. In the case of a negative
return value, there are one or more I/O modules that have not accepted the parameter
data record. In this case, the I/O modules respond according to their last valid
PROFIenergy parameter assignment with an incoming "Start_Pause" command.
● Parameter assignment by means of the parameter data record has to be repeated in case
of an I/O module failure or station failure.
● ET 200SP supports the setting for the behavior of one "Pause". If a different response is
required for an additional "Pause", you will have to assign parameters again.

Note
Effect: The response (shutdown) of the I/O modules to PROFIenergy is related to the slot,
which means that all channels of the slot show the same behavior.

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 9
PROFIenergy
1.3 Parameter assignment

Parameter data record

You specify which I/O modules (slots) are controlled with PROFIenergy commands in the
parameter data record for PROFIenergy.
The content of the parameter data record for PROFIenergy, index 3 is described below; you
can create it yourself and transmit it to the interface module.

Table 1- 2 Parameter data record for PROFIenergy (version 2), index 3

Byte Element Coding Explanation

0 Version 02D Cannot be modified
1 Number of blocks 01D to n Slots 1 to n depending
• on the number of slots supported by the interface module and
• the current configuration of the ET 200SP.
2 Block 1 Slot number 00D Unassigned
01D to n I/O module slot with PROFIenergy
3 Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED, proceed at "Pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN, shut down at "Pause" 1
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE, last output or measured value is retained
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE, substitute value "0" 2
: : : :
128 Block 64 Slot number See Block 1
129 Mode
1 The specific behavior depends on the used I/O module (with a digital input module, for example, the sensor supply is
turned off or the outputs of an analog output module are de-energized)
2 An analog output module (e. g. with the output range 0 mA to 20 mA, ± 20 mA) or a digital output module issues the
value "0".

Error messages
The feedback data record returns the following error messages, if needed:

Table 1- 3 Error messages

Error code Meaning

80B1H Impermissible length Check the length of the data record
80E0H Error in header information Check the data record header information
80E1H Parameter error Check the content of the data record and correct
the parameter assignment error before starting the
• At least one I/O module does
"Pause". Parameter assignment errors which are
not support PROFIenergy
not corrected can result in incorrect I/O module
• A parameter value has been shutdown behavior.
incorrectly encoded

PROFIenergy product information

10 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.4 PROFIenergy control data records

1.4 PROFIenergy control data records

PROFIenergy control data records

The control data record for PROFIenergy, Index 80A0H, supports the following services of
the Common Application Profile PROFIenergy V1.0 for the IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 PN HF:

Table 1- 4 Control data records for PROFIenergy

Service Service ID Meaning

Start pause 1 01H Assuming the configured Pause behavior, suppressing all associated diagnostics data
End Pause 02H Leaving the pause
Query Modes 03H Reads the supported modes
• Request List Energy Saving Modes
• Request Get Mode (Energy Saving Mode Data)
PEM status 04H Reads the PROFIenergy status
Status messages:
• 00H: PROFIenergy is ready for operation
• 01H: "Pause" is active
• FFH: "Pause" is not active
PE_Identify 05H Reads the supported PROFIenergy services
1 The minimum (configurable) pause time for the ET 200SP is 10 s.

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 11
PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

1.5 I/O modules

1.5.1 Digital input module

Requirements
● Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0)
● Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)
● Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR HF (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)
● Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Display
DI 8x24VDC ST/ DI 8x24VDC HF/ DI 8x24VDC HS
● The channel LEDs are directly affected by the signal level at the terminal.
● Switching off the sensor supply also switches off the channel LED if an external sensor
supply is connected.
DI 8xNAMUR
● The channel LEDs correspond to the signal state supplied by the I/O module.

Response to error detection

The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless
of whether the pause status is applied.
All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" in pause mode report errors as in
productive operation.
The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode:
● Sensor supply switch-off upon the start of "pause" does not result in the messages "Line
break" or "Short circuit".
● "Line break" and "Short circuit" error recognition is not possible during the "pause":
– Messages for errors already pending before the "pause" are retained.
– After the "pause" is over, the error status is updated and incoming/outgoing errors are
reported correspondingly.

PROFIenergy product information

12 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

Ending a "pause"
The pause is ended in the following cases:
● Failure of the supply voltage L+
● Change in parameter assignment of I/O module with DS128
● "End_Pause" command
● Controller failure
● Firmware update
● Station stop
● Restart of the interface module

Mode parameter
Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the
"Parameter assignment" chapter.

Table 1- 5 Mode parameter

Element Coding Explanation

Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Shut down at "Pause" 1
• Sensor supply switched off 2
• Pause substitute value: 0B
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause"
• Sensor supply switched off 2
• Pause substitute value: Last input value
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Substitute value at "pause"
• Sensor supply switched off 2
• Pause substitute value: Configured pause substi-
tute value

1 DI 8xNAMUR HF: A channel is set to "inverted". During the "pause", the PE substitute value is
read in 1:1 (as in the parameter settings and not inverted again).
2 DI 8x24VDC ST: As there is only one sensor supply for all channels, the supply can only be
switched off at a "pause" if all channel parameters have been set to switch off.

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 13
PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

1.5.2 Digital output modules

Requirements
● Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)
● Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0)
● Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)
● Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0)
● Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)
● Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0)
● Digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
● Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0)
● Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0)
● Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Display
The channel LEDs are directly affected by the output value at the terminal.

Response to error detection

The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless
of whether the pause status is applied.
Line break and short circuit error recognition continues to be possible during the "pause". All
channels therefore report errors as in productive operation, regardless of their pause mode.

Ending a "pause"
The pause is ended in the following cases:
● Failure of the supply voltage L+ (exception: The DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST remains in
"Pause")
● Change in parameter assignment of I/O module with DS128
● "End_Pause" command
● Controller failure
● Firmware update
● Station stop
● Restart of the interface module

PROFIenergy product information

14 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

Mode parameter
Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the
"Parameter assignment" chapter.

Table 1- 6 Mode parameter

Element Coding Explanation

Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: 0B
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: Last output value is
maintained1
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Substitute value at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: Configured pause substi-
tute value is output

1 DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS: In the "Pulse width modulation" mode, the last value is output as frequency.

1.5.3 Analog input modules

Requirements
● Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)
● Analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)
● Analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1)
● Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)
● Analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)
● Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA0)

Display
The channel LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy.

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 15
PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

Response to error detection

The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless
of whether the pause status is applied.
All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" in pause mode report errors as in
productive operation.
The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode:
● Sensor supply switch-off upon the start of "pause" does not result in the message "Line
break".
● "Line break", "Short circuit", "High limit exceeded" and "Low limit exceeded" error
recognition is not possible during the "pause":
– Messages for errors already pending before the "pause" are retained.
– After the "pause" is over, the error status is updated and incoming/outgoing errors are
reported correspondingly.

Ending a "pause"
The pause is ended in the following cases:
● Failure of the supply voltage L+
● Change in parameter assignment of I/O module with DS128
● "End_Pause" command
● Controller failure
● Firmware update
● Station stop
● Restart of the interface module

PROFIenergy product information

16 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

Mode parameter
Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the
"Parameter assignment" chapter.

Table 1- 7 Mode parameter

Element Coding Explanation

Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause"
• Sensor supply switched off 1
• Pause substitute value: 7FFFH
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause"
• Sensor supply switched off 1
• Pause substitute value: Last input value
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Substitute value at "pause"
• Sensor supply switched off 1
• Pause substitute value: Configured pause
substitute value

1 AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST, AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST, AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST, AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS: As there is only
one sensor supply for all channels, the supply can only be switched off at a "pause" if all channels
have been configured to switch off.

1.5.4 Analog output module

Requirements
● Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1)
● Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1)
● Analog output module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1)
● Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1)
● Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1)

Display
The channel LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy.

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 17
PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

Response to error detection

The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless
of whether the pause status is applied.
All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" in pause mode report errors as in
productive operation.
The following applies to all channels which switch to the pause mode
"PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN":
● "Line break" and "Short circuit" error recognition is not possible during the pause.
– Messages for errors already pending before the "pause" are retained.
– Incoming and outgoing errors are reported once the "pause" has ended.
The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode:
● "Line break" and "Short circuit" error recognition continues to be possible during the
pause. These errors are reported.
● The selection of an incorrect pause substitute value which does not correspond to the
output range may result in the message "High limit exceeded" or "Low limit exceeded".
The pause substitute output value effective at the terminal is limited to the high or low
control limit for the output range.

Ending a "pause"
The pause is ended in the following cases:
● Failure of the supply voltage L+
● Change in parameter assignment of I/O module with DS128
● "End_Pause" command
● Controller failure
● Firmware update
● Station stop
● Restart of the interface module

PROFIenergy product information

18 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

Mode parameter
Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the
"Parameter assignment" chapter.

Table 1- 8 Mode parameter

Element Coding Explanation

Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause"
• Outputs free from current and voltage
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: Last output value is
maintained
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Substitute value at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: Configured pause substi-
tute value is output

1.5.5 IO-Link Master

Requirements
Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0)

Note
The minimum pause time (10 s) must be observed. If it is undershot, problems may occur
with the restart of IO-Link communication.

1.5.5.1 DI operating mode

Display
Switching off the supply voltage USn (port) also switches off the associated channel status
LED Qn if an external supply voltage is connected.

Response to error detection

The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless
of whether the pause status is adopted.

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 19
PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

Ending a "pause"
The pause is ended in the following cases:
● Failure of the supply voltage L+
● Re-assignment of the I/O module parameters
● "End_Pause" command
● Controller failure
● Firmware update
● Station stop
● Restart of the interface module

Mode parameter
Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the
"Parameter assignment" chapter.

Table 1- 9 Mode parameter

Element Coding Explanation

Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause"
• Supply voltage USn (port) switched off
• Pause substitute value: 0B
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause"
• Supply voltage USn (port) switched off
• Pause substitute value: Last input value
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Substitute value at "pause"
• Supply voltage USn (port) switched off
• Pause substitute value: Configured pause substi-
tute value

PROFIenergy product information

20 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

1.5.5.2 DQ operating mode

Display
The channel status LEDs Qn show the output value.

Response to error detection

The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless
of whether the pause status is adopted.

Ending a "pause"
The pause is ended in the following cases:
● Failure of the supply voltage L+
● Re-assignment of the I/O module parameters
● "End_Pause" command
● Controller failure
● Firmware update
● Station stop
● Restart of the interface module

Mode parameter
Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the
"Parameter assignment" chapter.

Table 1- 10 Mode parameter

Element Coding Explanation

Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: 0B
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: Last output value is
maintained
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Substitute value at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: Configured pause substi-
tute value is output

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 21
PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

1.5.5.3 IO-Link operating mode

Display
When supply voltage USn (port) is switched off, the associated port status LED Cn and port
error LED Fn are also switched off.

Response to error detection

The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless
of whether the pause status is adopted.
All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" and "PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE" in
pause mode report errors as in productive operation.
The following conditions apply to all channels (ports) which switch to a different pause mode
("PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN" and "PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE"):
● Switching off the supply voltage USn (port) at the start of "pause" does not result in the
messages "Line break" or "Short circuit".
● Error detection is not possible during the "pause" (no IO-Link device communication):
– Messages for errors already pending before the "pause" are retained.
– After the "pause" is over, the error status is updated and incoming/outgoing errors are
reported correspondingly.

Ending a "pause"
The pause is ended in the following cases:
● Failure of the supply voltage L+
● Re-assignment of the I/O module parameters
● "End_Pause" command
● Controller failure
● Firmware update
● Station stop
● Restart of the interface module

PROFIenergy product information

22 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
 PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

Mode parameter
Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the
"Parameter assignment" chapter.

Table 1- 11 Mode parameter

Element Coding Explanation

Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause"
• Supply voltage USn (port) switched off1
• Pause substitute value (input): 0B
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE2 • Supply voltage USn (port) switched off
• Last input and output value is maintained
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE see: 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN
1 Supply voltage USn of the assigned port is switched off. Result: The IO-Link device fails.
2 With time-based IO, the IO-Link master behaves according to 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN

PROFIenergy product information

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 23
Product Information Mixed ___________________
Preface

Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL ___________________

Application planning 1

2
___________________
Mounting
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Connection
ET 200SP
Product Information Mixed 4
___________________
Configuring
Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL
5
___________________
BaseUnit BU-Send
Product Information

___________________
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6

02/2016
A5E33344611-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E33344611-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2016.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 02/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Scope
This product information supplements the ET 200SP system manual documentation.

Security information
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security in the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 3
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Application planning ................................................................................................................................ 5
2 Mounting ................................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Connection ............................................................................................................................................. 9
4 Configuring ........................................................................................................................................... 13
5 BaseUnit BU-Send ................................................................................................................................ 17
5.1 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 17
5.2 Connection ............................................................................................................................. 18
5.3 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 19
6 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC................................................................................................................... 20
6.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 20
6.2 Pin assignment....................................................................................................................... 22
6.3 Schematic circuit diagram ...................................................................................................... 22
6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display.................................................................................... 23
6.5 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

4 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
Application planning 1
Mixed configuration ET 200SP and ET 200AL with ET-Connection
You have the option of integrating the I/O modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(IP65/IP67) in a configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (IP20).
The figure below shows a combination of the modules of the ET 200AL and ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.

Image 1-1 Mixed configuration ET 200SP and ET 200AL with ET-Connection

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 5
Application planning

Requirement
The following components support mixed configuration:
● Interface module
– IM 155-6 PN HF (V3.0 or higher)
– IM 155-6 PN ST (V3.1 or higher)
– IM 155-6 DP HF (V3.0 or higher)
● CPU
– CPU 1510SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
– CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
– CPU 1512SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
– CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
● BaseUnit BU-Send with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
● ET-Connection cable
● Power cable

Rules
You must observe the following rules when assembling a mixed configuration:
● The bus length of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system must not exceed 1 m
(without interface module, including BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC and server module)
● A maximum of 16 ET 200AL I/O modules can be connected to ET-Connection.
● The maximum length of the bus cable for ET-Connection between BA-Send and the first
module or between two modules is 15 m.
The following table shows which firmware versions of your IM or CPU support which
maximum bus cable length.

IM/CPU 2m 5m 10 m 15 m
IM 155-6 PN HF V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.3 or higher
IM 155-6 PN ST V3.1 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.3 or higher
IM 155-6 DP HF V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher --
CPU 1510SP-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
CPU 1510SP F-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
CPU 1512SP-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
CPU 1512SP F-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

6 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
 Application planning

Procedure
To assemble a multi-tier configuration, follow these steps:
1. Install the BaseUnit BU-Send to the immediate right of the ET 200SP CPU/interface
module.
When the BaseUnit BU-Send is used next to the ET 200SP CPU, a CM DP and an
Ethernet CP or a maximum of 2 Ethernet CPs can be inserted between the CPU and BU-
Send.
2. Then mount the additional BaseUnits / I/O modules for the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system and the server module.
3. Connect the bus cable for ET-Connection to the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and mount
this on the BaseUnit BU-Send.
4. Screw the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC to the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw with 0.2 Nm
tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade.
5. Connect the other end of the bus cable for ET-Connection (with M8 connector) to the first
ET 200AL I/O module (X30 socket ET-Connection IN).
6. Connect the supply voltage (24 V DC) to the ET 200AL I/O modules (X80 connector).

Note
Firmware update of an ET 200AL I/O module
When you run a firmware update of an ET 200AL I/O module, ET-Connection is briefly
interrupted by the restart of the module. All downstream ET 200AL I/O modules report a
pull/plug interrupt.

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 7
Mounting 2
Introduction
For the connection of the ET 200AL I/O module via ET-Connection to the ET 200SP, you
require the BaseUnit BU-Send with the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC.

Requirement
● The mounting rail is mounted.
● The interface module is mounted.

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for dismantling the BusAdapter)

Mounting BaseUnit BU-Send

To mount the BaseUnit BU-Send, follow these steps:
1. Mount the BU-Send to the right of the CPU/interface module.
2. Swivel the BU-Send back until you hear the mounting rail release click into place.
3. Move the BU-Send to the left until you hear it click into place on the CPU/interface
module.

Image 2-1 Mounting BU-Send

4. Mount the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC only after you have connected the bus cable for
ET-Connection (see section Connecting (Page 9)).

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

8 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
Connection 3
Introduction
You connect the ET 200AL I/O modules via the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC using ET-
Connection.

① BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC

② Connection element for ET-Connection bus cable

Image 3-1 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

Required tools
Screwdriver with 3 to 3.5 mm blade

Required accessories
Use the bus cable for ET-Connection as connecting cable between the BusAdapter BA-Send
1xFC and the ET 200AL I/O modules.
We recommend using the stripping tool for ET-Connection (6ES7194-2KA00-0AA0) with
blade cassette green (6GK1901-1B...). This guarantees fast and safe stripping.
The bus cable for ET-Connection M8, prefabricated on one side with 1 x M8 connector, 4-
pole, shielded, is available in the following lengths:
● Length 2 m: 6ES7194-2LH20-0AC0
● Length 5 m: 6ES7194-2LH50-0AC0
● Length 10 m: 6ES7194-2LN10-0AC0
● Length 15 m: 6ES7194-2LN15-0AB0

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 9
Connection

Procedure
To connect the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC, follow these steps:
1. Strip the sheath of the bus cable at the open end as follows:

Image 3-2 Connecting cable

Use the stripping tool for ET-Connection to do this. The relevant settings are shown on
the tool.
2. Pull back the locking slide of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC and open the cover of the
connection element.
3. Lift the cable routing up as far as it will go.
4. Insert the unstripped single cores of the bus cable (according to the imprinted color
coding) into the cable routing as far as they will go and press the cable routing down as
far as it will go.
5. Close the cover of the connection element and push the locking slide forward.

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

10 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
 Connection

6. Connect and screw the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC to the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw
with 0.2 Nm tightening torque.) To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade.
7. Connect the M8 connector of the bus cable to the first ET 200AL I/O module (socket X30
ET-Connection IN). For more information about wiring the ET 200AL I/O module refer to
the system manual of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.

① Locking slide ③ Shield contact

② Cable routing ④ Bus cable for ET-Connection
Image 3-3 Connection of the BusAdapeter BA-Send 1xFC

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 11
Connection

BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC mounted

① BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC

② Bus cable for ET-Connection

Image 3-4 BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC mounted

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

12 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
Configuring 4
Introduction
The mixed configuration allows the connection of up to 16 ET 200AL I/O modules to the ET
200SP via ET-Connection. The figure below shows the configuration of the ET-Connection
and the assignment of the slots.

① ET 200SP I/O modules ⑤ 1st ET 200AL I/O module

② ET 200SP server module ⑥ 16th ET 200AL I/O module
③ Slots ⑦ ET-Connection
④ PROFINET IO
Image 4-1 Mixed configuration

For more information about connecting the ET-Connection, supply voltages, actuators and
sensors, refer to the ET 200AL system manual.

Configuration with a CPU

In a configuration with a CPU, a maximum of 2 slots can be used immediately to the right of
the CPU with CM DP module or Ethernet CP. Combinations are also possible, i.e. CM DP
module and one Ethernet CP or two Ethernet CPs.
BU-Send and BA-Send should always be inserted to the immediate right of the CM/CP.

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 13
Configuring

Rules
Observe the following rules when configuring:
● With mixed configurations, the following maximum configuration is possible:
– 31 (IM 155-6 DP HF and IM 155-6 PN ST)/63 (IM 155-6 PN HF and CPUs) slots for
ET 200SP modules
– 16 slots for ET 200AL I/O modules
– 1 slot for BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC
– 1 slot for server module.
● The mixed configuration may contain a maximum of 31 (IM 155-6 DP HF and IM 155-6
PN ST)/63 (IM 155-6 PN HF) ET 200SP I/O modules.
● The server module can also be mounted right next to the BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC.
● Supported functions:

Function Mixed configuration

ET 200SP ET 200AL I/O modules on
IM CPU ET-Connection
Isochronous mode ⑥ -- --

Configuration control ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
Shared device ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
PROFIenergy ⑥ -- ⑥
System redundancy S2 -- -- --

Configuring
Observe the following points when configuring:
● BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC and server module must be configured. With BU-Send/BA-Send
1xFC, no parameters are available.
● Arrangement of the modules in the configuration:
– Configure the BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC downstream from the interface module in slot
1. Position the ET 200SP modules behind it.
– Configure the ET 200AL I/O modules from slot 66 (PROFINET)/67 (CPU)/34
(PROFIBUS).
● The layout of the modules represents a preset configuration and is independent of the
configuration control.
● The system redundancy S2 function is not available in a mixed configuration.

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

14 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
 Configuring

Configuration example
An example of a mixed configuration is shown below:

Hardware configuration

① ET 200SP I/O modules ⑥ 2nd ET 200AL I/O module

② ET 200SP server module ⑦ 3rd ET 200AL I/O module
③ Slots ⑧ 4th ET 200AL I/O module
④ PROFINET IO ⑨ ET-Connection
⑤ 1st ET 200AL I/O module
Image 4-2 Mixed configuration

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 15
Configuring

Configuring configuration example

Table 4- 1 Overview

Mixed configura- Module Slot

tion
ET 200SP IM 155-6 PN HF 0
BA-Send 1xFC 1
DI 16×24VDC ST 2
DI 16×24VDC ST 3
DI 16×24VDC ST 4
Server module 5
ET 200AL DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 66
DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 8xM8 67
AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 68
CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 69

Note
Configuration using PROFIBUS GSD file
When you use the PROFIBUS GSD file for the configuration, you must configure the gaps
between the server module and the first ET 200AL I/O module with BU-Cover.

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

16 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
BaseUnit BU-Send 5
5.1 Product overview

Article number
6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0

View

Image 5-1 BaseUnit BU-Send

Properties
BaseUnit suitable for BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 17
BaseUnit BU-Send
5.2 Connection

5.2 Connection

Pin assignment
The BaseUnit BU-Send has only one slot for an expansion module. No other connections
are available.

Schematic circuit diagram

① Backplane bus
② BA-Send 1xFC expansion module

Image 5-2 Schematic circuit diagram BU-Send

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

18 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
 BaseUnit BU-Send
5.3 Technical specifications

5.3 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BaseUnit BU-Send

6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0
Product type designation BaseUnit BU-Send
Installation type/mounting
Rack mounting possible Yes
Front installation possible Yes
Rail mounting possible Yes
Wall/direct mounting possible No
Hardware configuration
Slots
Number of slots 1
Plug-in modules, other Yes; BusAdapter BA-Send
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 32 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 19
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6
6.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0

View of the module

① Module type and name

② LED for diagnostics
③ ((Connection for ET-CONNECTION))
④ Article number
⑤ Functional version

Image 6-1 View of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

20 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
6.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● BusAdapter for the direct connection of ET-Connection
● Connects the interface module via ET-Connection with the ET 200AL I/O modules
● Supports all ET 200AL I/O modules
The module supports the following functions:
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3. See system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Maximum configuration
● 16 ET 200AL I/O modules
● 15 m bus cable between BusAdapter BA Send and the first ET 200AL I/O module and
between two ET 200AL I/O modules.
● Supported functions:

Function Mixed configuration

ET 200SP ET 200AL I/O modules on
IM CPU ET-Connection
Isochronous mode ⑥ -- --

Configuration control ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
Shared device ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
PROFIenergy ⑥ -- ⑥
System redundancy S2 -- -- --

Accessories
The following components must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label
● Stripping tool for ET-Connection
● Bus cables for ET-Connection

See also
You can find more information on accessories and additional components in the
Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual.

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 21
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
6.2 Pin assignment

6.2 Pin assignment

ET-Connection with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

The following table shows the signal names and the designations for the pin assignment of
the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC.

Table 6- 1 ET-Connection pin assignment with BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC

View Signal name Description

1 TD Transmit data +
2 RD Receive data +
3 TD_N Transmit data –
4 RD_N Receive data -

6.3 Schematic circuit diagram

Schematic circuit diagram

Image 6-2 Schematic circuit diagram for BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

22 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display

6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED display (status and fault display) of the BusAdapter BA-
Send 1xFC.

① DIAG (green/red)

Image 6-3 LED display

Meaning of the LED display

The table below explains the meaning of the status and fault display.

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 23
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
6.5 Technical specifications

DIAG LED
Table 6- 2 Status and fault display DIAG

DIAG LED Meaning Remedy

There is no connection between the Check whether the bus cable is interrupted.
Off ET-Connection interface of the
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and ET
200AL.
The interface module does not sup- Run a firmware update.
port the BA-Send 1xFC.
There is a connection between the ---
On ET-Connection interface of the
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and ET
200AL.
There is (at least) one diagnostics Check the ET-Connection device.
alarm of an ET-Connection device.
Flashes
Group error for all ET-Connection
bus nodes.
Set configuration does not match the Check the configuration of the ET-Connection to see
actual configuration on the ET- whether a module is missing or defective, or whether a
Connection. non-configured module is wired.

6.5 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Cable length
• Copper cables 15 m; as of IM firmware V3.3: Bus nodes be-
tween BA-Send and the first ET-Connection as
well as between all other bus nodes.
ET-Connection
Number of interfaces ET-Connection 1
FC (FastConnect) Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. 60 °C
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 44 g

Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

24 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
User calibration of analog modules ___________________
Security information 1

2
___________________
Introduction

SIMATIC
___________________
Requirement 3

___________________
Mode of operation 4
ET 200SP
User calibration of analog modules
___________________
Performing user calibration 5

___________________
Example 6
Product Information

___________________
Appendix A A

09/2014
A5E34352075-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E34352075-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2014.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 10/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Security information ................................................................................................................................ 5

2 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 6
3 Requirement ........................................................................................................................................... 8
4 Mode of operation ................................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2 Data set structure....................................................................................................................10
4.2.1 Job data set ............................................................................................................................11
4.2.2 Acknowledgment data set .......................................................................................................15
5 Performing user calibration ................................................................................................................... 21
5.1 Calibration start .......................................................................................................................21
5.2 Calibration sequence ..............................................................................................................22
5.3 Calibration exit ........................................................................................................................22
5.4 Calibration completion ............................................................................................................23
5.5 Status and error codes............................................................................................................24
5.6 Time stamp, Date/time ............................................................................................................26
5.7 Re-parameterization of the input/output range .......................................................................26
5.8 Calibration counter ..................................................................................................................27
5.9 Behavior at CPU-STOP ..........................................................................................................27
5.10 Behavior with parameter assignment of analog modules during calibration ..........................27
6 Example ............................................................................................................................................... 28
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) ....................................................................................................28
6.1.1 Example: Analog input module RTD (resistance thermometer) .............................................29
6.1.1.1 Step A: Start ............................................................................................................................29
6.1.1.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration ................................................................................................31
6.1.1.3 Step C: Intermediate step .......................................................................................................33
6.1.1.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive ....................................................................................35
6.1.1.5 Step E: Closure .......................................................................................................................37
6.1.2 Example: Analog output module +/-10 V ................................................................................38
6.1.2.1 Step A: Start ............................................................................................................................38
6.1.2.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration ................................................................................................40
6.1.2.3 Step C: Intermediate step .......................................................................................................42
6.1.2.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive ....................................................................................44
6.2 Abort (mode = 3) .....................................................................................................................46
6.2.1 User abort ...............................................................................................................................46
6.2.2 Module abort ...........................................................................................................................47

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 3
Table of contents

6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4) ....................................................................................... 48

6.3.1 Step A: Start ........................................................................................................................... 48
6.3.2 Step B: Closure ...................................................................................................................... 50
6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5) ................................................................................... 51
6.5 Reset (mode = 6) ................................................................................................................... 53
A Appendix A ........................................................................................................................................... 55
A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels ................................................................................ 55
A.2 Output type/range format: Output channels ........................................................................... 58

User calibration of analog modules

4 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
Security information 1
To ensure the secure operation of products and solutions from Siemens, it is necessary to
take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component
into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in
use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on
the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 5
Introduction 2
The characteristics of analog-digital/digital-analog converters in analog modules are usually
offset and not uniform in their slope. This means you must calibrate the characteristics to the
conditions of the analog module. A general distinction is made between factory calibration
and user calibration.

Factory calibration
To ensure the accuracy of an analog module, it is calibrated during production in the factory.
You cannot delete or change the factory calibration. You can only read the factory calibration
values.

User calibration
You can start, delete and read back a user calibration for an analog module with error-free
parameter assignment at any time. User calibration is used to increase the accuracy for
specific use cases with deviations that can be compensated, for example, by sensors or
wiring.

Zero-Scale/Offset calibration
Zero-Scale or Offset calibration is the calibration of the zero point. Usually "0" for bipolar
ranges and the low limit of the nominal range for unipolar ranges. The characteristic of the
converter is offset corrected and thus shifted into the zero point.

Full-Scale/Gain/Gain calibration
Full-Scale or Gain calibration is the calibration of the end point. It is usually the high limit of
the nominal range. The slope of the converter characteristic is adjusted so that it also
intersects the end point.

User calibration of analog modules

6 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Introduction

Converter characteristic
The figure below shows the shift of the converter characteristic into the zero point on the left.
The right part of the figure shows the change in the converter characteristic slope so that the
converter characteristic intersects the end point.

Figure 2-1 Correction of the converter characteristic

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 7
Requirement 3
The accuracy/quality of a user calibration depends on the following points:
● Stable temperature condition (e.g., 25 °C)
● The settling time of the used calibrator/measuring instrument and the analog module
(e.g., for input or output modules with integrated measuring process → sigma-delta
converter)
● Cables (if possible, short, shielded and grounded at one side)
● Accuracy of the used calibrator and/or measuring instrument

Note
Measuring accuracy
The measuring accuracy may deteriorate if the user calibration is not performed properly.
It is not immediately clear if a channel works with factory calibration values or user
calibration values.

User calibration of analog modules

8 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
Mode of operation 4
You must perform the user calibration for each channel. To do so, always calibrate the
selected channel in the set input/output range. You can start the user calibration at any time
for a channel with error-free parameter assignment. After successful user calibration the
newly calibrated channel works in the current input/output range with the newly determined
calibration values.

4.1 Procedure
The user calibration is controlled by the data sets (DS). You must write a job data set for the
analog module and receive instructions for further actions in the acknowledgment data set.
This procedure is described in more detail in the section Performing user calibration
(Page 21).
The figure below shows the steps required for the user calibration of an instruction to the
analog module.

Figure 4-1 Steps in the user calibration for an instruction

The analog module saves the user calibration values. The values always apply only to the
input/output range for which they were created. If the input/output range is re-parameterized,
the factory calibration values are used once again. But the user calibration values still exist
(see section Re-parameterization of the input/output range (Page 26)).

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 9
Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

Each user calibration receives a time stamp (for each channel) which includes the date and
time of the last user calibration of the channel. You must transfer the date and time to the
analog module during calibration, because these values are not generated by the analog
module.
The analog module controls the number of required calibration steps for a user calibration.
The actions which you must start or confirm during user calibration are also initiated by the
analog module.
The set input/output range of a channel can only be calibrated completely during a user
calibration (zero-scale and full-scale). Partial calibration is not possible (e.g., zero-scale
only).

4.2 Data set structure

You can start a calibration process with the Write data set (job data set) and Read data set
(acknowledgment data set) mechanisms, DS 237 for each.
The structure of the job data set and the acknowledgment data set is identical. This means
the acknowledgment data set read last serves as the template for the next job data set.
Job data set and acknowledgment data set also apply to mixed modules with input and
output channels. Mixed modules have an input channel and an output channel with channel
number 0. To determine if you are calibrating an output channel or an input channel, the
channel number for output channels generally has the offset value 40H added to it.

User calibration of analog modules

10 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

4.2.1 Job data set

The following table shows the structure of the job data set.

Table 4- 1 Structure of the job data set (18 bytes long)

Byte address Element Value range Format

0 Command/job ID 1: Factory calibration Byte
2: User calibration
3: Abort, normal channel pro-
cessing
4: Read calibration values
5: Restore factory calibration
6: Reset
1 Identifier 0 Byte
1
2 Channel number 00H … 3FH Byte
40H … 7FH
FFH
3 Calibration step FFH Byte
FEH … 00H
4 Not relevant - Byte
5 Not relevant - Byte
6 Not relevant - Byte
7 Input/output size 0: Not relevant Byte
1: mV
2: μA
3: -
4: Time/date
5: Ohm
6: Degrees
7: -
8: -
9: U~ (0.01 V) effective value AC
10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value
AC
11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase
angle)
8 Substitute value behavior of inputs 0: retain last value Byte
1: Overflow (7FFFH)
2: Substitute value
3: continue to supply values*
9 Reserved - Byte
10 … 17 Extended Record See section below Extended Record

* Only for analog modules AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF and AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 11
Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

The tables below show the value ranges of the elements and description of the job data set.

Command/job ID

Table 4- 2 Command/job ID

Value range Description

1: Factory calibration Not relevant
2: User calibration See section User calibration (mode = 2) (Page 28)
3: Abort, normal channel processing See section Abort (mode = 3) (Page 46)
4: Read calibration values See section Read calibration values (mode = 4)
(Page 48)
5: Restore factory calibration See section Restore factory calibration (mode = 5)
(Page 51)
6: Reset See section Reset (mode = 6) (Page 53)

Identifier

Table 4- 3 Identifier

Value range Description

0 Not relevant
1 Execute

Channel number

Table 4- 4 Channel number

Value range Description

00H … 3FH Input channels
40H … 7FH Output channels
FFH All channels, only permitted for command = 6 (Re-
set)

Calibration step

Table 4- 5 Calibration step

Value range Description

FFH Start
FEH … 00H Apply from last acknowledgment data set

User calibration of analog modules

12 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

Input/output size

Table 4- 6 Input/output size

Value range Description

0: Not relevant Specifies how to interpret the values as of byte 10.
1: mV
2: μA
3: -
4: Time/date
5: Ohm
6: Degrees
7: -
8: -
9: U~ (0.01 V) effective value AC
10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value AC
11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase angle)

Substitute value behavior of inputs

Table 4- 7 Substitute value behavior of inputs

Value range Description

0: retain last value Only relevant for analog input modules.
1: Overflow (7FFFH) Evaluated at start only.
2: Substitute value
3: continue to supply values*

* Only for analog modules AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF and AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 13
Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

Extended Record

Table 4- 8 Extended Record for input/output size = 1 (mV), 2 (μA), 5 (Ohm), 6 (Degrees)

Byte address Element Format Value range Description

10 Date1 Word - Place before the decimal point
32768 … 3276
7
12 Date2 Word -999 … 999 Places after decimal point * 1000
14 Date3 Word Not used
16 Substitute Word Not used
value

Extended Record for input/output size = 4 (Date/Time), BCD coded: See section Time
stamp, date/time (Page 26)

Table 4- 9 Extended Record for input/output size = 9 (U~), 10 (I~), 11 (Phi)

Byte address Element Format Value range Description

10 Date1 Word Not used
12 Date2 Word Not used
14 Date3 Word 0 … 65535 Setpoint for calibration operating
point
16 Substitute Word Not used
value

Table 4- 10 Extended Record for substitute value behavior of inputs = 2 (substitute value)

Byte address Element Format Value range Description

10 Date1 Word 0 Not relevant
12 Date2 Word 0 Not relevant
14 Date3 Word 0 Not relevant
16 Substitute Word 8000H … 7FFF Must be within parameterized
value H measuring range

User calibration of analog modules

14 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

4.2.2 Acknowledgment data set

The following table shows the structure of the acknowledgment data set.

Table 4- 11 Structure of the job or acknowledgment data set (18 bytes long)

Byte address Element Value range Format

0 Command/mode 1: Factory calibration Byte
2: User calibration
3: Abort, normal channel pro-
cessing
4: Read calibration values
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working Byte
01H: OK, Ready
≥ 10H: Error
2 Channel number 00H … 3FH Byte
40H … 7FH
FFH
3 Calibration step FFH … 00H Byte
4 Input/output type 00H … F9H Byte
5 Input/output range 00H … F9H Byte
6 User action 0: None Byte
1: Short-circuit
2: Feed, connection
3: Measurement
4: Remove connections
7 Input/output size 0: Not relevant Byte
1: mV
2: μA
3: Calibration values
4: Time/date
5: Ohm
6: Degrees
7: -
8: -
9: U~ (0.01 V) effective value AC
10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value
AC
11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase
angle)
8 Calibration counter 00H … FFH Byte
9 Reserved - Byte
10 … 17 Extended Record See section below Extended Record

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 15
Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

The tables below show the value ranges of the elements and description of the
acknowledgment data set.

Command/mode
Is mirrored from the command with error-free processing of the job data set.

Table 4- 12 Command/mode

Value range Description

1: Factory calibration Not relevant
2: User calibration See section User calibration (mode = 2)
(Page 28)
3: Abort, normal channel processing See section Abort (mode = 3) (Page 46)
4: Read calibration values See section Read calibration values (mode = 4)
(Page 48)

Status/error code

Table 4- 13 Status/error code

Value range Description

00H: OK, Working Job processing still ongoing
01H: OK, Ready Job processing successfully completed
≥ 10H: Error See section Status and error codes (Page 24)

Channel number

Table 4- 14 Channel number

Value range Description

00H … 3FH Input channels
40H … 7FH Output channels
FFH All channels

Calibration step

Table 4- 15 Calibration step

Value range Description

FFH … 00H Number of calibration steps still required

User calibration of analog modules

16 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

Input/output type

Table 4- 16 Input/output type

Value range Description

00H … F9H Currently parameterized input/output type of the
channel, see Parameter tables in the sections
Format input type/range: Input channels
(Page 55) and Format output type/range: Output
channels (Page 58)

Input/output range

Table 4- 17 Input/output range

Value range Description

00H … F9H Currently parameterized input/output range of the
channel, see Parameter tables in the sections
Format input type/range: Input channels
(Page 55) and Format output type/range: Output
channels (Page 58)

User action

Table 4- 18 User action

Value range Description

0: None Indicates how to wire the terminals specified
1: Short-circuit under Terminal1/Terminal2.
2: Feed, connection
3: Measurement
4: Remove connections

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 17
Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

Input/output size

Table 4- 19 Input/output size

Value range Description

0: Not relevant Specifies how to interpret the values as of byte
1: mV 10.
2: μA For user actions = 2 and 3 the corresponding unit
3: Calibration values is specified here.
4: Time/date
5: Ohm
6: Degrees
7: -
8: -
9: U~ (0.01 V) effective value AC
10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value AC
11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase angle)

Calibration counter

Table 4- 20 Calibration counter

Value range Description

00H … FFH Number of successful user calibrations
00H = Factory calibration values

User calibration of analog modules

18 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

Extended Record

Table 4- 21 Extended Record for input/output size = 1 (mV), 2 (μA), 5 (Ω), 6 (Degrees)

Byte address Element Format Value range Description

10 Date1 Word -32768 … 32767 Place before the decimal point
12 Date2 Word -999 … 999 Place after decimal point * 1000
14 Date3 Word Not used
16 Terminal1 Byte 0…x Terminal at BaseUnit
(0 = invalid)
17 Terminal2 Byte 0…x Terminal at BaseUnit
(0 = invalid)

Table 4- 22 Extended Record for input/output size = 9 (U~), 10 (I~), 11 (Phi)

Byte address Element Format Value range Description

10 Date1 Double word 00H … FFFFFFFFH Calibration register content
(last calibration step executed)
14 Date2 Word 0 … 65535 Setpoint for next step
16 Terminal1 Byte 0…x Terminal at BaseUnit
(0 = invalid)
17 Terminal2 Byte 0…x Terminal at BaseUnit
(0 = invalid)

Extended Record for input/output size = 4 (Date/Time): See section Time stamp, date/time
(Page 26)

Table 4- 23 Extended Record for input/output size = 3 (calibration values)

Byte address Element Format Value range Description

10 Date1 Word Format 1 Offset (converter units)
12 Date2 Word Format 2 Gain
14 Date3 Word Module-specific Add1
16 Date4 Word Format 1 or For- Add2
mat 2

The values can be output in two formats:

Format 1 (identifier = 0):
WORD, value range -32767 ... +32768
Format 2 (identifier = 1):
Value range -31.999 to +31.999

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 19
Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure

Table 4- 24 Extended Record: Places before and after the decimal point

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

VZ Places before the decimal Places after decimal point * 1000 (0 … 999)
point (0 … 31)

Format Terminal1/Terminal2:
For user actions = 1, 2, 3, 4 the terminal number of the terminal at BaseUnit are displayed
here (1 … x).

User calibration of analog modules

20 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
Performing user calibration 5
5.1 Calibration start
You must start the user calibration using the job data set with command = 2 (user calibration)
and calibration step = FFH (Start).
An active/running calibration is displayed with Mode = 2 (user calibration) in the
acknowledgment data set.
A diagnostic is also reported for analog modules with diagnostic capability:
● Analog modules with channel diagnostics signal error 31 (Channel temporarily
unavailable) for the affected channel, channel fault LED lights up red, the module fault
LED flashes.
● Analog modules which support the value status (QI) set QI to "BAD".

The user calibration can be started at any time. The start requires that the channel was
parameterized without errors and that it is not already in another calibration mode which can
be recognized by command 3 and status > 00H in the acknowledgment data set:
● After starting the user calibration and until it is completed, only command = 2 is accepted
and processed for this channel.
All other commands result in the user calibration being aborted.
● The acknowledgment data set is generated immediately by mirroring it from the job data
set and entering it in the status = 00H (OK, Working).
● After completing the calibration step, the acknowledgment data set is updated and the
status > 00H is set:
– The command was accepted with status = 01H (OK, Ready). The number of steps that
still have to executed is specified in the calibration step. The action that you need to
execute next is specified in the user action.
– For user action = 1 (Short-circuit), 2 (Infeed), 3 (Measuring) and 4 (Remove
connections), the relevant terminals are specified in the Extended Record under
Terminal1 and Terminal2 whereby Terminal1 is always the positive terminal.
– For user action = 2 (Infeed) or 3 (Measuring) the unit is specified for measured
variable (e.g., μA or mV).
– For status > 10H, an error was detected and calibration was aborted. In
Command/Mode, "Abort, normal channel processing" is signaled. The analog module
resumes the same status as before calibration was started.

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 21
Performing user calibration
5.2 Calibration sequence

5.2 Calibration sequence

Each calibration step is triggered by writing the job data set with calibration step = FFH (for
start) or FEH … 00H, applied from the previously signaled acknowledgment data set and
identifier = 01H.
Next the analog module has to read and evaluate the acknowledgment data set.
● For status = 00H (OK, Working), the calibration of the analog module initiated with the job
data set is still in progress.
● For status = 01H (OK, Ready), the calibration of the analog module initiated with the job
data set is complete and was processed without errors.
● For status ≥ 10H (Error), the calibration of the analog module initiated with the job data set
was not processed successfully and was acknowledged with an error. The ongoing
calibration is aborted and any determined calibration values are discarded.

Note
Non-relevant elements
Elements that are not relevant for a calibration step are not taken into consideration by the
module. The user calibration is not aborted by these elements.

5.3 Calibration exit

You can exit the calibration in any calibration step by means of a job data set with command
= 3 (Abort, normal channel processing). Any calibration values determined until then are lost.
The analog module resumes the same status as before calibration was started. If user
calibration values existed before the calibration, these will become effective again after the
abort. If no user calibration values existed, the factory calibration values are still in effect.
Any calibration initiated previously can also be aborted with the following actions:
● POWER OFF/POWER ON of the supply voltage
● Pulling & plugging of the analog module
● Re-parameterization of the analog module
● Re-parameterization of the analog module
● Firmware update of the analog module

User calibration of analog modules

22 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Performing user calibration
5.4 Calibration completion

5.4 Calibration completion

The last calibration step is the confirmation of the calibration or of the determined calibration
values. This calibration step is initialized by the analog module for a user calibration with
calibration step = 1 in the acknowledgment data set. All calibration values of the current
calibration process are determined and signaled back.
Confirm the calibration values with the job data set and calibration step = 1. With input/output
size = 4 (Date/Time) a time stamp in S7 BCD format is entered starting with byte 10 (see
section Time stamp, Date/Time (Page 26)).
As soon as the calibration values and the time stamp of the analog module have been
checked and applied, mode = 3 (normal channel processing) and status = 01H (OK, Ready)
are signaled in the acknowledgment data set. The channel number, the input/output type and
the input/
output range remain the same; the remaining data equals zero.
The newly determined calibration values are now valid and in effect.
The previous user calibration values are overwritten and cannot be restored.
In case of an error in the last calibration step (e.g., error in time stamp), the corresponding
error code is signaled in the status. The new calibration values are discarded.

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 23
Performing user calibration
5.5 Status and error codes

5.5 Status and error codes

Table 5- 1 Status codes

Status code Description

00H OK, Working; job in progress
01H OK, Ready; job executed without error
02H … 0FH Reserved

Calibration is aborted with an error if an error occurs during calibration.

Table 5- 2 Error codes

Error codes Description Remedy/Cause

General errors of the calibration process
10H Invalid command Correct job data set; table Com-
mand/job ID (Page 12)
11H Invalid channel number Correct job data set; table Identification
(Page 12)
12H Invalid identification Correct job data set; table Channel
number (Page 12)
13H Invalid calibration step Correct job data set; table Calibration
step (Page 12)
14H Error in input/output type or input/ Input/output type or input/output range
output range cannot be scaled; see Analog Module
Manual
15H Invalid module action Irrelevant for user calibration
16H Invalid input/output size information Extended Record, invalid content; Cor-
rect job data set (Page 11)
17H Reserved –
18H Time stamp error (year) Invalid time stamp; correct job data set;
19H Time stamp error (month) section Time stamp, Date/Time
(Page 26)
1AH Time stamp error (day)
1BH Time stamp error (hour)
1CH Time stamp error (minute)
1DH Time stamp error (day of the week)
1EH Invalid substitute value behavior of Correct job data set; table Substitute
inputs value behavior of inputs (Page 13)
1F H Substitute value out of the measuring
range

User calibration of analog modules

24 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Performing user calibration
5.5 Status and error codes

Error codes Description Remedy/Cause

Technology errors
20H Value measured by user deviates too Circuit, check measuring technique;
much from setpoint correct job data set
21H Value supplied by user deviates too Circuit, check infeed technique
much from setpoint
22H … 23H Reserved –
24H User calibration not supported See Analog Module Manual
25H … 2FH Reserved –
System errors/general module errors
30H Error writing to EEPROM/Flash Replace analog module
31H Error in procedure A job data set with a command other
than the one active came in during the
calibration process.
Follow procedure; see section Example
(Page 28)
32H Channel not parameterized Correct configuration/parameter as-
signment
33H Reserved –
34H Abort due to parameter assignment See section Behavior with parameter
during ongoing calibration assignment of analog modules during
calibration (Page 27)
35H … 3FH Reserved –
Other faults/errors
40H Reserved –
41H No calibration values available No calibration values available to delete;
See section Prepare factory calibration
(mode = 5) (Page 51) and Reset (mode
= 6) (Page 53)
42H … FFH Reserved –

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 25
Performing user calibration
5.6 Time stamp, Date/time

5.6 Time stamp, Date/time

During user calibration, you transfer the date and time of the synchronization to the analog
module in calibration step = 1 Date and time.
When reading the calibration values (command = 4), the date and time of the read
calibration values are output in calibration step = 1.
Both take place with measured variable = 4 as time stamp in the acknowledgment data set
as well as in the job data set as of byte 10 in S7 BCD format.

Byte address Value Format Value range

10 Year Byte 00H = 2000, 99H = 2099
11 Month Byte 01H … 12H
12 Tag Byte 01H … 31H
13 Hour Byte 00H … 23H
14 Minute Byte 00H … 59H
15 Second Byte 00H … 59H
16 ms Byte 00H … 99H
17.4 … 17.7 ms High nibble 0H … 9H
17.0 … 17.3 Day of the week Low nibble 0 = undefined
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday

5.7 Re-parameterization of the input/output range

If you have conducted a user calibration on a channel, the user calibration values are in
effect for this channel. The user calibration values always apply only to the input/output
range for which they were created. If the input/output range is re-parameterized to another
input/output range, the factory calibration values are used once again for this range. The
user calibration values still exist.
When you start a user calibration in the new input/output range, the new calibration values
are saved for this new input/output range. The user calibration values of the previous
input/output range are overwritten because only one user calibration can be saved per
channel.
If you do not start user calibration and switch back to the previous input/output range, the
previous user calibration values will be in effect once again.
Other channel parameters (e.g., interference frequency suppression) have no effect on the
validity of the calibration values.

User calibration of analog modules

26 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Performing user calibration
5.8 Calibration counter

5.8 Calibration counter

Each error-free and complete user calibration of a channel is counted. More than 255
calibration processes do not increase the calibration counter.
The current counter status (including ongoing calibration) is displayed in calibration step = 1
together with the currently determined calibration values. When you acknowledge this
calibration step with the job data set, the calibration counter is saved retentively with the
determined user calibration values and will be in effect.
Each command = 5 (Restore factory calibration) or 6 (Reset) deletes the calibration counter.
A re-parameterization of the input/output ranges does not delete the calibration counter.
When you start a user calibration in the new input/output range, the calibration counter is
reset and starts counting from 1 again.
If you do not start user calibration and switch back to the previous input/output range, the
previous user calibration values will be in effect once again.

5.9 Behavior at CPU-STOP

Reading and writing of data sets is not possible in CPU STOP.

5.10 Behavior with parameter assignment of analog modules during

calibration
Each parameter data set that comes in during an ongoing user calibration results in the
calibration being aborted.
The acknowledgment data set is updated with a corresponding error message.

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 27
Example 6
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)
All processes described below are based on the initial state of the acknowledgment data set.

Byte Element Value

0 Mode 3: normal channel processing
1 Status/error code >0
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH*
4 Input/output type 0
5 Input/output range 0
6 User action 0: None
7 Input/output size 0
8 Calibration counter 0
9 Reserved 0
10 Date1 0
12 Date2 0
14 Date3 0
16 Terminal1 0
17 Terminal2 0

* The calibration step can only take place immediately after run-up FFH. After completion/abort of a
calibration step, "0 = no more steps" is signaled.

Only the data necessary for the current calibration step are entered in the job/
acknowledgment data set.
● The command and the channel number must remain the same for each job data set of a
calibration sequence; otherwise, the calibration is aborted.
● The calibration step must be transferred to the analog module again in each job data set
according to the last acknowledgment data set. The start is an exception.
● The channel must be parameterized.
● A job data set may only be transferred to the analog module with status > 00H.
● The current calibration step is to be executed with identifier = 1 in the job data set.

User calibration of analog modules

28 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

6.1.1 Example: Analog input module RTD (resistance thermometer)

6.1.1.1 Step A: Start

Job data set:
Start the user calibration with channel X. The specified substitute value behavior of the
inputs and the substitute value apply to the triggered calibration and are evaluated and
applied by the analog module during the initial call only.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH: Start
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior 0: retain last value
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Datem3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 29
Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

Acknowledgment data set:

The analog module acknowledges the change to user calibration (mode = 2) with channel =
X and status = 00H (OK, Working). As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H
(OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can
evaluate the data. The input/output range currently set on this channel as well as the number
of required calibration steps is signaled. The analog module requests channel X in the next
calibration step; short-circuit at terminals Y and Z.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step FFH 4 more steps
4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire
5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std.
6 User action 1: Short-circuit
7 Input/output size
8 Calibration counter
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

User calibration of analog modules

30 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

6.1.1.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 4. The requested action (short-circuit terminals Y, Z) is
finished.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier 1: Execute
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step 4
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 31
Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the
acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data.
The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The analog module requests
channel X in the next calibration step; infeed; remove connections.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step 4 3 more steps
4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire
5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std.
6 User action 4: Remove connec-
tions
7 Input/output size
8 Calibration counter
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

User calibration of analog modules

32 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

6.1.1.3 Step C: Intermediate step

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 3. The requested action (remove connections at terminals Y,
Z) is finished.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier 1: Execute
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step 3
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 33
Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the
acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data.
The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The analog module requests
channel X in the next calibration step; infeed 390.5 Ω at terminals Y and Z.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step 3 2 more steps
4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire
5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std.
6 User action 2: Infeed
7 Input/output size 5: Ohm
8 Calibration counter
9 Reserved
10 Date1 390
12 Date2 500
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

User calibration of analog modules

34 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

6.1.1.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 2. The requested action (infeed 390.5 Ω at terminals Y, Z) is
finished.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier 1: Execute
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step 2
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 35
Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the
acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data.
The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The calibration values
determined by the analog module are signaled (identified by measured variable = 3). The
offset is in Date1, the gain in Date2, Add1 in Date3 (if present) and Add2 in Date4 (if
present).
The number of successful calibration processes is signaled for this input/output range in the
calibration counter.
1 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means the last calibration step.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step 2 1 more step
4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire
5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std.
6 User action 0: None
7 Input/output size 3: Calibration values
8 Calibration counter X: 1 … 255
9 Reserved
10 Date1 Offset
12 Date2 Gain
14 Date3 Add1
16 Date4 Add2

User calibration of analog modules

36 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

6.1.1.5 Step E: Closure

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 1. The synchronization values signaled by the analog module
are accepted. You must enter the date and the time with measured variable = 4 in S7 BCD
format as of byte 10.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier 1: Execute
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step 1
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size 4: Date/time
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date/time Date and time in S7 BCD format

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (normal
channel processing), the determined calibration values and date/time are applied and saved.
0 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means no more calibration steps. Calibration
complete.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 3: normal channel
processing
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step 1 0 (ready now)
4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire
5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std.
6 User action 0
7 Input/output size 0
8 Calibration counter 0
9 Reserved 0
10 Date1 0
12 Date2 0
14 Date3 0
16 Terminal1 0
17 Terminal2 0

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 37
Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

6.1.2 Example: Analog output module +/-10 V

6.1.2.1 Step A: Start

Job data set:
Start the user calibration with channel X.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH: Start
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

38 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

Acknowledgment data set:

The analog module acknowledges the change to user calibration (mode = 2) with channel =
X and status = 00H (OK, Working). As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H
(OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can
evaluate the data.
The input/output range currently set on this channel as well as the number of required
calibration steps is signaled.
The analog module requests channel X in the first calibration step; measuring at terminals Y
and Z.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step FFH 3 more steps
4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage
5 Input/output range 02H: 0 … 10 V
6 User action 3: Measurement
7 Input/output size 1: mV
8 Calibration counter
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 39
Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

6.1.2.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 3. The requested action (voltage measuring at terminals Y, Z)
is finished. The measured voltage is transferred to the analog module in Date1 in the unit
specified under measured variable. The place in front of the decimal point of the voltage in
mV is entered in Date1, and the value after the decimal point of the voltage in mV multiplied
by 1000 is entered in Date2. Example: 15.6 mV.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier 1: Execute
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step 3
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size 1: mV
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1 15
12 Date2 600
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

40 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the
acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data.
The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented.
The analog module requests channel X in the next calibration step; measuring at terminals Y
and Z.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step 3 2 more steps
4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage
5 Input/output range 02H: 0 … 10 V
6 User action 3: Measurement
7 Input/output size 1: mV
8 Calibration counter
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 41
Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

6.1.2.3 Step C: Intermediate step

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 2. The requested action (voltage measuring at terminals Y, Z)
is finished. The measured voltage is transferred to the analog module in Date1 in the unit
specified under measured variable. The place in front of the decimal point of the voltage in
mV is entered in Date1, and the value after the decimal point of the voltage in mV multiplied
by 1000 is entered in Date2. Example: 9986.3 mV.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier 1: Execute
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step 2
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size 1: mV
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1 9986
12 Date2 300
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

42 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the
acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data.
The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The calibration values
determined by the analog module are signaled (identified by measured variable = 3). The
offset is in Date1, the gain in Date2, Add1 in Date3 (if present) and Add2 in Date4 (if
present). The number of successful calibration processes is signaled for this input/output
range in the calibration counter.
1 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means the last calibration step.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step 2 1 more step
4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage
5 Input/output range 02H: 0 … 10 V
6 User action 0: None
7 Input/output size 3: Calibration values
8 Calibration counter X: 1 … 255
9 Reserved
10 Date1 Offset
12 Date2 Gain
14 Date3 Add1
16 Date4 Add2

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 43
Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

6.1.2.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 1. The synchronization values signaled by the analog module
are accepted.
You must enter the date and the time with measured variable = 4 in S7 BCD format as of
Date1.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier 1: Execute
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step 1
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size 4: Date/time
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1 Date and time in S7 BCD format

User calibration of analog modules

44 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (normal
channel processing), the determined calibration values and date/time are applied and saved.
0 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means no more calibration steps. Calibration
complete.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 3: normal channel
processing
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step 1 0 (ready now)
4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage
5 Input/output range 02H: 0 … 10 V
6 User action 0
7 Input/output size 0
8 Calibration counter 0
9 Reserved 0
10 Date1 0
12 Date2 0
14 Date3 0
16 Terminal1 0
17 Terminal2 0

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 45
Example
6.2 Abort (mode = 3)

6.2 Abort (mode = 3)

6.2.1 User abort

Job data set:
An ongoing calibration can be aborted in any calibration step and in any state, even with
status = 00H (OK, Working), with the command = 3 (Abort, channel processing).

Byte Element Value

0 Command 3: Abort, channel processing
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

46 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.2 Abort (mode = 3)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (abort,
normal channel processing), the calibration of channel X is aborted. The channel has the
same state as before the calibration. The input/output range currently set on the channel is
signaled.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 3: Abort, channel 3: Abort, channel
processing processing
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step 0
4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage
5 Input/output range 02H: 0 … 10 V
6 User action 0
7 Input/output size 0
8 Calibration counter 0
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1
17 Terminal2

6.2.2 Module abort

If the analog module detects an error during a calibration process, this error aborts the
calibration. The error code is signaled in the status.

See also
Calibration exit (Page 22)

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 47
Example
6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4)

6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4)

All current calibration values of an analog module channel are read with command = 4 (Read
calibration values); these are either the values from the factory calibration or the user
calibration.
The command is only permitted in status > 00H. The channel number must be specified and
the calibration step must be set to FFH (Start).

6.3.1 Step A: Start

Job data set:

Byte Element Value

0 Command 4: Read calibration values
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH: Start
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

48 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the
acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. Measured variable = 3
identifies the data as of Date1 as calibration values. Only the current calibration values of the
specified channel are read with command = 4; these are the calibration values associated
with the parameterized input/output range.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 4: Read calibration 4: Read calibration
values values
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step FFH 1 more step
4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage
5 Input/output range 02H: 0 … 10 V
6 User action 0: None
7 Input/output size 3: Calibration values
8 Calibration counter X: 0 … 255
9 Reserved 0
10 Date1 Offset
12 Date2 Gain
14 Date3 Add1
16 Date4 Add2

The input/output range currently set on the channel is signaled.

The offset is in Date1, the gain in Date2, Add1 in Date3 (if present) and Add2 in Date4 (if
present).
The calibration counter specifies if the values are factory calibration values (calibration
counter = 0) or user calibration values (calibration counter > 0). For user calibration values,
the value of the calibration counter is equal to the number of successful calibration
processes for this input/output range (since the last user calibration of a different input/output
range).
Calibration step = 1 indicates that one more step is necessary.

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 49
Example
6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4)

6.3.2 Step B: Closure

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 1.

Byte Element Value

0 Command 4: Read calibration values
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step 1
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the
acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. Measured variable = 4
identifies the data as of Date1 Time stamp. A time stamp that matches the previously read
calibration values is signaled.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 4: Read calibration 3: normal channel
values processing
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step 1 0
4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage
5 Input/output range 02H: 0 … 10 V
6 User action 0: None
7 Input/output size 4: Date/time
8 Calibration counter X: 0 … 255
9 Reserved
10 Date/time Date and time in S7
BCD format

User calibration of analog modules

50 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5)

6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5)

Use command = 5 (Restore factory calibration) to undo the executed user calibration of the
specified channel for the set input/output range. The analog module applies the calibration
values determined at the factory which will be in effect again. Delete saved user calibration
values.
If user calibration values of the channel exist which do not belong to the set input/output
range, these are not deleted.
The command is only permitted in status > 00H.
Specify the channel number and set the calibration step to FFH (Start).
The calibration counter is set to 0 again with this command.
Job data set:

Byte Element Value

0 Command 5: Restore factory calibration
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 51
Example
6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (normal
channel processing), restoration is complete. The user calibration was deleted and the
channel continues operating in the previous state with factory calibration values.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 5: Restore factory 3: normal channel
calibration processing
1 Status/error code 00: OK, Working 01: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step FFH 0 (ready now)
4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage
5 Input/output range 02H: 0 … 10 V
6 User action
7 Input/output size
8 Calibration counter
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1
17 Terminal2

User calibration of analog modules

52 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Example
6.5 Reset (mode = 6)

6.5 Reset (mode = 6)

Use the command = 6 (Reset) to restore the factory calibration for a channel or the entire
analog module regardless of the parameter assignment of the channels.
The factory calibration of a channel is restored according to the channel number, and any
saved user calibration values are deleted (even if the saved user calibration values do not
belong to the currently set input/output range). With channel number FFH, restoration takes
place for all channels of the analog module.
The command is only permitted in status > 00H. Set the calibration step to FFH (Start). The
channel or the analog module must not be parameterized.
The involved calibration counters are set to 0 again with this command.
Job data set:

Byte Element Value

0 Command 6: Reset
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 53
Example
6.5 Reset (mode = 6)

Acknowledgment data set:

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (normal
channel processing), reset is complete. The user calibration values were deleted. All
channels involved continue operating in their previous state with factory calibration values.

Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 6: Reset 3: normal channel
processing
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step FFH 0 (ready now)
4 Input/output type
5 Input/output range
6 User action
7 Input/output size
8 Calibration counter
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1
17 Terminal2

User calibration of analog modules

54 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
Appendix A A
A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels

Input type format: Input channels

ValueD Input type

00 Deactivated
01 Voltage
02 Current (4-wire transducer)
03 Current (2-wire transducer)
04 resistance (4-wire connection)
05 resistance (3-wire connection)
06 resistance (2-wire connection)
07 Thermal resistance (linear, 4-conductor connection)
08 Thermal resistance (linear, 3-conductor connection)
09 Thermal resistance (linear, 2-conductor connection)
10 Thermocouple

Input range format: Input channels

An input type that is not as listed in this table can also be used for specific modules. You
must note, however, that the input type in the acknowledgment data set no longer matches
the general definition.

ValueD Input type

For input type = 01 (voltage)
00 ± 25 mV
01 ± 50 mV
02 ± 80 mV
03 ± 250 mV
04 ± 500 mV
05 ±1V
06 ± 1.25 V
07 ± 2.5 V
08 ±5V
09 ± 10 V
10 1…5V
11 0 … 10 V

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 55
Appendix A
A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels

ValueD Input type

For input type = 02, 03 (current)
00 ± 3.2 mA
01 ± 10 mA
02 0 … 20 mA
03 4 … 20 mA
04 ± 20 mA
05 ± 5 mA
For input type = 04, 05, 06 (resistor: 4-wire, 3-wire , 2-wire connection)
00 48 Ω
01 150 Ω
02 300 Ω
03 600 Ω
04 3000 Ω
05 6000 Ω
06 10000 Ω
15 PTC (DIN VDE 0660 Part 303 Type A)
For input type = 07, 08, 09 (thermistor: 4-wire, 3-wire , 2-wire connection)
00 Pt100 climatic range
01 Ni100 climatic range
02 Pt100 Standard range
03 Ni100 standard range
04 Pt500 standard range
05 Pt1000 standard range
06 Ni1000 standard range
07 Pt200 climatic range
08 Pt500 climatic range
09 Pt1000 climatic range
10 Ni1000 climatic range
11 Pt200 standard range
12 Ni120 standard range
13 Ni120 climatic range
14 Cu10 climatic range
15 Cu10 standard range
16 Ni200 standard range
17 Ni200 climatic range
18 Ni500 standard range
19 Ni500 climatic range
20 Pt10 standard range
21 Pt10 climatic range
22 Pt50 standard range
23 Pt50 climatic range
24 Cu50 standard range

User calibration of analog modules

56 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
 Appendix A
A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels

ValueD Input type

25 Cu50 climatic range
26 Cu100 standard range
27 Cu100 climatic range
28 LG Ni1000 standard range
29 LG Ni1000 climatic range
For input type = 10 (thermocouple)
00 Type B [PtRh-PtRh]
01 Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi]
02 Type E [NiCr-CuNi]
03 Type R [PtRh-Pt]
04 Type S [PtRh-Pt]
05 Type J [Fe-CuNi]
06 Type L [Fe-CuNi] recalled since 1994 standard (DIN 43710)
07 Type T [Cu-CuNi]
08 Type K [NiCr-Ni]
09 Type U [Cu-CuNi] recalled since 1994 standard (DIN 43710)
10 Type C [W5Re-W26Re]
11 TXK/XK(L) [TXK/XK(L)]

User calibration of analog modules

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 57
Appendix A
A.2 Output type/range format: Output channels

A.2 Output type/range format: Output channels

Output type format: Output channels

An output type that is not as listed in this table can also be used for specific modules. You
must note, however, that the output type in the acknowledgment data set no longer matches
the general definition.

ValueD Output type

00 Deactivated
01 Voltage
02 Current (4-wire transducer)
03 Current (2-wire transducer)

Output range format: Output channels

ValueD Output range

For output type = 01 (voltage)
00 ± 10 V
01 ±5V
02 0 … 10 V
03 1…5V
04 ± 2.5 V
05 ±1V
For output type = 02, 03 (current)
00 ± 20 mA
01 0 … 20 mA
02 4 … 20 mA

User calibration of analog modules

58 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
SIMATIC
ET 200SP Open Controller
Product information on CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)
Product Information

Validity
This product information supplements the documentation for the ET 200SP Open Controller CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF),
edition 09/2018.
The information provided in it should be considered more up-to-date if uncertainties arise.
The described function restrictions apply exclusively to the Open Controller CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) V2.5.

Technical update
Acronis backup is not supported
The Acronis backup is not supported in the current version – please use Image Partition Creator.

No activation of the Windows copy

If you do not have an Internet connection, you do not need to activate the Windows copy. There are no functional
restrictions.

Display of processor temperature by SIMATIC IPC DiagBase

The SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software shows only the temperature of the CPU. The temperature of the motherboard and
work memory are currently not displayed.

Changing the boot order

The boot order changes automatically when a DVD drive with USB connection is connected to the Open Controller
CPU 1515SP PC2 V2.5.

Restrictions when using the power management function

The power management function helps to maximize the performance of your PC or to save energy. Activating the "Power
saver" function may restrict the functions of the software controller.

Key combination <Ctrl+Alt+Del> during initial commissioning

To ensure that the initial initialization is complete, do not use the key combination <Ctrl+Alt+Del> during the initialization
phase.

Restriction to one monitor

Use only one monitor. If several monitors are used simultaneously, undefined states may occur in the system.

Cables for connecting the DisplayPorts

Use only the following cables to connect the DisplayPorts:
● DisplayPort cable, length: 5 m, E74020-C AWM Style 20276, 80°C, 30 V, VW-1 (with integrated ferrite cores at both
ends)
● DisplayPort cable, length: 3 m, 6AV7860-0DH30-0AA0
● DisplayPort cable, length: 5 m, 6AV7860-0DH50-0AA0

© Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved

4 A5E44910079-AA, 09/2018
Changes to section 12.4: Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
The tables below show the mechanical environmental conditions in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.

Table 1 Mechanical environmental conditions for BA 2×RJ45

Frequency range
5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude
8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration

Table 2 Mechanical environmental conditions for BA 2×FC

Frequency range
5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.2 Hz 7.5 mm amplitude
8.2 Hz ≤ f ≤ 500 Hz 2 g constant acceleration
The following table provides information about the type and scope of the tests for environmental mechanical conditions.

Table 3 Tests for mechanical environmental conditions

Test for ... Test standard Comment

Vibrations Vibration test Type of vibration: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of
according to 1 octave/minute.
IEC 60068-2-6 (sine) BA 2×RJ45
• 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude
• 8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration
BA 2×FC
• 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.2 Hz, 7.5 mm constant amplitude
• 8.2 Hz ≤ f ≤ 500 Hz, 2 g constant acceleration
Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of three
perpendicular axes
Shock Shock, tested Type of shock: Half-sine
according to Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration
IEC 60068-2-27
Direction of shock: 3 shocks in +/- direction in each of three perpendicular
axes

Changes to section 11.5: Windows language packages

Provided language packages
● Chinese (Simplified)
● German
● English
● French
● Italian
● Spanish
Storage location of the language packages
The language packages on the restore USB stick are provided under \LanguagesPackages\.

Product information on CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

A5E44910079-AA, 09/2018 5
Installation of the language packs
1. To start a console session, open the "Run" dialog, for example, with <Windows key+R>.
2. Enter the following command: pksetup.exe
3. Click "OK" to confirm.
4. The "Install or uninstall display languages" window opens.
5. Click on "Install display languages".
6. Select the display language to be installed by clicking on "Browse".
7. Navigate to the folder containing the display languages and confirm with "OK".
8. The selected language package is displayed in the "Install or uninstall display languages" window.
9. Click on "Next" and follow the instructions of the installation wizard.

Maximum current consumption

The max. current consumption is: 2.9 A

Ambient temperature during operation

A temperature range of -20° C bis 60° C is approved for operation.

Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY

Product information on CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) Product information on CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)
A5E44910079-AA,
6 09/2018 A5E44910079-AA, 09/2018
CPU 1510SP-1 PN ___________________
Preface

(6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) ___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
CPU 1510SP-1 PN Interrupts, error messages,
(6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0) ___________
4
diagnostics and system
alarms

Manual ___________________
Technical specifications 5

___________________
Dimension drawing A

09/2016
A5E33589074-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E33589074-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2016.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 08/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual as well as
the function manuals. This manual contains a description of the module-specific information.
The system-related functions are described in the system manual. All system-spanning
functions are described in the function manuals.
The information provided in this manual and the system manual allows you to commission
the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.

Conventions
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe the notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

4 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Preface

Siemens Industry Online Support

You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here:
● Product support
All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications,
FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals.
● Application examples
Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks – as well as function blocks,
performance information and videos.
● Services
Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and
training offers.
● Forums
For answers and solutions concerning automation technology.
● mySupport
Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries,
and configurable documents.
This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 ................................................................................. 11
2.2 Operating principle ................................................................................................................. 14
2.3 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 15
2.4 Operating and display elements ............................................................................................ 21
2.4.1 Front view of the module with BusAdapter ............................................................................ 21
2.5 Mode switch ........................................................................................................................... 22
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 23
3.1 Pin assignment....................................................................................................................... 23
4 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 27
4.1 Status and error display of the CPU ...................................................................................... 27
5 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 30
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 42

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

6 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

8 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

10 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
Product overview 2
2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0

New functions of the CPU in firmware version V2.0

This section lists the new features of the CPU with firmware version V2.0.
You can find additional information in the sections of this manual.

Table 2- 1 New functions of the CPU with firmware version 2.0 compared with firmware version V1.8

New functions Applications Customer benefits

OPC UA server You realize the data communication between OPC UA is a unified standard for data communi-
different systems, both within the process level cation and is independent of any particular oper-
and on the control and enterprise levels: ating system platforms.
• To embedded systems with controllers You have integrated security mechanisms on
different automation systems, for example, for
• To controllers with MES systems and sys-
data exchange, on the application level, for au-
tems of the enterprise level (ERP, asset thentication of the user.
systems)
OPC UA servers provide a large amount of data:
• To Siemens controllers with controllers
• Values of PLC tags that clients can access
from other manufacturers
• Data types of these PLC tags
• To intelligent sensors with controllers
Supported standard: OPC Data Access, DA. • Information about the OPC UA server itself
and the CPU
In this way, clients can gain an overview and can
read and write values.
PROFINET IO
MRPD: Media Re- PROFINET IO IRT enables you to realize By sending the cyclic IO data in both directions in
dundancy for Planned applications that place particularly high de- the ring, the communication to the IO devices is
Duplication for IRT mands on failure safety and accuracy (isoch- maintained even when the ring is interrupted and
ronous). does not result in device failure even with fast
update times. You achieve higher failure safety
than with MRP.
PROFINET perfor- You can develop applications with high de- Better utilization of the bandwidth results in short
mance upgrade mands on speed and clock cycles. This is reaction times.
interesting for applications with high demands
on performance.
Limitation of the data You limit the network load for standard Ether- You smooth peaks in the data infeed.
infeed into the net- net communication to a maximum value. You share the remaining bandwidth based on
work requirements.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 11
Product overview
2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0

New functions Applications Customer benefits

Web server
Backing up and re- You can, for example, backup and restore the You can make a backup copy of an operational
storing via the Web configuration of the CPU to the PG/PC on project without STEP 7.
server which the Web server is running. In an "emergency", you can simply use an exist-
ing configuration without STEP 7, for example,
during commissioning or after a program down-
load.
Web server provides When you export your plants worldwide, for You provide customers with better service.
up to three project example, comments or alarm texts can be
languages for com- stored on the card in up to 3 languages. For
ments and alarm texts example, German - author's language, English
- internationally usable, Portuguese - end
user's language.
Trace via Web server When you enable trace functions via the Web You get plant/project information for diagnostics
server, you have better service support. You and maintenance requirements without STEP 7.
can send your trace recordings via Web ser- You can provide trace recordings for each Web
vice, for example, to your service partner. server.
Monitoring of config- You can monitor statuses, errors, technology You save time in troubleshooting.
ured technology ob- alarms and the current values of technology
jects via a Web server objects (TOs) with the Web server.
Motion control
Greater number of Speed specification, e.g. for: You can implement additional Motion Control
axes for Motion Con- applications with a CPU.
• Pumps, fans, mixers
trol applications and The scalable configuration limits allow you to
new technology ob- • Conveyor belts
handle all types of application.
jects: Output cam, • Auxiliary drives High machine speeds result in greater productivi-
cam track and meas- Positioning tasks, e.g.: ty with better accuracy.
uring input
• Lifting and vertical conveyors
• Feeding and gate control
• Palletizing equipment
Output cams and cam tracks make other ap-
plications possible, e.g.:
• Applying glue tracks
• Triggering switching operations with pre-
cise positioning
• Very precise processing of products on a
conveyor belt
Measuring inputs are used, for example:
• For measuring products
• For detecting the position of the product on
a conveyor belt

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

12 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Product overview
2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0

New functions Applications Customer benefits

ET 200SP
Support for ET 200AL You can set up a simple connection of IP You do not have to individually run sensors or
in a central configura- 65/67 I/O to the CPU. actuators at the central control cabinet to the
tion You can connect up to 16 ET 200AL I/O mod- different sections of a machine or assembly line.
ules via a BA send module on the central bus You save time and costs:
of the ET 200SP CPU. The distance between
• Through lightweight construction
two ET 200AL modules can be up to 15 m.
• Reduction of wear and exposure to vibration
You can realize the use of ET 200AL in as-
sembly and handling engineering directly at • Increased productivity
moving parts, for example in linear axes or
drag chains.
Increasing the ad- For example, you can use up to 49 ET 200SP A larger address space of 2560 bytes (2048
dress space in the energy meter modules behind an ET 200SP bytes for ET 200SP module + 512 bytes for ET
station CPU. 200AL modules) is available in the station.
The address space has been increased to 288
bytes per module.
Support for communications processors
CP 1542SP-1 Flexible expansion of the ET 200SP system with an additional Ethernet interface; network separa-
tion.
CP 1542SP-1 IRC Seamless data recording with time stamping, support for standardized telecontrol protocols DNP3
and IEC.
CP 1543SP-1 ISEC With the integrated security functions firewall (Stateful Inspection) and VPN protocol (IPSec), the
communications processor protects ET200SP stations and subordinate networks against unau-
thorized access, and employs encryption to protect data transmission against manipulation and
espionage.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 13
Product overview
2.2 Operating principle

2.2 Operating principle

The CPU contains the operating system and executes the user program. The user program
is located on the SIMATIC memory card and is processed in the work memory of the CPU.
The PROFINET interfaces on the CPU allow simultaneous communication with PROFINET
devices, PROFINET controllers, HMI devices, programming devices, other controllers and
other systems. The CPU 1510SP-1 PN supports operation as an IO controller, I-device or
standalone CPU.
With its optional PROFIBUS interface, CM DP, CPU 1510SP-1 PN supports the
configuration of PROFIBUS networks in addition to PROFINET IO. When you use the
interface as a PROFIBUS DP interface, you can configure the CPU 1510SP-1 PN as a DP
master or as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave).

IO controller
CPU 1510SP-1 PN sends and receives data from the connected IO devices within a
PROFINET IO system. You can operate the CPU with a maximum of 64 connected
IO devices, a maximum of 64 of which use IRT (Isochronous Real Time).

I-device
The "I-device" (intelligent IO device) functionality allows you to exchange data with an
IOcontroller. CPU 1510SP-1 PN thus fulfills the role of an intelligent distributed pre-
processing unit for sub-processes. The I-device is connected as an IO device to a higher-
level IO controller for this purpose.
Advantages:
● Interference-resistant configuration due to short signal and encoder wiring
● Reduced wiring requirements for transmission of the data via PROFINET

Standalone CPU
You can also use the CPU 1510SP-1 PN in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a
"central system" without a higher-level controller.

DP master
To use the ET 200SP as a DP master, you need the CPU and the optional communication
module, CM DP. When used as a DP master, ET 200SP exchanges data with the connected
DP slaves via PROFIBUS DP.

Intelligent DP slave (I-slave)

To use the ET 200SP as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave), you need the CPU and the optional
communication module, CM DP. As an I-slave, the ET 200SP CPU is connected via
PROFIBUS DP to a higher-level DP master and exchanges data with it.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

14 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Product overview
2.3 Properties

2.3 Properties

Article number
6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0

View of the module

The following figure shows the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.

Figure 2-1 CPU 1510SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 15
Product overview
2.3 Properties

Properties
The CPU 1510SP-1 PN has the following technical properties:
● Communication:
– Interfaces
The CPU 1510SP-1 PN has a PROFINET interface (X1 P3) with an integrated 3-port
switch. Port 1 and port 2 are located on the optionally pluggable BusAdapter. Port 3 is
integrated in the housing of the CPU. The CPU supports the BusAdapters BA 2xRJ45
and BA 2xFC. You connect the PROFINET IO to the CPU via the BusAdapter.
In addition to PROFINET basic functionality, the interface also supports PROFINET
IO RT (real-time) and IRT (isochronous real-time). PROFINET IO communication or
real-time settings can be configured. The basic functionality of PROFINET supports
HMI communication, communication with the configuration system, communication
with a higher-level network (backbone, router, Internet) and communication with
another machine or automation cell.
Port 1 and port 2 can also be used as ring ports for the configuration of redundant ring
structures in Ethernet.

Note
The CPU is delivered without a BusAdapter. You can find the article numbers of the
supported BusAdapters in the "Accessories/spare parts" section of the ET 200SP
distributed automation system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

The CM DP is optionally available with a PROFIBUS interface (X2). You can find
additional information about this expansion module in the manual Communication
module CM DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90156526).
You can find information about connecting the PROFINET IO BusAdapter to the CPU
as well as connecting the optional PROFIBUS interface to the interface module in the
system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
– OPC UA
With OPC UA, data is exchanged via an open and vendor-neutral communication
protocol. The CPU, as OPC UA server, can communicate with OPC UA clients such
as HMI panels, SCADA systems, etc.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

16 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Product overview
2.3 Properties

● Integrated Web server:

A Web server is integrated in the CPU. You can read out the following information with
the Web server:
– Start page with general CPU information
– Identification information
– Contents of the diagnostics buffer
– Query of module states
– Firmware update
– Alarms (without acknowledgment option)
– Information about communication
– PROFINET topology
– Tag status, writing tags
– Watch tables
– Memory usage
– User pages
– Data logs (if used)
– Online backup and restoration of the configuration.
– Diagnostic information for the motion control technology objects
– Display of trace recordings stored on the SIMATIC memory card
– Readout service data
– Basic Web pages
– Display of the Web server in 3 project languages, for example, comments and
message texts
– Recipes
– User-defined Web pages

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 17
Product overview
2.3 Properties

● Integrated technology:
– Motion Control
The Motion Control functionality uses technology objects to support speed-controlled
axes, positioning axes, synchronous axes, external encoders, cams, cam tracks and
measuring inputs, as well as PLCopen blocks for programming the motion control
functionality.
You can find a detailed description of the use of Motion Control and its configuration in
the S7-1500 Motion Control
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109739589) function manual.
You can also use the TIA Selection Tool
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool) or the SIZER
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/mc-solutions/en/engineering-software/drive-design-tool-
sizer/Pages/drive-design-tool-sizer.aspx) to create or configure axes.
– Integrated closed-loop control functionality
- PID Compact (continuous PID controller)
- PID 3Step (step controller for integrating actuators)
- PID Temp (temperature controller for heating and cooling with two separate
actuators)
● Trace functionality:
– Trace functionality supports you in troubleshooting and optimizing the user program,
especially for motion control or closed-loop control applications. Trace only supports
saves measurements on a SIMATIC memory card. You will find additional information
on "Trace" in the Using the trace and logic analyzer function
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/64897128) function manual.
● Integrated system diagnostics:
– The alarms for the system diagnostics are automatically created by the system and
displayed on a PG/PC, HMI device or the Web server. System diagnostics information
is also available when the CPU is in STOP mode.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

18 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Product overview
2.3 Properties

● Integrated security:
– Know-how protection
The assignment of passwords protects user blocks against unauthorized access and
modifications.
– Copy protection
Copy protection links user blocks to the serial number of the SIMATIC memory card or
to the serial number of the CPU. User programs cannot run without the corresponding
SIMATIC memory card or CPU.
– Access protection
Extended access protection provides high-quality protection against unauthorized
configuration changes. You can use authorization levels to assign separate rights to
different user groups.
– Integrity protection
The system protects the data transferred to the CPU against manipulation. The CPU
detects erroneous or manipulated engineering data.
You can find additional information on the topic of "Protection" in the system manual
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
● Support for ET 200AL
– Simple connection of IP 65/67 I/O modules to the CPU.
● Communication CPs
– CP 1542SP-1: Flexible expansion of the ET 200SP system with an additional Ethernet
interface; network separation.
– CP 1542SP-1 IRC: Seamless data recording with time stamping, support for
standardized telecontrol protocols DNP3 and IEC.
– CP 1543SP-1 ISEC: With the integrated security functions firewall (Stateful Inspection)
and VPN protocol (IPSec), the communications processor protects ET200SP stations
and subordinate networks against unauthorized access, and employs encryption to
protect data transmission against manipulation and espionage.
● Address space
– A larger address space of 2560 bytes (2048 bytes for ET 200SP module + 512 bytes
for ET 200AL modules) is available within the station.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 19
Product overview
2.3 Properties

● CPU 1510SP-1 PN supports the following additional functions:

– PROFIenergy
You can find information on the topic of "PROFIenergy" in the PROFINET function
manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) and in the
PROFINET specification on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com).
– Shared device
You can find information on the topic of "Shared device" in the PROFINET function
manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856).
– Configuration control
You can find information on the topic of "Configuration control" in the system manual
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
– Isochronous mode
You can find information about the "Isochronous mode" topic in the PROFINET
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) function manual.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

20 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Product overview
2.4 Operating and display elements

2.4 Operating and display elements

2.4.1 Front view of the module with BusAdapter

The figure on the left shows the CPU 1510SP-1 PN including a plugged BA 2xRJ45
BusAdapter. The figure on the right shows a separate view of the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter.

① Mounting rail release

② Labeling strips
③ LEDs for status and error displays
④ LED for display of the supply voltage
⑤ Mode switch
⑥ Slot for the SIMATIC memory card
⑦ Connection for supply voltage (included in product package)
⑧ Cable support and attachment for port P3 of the PROFINET interface
⑨ LEDs for status displays of the PROFINET interface: LK1 and LK2 on BusAdapter, LK3 on
CPU
⑩ Port P3 of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket
⑪ Separate view of the BusAdapter
⑫ Port P1 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
R: Ring port for configuring a ring topology with media redundancy
⑬ Port P2 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
R: Ring port for configuring a ring topology with media redundancy

Figure 2-2 Front view of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN with BusAdapter

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 21
Product overview
2.5 Mode switch

2.5 Mode switch

Use the mode switch to set the CPU operating mode.
The following table shows the position of the switch and the corresponding meaning.

Table 2- 2 Mode switch settings

Position Meaning Explanation

RUN RUN mode The CPU is executing the user program.
STOP STOP mode The user program is not being executed.
MRES Memory reset Position for CPU memory reset.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

22 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment
This section provides information on the pin assignment of the individual interfaces and the
block diagram of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.

24 V DC supply voltage (X80)

The connector for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU ships from the factory.
The figure below shows the pin assignment for 24 V DC supply voltage.

① Ground of the supply voltage

② Ground of the supply voltage for loop-through (maximum of 10 A permitted)
③ +24 V DC of the supply voltage for loop-through (maximum of 10 A permitted)
④ Spring NC contacts
⑤ + 24 V DC of the supply voltage
Internally jumpered:
① and ②
③ and ⑤
Figure 3-1 Supply voltage connection

PROFINET IO interface on the CPU (X1 P3)

The assignment corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an RJ45 connector.
● When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch (MDI-X).
● If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and the RJ45 socket has either
a device assignment (MDI) or switch assignment (MDI-X).

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 23
Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment

PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R)

The assignment at the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an
RJ45 connector.

Table 3- 1 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45

View Designation
• When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is
allocated as a switch (MDI-X).
• If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and
the RJ45 socket has either a device assignment (MDI) or
switch assignment (MDI-X).

PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R)

The following table shows the pin assignment for the PROFINET IO interface on the
BusAdapter BA 2xFC.

Table 3- 2 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC

View Signal name Designation

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data -
3 RD Receive data +
4 RD_N Receive data -

Reference
You can find additional information on the topics of "Connecting the CPU" and
"Accessories/spare parts" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

24 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment

Assignment of the MAC addresses

The MAC address is a globally unique device identifier that is assigned to each PROFINET
device in the factory. Its 6 bytes are divided into 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and 3 bytes
for the device ID (serial number). The front of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN is lasered with the
MAC address of the PROFINET interface.
The PROFINET interface (X1) of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN has three ports. Port 3 is located on
the CPU. Ports 1 and 2 are located on the optional BusAdapter. In addition to the
PROFINET interface, each PROFINET port also has a separate MAC address. There is
therefore a total of four MAC addresses for the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.
The MAC addresses of the PROFINET ports are needed for the LLDP protocol, for example
for the neighborhood discovery function.
The table below shows how the MAC addresses are assigned.

Table 3- 3 Assignment of the MAC addresses

Assignment
MAC address 1 PROFINET interface X1
• Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices
• Lasered on the front of the CPU
(start of the number range)
MAC address 2 Port X1 P1 R (required for LLDP, for example)
MAC address 3 Port X1 P2 R (required for LLDP, for example)
MAC address 4 Port X1 P3 (required for LLDP, for example)

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 25
Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment

Block diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.

① PROFINET switch P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1

② Electronics P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2
③ Backplane bus interface P3 PROFINET interface X1 Port 3
④ Internal supply voltage L+ 24 V DC supply voltage
⑤ RUN/STOP/MRES mode selector M Ground
X5 BusAdapter LK1, 2, 3 LED Link TX/RX
X50 SIMATIC memory card R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green)
X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red)
MT MAINT LED (yellow)
PWR POWER LED (green)
Figure 3-2 Block diagram of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

26 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system
alarms 4
The status and error displays of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN are described below.
You will find additional information on "Interrupts" in the STEP 7 online help.
You can find additional information on the topics of "Diagnostics" and "System alarms" in the
Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function
manual.

4.1 Status and error display of the CPU

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN and the BA 2xRJ45
BusAdapter.

① RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green LED)

② ERROR LED (red LED)
③ MAINT LED (yellow LED)
④ LINK RX/TX LED for ports X1 P1 and X1 P2 (green LEDs on BusAdapter)
⑤ POWER LED (green LED)
⑥ LINK RX/TX LED for port X1 P3 (green LED on CPU)

Figure 4-1 LED displays on the CPU and BusAdapter

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 27
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
4.1 Status and error display of the CPU

Meaning of the POWER, RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs

CPU 1510SP-1 PN features an LED for monitoring the supply voltage of the electronics
(PWR) and three LEDs for displaying the current operating and diagnostics status. The
following table shows the meaning of the various combinations of colors for the POWER,
RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs.
Table 4- 1 Meaning of the LEDs
POWER RUN/STOP LED ERROR MAINT Meaning
LED LED LED
Missing or insufficient power supply on
LED off LED off LED off LED off the CPU.
An error has occurred.
LED lit green LED off LED flashes red LED off
CPU is in RUN mode.
LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED off
A diagnostics event is pending.
LED lit green LED lit green LED flashes red LED off
Maintenance demanded for the plant.
LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED lit yellow The affected hardware must be
checked/replaced within a short period of
time.
Active Force job
PROFIenergy pause
Maintenance required for the plant.
LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED flashes yel- The affected hardware must be
low checked/replaced within a foreseeable
period of time.
Bad configuration
Firmware update successfully completed.
LED lit green LED lit yellow LED off LED flashes yel-
low
CPU is in STOP mode.
LED lit green LED lit yellow LED off LED off
The program on the SIMATIC memory
LED lit green LED lit yellow card is causing an error.
LED flashes red LED flashes yel-
low CPU defective
CPU is performing internal activities
LED lit green LED off LED off during STOP, e.g. startup after STOP.
LED flashes yel-
low Download of the user program from the
SIMATIC memory card
Startup (transition from RUN → STOP)
LED lit green LED flashes LED off LED off
yellow/green
Startup (CPU booting)
LED lit green LED flashes LED flashes red LED flashes yel- Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a
yellow/green low module.
LED flashing test

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

28 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
4.1 Status and error display of the CPU

Meaning of the LINK LED

Each port has a LINK LED (LK1, LK2, LK3). The table below shows the various "LED
scenarios" of the ports of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.

Table 4- 2 Meaning of the LEDs

LINK LED Meaning

There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of the
LED off PROFINET device and the communication partner.
No data is currently being sent/received via the PROFINET interface.
There is no LINK connection.
The "LED flashing test" is being performed.
LED flashes green
There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of your
LED lit green PROFINET device and a communication partner.

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 29
Technical specifications 5
6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
General information
Product type designation CPU 1510SP-1 PN
Hardware function version FS03
Firmware version V2.0
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V14
as of version
Configuration control
Via data record Yes
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power and voltage failure buffering
Power/voltage failure buffer time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 0.6 A
Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value
I²t 0.14 A²s
Power
Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 5.6 W
Memory
Number of slots for SIMATIC memory card 1
SIMATIC memory card required Yes
Work memory
Integrated (for program) 100 KB
Integrated (for data) 750 KB
Load memory
Plug-in (SIMATIC memory card), max. 32 GB
Buffering
Maintenance-free Yes

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

30 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
CPU processing times
For bit operations, typ. 72 ns
For word operations, typ. 86 ns
For fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 115 ns
For floating-point arithmetic, typ. 461 ns
CPU blocks
Number of elements (total) 2000; blocks (OB/FB/FC/DB) and UDTs
DB
Number range 1 ... 60 999; divided into: Number range that can
be used by user: 1 ... 59 999 and number range
for DBs generated by SFC 86: 60 000 ... 60 999
Size, max. 750 KB; for absolutely addressed DBs, the max.
size is 64 KB
FB
Number range 0 ... 65 535
Size, max. 100 KB
FC
Number range 0 ... 65 535
Size, max. 100 KB
OB
Size, max. 100 KB
Number of free-cycle OBs 100
Number of time-of-day interrupt OBs 20
Number of time-delay interrupt OBs 20
Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 20
Number of hardware interrupt OBs 50
Number of DPV1 interrupt OBs 3
Number of isochronous mode OBs 1
Number of technology synchronous interrupt OBs 2
Number of startup OBs 100
Number of asynchronous error OBs 4
Number of synchronous error OBs 2
Number of diagnostic interrupt OBs 1
Nesting depth
Per priority class 24
Counters, timers and their retentivity
S7 counters
Quantity 2048
Retentivity
• can be set Yes

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 31
Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
IEC counters
Quantity Any (only limited by the work memory)
Retentivity
• can be set Yes

S7 timers
Quantity 2048
Retentivity
• can be set Yes

IEC timers
Quantity Any (only limited by the work memory)
Retentivity
• can be set Yes

Data areas and their retentivity

Total retentive data area (including timers, coun- 128 KB; for bit memories, timers, counters, DBs
ters, bit memories), max. and technological data (axes), usable retentive
memory: 88 KB
Bit memory
Number, max. 16 KB
Number of clock memories 8; there are 8 clock memory bits, grouped in one
clock memory byte
Data blocks
Retentivity can be set Yes
Retentivity preset No
Local data
Per priority class, max. 64 KB; max. 16 KB per block
Address area
Number of IO modules 1024; max. number of modules/submodules
I/O address area
Inputs 32 KB; all inputs are in the process image
Outputs 32 KB; all outputs are in the process image
Of which per integrated IO subsystem
• Inputs (volume) 8 KB

• Outputs (volume) 8 KB

Of which per CM/CP

• Inputs (volume) 8 KB

• Outputs (volume) 8 KB

Process image partitions

Number of process image partitions, max. 32
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 288 bytes; for both input and output data

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

32 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
Address space per station
Address space per station, max. 2560 bytes; for central inputs and outputs; de-
pending on configuration; 2048 bytes for ET
200SP modules + 512 bytes for ET 200AL mod-
ules
Hardware configuration
Number of distributed IO systems 32; a distributed IO system is understood to
mean the integration of distributed I/O via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication mod-
ules as well as the connection of I/O via AS-i
master modules or links (e.g. IE/PB link)
Number of DP masters
Via CM 1
Number of IO controllers
Integrated 1
Via CM 0
Rack
Modules per rack, max. 80; CPU + 64 modules + server module (configu-
ration width max. 1 m) + 16 ET 200AL modules
Number of rows, max. 1
PtP CM
Number of PtP CMs The number of PtP CMs that can be connected is
only limited by the available slots
Time
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Backup duration 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s
Operating hours counter
Quantity 16
Time-of-day synchronization
Supported Yes
On DP, master Yes; via CM DP module
On DP, slave Yes; via CM DP module
In AS, master Yes
In AS, slave Yes
On Ethernet via NTP Yes
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; via CM DP module
With optical interface No

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 33
Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
1st interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 3; 1st integrated + 2nd via BusAdapter
Integrated switch Yes
RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; X1 P3; opt. X1 P1 and X1 P2 via BusAdapt-
er BA 2xRJ45
BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; usable BusAdapters: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x FC
Protocols
PROFINET IO controller Yes
PROFINET IO device Yes
SIMATIC communication Yes
Open IE communication Yes
Web server Yes
Media redundancy Yes
PROFINET IO controller
Services
• PG/OP communication Yes

• S7 routing Yes

• Isochronous mode Yes

• Open IE communication Yes

• IRT Yes

• MRP Yes; as MRP redundancy manager and/or MRP

client; max. number of devices in the ring: 50
• MRPD Yes; requirement: IRT

• PROFIenergy Yes

• Prioritized startup Yes; max. 32 PROFINET devices

• Number of connectable IO devices, max. 64; a total of up to 256 distributed I/O devices can
be connected via AS-i, PROFIBUS or PROFINET
• of these, IO devices with IRT, max. 64

• Number of connectable IO devices for RT, 64

max.

• of these, in a line topology, max. 64

• Number of IO devices that can be activat- 8; in total over all interfaces

ed/deactivated simultaneously, max.

• Number of IO devices per tool, max. 8

• Update times The minimum value of the update time also de-
pends on the communication allocation setting for
PROFINET IO, the number of IO devices and the
amount of configured user data

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

34 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
Update time with IRT
• With send clock of 250 µs 250 µs to 4 ms; note: with IRT with isochronous
mode, the minimum update time of 625 µs of the
isochronous OB is crucial
• With send clock of 500 µs 500 µs to 8 ms; note: with IRT with isochronous
mode, the minimum update time of 625 µs of the
isochronous OB is crucial
• With send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 16 ms

• with send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 32 ms

• with send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 64 ms

• with IRT and "odd" send clock parameter as- Update time = set "odd" send clock (any multiple
signment of 125 µs: 375 µs, 625 µs to 3 875 µs)

Update time with RT

• With send clock of 250 µs 250 µs to 128 ms

• With send clock of 500 µs 500 µs to 256 ms

• With send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 512 ms

• with send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 512 ms

• with send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 512 ms

PROFINET IO device
Services
• PG/OP communication Yes

• S7 routing Yes

• Isochronous mode No

• Open IE communication Yes

• IRT Yes

• MRP Yes

• MRPD Yes; requirement: IRT

• PROFIenergy Yes

• Shared device Yes

• Number of IO controllers with shared device, 4

max.
2nd interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 1
RS 485 Yes; via CM DP module
Protocols
PROFIBUS DP master Yes
PROFIBUS DP slave Yes
SIMATIC communication Yes

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 35
Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Protocols
Number of connections
Number of connections, max. 96
Number of connections reserved for ES/HMI/Web 10
Number of connections via integrated interfaces 64
Number of connections per CP/CM 32
Number of S7 routing connections 16
SIMATIC communication
S7 communication, as server Yes
S7 communication, as client Yes
User data per job, max. See online help (S7 communication, user data
size)
Open IE communication
TCP/IP Yes
• Data length, max. 64 KB

• Multiple passive connections per port, sup- Yes

ported
ISO-on-TCP (RFC1006) Yes
• Data length, max. 64 KB

UDP Yes
• Data length, max. 1472 bytes

DHCP No
SNMP Yes
DCP Yes
LLDP Yes
Web server
HTTP Yes; standard and user-defined pages
HTTPS Yes; standard and user-defined pages

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

36 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
PROFIBUS DP master
Number of connections, max. 48
Services
• PG/OP communication Yes

• S7 routing Yes

• Data record routing Yes

• Isochronous mode No

• Constant bus cycle time No

• Number of DP slaves 125; a total of up to 256 distributed I/O devices

can be connected via AS-i, PROFIBUS or
PROFINET
• Activation/deactivation of DP slaves Yes

OPC UA
OPC UA server Yes; Data Access (Read, Write, Subscribe),
Runtime license required
• Application authentication Yes

• Security Policies Available Security Policies: None,

Basic128Rsa15, Basic256Rsa15,
Basic256Sha256
• User authentication "Anonymous" or with user name and password

Additional protocols
MODBUS Yes; MODBUS TCP
Media redundancy
Switchover time in the case of cable break, typ. 200 ms; with MRP; bumpless with MRPD
Number of devices in the ring, max. 50
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes; only with PROFINET; with a minimum OB
terminal) 6x cycle of 625 µs
S7 signaling functions
Number of stations that can be logged in for sig- 32
naling functions, max.
Block-related alarms Yes
Number of configurable interrupts, max. 5000
Number of simultaneously active interrupts in
interrupt pool
• Number of reserved user interrupts 300

• Number of reserved interrupts for system di- 100

agnostics

• Number of reserved interrupts for motion con- 80

trol technology objects

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 37
Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
Test/commissioning functions
Shared commissioning (Team Engineering) Yes; parallel online access possible for up to 3
engineering systems
Status block Yes; up to 8 simultaneously (in total over all ES
clients)
Single-step No
Status/modify
Status/modify tag Yes
Tags Inputs/outputs, bit memory, DB, peripheral in-
puts/outputs, timers, counters
Number of tags, max.
• Of which are status tags, max. 200; per job

• Of which are modify tags, max. 200; per job

Forcing
Forcing Yes
Forcing, tags Peripheral inputs/outputs
Number of tags, max. 200
Diagnostics buffer
Available Yes
Number of entries, max. 1000
• Of which are power failure-proof 500
Traces
Number of configurable traces 4; up to 512 KB data possible per trace
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics display LED
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes
Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes
Supported technology objects
Motion control Yes; note: the number of axes affects the cycle
time of the PLC program; selection guide via the
TIA Selection Tool or SIZER
• Number of available motion control resources 800
for technology objects (except cams)
• Required Motion Control resources
– per speed-controlled axis 40
– per positioning axis 80
– per synchronous axis 160
– per external encoder 80
– per output cam 20
– per cam track 160
– per measuring input 40

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

38 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
Controller
• PID_Compact Yes; universal PID controller with integrated op-
timization
• PID_3Step Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization
for valves
• PID temp Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization
for temperature
Counting and measuring
• High-speed counter Yes

Standards, approvals, certificates

Suitable for safety functions No
Highest safety class achievable in safety mode
Performance level according to EN ISO 13849- None
1:2008
SIL according to IEC 61508 No
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Horizontal mounting position, min. 0 °C
Horizontal mounting position, max. 60 ℃
Vertical mounting position, min. 0 °C
Vertical mounting position, max. 50 °C
Ambient temperature during storage/transport
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
Configuring
Programming
Programming language
• LAD Yes

• FBD Yes

• STL Yes

• SCL Yes

• GRAPH Yes

Know-how protection
User program protection Yes
Copy protection Yes
Block protection Yes
Access protection
Protection level: Write protection Yes
Protection level: Read/write protection Yes
Protection level: Complete protection Yes

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 39
Technical specifications

6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0
Cycle time monitoring
Low limit Configurable minimum cycle time
High limit Configurable maximum cycle time
Dimensions
Width 100 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 310 g

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

Table 5- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
RJ45 Yes; 2 x
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 46 g

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

40 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC

Table 5- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC

6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 2 x
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 53 g

General technical specifications

You can find information on the general technical specifications, such as standards and
approvals, electromagnetic compatibility, protection class, etc., in the system manual ET
200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC 41
Dimension drawing A
This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc.

Dimension drawing of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN

Figure A-1 Dimensional drawing CPU 1510SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ01-0AB0)

42 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33589074-AC
CPU 1512SP-1 PN ___________________
Preface

(6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) ___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
CPU 1512SP-1 PN Interrupts, error messages,
(6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0) ___________
4
diagnostics and system
alarms

Manual ___________________
Technical specifications 5

___________________
Dimension drawing A

09/2016
A5E33591411-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E33591411-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2016.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 08/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual as well as
the function manuals. This manual contains a description of the module-specific information.
The system-related functions are described in the system manual. All system-spanning
functions are described in the function manuals.
The information provided in this manual and the system manual allows you to commission
the CPU 1512SP-1 PN.

Conventions
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

4 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Preface

Siemens Industry Online Support

You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here:
● Product support
All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications,
FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals.
● Application examples
Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks – as well as function blocks,
performance information and videos.
● Services
Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and
training offers.
● Forums
For answers and solutions concerning automation technology.
● mySupport
Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries,
and configurable documents.
This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0 ................................................................................. 11
2.2 Operating principle ................................................................................................................. 14
2.3 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 15
2.4 Operating and display elements ............................................................................................ 20
2.4.1 Front view of the module with BusAdapter ............................................................................ 20
2.5 Mode switch ........................................................................................................................... 21
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 22
4 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 30
4.1 Status and error display of the CPU ...................................................................................... 30
5 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 33
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 48

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

6 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

8 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

10 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
Product overview 2
2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0

New functions of the CPU in firmware version V2.0

This section lists the new features of the CPU with firmware version V2.0.
You can find additional information in the sections of this manual.

Table 2- 1 New functions of the CPU with firmware version 2.0 compared with firmware version V1.8

New functions Applications Customer benefits

OPC UA server You realize the data communication between OPC UA is a unified standard for data communi-
different systems, both within the process level cation and is independent of any particular oper-
and on the control and enterprise levels: ating system platforms.
• To embedded systems with controllers You have integrated security mechanisms on
different automation systems, for example, for
• To controllers with MES systems and sys-
data exchange, on the application level, for au-
tems of the enterprise level (ERP, asset thentication of the user.
systems)
OPC UA servers provide a large amount of data:
• To Siemens controllers with controllers
• Values of PLC tags that clients can access
from other manufacturers
• Data types of these PLC tags
• To intelligent sensors with controllers
Supported standard: OPC Data Access, DA. • Information about the OPC UA server itself
and the CPU
In this way, clients can gain an overview and can
read and write values.
PROFINET IO
MRPD: Media Re- PROFINET IO IRT enables you to realize By sending the cyclic IO data in both directions in
dundancy for Planned applications that place particularly high de- the ring, the communication to the IO devices is
Duplication for IRT mands on failure safety and accuracy (isoch- maintained even when the ring is interrupted and
ronous). does not result in device failure even with fast
update times. You achieve higher failure safety
than with MRP.
PROFINET perfor- You can develop applications with high de- Better utilization of the bandwidth results in short
mance upgrade mands on speed and clock cycles. This is reaction times.
interesting for applications with high demands
on performance.
Limitation of the data You limit the network load for standard Ether- You smooth peaks in the data infeed.
infeed into the net- net communication to a maximum value. You share the remaining bandwidth based on
work requirements.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 11
Product overview
2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0

New functions Applications Customer benefits

Web server
Backing up and re- You can, for example, backup and restore the You can make a backup copy of an operational
storing via the Web configuration of the CPU to the PG/PC on project without STEP 7.
server which the Web server is running. In an "emergency", you can simply use an exist-
ing configuration without STEP 7, for example,
during commissioning or after a program down-
load.
Web server provides When you export your plants worldwide, for You provide customers with better service.
up to three project example, comments or alarm texts can be
languages for com- stored on the card in up to 3 languages. For
ments and alarm texts example, German - author's language, English
- internationally usable, Portuguese - end
user's language.
Trace via Web server When you enable trace functions via the Web You get plant/project information for diagnostics
server, you have better service support. You and maintenance requirements without STEP 7.
can send your trace recordings via Web ser- You can provide trace recordings for each Web
vice, for example, to your service partner. server.
Monitoring of config- You can monitor statuses, errors, technology You save time in troubleshooting.
ured technology ob- alarms and the current values of technology
jects via a Web server objects (TOs) with the Web server.
Motion control
Greater number of Speed specification, e.g. for: You can implement additional Motion Control
axes for Motion Con- applications with a CPU.
• Pumps, fans, mixers
trol applications and The scalable configuration limits allow you to
new technology ob- • Conveyor belts
handle all types of application.
jects: Output cam, • Auxiliary drives High machine speeds result in greater productivi-
cam track and meas- Positioning tasks, e.g.: ty with better accuracy.
uring input
• Lifting and vertical conveyors
• Feeding and gate control
• Palletizing equipment
Output cams and cam tracks make other ap-
plications possible, e.g.:
• Applying glue tracks
• Triggering switching operations with pre-
cise positioning
• Very precise processing of products on a
conveyor belt
Measuring inputs are used, for example:
• For measuring products
• For detecting the position of the product on
a conveyor belt

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

12 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Product overview
2.1 New functions in firmware version V2.0

New functions Applications Customer benefits

ET 200SP
Support for ET 200AL You can set up a simple connection of IP You do not have to individually run sensors or
in a central configura- 65/67 I/O to the CPU. actuators at the central control cabinet to the
tion You can connect up to 16 ET 200AL I/O mod- different sections of a machine or assembly line.
ules via a BA send module on the central bus You save time and costs:
of the ET 200SP CPU. The distance between
• Through lightweight construction
two ET 200AL modules can be up to 15 m.
• Reduction of wear and exposure to vibration
You can realize the use of ET 200AL in as-
sembly and handling engineering directly at • Increased productivity
moving parts, for example in linear axes or
drag chains.
Increasing the ad- For example, you can use up to 49 ET 200SP A larger address space of 2560 bytes (2048
dress space in the energy meter modules behind an ET 200SP bytes for ET 200SP module + 512 bytes for ET
station CPU. 200AL modules) is available in the station.
The address space has been increased to 288
bytes per module.
BusAdapter with You can achieve long distances (up to 3 km) between the PROFINET devices.
glass-fiber interface
Support for communications processors
CP 1542SP-1 Flexible expansion of the ET 200SP system with an additional Ethernet interface; network separa-
tion.
CP 1542SP-1 IRC Seamless data recording with time stamping, support for standardized telecontrol protocols DNP3
and IEC.
CP 1543SP-1 ISEC With the integrated security functions firewall (Stateful Inspection) and VPN protocol (IPSec), the
communications processor protects ET200SP stations and subordinate networks against unau-
thorized access, and employs encryption to protect data transmission against manipulation and
espionage.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 13
Product overview
2.2 Operating principle

2.2 Operating principle

The CPU contains the operating system and executes the user program. The user program
is located on the SIMATIC memory card and is processed in the work memory of the CPU.
The PROFINET interfaces on the CPU allow simultaneous communication with PROFINET
devices, PROFINET controllers, HMI devices, programming devices, other controllers and
other systems. The CPU 1512SP-1 PN supports operation as an IO controller, I-device or
standalone CPU.
With its optional PROFIBUS interface, CM DP, CPU 1512SP-1 PN supports the
configuration of PROFIBUS networks in addition to PROFINET IO. When you use the
interface as a PROFIBUS DP interface, you can configure the CPU 1512SP-1 PN as a DP
master or as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave).

IO controller
CPU 1512SP-1 PN sends and receives data from the connected IO devices within a
PROFINET IO system. You can operate the CPU with a maximum of 128 connected IO
devices, a maximum of 64 of which use IRT (Isochronous Realtime).

I-device
The "I-device" (intelligent IO device) functionality allows you to exchange data with an
IO controller. CPU 1512SP-1 PN thus fulfills the role of an intelligent distributed pre-
processing unit for sub-processes. The I-device is connected as an IO device to a higher-
level IO controller for this purpose.
Advantages:
● Interference-resistant configuration due to short signal and encoder wiring
● Reduced wiring requirements for transmission of the data via PROFINET

Standalone CPU
You can also use the CPU 1512SP-1 PN in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a
"central system" without a higher-level controller.

DP master
To use the ET 200SP as a DP master, you need the CPU and the optional communication
module, CM DP. When used as a DP master, ET 200SP exchanges data with the connected
DP slaves via PROFIBUS DP.

Intelligent DP slave (I-slave)

To use the ET 200SP as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave), you need the CPU and the optional
communication module, CM DP. As an I-slave, the ET 200SP CPU is connected via
PROFIBUS DP to a higher-level DP master and exchanges data with it.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

14 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Product overview
2.3 Properties

2.3 Properties

Article number
6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0

View of the module

The following figure shows the CPU 1512SP-1 PN.

Figure 2-1 CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 15
Product overview
2.3 Properties

Properties
The CPU 1512SP-1 PN has the following technical properties:
1. Communication:
– Interfaces
The CPU 1512SP-1 PN has a PROFINET interface (X1 P3) with an integrated 3-port
switch. Port 1 and port 2 are located on the optionally pluggable BusAdapter. Port 3 is
integrated in the housing of the CPU. You connect the PROFINET IO to the CPU via
the BusAdapter. You will find information on the BusAdapters supported by the CPU in
section Wiring (Page 22).
In addition to PROFINET basic functionality, the interface also supports PROFINET IO
RT (real-time) and IRT (isochronous real-time). PROFINET IO communication or real-
time settings can be configured. The basic functionality of PROFINET supports HMI
communication, communication with the configuration system, communication with a
higher-level network (backbone, router, Internet) and communication with another
machine or automation cell.
Port 1 and port 2 can also be used as ring ports for the configuration of redundant ring
structures in Ethernet.

Note
The CPU is delivered without a BusAdapter. You can find the article numbers of the
supported BusAdapters in the "Accessories/spare parts" section of the ET 200SP
distributed automation system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

The CM DP is optionally available with a PROFIBUS interface (X2). You can find
additional information about this expansion module in the manual Communication
module CM DP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90156526).
You can find information about connecting the PROFINET IO BusAdapter to the CPU
as well as connecting the optional PROFIBUS interface to the interface module in the
system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
– OPC UA
With OPC UA, data is exchanged via an open and vendor-neutral communication
protocol. The CPU, as OPC UA server, can communicate with OPC UA clients such
as HMI panels, SCADA systems, etc.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

16 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Product overview
2.3 Properties

● Integrated Web server:

A Web server is integrated in the CPU. You can read out the following information with
the Web server:
– Start page with general CPU information
– Identification information
– Contents of the diagnostics buffer
– Query of module states
– Firmware update
– Alarms (without acknowledgment option)
– Information about communication
– PROFINET topology
– Tag status, writing tags
– Watch tables
– Memory usage
– User pages
– Data logs (if used)
– Online backup and restoration of the configuration.
– Diagnostic information for the motion control technology objects
– Display of trace recordings stored on the SIMATIC memory card
– Readout service data
– Basic Web pages
– Display of the Web server in 3 project languages, for example, comments and
message texts
– Recipes
– User-defined Web pages
● Integrated technology:
– Motion Control
The Motion Control functionality uses technology objects to support speed-controlled
axes, positioning axes, synchronous axes, external encoders, cams, cam tracks and
measuring inputs, as well as PLCopen blocks for programming the motion control
functionality.
You can find a detailed description of the use of Motion Control and its configuration in
the S7-1500 Motion Control
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109739589) function manual.
You can also use the TIA Selection Tool
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool) or the SIZER
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/mc-solutions/en/engineering-software/drive-design-tool-
sizer/Pages/drive-design-tool-sizer.aspx) to create or configure axes.
– Integrated closed-loop control functionality
- PID Compact (continuous PID controller)
- PID 3Step (step controller for integrating actuators)
- PID Temp (temperature controller for heating and cooling with two separate
actuators)

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 17
Product overview
2.3 Properties

● Trace functionality:
– Trace functionality supports you in troubleshooting and optimizing the user program,
especially for motion control or closed-loop control applications. Trace only supports
saves measurements on a SIMATIC memory card.
You will find additional information on "Trace" in the Using the trace and logic analyzer
function (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/64897128) function
manual.
● Integrated system diagnostics:
– The alarms for the system diagnostics are automatically created by the system and
displayed on a PG/PC, HMI device or the Web server. System diagnostics information
is also available when the CPU is in STOP mode.
● Integrated security:
– Know-how protection
The assignment of passwords protects user blocks against unauthorized access and
modifications.
– Copy protection
Copy protection links user blocks to the serial number of the SIMATIC memory card or
to the serial number of the CPU. User programs cannot run without the corresponding
SIMATIC memory card or CPU.
– Access protection
Extended access protection provides high-quality protection against unauthorized
configuration changes. You can use authorization levels to assign separate rights to
different user groups.
– Integrity protection
The system protects the data transferred to the CPU against manipulation. The CPU
detects erroneous or manipulated engineering data.
You can find additional information on the topic of "Protection" in the system manual
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
● Support for ET 200AL
– Simple connection of IP 65/67 I/O modules to the CPU.
● Communication CPs
– CP 1542SP-1: Flexible expansion of the ET 200SP system with an additional Ethernet
interface; network separation.
– CP 1542SP-1 IRC: Seamless data recording with time stamping, support for
standardized telecontrol protocols DNP3 and IEC.
– CP 1543SP-1 ISEC: With the integrated security functions firewall (Stateful Inspection)
and VPN protocol (IPSec), the communications processor protects ET200SP stations
and subordinate networks against unauthorized access, and employs encryption to
protect data transmission against manipulation and espionage.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

18 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Product overview
2.3 Properties

● Address space
– A larger address space of 2560 bytes (2048 bytes for ET 200SP module + 512 bytes
for ET 200AL modules) is available within the station.
● CPU 1512SP-1 PN supports the following additional functions:
– PROFIenergy
You can find information on the topic of "PROFIenergy" in the PROFINET function
manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) and in the
PROFINET specification on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com).
– Shared device
You can find information on the topic of "Shared device" in the PROFINET function
manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856).
– Configuration control
You can find information on the topic of "Configuration control" in the system manual
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
– Isochronous mode
You can find information about the "Isochronous mode" topic in the PROFINET
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) function manual.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 19
Product overview
2.4 Operating and display elements

2.4 Operating and display elements

2.4.1 Front view of the module with BusAdapter

The figure on the left shows the CPU 1512SP-1 PN including a plugged BA 2xRJ45
BusAdapter. The figure on the right shows a separate view of the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter.

① Mounting rail release

② Labeling strips
③ LEDs for status and error displays
④ LED for display of the supply voltage
⑤ Mode switch
⑥ Slot for the SIMATIC memory card
⑦ Connection for supply voltage (included in product package)
⑧ Cable support and attachment for port P3 of the PROFINET interface
⑨ LEDs for status displays of the PROFINET interface: LK1 and LK2 on BusAdapter, LK3 on
CPU
⑩ Port P3 of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket
⑪ Separate view of the BusAdapter
⑫ Port P1 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
R: Ring port for configuring a ring topology with media redundancy
⑬ Port P2 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
R: Ring port for configuring a ring topology with media redundancy

Figure 2-2 Front view of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN with BusAdapter

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

20 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Product overview
2.5 Mode switch

2.5 Mode switch

Use the mode switch to set the CPU operating mode.
The following table shows the position of the switch and the corresponding meaning.

Table 2- 2 Mode switch settings

Position Meaning Explanation

RUN RUN mode The CPU is executing the user program.
STOP STOP mode The user program is not being executed.
MRES Memory reset Position for CPU memory reset.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 21
Wiring 3
This section provides information on the pin assignment of the individual interfaces and the
block diagram of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN.

24 V DC supply voltage (X80)

The connector for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU ships from the factory.
The figure below shows the pin assignment for 24 V DC supply voltage.

① Ground of the supply voltage

② Ground of the supply voltage for loop-through (maximum of 10 A permitted)
③ +24 V DC of the supply voltage for loop-through (maximum of 10 A permitted)
④ Spring NC contacts
⑤ + 24 V DC of the supply voltage
Internally jumpered:
① and ②
③ and ⑤
Figure 3-1 Supply voltage connection

PROFINET IO interface on the CPU (X1 P3)

The assignment corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an RJ45 connector.
● When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch (MDI-X).
● If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and the RJ45 socket has either
a device assignment (MDI) or switch assignment (MDI-X).

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

22 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Wiring

PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R)

The assignment at the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an
RJ45 connector.

Table 3- 1 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45

View Designation
• When autonegotiation is deactivated, the RJ45 socket is
allocated as a switch (MDI-X).
• If autonegotiation is activated, then autocrossing is active and
the RJ45 socket has either a device assignment (MDI) or
switch assignment (MDI-X).

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 23
Wiring

PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R)

The following table shows the pin assignment for the PROFINET IO interface on the
BusAdapter BA 2xFC.

Table 3- 2 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BusAdapter BA 2xFC

View Signal name Designation

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data -
3 RD Receive data +
4 RD_N Receive data -

PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA 2×LC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) (as of V2.0)

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA
2×LC BusAdapter.

Table 3- 3 Pin assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×LC

View Signal Designation

name
① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

24 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Wiring

PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) (as of V2.0)

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter.

Table 3- 4 Pin assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45

View Signal name Designation

① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

RJ45, Port2
• When autonegotiation is deactivated, the
RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch
(MDI-X).
• If autonegotiation is activated, then auto-
crossing is active and the RJ45 socket
has either a device assignment (MDI) or
switch assignment (MDI-X).

PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA LC/FC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R) (as of V2.0)

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA LC/FC BusAdapter.
The I/Os of the BA LC/FCBusAdapter are shown individually for a clearer overview.

Table 3- 5 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/FC

View Signal name Designation

① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data –
3 RD Receive data +
4 RD_N Receive data -

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 25
Wiring

PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R)

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter.

Table 3- 6 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

View Signal Designation

name
① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

PROFINET IO interface with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45 (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R)

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter.

Table 3- 7 Pin assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

View Signal name Designation

① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

RJ45, Port2
• When autonegotiation is deactivated, the
RJ45 socket is allocated as a switch
(MDI-X).
• If autonegotiation is activated, then auto-
crossing is active and the RJ45 socket
has either a device assignment (MDI) or
switch assignment (MDI-X).

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

26 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Wiring

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R)

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter.
The pin assignment for the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter is shown individually for a clearer
overview.

Table 3- 8 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

View Signal name Designation

① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data –
3 RD Receive data +
4 RD_N Receive data -

Reference
You can find additional information on the topics of "Connecting the CPU" and
"Accessories/spare parts" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Assignment of the MAC addresses

The MAC address is a globally unique device identifier that is assigned to each PROFINET
device in the factory. Its 6 bytes are divided into 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and 3 bytes
for the device ID (serial number). The front of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN is lasered with the
MAC address of the PROFINET interface.
The PROFINET interface (X1) of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN has three ports. Port 3 is located on
the CPU. Ports 1 and 2 are located on the optional BusAdapter. In addition to the
PROFINET interface, each PROFINET port also has a separate MAC address. There is
therefore a total of four MAC addresses for the CPU 1512SP-1 PN.
The MAC addresses of the PROFINET ports are needed for the LLDP protocol, for example
for the neighborhood discovery function.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 27
Wiring

The table below shows how the MAC addresses are assigned.

Table 3- 9 Assignment of the MAC addresses

Assignment
MAC address 1 PROFINET interface X1
• Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices
• Lasered on the front of the CPU
(start of the number range)
MAC address 2 Port X1 P1 R (required for LLDP, for example)
MAC address 3 Port X1 P2 R (required for LLDP, for example)
MAC address 4 Port X1 P3 (required for LLDP, for example)

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

28 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Wiring

Block diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN.

① PROFINET switch P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1

② Electronics P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2
③ Backplane bus interface P3 PROFINET interface X1 Port 3
④ Internal supply voltage L+ 24 V DC supply voltage
⑤ RUN/STOP/MRES mode selector M Ground
X5 BusAdapter LK1, 2, 3 LED Link TX/RX
X50 SIMATIC memory card R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green)
X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red)
MT MAINT LED (yellow)
PWR POWER LED (green)
Figure 3-2 Block diagram of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 29
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system
alarms 4
The status and error displays of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN are described below.
You will find additional information on "Interrupts" in the STEP 7 online help.
You can find additional information on the topics of "Diagnostics" and "System alarms" in the
Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function
manual.

4.1 Status and error display of the CPU

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN and the BA 2xRJ45
BusAdapter.

① RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green LED)

② ERROR LED (red LED)
③ MAINT LED (yellow LED)
④ LINK RX/TX LED for ports X1 P1 and X1 P2 (green LEDs on BusAdapter)
⑤ POWER LED (green LED)
⑥ LINK RX/TX LED for port X1 P3 (green LED on CPU)

Figure 4-1 LED displays on the CPU and BusAdapter

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

30 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
4.1 Status and error display of the CPU

Meaning of the POWER, RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs

CPU 1512SP-1 PN features an LED for monitoring the supply voltage of the electronics
(PWR) and three LEDs for displaying the current operating and diagnostics status. The
following table shows the meaning of the various combinations of colors for the POWER,
RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs.
Table 4- 1 Meaning of the LEDs

POWER RUN/STOP LED ERROR MAINT Meaning

LED LED LED
Missing or insufficient supply voltage on
LED off LED off LED off LED off the CPU.
An error has occurred.
LED lit green LED off LED flashes red LED off
CPU is in RUN mode.
LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED off
A diagnostics event is pending.
LED lit green LED lit green LED flashes red LED off
Maintenance demanded for the plant.
LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED lit yellow The affected hardware must be
checked/replaced within a short period of
time.
Active Force job
PROFIenergy pause
Maintenance required for the plant.
LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED flashes yel- The affected hardware must be
low checked/replaced within a foreseeable
period of time.
Bad configuration
Firmware update successfully completed.
LED lit green LED lit yellow LED off LED flashes yel-
low
CPU is in STOP mode.
LED lit green LED lit yellow LED off LED off
The program on the SIMATIC memory
LED lit green LED lit yellow card is causing an error.
LED flashes red LED flashes yel-
low CPU defective
CPU is performing internal activities
LED lit green LED off LED off during STOP, e.g. startup after STOP.
LED flashes yel-
low Download of the user program from the
SIMATIC memory card
Startup (transition from RUN → STOP)
LED lit green LED flashes LED off LED off
yellow/green
Startup (CPU booting)
LED lit green LED flashes LED flashes red LED flashes yel- Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a
low module.
yellow/green
LED flashing test

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 31
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
4.1 Status and error display of the CPU

Meaning of the LINK LED

Each port has a LINK LED (LK1, LK2, LK3). The table below shows the various "LED
scenarios" of ports for the CPU 1512SP-1 PN.

Table 4- 2 Meaning of the LEDs

LINK LED Meaning

There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of the
LED off PROFINET device and the communication partner.
No data is currently being sent/received via the PROFINET interface.
There is no LINK connection.
The "LED flashing test" is being performed.
LED flashes green
There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of your
LED lit green PROFINET device and a communication partner.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

32 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
Technical specifications 5
6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
General information
Product type designation CPU 1512SP-1 PN
Hardware function version FS03
Firmware version V2.0
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V14
as of version
Configuration control
Via data record Yes
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power and voltage failure buffering
Power/voltage failure buffer time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 0.6 A
Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value
I²t 0.14 A²s
Power
Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 5.6 W
Memory
Number of slots for SIMATIC memory card 1
SIMATIC memory card required Yes
Work memory
Integrated (for program) 200 KB
Integrated (for data) 1 MB
Load memory
Plug-in (SIMATIC memory card), max. 32 GB
Buffering
Maintenance-free Yes

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 33
Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
CPU processing times
For bit operations, typ. 48 ns
For word operations, typ. 58 ns
For fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 77 ns
For floating-point arithmetic, typ. 307 ns
CPU blocks
Number of elements (total) 2000; blocks (OB/FB/FC/DB) and UDTs
DB
Number range 1 ... 60 999; divided into: Number range that can
be used by user: 1 ... 59 999 and number range
for DBs generated by SFC 86: 60 000 ... 60 999
Size, max. 1 MB; for absolutely addressed DBs, the max.
size is 64 KB
FB
Number range 0 ... 65 535
Size, max. 200 KB
FC
Number range 0 ... 65 535
Size, max. 200 KB
OB
Size, max. 200 KB
Number of free-cycle OBs 100
Number of time-of-day interrupt OBs 20
Number of time-delay interrupt OBs 20
Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 20
Number of hardware interrupt OBs 50
Number of DPV1 interrupt OBs 3
Number of isochronous mode OBs 1
Number of technology synchronous interrupt OBs 2
Number of startup OBs 100
Number of asynchronous error OBs 4
Number of synchronous error OBs 2
Number of diagnostic interrupt OBs 1
Nesting depth
Per priority class 24
Counters, timers and their retentivity
S7 counters
Quantity 2048
Retentivity
• can be set Yes

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

34 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
IEC counters
Quantity Any (only limited by the work memory)
Retentivity
• can be set Yes

S7 timers
Quantity 2048
Retentivity
• can be set Yes

IEC timers
Quantity Any (only limited by the work memory)
Retentivity
• can be set Yes

Data areas and their retentivity

Total retentive data area (including timers, coun- 128 KB; for bit memories, timers, counters, DBs
ters, bit memories), max. and technological data (axes), usable retentive
memory: 88 KB
Bit memory
Number, max. 16 KB
Number of clock memories 8; there are 8 clock memory bits, grouped in one
clock memory byte
Data blocks
Retentivity can be set Yes
Retentivity preset No
Local data
Per priority class, max. 64 KB; max. 16 KB per block
Address area
Number of IO modules 2048; max. number of modules/submodules
I/O address area
Inputs 32 KB; all inputs are in the process image
Outputs 32 KB; all outputs are in the process image
Of which per integrated IO subsystem
• Inputs (volume) 8 KB

• Outputs (volume) 8 KB

Of which per CM/CP

• Inputs (volume) 8 KB

• Outputs (volume) 8 KB

Process image partitions

Number of process image partitions, max. 32
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 288 bytes; for both input and output data

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 35
Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
Address space per station
Address space per station, max. 2560 bytes; for central inputs and outputs; de-
pending on configuration; 2048 bytes for ET
200SP modules + 512 bytes for ET 200AL mod-
ules
Hardware configuration
Number of distributed IO systems 32; a distributed IO system is understood to
mean the integration of distributed I/O via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication mod-
ules as well as the connection of I/O via AS-i
master modules or links (e.g. IE/PB link)
Number of DP masters
Via CM 1
Number of IO controllers
Integrated 1
Via CM 0
Rack
Modules per rack, max. 80; CPU + 64 modules + server module (configu-
ration width max. 1 m) + 16 ET 200AL modules
Number of rows, max. 1
PtP CM
Number of PtP CMs The number of PtP CMs that can be connected is
only limited by the available slots
Time
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Backup duration 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s
Operating hours counter
Quantity 16
Time-of-day synchronization
Supported Yes
On DP, master Yes; via CM DP module
On DP, slave Yes; via CM DP module
In AS, master Yes
In AS, slave Yes
On Ethernet via NTP Yes
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; via CM DP module
With optical interface Yes; via BusAdapter
1st interface

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

36 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
Interface hardware
Number of ports 3; 1st integrated + 2nd via BusAdapter
Integrated switch Yes
RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; X1 P3; opt. X1 P1 and X1 P2 via BusAdapt-
er BA 2xRJ45
BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; usable BusAdapters: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x
FC, BA 2x SCRJ, BA SCRJ / RJ45, BA SCRJ /
FC, BA 2x LC, BA LC / RJ45, BA LC / FC
Protocols
PROFINET IO controller Yes
PROFINET IO device Yes
SIMATIC communication Yes
Open IE communication Yes
Web server Yes
Media redundancy Yes
PROFINET IO controller
Services
• PG/OP communication Yes

• S7 routing Yes

• Isochronous mode Yes

• Open IE communication Yes

• IRT Yes

• MRP Yes; as MRP redundancy manager and/or MRP

client; max. number of devices in the ring: 50
• MRPD Requirement: IRT

• PROFIenergy Yes

• Prioritized startup Yes; max. 32 PROFINET devices

• Number of connectable IO devices, max. 128; a total of up to 512 distributed I/O devices
can be connected via AS-i, PROFIBUS or
PROFINET
• of these, IO devices with IRT, max. 64

• Number of connectable IO devices for RT, 128

max.

• of these, in a line topology, max. 128

• Number of IO devices that can be activat- 8; in total over all interfaces

ed/deactivated simultaneously, max.

• Number of IO devices per tool, max. 8

• Update times The minimum value of the update time also de-
pends on the communication allocation setting for
PROFINET IO, the number of IO devices and the
amount of configured user data

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 37
Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
Update time with IRT
• With send clock of 250 µs 250 µs to 4 ms; note: with IRT with isochronous
mode, the minimum update time of 500 µs of the
isochronous OB is decisive
• With send clock of 500 µs 500 µs to 8 ms

• With send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 16 ms

• with send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 32 ms

• with send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 64 ms

• with IRT and "odd" send clock parameter as- Update time = set "odd" send clock (any multiple
signment of 125 µs: 375 µs, 625 µs to 3 875 µs)

Update time with RT

• With send clock of 250 µs 250 µs to 128 ms

• With send clock of 500 µs 500 µs to 256 ms

• With send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 512 ms

• with send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 512 ms

• with send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 512 ms

PROFINET IO device
Services
• PG/OP communication Yes

• S7 routing Yes

• Isochronous mode No

• Open IE communication Yes

• IRT Yes

• MRP Yes

• MRPD Yes; requirement: IRT

• PROFIenergy Yes

• Shared device Yes

• Number of IO controllers with shared device, 4

max.
2nd interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 1
RS 485 Yes; via CM DP module
Protocols
PROFIBUS DP master Yes
PROFIBUS DP slave Yes
SIMATIC communication Yes

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

38 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Protocols
Number of connections
Number of connections, max. 128
Number of connections reserved for ES/HMI/Web 10
Number of connections via integrated interfaces 88
Number of connections per CP/CM 32
Number of S7 routing connections 16
SIMATIC communication
S7 communication, as server Yes
S7 communication, as client Yes
User data per job, max. See online help (S7 communication, user data
size)
Open IE communication
TCP/IP Yes
• Data length, max. 64 KB

• Multiple passive connections per port, sup- Yes

ported
ISO-on-TCP (RFC1006) Yes
• Data length, max. 64 KB

UDP Yes
• Data length, max. 1472 bytes

DHCP No
SNMP Yes
DCP Yes
LLDP Yes
Web server
HTTP Yes; standard and user-defined pages
HTTPS Yes; standard and user-defined pages

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 39
Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
PROFIBUS DP master
Number of connections, max. 48
Services
• PG/OP communication Yes

• S7 routing Yes

• Data record routing Yes

• Isochronous mode No

• Constant bus cycle time No

• Number of DP slaves 125; a total of up to 512 distributed I/O devices

can be connected via AS-i, PROFIBUS or
PROFINET
• Activation/deactivation of DP slaves Yes

OPC UA
OPC UA server Yes; Data Access (Read, Write, Subscribe),
Runtime license required
• Application authentication Yes

• Security Policies Available Security Policies: None,

Basic128Rsa15, Basic256Rsa15,
Basic256Sha256
• User authentication "Anonymous" or with user name and password

Additional protocols
MODBUS Yes; MODBUS TCP
Media redundancy
Switchover time in the case of cable break, typ. 200 ms; with MRP; bumpless with MRPD
Number of devices in the ring, max. 50
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes; only with PROFINET; with a minimum OB
terminal) 6x cycle of 625 µs
S7 signaling functions
Number of stations that can be logged in for sig- 32
naling functions, max.
Block-related alarms Yes
Number of configurable interrupts, max. 5000
Number of simultaneously active interrupts in
interrupt pool
• Number of reserved user interrupts 300

• Number of reserved interrupts for system di- 100

agnostics

• Number of reserved interrupts for motion con- 80

trol technology objects

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

40 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
Test/commissioning functions
Shared commissioning (Team Engineering) Yes; parallel online access possible for up to 3
engineering systems
Status block Yes; up to 8 simultaneously (in total over all ES
clients)
Single-step No
Status/modify
Status/modify tag Yes
Tags Inputs/outputs, bit memory, DB, peripheral in-
puts/outputs, timers, counters
Number of tags, max.
• Of which are status tags, max. 200; per job

• Of which are modify tags, max. 200; per job

Forcing
Forcing Yes
Forcing, tags Peripheral inputs/outputs
Number of tags, max. 200
Diagnostics buffer
Available Yes
Number of entries, max. 1000
• Of which are power failure-proof 500
Traces
Number of configurable traces 4; up to 512 KB data possible per trace
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics display LED
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes
Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes
Supported technology objects
Motion control Yes; note: the number of axes affects the cycle
time of the PLC program; selection guide via the
TIA Selection Tool or SIZER
• Number of available motion control resources 800
for technology objects (except cams)
• Required Motion Control resources
– per speed-controlled axis 40
– per positioning axis 80
– per synchronous axis 160
– per external encoder 80
– per output cam 20
– per cam track 160
– per measuring input 40

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 41
Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
Controller
• PID_Compact Yes; universal PID controller with integrated op-
timization
• PID_3Step Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization
for valves
• PID temp Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization
for temperature
Counting and measuring
• High-speed counter Yes

Standards, approvals, certificates

Suitable for safety functions No
Highest safety class achievable in safety mode
Performance level according to EN ISO 13849- None
1:2008
SIL according to IEC 61508 No
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Horizontal mounting position, min. 0 °C
Horizontal mounting position, max. 60 ℃
Vertical mounting position, min. 0 °C
Vertical mounting position, max. 50 °C
Ambient temperature during storage/transport
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
Configuring
Programming
Programming language
• LAD Yes

• FBD Yes

• STL Yes

• SCL Yes

• GRAPH Yes

Know-how protection
User program protection Yes
Copy protection Yes
Block protection Yes
Access protection
Protection level: Write protection Yes
Protection level: Read/write protection Yes
Protection level: Complete protection Yes

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

42 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Technical specifications

6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
Cycle time monitoring
Low limit Configurable minimum cycle time
High limit Configurable maximum cycle time
Dimensions
Width 100 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 310 g

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

Table 5- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
RJ45 Yes; 2 x
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 46 g

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC

Table 5- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC

6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 2 x
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 53 g

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 43
Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×LC

Table 5- 3 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×LC

6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC multimode glass-fiber
PROFINET IO
RJ45 No
FC (FastConnect) No
SCRJ 0
LC 2
Cable length
• Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 µm 3 km

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 μm 3 km

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. 60 ℃
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 40 g

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

Table 5- 4 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) SCRJ FO
SCRJ 2
Cable length
• PCF 100 m

• Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m

• PCF-GI 300 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

44 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45

Table 5- 5 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45

6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC / RJ45
PROFINET IO
RJ45 Yes; 1x
FC (FastConnect) No
SCRJ 0
LC 1
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 µm 3 km

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 μm 3 km

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. 60 ℃
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 32 g

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 45
Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC

Table 5- 6 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC

6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
PROFINET IO
RJ45 No
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1x
SCRJ 0
LC 1
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 µm 3 km

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 μm 3 km

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. 60 ℃
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

Table 5- 7 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + RJ45)
RJ45 Yes; 1 x
SCRJ 1
Cable length
• PCF 100 m

• Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m

• PCF-GI 300 m

• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

46 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

Table 5- 8 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + FC)
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1 x
SCRJ 1
Cable length
• PCF 100 m

• Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m

• PCF-GI 300 m

• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

General technical specifications

You can find information on the general technical specifications, such as standards and
approvals, electromagnetic compatibility, protection class, etc., in the system manual ET
200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC 47
Dimension drawing A
This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc.

Dimension drawing of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN

Figure A-1 Dimension drawing CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0)

48 Manual, 09/2016, A5E33591411-AC
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Safety notes 2

___________________
Product overview 3
ET 200SP Open Controller
CPU 1515SP PC (F)
___________________
Installing 4

___________________
Connection 5
Manual

___________________
Diagnostics, error and
system alarm 6

___________________
Commissioning 7

___________________
Functions 8

___________________
Maintenance 9

___________________
Technical data 10

___________________
Accessories/spare parts A

___________________
Abbreviations B

___________________
Troubleshooting C

05/2017
A5E32701806-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E32701806-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 04/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information contained in this product manual and the system / function manuals enable
you put the CPU 1515SP PC (F) into operation.

Basic knowledge required

The system must be operated and used by qualified staff only.
The following knowledge is required:
● Installation guideline for SIMATIC ET 200SP
● Programming with STEP 7
● PC based automation with an S7-1500 software controller and with
WinCC Runtime Advanced
● Basic knowledge of PC technology
● Windows Embedded Standard 7 operating system

Scope of validity of the documentation

This documentation is valid for the following devices:

ET 200SP Open Controller Article number

System version System version
WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM
CPU 1515SP PC 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT -- 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT -- 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT -- 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0
CPU 1515SP PC F 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0
CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 128PT -- 6ES7677-2FA41-0FK0
CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 512PT -- 6ES7677-2FA41-0FL0
CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 2048PT -- 6ES7677-2FA41-0FM0
CPU 1515SP PC, 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
spare part, without CFast card, without soft-
ware

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

4 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Preface

Conventions
Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions
of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 5
Preface

Siemens Industry Online Support

You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here:
● Product support
All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications,
FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals.
● Application examples
Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks – as well as function blocks,
performance information and videos.
● Services
Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and
training offers.
● Forums
For answers and solutions concerning automation technology.
● mySupport
Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries,
and configurable documents.
This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).

Information about third-party software updates

This product contains third-party software. Siemens accepts liability with respect to
updates/patches for the third-party software only when these are distributed by Siemens in
the context of a Software Update Service contract or officially approved by Siemens.
Otherwise, updates/patches are installed at the user's own risk. You can find more
information about our software update service offer under
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/licenses/software-update-
service/Pages/Default.aspx).

Notes on protecting administrator accounts

A user with administrator rights has extensive access and manipulation possibilities.
Therefore, make sure that the administrator account is adequately protected to prevent
unauthorized changes. To do this, set secure passwords and use a standard user account
for regular operation. Other measures, such as the use of security policies, should be
applied as required.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

6 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Preface

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 7
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................ 11
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F) ................................................................................ 14
2 Safety notes .......................................................................................................................................... 15
2.1 Notes on use .......................................................................................................................... 17
3 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 18
3.1 Fail-safe option....................................................................................................................... 18
3.2 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 19
3.3 Sample configuration ............................................................................................................. 21
3.4 Components ........................................................................................................................... 23
3.5 Configuration of the devices .................................................................................................. 24
3.6 Operator controls and display elements ................................................................................ 25
3.7 Scope of delivery.................................................................................................................... 28
3.7.1 Unpacking the device ............................................................................................................. 28
3.7.2 Scope of delivery - System version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM .............................................. 30
3.7.3 Scope of delivery - System version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM .............................................. 32
4 Installing ............................................................................................................................................... 34
4.1 Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 34
4.2 Hardware configuration .......................................................................................................... 37
4.3 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F) ............................................................................................... 38
5 Connection ........................................................................................................................................... 40
5.1 Notes on connection .............................................................................................................. 40
5.2 Terminal and block diagram................................................................................................... 41
5.3 Electrical configuration ........................................................................................................... 42
5.4 Connecting devices to networks ............................................................................................ 44
5.5 Securing cables...................................................................................................................... 44
6 Diagnostics, error and system alarm ..................................................................................................... 46
6.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 46

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

8 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Table of contents

7 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................... 49
7.1 Notes on commissioning .........................................................................................................49
7.2 Initial commissioning ...............................................................................................................50
7.3 Initial configuration of an Open Controller ..............................................................................53
7.4 Installing license keys .............................................................................................................55
7.5 Windows Security Center .......................................................................................................57
7.6 Switching CPU 1515SP PC (F) on/off ....................................................................................58
8 Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 59
8.1 Monitoring functions ................................................................................................................59
8.2 Retentive memory NVRAM .....................................................................................................60
8.3 BIOS description .....................................................................................................................61
8.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................61
8.3.2 Starting BIOS setup ................................................................................................................62
8.3.3 BIOS setup menus ..................................................................................................................63
8.3.3.1 Information menu ....................................................................................................................65
8.3.3.2 Main menu ..............................................................................................................................66
8.3.3.3 Advanced menu ......................................................................................................................67
8.3.3.4 Security menu .........................................................................................................................69
8.3.3.5 Power menu ............................................................................................................................70
8.3.3.6 Boot menu ...............................................................................................................................71
8.3.3.7 Exit menu ................................................................................................................................73
8.3.4 BIOS setup default settings ....................................................................................................74
8.3.5 BIOS update ...........................................................................................................................75
8.4 Power options .........................................................................................................................76
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers ......................................................................................77
8.5.1 Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) ..................................................................................................78
8.5.2 File-Based Write Filter (FBWF) ...............................................................................................82
9 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 84
9.1 Backing up and restoring data ................................................................................................84
9.2 Change partitioning .................................................................................................................85
9.2.1 Partitions in the delivery state .................................................................................................85
9.2.2 Change partitioning .................................................................................................................86
9.3 Restoring the delivery state ....................................................................................................92
9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick ................................................................................95
9.5 Updating software ...................................................................................................................97
9.6 Windows Embedded Standard 7 ............................................................................................98
9.7 Sending the device to customer service .................................................................................99
9.8 Removing and inserting the CFast card ...............................................................................100

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 9
Table of contents

10 Technical data .....................................................................................................................................101

10.1 Standards and approvals ..................................................................................................... 101
10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility .............................................................................................. 105
10.3 Shipping and storage conditions .......................................................................................... 108
10.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions ........................................................................ 108
10.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage ........... 110
10.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres .................................... 111
10.7 Module data ......................................................................................................................... 112
10.7.1 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM .............................................. 112
10.7.2 CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM ........................................... 115
10.7.3 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM - spare part ........................... 118
10.7.4 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM .............................................. 121
10.7.5 CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM ........................................... 124
10.7.6 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 64Bit 4GB RAM - spare part ........................... 127
10.7.7 CPU 1515SP PC (F) + HMI ................................................................................................. 130
10.7.8 S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F) ................................................................... 130
10.8 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................. 131
10.8.1 CPU 1515SP PC (F) ............................................................................................................ 131
A Accessories/spare parts .......................................................................................................................133
B Abbreviations .......................................................................................................................................135
C Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................137
Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................138

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

10 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 11
Documentation guide
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F)

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

12 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Documentation guide
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F)

In doing so you can select:

● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 13
Documentation guide
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F)

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F)

The following additional documentation is required for using the CPU 1515SP PC (F):
● Operating manual S7-1500 software controller
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109249299)
● System manual WinCC Advanced V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109742297)
● System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)
● Manual Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531)

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

14 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
Safety notes 2
WARNING
Life-endangering voltage when control cabinet is open
If the device is installed in a control cabinet, areas or components can be under life-
endangering voltage when the control cabinet is open.
Contact with these areas or components may lead to death through electric shock.
Switch off the power before opening the control cabinet.

If the device is operated in a machine in accordance with the machinery directive, the
provisions of the guideline 2006/42/EC apply.

Safe operation of a plant

WARNING
Risk of fire
The device is classified for use in the area of Industrial Control Equipment as "Open Type"
according to UL508. If overheating occurs, burning material may leak and cause a fire.
For this reason, observe the following information:
• For approval and operation in accordance with UL508, the device must be installed in a
housing complying with UL508.
• Install the device in an enclosure that meets the requirements of sections 4.6 and 4.7.3
of the standards EN 60950-1:2006 and IEC/UL/EN/DIN-EN 60950-1.

If you have questions about the validity of installation in the planned environment, please
contact our service representatives.

NOTICE
Protective measures
To ensure safe operation of a plant, you have to take suitable IT security measures, for
example, network segmentation.
Seal the cover with lead to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) against unauthorized access.
For more information on Industrial Security, refer to the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 15
Safety notes

Repairs

WARNING
Damage caused by opening the device
Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial
damage to equipment or endanger the user.
Only authorized personnel are permitted to repair the device.

For additional information on repairs, see section Sending the device to customer service
(Page 99).

ESD guidelines
Modules containing electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) can be identified by the following
label:

Strictly follow the guidelines mentioned below when handling modules which are sensitive to
ESD:
● Before working with modules with ESD, you need to ensure that you are free of
electrostatic charge (e.g. by touching a grounded object).
● All devices and tools must be free of static charge.
● Always pull the mains connector and disconnect the battery before installing or removing
modules which are sensitive to ESD.
● Handle modules fitted with ESDs only by their edges.
● Do not touch any connector pins or conductors on modules containing ESDs.

See also
Electromagnetic compatibility (Page 105)

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

16 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Safety notes
2.1 Notes on use

2.1 Notes on use

WARNING
Hazards at an unprotected machine or plant
According to the results of a risk analysis, hazards can occur at an unprotected machine.
The hazards may lead to personal injury.
According to the risk analysis, the risk of injury to persons can be countered with the
following measures:
• Additional protective equipment at the machine or plant. In this case, the programming,
parameter assignment and wiring of the I/O used, in particular, must be performed in
accordance with the safety criteria (SIL, PL or Cat.) ascertained by means of an
appropriate risk analysis.
• Use of the device for its intended purpose, which can be established by performing a
functional test on the plant. This allows errors in programming, parameter assignment
and wiring to be detected.
• Documentation of the test results which can be entered, if required, into the relevant
safety certificates.

NOTICE
Ambient conditions
Ambient conditions for which the device is not suitable can lead to faults or damage the
device.
Note the following:
• Only operate the device in enclosed areas. If you do not comply with this instruction, the
warranty becomes void.
• Only operate the device in accordance with the ambient conditions given in the technical
specifications.
• Protect the device from dust, moisture and heat.
• Do not expose the device to direct sunlight or other strong sources of light.
• The device must not be used in places with more difficult operating conditions through
corrosive vapors or gases without taking additional protective measures, for example,
supply of clean air.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 17
Product overview 3
3.1 Fail-safe option

Areas of application
F-CPUs are mainly designed for personal and machine protection. In addition to the safety
program, you can also program standard applications. You can operate the F-CPUs in safety
mode or in standard mode.

Reference
Information on the use of F-CPUs in safety mode is available in the programming and
operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126).
You can find information on using the CPU 1505SP (F) software controller in the
corresponding product manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740725) and in the F product
information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478599).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

18 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Product overview
3.2 Properties

3.2 Properties

Article number
6ES7677-2xAxx-0xx0
The complete article number depends on the system version and the ordering option.

View of the module

The figure below shows the CPU 1515SP PC.

Figure 3-1 CPU 1515SP PC with supplied accessories

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 19
Product overview
3.2 Properties

Properties
CPU 1515SP PC (F) is a PC based automation device in the design of the ET 200SP. It is
used for control and visualization purposes. The supplied IPC DiagBase software provides
basic diagnostics functions and supports you in handling the BIOS.

CPU 1515SP PC (F) has the following technical properties:

● A removable CFast card with the following pre-installations is used as storage medium:
– Windows Embedded Standard 7 operating system
– S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F)
– Optionally with HMI: WinCC Runtime Advanced as of V14 SP1
● Interfaces
– An interface for the exchangeable ET 200SP BusAdapters for connection of
PROFINET IO (2 ports)
– An interface for connecting devices using Industrial Ethernet (Gigabit Ethernet)
– 3 interfaces for USB devices
– One DVI-I interface for a monitor
– A sealable slot for the CFast card
– A slot for an SD/MMC card as additional optional drive
● Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope
of delivery.
● CPU 1515SP PC (F) is designed for use in industrial environment:
– Compact design
– Fan-less operation
– High robustness
● The CPU 1515SP PC (F) is approved for the degree of protection IP20 and for the
installation in a control cabinet.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

20 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Product overview
3.3 Sample configuration

System versions and ordering options

System version SIMATIC software CFast card Article number

WES7 E 32Bit CPU 1505SP V2.1 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0
WES7 P 64Bit CPU 1505SP V2.1 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
(multitouch functionality) CPU 1505SP V2.1 & WinCC Runtime 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0
Adv. V14 SP1 128PT
CPU 1505SP V2.1 & WinCC Runtime 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0
Adv. V14 SP1 512PT
CPU 1505SP V2.1 & WinCC Runtime 30 GB 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0
Adv. V14 SP1 2048PT
WES7 E 32Bit CPU 1505SP F V2.1 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0
WES7 P 64Bit CPU 1505SP F V2.1 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0
(multitouch functionality) CPU 1505SP F V2.1 & WinCC 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA41-0FK0
Runtime Adv. V14 SP1 128PT
CPU 1505SP F V2.1 & WinCC 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA41-0FL0
Runtime Adv. V14 SP1 512PT
CPU 1505SP F V2.1 & WinCC 30 GB 6ES7677-2FA41-0FM0
Runtime Adv. V14 SP1 2048PT
CPU 1515SP PC, spare part, without CFast card, without software 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0

3.3 Sample configuration

Configuration
CPU 1515SP PC (F) is mounted on the mounting rail according to EN 60715. A modular
system is formed with ET 200SP modules in the central rack.
You can use the CPU 1515SP PC (F) as PROFINET IO controller. The PROFINET IO
devices are connected with the SIMATIC BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 via the ports of the
interface X1 PN (LAN).
Devices can be connected via Industrial Ethernet using the integrated interface
X2 PN/IE (LAN).
The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 21
Product overview
3.3 Sample configuration

Sample configuration
The figure below shows an example configuration with CPU 1515SP PC (F).

Figure 3-2 Example configuration with the CPU 1515SP PC (F)

① CPU 1515SP PC (F), I/O module, server module

② Mounting rail
③ Flat Panel - Wide Screen Display
④ USB devices: Keyboard, mouse, printer ...
⑤ PROFINET IO device
⑥ Camera
⑦ Industrial Thin Client ITC
⑧ SCALANCE W786
⑨ Field programming device
⑩ PC/Programming device

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

22 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Product overview
3.4 Components

3.4 Components

Components of the CPU 1515SP PC (F)

The table below contains an overview of the components of the CPU 1515SP PC (F):

Table 3- 1 Components of the CPU 1515SP PC

Component Function Figure

Mounting rail in accordance The mounting rail is the module carri-
with EN 60715 er for the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

CPU 1515SP PC (F) CPU with strain relief and white refer-
ence labels

BusAdapter The BusAdapter allows free selection

of the connection technology for
PROFINET IO. The following versions
are available for CPU 1515SP PC (F):
• For standard RJ45 plug
(BA 2×RJ45) ①
• For direct connection of the bus
cable (BA 2×FC) ②

Server module The server module completes the

configuration of the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) with I/O mod-
ules.
The server module is included in the
CPU's scope of delivery.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 23
Product overview
3.5 Configuration of the devices

3.5 Configuration of the devices

Front view

Figure 3-3 Front view CPU 1515SP PC (F)

① Mounting rail release mechanism

② Labeling strips
③ Server module
④ Cooling fins
⑤ Strain relief
⑥ Reference labels

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

24 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Product overview
3.6 Operator controls and display elements

3.6 Operator controls and display elements

Front view of the module

The figure below shows the operator control and connection elements of the
CPU 1515SP PC (F).

Figure 3-4 View of the CPU 1515SP PC (F)

① LED displays for the current operating mode and diagnostic status of the CPU
② Power LED
③ X50: Slot for the CFast card (flash memory), sealable
④ Mode selector
⑤ X51: Slot for an optional SD/MMC card
⑥ X80: Connector for 24 V DC supply voltage
⑦ X1 PROFINET Slot for BusAdapter for connection of PROFINET IO;
(LAN): status display for PROFINET
⑧ X2 PN/IE (LAN): GbE Ethernet connection with integrated display
⑨ X60, X61, X62: 3 USB connections
⑩ X70 DVI-I: Connection for monitor

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 25
Product overview
3.6 Operator controls and display elements

Slot for CFast card

The operating system, Runtime software and project are installed on the supplied SIMATIC
CFast card. The CFast card is the only mass storage device of the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

Note
Unauthorized access
Seal the cover of the shaft with lead to protect the CFast card with the operating system of
the CPU 1515SP PC (F) against unauthorized access and manipulation.

Slot for SD/MMC card

You can use a SIMATIC SD or MMC card as additional storage drive. This drive can be used
to store data via Windows, for example a backup, but not the operating system, the Runtime
software or the project.
Permitted SD cards: SDHC up to 32 GB, SDXC up to 2 TB.

USB connections
Two USB high-current (500 mA) interfaces and one low-current (100 mA) interface can be
used at the same time.

MAC addresses
The MAC address consists of a 3-byte manufacturer ID and a 3-byte device ID (consecutive
number).
Each device is already assigned four MAC addresses in the factory. The front of the CPU
1515SP PC (F) is lasered with the MAC addresses 1 and 4. With the MAC addresses 2 and
3, the consecutive numbers are incremented. If, for example, the first MAC address is
08-00-06-6B-80-C0, the second MAC address is 08-00-06-6B-80-C1.

Table 3- 2 Assignment of the MAC addresses

Assignment
MAC address 1 X2 PN/IE (LAN)
• Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices
• Lasered on the front of the CPU (start of the number range)
MAC address 2 X1 PROFINET (LAN)
• Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices
MAC address 3 Port X1 P1 (required for LLDP, for example)
MAC address 4 Port X1 P2 R (required for LLDP, for example)
• Lasered on the front of the CPU (end of the number range)

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

26 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Product overview
3.6 Operator controls and display elements

Connector for supply voltage

CPU 1515SP PC (F) has a 2-pole terminal for the power supply.
The connection plug for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU is shipped from the
factory.

Mode selector
Use the mode selector to set the CPU operating mode.

Table 3- 3 Mode selector positions

Position Meaning Description

RUN Operating mode RUN1 The CPU is processing the user program.
STOP Operating mode STOP1 The CPU is not processing the user program.
The outputs are set to a "safe" state.
MRES Memory reset For active S7-1500 software controller2 only:
CPU memory reset
1 RUN and STOP indicate the selected operating state. The LED displays RUN and STOP display the actual operating
state of the CPU 1515SP PC (F).
2 See the S7-1500 software controller manual

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 27
Product overview
3.7 Scope of delivery

3.7 Scope of delivery

3.7.1 Unpacking the device

When unpacking
When unpacking, make sure to check the following:
● Check packaging and contents for visible damage from transport.
● Check the delivery for completeness.
Please inform your Siemens contact partner should you determine damages from
transport or any irregularities.
● Keep the supplied documentation and licenses. They belong to the device and are the
proof that you have purchased the software preinstalled on the CFast card.
Documentation and licenses are required for initial commissioning and for any questions
that arise.
● Keep the original packaging in case the device needs to be transported again.

NOTICE
Damage to the device during transport and storage
If a device is transported or stored without packaging, it is unprotected from shocks,
vibrations, pressure and moisture. Damaged packaging indicates that environmental
conditions have already had a significant impact on the device.
The device might be damaged.
Do not dispose of the original packaging. Pack the device for transport and storage.

NOTICE
Damage to the device caused by condensation
If the device was exposed to low temperatures or extreme variations in temperature during
transport, this may cause moisture to build up on or in the device (condensation).
Moisture can cause short-circuits in the electrical circuits and damage the device.
Proceed as follows to avoid damage:
• Store the device in dry conditions.
• Make sure it adapts to room temperature before commissioning.
• Do not expose the device to direct heat radiation from a heater.
• If condensation has developed, wait for approximately 12 hours or until the device is
completely dry before you switch it on.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

28 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Product overview
3.7 Scope of delivery

WARNING
Electric shock and fire hazard from damaged device
A damaged device can carry dangerous voltage and trigger a fire in the machine or plant. A
damaged device has unpredictable properties and states.
Death or severe injury could occur.
Make sure that the damaged device is not installed and commissioned accidentally. Label
the damaged device correspondingly and keep it locked up. Have the device repaired
without delay.

Identification data
The identification data can be used to clearly identify the device when a repair is necessary.
Make a note of the following data for your devices:
● The article number of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is located on the order form.
● Depending on the scope of delivery, the "Certificate-of-License" is included in the license
verification for the S7-1500 software controller and for WinCC Runtime Advanced V14
SP1.
● The "Microsoft Windows Product Key" can be found on the "Certificate of Authenticity"
label.
● The first and the last MAC addresses are located on the device.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 29
Product overview
3.7 Scope of delivery

3.7.2 Scope of delivery - System version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM

Note
The designation CPU 1515SP PC with the article number 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 is always
on the device regardless of the order option.

The following components are included in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC:

Order option CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1515SP PC

(spare part)
Article number 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
CPU X X
Strain relief with fixing screws X X
Server module X X
30 GB CFast card with the following
pre-installations:
• Windows Embedded Standard 7 E X –
operating system

• S7-1500 Software Controller X –

CPU 1505SP

• WinCC RT Advanced as of V14 – –

SP1
Restore DVD for image restore X –
"Documentation and Drivers" DVD X –
Windows-Certificate of Authenticity X –
(CoA)
Certificate of License (COL) X –
USB stick with SIMATIC license keys X –
Product information X –

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

30 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Product overview
3.7 Scope of delivery

The following components are contained in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC F:

Order option CPU 1515SP PC F

Article number 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0
CPU X
Strain relief with fixing screws X
Server module X
30 GB CFast card with the following pre-installations:
• Windows Embedded Standard 7 E operating system X

• S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F X

• WinCC RT Advanced as of V14 SP1 –

Restore DVD for image restore X

"Documentation and Drivers" DVD X
Windows-Certificate of Authenticity (CoA) X
Certificate of License (COL) X
USB stick with SIMATIC license keys X
Product information X

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 31
Product overview
3.7 Scope of delivery

3.7.3 Scope of delivery - System version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM

Note
The designation CPU 1515SP PC with the article number 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0 is always
on the device regardless of the order option.

The following components are included in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC:

Order option CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1515SP PC + HMI CPU 1515SP PC

(spare part)
Article number 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0 HMI 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
128PT
6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0 HMI
512PT
6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0 HMI
2048PT
CPU X X X
Strain relief with fixing X X X
screws
Server module X X X
30 GB CFast card with the
following pre-installations:
• Win- X X –
dows Embedded Standar
d 7 P operating system

• S7-1500 Software Con- X X –

troller CPU 1505SP

• WinCC RT Advanced as – X –
of V14 SP1
Restore DVD for image re- X X –
store
"Documentation and Drivers" X X –
DVD
Windows Certificate of Au- X X –
thenticity (CoA)
Certificate of License (CoL) X X –
USB stick with SIMATIC X X –
license keys
Product information X X –

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

32 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Product overview
3.7 Scope of delivery

The following components are contained in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC F:

Order option CPU 1515SP PC F CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI

Article number 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0 6ES7677-2FA41-
• 0FK0 HMI 128PT
• 0FL0 HMI 512PT
• 0FM0 HMI 2048PT
CPU X X
Strain relief with fixing screws X X
Server module X X
30 GB CFast card with the following
pre-installations:
• Windows Embedded Standard 7 P X X
operating system

• S7-1500 Software Controller CPU X X

1505SP F

• WinCC RT Advanced as of V14 – X

SP1
Restore DVD for image restore X X
"Documentation and Drivers" DVD X X
Windows Certificate of Authenticity X X
(CoA)
Certificate of License (CoL) X X
USB stick with SIMATIC license keys X X
Product Information X X

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 33
Installing 4
4.1 Basics

Introduction
The CPU 1515SP PC (F) is an open operation resource. This means that you may only
install it in enclosures, cabinets or electrical operating areas. These housings, cabinets or
electrical operating areas must only be accessible with a key or tool. Access may only be
possible for instructed or authorized personnel.

Installation location
CPU 1515SP PC (F) must be installed in a suitable enclosure or suitable control cabinet with
at least IP54 degree of protection according to EN 60529 and the ambient conditions for the
operation of the equipment must be taken into consideration.

Installation position
You can install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in any position. The preferred mounting
position is horizontal mounting on a vertical wall.
The restrictions regarding ambient temperature and maximum configuration apply to the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) depending on the mounting position.

NOTICE
Damage to the modules
Modules can be damaged if exposed to ambient temperatures higher than permitted.
The following ambient temperatures must not be exceeded during operation:
• Horizontal mounting
– 60 °C for an installation with up to 32 I/O modules.
– 55 °C for an installation with up to 64 I/O modules.
• Vertical mounting
– 50 °C for an installation with up to 32 I/O modules.

For more detailed information, refer to section Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions
(Page 108)

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

34 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Installing
4.1 Basics

Mounting rail
CPU 1515SP PC (F) is mounted on a mounting rail according to EN 60715 (35 × 7.5 mm
and/or 35 × 15 mm).
You must ground the mounting rail separately in the control cabinet. Exception: If you install
the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground the rail
separately.

Note
If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to vibration and shock loads, both ends of
the ET 200SP system assembly must be mechanically fixed to the mounting rail (e.g using
8WA1010-1PH01 ground terminals). This measure prevents the ET 200SP from shifting to
the side.

Note
If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to high vibration and shock load, we
recommend that you screw the mounting rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approx.
200 mm.

Suitable surface finishes are:

● Steel strip in accordance with Appendix A of EN 60715 or
● Tinned steel strip. We recommend the use of the mounting rails in section
Accessories/spare parts (Page 133).

Note
Mounting rails of other manufacturers
If you use mounting rails from other manufacturers, ensure that they have the properties
required for your climatic and mechanical ambient conditions.
Check whether the mounting rails meet the requirements for a protective conductor.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 35
Installing
4.1 Basics

Minimum clearances
Maintain the following minimum clearances when installing or dismantling the
CPU 1515SP PC (F).

Figure 4-1 Minimum clearances

Installation rules
● After the CPU 1515SP PC (F) there is a BaseUnit BU..D with incoming supply voltage L+
(light terminal box).
● This is followed by BaseUnits BU..B (with dark-colored terminal box).
● The respective corresponding I/O modules can be connected to the BaseUnits.
Suitable combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules can be found in the ET 200SP
System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).
● The server module completes the installation.

Note
Only install the CPU 1515SP PC (F) when the power supply is switched off.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

36 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Installing
4.2 Hardware configuration

4.2 Hardware configuration

Maximum mechanical configuration

As soon as one of the following rules applies, the maximum configuration has been reached:

Table 4- 1 Maximum mechanical configuration

Properties Rule
Number of modules • Horizontal mounting
– 0 to 60 °C ambient temperature:
a maximum of 32 I/O modules and USB load
– 0 to 55 °C ambient temperature:
a maximum of 64 I/O modules and USB load
• Vertical mounting
– 0 to 50 °C ambient temperature:
a maximum of 32 I/O modules and USB load
Backplane bus length Maximum 1 m mounting width (without CPU 1515SP PC (F), including
server module)

Electrical maximum configuration

The number of operable I/O modules of a potential group is limited by the
● Power consumption of the I/O modules
● Power consumption of the components supplied via these I/O modules
The maximum current-carrying capability of the terminals on the BaseUnit L+/ground is 10 A.

USB load
In case of maximum configuration with the CPU 1515SP PC (F), the USB load must also be
taken into consideration:
● Horizontal mounting
– Ambient temperature of 0 to 60 °C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 3 x 100 mA
USB load
– Ambient temperature of 0 to 55 °C with maximum 64 I/O modules and 2 x 500 mA +
1 x 100 mA USB load
● Vertical mounting
– Ambient temperature of 0 to 50 °C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 3 x 100 mA
USB load

Address space
The address space is predefined. However, you can adjust the address space in the user
program.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 37
Installing
4.3 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F)

4.3 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Requirements
The mounting rail is fitted.

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only to fix the strain relief and dismantle the BusAdapter)

Fixing strain relief

Fasten the strain relief at the upper and lower left side of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) with the
supplied screws.

Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F)

1. Install the CPU on the mounting rail.
2. Swivel the CPU back until you hear the mounting rail release click into place
3. To check that the CPU has correctly clicked into place, pull on the underside of the
enclosure.

Figure 4-2 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F)

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

38 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Installing
4.3 Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Disassemble CPU 1515SP PC (F)

The BaseUnits with the I/O modules are located to the left of the CPU 1515SP PC (F):
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU.
2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit and, at the same time, move
the CPU in parallel to the left until it comes off the remaining the module group.
Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the CPU.
3. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CPU, swivel the CPU out of the
mounting rail.

Note
It is not necessary to remove the BusAdapter from the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 39
Connection 5
5.1 Notes on connection

Note
Rules and regulations for operation
Observe the information contained in the Wiring section in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) and
in the function manual Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566).

NOTICE
Fault caused by I/O devices
The connection of I/O devices can lead to faults on the device.
Injury to persons and damage to the machine or plant could result.
Note the following when connecting I/O devices:
• Read the documentation related to the I/O devices. Follow all instructions given in the
documentation.
• Only connect I/O devices which are suitable for use in industrial environments according
to EN 61000-6-2/EC 61000-6-2.
• You may only connect hot-plug capable I/O devices when the power supply is switched
off.

Note
Feedback through USB devices
If USB devices are connected which - contrary to the USB 2.0 specification - feed voltage
back to the host interface, the startup of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is not ensured upon power-
up.
Regenerative feedback is generally not permitted.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

40 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Connection
5.2 Terminal and block diagram

5.2 Terminal and block diagram

Block diagram
The figure below shows the block diagram of the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

① Switch X1 PN (LAN) PROFINET interface X1

② Electronics P1 PROFINET interface X1 Port 1
③ Backplane bus interface P2 PROFINET interface X1 Port 2
④ Internal supply voltage L+ 24 V DC supply voltage
⑤ Mode selector M Ground
X50 CFast card LK1, LK2 LED Link TX/RX
X51 SD/MMC card LK3 LED Link
X60 USB interface 2.0, 0.5 A R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green)
X61, X62 USB interface 2.0, 0.5 A ER ERROR LED (red)
X70 DVI-I interface MT MAINT LED (yellow)
X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage PWR POWER LED (yellow/green)
X2 PN/IE (LAN) Ethernet interface X2
Figure 5-1 Block diagram for CPU 1515SP PC (F)

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 41
Connection
5.3 Electrical configuration

5.3 Electrical configuration

Non-isolated configuration

Note
Unlike the distribution I/O system ET 200SP, only a non-isolated configuration is possible the
CPU 1515SP PC (F).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

42 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Connection
5.3 Electrical configuration

The figure below shows a CPU 1515SP PC (F) in the overall configuration with infeed from a
TN-S system. The power supply supplies the CPU 1515SP PC (F) and the load circuits for
the 24 V DC modules.
With the CPU 1515SP PC (F) there is a fixed connection between the ground infeed terminal
and the contact springs to the mounting rail. You must ground the mounting rail separately in
the control cabinet.

① Master switch
② Short-circuit and overload protection
③ Load current supply (galvanic isolation)
④ In the CPU 1515SP PC (F), this connection is automatically established.
The represented layout of the power connections does not correspond to the actual layout; it
was chosen for demonstration purposes only.

Figure 5-2 Connecting the load voltage reference potential

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 43
Connection
5.4 Connecting devices to networks

5.4 Connecting devices to networks

The following options are available for integrating devices into existing or planned system
environments and networks.

Ethernet
You can use the integrated Ethernet interface X2 PN/IE (LAN) (10/100/1000 Mbps) for
communication and data exchange with automation devices, for example, SIMATIC S7.
Only ASCII characters are permitted in the name of the interface X2 PN/IE (LAN) in the
TIA Portal, e.g. PROFINET_2.
You need suitable software to do this: STEP 7, WinCC, SIMATIC NET.

Note
Use a Category 5e Ethernet cable (Cat-5e cable) for operation with 1000 Mbps.

PROFINET
PROFINET operation is possible via the X1 PN (LAN) interface and the approved
BusAdapter.

PROFIBUS
The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module.

5.5 Securing cables

The strain relief for connection lines prevents the USB and the PROFINET connector coming
loose from the CPU 1515SP PC (F). The strain relief is included in the scope of delivery.

WARNING
Flying sparks due to loose cables
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong
oscillation and high vibrating loads.
Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

44 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Connection
5.5 Securing cables

Requirements
● The strain relief is fixed to the CPU.
● The CPU is installed.

Procedure
Secure the USB and PROFINET cables to the strain relief using cable ties.

Figure 5-3 Secured cables

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 45
Diagnostics, error and system alarm 6
6.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

① RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green LED)

② ERROR LED (red LED)
③ MAINT LED (yellow LED)
④ POWER LED (yellow/green LED)

Figure 6-1 LED displays of the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

46 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Diagnostics, error and system alarm
6.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LED displays with active software controller

CPU 1515SP PC (F) has a display of the current operating state and of the diagnostics
status (three LEDs).
The following table shows the meaning of the color combinations of the LED displays in
connection with the software controller.

Table 6- 1 Meaning of the LED displays

RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED MAINT LED Meaning

POWER OFF
LED off LED off LED off Starting of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) in
the "Windows only" mode
No power supply.
The software controller of the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) has not been down-
loaded or the
software controller of the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) is in the operating
state Power OFF.
An error has occurred.
LED off LED flashes red LED off
Software controller of the
LED green LED off LED off CPU 1515SP PC (F) is in RUN mode.
A diagnostics event is pending.
LED green LED flashes red LED off
Maintenance demanded for the plant.
LED green LED off LED lights up The affected hardware must be ex-
yellow changed within a short period.
Maintenance required for the plant.
LED green LED off LED flashes yel- You must exchange the affected hard-
low ware within a foreseeable period.
Firmware update successfully completed
Software controller of the CPU is in the
LED lights up LED off LED off operating state STOP.
yellow
The user program is causing an error.
LED lights up LED flashes red LED flashes yel- CPU defective
yellow low
CPU is performing internal activities
LED off LED off during STOP, e.g. ramp-up after STOP.
LED flashes yel-
low Loading the user program
Startup (transition from RUN → STOP)

LED flashes LED off LED off

yellow/green

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 47
Diagnostics, error and system alarm
6.1 Status and error display

RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED MAINT LED Meaning

Startup (CPU booting)
LED flashes LED flashes red LED flashes yel- Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a
yellow/green low module.
LED flashing test

POWER LED

Table 6- 2 POWER LED

POWER LED Meaning

No supply voltage or supply voltage too low
LED off
Supply voltage present;
LED lights up yellow running through BIOS phase;
operating system is shut down
Supply voltage present;
LED green Booting or operation of the operating system

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

48 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
Commissioning 7
7.1 Notes on commissioning

WARNING
Improper commissioning in hazardous areas
Device failure or risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
• Do not commission the device unless it is fully mounted and connected according to the
specifications in the section Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) (Page 78).
• Before commissioning, please consider the effects on other devices in the plant.

CAUTION
Hot surfaces
Risk of burns due to hot surfaces.
During operation, only touch the device with appropriate protective gloves.

NOTICE
Condensation in the device
Damage to the device due to condensation if the temperature between transport or storage
and the installation site differs by more than 20 °C (36 °F).
Before commissioning the device, leave it to stand for several hours in the new
environment.

NOTICE
Data loss
Data loss may occur if write filters are used incorrectly.
Therefore, note the information on write filters.
Two write filters are available for configuration under Windows Embedded:
• Enhanced Write Filter (Page 78)
• File Based Write Filter (Page 82)

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 49
Commissioning
7.2 Initial commissioning

7.2 Initial commissioning

Requirements
The following conditions must be met before you commission the open controller for the first
time.
● CPU 1515SP PC (F) is mounted.
● The CFast card is inserted.
● No data carriers are connected via USB.
● The following hardware is available: A monitor, a USB keyboard, a USB mouse

Procedure
1. Connect a monitor via a DVI-I cable.
2. Connect a keyboard and a mouse to the CPU via USB.
3. Connect the power supply.
→ The PWR LED lights up yellow first, then green.
→ The device carries out the hardware initialization.
4. Wait until the Siemens logo disappears from the screen.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the device

NOTICE
Faulty installation
If you change the default values in the BIOS Setup or switch off the device during the
installation, the installation will be disrupted and the operating system will not be installed
correctly. The operational reliability of the device and the plant is endangered.
Do not switch of the device during the entire installation process. Do not change the default
values in the BIOS Setup.

Result
● The WES7 operating system is installed.
● WES7 P: The Multitouch functions are available.
● The operating system's start screen is displayed after each startup.
● A login window appears if a password was entered during the initial commissioning.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

50 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Commissioning
7.2 Initial commissioning

Initial commissioning an open controller

The basic settings, user name, administrator password and IP address are prompted for
during initial power-up of your CPU 1515SP PC (F). The device is then automatically set up
for the operating system that is installed on the CFast card. Restart the device after the
operating system has been set up.

Note
The initial commissioning is not possible with a Multitouch panel, as the Multitouch driver is
only available after the installation of the operating system.

User name, computer name, password

When you enter a "User name", this is suffixed with "-PC" under "Computer name". The
computer name must not exceed 15 characters.

Note
This user has administrator rights!
For security reasons, enter a password for this user (administrator).

IP address
The IP address (192.168.1.1) and the subnet mask (255.255.255.0) for the X2 interface are
pre-set in the logon dialog.
You use the buttons to make your changes or to retain the pre-set values.

Note
The initial TIA Portal download must be performed using set IP address via the GB Ethernet
interface X2 in order that the PROFINET interface X1 and the hardware configuration are
correctly assigned.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 51
Commissioning
7.2 Initial commissioning

User "Operator"
A user "Operator" with standard user rights is already created on the Windows system.
The user is in a user group "SIEMENS TIA Engineer". This grants the user the rights to use
the installed SIMATIC software products.
To be able to use the CPU 1515SP PC (F) directly, the Windows "Autologon" is activated for
the user "Operator". No password is preset.

Note
When you assign a password, change the entry for the Windows "Autologon" function
accordingly in order that the function remains activated.

Administrator rights
You need administrator rights for the following actions:
● Back up the data in the root directory of the C partition.
● Installing the language pack

Screen resolution
In Windows Embedded Standard 7, the values that are determined for the monitor via the
DVI-I interface are set for the screen resolution.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

52 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Commissioning
7.3 Initial configuration of an Open Controller

7.3 Initial configuration of an Open Controller

Creating the configuration

You have created a new project in the TIA Portal.
To create the configuration in the TIA Portal, follow these steps:
1. Double-click "Add new device" in the project tree.
2. In "PC-Systeme > SIMATIC S7 Open Controller > ET 200SP Open Controller >", select
the "CPU 1515SP PC (F) (+HMI)".
3. Select the appropriate version.
The configured Open Controller is displayed in the device view.
4. The following components can be seen in the Open Controller:
– Onboard interface X2 (GB Ethernet Windows interface) that is assigned directly to the
PC station (1 port)
– Replaceable BusAdapter X1, which is directly assigned to the software controller (2
ports)
– On the right side (behind the plugged modules in the rack): the configured software
controller CPU 1505SP (F) and WinCC Runtime Advanced.
5. Insert the server module.
The server module at the right end of the configuration forms the termination of the CPU
with the I/O modules.

Setting the IP addresses:

In the Inspector window under "Properties":
● Onboard interface X2: the configured, specified IP address is identical with the Windows
IP address that is set during the first commissioning on the open controller.
● BusAdapter X1: the configured, specified IP address is identical with the IP address that
is set during the first commissioning in the panel of the software controller (display
application).

Important properties of the Software Controller

Change the properties in the Inspector window under "Properties" if required:
● Selecting startup type
● System diagnostics
● Setting the storage location for retentive data
● Setting up copy protection
● Using the LEDs of the hardware
● Configuring the Web server
● Assigning interfaces for the communication

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 53
Commissioning
7.3 Initial configuration of an Open Controller

Establish HMI connection

1. Right-click the WinCC RT Advanced in the device view.
2. Start the HMI device wizard.
3. Apply all default settings.
The wizard creates system images for you with the corresponding navigation.
4. Switch to the connection view in the network view.
5. Click on WinCC RT Advanced.
6. Drag (with mouse button pressed) from the WinCC RT Advanced software to the S7-1500
software controller (for example, CPU 1505SP).
A network connection is established between the two devices.

Downloading the project to the target system

The complete PC station is downloaded the first time you download the configuration.
1. Select the complete PC system in the device view.
2. Click the "Download to device" button.
3. Make the following settings:
– Type of connection
– Specify the interface of the programming device
– Specify the X2 interface on the Open Controller

Note
The first TIA Portal download must be via the "X2" interface.
Only ASCII characters are permitted in the name of the interface X2 PN/IE (LAN) in the
TIA Portal, e.g. PROFINET_2.

Download and compile the project. The hardware configuration and the first download are
now completed.

WinCC RT Advanced
WinCC Runtime Advanced contains all the essential functions for operator control and
monitoring of machinery or plants.

Reference
For more information on WinCC RT Advanced, refer to the WinCC Advanced V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109742297) system manual.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

54 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Commissioning
7.4 Installing license keys

7.4 Installing license keys

Licensing the software

A license key is not required to operate the S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505SP (F)
V2.x. The software controller is permanently coupled to your CPU 1515SP PC (F). It is not
necessary to input the key via the Automation License Manager!
WinCC RT Advanced requires a product-specific license key. This is located on the supplied
USB stick.
Prior to commissioning, you must install the license key for the HMI powertags using the
Automation License Manager (ALM).
Perform the licensing directly via the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

Requirements
● Initial commissioning was successfully completed.
● Windows Embedded Standard 7 has started.
● The enhanced write filter EWF must be disabled on the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

Installing License keys with local configuration

The Automation License Manager is preinstalled on the CPU 1515SP PC (F).
Open the software using the icon on the desktop or a menu command.
1. In the Windows start bar, select Start > All Programms > Siemens Automation >
Automation License Manager.
2. Follow the instructions of the Automation License Manager.

Using a programming device/PC to install the license keys

The Automation License Manager is pre-installed on a programming device / PC with
STEP 7 and the CPU 1515SP PC (F).
1. Connect the CPU 1515SP PC (F) to a programming device / PC.
2. Connect the supplied USB stick to the programming device/PC.
3. Select the menu command Start >SIMATIC >License Management > Automation
License Manager.
4. Select the menu command Bearbeiten > Rechner verbinden and enter the IP address of
the CPU 1515SP PC (F) (default 192.168.1.1).
5. Drag the license keys from the USB stick to the system partition C: of the
CPU 1515SP PC (F).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 55
Commissioning
7.4 Installing license keys

Saving and securing license keys in the case of restore and repair

Note
Loss of license keys
A SIMATIC license key cannot be copied or duplicated. If you drag the license keys from
your USB-Stick to your CPU 1515SP PC (F), no copies are then left on the USB stick.
Secure your purchased license keys before restoring the delivery state (Restore) or in the
case of repair. To do this, move the license keys to a USB stick and keep this stick in a safe
place.

If a fault occurs with your license keys on the CPU 1515SP PC (F), contact your local
Siemens representative. Make sure to have the "Certificate of License" (CoL) to hand.

Note
The EWF (Page 78) write filter serves to protect your license keys and your configuration.

Reference
For additional information on licenses, refer to the Automation License Manager manual.
You can find the manual for the CPU 1515SP PC (F) under Start > All Programs > Siemens
Automation > Documentation and in the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56956174).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

56 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Commissioning
7.5 Windows Security Center

7.5 Windows Security Center

Warning from the Windows Security Center

A warning from the Windows Security Center appears when you first switch on your device.
The Security Center check the status of the device with regard to the main security aspects
listed below. If the Security Center finds a problem during this check, it gives
recommendations on how to better protect the device.
● Firewall: The Windows firewall contributes to protecting the device by preventing the
access of unauthorized users via a network or the Internet. Windows checks whether the
device is protected by a software firewall.
As delivered, the firewall is enabled.
● Antivirus software: Antivirus programs contribute to protecting the device against viruses
and other security threats. Windows checks whether a comprehensive up-to-date
program is used on the device.
No antivirus software is installed as delivered.
● Automatic updates: With the help of automatic updates, Windows can routinely check for
the latest major updates for the device and install these automatically. In the delivery
state, this option is disabled.

Note
To keep Windows up-to-date, enable either the automatic update function of Windows or
install updates manually. Before the installation, check the size of the package to be
installed and decide if you need the update and if there is sufficient storage space
available.
Some updates may make it necessary to use a larger CFast card or to change the
partitioning. You can find information on changing the partition size in the Change
partitioning (Page 85) chapter.

Configure the Security Center to suit your requirements.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 57
Commissioning
7.6 Switching CPU 1515SP PC (F) on/off

7.6 Switching CPU 1515SP PC (F) on/off

Requirements
Initial commissioning was successfully completed.

Switching on the CPU 1515SP PC

1. Switch on the power supply of the CPU.
The Boot Manager GRUB4DOS opens.
2. Select the mode in which the CPU 1515SP PC (F) should start:
– Only with the Windows operating system.
– With the Windows operating system and the S7-1500 software controller (default).

Figure 7-1 Boot Manager GRUB4DOS

Switch off CPU 1515SP PC (F)

1. To switch off the Windows function, use StartShut down.
The PWR LED changes from green to yellow.
The Windows function shuts down the Windows operating system and the S7-1500
software controller.
If the device will not be used for a longer period after the shutdown, de-energize the device.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

58 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
Functions 8
8.1 Monitoring functions

Introduction
CPU 1515SP PC (F) has monitoring functions that you can use with the corresponding
software. The following display, monitoring and control functions are available.
● Temperature monitoring
● Monitoring of drives with SMART functionality
● Operating hours counter (information on the total runtime)

SIMATIC IPC DiagBase

The SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software is contained in the scope of delivery of the
CPU 1515SP PC (F).
With the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software, you use the functions for local monitoring. Use
the DiagBase Management Explorer application to obtain a clearer overview for monitoring.
The DiagBase Alarm Manager notifies you of individual alarms.

Note
For additional information, refer to the online help for the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software.

SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor

The SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor software is provided on a CD.
Potential system failures are detected and reported in good time with the diagnostics and
alerting software. The software is also used for remote diagnostics.
The software contains:
● The software for the stations to be monitored
● A library for creating your own applications

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 59
Functions
8.2 Retentive memory NVRAM

Temperature monitoring
Three thermistors monitor the temperature at multiple locations of the CPU 1515SP PC (F):
● Processor temperature
● Temperature in the vicinity of the RAM ICs/blocks
● Temperature of the basic module
If one of the temperature values exceeds the set temperature threshold, the temperature
monitoring triggers a temperature error. The temperature error activates the IPC DiagBase
and/or IPC DiagMonitor software.
The temperature error remains stored until the temperatures fall below the temperature
threshold again and it is reset using one of the following measures:
● Acknowledgment of the error message by the monitoring software
● Restart of the device

8.2 Retentive memory NVRAM

Retentive memory is non-volatile memory for saving a limited quantity of data in the event of
power failure.
The data defined as retentive is stored in retentive memory. This data is retained beyond a
power-off or power failure.
A corresponding function is implemented in the S7-1500 software controller to allow NVRAM
to be used there. Up to 410 KB of data is backed up to non-volatile data memeory by this in
the event of power failure. This function can be set on the engineering station in the TIA
Portal.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

60 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3 BIOS description

8.3.1 Introduction

BIOS setup
The BIOS setup is located in the BIOS ROM. The information is stored to the memory of the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) via the system configuration.
You can set the following using the Setup:
● The hardware configuration, for example, drive type
● The system properties
● time and date

Note
The American keyboard layout applies in the BIOS.

Changing the device configuration

The device configuration is preset for working with the supplied software.
Only change the set values if you have made technical changes to your device.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 61
Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.2 Starting BIOS setup

Start the setup program as follows:
1. Disconnect the device from the power supply and switch it on again (cold restart).
The following screen appears in the default setting of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) after it is
switched on:

Figure 8-1 BIOS setup

After completion of the startup test, you have the option of starting the SETUP program.
The following BIOS message appears:
Press F2 go to Setup Utility

Press F12 go to Boot Manager

2. Press the <F2> button while the message is on the screen.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

62 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.3 BIOS setup menus

Overview of BIOS setup

The menus and submenus are shown on the following pages.

① Menu bar
② Selectable submenu
③ Help window
④ Operating line
Figure 8-2 Structure of the BIOS setup menus

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 63
Functions
8.3 BIOS description

Menu structure
In the menu bar ①, you can select between the following menu forms:
[Information] [Main] [Advanced] [Security] [Power] [Boot] [Exit].
In the main window ②, various settings are displayed or submenus selected.
In the Help window ③ of the respective menu, you can find information on the selected
setup entry.
The operating line ④ contains notes on operation.
You can use the cursor keys [←] left and [→] right to switch between the menu forms.

Menu Meaning
Information Device-specific information, for example, product version
Main Setting system functions
Advanced Advanced system configuration
Security Safety functions, for example, setting a password
Power Determining the switch-on behavior of the device
Boot Determining boot options, such as boot priority
Exit Exiting and saving

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

64 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.3.1 Information menu

This menu shows the versions of the device-specific functions.
Keep this information at hand for Customer Support when you have technical questions
regarding your system.

Example

Figure 8-3 Information menu

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 65
Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.3.2 Main menu

Settings in the Main menu

Figure 8-4 Main menu

In the Main menu, you can use the [↑] up and [↓] down arrow keys to select between the
following system setting fields:

Array Meaning
System Time Displaying and setting the current time
System Date Displaying and setting the current calendar date

System Time and System Date

System Time and System Date show the current values. After you have selected the
corresponding field, you can change the following settings, one after the other, using the [+]
and [–] keys:
● For the time of day: Hour: Minute: Second
● For the date: Month/day/year.
You can use the <ENTER> key to switch between the entries within the Date and Time fields
(e.g., from hour to minute).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

66 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.3.3 Advanced menu

Settings in the Advanced menu

Figure 8-5 Advanced menu

Entry Meaning
Boot Configuration Configuring the boot settings
IDE Configuration Configuring the devices
Video Configuration Configuring the graphics parameters
CPU Related setting Configuring CPU parameters
AMD PBS Option Configuring interfaces

"IDE Configuration" submenu

Entry Meaning
SATA configure as Setting the SATA configuration type:
IDE, LEGACY IDE, AHCI
Serial ATA Port 0 Serial ATA Port 0 device configuration

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 67
Functions
8.3 BIOS description

"Video Configuration" submenu

Entry Meaning
UMA Sharing Memory Size Setting the size of the work memory for the graphics processor.
(256 MB) (Unified Memory Architecture; also Shared Memory)

"CPU Related setting" submenu

Entry Meaning
SVM support Enabling (Enabled) or disabling (Disabled) Secure Virtual Machine
functionality .

"AMD PBS Option" submenu

Entry Meaning
Internal LAN Controller Integrated Ethernet interface (10/100/1000 Mbps)
X2 PN/IE (LAN)
PXE Boot to INT_LAN Enabling (Enabled) or disabling (Disabled) internal Southbridge
Network Controller.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

68 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.3.4 Security menu

Settings in the Security menu

Figure 8-6 Security menu

To protect the CPU 1515SP PC (F) against unauthorized access, assign a password.

Supervisor Pass- Installed Specific setup fields, including the Supervisor password,
word can be modified by the user.
Not installed Password is disabled.
Set Supervisor This field opens a dialog for assigning or changing the password.
Password

Note
Overwriting of the Supervisor password during a BIOS update
A BIOS update overwrites the password.
After a BIOS update, set up the password again.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 69
Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.3.5 Power menu

Settings in the Power menu

Figure 8-7 Power menu

In the Power menu, you specify the device reaction to a power failure and a Wake Event.

Entry Meaning
Wake on PME When activated (Enabled), the device switches itself on when a
Power Management Event occurs. Otherwise, the device remains
switched off.
Auto Wake on S5 When activated (Enabled), the device switches itself on when a
Wake Event occurs. Otherwise, the device remains switched off.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

70 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.3.6 Boot menu

Entries in the Boot menu

Figure 8-8 Boot menu

In this menu, you define the boot behavior of the device.

Entry Meaning
Quick Boot Enabling (Enabled) or disabling (Disabled).
The device starts up faster when this option is enabled, because vari-
ous hardware function tests are skipped.
Quiet Boot When this option is disabled, the device boots in text mode.
When it is enabled, a start screen with logo appears.
USB Boot Booting from connected USB devices permitted/not permitted.

Boot menu > submenu "Boot Device Priority"

In this menu, you define the sequence of the boot media.

Entry Meaning
Normal Boot Menu Normal = boot sequence by component type
Advance = individual boot sequence of all components

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 71
Functions
8.3 BIOS description

Boot Device Priority > submenu "Boot Type Order"

Entry Meaning
Hard Disk Drive Setting the boot sequence of the group of drives
USB Setting the boot sequence of the group of USB drives
Others Setting the boot sequence of the group Others,, e.g. Remote Boot
Device

All connected boot-capable components and their boot position are displayed in this menu.
The boot position of the components can be moved freely.
The component at the top (highest boot priority) is used for booting. If the component is not
available, the system boots from the next component in the list.
You change the boot sequence as follows:
● Select the boot components using the keys <↑>, <↓>
● Move to the required position using the keys <+>, <–>

Note
You can start the Boot Manager by pressing the <F12> key during the boot process.
The Boot Manager shows all available boot components and boots from the device selected
by the user.

"Normal Boot Menu > Advance" setting

Boot capable components which were disconnected and reconnected to the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) during the boot processes, appear in first place in the BIOS in the
"Advance" setting.

Boot Device Priority > submenu "Hard Disk Drive"

The size of the CFast card is displayed in this menu.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

72 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.3.7 Exit menu

Settings in the Exit menu

Figure 8-9 Exit menu

The setup program is always terminated via the Exit menu.

The menu is used to save or discard the changes made.

Entry Meaning
Exit Saving Changes Saves all changes and then starts the system with the new parame-
ters.
Save Change Without Exit Saves all changes
Exit Discarding Changes Discards all changes and then restarts the system with the old pa-
rameters.
Load Optimal Defaults Loads the optimum default values
Load Custom Defaults Loads the default values
Safe Custom Defaults Saves the default values
Discard Changes Discards all changes

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 73
Functions
8.3 BIOS description

8.3.4 BIOS setup default settings

Documenting the device configuration

If you change the default setting of the BIOS Setup, then enter this in the following table.
This will ensure that values you set will be readily available if hardware changes are made
later.
We recommend that you print out the table below and keep it in a safe place after you have
made your entries.

Note
The default settings in the BIOS setup depend on the ordered device configuration.

BIOS setup default settings

Menu System parameters Default settings User settings

Main System Time hh:mm:ss
System Date MM/TT/JJJJ
Advanced > IDE Configura- SATA configure as LEGACY IDE
tion Serial ATA Port 0 SIMATIC IPC CFast 30
Advanced > Video Configu- UMA Sharing Memory Size 256 MB
ration
Advanced > CPU Related SVM Support Enabled
setting
Advanced > AMD PBS Op- Internal LAN Controller Auto
tion PXE Boot to INT_LAN Disabled
Security Supervisor Password Not installed
Set Supervisor Password Inactive (no password as-
signed)
Power Wake on PME Enabled
Auto Wake on S5 Disabled
Boot Quick Boot Enabled
Quiet Boot Disabled
USB Boot Disabled
Boot > Boot Device Priority > Normal Normal
Normal Boot Menu Advance
Boot > Boot Device Priority Boot Type Order Hard Disk Drive
USB
Others
Hard Disk Drive SIMATIC IPC CFast 8/16/30
GByte

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

74 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.3 BIOS description

Menu System parameters Default settings User settings

Exit Exit Saving Change Standard
Save Change Without Exit
Exit Discarding Changes
Load Optimal Defaults
Load Custom Defaults
Safe Custom Defaults
Discard Changes

8.3.5 BIOS update

With the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software (included in scope of delivery), you can perform
the following actions:
● Perform a BIOS update.
● Saving and updating the current BIOS version.
● Saving the BIOS settings or loading them from another backup.
For additional information, refer to the online help for the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software.

Requirements
● The S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505SP (F) must be in STOP mode.
● CPU 1515SP PC (F) must be started in Windows mode.

NOTICE
Malfunctions in the software controllers due to critical actions
If you perform a BIOS update during the operation of the S7-1500 software controller
CPU 1505SP (F), software controller malfunctions can occur that lead to interruptions in
communications and downtimes.
Do not perform BIOS updates or other actions that strongly utilize the hardware resources
during the operation of the CPU 1505SP (F).
Prior to a BIOS update, switch the CPU 1505SP (F) to STOP.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 75
Functions
8.4 Power options

Performing a BIOS update

1. Start the CPU 1515SP PC (F) in the GRUB menu in Windows mode (see figure
(Page 58)).
→ The PWR LED lights up yellow first, then green.
→ The device carries out the hardware initialization.
2. Follow the BIOS update steps described in the help for SIMATIC IPC DiagBase.
→ The update is performed.
→ You are prompted to restart the device.
3. Us thee Windows function Start > Shut down to shut down the CPU 1515SP PC (F).
→ The PWR LED lights up green first, then yellow.
→ The Windows function closes the Windows operating system and the software
controller.
4. Switch off the power supply at the CPU 1515SP PC (F).
5. Connect the power supply.
6. Wait until the Siemens logo disappears.
→ The CPU 1515SP PC (F) restarts.

NOTICE
Overwriting of the Supervisor password during a BIOS update
A BIOS update overwrites the password.
After a BIOS update, set up the password again in the Security menu under "Set
Supervisor Password".

8.4 Power options

An energy diagram with the name SIMATIC on the CPU 1515SP PC (F). This ensures that
the CPU does not deviate from its maximum clock rate in order not to endanger the real-time
capability of the software controller.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

76 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers

8.5 Protective functions for data carriers

NOTICE
Data loss
The number of write cycles on CFast cards is limited due to technical reasons.
To prevent data loss, the CFast card must therefore be provided with special protection.
Use a write filter to lengthen of service life of the CFast card and avoid the
CPU 1515SP PC (F).

Write filters
Two write filters are available for Windows Embedded:
● To protect an entire partition of the CFast card, use the Enhanced Write Filter EWF
(Page 78).
Unlike FBWF, you can also use EWF with compressed NTFS data systems.
● Use the File-Based Write Filter FBWF (Page 82), to update specific files dynamically.
The FBWF can be configured more flexibly and enables direct write access without
restart.

NOTICE
Data loss
If both write filters are activated, the EWF blocks direct write access of the FBWF.
Data get lost after a restart of CPU 1515SP PC (F).
Activate only one of the two write filters per partition.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 77
Functions
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers

8.5.1 Enhanced Write Filter (EWF)

Purpose and function

The Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) allows you to write-protect individual partitions.
EWF is disabled by default on the CPU 1515SP PC (F).
The EWF is activated by means of the pre-installed SIMATIC IPC EWF Manager or the
Windows console application ewfmgr.exe.

SIMATIC IPC EWF Manager

Start the software via Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > SIMATIC >
EWF Manager.
In the status bar, you can use the SIMATIC IPC EWF Manager icon to check whether the
EWF is active.

Table 8- 1 Meaning of the icons

Icons Meaning
The partition is protected by the EWF.

EWF is disabled for this partition.

The EWF is currently switched off, but is activated after the restart.

The EWF is currently active, but will be deactivated after the restart.
The filter is active. A Commit command is executed before the next reboot.
The filter is currently active, but is deactivated after the restart.
A Commit command will also be executed before the next reboot.

The operating instructions for the SIMATIC Industrial PC: IPC EWF Manager
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50867677) is available on the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) under Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > Documents >
Manuals.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

78 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers

Console application ewfmgr.exe

The application is called via the Windows command line (Command Prompt).
The following functions are available, among others, for setting, switching on and switching
off the EWF:

Table 8- 2 Enhanced Write Filter functions

Function Command
Write-protect drive C: Switching on ewfmgr c: -enable

Write-protect drive C: disable ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable

(modified data is accepted)
Modified files on drive C: Accept ewfmgr c: -commit

Display information about the EWF drive ewfmgr c:

Display help ewfmgr /h

Note
The EWF commands for write protection become effective only after a restart.

Note
The EWF command ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable must not be used with the option -Live.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 79
Functions
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers

Special features when using the EWF

NOTICE
Data loss upon power failure and upon shutdown/restart
If the EWF is active, all changes made on the C drive are lost after power failure and on
shutdown/restart.
Use an UPS to prevent data losses after power failure.

Back up the data in the EWF-RAM overlay to the CFast card before shutting down the
CPU 1515SP PC (F). In the command line, enter the following commands:

ewfmgr c: -commit

Restart the device

Or

ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable

Restart the device

ewfmgr c: -enable
Restart the device

Note
Data loss
If EWF is active and you decline a restart after having set the -commitanddisable or -commit
option, your data is lost after a power failure!

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

80 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers

Note
Disabling automatic daylight saving changes
In systems without central time management and with activated EWF, the time is advanced
or set back by one hour in the daylight saving time or standard time period each time the
system performs a cold or warm restart, due to the system-specific function for automatic
daylight saving changes.
Reason for this behavior: Windows Embedded Standard 7 sets a flag in a registry entry that
indicates completion of the conversion to daylight saving time. Since this file is also
protected against modification by the EWF, the marker is lost during the boot sequence and
the adjustment is made again.
We therefore recommend that you deactivate the automatic adjustment and change the
clock manually.
Proceed as follows:
1. Disable the EWF filter (ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable) and reboot the system.
2. Deactivate the automatic switchover in the Control Panel:
Start > Control Panel > Date and Time > in the tab "Time Zone" clear the check mark for
"Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes".
3. Save the change (ewfmgr c: -commit).
4. Switch on the EWF again (ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable) and reboot the system.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 81
Functions
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers

8.5.2 File-Based Write Filter (FBWF)

Purpose and function

The FBWF allows you to write-protect specific files and folders of a partition.
FBWF is enabled by default on the CPU 1515SP PC (F).
The FBWF is activated by means of the Windows console application fbwfmgr.exe.

NOTICE
Data loss
If both write filters are activated, the EWF blocks direct write access of the FBWF.
Data get lost after a restart of CPU 1515SP PC (F).
Activate only one of the two write filters.

Console application fbwfmgr.exe

The application is called via the Windows command line (Command Prompt).
The following functions, among others, are available for setting, switching on and switching
off the FBWF:

Table 8- 3 File-Based Write Filter

Function Command
Show FBWF status fbwfmgr /displayconfig

Activate FBWF after the next restart fbwfmgr /enable

Write to protected files fbwfmgr /commit c: \<Path>\<File Name>

Display help fbwfmgr /?

Defining exclusions:
fbwfmgr /addexclusion c:
• Add file \<Path>\<FileName.ext>
fbwfmgr /addexclusion c: \<Path>
• Add folder
fbwfmgr /removeexclusion c:
• Remove file \<Path>\<FileName.ext>
fbwfmgr /removeexclusion c: \<Path>
• Remove folder

Note
Note:
• The correct notation is as follows:
Drive letter: space character "\" relative file path
• The write protection commands become effective only after a restart.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

82 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Functions
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers

Rule for exclusion list

The following sequence applies if you define exclusions for files and folders that do not yet
exist:
● Defining exclusions
● Restart CPU 1515SP PC (F)
● Create file/folder

Display of the partition size with activated FBWF

The partition size displayed in the Explorer does not correspond with the actual size when
the FBWF is active. The size displayed is derived from the amount of memory occupied on
the partition and from memory released by the FBWF. After the maximum size of the overlay
was reached, a message is output warning of insufficient space on the partition.

Reference
Additional information on FBWF is available on the Internet (http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-
us/library/ff794219(v=winembedded.60).aspx).
Additional information on the topic of partitions is available in the Change partitioning
(Page 85) chapter.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 83
Maintenance 9
9.1 Backing up and restoring data

Introduction
The operating system and the Runtime software are located on the supplied Restore DVD.
You can use this to restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC (F).
If you use functions from the Restore menu, you must acknowledge a security message. For
the functions, 72 hours are available in each case. If the functions are no completed within
this period, the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is automatically restarted.
Save your project to partition D: of the CFast card.

SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator

You can also create your own image of your CFast card. This contains the operating system,
the Runtime software and the complete project loaded from the TIA Portal.
To back up data in Windows Embedded Standard 7, we recommend the software tool
SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator (V3.3 or later). It provides for easy backup and fast
restore of the contents of the CFAST card and of individual partitions (images).

Note
The SIMATIC Image & Partition Creator supports the X2 PN/IE (LAN) interface.

You can procure the SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator:
● via the Siemens online ordering system (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall).
● Pre-installed on the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives.
For additional information, please refer to the corresponding product documentation.

SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive

You can use the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives for data backup and restore.
You obtain these through the Siemens online ordering system
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

84 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Maintenance
9.2 Change partitioning

9.2 Change partitioning

9.2.1 Partitions in the delivery state

Partitioning the CFast card

The following partitions are set up on the CFast card by default:

Partition Name 30 GB CFast card File system

(WES7 E 32Bit/WES7 P 64Bit)
C: SYSTEM 19.5 GB NTFS
D: DATA 8 GB NTFS
- - 0.4 GB RAW
- WinCCMB 0.04 GB NTFS

Note
Partitions in Windows Embedded Standard 7
The partitions need to be set again if they are faulty or if the partitioning is to be changed.

NOTICE
CPU volume for software controller (0.4 GB RAW)
Do not change the CPU volume for software controllers.
This is the only way to ensure that the software controller continues to operate without
error.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 85
Maintenance
9.2 Change partitioning

9.2.2 Change partitioning

If the capacities of the partitions are insufficient, you have the option with Windows 7 to
change the size of the partitions (for example, drive C: extend and drive D: reduce).
Free space must be available in order to extend the partition. You can recognize free space
by the designation "Unallocated". You may have the reduce or delete other partitions to
create space.

Note
Deleting partitions
When partitions are deleted on the data on them are destroyed.

Possible reasons for an expansion of the partition size to drive C:

● Loading security updates for Windows drive C:
● Option of installing large software packages on C, if their size exceeds the available
storage space.

Expand/shrink partition
To expand, for example, Partition C: at the cost of Partition D: follow these steps:
In the Windows start bar, select Start > Control Panel > System and Security >
Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Disk Management. The "Computer
Management" window opens.

Figure 9-1 Computer Management

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

86 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Maintenance
9.2 Change partitioning

To expand Partition C: you must delete Partition D: first. Right-click on Partition D: and select
"Delete Volume..."

Figure 9-2 Partition D: Delete

The space which was occupied by Partition D: is now available for Partition C: .

Figure 9-3 Partition D: cleared

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 87
Maintenance
9.2 Change partitioning

Now right-click on Partition C: and select "Extend Volume...".

Figure 9-4 Partition C: expand

After selecting the option "Extend Volume...", the "Extend Volume Wizard" appears.

Figure 9-5 Extend Volume Wizard

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

88 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Maintenance
9.2 Change partitioning

In the following window you have the option to expand Partition C: by all or part of the
available memory. In our example we expand Partition C: by 500 MB.

Figure 9-6 Select memory size

When you have completed the steps of the wizard, the Computer Management window
shows you the new division of the partition sizes.

Figure 9-7 Result of the repartitioning

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 89
Maintenance
9.2 Change partitioning

To reassign the unassigned memory to Partition D: right-click on the unassigned memory

and select "New Simple Volume..."

Figure 9-8 Recreate partition

After selecting the option "New Simple Volume...", the "New Simple Volume Wizard"
appears. Set the required memory size there.

Figure 9-9 Select memory size

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

90 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Maintenance
9.2 Change partitioning

In the following window, select Drive D:

Figure 9-10 Assign drive letter

Specify the formatting for storing data on the partition.

Figure 9-11 Specify formatting

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 91
Maintenance
9.3 Restoring the delivery state

Once you have defined the formatting, an overview of your selected settings appears. Then
click "Finish" to complete the process.
The "Computer Management" window now shows the new partition sizes.

9.3 Restoring the delivery state

Introduction
The entire image of your operating system and your Runtime software are located on the
supplied Restore DVD. You can use the SIMATIC Restore menu to restore the original
CPU 1515SP PC (F) software.
Alternatively, you can use the Restore menu to create a boot-capable USB stick to restore
the original software without a DVD-ROM drive (see chapter Restoring delivery state using
USB stick (Page 95)).

Note
Restoring existing system partition
If your projects are stored on partition D: you can then use the option "Restore existing
system partition" to restore Partition C: with the operating system and the Runtime software,
without your project data being affected.

Note
Using Multitouch panels
The restoration of the original software is not possible with a Multitouch panel, because the
Multitouch driver is not available until after the installation of the operating system.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

92 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Maintenance
9.3 Restoring the delivery state

Requirements
To restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC (F), the following is required:
● A CFast card. Minimum size of the CFast card for the CPU 1515SP PC (F):
– WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM: 8 GB
– WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM: 16 GB
● A DVD drive with external power supply
● The supplied Restore DVD. Alternatively, a bootable USB stick
● A data backup

NOTICE
Data loss
During restoration of the system to delivery state, the CFast card is completely erased and
re-formatted, and is then loaded with the original software. All subsequently modified or
added data, programs, license keys and partitions on the CFast card will be lost.
Back up the data of the CPU 1515SP PC (F), after you have assigned parameters to the
module and if you have made changes to the configuration.

NOTICE
Loss of license keys
Back up the license keys before the restore by dragging these to your USB stick via
Automation License Manager.
After the restart of the CPU 1515SP PC (F), re-install the license keys on the device via the
Automation License Manager.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 93
Maintenance
9.3 Restoring the delivery state

Restore delivery state of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) with the Restore DVD

Before the restore

1. Switch off the power supply of the CPU.
2. Remove all USB devices from the CPU.
3. Connect a DVD drive with restore DVD to a USB interface of the CPU.
4. Switch on the power supply of the CPU.
→ The CPU is started.
5. Press <F12> to start the Boot Manager.
6. Select the list entry for the DVD drive in the Boot Manager.
7. After the prompt, confirm the start by pressing any key.
→ The loading process is displayed (Windows logo).
→ The SIMATIC Restore menu opens.
– Select a language.
– Select "CPU1515SP PC (F)" or "CPU1515SP PC (F) + HMI".
– Select the option "Completely restore system drive".
→ The original software is restored on Partition C:, Partition D: is deleted.

After the restore

1. Exit the Restore menu.
2. Remove all USB devices.
3. Proceed as described in Initial commissioning (Page 50).

Further procedure
● Reconnect the USB devices.
● Install the license keys.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

94 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Maintenance
9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick

9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick

Introduction
You can use the Restore menu to create a bootable USB stick in order to restore the original
software of the CPU 1515SP PC (F).
Use the SIMATIC IPC Service USB FlashDrive (6AV7672-8JD02-0AA0) for the creation.

Preparing bootable USB stick using PC

NOTICE
Data loss
If you transfer the data from the Restore-DVD to the USB stick, all existing data on the USB
stick is deleted.
You should back up the data on the USB stick before you create the Restore USB stick.

Transferring Restore DVD data to the USB stick

1. Place the Restore DVD into the DVD drive of a PC.
2. Double-click the CD_Menu.exe file in the root directory of the DVD.
3. Select the option " Create USB flash drive".
4. When all the data has been transferred, remove the Restore USB stick safely from the
PC.

Note
If you disturb the User-Interface window during the process (for example, by a mouse click in
the window), the process continues unchanged even if no reaction is recognizable within the
tool interface.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 95
Maintenance
9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick

Restoring delivery state using USB stick

Before the restore

1. Switch off the power supply of the CPU.
2. Remove all USB devices from the CPU.
3. Connect the Restore USB stick directly to the CPU.
4. Switch on the power supply of the CPU.
The CPU is started.
The restore process starts.
5. Press <F12> to start the Boot Manager.
6. Select the list entry for the USB stick as boot medium in the Boot Manager.
7. After the prompt, confirm the start by pressing any key.
The loading process is displayed (Windows logo).
The SIMATIC Restore menu opens.
8. Select a language.
9. Select "CPU 1515SP PC (F)" or "CPU 1515SP PC (F) + HMI".
10.Select the option "Restore delivery state".
The original software is restored.

After the restore

1. Exit the Restore menu.
2. Remove all USB devices.
3. Proceed as described in Initial commissioning.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

96 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Maintenance
9.5 Updating software

9.5 Updating software

Note
If you update the software, then always start the CPU 1515SP PC (F) in the GRUB menu in
Windows mode (see Figure (Page 58)).

Information on updating software can be found on the Internet

(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en).

HMI devices
During the installation, make sure that you always use the latest drivers for the HMI devices
used (SIMATIC Flat Panels).
Before you install a new driver version, you must uninstall the old driver version in order to
ensure proper operation.
You can download the current driver software from SIMATIC Product Support.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 97
Maintenance
9.6 Windows Embedded Standard 7

9.6 Windows Embedded Standard 7

The Windows Embedded Standard 7 operating system is pre-installed on the
CPU 1515SP PC (F). WES7 E 32Bit or WES7 P 64Bit are available depending on the order
option.
The WES7 P version supports multi-touch functionality (gesture control).

Windows language packs

English is available as the basic language for the installation of the Windows operating
system.
With the system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM of the CPU 1515SP PC (F), other
operating system languages can be installed after the first commissioning. Note that you
need administrator rights to install language packages.
The following language packages are contained on the Restore DVD in
\Packages\x64\LanguagePack:
● Traditional Chinese
● Simplified Chinese
● German
● English
● French
● Italian
● Japanese
● Korean
● Russian
● Spanish

Installing languages
Use the Windows function "Start > Control Panel > Region and Language" to install a
language pack. The installation takes around 45 minutes.

Updates
You can install additional updates at a later time. You can find current information on the
operating system at Widows (http://www.windows.com).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

98 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Maintenance
9.7 Sending the device to customer service

9.7 Sending the device to customer service

Before sending

Note
Back up data and remove memory cards
Before you send in the CPU 1515SP PC (F) for repair:
• Create a backup of your data.
• Back up your SIMATIC license keys on a USB stick.
• Remove your SD/MMC cards.
• Remove your CFast card.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 99
Maintenance
9.8 Removing and inserting the CFast card

9.8 Removing and inserting the CFast card

Introduction
CPU 1515SP PC (F) has one slot for a CFast card. On this card, you will find the operating
system, your Runtime software and, after configuration, the project.
Seal the cover for the CFast card to protect the system against unauthorized access.
You must remove the CFast card before you send in the CPU, for example, for repair.

Requirements
● CPU 1515SP PC (F) is de-energized.

Procedure – Removing the CFast card

1. Remove the seal.
2. Open the cover, using a screwdriver if necessary.
3. Press onto the CFast card.
The card is pressed out of the slot.
4. Pull the card out of the slot.
To do this, grip the rib on the underside of the memory card.

Procedure – Inserting the CFast card

1. Open the cover of the slot, using a screwdriver if necessary.
2. Insert the CFast card into the slot.
3. Press the CFast card into the slot.
The CFast card is properly inserted if the cover can be closed without any resistance.
4. Close the cover.

NOTICE
Unauthorized access
Seal the cover with lead to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) against unauthorized access.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

100 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
Technical data 10
10.1 Standards and approvals

Introduction
The general technical specifications cover the following:
● The standards and test values which the CPU 1515SP PC (F) complies with and fulfils.
● The test criteria according to which the CPU 1515SP PC (F) was tested.

Currently valid markings and approvals

Note
The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

Safety information

WARNING
Risk of personal injury and damage to property.
In potentially explosive atmospheres, injury to persons and material damage may occur if
you disconnect plug-in connections during operation of an ET 200SP.
Always switch off the power to the ET 200SP when disconnecting plug-in connections in
potentially explosive atmospheres.

WARNING
Flying sparks due to loose cables
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong
oscillation and high vibrating loads.
Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 101
Technical data
10.1 Standards and approvals

WARNING
Explosion hazard
If you replace components, compliance with Class I, DIV. 2 can become invalid.

WARNING
Area of application
This device is only suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D, or in non-hazardous
areas.

CE marking
The CPU 1515SP PC (F) meets the requirements and protection targets of the following EC
guidelines and complies with the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable
logic controllers published in the official gazettes of the European Community:
● 2006/95/EC "Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits" (Low-
Voltage Directive)
● 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● 94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
The EC declarations of conformity are available for the responsible authorities at:
Siemens AG
Digital Factory

Factory Automation
DF FA AS DH AMB
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
These are also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages, keyword
"Declaration of Conformity".

cULus approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
OR

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

102 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.1 Standards and approvals

cULus HAZ. LOC. approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
● CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Installation Instructions for cULus haz.loc.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is
known to be non-hazardous.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
● This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I,
Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations.
WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS.

FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) according to
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 (ANSI/ISA 82.02.01)
CSA C22.2 No. 213
CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

ATEX approval
in accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;
Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements)

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 103
Technical data
10.1 Standards and approvals

IECEx approval
According to IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type
of protection "n") and IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General
requirements)

Marking for Australia and New Zealand

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the requirements of the standard
AS/NZS CISPR 16.

Korea Certificate KCC-REM-S49-ET200SP

Note that this device corresponds to limit class A in terms of the emission of radio frequency
interference. This device can be used in all areas, except residential areas.
이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기
바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.

IEC 61131
The CPU 1515SP PC (F) with the S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505SP (F) meets the
requirements and criteria of the standard IEC 61131-2 (programmable logic controllers, part
2: Equipment requirements and tests).

PROFINET standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on the standard IEC 61158 Type 10.

PROFIBUS standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on the standard IEC 61158 Type 3.

IO-Link standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on the standard IEC 61131-9.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

104 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Use in industrial environments

SIMATIC products are designed for use in industry.

Table 10- 1 Use in industrial environments

Area of applica- Interference emission requirements Interference immunity requirements

tion
Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2011 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

Use in residential areas

Note
The ET 200SP is intended for use in industrial areas; use in residential areas may have an
impact on radio/TV reception.

If you want to use the ET 200SP in residential areas, you must ensure that its radio
frequency interference emission complies with limit class B in accordance with EN 55011.
Suitable measures for achieving RF interference level Class B include, for example:
● Installation of the CPU 1515SP PC (F). in grounded control/switch cabinets
● Use of filters in the supply lines

Reference
The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under
Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment.
Among other things, CPU 1515SP PC (F) also meets the requirements of the EMC
legislation for the European single market. The prerequisite for this is that the
CPU 1515SP PC (F) complies with the requirements and guidelines relating to electrical
equipment.

EMC according to NE 21
The CPU 1515SP PC does not meet the EMC specifications of the NAMUR guideline NE21.
The CPU 1515SP PC meets the EMC specifications according to IEC 61131-2 and
IEC 61000-6-2.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 105
Technical data
10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Pulse-shaped disturbance
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) with
regard to pulse-shaped interference.

Table 10- 2 Pulse-shaped disturbance

Pulse-shaped disturbance Test voltage corresponds to

degree of se-
verity
Electrostatic discharge according Air discharge: ±8 kV 3
to IEC 61000-4-2. Contact discharge ± 4 kV 3
Burst pulses (high-speed transient 2 kV (power supply cable) 3
disturbance) according to 2 kV (signal cable > 30 m) 3
IEC 61000-4-4. 1 kV (signal cable < 30 m)
High-energy single pulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (see function manual
Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566))
• asymmetric coupling 2 kV (power supply cable) 3
DC with protective elements
2 kV (signal cable/data cable only > 30 m),
possibly with protective elements
• symmetric coupling 1 kV (power supply cables) DC with protective
elements
1 kV (signal cable/data cable only > 30 m),
possibly with protective elements

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

106 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Sinusoidal disturbance
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) with
regard to sinusoidal interference.
● RF radiation

Table 10- 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF radiation

RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3/NAMUR 21 corresponds to degree of

Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated severity
80 to 1000 MHz; 1.0 to 2.0 GHz 2.0 GHz to 2.7 GHz 3
10 V/m 3 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)

● RF coupling

Table 10- 4 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF coupling

RF coupling according to IEC 61000-4-6 corresponds to degree of

severity
(10 kHz) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3
10 Vrms unmodulated
80% AM (1 kHz)
150 Ω source impedance

Emission of radio interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55016: Limit class A, group
1 (measured at a distance of 10 m).

Table 10- 5 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55016

Frequency Emitted interference

30 MHz to 230 MHz < 40 dB (µV/m)Q
230 MHz to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (µV/m)Q

Interference emission via the AC power supply according to EN 55016: Limit value class A,
Group 1.

Table 10- 6 Interference emission via the AC power supply according to EN 55016

Frequency Emitted interference

0.15 to 0.5 MHz <79 dB (µV) Q
<66 dB (µV) M
0.5 to 30 MHz <73 dB (µV) Q
<60 dB (µV) M

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 107
Technical data
10.3 Shipping and storage conditions

10.3 Shipping and storage conditions

Introduction
The CPU 1515SP PC (F) exceeds requirements in terms of shipping and storage conditions
according to IEC 61131-2. The following information applies to modules that are shipped
and/or stored in their original packaging.

Table 10- 7 Shipping and storage conditions for modules

Type of condition Permissible range

Free fall (in shipping package) ≤1 m
Temperature From -40 °C to +70 °C
Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 660 hPa (corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m
to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 5% to 95%, without condensation
Sinusoidal vibrations according to 5 - 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 8.4 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock according to IEC 60068-2-27 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

10.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions

Note
Restrictions
Deviating from the ambient conditions for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the following
restrictions apply to the CPU 1515SP PC (F):
• Mechanical ambient conditions:
– 2 g constant acceleration when using the BusAdapter BA 2×FC
• Ambient temperature:
– 0 to 60 °C for horizontal installation with maximum 32 I/O modules
– 0 to 55 °C for horizontal installation with maximum 64 I/O modules
– 0 to 50 °C for vertical installation with maximum 32 I/O modules

Operating conditions
CPU 1515SP PC (F) is designed for stationary use in weather-proof locations. The operating
conditions exceed the requirements according to DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

108 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions

Mechanical ambient conditions

The table below shows the mechanical ambient conditions in the form of sinusoidal
oscillations.

Table 10- 8 Mechanical ambient conditions

Frequency band CPU 1515SP PC (F)

5 ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude
8.4 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration
10 ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude
60 ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz • 1 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45)
• 2 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2×FC)

Test of mechanical ambient conditions

The table below provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the test
of ambient mechanical conditions.

Table 10- 9 Test of mechanical ambient conditions

Condition tested Test Standard Comment

Vibration Vibration test accord- Type of oscillation: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 oc-
ing to IEC 60068-2-6 tave/minute.
(sine) BA 2×RJ45
• 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude
• 8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration
BA 2×FC
• 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz, 0.35 mm constant amplitude
• 60 Hz ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz, 2 g constant acceleration
Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of 3 vertically
aligned axes
Shock Shock, tested accord- Type of shock: Half-sine
ing to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of 3 vertically
aligned axes

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 109
Technical data
10.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage

Climatic ambient conditions

You may use the CPU 1515SP PC (F) under the following climatic, ambient conditions.

Table 10- 10 Climatic ambient conditions

Ambient conditions Permissible range Comments

Temperature: • from 0 to 60 °C For configuration with 32 I/O modules and 3 x
Horizontal mounting position: 100 mA USB load
• from 0 to 55 °C For configuration with 64 I/O modules and 2 x
500 mA + 1 x 100 mA USB load
Vertical installation: • 0 to 50 °C For configuration with 32 I/O modules and 3 x
100 mA USB load
Permitted temperature change 10 K/h -
Relative humidity from 10 to 95% Without condensation, corresponds to rela-
tive humidity (RH) class 2 according to IEC
61131 part 2
Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m
to 2000 m
Concentration of pollutants SO2: <0.5 ppm; -
RH <60 %, no condensation
H2S: <0.1 ppm;
RH <60 %, no condensation
ISA-S71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 -

10.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and

rated voltage

Insulation
The insulation is designed according to the requirements of EN 61131-2: 2007.

Note
For modules with 24 V DC supply voltage, the electrical isolation is designed for max. 60 V
AC / 75 V DC and basic insulation is designed according to EN 61131-2: 2007.

Pollution degree/overvoltage category according to IEC 61131

● Pollution degree 2
● Overvoltage category: II

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

110 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres

Protection class according to IEC 61131-2:2007

CPU 1515SP PC (F) fulfils the protection class I and contains parts of protection class II and
III.
The grounding of the mounting rail must meet the requirements for functional earth FE.
The installation location (e.g. enclosure, control cabinet) must have a protective conductor
connection that meets the standard to maintain protection class I.

Degree of protection IP20

Degree of protection IP20 according to IEC 60529, i.e.:
● Protection against contact with standard probe
● Protection against foreign objects with diameters in excess of 12.5 mm
● No protection against water

Rated voltage for operation

CPU 1515SP PC (F) works with the rated voltage and corresponding tolerances listed in the
following table.

Table 10- 11 Rated voltage for operation

Rated voltage Tolerance range

24 V 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 1
18.5 to 30.2 V DC 2
1 Static value: Creation as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation in accordance
with IEC 60364-4-41
2 Dynamic value: including ripple, for example, with three-phase bridge rectification

10.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres

See product information Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19692172).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 111
Technical data
10.7 Module data

10.7 Module data

10.7.1 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM

CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM

6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0
General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC
HW release number FS06
Firmware version V2.1
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 SP1
PC configuration
Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E
Main memory 4 GB RAM
Flash disk 30 GB
Operating systems Windows Embedded Standard 7 E 32 bit
Installed SW
Visualization No
Controller S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP V2.1
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power and voltage failure backup
Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB
use
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A
Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value
Power
Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use
Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

112 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0
Memory
Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Work memory
Integrated (for program) 1 MB
Integrated (for data) 5 MB
Integrated (for ODK application) 10 MB
Load memory
Integrated (on PC mass storage medium) 320 MB
Buffering
with UPS Yes; all retentive declared memory areas
with non-volatile memory Yes
Hardware configuration
integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
Via CM 1
Racks
Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 module + server module
Number of rows, max. 1
Time-of-day
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s
Interfaces
Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each – of which 2 x 500 mA
and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
Graphic interface 1x DVI-I
1st interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 2
Integrated switch Yes
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
• Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 113
Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0
2nd interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 1
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated
• Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED No

3rd interface
Interface hardware
RS 485 Yes
Interface hardware
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1
1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
LED diagnostics display
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and
3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max 64 ET 200SP
modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB
load
Horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
Horizontal installation, max. 60 °C
Vertical installation, min. 0 °C
Vertical installation, max. 50 °C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA
USB load
Ambient temperature during storage / transport
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
I/O / Options
I/O
• SD card Optional for additional mass storage

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

114 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0
Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

10.7.2 CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM

CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM

6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0
General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC F
Firmware version V2.1
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 SP1
PC configuration
Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E
Main memory 4 GB RAM
Flash disk 30 GB
Operating systems Windows Embedded Standard 7 E 32 bit
Installed SW
Visualization No
Controller S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power and voltage failure backup
Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB
use
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A
Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 115
Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0
Power
Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use
Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use
Memory
Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Work memory
Integrated (for program) 1.5 MB
Integrated (for data) 5 MB
Integrated (for ODK application) 10 MB
Load memory
Integrated (on PC mass storage medium) 320 MB
Buffering
with UPS Yes; all retentive declared memory areas
with non-volatile memory Yes
Hardware configuration
integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
Via CM 1
Racks
Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 module + server module
Number of rows, max. 1
Time-of-day
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s
Interfaces
Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each – of which 2 x 500 mA
and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
Graphics interface 1x DVI-I

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

116 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0
1st interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 2
integrated switch Yes
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
• Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes

2nd interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 1
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated
• Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED No

3rd interface
Interface hardware
RS 485 Yes
Interface hardware
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1
1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
LED diagnostics display
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and
3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max 64 ET 200SP
modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB
load
Horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
Horizontal installation, max. 60 °C
Vertical installation, min. 0 °C
Vertical installation, max. 50 °C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA
USB load

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 117
Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0
Ambient temperature during storage / transport
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
I/O / Options
I/O
• SD card optional for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

10.7.3 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM - spare part

CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM - spare part

6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version as of STEP 7 V14
PC configuration
Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E
Main memory 4 GB RAM
Installed SW
Visualization No
Controller No
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power and voltage failure backup
Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

118 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB
use
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A
Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value
Power
Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use
Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use
Memory
Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM
CFast memory card No
Work memory
Integrated 4 GB
Hardware configuration
integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
Via CM 1
Racks
Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU + 64 Module + server module (mounting width
max. 1 m)
Number of rows, max. 1
Time-of-day
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s
Interfaces
Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; via CM DP module
Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each – of which 2 x 500 mA
and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
Graphics interface 1x DVI-I

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 119
Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
1st interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 2
integrated switch Yes
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
• Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes

2nd interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 1
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated
• Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED No

3rd interface
Interface hardware
RS 485 Yes; via CM DP module
Interface hardware
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1
1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and
3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max 64 ET 200SP
modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB
load
Horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
Horizontal installation, max. 60 °C
Vertical installation, min. 0 °C
Vertical installation, max. 50 °C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA
USB load
Ambient temperature during storage / transport
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

120 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
I/O / Options
I/O
• SD card optional for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

10.7.4 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM

CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM

6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC
HW release number FS05
Firmware version V2.1
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 SP1
PC configuration
Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E
Main memory 4 GB RAM
Flash disk 30 GB
Operating systems Windows Embedded Standard 7 P 64 bit
Installed SW
Visualization No
Controller S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP V2.1
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power and voltage failure backup
Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 121
Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB
use
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A
Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value
Power
Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use
Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use
Memory
Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Work memory
Integrated (for program) 1 MB
Integrated (for data) 5 MB
Integrated (for ODK application) 10 MB
Load memory
Integrated (on PC mass storage medium) 320 MB
Buffering
with UPS Yes; all retentive declared memory areas
with non-volatile memory Yes
Hardware configuration
integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
Via CM 1
Racks
Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 module + server module
Number of rows, max. 1
Time-of-day
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s
Interfaces
Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each – of which 2 x 500 mA
and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously
Number of SD card slots 1

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

122 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
Video interfaces
Graphics interface 1x DVI-I
1st interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 2
integrated switch Yes
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
• Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes

2nd interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 1
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated
• Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED No

3rd interface
Interface hardware
RS 485 Yes
Interface hardware
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1
1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
LED diagnostics display
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and
3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max 64 ET 200SP
modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB
load
Horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
Horizontal installation, max. 60 °C
Vertical installation, min. 0 °C
Vertical installation, max. 50 °C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA
USB load

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 123
Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
Ambient temperature during storage / transport
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
I/O / Options
I/O
• SD card optional for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

10.7.5 CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM

CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM

6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0
General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC
HW release number FS02
Firmware version V2.1
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V14 SP1
PC configuration
Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E
Main memory 4 GB RAM
Flash disk 30 GB
Operating systems Windows Embedded Standard 7 P 64 bit
Installed SW
Visualization No
Controller S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

124 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0
Power and voltage failure backup
Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB
use
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A
Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value
Power
Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use
Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use
Memory
Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Work memory
Integrated (for program) 1.5 MB
Integrated (for data) 5 MB
Integrated (for ODK application) 10 MB
Load memory
Integrated (on PC mass storage medium) 320 MB
Buffering
with UPS Yes; all retentive declared memory areas
with non-volatile memory Yes
Hardware configuration
integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
Via CM 1
Racks
Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 module + server module
Number of rows, max. 1
Time-of-day
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 125
Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0
Interfaces
Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each – of which 2 x 500 mA
and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
Graphics interface 1x DVI-I
1st interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 2
integrated switch Yes
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
• Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes

2nd interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 1
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated
• Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED No

3rd interface
Interface hardware
RS 485 Yes
Interface hardware
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1
1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
LED diagnostics display
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

126 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and
3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max 64 ET 200SP
modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB
load
Horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
Horizontal installation, max. 60 °C
Vertical installation, min. 0 °C
Vertical installation, max. 50 °C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA
USB load
Ambient temperature during storage / transport
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
I/O / Options
I/O
• SD card optional for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

10.7.6 CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 64Bit 4GB RAM - spare part

CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 64Bit 4GB RAM - spare part

6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version as of STEP 7 V14
PC configuration
Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E
Main memory 4 GB RAM
Installed SW
Visualization No
Controller No

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 127
Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power and voltage failure backup
Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP modules and USB
use
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A
Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value
Power
Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use
Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without USB use
Memory
Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM
CFast memory card No
Work memory
Integrated 4 GB
Hardware configuration
integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
Via CM 1
Racks
Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU + 64 Module + server module (mounting width
max. 1 m)
Number of rows, max. 1
Time-of-day
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s
Interfaces
Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; via CM DP module
Number of interfaces RS 485 1; via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each – of which 2 x 500 mA
and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

128 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
Graphics interface 1x DVI-I
1st interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 2
integrated switch Yes
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
• Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes

2nd interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 1
RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated
• Transmission rate, max. 1000 Mbps

• Industrial Ethernet status LED No

3rd interface
Interface hardware
RS 485 Yes; via CM DP module
Interface hardware
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; for 1st Interface X1
1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd Interface X2
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and
3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max 64 ET 200SP
modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x max. 100 mA USB
load
Horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
Horizontal installation, max. 60 °C
Vertical installation, min. 0 °C
Vertical installation, max. 50 °C; with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x 100 mA
USB load
Ambient temperature during storage / transport
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 129
Technical data
10.7 Module data

6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
I/O / Options
I/O
• SD card optional for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

10.7.7 CPU 1515SP PC (F) + HMI

The technical specifications of the following devices modules can be found in the product
information under (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/104117388).

ET 200SP Open Controller Article number

System version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM
CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0
CPU 1515SP PC F
CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FK0
CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FL0
CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FM0

10.7.8 S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F)

CPU 1505SP (F) is a PC-based controller of the SIMATIC S7-1500 Software Controller
family. For more information about the CPU 1505SP (F), refer to the corresponding manual
at (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740725). For the
CPU 1505SP F, also note the information in the F product information at
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478599).

Technical specifications
You can find all technical specifications on CPU 1505SP with the article number
6ES7672-5DC01-0YA0 under (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-
5DC01-0YA0/td). You can find all technical specifications on CPU 1505SP F with the article
number 6ES7672-5SC01-0YA0 under
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5SC01-0YA0/td).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

130 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Technical data
10.8 Dimension drawings

10.8 Dimension drawings

10.8.1 CPU 1515SP PC (F)

This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets.

Dimension drawings of the CPU 1515SP PC (F).

Figure 10-1 Dimension drawing of CPU 1515SP PC, front view

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 131
Technical data
10.8 Dimension drawings

Figure 10-2 Dimension drawing of CPU 1515SP PC, side view

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

132 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
Accessories/spare parts A
Ordering options and accessories for CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Table A- 1 Order options for CPU 1515SP PC

Description Article number

System version
WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM 1
CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0
Controller CPU 1505SP
CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software 6ES7677-2FA31-0EB0
Controller CPU 1505SP F
CPU 1515SP PC 4 GB, spare part (without CFast card, without software) 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
System version
WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM 1
CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
Controller CPU 1505SP
CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software
Controller CPU 1505SP and WinCC Runtime Advanced as of V14
• CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0

• CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0

• CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0

CPU 1515SP PC F, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software 6ES7677-2FA41-0FB0

Controller CPU 1505SP
CPU 1515SP PC, 30 GB CFast card with pre-installed S7-1500 Software
Controller CPU 1505SP F and WinCC Runtime Advanced as of V14
• CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FK0

• CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FL0

• CPU 1515SP PC F + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2FA41-0FM0

1 Windows Embedded Standard 7

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 133
Accessories/spare parts

Table A- 2 Accessories for CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Description Article number

BusAdapter, 1 unit
• BA 2×RJ45 (PROFINET BusAdapter with standard Ethernet socket) 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0

• BA 2×FC (PROFINET BusAdapter with Fast Connect Ethernet connec- 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0

tion)
Server module; 1 unit 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
Strain relief for CPU 1515SP PC (F) A5E32291462
SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive 8 GB (SLC), pre-installed BIOS- 6AV7672-8JD01-0AA0
MANAGER V3.3, Image/Partition Creator V3.3 and installation CD
SIMATIC IPC Service USB Flashdrive 16 GB, USB3.0, pre-installed BIOS- 6AV7672-8JD02-0AA0
MANAGER V3.3, Image/Partition Creator V3.4 and installation CD
SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor Software V4.4 6ES7648-6CA04-4YX0
SIMATIC PC, adapter cable, DVI-I compliant with VGA, 250 mm long 6ES7648-3AB00-0XA0
Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels, 10 units 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0
Mounting rails, tin-plated steel strip
• Length: 483 mm 6ES5710-8MA11

• Length: 430 mm 6ES5710-8MA21

• Length: 830 mm 6ES5710-8MA31

• Length: 2000 mm 6ES5710-8MA41

SIMATIC IPC CFast cards

• CFast 4 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XG10

• CFast 8 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XH10

• CFast 16 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XJ10

• CFast 30 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XK10

Online catalog
Additional article numbers can be found on the Internet in the online catalog and online
ordering system (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

134 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
Abbreviations B
Abbreviation Term Meaning
AC Alternating current Alternating current
ALM Automation License Manager Tool for managing license keys in STEP 7
BIOS Basic Input Output System Basic Input Output System. A set of important software rou-
tines used after the startup of the CPU to load the operating
system and to provide the routines for data exchange between
hardware components.
CE Communauté Européenne CE label
CFast CompactFlash ATA Serial Transfer Memory card
CoA Certificate of Authenticity Certificate of Authenticity, label with Microsoft Windows
"Product Key"
CoL Certificate of License Certificate of License for the SIMATIC software loaded
DC Direct Current DC current
DVD Digital Versatile Disc Digital storage medium with high memory capacity.
DVI-I Digital Visual Interface Interface for transfer of image and video data for DVI-I moni-
tors.
ESD Components sensitive to electro-
static charge
EN European standard
EWF Enhanced Write Filter Enhanced write filter
FBWF File Based Write Filter File based write filter
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
GRUB / GRUB4DOS GRand Unified Bootloader Boot Manager
HMI Human Machine Interface User interface
IEC International Electronical Commis-
sion
IM Interface module The interface module connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system with the IO controller and exchanges data with the I/O
modules via the backplane bus.
LAN Local Area Network Computer network that is limited to a local area.
LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode
LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Protocol that enables the exchange of information between
adjacent devices.
MMC Multi Media Card Memory card
NTFS New Technology File System File system that offers targeted access protection at the file
level.
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random-Access Non-volatile data memory that is RAM-based, the data content
Memory of which is retained without external power supply.
PC Personal Computer

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 135
Abbreviations

Abbreviation Term Meaning

PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV, previously called "extra low voltage with safe isolation",
is a protective measure against electrical shock. See EN
50178.
PN PROFINET
PG Programming device Compact programming device which meets the special re-
quirements of industry. The PG is fully equipped for program-
ming SIMATIC PLCs.
PS Power supply Power supply
PT Power Tags Process tags; tags enable data exchange between the com-
ponents of an automation process, for example, between the
HMI device and the controller.
RAM Random Access Memory Main or work memory of a computer with direct access, allow-
ing read access to data and editing.
RT Runtime
SD Secure Digital card Memory card
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage Safety extra-low voltage; protective measure in which circuits
with a rated voltage of up to 50 V AC or 120 V DC are operat-
ed ungrounded and feeds from circuits with a higher voltage
are separated from these by, for example, a safety transform-
er.
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
USB Universal Serial Bus Serial bus system for connecting a computer to external de-
vices.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

136 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
Troubleshooting C
Problem Possible cause Remedy
CPU 1515SP PC (F) is not working. CPU 1515SP PC (F) is not supplied Check the power supply.
with current.
CPU 1515SP PC (F) does not start. Feedback through USB devices. Use USB devices that comply with the
USB 2.0 specification.
Windows no longer boots. Settings in the BIOS setup are not Check the settings in the BIOS setup
correct. menu Boot.
Windows clock is set incorrectly.
Time and/or date of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) was not con- Correct the settings in the BIOS setup
CPU 1515SP PC (F) do not match. nected for more than 6 weeks. menu Main or in Windows.
USB device is not working. USB power supply is overloaded. Use an external power supply for the
USB device (see section Application
planning (Page 37).

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 137
Glossary

Cold restart
A startup procedure commencing when the CPU is switched on. Upon a cold restart, the
system typically performs some basic hardware checks and then loads the operating system
from the hard disk into the work memory.

Controller
Integrated hardware and software controlling the operation of a specific internal or I/O device
(e.g. keyboard controller).

Device configuration
The device configuration of a PC/programming device includes information on the features
and options of the PC/programming device such as memory configuration, drive types,
monitor, network address etc. The data is stored in a configuration file and is used by the
operating system to load the corresponding device drivers or assign device parameters.

Drivers
Program sections of the operating system. They convert data from the user programs to the
specific formats required by the I/O devices (e.g. hard disks, monitors, printers).

Enhanced Write Filter (EWF)

Configurable write filter making it possible to boot Windows Embedded Standard from write-
protected media (e.g. from CD-ROM), to write-protect individual partitions and to adapt file
system performance to the user's requirements (e.g. when using CFast cards).

Ethernet
Local network (bus structure for text and data communication with a data transmission rate
of 10/100/1000 Mbps.

File-Based Write Filter (FBWF)

Configurable write filter making it possible to write-protect individual files.

Image
An image is a copy of hard-disk partitions, for example, which is stored as backup in a file so
that it can be restored if necessary.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

138 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 Glossary

Interface
● Connection between individual hardware elements such as PCs, programming device,
printer or screen by means of physical plug-in connections (cables).
● Connection between different programs to allow them to be used together.

LAN
Local Area Network: LAN refers to a local network consisting of a group of computers and
other devices which are distributed over a relatively restricted area and connected through
communication lines. The devices connected to a LAN are referred to as nodes. The
purpose of networks is the shared use of files, printers or other resources.

License key
The license key is the electronic license stamp of a license. Siemens AG provides a license
key for software that is protected by licensing laws.

Operating system
Generic term which describes all functions for controlling and monitoring user program
execution and distribution of system resources to the user programs as well as maintenance
of the operating mode in cooperation with the hardware.

Power options
The power options can be used to reduce the power consumption of the computer while still
keeping it ready for immediate use. In Windows via Start > Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Power Options.

Restart
The restart of the company that is already in operation using, for example, the
<Ctrl+Alt+Del> shortcut without switching off the power supply.

Restore DVD
You use the Restore DVD to reset your system partition or the entire hard disk to the delivery
state in the event of an error. The DVD contains all the image files required and is bootable.

ROM
Read Only Memory. ROM refers to a read-only memory where each memory location can be
addressed individually. The stored programs or data are hard-coded and are preserved even
in the event of a power failure.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC 139
Glossary

S.M.A.R.T
Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART or S.M.A.R.T.) is an industry
standard for storage media. It provides for permanent monitoring of relevant parameters and
thus early recognition of pending defects.

SATA
Serial ATA. An interface for hard disk drives and optical drives with serial data transfer.

SETUP (BIOS setup)

A program used to determine information on the device configuration. The device
configuration of the CPU 1515SP PC (F) is pre-set. Changes must be made whenever a
memory expansion, new modules or drives are to be activated.

CPU 1515SP PC (F)

140 Manual, 05/2017, A5E32701806-AC
 1
___________________
Introduction

___________________
Safety information 2

___________________ 3
SIMATIC Areas of application

___________________
Product overview 4
ET 200SP Open Controller
CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)
___________________
Application planning 5

___________________
Installation 6
Operating Instructions

7
___________________
Wiring

8
___________________
Commissioning

Interrupt, error and system

___________________
messages 9

10
___________________
Functions

11
___________________
Maintenance

___________________
Technical specifications 12

___________________
Dimension drawings 13

___________________
Spare parts/accessories 14

A
___________________
Appendix

___________________
List of abbreviations B

09/2018
A5E42603425-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E42603425-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 07/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 6
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2 ...................................................................................... 8
1.2 Information about third-party software updates ......................................................................12
1.3 Notes on protecting administrator accounts ...........................................................................12
2 Safety information ................................................................................................................................. 13
2.1 Security information ................................................................................................................13
2.2 General safety instructions .....................................................................................................14
2.3 Notes on use ...........................................................................................................................16
3 Areas of application .............................................................................................................................. 17
3.1 Areas of application of fail-safe CPUs ....................................................................................17
3.2 Areas of application of technology CPUs ...............................................................................17
4 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 18
4.1 Field of application ..................................................................................................................18
4.2 Characteristics ........................................................................................................................19
4.3 Sample configuration ..............................................................................................................20
4.4 Components ............................................................................................................................22
4.5 Operator controls and connection elements ...........................................................................24
4.6 Scope of delivery ....................................................................................................................27
5 Application planning .............................................................................................................................. 28
5.1 Basics......................................................................................................................................28
5.2 Unpacking the device..............................................................................................................29
5.3 Identification data ....................................................................................................................30
5.4 Installation location .................................................................................................................31
5.5 Hardware configuration ...........................................................................................................33
6 Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 34
6.1 Installing the device ................................................................................................................34
7 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 36
7.1 Notes on connection ...............................................................................................................36
7.2 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................37
7.3 Electrical configuration ............................................................................................................38
7.4 Connecting devices to networks .............................................................................................40

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 3
Table of contents

7.5 Securing cables...................................................................................................................... 41

8 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................... 42
8.1 Notes on commissioning ........................................................................................................ 42
8.2 Basic commissioning procedure ............................................................................................ 43
8.2.1 Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 43
8.2.2 Preparing commissioning ....................................................................................................... 43
8.2.3 Commissioning procedure ..................................................................................................... 43
8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller ................................................................................ 45
8.3.1 Creating the configuration of the Open Controller ................................................................. 45
8.3.2 Setting the IP address ............................................................................................................ 46
8.3.3 Changing the properties of the S7-1500 Software Controller ................................................ 46
8.3.4 Establishing the HMI connection............................................................................................ 47
8.3.5 Downloading a project to the target system ........................................................................... 47
8.3.6 Transferring license keys ....................................................................................................... 48
8.3.7 Switching the Open Controller on/off ..................................................................................... 50
9 Interrupt, error and system messages ................................................................................................... 51
9.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 51
10 Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 54
10.1 Monitoring functions ............................................................................................................... 54
10.1.1 Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 54
10.1.2 Temperature monitoring ......................................................................................................... 55
10.1.3 Monitoring drives .................................................................................................................... 55
10.1.4 Operating hours counter ........................................................................................................ 55
10.2 Retentive memory NVRAM .................................................................................................... 55
10.3 BIOS setup ............................................................................................................................. 56
10.4 Power options ........................................................................................................................ 56
10.5 "Unified Write Filter (UWF)" write filter ................................................................................... 57
11 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 58
11.1 Backing up and restoring data ............................................................................................... 58
11.2 Partitions in the delivery state ................................................................................................ 59
11.3 Restoring the delivery state ................................................................................................... 60
11.4 Updating software .................................................................................................................. 62
11.5 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise (64-bit) ....................................................................................... 62
11.6 Sending the device to customer service ................................................................................ 63
11.7 Removing and inserting the CFast card ................................................................................ 64
11.8 Recycling and disposal .......................................................................................................... 65
12 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 66
12.1 Standards and approvals ....................................................................................................... 66
12.2 Electromagnetic compatibility ................................................................................................ 71
12.3 Shipping and storage conditions ............................................................................................ 73

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

4 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Table of contents

12.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions ..........................................................................74

12.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage ..............76
12.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres .......................................77
12.7 Module data ............................................................................................................................78
12.7.1 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 - basic device ................................................78
12.7.2 Technical specifications CPU 1515SP PC2 ...........................................................................81
12.7.3 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 128PT .................................................85
12.7.4 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 512PT .................................................89
12.7.5 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 2048PT ...............................................93
12.7.6 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F ....................................................................97
12.7.7 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 128PT ............................................101
12.7.8 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 512PT ............................................105
12.7.9 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 2018PT ..........................................109
12.7.10 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 T ..................................................................113
12.7.11 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 TF ................................................................117
12.7.12 S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) ............................................................120
13 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................................ 121
13.1 CPU 1515SP PC2.................................................................................................................121
14 Spare parts/accessories ...................................................................................................................... 123
14.1 Accessories/spare parts........................................................................................................123
A Appendix............................................................................................................................................. 124
A.1 Siemens Industry Online Support .........................................................................................124
A.2 Industry Mall ..........................................................................................................................124
A.3 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................125
B List of abbreviations ............................................................................................................................ 126
B.1 Abbreviations ........................................................................................................................126
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 128
Index................................................................................................................................................... 131

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 5
Introduction 1
Purpose of the documentation
These operating instructions supplement the system manual
ET 200SP distributed I/O system. Functions that generally relate to the system are described
in this manual.
The information provided in these operating instructions and in the system/function manuals
supports you in commissioning the CPU 1515SP PC2.

Basic knowledge required

The system must be operated and used by qualified staff only.
The following knowledge is required:
● Installation guideline for SIMATIC ET 200SP
● Totally Integrated Automation Portal, in particular:
– Hardware configuration with hardware and network editor
– Communication between CPUs
● PC based automation with an S7-1500 software controller and with
WinCC Runtime Advanced
● Basic knowledge of fail-safe automation systems
● Basic knowledge of PC technology
● Windows 10 IoT Enterprise operating system (64-bit)

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

6 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Introduction
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2

Conventions
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
"CPU1515SP PC2 T" means that the respective section applies only to the
"CPU 1515SP PC2 T".
"CPU1515SP PC2 F" means that the respective section applies only to the
"CPU 1515SP PC2 F".
"CPU1515SP PC2 TF" means that the respective section applies only to the
"CPU 1515SP PC2 TF".
"CPU 1515SP PC2" also includes "CPU1 515SP PC2 F", "CPU 1515SP PC2 T" and
"CPU 1515SP PC2 TF".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Scope of validity of the documentation

This documentation is valid for the following products:

ET 200SP Open Controller Article number

Standard CPU
• CPU 1515SP PC2 basic device 6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0

• CPU 1515SP PC2 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0

• CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0

• CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0

• CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0

Fail-safe CPUs
• CPU 1515SP PC2 F 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0

• CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0

• CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0

• CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0

Technology CPUs
• CPU 1515SP PC2 T 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0

Fail-safe technology CPUs

• CPU 1515SP PC2 TF 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 7
Introduction
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2

1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2

The following additional documentation is required to use the CPU 1515SP PC2:
● Operating instructions CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF), CPU 1507S (F) Version 2.5
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109740725)
● STEP 7 and WinCC Engineering V15 system manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755202)
● ET 200SP distributed I/O system manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)
● ET 200SP server module manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531)
● SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126)
● SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPUs
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109478599)
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

8 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Introduction
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 9
Introduction
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

10 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Introduction
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the
TIA Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 11
Introduction
1.2 Information about third-party software updates

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet.

1.2 Information about third-party software updates

This product contains third-party software. Siemens accepts liability with respect to
updates/patches for the third-party software only when these are distributed by Siemens in
the context of a Software Update Service contract or officially approved by Siemens.
Otherwise, updates/patches are installed at the user's own risk. You can find more
information about our software update service offer under
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/licenses/software-update-
service/Pages/Default.aspx).

1.3 Notes on protecting administrator accounts

A user with administrator rights has extensive access and manipulation possibilities.
Therefore, make sure that the administrator account is adequately protected to prevent
unauthorized changes. To do this, set secure passwords and use a standard user account
for regular operation. Other measures, such as the use of security policies, should be
applied as required.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

12 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
Safety information 2
2.1 Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 13
Safety information
2.2 General safety instructions

2.2 General safety instructions

WARNING
Life-endangering voltage when control cabinet is open
If the device is installed in a control cabinet, areas or components can be under life-
endangering voltage when the control cabinet is open.
Contact with these areas or components may lead to death through electric shock.
Switch off the power before opening the control cabinet.

If the device is operated in a machine in accordance with the machinery directive, the
provisions of the guideline 2006/42/EC apply.

Safe operation of a plant

NOTICE
Protective measures
To ensure safe operation of a plant, you have to take suitable IT security measures, for
example, network segmentation.
Seal the cover to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the CPU 1515SP PC2
from unauthorized access.
For more information on Industrial Security, refer to the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

If you have questions about whether it is permissible to install the device in the planned
environment, please contact your service representative.

Repairs

WARNING
Damage caused by opening the device
Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial
damage to equipment or endanger the user.
Only authorized personnel are permitted to repair the device.

You can find more information on the repair in the section Sending device in for repair
(Page 63).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

14 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Safety information
2.2 General safety instructions

ESD guidelines
Modules containing electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) can be identified by the following
label:

Strictly follow the guidelines mentioned below when handling modules which are sensitive to
ESD:
● Before working with modules with ESD, you need to ensure that you are free of
electrostatic charge (e.g. by touching a grounded object).
● All devices and tools must be free of static charge.
● Always pull the mains connector and disconnect the battery before installing or removing
modules which are sensitive to ESD.
● Handle modules fitted with ESDs only by their edges.
● Do not touch any connector pins or conductors on modules containing ESDs.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 15
Safety information
2.3 Notes on use

2.3 Notes on use

WARNING
Hazards at an unprotected machine or plant
According to the results of a risk analysis, hazards can occur at an unprotected machine.
The hazards may lead to personal injury.
According to the risk analysis, the risk of injury to persons can be countered with the
following measures:
• Additional protective equipment at the machine or plant. In this case, the programming,
parameter assignment and wiring of the I/O used, in particular, must be performed in
accordance with the safety criteria (SIL, PL or Cat.) ascertained by means of an
appropriate risk analysis.
• Use of the device for its intended purpose, which can be established by performing a
functional test on the plant. This allows errors in programming, parameter assignment
and wiring to be detected.
• Documentation of the test results which can be entered, if required, into the relevant
safety certificates.

NOTICE
Ambient conditions
Ambient conditions for which the device is not suitable can lead to faults or damage the
device.
Note the following:
• Only operate the device in enclosed areas. If you do not comply with this instruction, the
warranty becomes void.
• Only operate the device in accordance with the ambient conditions given in the technical
specifications.
• Protect the device from dust, moisture and heat.
• Do not expose the device to direct sunlight or other strong sources of light.
• The device must not be used in places with more difficult operating conditions through
corrosive vapors or gases without taking additional protective measures, for example,
supply of clean air.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

16 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
Areas of application 3
3.1 Areas of application of fail-safe CPUs

Areas of application
F-CPUs are mainly designed for personal and machine protection. In addition to the safety
program, you can also program standard applications. You can operate the F-CPUs in safety
mode or in standard mode.

Reference
Information on the use of F-CPUs in safety mode is available in the programming and
operating manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126).
You can find information on using the CPU 1505SP (F) Software Controller in the associated
manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740725) and in the
F-product information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478599).

3.2 Areas of application of technology CPUs

Areas of application
Areas of application of T-CPUs are motion control applications such as gearing and
camming as well as control of kinematics. Due to the supported technology functions, the
S7-1500T CPUs are suitable for controlling packaging machines, converting applications,
assembly automation, etc.
You can operate the TF-CPUs in safety mode or in standard mode.

Reference
You can find information on using the T-CPUs in the function manual SIMATIC S7-1500T
Motion Control (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109749263).
You can find information on using the T-CPUs in the function manual SIMATIC S7-1500T
kinematics functions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109749264).
You can find information on using the F-CPUs and TF-CPUs in safety mode in the product
information for SIMATIC S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPUs
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109478599).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 17
Product overview 4
4.1 Field of application

Article number
The article number depends on the pre-installed S7-1500 Software Controller and
HMI Runtime.
You can find an overview of the article numbers in the section Scope of validity of the
documentation (Page 6).

View of the module

The following figure shows the CPU 1515SP PC2:

Figure 4-1 CPU 1515SP PC2 with supplied accessories

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

18 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Product overview
4.2 Characteristics

4.2 Characteristics
The CPU 1515SP PC2 is a PC-based automation device in the design of the ET 200SP. It is
used for control and visualization purposes. The supplied IPC DiagBase software provides
basic diagnostics functions and supports you in handling the BIOS.

General characteristics
● A removable CFast card with the following pre-installations is used as storage medium:
– Windows 10 IoT Enterprise operating system (64-bit)
– S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP, CPU 1505SP F, CPU 1505SP T,
CPU 1505SP TF
– Optionally with HMI: WinCC Runtime Advanced as of V15
● Interfaces:
– An interface for the exchangeable ET 200SP BusAdapters for connection of
PROFINET IO (2 ports) Accessories/spare parts (Page 123)
– An interface for connecting devices using Industrial Ethernet (Gigabit Ethernet)
– 4 interfaces for USB devices (2 x USB 3.0 and 2 x USB 2.0)
– A DisplayPort interface (DPP) for a monitor
– A sealable slot for the CFast card
– A slot for an SD/MMC card as additional optional drive
● Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope
of delivery.
● The CPU 1515SP PC2 is suitable for use in industrial environments:
– Compact design
– Fan-less operation
– High robustness
● The CPU 1515SP PC2 complies with IP 20 degree of protection and is intended for
installation in a control cabinet.

Additional information
You can find more information on the system versions and ordering options in the section
Scope of validity of the documentation (Page 6).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 19
Product overview
4.3 Sample configuration

4.3 Sample configuration

Configuration
The CPU 1515SP PC2 is mounted on a mounting rail according to EN 60715. A modular
system is formed with ET 200SP modules in the central rack. You can also expand the
CPU 1515SP PC2 with fail-safe I/O modules.
You can use the CPU 1515SP PC2 as PROFINET IO controller. The PROFINET IO devices
are connected via the ports of the X1 PN(LAN) interface using a SIMATIC BusAdapter.
Devices can be connected via Industrial Ethernet using the integrated interface
X2 PN/IE(LAN).
The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

20 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Product overview
4.3 Sample configuration

Sample configuration
The following figure shows a sample configuration with the CPU 1515SP PC2:

① CPU 1515SP PC2, I/O modules, server module, BusAdapter

② ET 200AL modules with ET-Connection
③ Flat Panel - Wide Screen Display
④ USB devices: Keyboard, mouse, printer ...
⑤ Industrial Thin Client ITC
⑥ SCALANCE W786
⑦ Field PG
⑧ PROFINET IO device
⑨ Camera
⑩ PC/Programming device
Figure 4-2 Configuration example with the CPU 1515SP PC2

Reference
You can find more information about configuring the ET 200AL modules in the system
manual ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 21
Product overview
4.4 Components

4.4 Components

Components of the CPU 1515SP PC2

The following table provides an overview of the components of the CPU 1515SP PC2:

Table 4- 1 Components of the CPU 1515SP PC2

Component Function Figure

Mounting rail in accordance The mounting rail is the rack for the
with EN 60715 CPU 1515SP PC2.

CPU 1515SP PC2 CPU with strain relief and white refer-
ence labels

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

22 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Product overview
4.4 Components

Component Function Figure

BusAdapter The BusAdapter allows free selection
of the connection technology for
PROFINET IO.
The following versions are available
for CPU 1515SP PC2:
• For standard RJ45 connector
(BA 2×RJ45) ①
• For direct connection of the bus
cable (BA 2×FC) ②
• For POF/PCF fiber-optic cable
(BA 2xSCRJ) ③
• As media converter for POF/PCF
fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45
connector (BA SCRJ/RJ45) ④
• As media converter for POF/PCF
fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connec-
tion of the bus cable
(BA SCRJ/FC) ⑤
• For glass fiber-optic cable
(BA 2xLC) ⑥
• As media converter for glass fiber-
optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 con-
nector (BA LC/RJ45) ⑦
• As media converter for glass fiber-
optic cable ⇔ direct connection of
the bus cable (BA LC/FC) ⑧
For mixed configuration with an
ET 200AL , you require the
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC ①
(plugged into the BaseUnit BU-Send).
Connect the bus cable for ET-
Connection to the BusAdapter
BA-Send 1xFC.

Server module The server module completes the

configuration of the
CPU 1515SP PC2 with I/O modules.
The server module is included in the
CPU's scope of delivery.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 23
Product overview
4.5 Operator controls and connection elements

4.5 Operator controls and connection elements

View of the module
The following figure shows the operator controls and connection elements of the
CPU 1515SP PC2:

① Reference identification labels

② Mounting rail release
③ Labeling strips
④ LEDs for the current operating state and diagnostic status of the CPU 1505SP
⑤ Power LED
⑥ Server module
⑦ X50: Slot for the CFast card (flash memory), sealable
⑧ Mode selector
⑨ X51: Slot for an optional SD/MMC card
⑩ X80: Connector for 24 V DC supply voltage
⑪ Cooling fins
⑫ X1 PROFINET (LAN): Slot for BusAdapter for connection of PROFINET IO;
Status display for PROFINET
⑬ X2 PN/IE(LAN): GbE Ethernet connection with integrated display
⑭ Strain relief
⑮ X62, X63: 2 x USB 2.0 ports
⑯ X60, X61: 2 x USB 3.0 ports
⑰ X70: DisplayPort interface (DPP)
Figure 4-3 View of the CPU 1515SP PC2

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

24 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Product overview
4.5 Operator controls and connection elements

Slot for CFast card

The operating system, Runtime software and project are installed on the supplied
SIMATIC CFast card. The CFast card is the only mass storage device of the
CPU 1515SP PC2.

Note
Unauthorized access
Seal the cover of the slot to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the
CPU 1515SP PC2 from unauthorized access and manipulation.

Slot for SD/MMC card

You can use a SIMATIC SD or MMC card as additional storage drive. This drive can be used
to store data via Windows, for example a backup, but not the operating system, the Runtime
software or the project.
Permitted SD cards: SDHC up to 32 GB, SDXC up to 2 TB.

USB connections
● 2 x USB 3.0 with Imax = 1 A per interface
● 2 x USB 2.0 with Imax = 0.5 A per interface

MAC addresses
The MAC address consists of a 3-byte manufacturer ID and a 3-byte device ID (consecutive
number).
Each device is already assigned four MAC addresses in the factory. The front of the
CPU 1515SP PC2 is lasered with the MAC address 1 and 4. With the MAC addresses 2 and
3, the consecutive numbers are incremented. If, for example, the first MAC address is
08-00-06-6B-80-C0, the second MAC address is 08-00-06-6B-80-C1.

Table 4- 2 Assignment of the MAC addresses

Assignment
MAC address 1 X2 PN/IE(LAN)
• Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices
• Lasered on the front of the CPU (start of the number range)
MAC address 2 X1 PROFINET (LAN)
• Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices
MAC address 3 Port X1 P1 (required for LLDP, for example)
MAC address 4 Port X1 P2 R (required for LLDP, for example)
• Lasered on the front of the CPU (end of the number range)

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 25
Product overview
4.5 Operator controls and connection elements

Connector for supply voltage

The CPU 1515SP PC2 is equipped with a 2-pin connection terminal for the power supply.
The connection plug for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU is shipped from the
factory.

Mode selector
Use the mode selector to set the CPU operating mode.

Table 4- 3 Mode selector positions

Position Meaning Description

RUN Operating mode RUN1 The CPU is processing the user program.
STOP Operating mode STOP1 The CPU is not processing the user program.
The outputs are set to a "safe" state.
MRES Memory reset For active S7-1500 software controller2 only:
CPU memory reset
1 RUN and STOP indicate the selected operating state. The RUN and STOP LEDs indicate the actual operating mode of
the CPU 1515SP PC2.
2 See manual S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F), CPU 1507S (F) Version 2

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

26 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Product overview
4.6 Scope of delivery

4.6 Scope of delivery

Note
The device always comes with the CPU 1515SP PC2 label with article number
6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0, regardless of the order options.

The following components are included in the scope of delivery of the CPUs:
● CPU 1515SP PC2 basic device
● Strain relief with fixing screws
● Server module
● CFast card with the following pre-installations:
– Windows 10 IOT Enterprise operating system (64-bit)
– S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP
– Optional only for CPU 1515SP PC2/CPU 1515SP PC2 F: WinCC RT Advanced as
of V15
● Restore USB stick for image restore
● Windows-Certificate of Authenticity (CoA)
● Certificate of License (CoL)
● Only for CPU 1515SP PC2 (F) with HMI and CPU 1515SP PC2 T/ TF: USB stick with
SIMATIC license keys
● Product information

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 27
Application planning 5
5.1 Basics

Introduction
The CPU 1515SP PC2 is open equipment. This means you may only set up the CPU in
enclosures, cabinets or electrical equipment rooms and in a dry environment (IP20 degree of
protection). The housings, cabinets and electrical operating rooms must guarantee
protection against electric shock and spread of fire. The requirements regarding mechanical
strength must also be observed. The housings, cabinets, and electrical operating rooms
must not be accessible without a key or tool. Access may only be possible for instructed or
authorized personnel.

Installation location
Install the CPU 1515SP PC2 in a suitable enclosure/control cabinet with at least IP54 degree
of protection according to EN 60529 and take into consideration the ambient conditions for
operating the devices.

Installation position
You can install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in any position. The preferred mounting
position is horizontal mounting on a vertical wall.
Depending on the mounting position, restrictions on ambient temperature and maximum
configuration apply to the CPU 1515SP PC2.

NOTICE
Damage to the modules
Modules can be damaged if exposed to ambient temperatures higher than permitted.
The following ambient temperatures must not be exceeded during operation:
• Horizontal mounting
60 °C for an installation with up to 32 I/O modules.
55 °C for an installation with up to 64 I/O modules.
• Vertical mounting
50 °C for an installation with up to 32 I/O modules.

Additional information can be found in the section Mechanical and climatic environmental
conditions (Page 74).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

28 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Application planning
5.2 Unpacking the device

5.2 Unpacking the device

When unpacking
When unpacking, make sure to check the following:
● Check packaging and contents for visible damage from transport. Damaged or
incomplete devices should never be commissioned.
● Check the delivery for correctness and completeness.
Please inform your Siemens contact partner should you notice any irregularities.
● Keep the supplied documentation and licenses. They belong to the device and are the
proof that you have purchased the software preinstalled on the CFast card.
Documentation and licenses are required for initial commissioning and for any questions
that arise.
● Keep the original packaging in case the device needs to be transported again.
● Note the identification data (Page 30) of the device.

NOTICE
Damage to the device during transport and storage
If a device is transported or stored without packaging, it is unprotected from shocks,
vibrations, pressure and moisture. Damaged packaging indicates that environmental
conditions have already had a significant impact on the device.
The device might be damaged.
Do not dispose of the original packaging. Pack the device for transport and storage.

NOTICE
Damage to the device caused by condensation
If the device was exposed to low temperatures or extreme variations in temperature during
transport, this may cause moisture to build up on or in the device (condensation). Please
note the specified mechanical and climatic ambient conditions (Page 74).
Moisture can cause short-circuits in the electrical circuits and damage the device.
Proceed as follows to avoid damage:
• Store the device in dry conditions.
• Make sure it adapts to room temperature before commissioning.
• Do not expose the device to direct heat radiation from a heater.
• If condensation has developed, wait until the device is completely dry before you switch
it on.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 29
Application planning
5.3 Identification data

WARNING
Electric shock and fire hazard from damaged device
A damaged device can carry dangerous voltage and trigger a fire in the machine or plant. A
damaged device has unpredictable properties and states.
Death or severe injury could occur.
Make sure that the damaged device is not installed and commissioned accidentally. Label
the damaged device correspondingly and keep it locked up. Have the device repaired
without delay.

5.3 Identification data

The identification data can be used to clearly identify the device when a repair is necessary.
Note the following data:
● Printed on the nameplate of the device, please find the following information:
– Article number
– Serial number
– The first and the last MAC address
● Depending on the scope of delivery, the "Certificate-of-License" is provided as proof of
license. This document is valid for the following product:
– S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP
– S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F/T/TF
– WinCC Runtime Advanced V15
● The "Microsoft Windows Product Key" can be found on the "Certificate of Authenticity"
label.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

30 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Application planning
5.4 Installation location

5.4 Installation location

Introduction
Install the CPU 1515SP PC2 in a suitable housing/control cabinet with sufficient mechanical
strength, fire protection and at least IP54 degree of protection according to EN 60529, and
take into consideration the ambient conditions for operating the devices.

Mounting rail
You must ground the mounting rail separately in the control cabinet. Exception: If you install
the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground the rail
separately.

Note
If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to vibration and shock loads, both ends of
the ET 200SP system assembly must be mechanically fixed to the mounting rail (e.g using
8WA1010-1PH01 ground terminals). This measure prevents the ET 200SP from shifting to
the side.

Note
If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to high vibration and shock load, we
recommend that you screw the mounting rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approx.
200 mm.

Suitable surface finishes are:

● Steel strip in accordance with Appendix A of EN 60715 or
● Tinned steel strip. We recommend the use of the mounting rails in section (Page 123).

Note
Mounting rails of other manufacturers
If you use mounting rails from other manufacturers, ensure that they have the properties
required for your climatic and mechanical ambient conditions.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 31
Application planning
5.4 Installation location

Minimum clearances
Make sure to maintain the following minimum clearances when installing the
CPU 1515SP PC2.

Figure 5-1 Minimum clearances

Installation rules
● After the CPU 1515SP PC2, there is a BaseUnit BU..D with incoming supply voltage L+
(light-colored terminal box).
● This is followed by BaseUnits BU..B (with dark-colored terminal box).
● The respective corresponding I/O modules can be connected to the BaseUnits.
Suitable combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules can be found in the ET 200SP
System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).
● The server module completes the installation.

Note
Install the CPU 1515SP PC2 only with disconnected supply voltage.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

32 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Application planning
5.5 Hardware configuration

5.5 Hardware configuration

As soon as one of the following rules applies, the maximum configuration has been reached.

Maximum mechanical configuration

Backplane bus length: Maximum 1 m mounting width (without CPU 1515SP PC2, including
server module)

Electrical maximum configuration

The number of operable I/O modules of a potential group is limited by the
● Power consumption of the I/O modules
● Power consumption of the components supplied via these I/O modules
The maximum current-carrying capability of the terminals on the BaseUnit L+/ground is 10 A.

USB load
When using the CPU 1515SP PC2 with the maximum configuration, the USB load must also
be considered:
● Horizontal mounting
– Ambient temperature of 0 to 60 °C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 4 x low-current
(500 mA) USB load
– Ambient temperature of 0 to 55 °C with maximum 64 I/O modules and 2 x high-current
(900 mA) + 2 x low-current (500 mA) USB load
● Vertical mounting
– Ambient temperature of 0 to 50 °C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 4 x low-current
(500 mA) USB load

Address space
The address space is predefined. However, you can adjust the address space in the user
program.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 33
Installation 6
6.1 Installing the device

Requirements
The mounting rail is fitted.

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only to fix the strain relief and dismantle the BusAdapter)

Fixing strain relief

Fix the strain relief to the top and bottom of the left-hand side of the CPU 1515SP PC2 with
the supplied screws.

Installing the CPU 1515SP PC2

1. Install the CPU on the mounting rail.
2. Swivel the CPU back until you hear the mounting rail release click into place
3. To check that the CPU has correctly clicked into place, pull on the underside of the
enclosure.

Figure 6-1 Installing the CPU 1515SP PC2

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

34 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Installation
6.1 Installing the device

Uninstalling the CPU 1515SP PC2

The BaseUnits with the I/O modules are located to the right of the CPU 1515SP PC2:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU.
2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit and, at the same time, move
the CPU parallel to the left until it comes off the rest of the module group.
Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the CPU.
3. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CPU, swivel the CPU out of the
mounting rail.

Note
It is not necessary to remove the BusAdapter from the CPU 1515SP PC2.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 35
Wiring 7
7.1 Notes on connection

Note
Rules and regulations for operation
Observe the information contained in the Wiring section in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942) and
in the function manual Designing interference-free controllers function manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566).

NOTICE
Risk of hazardous system states
If you remove and insert I/O devices with the supply voltage switched on, this can result in
hazardous system states.
Injury to persons and damage to the machine or plant could result.
Therefore, I/O devices can only be inserted and removed when the supply voltage is
switched off.
Only connect I/O devices which are suitable for use in industrial environments according to
EN 61000-6-2 / IEC 61000-6-2.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

36 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Wiring
7.2 Terminal and block diagram

7.2 Terminal and block diagram

Block diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram for the CPU 1515SP PC2.

① Switch X1 PN(LAN) PROFINET interface X1

② Electronics P1 PROFINET interface X1 Port 1
③ Backplane bus interface P2 PROFINET interface X1 Port 2
④ Internal supply voltage L+ 24 V DC supply voltage
⑤ Mode selector M Ground
X50 CFast card LK1, LK2 LED Link TX/RX
X51 SD/MMC card LK3 LED Link
X60, X61 USB 3.0 interfaces, max. 0.9 A R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green)
X62, X63 USB 2.0 interfaces, max. 0.5 A ER ERROR LED (red)
X70 DPP interface MT MAINT LED (yellow)
X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage PWR POWER LED (yellow/green)
X2 PN/IE(LAN) Ethernet interface X2
Figure 7-1 Block diagram for the CPU 1515SP PC2

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 37
Wiring
7.3 Electrical configuration

7.3 Electrical configuration

Non-isolated configuration

Note
Unlike the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the CPU 1515SP PC2 can only be operated
with a non-isolated configuration.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

38 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Wiring
7.3 Electrical configuration

The following figure shows the overall configuration of a CPU 1515SP PC2 with power
supply from a TN-S system. The power supply supplies the CPU 1515SP PC2 and the load
circuit for the 24 V DC modules.
For the CPU 1515SP PC2, there is a fixed connection between the ground infeed terminal
and the contact springs to the mounting rail. You must ground the mounting rail separately in
the control cabinet.

① Master switch
② Short-circuit and overload protection
③ Load current supply (galvanic isolation)
④ This connection is established automatically with the CPU 1515SP PC2.
The represented layout of the power connections does not correspond to the actual layout; it was
chosen for demonstration purposes only.

Figure 7-2 Connecting the load voltage reference potential

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 39
Wiring
7.4 Connecting devices to networks

7.4 Connecting devices to networks

The following options are available for integrating devices into existing or planned system
environments and networks.

Ethernet
You can use the integrated Ethernet interface X2 PN/IE(LAN) (10/100/1000 Mbps) for
communication and data exchange with automation devices, for example, SIMATIC S7.
Only ASCII characters are permitted in the name of the X2 PN/IE(LAN) interface in the
TIA Portal, e.g. PROFINET_2.
You need suitable software to do this: STEP 7, WinCC, SIMATIC NET.

Note
Use a Category 5e Ethernet cable (Cat-5e cable) for operation with 1000 Mbps.

PROFINET
PROFINET operation is possible via the X1 PN(LAN) interface and the approved
BusAdapter.

PROFIBUS
The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

40 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Wiring
7.5 Securing cables

7.5 Securing cables

The strain relief for connecting cables prevents the USB cables and PROFINET connectors
detaching from the CPU 1515SP PC2. The strain relief is included in the scope of delivery.

WARNING
Flying sparks due to loose cables
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong
oscillation and high vibrating loads.
Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties.

Requirements
● The strain relief is fixed to the CPU.
● The CPU is installed.

Procedure
Secure the USB and PROFINET cables to the strain relief using cable ties.

Figure 7-3 Secured cables

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 41
Commissioning 8
8.1 Notes on commissioning

WARNING
Improper commissioning in hazardous areas
Device failure or risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
• Do not commission the device unless it is fully mounted and connected according to the
specifications in the section Wiring (Page 36).
• Before commissioning, please consider the effects on other devices in the plant.

NOTICE
Condensation in the device
Damage to the device due to condensation if the temperature between transport or storage
and the installation point differs.
Before commissioning the device, leave it to stand until it is dry.

NOTICE
Data loss
Data loss may occur if write filters are used incorrectly.
Therefore, note the information on write filters.
The following configurable write filter is available under Windows 10:
• Unified Write Filter (UWF) (Page 57)

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

42 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Commissioning
8.2 Basic commissioning procedure

8.2 Basic commissioning procedure

Step Execution Section

1 Requirements 8.2.1 (Page 43)
2 Preparing commissioning 8.2.2 (Page 43)
3 Commissioning procedure 8.2.3 (Page 43)

8.2.1 Requirements
The following requirements must be met before you commission the Open Controller for the
first time:
● The CPU 1515SP PC2 is mounted.
● The supplied CFast card is inserted.
● No data carriers are connected via USB.

8.2.2 Preparing commissioning

Procedure
When the requirements are met, proceed as follows with the commissioning:
1. Connect a monitor using a DisplayPort cable.
2. Connect a keyboard and a mouse to the CPU via USB.

Result
The Open Controller is prepared for commissioning.

8.2.3 Commissioning procedure

When you start up your CPU 1515SP PC2 for the first time, basic settings and the
administrator password are queried. The device is then automatically set up for the operating
system that is installed on the CFast card. Restart the device after the operating system has
been set up.

Note
The initial commissioning is not possible with a Multitouch panel, as the Multitouch driver is
only available after the installation of the operating system.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 43
Commissioning
8.2 Basic commissioning procedure

Procedure
When the requirements (Page 43) are met and the preparations for commissioning
(Page 43) are complete, proceed as follows with the commissioning:
1. Connect the power supply.
→ The PWR LED lights up yellow first, then green.
→ The device carries out the hardware initialization.
2. Wait until the Siemens logo disappears from the screen.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the device:
– Set <Language>, <Country/region>, <App language>, <Keyboard layout>, <Time
zone for>
– Accept license conditions
– Setting the account
4. Finally, you will be prompted to restart the device.

NOTICE
Faulty installation
If you change the device during the installation, the installation will be disrupted and the
operating system will not be installed correctly. The operational reliability of the device and
the plant is endangered.
Do not switch off the device during the entire installation process.

Information on users/user groups in Windows

A user "Operator" with standard user rights is already created on the Windows system.
The user is in a user group "SIEMENS TIA Engineer". This grants the user the rights to use
the installed SIMATIC software products.
To use the CPU 1515SP PC2 directly, the Windows "Autologon" function is enabled for the
"Operator" user. No password is preset.

Note
When you assign a password, change the entry for the "Autologon" function accordingly
using the Windows user administration.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

44 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Commissioning
8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller

Result
● The Windows 10 IOT Enterprise operating system (64-bit) is installed.
● The "Operator" user is logged on automatically.
● The software controller and WinCC Runtime Advanced, if required, are ready for use.
● For administrative purposes, the "Operator" user can be logged off and the administrator
created during commissioning can be logged on.
● The operating system's start screen is displayed after each startup.

8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller

Step Execution Section

1 Creating the configuration of the Open Controller 8.3.1 (Page 45)
2 Setting the IP address 8.3.2 (Page 46)
3 Changing the properties of the Software Control- 8.3.3 (Page 46)
ler
4 Establishing the HMI connection 8.3.4 (Page 47)
5 Downloading a project to the target system 8.3.5 (Page 47)
6 Transferring the license key 8.3.6 (Page 48)
7 Switching the Open Controller on/off 8.3.7 (Page 50)

8.3.1 Creating the configuration of the Open Controller

Requirements
The following requirements must be met before you can create the configuration of the Open
Controller:
● TIA Portal V15 + HSP 0269 or TIA Portal ≥ V15 SP1 must be installed.
● You have started the TIA Portal and created a new project.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 45
Commissioning
8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller

Creating the configuration

To create the configuration in the TIA Portal, follow these steps:
1. Double-click "Add new device" in the project tree.
2. Select "PC systems > SIMATIC S7 Open Controller > ET 200SP Open Controller >".
3. Select the required device.
4. Select the desired version and click "OK".
The configured Open Controller is displayed in the device view.
5. The following interfaces can be seen in the Open Controller:
– Onboard interface X2 (GB Ethernet Windows interface) that is assigned directly to the
PC station (1 port)
– Exchangeable BusAdapter that is assigned directly to the Software Controller (2 ports)
6. The following preconfigured components can be seen in the device view:
– CPU 1515SP PC2 / CPU 1515SP PC2 F/T/TF: CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) Software
Controller
– CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI / CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI: CPU 1505SP (F) Software
Controller and WinCC Runtime Advanced
7. Insert the server module from the hardware catalog.
The server module forms the termination of the CPU with the I/O modules. If no server
module is configured, the server module is added automatically during compiling.

8.3.2 Setting the IP address

Set the IP address as follows:
● BusAdapter [X1]: The configured IP address becomes effective on the Open Controller
after a download. To go online via the [X1] interface, the configured address must match
the [X1] address entered in the panel of the software controller.
● Onboard interface [X2]: The configured IP address should be identical to the Windows
IP address of the Open Controller.

8.3.3 Changing the properties of the S7-1500 Software Controller

Information on the property of the CPU is available in the Inspector window under
"Properties". You can change these properties if required.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

46 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Commissioning
8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller

8.3.4 Establishing the HMI connection

Procedure
The WinCC RT software is integrated in the SIMATIC HMI devices (e.g.
Basic/Comfort/Mobile Panel) and permits data exchange over HMI connections.
No HMI connection exists between the WinCC RT Advanced software and the
S7-1500 Software Controller at the time of the configuration.
To establish a HMI connection between the WinCC RT Advanced software on the
S7-1500 Software Controller, proceed as follows:
1. In the network view, switch to "Connections".
2. Click on WinCC RT Advanced.
3. Draw a line from the WinCC RT Advanced software to the S7-1500 Software Controller
(e.g. CPU 1505SP) while keeping the mouse button pressed.
A network connection is established between the two devices.

Reference
You can find additional information on configuring an HMI connection in the TIA Portal online
help or in the STEP 7 and WinCC Engineering V15
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109755202) system manual.

8.3.5 Downloading a project to the target system

Key statement
To set up your automation system, you need to download the project data you generated
offline to the connected devices. This project data is generated, for example when
configuring hardware, networks, and connections or when programming the user program or
when creating recipes. The first time you download, the entire project data is downloaded.
During later download operations, only changes are downloaded.
Proceed as follows to download the configuration:
1. Select the complete PC system in the device view.
2. Right-click on the PC system.
3. Select the option you require in the "Download to device" menu command.

Note
Note that the options available to you always depend on the selected device.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 47
Commissioning
8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller

4. Select the interfaces with which you want to establish the online connection to the device.
You have the option of showing all compatible devices by selecting the corresponding
option and clicking the "Start search" command.

Note
The first TIA Portal download must be via the "X2" interface.
Only ASCII characters are permitted in the name of the X2 PN/IE(LAN) interface in the
TIA Portal, e.g. PROFINET_2.

5. Download and compile the project.

The hardware configuration and the first download are now completed.

Reference
Additional information on the possible options for downloading is available in the online help
of the TIA Portal.

8.3.6 Transferring license keys

Licensing the software

For the following products, you need to transfer the product-specific license key with the
Automation License Manager (ALM) before commissioning:
● WinCC RT Advanced incl. PowerTag
● CPU 1505SP T/TF

Note
No license key is required to operate the S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F)
V2.x.

Requirements
● Initial commissioning was successfully completed.
● Windows 10 IoT Enterprise (64-bit) has been started.
● The extended write filter UWF must be deactivated on the CPU 1515SP PC2.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

48 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Commissioning
8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller

Transferring license keys with local configuration

The Automation License Manager is pre-installed on the CPU 1515SP PC2.
Open the software using the icon on the desktop or a menu command.
1. In the Windows start bar, select Start > Siemens Automation > Automation License
Manager.
2. Follow the instructions of the Automation License Manager.

Transferring license keys via programming device/PC

The Automation License Manager is pre-installed on a programming device/PC with STEP 7
and the CPU 1515SP PC2.
1. Connect the CPU 1515SP PC2 to a programming device/PC.
2. Connect the supplied USB stick to the programming device/PC.
3. Select the menu command Start > Siemens Automation > Automation License Manager.
4. Select the menu command Edit > Connect computer and enter the IP address of the
CPU 1515SP PC2.
5. if the option "Forbid license keys transfer from local computer" is disabled on the source
computer, drag the license keys from the USB stick to the system partition C: of the
CPU 1515SP PC2.

Backing up license keys for restore and repair

Note
Loss of license keys
A SIMATIC license key cannot be copied or duplicated. No more license key copies exist on
the USB stick once you have dragged the license keys from the USB stick to your
CPU 1515SP PC2.
Secure your purchased license keys before restoring the delivery state (Restore) or in the
case of repair. To do this, move the license keys to a USB stick and keep this stick in a safe
place.

If an error occurs on your license keys on the CPU 1515SP PC2, please contact your
Siemens representative. Make sure to have the "Certificate of License" (CoL) to hand.

Reference
For additional information on licenses, refer to the Automation License Manager manual.
You can find the manual on the CPU 1515SP PC2 under Start > All Programs > Siemens
Automation > Documentation and on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56956174).
You can find more information on the UWF write filter in the section: Protective function for
data carriers (Page 57).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 49
Commissioning
8.3 Initial commissioning an open controller

8.3.7 Switching the Open Controller on/off

Requirements
Initial commissioning was successfully completed.

Switching on the CPU 1515SP PC2

Proceed as follows to switch on the CPU 1515SP PC2:
1. Switch on the power supply of the CPU.
The Boot Manager GRUB2DOS starts.
2. Select the mode in which the CPU 1515SP PC2 should start:
– Default: with the Windows operating system and the S7-1500 software controller
– Only with the Windows operating system (e.g. with updates)

Switching off the CPU 1515SP PC2

Proceed as follows to switch off the CPU 1515SP PC2:
1. Use the Windows function Start > Power > Shut down to switch off.
The PWR LED changes from green to yellow.
The Windows function shuts down the Windows operating system and the S7-1500
software controller.
If the device will not be used for a longer period after the shutdown, de-energize the device.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

50 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
Interrupt, error and system messages 9
9.1 Status and error display

LED display
The following figure shows the LED displays of the CPU 1515SP PC2.

① RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green LED)

② ERROR LED (red LED)
③ MAINT LED (yellow LED)
④ POWER LED (yellow/green LED)

Figure 9-1 LEDs of the CPU 1515SP PC2

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 51
Interrupt, error and system messages
9.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LED displays with active S7-1500 Software Controller

The CPU 1515SP PC2 has three LEDs to indicate the current operating state and
diagnostics status.
The following table shows the meaning of the color combinations of the LED displays in
connection with the S7-1500 Software Controller.
Table 9- 1 Meaning of the LED displays

RUN/STOP ERROR LED MAINT LED Meaning

LED
POWER OFF
LED off LED off LED off Starting of the CPU 1515 SP PC2 in "Windows
only" mode
No power supply.
Software Controller of the CPU 1515SP PC2:
• is not downloaded
• is in the operating state Power OFF
Use of the hardware LEDs was disabled (con-
figuration via TIA Portal).
An error has occurred.
LED off LED flashes LED off
red
Software Controller of the CPU 1515SP PC2 is
LED green LED off LED off in RUN mode.
A diagnostics event is pending.
LED green LED flashes LED off
red
Maintenance demanded for the plant.
LED green LED off LED lights up The affected hardware must be exchanged
yellow within a short period.
Maintenance required for the plant.
LED green LED off LED flashes You must exchange the affected hardware
yellow within a foreseeable period.
Firmware update successfully completed

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

52 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Interrupt, error and system messages
9.1 Status and error display

RUN/STOP ERROR LED MAINT LED Meaning

LED
Software controller of the CPU is in the operat-
LED lights up LED off LED off ing state STOP.
yellow
The user program is causing an error.
LED lights up LED flashes LED flashes
yellow red yellow
CPU is performing internal activities during
LED off LED off STOP, e.g. ramp-up after STOP.
LED flashes
yellow Loading the user program
Startup (transition from STOP → RUN)
LED flashes LED off LED off
yellow/green
Startup (CPU booting)

LED flashes LED flashes LED flashes Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a module.
yellow/green red yellow LED flashing test
CPU defective
LED flashes LED flashes LED flashes
green red red

POWER LED

Table 9- 2 POWER LED

POWER LED Meaning

No supply voltage or supply voltage too low
LED off
Supply voltage present;
LED lights up yellow running through BIOS phase;
operating system is shut down
Supply voltage present;
LED green Booting or operation of the operating system

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 53
Functions 10
10.1 Monitoring functions

10.1.1 Requirements

Introduction
The CPU 1515SP PC2 has monitoring functions that you can use with the corresponding
monitoring software.
The following display, monitoring and control functions are available:
● Temperature monitoring
● Monitoring of drives with S.M.A.R.T. functionality
● Operating hours counter (information on the total runtime)
● HW LED status display (RUN/STOP, ERROR, MAINT)

Monitoring software
● SIMATIC IPC DiagBase
The SIMATIC DiagBase software is included in the scope of delivery of the
CPU 1515SP PC2.
Use the DiagBase Management Explorer application to obtain a clearer overview for
monitoring. The DiagBase Alarm Manager notifies you of individual alarms.

Note
For additional information, refer to the online help for the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase
software.

● SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor

The SIMATIC DiagMonitor software is provided on a CD. You can find the order number
of the license in the section Accessories/Spare parts (Page 123).
Potential system failures are detected and reported in good time with the diagnostics and
alerting software. The software is also used for remote diagnostics.
The software contains:
– The software for the stations to be monitored
– A library for creating your own applications

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

54 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Functions
10.2 Retentive memory NVRAM

10.1.2 Temperature monitoring

Three temperature sensors monitor the temperature at different locations of the
CPU 1515SP PC2:
● Processor temperature
● Temperature in the vicinity of the RAM ICs/blocks
● Temperature of the basic module
If one of the temperature values exceeds the set temperature threshold, the temperature
monitoring triggers a temperature error. The temperature error activates the IPC DiagBase
and/or IPC DiagMonitor software.
The temperature error remains stored until the temperatures fall below the temperature
threshold again and it is reset using one of the following measures:
● Acknowledgment of the error message by the monitoring software
● Restart of the device

10.1.3 Monitoring drives

The S.M.A.R.T. function is a monitoring function of storage media. With this function,
different parameters are queried in order to detect possible defects at an early stage. This
information is shown to the user with corresponding software.

10.1.4 Operating hours counter

You can use an operating hours counter for a variety of applications:
● For calculating the operating time of the CPU
● For calculating the operating time of controlled equipment
You can find more information about the operating hours counter in the "Operating hours
counter" group in the "Diagnostics" folder of the Online and Diagnostics view in the TIA
Portal.

10.2 Retentive memory NVRAM

Retentive memory is non-volatile memory for saving a limited quantity of data in the event of
power failure.
The data defined as retentive is stored in retentive memory. This data is retained beyond a
power-off or power failure.
A corresponding function is implemented in the S7-1500 software controller to allow NVRAM
to be used there. This saves up to 410 KB of data in non-volatile data memory in the case of
power failure. This function can be set on the engineering station in the TIA Portal.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 55
Functions
10.3 BIOS setup

10.3 BIOS setup

BIOS setup
The boot order can be set using the BIOS Setup.

Changing the device configuration

The device configuration is preset for working with the supplied software.
Only change the set values if you have made technical changes to your device.

10.4 Power options

A power plan with the name SIMATIC S7 is set as default on the CPU 1515SP PC2. This
ensures that the CPU does not deviate from its maximum clock rate in order not to endanger
the real-time capability of the software controller.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

56 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Functions
10.5 "Unified Write Filter (UWF)" write filter

10.5 "Unified Write Filter (UWF)" write filter

General information on the UWF write filter

The Unified Write Filter (UWF) is a configurable write filter which provides the CFast cards
with a write protection.
External removable media such as USB sticks and other flash drives that are recognized as
removable media by the operating system are not supported.

NOTICE
Data loss on CFast cards
The number of write cycles on CFast cards is limited due to technical reasons.
To prevent data loss, the CFast card must therefore be provided with special protection.
Use the UWF write filter to extend the service life of the CFast card and to avoid a possible
failure of the CPU 1515SP PC2.

Note
Write protection is deactivated in the delivery state!
Note that the work memory is reduced when UWF is activated.

NOTICE
Risk of data loss when UWF is activated
If UWF is activated, all changes made to data carriers which are write protected by the
UWF after the boot operation may be lost when the device is shut down.
Proceed as follows to prevent this situation:
• Make changes to data carriers only when write protection is disabled.

Reference
You can find additional information on the UWF write filter on the Internet in the online help
for Microsoft® Windows® 10.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 57
Maintenance 11
11.1 Backing up and restoring data

Introduction
The operating system and the Runtime software are located on the supplied restore USB
stick. You can use the USB stick to restore the delivery state of the CPU 1515SP PC2.
If you use functions from the Restore menu, you must acknowledge a security message. For
the functions, 72 hours are available in each case. If the functions are not completed within
this time period, CPU 1515SP PC2 is automatically restarted without a further prompt.
If you want to back up your projects, save them to the D: partition of the CFast card.

SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator

You can also create your own image of your CFast card. This contains the operating system,
the Runtime software and the complete project loaded from the TIA Portal.
We recommend the SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator (≥ V3.5) software tool to back
up data under Windows. It provides for easy backup and fast restore of the contents of the
CFAST card and of individual partitions (images).

Note
Data can only be backed up to a network drive with the SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition
Creator software using the X2 PN/IE(LAN) interface.

You can procure the SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator:
● Via the Siemens online ordering system.
● Pre-installed on the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives.
For additional information, please refer to the corresponding product documentation.

SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive

You can use the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives for data backup and restore.
You obtain these through the Siemens online ordering system.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

58 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Maintenance
11.2 Partitions in the delivery state

11.2 Partitions in the delivery state

Partitioning the CFast card

The following partitions are set up on the CFast card by default:

Partition Name 30 GB CFast card File system

C: SYSTEM 19.5 GB NTFS
D: DATA 8 GB NTFS
- - 0.4 GB RAW
- WinCCMB 0.04 GB NTFS

Note
Partitions under Windows 10 IoT Enterprise (64-bit)
The partitions need to be set again if they are faulty or if the partitioning is to be changed.

NOTICE
CPU volume for S7-1500 Software Controller (0.4 GB RAW)
Do not change the CPU volume for software controllers.
This is the only way to ensure that the software controller continues to operate without
error.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 59
Maintenance
11.3 Restoring the delivery state

11.3 Restoring the delivery state

Introduction
The entire image of your operating system and your Runtime software are located on the
supplied restore USB stick. You can use the SIMATIC restore menu to restore the delivery
state of the CPU 1515SP PC2.

Note
Restoring existing system partition
If your projects are stored on partition D: you can use the "Restore existing system partition"
option to restore partition C: with the operating system and the Runtime software, without
your project data being affected.

Note
Using Multitouch panels
The restoration of the original software is not possible with a Multitouch panel, because the
Multitouch driver is not available until after the installation of the operating system.

Requirements
To restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC2, the following is required:
● the supplied CFast card
● the supplied restore USB stick

NOTICE
Data loss
During restoration of the system to delivery state, the CFast card is completely erased and
re-formatted, and is then loaded with the original software. All subsequently modified or
added data, programs, license keys and partitions on the CFast card will be lost.
Back up the data of the CPU 1515SP PC2 after you have assigned parameters to the
module and if you have made changes to the configuration.

NOTICE
Loss of license keys
Back up the license keys before the restore by dragging these to your USB stick via
Automation License Manager.
After the restart of the CPU 1515SP PC2, transfer the license keys back to the device via
the Automation License Manager.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

60 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Maintenance
11.3 Restoring the delivery state

Restoring the delivery state of the CPU 1515SP PC2 with restore USB stick

Before the restore

1. Connect a monitor and a keyboard to the CPU.
2. Switch off the power supply of the CPU.
3. Remove all USB drives from the CPU.
4. Connect the restore USB stick to a USB port.
5. Switch on the power supply of the CPU.
→ The CPU is started.
6. Press <Esc> to start the Boot Manager.
7. Select the list entry for the USB stick in the Boot Manager.
8. After the prompt, confirm the start by pressing any key.
→ The loading process is displayed (Windows logo).
→ The SIMATIC Restore menu opens.
– Select a language.
– Select "CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)" or "CPU 1515SP PC2 (F) + HMI".
– Select the option "Completely restore system drive".
→ The original software is restored on Partition C:, Partition D: is deleted.

After the restore

1. Exit the Restore menu.
2. Remove the restore USB stick.
3. Proceed as described in Initial commissioning.

Further procedure
● Re-connect any other required USB devices.
● Transfer the license keys.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 61
Maintenance
11.4 Updating software

11.4 Updating software

Note
When you update software (such as Windows, drivers, BIOS, etc.), always start the
CPU 1515SP PC2 in the GRUB menu in Windows mode.

Information on updating software for the respective product can be found on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en).

HMI devices
During the installation, make sure that you always use the latest drivers for the HMI devices
used (SIMATIC Flat Panels).
Before you install a new driver version, you must uninstall the old driver version in order to
ensure proper operation.
You can download the current driver software from SIMATIC Product Support.

11.5 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise (64-bit)

The Windows 10 IoT Enterprise operating system (64-bit) is pre-installed on the
CPU 1515SP PC2.

Windows language packs

English and German are available as the basic language for the installation of the Windows
operating system.
After initial commissioning of the CPU 1515SP PC2, additional operating system languages
can be installed. Note that you need administrator rights to install language packages.
The following language packs are contained on the restore USB stick under
\Packages\x64\LanguagePack:
● Traditional Chinese
● Simplified Chinese
● German
● English
● French
● Italian
● Spanish

Installing languages
Use the Windows function "Start > Settings > Speech Recognition, Region, Date >
Languages" to install a language pack.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

62 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Maintenance
11.6 Sending the device to customer service

Updates
You can install additional updates at a later time. You can find current information on the
operating system at Widows (http://www.windows.com).

Note
In the delivery state, partitions are set up on drive C: and D: on the CFast card with free
memory. See section Partitions in the delivery state (Page 59).
Make sure that sufficient free memory space is available on your CFast card for the
installation of updates.

11.6 Sending the device to customer service

Before sending
Before you send in the CPU 1515SP PC2 for repair:
● Create a backup of your data.
● Back up your SIMATIC license keys on a USB stick.
● Remove your SD/MMC cards.
● Remove your CFast card.

Sending in the device

● Pack the device in its original packaging.
● Enclose identification data (Page 30).
● Send to your Siemens contact partner.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 63
Maintenance
11.7 Removing and inserting the CFast card

11.7 Removing and inserting the CFast card

Introduction
The CPU 1515SP PC2 has a slot for a CFast card. On this card, you will find the operating
system, your Runtime software and, after configuration, the project.
Seal the cover for the CFast card to protect the system against unauthorized access.
You must remove the CFast card before you send in the CPU, for example, for repair.

Requirements
● The CPU 1515SP PC2 is disconnected from the power supply.

Procedure – Removing the CFast card

1. Remove the seal.
2. Open the cover, using a screwdriver if necessary.
3. Press onto the CFast card.
The card is pressed out of the slot.
4. Pull the card out of the slot.
To do this, grip the rib on the underside of the memory card.

Procedure – Inserting the CFast card

1. Open the cover of the slot, using a screwdriver if necessary.
2. Insert the CFast card into the slot.
3. Press the CFast card into the slot until it clicks into place.
The CFast card is properly inserted if the cover can be closed without any resistance.
4. Close the cover.

NOTICE
Unauthorized access
Seal the cover to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the
CPU 1515SP PC2 from unauthorized access.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

64 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Maintenance
11.8 Recycling and disposal

11.8 Recycling and disposal

For ecologically sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certificated
disposal service for electronic scrap or dispose of the device in accordance with the
regulations in your country.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 65
Technical specifications 12
12.1 Standards and approvals

Introduction
The general technical specifications cover the following:
● The standards and test values that the CPU 1515SP PC2 complies with and fulfills.
● The test criteria according to which the CPU 1515SP PC2 was tested.

Currently valid markings and approvals

Note
Information for CPU 1515SP PC2
The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the CPU 1515SP PC2.

Safety information

WARNING
Risk of personal injury and damage to property.
In hazardous areas, there is a risk of injury or damage if you disconnect any connectors
while the CPU 1515SP PC2 is in operation.
Always de-energize the CPU 1515SP PC2 operated in such areas before you disconnect
the connectors.

WARNING
Flying sparks due to loose cables
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong
oscillation and high vibrating loads.
Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

66 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.1 Standards and approvals

WARNING
Explosion hazard
If you replace components, compliance with Class I, DIV. 2 can become invalid.

WARNING
Area of application
This device is only suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D, or in non-hazardous
areas.

CE marking
The CPU 1515SP PC2 meets the requirements and safety objectives of the following
guidelines and complies with the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable
logic controllers published in the official journals of the European Community:
● 2014/30/EU "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● 2014/34/EU "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
● 2011/65/EU "Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and
electronic equipment" (RoHS Directive)
● 2006/42/EC "Machinery Directive" for fail-safe modules
The conformity declaration certificates are available for the responsible authorities and are
kept at the following address:
Siemens AG
Digital Factory
Factory Automation
DF FA AS SYS
P.O. Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg, Germany
They are also available for download on the Siemens Industry Online Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/) web pages, keyword "Declaration of
Conformity".

cULus approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
OR

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 67
Technical specifications
12.1 Standards and approvals

cULus HAZ. LOC. approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
● CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Installation Instructions for cULus haz.loc.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is
known to be non-hazardous.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
● This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I,
Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations.
WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAY.

FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) according to
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
(ANSI/ISA 82.02.01)
CSA C22.2 No. 213
CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Installation Instructions for FM
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is
known to be non-hazardous.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
● This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I,
Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations.
WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS.
OR

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

68 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.1 Standards and approvals

ATEX approval
In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;
Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements)

OR

IECEx approval
According to IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type
of protection "n") and IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General
requirements)

RCM (C-Tick) Declaration of conformity for Australia/New Zealand

CPU 1515SP PC2 meets the requirements of the standard EN 61000-6-4:2007 + A1:2011.

Korea Certificate KCC-REM-S49-ET200SP

Note that this device corresponds to limit class A in terms of the emission of radio frequency
interference. This device can be used in all areas, except residential areas.
이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기
바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.

IEC 61131
The CPU 1515SP PC2 with the S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) fulfills
the requirements and criteria of the IEC 61131-2 standard (programmable logic controllers,
Part 2: Equipment requirements and tests).

PROFINET standard
CPU 1515SP PC2 is based on standard IEC 61158 Type 10.

PROFIBUS standard
CPU 1515SP PC2 is based on standard IEC 61158 Type 3.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 69
Technical specifications
12.1 Standards and approvals

IO-Link standard
CPU 1515SP PC2 is based on standard IEC 61131-9.

Use in industrial environments

CPU 1515SP PC2 is designed for use in industrial environments. It meets the following
standards for this type of use:
● Requirements on interference emission EN 61000-6-4: 2007 + A1: 2011
● Requirements on immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005

Use in mixed areas

Under certain circumstances, you can use the CPU 1515SP PC2 in a mixed area. A mixed
area is used for residential purposes and for commercial operations that do not significantly
impact on residents.
If you want to use the CPU 1515SP PC2 in mixed areas, you must ensure that its radio
frequency interference emission complies with the limit classes of the EN 61000-6-3 generic
standard. Suitable measures for observing these limits for use in a mixed area are, for
example:
● Installation of the CPU 1515SP PC2 in grounded control cabinets
● Use of noise filters in the supply cables
An individual acceptance test is also required.

Use in residential areas

Note
CPU 1515SP PC2 not intended for use in residential areas
CPU 1515SP PC2 is not intended for use in residential areas. Using the CPU 1515SP PC2
in residential areas can affect radio and television reception.

Reference
The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under
Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

70 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

12.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment.
The CPU 1515SP PC2 meets the requirements of the EMC legislation for the European
single market, among other requirements. The prerequisite for this is that the
CPU 1515SP PC2 complies with the specifications and guidelines relating to electrical
configuration.

EMC according to NE 21
The CPU 1515SP PC2 meets the EMC specifications of NAMUR guideline NE 21.

Pulse-shaped disturbance
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC2 with
regard to pulse-shaped disturbances.

Table 12- 1 Pulse-shaped disturbance

Pulse-shaped disturbance Test voltage corresponds to

degree of se-
verity
Electrostatic discharge according Air discharge: ±8 kV 3
to IEC 61000-4-2. Contact discharge ± 4 kV 3
Burst pulses (high-speed transient ±2 kV (power supply lines) 3
disturbance) according to ±2 kV (signal lines > 30 m) 3
IEC 61000-4-4. ±1 kV (signal lines < 30 m)
High-energy single pulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (see function manual
Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566))
• asymmetric coupling ±2 kV (power supply lines) 3
DC with protective elements
±2 kV (signal/data line only > 30 m), with pro-
tective elements
• symmetric coupling ±1 kV (power supply lines) DC with protective
elements
±1 kV (signal/data line only > 30 m), with pro-
tective elements

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 71
Technical specifications
12.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Sinusoidal disturbance
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC2 with
regard to sinusoidal disturbances.
● RF radiation

Table 12- 2 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF radiation

RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3/NAMUR 21 corresponds to degree of

Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated severity
80 to 1000 MHz; 1.0 to 2.0 GHz 2.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz 3
10 V/m 3 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)

● RF coupling

Table 12- 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF coupling

RF coupling according to IEC 61000-4-6 corresponds to degree of

severity
(10 kHz) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3
10 Vrms unmodulated
80% AM (1 kHz)
150 Ω source impedance

Emission of radio interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with IEC61000-6-4 (measured
at a distance of 10 m).

Table 12- 4 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields

Frequency Emitted interference

30 MHz to 230 MHz < 40 dB (µV/m)Q
230 MHz to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (µV/m)Q

Emission of interference via AC supply voltage in accordance with EN 55016.

Table 12- 5 Interference emission via the AC power supply

Frequency Emitted interference

0.15 to 0.5 MHz <79 dB (µV) Q
<66 dB (µV) M
0.5 to 30 MHz <73 dB (µV) Q
<60 dB (µV) M

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

72 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.3 Shipping and storage conditions

12.3 Shipping and storage conditions

Introduction
The CPU 1515SP PC2 exceeds the requirements of IEC 61131-2 in terms of shipping and
storage conditions. The following information applies to modules that are shipped and/or
stored in their original packaging.

Table 12- 6 Shipping and storage conditions for modules

Type of condition Permissible range

Free fall (in shipping package) ≤1 m
Temperature From -40 °C to +70 °C
Barometric pressure from 1140 hPa to 660 hPa (corresponds to an altitude of
-1000 m to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 5% to 95%, without condensation
Sinusoidal vibrations according to 5 - 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 8.4 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock according to IEC 60068-2-27 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 73
Technical specifications
12.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions

12.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions

Note
Restrictions
In contrast to the ambient conditions for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the following
restrictions apply to the CPU 1515SP PC2:
• Mechanical ambient conditions:
– 2 g constant acceleration when using the BusAdapter BA 2×FC
• Ambient temperature:
– 0 to 60 °C for horizontal installation with maximum 32 I/O modules
– 0 to 55 °C for horizontal installation with maximum 64 I/O modules
– 0 to 50 °C for vertical installation with maximum 32 I/O modules

Operating conditions
The CPU 1515SP PC2 is suitable for use in weather-proof, fixed locations. The operating
conditions are based on the requirements of DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)

Mechanical ambient conditions

The table below shows the mechanical ambient conditions in the form of sinusoidal
oscillations.

Table 12- 7 Mechanical ambient conditions

Frequency band CPU 1515SP PC2

5 ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude
8.4 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration
10 ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude
60 ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz • 1 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45)
• 2 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2×FC)

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

74 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions

Test of mechanical ambient conditions

The table below provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the test
of ambient mechanical conditions.

Table 12- 8 Test of mechanical ambient conditions

Condition tested Test Standard Comment

Vibration Vibration test accord- Type of oscillation: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 oc-
ing to IEC 60068-2-6 tave/minute.
(sine) BA 2×RJ45
• 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude
• 8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration
BA 2×FC
• 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz, 0.35 mm constant amplitude
• 60 Hz ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz, 2 g constant acceleration
Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of 3 vertically
aligned axes
Shock Shock, tested accord- Type of shock: Half-sine
ing to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of 3 vertically
aligned axes

Climatic ambient conditions

You can use the CPU 1515SP PC2 under the following climatic ambient conditions:

Table 12- 9 Climatic ambient conditions

Ambient conditions Permissible range Comments

Temperature: • from 0 to 60 °C For configuration with 32 I/O modules
Horizontal mounting position:
• from 0 to 55 °C For configuration with 64 I/O modules

Vertical installation: • 0 to 50 °C For configuration with 32 I/O modules

Permitted temperature change 10 K/h -

Relative humidity from 10 to 95% Without condensation
Barometric pressure From 1140 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m
to 2000 m
Concentration of pollutants ANSI/ISA-71.04 severity level G1; G2; -
G3

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 75
Technical specifications
12.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage

12.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and

rated voltage

Insulation
The insulation is designed according to the requirements of EN 61131-2: 2007.

Note
In the case of modules with 24 V DC (SELV/PELV) supply voltage, galvanic isolations are
tested with 707 V DC (type test).

Note
The ground/minus pole of the 24 V DC power supply is connected via the device with
functional ground (FE).

Pollution degree / overvoltage category according to IEC 61131

● Pollution degree 2
● Overvoltage category: II

Protection class in accordance with IEC 61131-2:2007

The distributed I/O system ET 200SP fulfills protection class I and includes parts of
protection class II and III. The CPU 1515SP PC2 is a part of protection class III.
The grounding of the mounting rail must meet the requirements for functional earth FE.
The installation location (e.g. enclosure, control cabinet) must have a protective conductor
connection that meets the standard to maintain protection class I.

Degree of protection IP20

Degree of protection IP20 according to IEC 60529, i.e.:
● Protection against contact with standard probe
● Protection against foreign objects with diameters in excess of 12.5 mm
● No protection against water

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

76 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres

Rated voltage for operation

The CPU 1515SP PC2 works with the rated voltage and corresponding tolerances listed in
the following table.

Table 12- 10 Rated voltage for operation

Rated voltage Tolerance range

24 V DC 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 1
1 Static value: Creation as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation in accordance
with IEC 60364-4-41

12.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres

See product information Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19692172).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 77
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7 Module data

12.7.1 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 - basic device

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 255
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization No

• Control No

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

78 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card No
SIMATIC memory card required No
Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU + 64 modules + server module (mount-
ing width max. 1 m)
Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 79
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB40-0AA0

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load
Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

80 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.2 Technical specifications CPU 1515SP PC2

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization No

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 81
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

82 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 83
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GB0

Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

84 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.3 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 128PT

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 128
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 85
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

86 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load
Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 87
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GK0

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

88 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.4 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 512PT

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 512
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 89
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

90 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load
Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 91
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GL0

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

92 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.5 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 2048PT

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 + HMI 2048
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 93
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

94 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load
Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 95
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2DB42-0GM0

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

96 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.6 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 F
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization No

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 97
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

98 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load
Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 99
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GB0

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

100 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.7 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 128PT

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 128
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 101
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

102 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load
Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 103
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GK0

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

104 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.8 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 512PT

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 512
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 105
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

106 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load
Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 107
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GL0

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

108 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.9 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 2018PT

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 F + HMI 2048
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization WinCC Runtime Advanced V15

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP F

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 109
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

110 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load
Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 111
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2SB42-0GM0

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

112 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.10 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 T

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 T
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization No

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP T

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 113
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

114 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load
Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 115
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2VB42-0GB0

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

116 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

12.7.11 Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 TF

Technical specifications
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0/td).

Article number 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0

General information
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC2 TF
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V2.5
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 with HSP 269
as of version
Installed software
• Visualization No

• Control S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP TF

Control elements
Mode selector switch 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.8 A; Full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and using USB
Current consumption (in no-load operation), 0.5 A
typ.
I²t 0.426 A²·s; with starting current inrush
Power
Active power input, max. 43 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and using USB
Infeed power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 16 W
Processor
Processor type Intel Atom E3940, 1.6 GHz, 4 cores

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 117
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0

Memory
Type of memory DDR3L
Main memory 8 GB RAM
CFast memory card Yes; 30 GB flash memory
SIMATIC memory card required No
Flash Disk 30 GB
Work memory
• integrated (for program) 1.5 Mbyte

• integrated (for data) 5 Mbyte

• integrated (for CPU function library of CPU 10 Mbyte

Runtime)
Load memory
• integrated (on PC mass storage) 320 Mbyte

Backup
• with UPS Yes; all memory areas declared retentive

• with non-volatile memory Yes

Hardware configuration
Integrated power supply Yes
Number of DP masters
• Via CM 1

Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU 1515SP PC + 64 modules + server
module
• Number of lines, max. 1

Time of day
Clock
• Type Hardware clock

• Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Via CM DP module
Number of USB interfaces 4; 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 on front side
Number of SD card slots 1
Video interfaces
• Graphics interface 1x DisplayPort

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

118 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0

1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45

– Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 1

• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Integrated

– Transmission rate, max. 1 000 Mbit/s

– Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN/STOP LED Yes

• ERROR LED Yes

• MAINT LED Yes

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C

• max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and

3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; With max. 32 ET 200SP modules and 3x

100 mA USB load

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 119
Technical specifications
12.7 Module data

Article number 6ES7677-2WB42-0GB0

Ambient temperature during stor-
age/transportation
• min. -40 °C

• max. 70 °C

Operating systems
Operating systems Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016 (64-bit)
MUI
Peripherals/Options
Peripherals
• SD card Optionally for additional mass storage

Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg

12.7.12 S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF)

The CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) is a PC-based controller of the SIMATIC S7-1500 Software
Controller family. You can find additional information about the CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF) in the
relevant manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109740725). For the
CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF), please also note the information in the F product information
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478599).

Technical specifications
You can find technical specifications of CPU 1505SP with the article number
6ES7672-5DC11-0YA0 on the Internet under the following link
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5DC11-0YA0/td).
You can find technical specifications of CPU 1505SP F with the article number
6ES7672-5SC11-0YA0 on the Internet under the following link
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5SC11-0YA0/td).
You can find technical specifications of CPU 1505SP T with the article number
6ES7672-5VC11-0YA0 on the Internet under the following link
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5VC11-0YA0/td).
You can find all technical specifications of CPU 1505SP TF with the article number
6ES7672-5W11-0YA0 on the Internet under the following link
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7672-5WC11-0YA0/td).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

120 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
Dimension drawings 13
13.1 CPU 1515SP PC2
This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets.

Dimension drawings of the CPU 1515SP PC2

Figure 13-1 Dimension drawing CPU 1515SP PC2, front view

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 121
Dimension drawings
13.1 CPU 1515SP PC2

Figure 13-2 Dimension drawing CPU 1515SP PC2, side view

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

122 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
Spare parts/accessories 14
14.1 Accessories/spare parts

Accessories for CPU 1515SP PC2

Table 14- 1 Accessories for CPU 1515SP PC2

Description Article number

BusAdapter/media converter; 1 unit
• BA 2×FC (PROFINET BusAdapter with FastConnect Ethernet connection) 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0

• BA 2xLC (BusAdapter 2x LC glass fiber-optic connectors, for PROFINET) 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0

• BA LC/RJ45 (media converter glass fiber-optic/CU 1x LC FO connector 1x RJ45 con- 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0

nector for PROFINET)
• BA LC/FC (media converter glass fiber-optic/CU 1x LC FO connector and 1x FastCon- 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0
nect (FC) connector for PROFINET)
• BA 2xSCRJ (BusAdapter 2 SCRJ FO connectors, for PROFINET) 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0

• BA SCRJ/RJ45 (media converter fiber-optic CU 1x SCRJ FO connector and 1x RJ45 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0

connector for PROFINET)
• BA SCRJ/FC (media converter fiber-optic CU 1x SCRJ FO connector and 1x FastCon- 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0
nect (FC) connector for PROFINET)
• BA 2×RJ45 (PROFINET BusAdapter with standard Ethernet socket) 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0

• BA-Send 1xFC (1x FastConnect connector for ET-Connection) 6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0

Server module; 1 unit 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
Strain relief for CPU 1515SP PC2 A5E32291462
SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive 8 GB (SLC), pre-installed BIOS-MANAGER V3.3, 6AV7672-8JD01-0AA0
Image/Partition Creator V3.3 and installation CD
SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive 16 GB, USB3.0, pre-installed BIOS-MANAGER V3.3, 6AV7672-8JD02-0AA0
Image/Partition Creator V3.4 and installation CD
SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor software 6ES7648-6CA05-0YX0
SIMATIC PC, DisplayPort according to DVI-I for onboard graphics 6ES7648-3AF00-0XA0
Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels, 10 units 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0
Mounting rails, tin-plated steel strip
• Length: 483 mm 6ES5710-8MA11

• Length: 430 mm 6ES5710-8MA21

• Length: 830 mm 6ES5710-8MA31

• Length: 2000 mm 6ES5710-8MA41

Online catalog
Additional article numbers can be found on the Internet in the online catalog and online
ordering system (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 123
Appendix A
A.1 Siemens Industry Online Support
You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here:
● Product support
All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications,
FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals.
● Application examples
Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks – as well as function blocks,
performance information and videos.
● Services
Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and
training offers.
● Forums
For answers and solutions concerning automation technology.
● mySupport
Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries,
and configurable documents.
This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

A.2 Industry Mall

The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet.

See also
Industry Mall (https://mall.industry.siemens.com)

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

124 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Appendix
A.3 Troubleshooting

A.3 Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Remedy

CPU 1515SP PC2 does not work. CPU 1515SP PC2 is not supplied Check the power supply.
with power.
Time and/or date of the CPU 1515SP PC2 CPU 1515SP PC2 was not con- Check the settings in Windows.
not correct. nected for more than 6 weeks.
USB device is not working. USB power supply is overloaded. Use an external power supply for the
USB device (see section Application
planning (Page 33)).

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 125
List of abbreviations B
B.1 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Term Meaning

AC Alternating current Alternating current
ALM Automation License Manager Tool for managing license keys in STEP 7
BIOS Basic Input Output System Basic Input Output System. A set of important software rou-
tines used after the startup of the CPU to load the operating
system and to provide the routines for data exchange between
hardware components.
CE Communauté Européenne CE label
CFast CompactFlash ATA Serial Transfer Memory card
CoA Certificate of Authenticity Certificate of Authenticity, label with Microsoft Windows
"Product Key"
CoL Certificate of License Certificate of License for the SIMATIC software loaded
DC Direct current DC current
DPP Dual-mode DisplayPort Interface for transfer of image and video data for monitors
ESD Components sensitive to electro-
static charge
EN European standard
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
GRUB / GRUB2DOS GRand Unified Bootloader Boot Manager
HMI Human Machine Interface User interface
IEC International Electrotechnical
Commission
IM Interface module The interface module connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system with the IO controller and exchanges data with the I/O
modules via the backplane bus.
LAN Local Area Network Computer network that is limited to a local area.
LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode
LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Protocol that enables the exchange of information between
adjacent devices.
MMC Multi Media Card Memory card
NTFS New Technology File System File system that offers targeted access protection at the file
level.
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random-Access Non-volatile data memory that is RAM-based, the data content
Memory of which is retained without external power supply.
PC Personal computer
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV, previously called "extra low voltage with safe isolation",
is a protective measure against electrical shock. See EN
50178.
PN PROFINET

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

126 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 List of abbreviations
B.1 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Term Meaning

PG Programming device Compact programming device which meets the special re-
quirements of industry. The PG is fully equipped for program-
ming SIMATIC PLCs.
PS Power supply Power supply
PT Power Tags Process tags; tags enable data exchange between the com-
ponents of an automation process, for example, between the
HMI device and the controller.
RAM Random Access Memory Main or work memory of a computer with direct access, allow-
ing read access to data and editing.
RT Runtime
SD Secure Digital card Memory card
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage Safety Extra Low Voltage; electrical circuit in which the volt-
age cannot exceed 30 V AC (RMS), 42.4 V AC peak or
60 V DC under NORMAL CONDITIONS and CONDITIONS
OF A SINGLE FAULT, including ground faults in other circuits.
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UWF Unified Write Filter Configurable write protection under Windows 10, for protec-
tion of data carriers (for example, CFast card, internal USB
drives, etc.)"Unified Write Filter (UWF)" write filter (Page 57)
USB Universal Serial Bus Serial bus system for connecting a computer to external de-
vices.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 127
Glossary

Cold restart
A startup procedure commencing when the CPU is switched on. Upon a cold restart, the
system typically performs some basic hardware checks and then loads the operating system
from the hard disk into the work memory.

Controller
Integrated hardware and software controlling the operation of a specific internal or I/O device
(e.g. keyboard controller).

Device configuration
The device configuration of a PC/programming device includes information on the features
and options of the PC/programming device such as memory configuration, drive types,
monitor, network address etc. The data is stored in a configuration file and is used by the
operating system to load the corresponding device drivers or assign device parameters.

Drivers
Program sections of the operating system. They convert data from the user programs to the
specific formats required by the I/O devices (e.g. hard disks, monitors, printers).

Ethernet
Local network (bus structure) for text and data communication with a data transmission rate
of 10/100/1000 Mbps.

Image
An image is a copy of hard-disk partitions, for example, which is stored as backup in a file so
that it can be restored if necessary.

Interface
● Connection between individual hardware elements such as PCs, programming device,
printer or screen by means of physical plug-in connections (cables).
● Connection between different programs to allow them to be used together.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

128 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Glossary

LAN
Local Area Network: LAN refers to a local network consisting of a group of computers and
other devices which are distributed over a relatively restricted area and connected through
communication lines. The devices connected to a LAN are referred to as nodes. The
purpose of networks is the shared use of files, printers or other resources.

License key
The license key is the electronic license stamp of a license. Siemens AG provides a license
key for software that is protected by licensing laws.

Operating system
Generic term which describes all functions for controlling and monitoring user program
execution and distribution of system resources to the user programs as well as maintenance
of the operating mode in cooperation with the hardware.

Power options
The power options can be used to reduce the power consumption of the computer while still
keeping it ready for immediate use. In Windows via Start > Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Power Options.

Restart
The restart of the company that is already in operation using, for example, the
<Ctrl+Alt+Del> shortcut without switching off the power supply.

Restore USB stick

You use the Restore USB stick to reset your system partition or the entire hard disk to the
delivery state in the event of an error. The USB stick contains all the necessary image files
and is bootable.

ROM
Read Only Memory. ROM refers to a read-only memory where each memory location can be
addressed individually. The stored programs or data are hard-coded and are preserved even
in the event of a power failure.

S.M.A.R.T
Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART or S.M.A.R.T.) is an industry
standard for storage media. It provides for permanent monitoring of relevant parameters and
thus early recognition of pending defects.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 129
Glossary

SATA
Serial ATA. An interface for hard disk drives and optical drives with serial data transfer.

SETUP (BIOS setup)

A program used to determine information on the device configuration. The device
configuration of the CPU 1515SP PC2 is preset. Changes must be made whenever a
memory expansion, new modules or drives are to be activated.

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

130 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
Index

Characteristics
Control cabinet, 19
A Degree of protection, 19
General, 19
AC
Interfaces, 19
Alternating current, 126
Power supply, 19
Accessories, 123
Pre-installations, 19
Address space, 33
Climatic ambient conditions, 75
ALM
CoA
Automation License Manager, 126
Certificate of Authenticity, 126
Alternating current
Col
AC, 126
Certificate of License, 126
Ambient conditions
Commissioning
Climatic, 75
Commissioning procedure, 43
Mechanical, 74
Creating the configuration, 46
Approvals, 66
Notes, 42
Areas of application, 17
Operator user, 44
Fail-safe CPUs, 17
Procedure, 44
Technology CPUs, 17
Requirements, 43
Automation License Manager, 48
Setting the IP address, 46
ALM, 126
Communauté Européenne
CE, 126
CompactFlash ATA Serial Transfer
B
CFast, 126
Basic Input Output System Components
BIOS, 126 BusAdapter, 23
Basic knowledge, 6 Mounting rail, 22
BIOS Overview of CPU 1515SP PC2, 22
Basic Input Output System, 126 Server module, 23
BIOS setup, 56 Components sensitive to electrostatic charge
changing the device configuration, 56 ESD, 126
Boot Manager, 50 Configuration
Commissioning, 46
Non-isolated configuration, 38
C Reference potential of the load voltage, 38
TN-S grid, 38
CE
Conventions, 7
Communauté Européenne, 126
CPU
Certificate of Authenticity
Damage, 29
CoA, 126
LED displays, 51
Certificate of License
Switching on, 50
Col, 126
Unpacking, 29
CFast
CPU
CompactFlash ATA Serial Transfer, 126
Switching off, 50
CFast card
CPU 1515SP PC2
insert, 64
Components, 22
Partitioning, 59
Dimension drawing, 121
remove, 64

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 131
Index

D Gigabit Ethernet
GbE, 126
Data
GRand Unified Bootloader
Backup, 58
GRUB/GRUB2DOS, 126
Restoring, 58
GRUB/GRUB2DOS
Data backup, 58
GRand Unified Bootloader, 126
SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator, 58, 58
DC
Direct current, 126
H
Degree of protection, 76
Dimension drawing HMI
CPU 1515SP PC2, 121 Human Machine Interface, 126
Direct current HMI connection
DC, 126 establish, 47
Disposal HMI devices
Recycling, 65 Updating software, 62
Downloading a project Human Machine Interface
Target system, 47 HMI, 126
DPP
Dual-mode DisplayPort, 126
Dual-mode DisplayPort I
DPP, 126
Identification data
Repairs, 30
IEC
E
International Electrotechnical Commission, 126
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 71 IM
EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility), 71 Interface module, 126
EN Installation rules, 32
European standard, 126 Insulation, 76
ESD Interface module
Components sensitive to electrostatic charge, 126 IM, 126
European standard International Electrotechnical Commission
EN, 126 IEC, 126
IP address
Commissioning, 46
F Setting, 46
Functions, 55, 55
BIOS setup, 56
L
Monitoring drives, 55
Monitoring functions, 54 LAN
Operating hours counter, 55 Local Area Network, 126
Power options, 56 Language packs
Retentive memory NVRAM, 55 for installing Windows, 62
SIMATIC IPC DiagBase, 54 Windows, 62
SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor, 54 LED
Temperature monitoring, 55 Light Emitting Diode, 126
LED displays
CPU, 51
G ERROR, 52
MAINT, 52
GbE
Meaning, 52
Gigabit Ethernet, 126

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

132 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Index

Power, 52 Multi Media Card

RUN/STOP, 52 MMC, 126
License
Certificate of License, 49
Software, 48 N
License key
Network connection
Backup, 49
HMI, 47
Restore, 49
Networks
transfer, 48
Ethernet, 40
Light Emitting Diode
PROFIBUS, 40
LED, 126
PROFINET, 40
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
New Technology File System
LLDP, 126
NTFS, 126
LLDP
Non-Volatile Random-Access Memory
Link Layer Discovery Protocol, 126
NVRAM, 126
Local Area Network
Notes on use, 16
LAN, 126
Ambient conditions, 16
Hazards at an unprotected machine or plant, 16
NTFS
M
New Technology File System, 126
MAC addresses NVRAM
Assignment, 25 Non-Volatile Random-Access Memory, 126
Maximum configuration, 28 Retentive memory, 55
Address space, 33
Electrical, 33
Mechanical, 33 O
Rules, 33
Operator controls and display elements, 24
USB load, 33
CFast card, 25
mechanical ambient conditions, 74
Interfaces, 24
Minimum clearances
MAC addresses, 25
Mounting, 32
Mode selector, 26
MMC
Power supply, 26
Multi Media Card, 126
SD/MMC card, 25
Mode selector
USB connections, 25
Positions, 26
Operator user
Monitoring functions, 54
Commissioning, 44
Mounting
Ambient temperatures, 28, 33
Fixing strain relief, 34
P
Installation location, 28
Installation position, 28 Packaging
Installing the CPU, 34 CPU, 29
Maximum configuration, 28 Damage, 29
Minimum clearances, 32 Partitioning
Mounting rail, 31 CFast card, 59
Required tool, 34 PC
Rules, 32 Personal computer, 126
Strain relief, 41 PELV
Uninstalling the CPU, 35 Protective Extra Low Voltage, 126
USB load, 33 Personal computer
Mounting rail PC, 126
Mounting, 31

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 133
Index

PG S
Programming device, 127
Safety Extra Low Voltage
PN
SELV, 127
PROFINET, 126
Safety information, 14
Power options
ESD guidelines, 15
Functions, 56
Repairs, 14
Power supply
Safe operation of a plant, 14
PS, 127
Sample configuration, 20
Power Tags
Configuration, 20
PT, 127
Scope, 7
Procedure
Documentation, 7
Commissioning, 44
Scope of delivery, 27
PROFINET
CPU 1515SP PC2, 27
PN, 126
CPU 1515SP PC2 F, 27
Programming device
CPU 1515SP PC2 T, 27
PG, 127
CPU 1515SP PC2 TF, 27
Proof of license, 27
Proof of license, 27
Certificate of Authenticity, 30
SD
Certificate of License, 30
Secure Digital card, 127
Protection class, 76, 76
Secure Digital card
Protective Extra Low Voltage
SD, 127
PELV, 126
SELV
PS
Safety Extra Low Voltage, 127
Power supply, 127
Sending in the device, 63
PT
Shipping conditions, 73
Power Tags, 127
SIMATIC IPC DiagBase, 54
SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor, 54
SIMATIC IPC Image&Partition Creator
R
Data backup, 58
Radio interference, 70, 72 SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive
RAM Data backup, 58
Random Access Memory, 127 Software
Random Access Memory update for HMI devices, 62
RAM, 127 Spare parts, 123
Rated voltage, 77 Standards, 66
Recycling Storage conditions, 73
Disposal, 65 Strain relief
Repair, 63 mounting, 41
Restoring the delivery state, 60
Requirements, 60
with restore USB stick, 61 T
Retentive memory NVRAM
Technical specifications
Functions, 55
Climatic ambient conditions, 75
RT
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 71
Runtime, 127
mechanical ambient conditions, 74
Runtime
Shipping and storage conditions, 73
RT, 127
Standards and approvals, 66
Temperature monitoring, 55
Test voltage, 76
Transfer
License key, 48

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

134 Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA
 Index

U
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., 127
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UL, 127
Unified Write Filter
UWF, 127
Universal Serial Bus
USB, 127
Updates
for installing Windows, 63
USB
Universal Serial Bus, 127
Use
in industrial environments, 70
in mixed areas, 70
in residential areas, 70
UWF
Unified Write Filter, 127

W
Windows
Installing updates, 63
Language packs, 62
Wiring, 37
Block diagram, 37
Pin assignment, 37
Rules and regulations, 36

Z
zone 2 explosion-proof atmosphere, 77

CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)

Operating Instructions, 09/2018, A5E42603425-AA 135
SIMATIC
S7-1200/S7-1500
F-CPUs
Produktinformation

Security-Hinweise
Siemens bietet Produkte und Lösungen mit Industrial Security-Funktionen an, die den sicheren Betrieb von Anlagen,
Systemen, Maschinen und Netzwerken unterstützen.
Um Anlagen, Systeme, Maschinen und Netzwerke gegen Cyber-Bedrohungen zu sichern, ist es erforderlich, ein
ganzheitliches Industrial Security-Konzept zu implementieren (und kontinuierlich aufrechtzuerhalten), das dem aktuellen
Stand der Technik entspricht. Die Produkte und Lösungen von Siemens formen einen Bestandteil eines solchen Konzepts.
Die Kunden sind dafür verantwortlich, unbefugten Zugriff auf ihre Anlagen, Systeme, Maschinen und Netzwerke zu
verhindern. Diese Systeme, Maschinen und Komponenten sollten nur mit dem Unternehmensnetzwerk oder dem Internet
verbunden werden, wenn und soweit dies notwendig ist und nur wenn entsprechende Schutzmaßnahmen (z. B. Firewalls
und/oder Netzwerksegmentierung) ergriffen wurden.
Weiterführende Informationen zu möglichen Schutzmaßnahmen im Bereich Industrial Security finden Sie unter
(https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Die Produkte und Lösungen von Siemens werden ständig weiterentwickelt, um sie noch sicherer zu machen. Siemens
empfiehlt ausdrücklich, Produkt-Updates anzuwenden, sobald sie zur Verfügung stehen und immer nur die aktuellen
Produktversionen zu verwenden. Die Verwendung veralteter oder nicht mehr unterstützter Versionen kann das Risiko von
Cyber-Bedrohungen erhöhen.
Um stets über Produkt-Updates informiert zu sein, abonnieren Sie den Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed unter
(https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Inhalt
Einleitung
Diese Produktinformation enthält wichtige Informationen zu den im Absatz "Geltungsbereich" genannten F-CPUs. Die
Produktinformation ist Bestandteil des gelieferten Produkts. Die in dieser Produktinformation enthaltenen Aussagen sind in
Zweifelsfällen als aktueller anzusehen.

Geltungsbereich
Die Aussagen in dieser Produktinformation sind für die nachfolgend aufgezählten F-CPUs gültig:
F-CPUs S7-1200 F-CPUs S7-1500
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN • CPU 1510SP F-1 PN S7-1500 F Software
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1513F-1 PN • CPU 1512SP F-1 PN Controller
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN • CPU 1516proF-2 PN • CPU 1505SP (T)F
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1507S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1508S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
• CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
(MFP/ODK)

© Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. Alle Rechte vorbehalten

A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 1
Einsatzgebiete
Haupteinsatzgebiete der F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 sind Personen- und Maschinenschutz und Brennersteuerungen. Neben
dem Sicherheitsprogramm können Sie auch Standard-Anwendungen programmieren.
Die F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 können Sie im Sicherheitsbetrieb oder im Standardbetrieb betreiben.
Für den Sicherheitsbetrieb ist das installierte Optionspaket STEP 7 Safety notwendig. Ohne installiertes Optionspaket STEP
7 Safety können Sie die F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 im Standard-Betrieb einsetzen. Im Standardbetrieb verhalten sich F-CPUs
S7-1200/1500 wie Standard-CPUs S7-1200/1500.
Informationen zum Einsatz der F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 im Sicherheitsbetrieb erhalten Sie im Programmier- und
Bedienhandbuch "SIMATIC Safety - Projektieren und Programmieren
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/54110126)".
Informationen zum Einsatz der F-CPUs S7-1200 im Standardbetrieb erhalten Sie im Systemhandbuch "S7-1200
Automatisierungssystem (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/109478121)".
Informationen zum Einsatz der F-CPUs S7-1500 im Standardbetrieb erhalten Sie in den jeweiligen Gerätehandbüchern der
Standard-CPUs S7-1500 und den Standard-T-CPUs S7-1500 unter den folgenden Links:
● CPUs 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/67295862/133300)
● CPUs 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ps/22057/man)
● CPUs 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/90466439/133300)
● CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ps/13906/man)
● S7-1500 Software Controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/109740725)
Die aktuelle Firmware für die jeweilige F-CPU finden Sie mit einer Suche nach Downloads mit der jeweiligen Artikelnummer
im Industy Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com).

Hinweis
Beachten Sie anwendungsspezifische Anforderungen z. B. zur Netzausfallüberbrückung bei Netzteilen/Netzgeräten.

PFDavg-, PFH-Werte für F-CPUs

Nachfolgend finden Sie die Versagenswahrscheinlichkeitswerte (PFDavg-, PFH-Werte) für die oben genannten F-CPUs bei
einer Gebrauchsdauer von 20 Jahren und bei einer Reparaturzeit von 100 Stunden:
Betrieb im geringen Anforderungsmodus Betrieb im häufigen Anforderungs- oder kontinuierlichen
low demand mode Modus
gemäß IEC 61508:2010: high demand/continuous mode
PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on gemäß IEC 61508:2010:
demand PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1]
< 2E-05 < 1E-09

Überblick über den Arbeitsspeicher der F-CPUs im Vergleich mit den Standard-CPUs
CPU Arbeitsspeicher F-CPU Arbeitsspeicher
CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 kbyte CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 kbyte
CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC 100 kbyte CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 kbyte
CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC 125 kbyte CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC 150 kbyte
CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1511-1 PN 150 kbyte CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 kbyte
CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 kbyte CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 kbyte
CPU 1513-1 PN 300 kbyte CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 kbyte
CPU 1515-1 PN 500 kbyte CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 kbyte
CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 kbyte CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 kbyte
CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 Mbyte CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte

F-CPUs
2 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
CPU Arbeitsspeicher F-CPU Arbeitsspeicher
CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte
CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 Mbyte CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte
CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte
CPU 1518-4 PN/DP 4 Mbyte CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP 6 Mbyte
(MFP/ODK) (MFP/ODK)
CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 kbyte CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 kbyte
CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 kbyte CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 kbyte
CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 Mbyte CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1,5 Mbyte
CPU 1505SP (T) 1 Mbyte CPU 1505SP (T)F 1,5 Mbyte
CPU 1507S 5 Mbyte CPU 1507S F 7,5 Mbyte
CPU 1508S 10 Mbyte CPU 1508S F 12,5 Mbyte

Unterstützung von PROFIsafe V2

Schnittstellen, die PROFINET IO unterstützen, unterstützen auch PROFIsafe V2.

Einschränkung bei den Anweisungen "CREAT_DB" und "DELETE_DB"

F-DBs können weder erzeugt noch gelöscht werden.

Einschränkung bei den Anweisungen "READ_DBL" und "WRIT_DBL"

Die Zieladresse darf nicht auf einen F-DB zeigen.

Einschränkung bei der Projektierung des Remanenzverhaltens von Datenbausteinen

Die Projektierung der Remanenz von Datenbausteinen wird für F-DBs nicht unterstützt. D. h., bei NETZ-AUS/EIN und
Neustart (STOP-RUN) der F-CPU sind die Aktualwerte der F-DBs nicht remanent. Die F-DBs erhalten die Anfangswerte aus
dem Ladespeicher.
In F-DBs ist für alle Variablen das Kontrollkästchen "Remanenz" gegraut dargestellt.

Konfigurationssteuerung (Optionenhandling) auf einer F-CPU S7-1200

Die Konfigurationssteuerung (Optionenhandling) auf einer F-CPU S7-1200 ist mit zentralen Modulen unter folgender
Einschränkung möglich:
● Die fehlersicheren Module S7-1200 dürfen nicht getauscht werden und müssen auch immer an Ihrem projektierten
Steckplatz physikalisch gesteckt werden.
Platzieren Sie die fehlersicheren Module S7-1200 direkt neben der F-CPU. Platzieren Sie die Standard-Module rechts
neben den fehlersicheren Modulen S7-1200.

Vorgehen zum Laden einer Projektierung für Firmware < V2.0 für F-CPUs S7-1500
Wenn Sie eine F-CPU S7-1500 mit einer Projektierung für Firmware ab V2.0 mit projektierter Schutzstufe "Vollzugriff inkl.
Fail-safe (kein Schutz)" geladen haben und nun eine Projektierung für Firmware <= V1.8 auf diese F-CPU laden wollen,
müssen Sie Folgendes beachten:
Beim Laden der Projektierung mit Firmware <= V1.8 auf die F-CPU wird das Passwort abgefragt und als ungültig erkannt.
Als Abhilfe formatieren Sie die SIMATIC Memory Card wie in der Online-Hilfe zu STEP 7 unter "Eine S7-1500-Memory Card
formatieren" beschrieben. Anschließend können Sie die Projektierung für Firmware <= V1.8 auf die F-CPU laden.

Einsatz von Taktsynchronalarm-(F-)OBs

Die Anzahl der verwendbaren Taktsynchronalarm-(F-)OBs ist von der eingesetzten F-CPU abhängig. Informationen dazu
erhalten Sie in den technischen Daten der CPU.
Überschreitet die Summe der Taktsynchronalarm-OBs und des Taktsynchronalarm-F-OBs die in den technischen Daten der
CPU angegebene Anzahl, ist das Laden des Standard-Anwenderprogramms im RUN nicht mehr möglich.

F-CPUs
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 3
Display (bei F-CPUs S7-1500 mit Display bzw. Panel)
F-CPUs S7-1500 mit Display zeigen Ihnen im Menü "Übersicht" unter "Fehlersicher" Folgendes an:
● Sicherheitsbetrieb aktiviert/deaktiviert
● F-Gesamtsignatur
● Letzte fehlersichere Änderung
● Die Version von STEP 7 Safety, mit der das Sicherheitsprogramm übersetzt wurde.
● Informationen zu den F-Ablaufgruppen
– Name der F-Ablaufgruppe
– F-Ablaufgruppen-Signatur
– Aktuelle Zykluszeit
– Max. Zykluszeit
– Aktuelle Laufzeit
– Max. Laufzeit
Für jede F-Peripherie wird Ihnen unter "Fehlersichere Parameter" Folgendes angezeigt:
● F-Parameter-Signatur (mit Adresse)
● Sicherheitsbetrieb
● F-Überwachungszeit
● F-Quelladresse
● F-Zieladresse
Im Menü "Einstellungen" unter "Schutz" wird der folgende zusätzliche Menüpunkt angezeigt:
● F-Passwort freigeben/sperren
Der schreibende Zugriff auf F-Bausteine ist nicht zulässig.

Hinweis
Das Steuern von fehlersicheren Ein-/Ausgängen kann zum STOP der F-CPU führen.

Hinweis
Bei der Display-Firmware V2.5 wird nach dem Laden von Programmänderungen das Display für wenige Minuten nicht
aktualisiert und ist nicht bedienbar, anschließend startet das Display neu.

F-CPUs
4 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Webserver
Die F-CPUs S7-1200/1500 zeigt Ihnen auf der Startseite des Webservers Folgendes an:
● Sicherheitsbetrieb aktiviert/deaktiviert
● F-Gesamtsignatur
● Letzte fehlersichere Änderung
● Die Version von STEP 7 Safety, mit der das Sicherheitsprogramm übersetzt wurde.
● Informationen zu den F-Ablaufgruppen
– Name der F-Ablaufgruppe
– F-Ablaufgruppen-Signatur
– Aktuelle Zykluszeit
– Max. Zykluszeit
– Aktuelle Laufzeit
– Max. Laufzeit
Für jede F-Peripherie wird Ihnen auf der Webseite "Baugruppenzustand" im Reiter "Fehlersicherheit" Folgendes angezeigt:
● F-Parameter-Signatur (mit Adresse)
● Sicherheitsbetrieb
● F-Überwachungszeit
● F-Quelladresse
● F-Zieladresse
Der schreibende Zugriff auf F-Bausteine ist nicht zulässig.

Hinweis
Das Steuern von fehlersicheren Ein-/Ausgängen kann zum STOP der F-CPU führen.

Die folgenden Punkte betreffen den S7-1500 F Software Controller

Der S7-1500 F Software Controller ist eine fehlersichere Software-CPU, die auf den folgenden Geräten zum Einsatz kommt:
S7-1500 F Software Controller Gerät
CPU 1505SP (T)F • CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1507S F • IPC 2x7E*
• IPC 4x7D*
• IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
CPU 1508S F • IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
* Nur einsetzbar, wenn NVRAM vorhanden (wird automatisch zugewiesen)
** Nur einsetzbar mit PROFIBUS- bzw. PROFINET-Schnittstelle und, wenn NVRAM vorhanden (wird automatisch
zugewiesen)

F-CPUs
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 5
Die in der obigen Tabelle genannten Geräte reagieren beim Einsatz des S7-1500 F Software Controllers und STEP 7 Safety
auch bei erhöhter elektromagnetischer Störbeeinflussung fehlersicher. Spezielle Typprüfungen im Hinblick auf funktionale
Sicherheit sind daher für diese Geräte - im Gegensatz zur F-Peripherie - nicht erforderlich. Beachten Sie jedoch im Hinblick
auf Verfügbarkeit anwendungsspezifische Anforderungen, insbesondere die Normen zur Brennersteuerung.
Der im Lieferumfang enthaltene gelbe Aufkleber mit dem TÜV SÜD-Prüfzeichen für funktionale Sicherheit ist ausschließlich
für die Verwendung im Zusammenhang mit den S7-1500 F Software Controllern bestimmt (nicht im Lieferumfang der
Download-Version). Den Aufkleber können Sie zur Kennzeichnung der Hardware verwenden, auf der der S7-1500 F
Software Controller installiert wurde. Wenn Sie den S7-1500 F Software Controller deinstallieren, müssen Sie den Aufkleber
entfernen.
Sichern und Wiederherstellen
Das Sichern und Wiederherstellen von Projektdaten wird nicht unterstützt.
Passwörter für Schutzstufen
Die PC Station unterscheidet nicht zwischen den beiden Passwörtern der Schutzstufen "Vollzugriff inkl. Fail-safe (kein
Schutz)" und "Vollzugriff (kein Schutz)". Der S7-1500 F Software Controller unterscheidet zwischen den beiden Passwörtern
der Schutzstufen "Vollzugriff inkl. Fail-safe (kein Schutz)" und "Vollzugriff (kein Schutz)".
Anweisung ENDIS_PW
Beim Einsatz der Anweisung ENDIS_PW auf einem IPC können Sie sich von Ihrem System aussperren, weil ein IPC keinen
Betriebsartenschalter besitzt. Als Abhilfe können Sie sinngemäß vorgehen wie in der Online-Hilfe zur Anweisung
ENDIS_PW unter "Ungewolltes Aussperren bei einer S7-1200-CPU verhindern" beschrieben.
Für PC-Stationen bis einschließlich V2.0 gilt: Wenn es zu einer ungewollten Aussperrung gekommen ist, dann können Sie
die Sperre nur durch deinstallieren und installieren des S7-1500 F Software Controllers aufheben.
Für PC-Station ab V2.1 gilt: Mitglieder der Windowsbenutzergruppe "Failsafe Operators" können mit der Funktion "Delete
Configuration" die Aussperrung umgehen.

Hinweis
Der Windowsbenutzer "Jedermann" wird nicht berücksichtigt, wenn er in der Windowsbenutzergruppe "Failsafe Operators"
ist.

Funktionalität TPM
Die Funktionalität TPM darf für S7-1500 F Software Controller nicht genutzt werden, da dies zu einem STOP führen kann.
Nutzung von EWF bzw. UWF und dem EWF- bzw. UWF-Manager
Sie dürfen EWF bzw. UWF und den EWF- bzw. UWF-Manager nicht für das CPU-Volume anwählen.
Weitere Besonderheiten

WARNUNG
Sie müssen den Zugang für den S7-1500 F Software Controller durch einen Zugangsschutz auf Personen begrenzen, die
zum Installieren bzw. Deinstallieren der Software des S7-1500 F Software Controllers berechtigt sind.

Hinweis
Bei einem S7-1500 F Software Controller mit einer PC-Station Version bis einschließlich V2.1 wird die Funktion "Delete
Configuration" am PC-Station Panel nur angeboten, wenn an der F-CPU kein Zugriffsschutz (kein Schutz) eingerichtet ist.
Bei einer PC-Station ab V2.2 wird geprüft, ob der Windowsbenutzer Mitglied der Windowsbenutzergruppe "Failsafe
Operators" ist. Wenn der eingeloggte Windowsbenutzer Mitglied der Gruppe ist, kann er die Funktion "Delete Configuration"
auch beim gesetzten F-Passwort ausführen. Wenn der eingeloggte Windowsbenutzer nicht Mitglied der Gruppe ist, verhält
sich die PC-Station wie bis V2.1.

Hinweis
Wenn der S7-1500 F Software Controller mit einem Zugriffsschutz versehen ist, wird dieser mit "Delete Configuration" nicht
gelöscht und bleibt erhalten.

Hinweis
Benötigte BIOS-Version für CPU 1505SP F kleiner V2.5
Für den Einsatz der CPU 1505SP F benötigen Sie mindestens die BIOS-Version V2.00_02.01.

F-CPUs
6 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Hinweis
Der CPU-Takt darf sich im RUN nicht ändern, da dies zu einem STOP führen würde. Dies können Sie durch das
Deaktivieren der Energiesparfunktion verhindern.

Hinweis
Zuweisung der PROFIsafe-Adressen für F-Module am PROFIBUS an IPCs mit S7-1500 F Software Controller kleiner V2.5
Wenn Sie PROFIsafe-Adressen F-Modulen zuweisen wollen, die über PROFIBUS an einem IPC mit einem S7-1500 F
Software Controller betrieben werden, dann weisen Sie die PROFIsafe-Adressen den F-Modulen zu und führen Sie
anschließend ein Netzaus/Netzein der PROFIBUS-Station durch.

Hinweis
Sicherheitsprogramm laden bzw. Sicherheitsbetrieb aktivieren für S7-1500 F Software Controller kleiner V2.5
Schließen Sie nach dem Laden des Sicherheitsprogramms bzw. nach dem Aktivieren des Sicherheitsbetriebs das Panel und
öffnen Sie es wieder, damit die Anzeige im Panel aktualisiert wird.

Hinweis
Wenn Sie bei einem S7-1500 F Software Controller mit Version 2.0 ein Update auf eine Version > 2.0 durchführen, wird,
wenn sich bereits ein Sicherheitsprogramm auf dem S7-1500 F Software Controller befindet, der Wert "Letzte fehlersichere
Änderung" auf den Installationszeitpunkt gesetzt.

Hinweis
Die Funktionalität "Konfigurationsdatei Export" setzt das Optionspaket STEP 7 Safety ab V15 und einen S7-1500 F Software
Controller ab V2.5 voraus.

Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
DEUTSCHLAND

F-CPUs
A5E35635424-AG,
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
11/2018 7
SIMATIC
S7-1200/S7-1500
F-CPUs
Product Information

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants,
systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and
continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one
element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such
systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent
such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that can be implemented, please visit
(https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly
recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used.
Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers'
exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed visit
(https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Content
Introduction
This Product Information contains important information on the F-CPUs specified in the section "Scope of validity". The
Product Information is part of the product supplied. The information in this Product Information should be considered more
up-to-date than other documentation if uncertainties arise.

Scope of validity
The statements in this product information apply to the F-CPUs listed below:
S7-1200 F-CPUs S7-1500 F-CPUs
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN • CPU 1510SP F-1 PN S7-1500 F-Software
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1513F-1 PN • CPU 1512SP F-1 PN Controller
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN • CPU 1516proF-2 PN • CPU 1505SP (T)F
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1507S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1508S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
• CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
(MFP/ODK)

© Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. All rights reserved

8 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Areas of application
Main areas of application of the S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs are personal and machine safety and burner controls. In addition to
the safety program, you can also program standard applications.
You can operate the S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs in safety or standard mode.
The installed STEP 7 Safety optional package is required for safety mode. If the STEP 7 Safety optional package is not
installed, you can use the S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPUs in standard mode. In standard mode, S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs behave
like standard S7-1200/1500 CPUs.
Additional information on using the S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs in safety mode is available in the programming and operating
manual "SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126)".
Additional information on using the S7-1200 F-CPUs in standard mode is available in the "S7-1200 Programmable controller
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478121)" system manual.
Additional information on using the S7-1500 F-CPUs in standard mode is available in the relevant manuals for the S7-1500
and the standard-T-CPUs S7-1500 at the following links:
● CPUs 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/67295862/133300)
● CPUs 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/22057/man)
● CPUs 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90466439/133300)
● CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13906/man)
● S7-1500 Software Controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109740725)
You can find the latest firmware for the relevant F-CPU by searching for downloads with the respective article number in the
Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com).

Note
Observe any application-specific requirements, for example on mains buffering for power supplies/power packs.

PFDavg and PFH values for F-CPUs

Below are the probability of failure on demand values (PFDavg, PFH values) for the above-named F-CPUs with a service life
of 20 years and an MTTR of 100 hours:
Operation in low demand mode Operation in high demand or continuous mode
low demand mode high demand/continuous mode
According to IEC 61508:2010: According to IEC 61508:2010:
PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1]
demand
< 2E-05 < 1E-09

Overview of the work memory of F-CPUs compared with standard CPUs

CPU Work memory F-CPU Work memory
CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 KB CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 KB
CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC 100 KB CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 KB
CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC 125 KB CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC 150 KB
CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1511-1 PN 150 KB CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 KB
CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 KB CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 KB
CPU 1513-1 PN 300 KB CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 KB
CPU 1515-1 PN 500 KB CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 KB
CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 KB CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 KB
CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 MB CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB

F-CPUs
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 9
CPU Work memory F-CPU Work memory
CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB
CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 MB CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 MB
CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 MB CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 MB
CPU 1518-4 PN/DP 4 MB CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP 6 MB
(MFP/ODK) (MFP/ODK)
CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 KB CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 KB
CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 KB CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 KB
CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 MB CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1.5 MB
CPU 1505SP (T) 1 MB CPU 1505SP (T)F 1.5 MB
CPU 1507S 5 MB CPU 1507S F 7.5 MB
CPU 1508S 10 MB CPU 1508S F 12.5 MB

Support of PROFIsafe V2
Interfaces that support PROFINET IO also support PROFIsafe V2.

Restriction with "CREAT_DB" and "DELETE_DB" instructions

F-DBs can neither be created nor deleted.

Restriction with "READ_DBL" and "WRIT_DBL" instructions

The destination address must not point to an F-DB.

Restrictions when configuring the retentive behavior of data blocks

The configuration of the retentive behavior of data blocks is not supported for F-DBs. This means that the actual values of
the F-DBs will not be retentive in the event of Power OFF/ON and Restart (STOP-RUN) of the F-CPU. The F-DBs retain the
initial values from the load memory.
The "Retain" check box is grayed-out for all tags in F-DBs.

Configuration control (option handling) on an S7-1200 F-CPU

Configuration control (option handling) on an S7-1200 F-CPU is possible with central modules subject to the following
limitation:
● The fail-safe S7-1200 modules cannot be swapped and must also always be physically inserted into their configured slot.
Position the fail-safe S7-1200 modules directly next to the F-CPU. Position the standard modules on the right next to the
fail-safe S7-1200 modules.

Procedure for loading a configuration for firmware < V2.0 for S7-1500 F-CPUs
If you have loaded an S7-1500 F-CPU with a configuration for firmware as of V2.0 with configured protection level "Full
access with fail-safe (no protection)" and you now want to load a configuration for firmware <= V1.8 to this F-CPU, you must
observe the following:
When the configuration with firmware <= V1.8 is loaded to the F-CPU, you will be prompted to enter the password and the
entered password will be identified as invalid.
As a remedy, format the SIMATIC Memory Card as described in the online help for STEP 7 under "Formatting an S7-1500
memory card". You can then load the configuration for firmware <= V1.8 to the F-CPU.

Use of isochronous mode interrupt (F-)OBs

The number of isochronous mode interrupt (F-)OBs depends on the F-CPU used. You can obtain information in the technical
specification of the CPU.
If the sum of the isochronous mode interrupt OBs and the isochronous mode interrupt F-OBs exceeds the number specified
in the technical specifications of the CPU, it is no longer possible to load the standard user program in RUN.

F-CPUs
10 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Display (for S7-1500 F-CPUs with display or panel)
S7-1500 F-CPUs with display show you the following in the "Overview" menu under "Fail-safe":
● Safety mode activated/deactivated
● Collective F-signature
● Last fail-safe change
● Version of STEP 7 Safety with which the safety program was compiled.
● Information on the F-runtime groups
– Name of F-runtime group
– F-runtime groups signature
– Current cycle time
– Max. cycle time
– Current runtime
– Max. runtime
The following is displayed for each F-I/O under "Fail-safe parameters":
● F-parameter signature (with addresses)
● Safety mode
● F-monitoring time
● F-source address
● F-destination address
The following additional menu command is displayed in the "Settings" menu under "Protection":
● Enable/disable F-password
Write access to F-blocks is not permitted.

Note
Controlling fail-safe inputs/outputs can result set the F-CPU to STOP.

Note
With the display firmware V2.5, the display is not refreshed and cannot be operated for a few minutes after loading program
changes. Afterwards, the display restarts.

F-CPUs
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 11
Web server
S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs show you the following on the start page of the Web server:
● Safety mode activated/deactivated
● Collective F-signature
● Last fail-safe change
● Version of STEP 7 Safety with which the safety program was compiled.
● Information on the F-runtime groups
– Name of F-runtime group
– F-runtime groups signature
– Current cycle time
– Max. cycle time
– Current runtime
– Max. runtime
The following is displayed for each F-I/O on the "Module information" web page in the "Fail-safe" tab:
● F-parameter signature (with addresses)
● Safety mode
● F-monitoring time
● F-source address
● F-destination address
Write access to F-blocks is not permitted.

Note
Controlling fail-safe inputs/outputs can result set the F-CPU to STOP.

The following points relate to the S7-1500 F-Software Controller

The S7-1500 F-Software Controller is a fail-safe software CPU that is used on the following devices.
S7-1500 F-Software Controller Device
CPU 1505SP (T)F • CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1507S F • IPC 2x7E*
• IPC 4x7D*
• IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
CPU 1508S F • IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
* Can only be used when NVRAM is present (to be automatically allocated)
** Can only be used with PROFIBUS or PROFINET interface and when NVRAM is present (to be automatically allocated)

F-CPUs
12 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
The devices specified in the table above react in a fail-safe manner when the S7-1500 F-Software Controller and STEP 7
Safety are used, even in the case of elevated electromagnetic interference. Special type tests for functional safety are
therefore not required for these devices – in contrast to F-I/O. With regard to availability, however, you must observe the
application-specific requirements, especially the standards for burner control.
The yellow adhesive label with the TÜV SÜD test mark for functional safety included in the scope of delivery is exclusively
intended for use in connection with S7-1500 F-Software Controllers (not included in the download version of the product
package). You can use the adhesive label to mark the hardware on which the S7-1500 F-Software Controller is installed.
You must remove the adhesive label when you uninstall the S7-1500 F-Software Controller.
Backup and restore
Backup and restoration of project data is not supported.
Passwords for protection levels
The PC station does not distinguish between the two passwords of protection levels "Full access with fail-safe (no
protection)" and "Full access (no protection)". The S7-1500 F-Software Controller distinguishes between the two passwords
of protection levels "Full access with fail-safe (no protection)" and "Full access (no protection)".
ENDIS_PW instruction
When the ENDIS_PW instruction is used on an IPC, you can be locked out of your system because an IPC has no mode
selector. As a remedy, you can follow a procedure similar to that described in the online help for the ENDIS_PW instruction
under "Preventing unintentional lockout of an S7-1200 CPU".
The following applies for PC stations up to and including V2.0: If an unintentional lockout occurs, you can remedy this only
by uninstalling and installing the S7-1500 F-Software Controller.
The following applies for PC stations as of V2.1: Members of the Windows "Failsafe Operators" user group can bypass the
lockout using the "Delete Configuration" function.

Note
The Windows user "Everyone" is not taken into consideration if it is in the "Failsafe Operators" Windows user group.

TPM functionality
The TPM functionality cannot be used for S7-1500 F-Software Controllers because it could result in a STOP.
Using EWF or UWF and the EWF or UWF Manager
You cannot select EWF or UWF and the EWF or UWF Manager for the CPU volume.
Other particularities

WARNING
You must limit access for the S7-1500 F-Software Controller through access protection to persons who are authorized to
install or uninstall the software of the S7-1500 F-Software Controller.

Note
With an S7-1500 F-Software Controller with a PC station up to and including V2.1, the "Delete Configuration" function is only
offered on the PC-station panel when no access protection (no protection) is set up on the F-CPU.
With a PC station as of V2.2, it is checked whether the Windows user is a member of the "Failsafe Operators" Windows user
group. If the logged-on Windows user is a member of the group, he can execute the "Delete Configuration" function even
when the F-password is set. If the logged-on Windows user is not a member of the group, the PC station behaves as up to
V2.1.

Note
If the S7-1500 F-Software Controller features an access protection, this is not deleted with "Delete Configuration" and is
retained.

Note
Required BIOS version for CPU 1505SP F prior to V2.5
For use of the CPU 1505SP F, you require BIOS version V2.00_02.01 or higher.

F-CPUs
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 13
Note
The CPU clock must not be changed in RUN because this would result in a STOP. You can prevent this by disabling the
energy-saving function.

Note
Assignment of PROFIsafe addresses for F-modules via PROFIBUS on IPCs with S7-1500 F Software Controller prior to
V2.5
If you want to assign PROFIsafe addresses for F-modules that are being operated via PROFIBUS on an IPC with an S7-
1500 F-Software Controller, assign the PROFIsafe addresses to the F-modules and then perform a power on/power off of
the PROFIBUS station.

Note
Loading the safety program or activating safety mode for S7-1500 F Software Controller prior to V2.5
After loading the safety program or activating safety mode, close the panel and then open it again to update the display on
the panel.

Note
If you execute an update for a S7-1500 F Software Controller with V2.0 to a version > 2.0, the value "Last fail-safe change"
is set to the time of installation if a safety program is already installed on the S7-1500 F-Software Controller.

Note
The "Configuration file export" functionality requires the STEP 7 Safety add-on package as of V15 and an S7-1500 F
Software Controller prior to V2.5.

Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY

F-CPUs F-CPUs
A5E35635424-AG,
14 11/2018 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
SIMATIC
S7-1200/S7-1500
CPU F
Information produit

Notes relatives à la sécurité

Siemens commercialise des produits et solutions comprenant des fonctions de sécurité industrielle qui contribuent à une
exploitation sûre des installations, solutions, machines, équipements et réseaux.
Pour garantir la sécurité des installations, systèmes, machines et réseaux contre les cybermenaces, il est nécessaire
d’implémenter (et de préserver) un concept de sécurité industrielle global et de pointe. Les produits et solutions de Siemens
constituent une partie de ce concept.
Il incombe aux clients d’empêcher tout accès non autorisé à leurs installations, systèmes, machines et réseaux. Ces
systèmes, machines et composants doivent uniquement être connectés au réseau d’entreprise ou à Internet si et dans la
mesure où cela est nécessaire et seulement si des mesures de protection adéquates (ex: pare-feux et/ou segmentation du
réseau) ont été prises.
Pour plus d’informations sur les mesures de protection pouvant être mises en œuvre dans le domaine de la sécurité
industrielle, rendez-vous sur (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Les produits et solutions Siemens font l’objet de développements continus pour être encore plus sûrs. Siemens
recommande vivement d’effectuer des mises à jour dès que celles-ci sont disponibles et d’utiliser la dernière version des
produits. L’utilisation de versions qui ne sont plus prises en charge et la non-application des dernières mises à jour peut
augmenter le risque de cybermenaces pour nos clients.
Pour être informé des mises à jour produit, abonnez-vous au flux RSS Siemens Industrial Security à l’adresse suivante
(https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Contenu
Introduction
Cette Information produit contient des indications importantes concernant les CPU F citées au paragraphe "Domaine de
validité". L'Information produit fait partie de la livraison du produit. Les informations contenues dans cette information produit
prévalent en cas de doute sur celles d'autres documents.

Domaine de validité
Les informations contenues dans cette Information produit s'appliquent aux CPU F suivantes :
CPU F S7-1200 CPU F S7-1500
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN • CPU 1510SP F-1 PN Contrôleur logiciel S7-1500
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1513F-1 PN • CPU 1512SP F-1 PN F
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN • CPU 1516proF-2 PN • CPU 1505SP (T)F
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1507S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1508S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
• CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
(MFP/ODK)

© Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. Tous droits réservés

A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 15
Champs d’application
Les principaux champs d’application des CPU F S7-1200/1500 sont la sécurité des personnes et des machines ainsi que la
commande de brûleurs. Outre le programme de sécurité, vous pouvez programmer des applications standard.
Vous pouvez exploiter les CPU F S7-1200/1500 en mode de sécurité ou en mode standard.
L'installation du logiciel optionnel STEP 7 Safety est requise pour le mode de sécurité. Si le logiciel optionnel STEP 7 Safety
n'est pas installé, vous pouvez utiliser les CPU F S7-1200/1500 en mode standard. En mode standard, les CPU F S7-
1200/1500 ont le même comportement que les CPU S7-1200/1500 standard.
Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des CPU F S7-1200/1500 en mode de sécurité, référez-vous au manuel de
programmation et d'utilisation "SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126)".
Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des CPU F S7-1200 en mode standard, référez-vous au manuel système "Système
d'automatisation S7-1200 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/fr/view/109478121)".
Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des CPU F S7-1500 en mode standard, référez-vous aux manuels des CPU
standard S7-1500 et des CPU T standard S7-1500 respectifs sous les liens internet suivants :
● CPU 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/67295862/133300)
● CPUs 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/fr/22057/man)
● CPU 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/90466439/133300)
● CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/fr/ps/13906/man)
● Contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/109740725)
Vous trouverez le firmware actuel de la CPU F concernée en parcourant les téléchargements avec le n° d'article respectif
sur le portail Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com).

Remarque
Tenez compte des exigences spécifiques à une application, p. ex. l'immunité aux microcoupures pour les blocs
d'alimentation.

Valeurs PFDavg, PFH pour les CPU F

Vous trouverez ci-dessous les valeurs de la probabilité de défaillance (valeurs PFDavg, PFH) pour les CPU F précitées avec
un temps de mission de 20 ans et une durée de panne de 100 heures :
Fonctionnement en mode demande faible Fonctionnement en mode demande élevé / mode continu
low demand mode high demand/continuous mode
selon la norme CEI 61508:2010 : selon la norme CEI 61508:2010 :
PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1]
demand
< 2E-05 < 1E-09

Aperçu de la mémoire de travail des CPU F, comparaison avec les CPU standard
CPU Mémoire de travail CPU F Mémoire de travail
CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 Ko CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 Ko
CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC 100 Ko CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 Ko
CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC 125 Ko CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC 150 Ko
CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1511-1 PN 150 Ko CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 Ko
CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 Ko CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 Ko
CPU 1513-1 PN 300 Ko CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 Ko
CPU 1515-1 PN 500 Ko CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 Ko
CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 Ko CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 Ko

CPU F
16 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
CPU Mémoire de travail CPU F Mémoire de travail
CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 Mo CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mo
CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mo CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mo
CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 Mo CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 Mo
CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 Mo CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 Mo
CPU 1518-4 PN/DP 4 Mo CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP 6 Mo
(MFP/ODK) (MFP/ODK)
CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 Ko CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 Ko
CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 Ko CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 Ko
CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 Mo CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1,5 Mo
CPU 1505SP (T) 1 Mo CPU 1505SP (T)F 1,5 Mo
CPU 1507S 5 Mo CPU 1507S F 7,5 Mo
CPU 1508S 10 Mo CPU 1508S F 12,5 Mo

Prise en charge de PROFIsafe V2

Les interfaces qui prennent en charge PROFINET IO prennent également en charge PROFIsafe V2.

Restriction pour les instructions "CREAT_DB" et "DELETE_DB"

Les blocs de données F ne peuvent être ni générés ni effacés.

Restriction pour les instructions "READ_DBL" et "WRIT_DBL"

L’adresse de destination ne peut pas être celle d’un bloc de données F (DB F).

Restriction lors de la configuration du comportement rémanent des blocs de données

La configuration de la rémanence des blocs de données F n’est pas prise en charge. Ainsi, les valeurs effectives des DB F
ne sont pas rémanentes après une mise hors tension puis sous tension et un redémarrage (STOP-RUN) de la CPU F. Les
DB F prennent les valeurs initiales de la mémoire de chargement.
La case à cocher "Rémanence" est grisée pour toutes les variables dans les DB F.

Commande de configuration (gestion des options) sur une CPU F S7-1200

La commande de configuration (gestion des options) sur une CPU F S7-1200 est possible avec des modules centralisés
avec les restrictions suivantes :
● Les modules de sécurité S7-1200 ne doivent pas être échangés et doivent toujours être enfichés à l'emplacement qui a
été configuré pour eux.
Placez les modules de sécurité S7-1200 directement à côté de la CPU F. Placez les modules standard à droite à côté des
modules de sécurité S7-1200.

Marche à suivre pour charger une configuration pour un firmware de version antérieure à la V2.0 pour des CPU F S7-1500
Si vous avez chargé une CPU F S7-1500 avec une configuration pour firmware à partir de la version V2.0 avec le niveau de
protection "Accès complet, y compris failsafe (pas de protection)" configuré et que vous souhaitez charger une configuration
pour un firmware de version antérieure à la version V1.8 sur cette CPU F, vous devez tenir compte de ce qui suit :
Lors du chargement de la configuration avec un firmware de version antérieure à la version V1.8 sur la CPU F, le mot de
passe est demandé et détecté comme incorrect.
Pour remédier à ce problème, formatez la carte mémoire SIMATIC en suivant la description de l'aide en ligne de STEP 7
sous "Formater une carte mémoire S7-1500". Vous pouvez ensuite charger la configuration pour le firmware de version
antérieure à la version V1.8 sur la CPU F.

CPU F
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 17
Utilisation des OB (F) d'alarme d'isochronisme
Le nombre d'OB (F) d'alarme d'isochronisme qu'il est possible d'utiliser est fonction de la CPU F mise en œuvre. Pour plus
d'informations à ce sujet, référez-vous aux caractéristiques techniques de la CPU.
Si la somme des OB d'alarme d'isochronisme et des OB F d'alarme d'isochronisme dépasse le nombre spécifié dans les
caractéristiques techniques de la CPU, il n'est plus possible de charger le programme utilisateur standard en RUN.

Écran (pour les CPU F S7-1500 avec écran ou panneau)

Les CPU F S7-1500 avec écran affichent les indications suivantes dans le menu "Vue d'ensemble", sous "De sécurité" :
● Mode de sécurité activé/désactivé
● Signature globale
● Dernière modification de sécurité
● La version de STEP 7 Safety avec laquelle le programme de sécurité a été compilé.
● Informations sur les groupes d'exécution F
– Nom du groupe d'exécution F
– Signature de groupe d'exécution F
– Temps de cycle actuel
– Temps de cycle max.
– Temps d'exécution actuel
– Temps d'exécution max.
Vous avez les indications suivantes sous "Paramètres de sécurité" pour chaque périphérie de sécurité :
● Signature de paramètres F (avec adresse)
● Mode de sécurité
● Temps de surveillance F
● Adresse source F
● Adresse cible F
La commande de menu supplémentaire suivante s'affiche dans le menu "Paramètres", sous "Protection".
● Verrouiller/déverrouiller le mot de passe F
L'accès en écriture aux blocs F n'est pas autorisé.

Remarque
La commande d'entrées /sorties de sécurité entraîne l'arrêt de la CPU F.

Remarque
Après un chargement des modifications du programme, le rafraîchissement de l'écran avec la version de firmware V2.5 est
retardé de quelques minutes et l'écran n'est pendant ce temps pas utilisable, puis l'écran redémarre.

CPU F
18 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Serveur Web
Les CPU F S7-1200/1500 vous fournissent les indications suivantes sur la page d'accueil du serveur Web :
● Mode de sécurité activé/désactivé
● Signature globale F
● Dernière modification de sécurité
● La version de STEP 7 Safety avec laquelle le programme de sécurité a été compilé.
● Informations sur les groupes d'exécution F
– Nom du groupe d'exécution F
– Signature de groupe d'exécution F
– Temps de cycle actuel
– Temps de cycle max.
– Temps d'exécution actuel
– Temps d'exécution max.
L'onglet "Sécurité en cas de défaut" sur la page Web "Etat du module" vous fournit les informations suivantes pour chaque
périphérie de sécurité :
● Signature de paramètres F (avec adresse)
● Mode de sécurité
● Temps de surveillance F
● Adresse source F
● Adresse cible F
L'accès en écriture aux blocs F n'est pas autorisé.

Remarque
La commande d'entrées /sorties de sécurité entraîne l'arrêt de la CPU F.

Les points suivants concernent le contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F

Le contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F est une CPU logicielle de sécurité qui est utilisée sur les appareils suivants :
Contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F Appareil
CPU 1505SP (T)F • CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1507S F • IPC 2x7E*
• IPC 4x7D*
• IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
CPU 1508S F • IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
* Utilisable seulement lorsqu'une NVRAM est présente (affectation automatique)
** Utilisable seulement avec interface PROFIBUS ou PROFINET et si une NVRAM est présente (affectation automatique)

CPU F
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 19
Les appareils présentés dans le tableau ci-dessus réagissent de manière sûre lors de l'utilisation du contrôleur logiciel
S7-1500 F et de STEP 7 Safety, y compris en cas d'importantes interférences électromagnétiques. C'est pourquoi des
essais de sécurité spéciaux ne sont pas nécessaires pour ces appareils. Seule la périphérie de sécurité doit être soumise à
un examen correspondant. Tenez compte cependant des exigences spécifiques d'une application, notamment des normes
relatives à la commande de brûleurs concernant la disponibilité.
L'étiquette jaune fournie à la livraison et qui porte la marque d'homologation du TÜV SÜD pour la sécurité fonctionelle est
prévue exclusivement pour l'utilisation de contrôleurs logiciels S7-1500 F (ne fait pas partie de la livraison en cas de
téléchargement). Vous pouvez utiliser l'étiquette pour identifier le matériel sur lequel a été installé le contrôleur logiciel
S7-1500 F. Si vous désinstallez le contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F, vous devez retirer l'étiquette.
Sauvegarde et restauration
La sauvegarde et la restauration de données de projet ne sont pas prises en charge.
Mots de passe pour les niveaux de protection
La station PC ne fait pas la différence entre les deux mots de passe des niveaux de protection "Accès complet, y compris
failsafe (pas de protection)" et "Accès complet (pas de protection)". Le contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F ne fait pas la différence
entre les deux mots de passe des niveaux de protection "Accès complet, y compris failsafe (pas de protection)" et "Accès
complet (pas de protection)".
Instruction ENDIS_PW
Lors de l'utilisation de l'instruction ENDIS_PW sur un IPC, vous pouvez perdre tout accès à votre système puisqu'un IPC ne
possède pas de sélecteur de mode. Pour remédier à ce problème, vous pouvez suivre ce qui est décrit dans l'aide en ligne à
propos de l'instruction ENDIS_PW sous "Éviter le blocage involontaire pour une CPU S7-1200".
Pour les stations PC jusqu'à la version V2.0 : Si un blocage involontaire se produit, vous ne pouvez procéder au déblocage
qu'en désinstallant et installant le contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F.
Pour la station PC à partir de la V2.1 : Les membres du groupe d'utilisateurs Windows "Failsafe Operators" peuvent utiliser
la fonction "Delete Configuration" pour éviter le blocage.

Remarque
L'utilisateur Windows "Tout le monde" n'est pas pris en compte s'il appartient au groupe d'utilisateurs Windows "Failsafe
Operators".

Fonction TPM
La fonction TPM ne peut pas être utilisée pour le contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F, sous peine de provoquer un ARRÊT.
Utilisation du EWF ou UWF et du gestionnaire EWF ou UWF
Vous ne devez pas sélectionner EWF ou UWF et le gestionnaire EWF ou UWF pour le volume de la CPU.
Particularités supplémentaires

ATTENTION
Une sécurité d'accès vous permet de restreindre le droit d'accès au contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F à un cercle de personnes
qui seront alors les seules à avoir le droit d'installer ou de désinstaller le logiciel du contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F.

Remarque
Dans le cas d'un contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F jusqu'à V2.1 comprise, la fonction "Delete Configuration" n'est proposée sur
le panneau de commande de la station PC que si aucune protection d'accès n'est configurée sur la CPU F (pas de
protection).
Dans le cas d'une station PC à partir de V2.2, une vérification est effectuée pour déterminer si l'utilisateur est membre du
groupe d'utilisateurs Windows "Failsafe Operators". Si l'utilisateur Windows est membre du groupe, il peut également
exécuter la fonction "Delete Configuration" en ayant entré le mot de passe F. Si l'utilisateur Windows identifié n'est pas
membre du groupe, la station PC se comporte comme les versions jusqu'à V2.1.

Remarque
Si le contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F est pourvu d'une protection d'accès, cette dernière n'est pas supprimée avec "Delete
Configuration", elle est conservée.

CPU F
20 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Remarque
Version BIOS requise pour la CPU 1505SP F inférieure à V2.5
Pour pouvoir utiliser la CPU 1505SP F, il vous faut au moins la version V2.00_02.01 du BIOS.

Remarque
L'horloge de la CPU ne doit pas être modifiée en mode MARCHE, sous peine de provoquer un ARRÊT. Vous pouvez
empêcher cela en désactivant la fonction d'économie d'énergie.

Remarque
Affectation d'adresses PROFIsafe à des modules F avec PROFIBUS sur des IPC avec contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F de
version inférieure à V2.5.
Si vous voulez affecter des adresses PROFIsafe à des modules de sécurité qui fonctionnent avec PROFIBUS sur un IPC
avec un contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F, attribuez les adresses PROFIsafe aux modules F puis effectuez une mise hors
tension puis une mise sous tension de la station PROFIBUS.

Remarque
Charger le programme de sécurité ou activer le mode de sécurité pour le contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F de version inférieure
à V2.5.
Après avoir chargé le programme de sécurité ou activé le mode de sécurité, fermez le panneau de commande et ouvrez-le
de nouveau pour actualiser l'affichage.

Remarque
Lors de la mise à jour d'un contrôleur logiciel S7-1500 F version 2.0 à une version > 2.0, la valeur "Dernière modification de
sécurité" est mise sur le dernier événement d'installation si le programme de sécurité se trouve déjà sur le contrôleur
logiciel S7-1500 F.

Remarque
La fonctionnalité "Exportation du fichier de configuration" requiert le pack logiciel STEP 7 Safety à partir de la version V15 et
la version S7-1500 F Software Controller à partir de V2.5.

Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
ALLEMAGNE

CPU F
A5E35635424-AG,
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
11/2018 21
SIMATIC
S7-1200/S7-1500
CPU F
Información del producto

Información de seguridad
Siemens ofrece productos y soluciones con funciones de seguridad industrial con el objetivo de hacer más seguro el
funcionamiento de instalaciones, sistemas, máquinas y redes.
Para proteger las instalaciones, los sistemas, las máquinas y las redes de amenazas cibernéticas, es necesario
implementar (y mantener continuamente) un concepto de seguridad industrial integral que sea conforme a la tecnología
más avanzada. Los productos y las soluciones de Siemens constituyen únicamente una parte de este concepto.
Los clientes son responsables de impedir el acceso no autorizado a sus instalaciones, sistemas, máquinas y redes. Dichos
sistemas, máquinas y componentes solo deben estar conectados a la red corporativa o a Internet cuando y en la medida
que sea necesario y siempre que se hayan tomado las medidas de protección adecuadas (p. ej. uso de cortafuegos y
segmentación de la red).
Para obtener información adicional sobre las medidas de seguridad industrial que podrían ser implementadas, por favor
visite (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Los productos y las soluciones de Siemens están sometidos a un desarrollo constante con el fin de mejorar todavía más su
seguridad. Siemens recomienda expresamente realizar actualizaciones en cuanto estén disponibles y utilizar únicamente
las últimas versiones de los productos. El uso de versiones anteriores o que ya no se soportan puede aumentar el riesgo de
amenazas cibernéticas.
Para mantenerse informado de las actualizaciones de productos, recomendamos que se suscriba al Siemens Industrial
Security RSS Feed en (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Contenido
Introducción
Esta información de producto contiene datos importantes sobre las CPU F mencionadas en el apartado "Ámbito de validez".
La información de producto forma parte del producto suministrado. En caso de duda, el contenido de esta información del
producto prevalece sobre lo indicado en otras fuentes.

Ámbito de validez
El contenido de esta información del producto es válido para las CPU F que se indican a continuación:
CPU F S7-1200 CPU F S7-1500
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN • CPU 1510SP F-1 PN Controladores por software
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1513F-1 PN • CPU 1512SP F-1 PN S7-1500 F
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN • CPU 1516proF-2 PN • CPU 1505SP (T)F
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1507S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1508S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
• CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
(MFP/ODK)

© Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. Reservados todos los derechos

22 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Campos de aplicación
Los principales campos de aplicación de las CPU F S7-1200/1500 son la protección de personas y máquinas así como el
control de quemadores. Además del programa de seguridad, también se pueden programar aplicaciones estándar.
Las CPU F S7-1200/1500 se pueden utilizar en modo de seguridad o en modo estándar.
Para el modo de seguridad es necesario que esté instalado el paquete opcional STEP 7 Safety. Si no está instalado el
paquete opcional STEP 7 Safety, puede utilizar las CPU F S7-1200/1500 en modo estándar. En el modo estándar, las CPU
F S7-1200/1500 se comportan como CPU estándar S7-1200/1500.
Encontrará información sobre el uso de las CPU F S7-1200/1500 en modo de seguridad en el manual de programación y de
manejo "SIMATIC Safety: Configuring and Programming (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126)"
(en inglés).
Encontrará información sobre el uso de las CPU F S7-1200 en modo estándar en el manual de sistema "Sistema de
automatización S7-1200 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/es/view/109478121)".
Encontrará información sobre el uso de las CPU F S7-1500 en modo estándar en los respectivos manuales de producto de
las CPU estándar S7-1500 y CPU T estándar S7-1500, en los enlaces siguientes:
● CPU 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/67295862/133300)
● CPU 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/es/ps/22057/man)
● CPU 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/90466439/133300)
● CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/es/ps/13906/man)
● Controladores por software S7-1500 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/109740725)
Encontrará el firmware actual para la CPU en cuestión si busca descargas con la referencia correspondiente en el Industry
Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com).

Nota
Tenga en cuenta los requisitos específicos de la aplicación, p. ej., en lo que respecta al tiempo de regulación por pérdida de
alimentación en el caso de fuentes de alimentación o generadores de alta tensión.

Valores PFDavg, PFH para CPU F

A continuación se ofrecen los valores de probabilidad de fallo (valores PFDavg, PFH) para las CPU antes mencionadas con
una vida útil de 20 años y un tiempo de reparación de 100 horas:
Funcionamiento en modo de baja demanda Funcionamiento en modo de demanda alta o continua
low demand mode high demand/continuous mode
según IEC 61508:2010: según IEC 61508:2010:
PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1]
demand
< 2E-05 < 1E-09

Comparativa de la memoria de trabajo de las CPU F frente a la de las CPU estándar

CPU Memoria de trabajo CPU F Memoria de trabajo
CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 kbytes CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 kbytes
CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC 100 kbytes CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 kbytes
CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC 125 kbytes CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC 150 kbytes
CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1511-1 PN 150 kbytes CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 kbytes
CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 kbytes CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 kbytes
CPU 1513-1 PN 300 kbytes CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 kbytes
CPU 1515-1 PN 500 kbytes CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 kbytes
CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 kbytes CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 kbytes

CPU F
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 23
CPU Memoria de trabajo CPU F Memoria de trabajo
CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 Mbyte CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbytes
CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbytes CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbytes
CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 Mbytes CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 Mbytes
CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 Mbytes CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 Mbytes
CPU 1518-4 PN/DP 4 Mbytes CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP 6 Mbytes
(MFP/ODK) (MFP/ODK)
CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 kbytes CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 kbytes
CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 kbytes CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 kbytes
CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 Mbyte CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1,5 Mbytes
CPU 1505SP (T) 1 Mbyte CPU 1505SP (T)F 1,5 Mbytes
CPU 1507S 5 Mbytes CPU 1507S F 7,5 Mbytes
CPU 1508S 10 Mbytes CPU 1508S F 12,5 Mbytes

Soporte de PROFIsafe V2
Las interfaces que soportan PROFINET IO también soportan PROFIsafe V2.

Restricción con las instrucciones "CREAT_DB" y "DELETE_DB"

Los bloques de datos F no se pueden crear ni eliminar.

Restricción con las instrucciones "READ_DBL" y "WRIT_DBL"

La dirección de destino no debe apuntar a un bloque de datos F.

Restricción en la configuración del comportamiento remanente de bloques de datos

No se puede configurar la remanencia de bloques de datos F. Esto significa que en caso de Power Off/On y rearranque
(STOP-RUN) de la CPU F, los valores actuales de los bloques de datos F no son remanentes. Los bloques de datos F
contienen los valores iniciales de la memoria de carga.
La casilla de verificación "Remanencia" de los bloques de datos F se visualiza en gris para todas las variables.

Control de configuración (configuración futura) en una CPU F S7-1200

El control de configuración (configuración futura) en una CPU F S7-1200 se puede realizar con módulos centrales con la
siguiente restricción:
● Los módulos de seguridad S7-1200 no puede cambiarse y deben estar siempre físicamente enchufados en el slot que
tienen configurado.
Coloque los módulos de seguridad S7-1200 directamente junto a la CPU F. Coloque los módulos estándar a la derecha de
los módulos de seguridad S7-1200.

Procedimiento para cargar una configuración para firmware < V2.0 en CPU F S7-1500
Si ha cargado en una CPU F S7-1500 una configuración para el firmware V2.0 o sup. con el nivel de protección configurado
"Acceso completo incl. de seguridad (sin protección)" y ahora quiere cargar una configuración para firmware <= V1.8 en
esta CPU F, deberá tener en cuenta lo siguiente:
Cuando se carga la configuración con firmware <= V1.8 en la CPU F la contraseña se consulta y se reconoce como no
válida.
Para solucionarlo, formatee la SIMATIC Memory Card como se describe en la ayuda en pantalla de STEP 7, en "Formatear
una S7-1500 Memory Card". A continuación puede cargar la configuración para firmware <= V1.8 en la CPU F.

Uso de OB (de seguridad) de alarma de sincronismo

El número de OB (de seguridad) de sincronismo depende de la CPU de seguridad utilizada. Encontrará información al
respecto en los datos técnicos de la CPU.
Si la suma de los OB de sincronismo y del OB F de sincronismo excede el número indicado en los datos técnicos de la
CPU, ya no será posible cargar el programa de usuario estándar en RUN.

CPU F
24 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Display (en CPU F S7-1500 con display o panel)
Las CPU F S7-1500 con display muestran lo siguiente en el menú "Vista general", bajo "Seguridad":
● Modo de seguridad activado/desactivado
● Firma general F
● Última modificación de seguridad
● La versión de STEP 7 Safety con la que se ha compilado el programa de seguridad.
● Información sobre los grupos de ejecución F
– Nombre del grupo de ejecución F
– Firma del grupo de ejecución F
– Tiempo de ciclo actual
– Tiempo de ciclo máx.
– Tiempo de ejecución actual
– Tiempo de ejecución máx.
Para cada periferia F, en "Parámetros de seguridad" se muestra lo siguiente:
● Firma de parámetros F (con dirección)
● Modo de seguridad
● Tiempo de vigilancia F
● Dirección de origen F
● Dirección de destino F
En el menú "Ajustes", dentro de "Protección", se muestra la siguiente opción de menú adicional:
● Habilitar/bloquear contraseña F
No está permitido el acceso de escritura a los bloques F.

Nota
El control de entradas y salidas de seguridad puede producir un STOP de la CPU F.

Nota
Con el firmware V2.5 del display, tras cargar los cambios en el programa no se actualiza durante algunos pocos minutos el
display y no puede manejarse, seguidamente se reinicia el display.

CPU F
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 25
Servidor web
Las CPU S7-1200/1500 muestran lo siguiente en la página de inicio del servidor web:
● Modo de seguridad activado/desactivado
● Firma general F
● Última modificación de seguridad
● La versión de STEP 7 Safety con la que se ha compilado el programa de seguridad.
● Información sobre los grupos de ejecución F
– Nombre del grupo de ejecución F
– Firma del grupo de ejecución F
– Tiempo de ciclo actual
– Tiempo de ciclo máx.
– Tiempo de ejecución actual
– Tiempo de ejecución máx.
Para cada periferia F, la página web "Información del módulo" muestra lo siguiente en la pestaña "Fail-safe":
● Firma de parámetros F (con dirección)
● Modo de seguridad
● Tiempo de vigilancia F
● Dirección de origen F
● Dirección de destino F
No está permitido el acceso de escritura a los bloques F.

Nota
El control de entradas y salidas de seguridad puede producir un STOP de la CPU F.

Los puntos siguientes afectan al controlador por software S7-1500 F

El controlador por software S7-1500 F Software Controller es una CPU por software de seguridad que se utiliza en los
siguientes equipos:
Controladores por software S7-1500 F Equipo
CPU 1505SP (T)F • CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1507S F • IPC 2x7E*
• IPC 4x7D*
• IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
CPU 1508S F • IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
* Posible solo si se dispone de NVRAM (se asigna de forma automática)
** Solo puede utilizarse con interfaz PROFINET y PROFIBUS y, si hay NVRAM (se asigna de forma automática)

CPU F
26 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Los equipos indicados en la tabla anterior reaccionan de forma segura cuando se utiliza el controlador por software
S7-1500 F Software Controller y STEP 7 Safety incluso bajo fuertes perturbaciones electromagnéticas. Así pues, para estos
equipos no son necesarios ensayos de tipo especiales por lo que respecta a la seguridad funcional, a diferencia de lo que
ocurre con la periferia F. Sin embargo, en lo que se refiere a la disponibilidad de los requisitos específicos de las
aplicaciones deben tenerse en cuenta especialmente las normas sobre control de quemadores.
La etiqueta adhesiva amarilla con el sello TÜV SÜD de seguridad funcional que se incluye en el paquete de suministro está
prevista exclusivamente para el uso con los controladores por software S7-1500 F (no se incluye en la versión de
descarga). Puede emplear la etiqueta para marcar el hardware en el que se ha instalado el controlador por software
S7-1500 F. Si desinstala el controlador por software S7-1500 F Software Controller, deberá retirar la etiqueta.
Copia de seguridad y restauración
No se soporta la copia de seguridad y restauración de datos de proyecto.
Contraseñas para niveles de protección
La estación PC no hace distinción entre las dos contraseñas de los niveles de protección "Acceso completo incl. de
seguridad (sin protección)" y "Acceso completo (sin protección)". El controlador por software S7-1500 F sí hace distinción
entre las dos contraseñas de los niveles de protección "Acceso completo incl. de seguridad (sin protección)" y "Acceso
completo (sin protección)".
Instrucción ENDIS_PW
En caso de utilizar la instrucción ENDIS_PW en un IPC puede verse bloqueado por parte del sistema porque un IPC no
dispone de selector de modo. Para solucionarlo puede proceder de forma análoga a como se indica en el apartado "Impedir
el bloqueo no intencionado en una CPU S7-1200" de la ayuda en pantalla para la instrucción ENDIS_PW.
Para las estaciones de PC hasta la versión V2.0 vale lo siguiente: Si se ha producido un bloqueo no intencionado, solo
puede anular el bloqueo desinstalando e instalando de nuevo el controlador por software S7-1500 F.
Para la estación de PC a partir de la versión V2.1 vale lo siguiente: Los miembros del grupo de usuarios de Windows
"Failsafe Operators" pueden omitir el bloqueo con la función "Delete Configuration".

Nota
El usuario de Windows "Cualquiera" no se tiene en cuanta si forma parte del grupo de usuarios de Windows "Failsafe
Operators".

Funcionalidad TPM
La funcionalidad TPM no puede utilizarse para el controlador por software S7-1500 F porque podría dar lugar a un STOP.
Uso de EWF o UWF y el EWF o UWF-Manager
No está permitido seleccionar el EWF o UWF y el EWF o UWF Manager para el volumen de la CPU.
Otras particularidades

ADVERTENCIA
Debe utilizar una protección de acceso para limitar el acceso al controlador por software S7-1500 F a aquellas personas
autorizadas para instalar o desinstalar el software del controlador por software S7-1500 F.

Nota
En un controlador por software S7-1500 F con una estación PC hasta la versión V2.1, la función "Delete Configuration" solo
estará disponible en el panel de la estación PC si en la CPU F no se ha configurado ninguna protección de acceso (sin
protección).
En una estación PC a partir de la versión V2.2 se comprueba si el usuario de Windows es miembro del grupo de usuarios
de Windows "Failsafe Operators". Si el usuario de Windows registrado es miembro del grupo, puede ejecutar la función
"Delete Configuration" incluso si se ha definido la contraseña F. Si el usuario de Windows que ha iniciado sesión no es
miembro del grupo, la estación PC se comportará como hasta la versión V2.1.

Nota
Si el controlador por software S7-1500 F dispone de protección de acceso, esta no se borra con "Delete Configuration", sino
que se mantiene.

CPU F
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 27
Nota
Versión necesaria de la BIOS para CPU 1505SP F anterior a la versión V2.5
Para el uso de la CPU 1505SP F se necesita la versión BIOS V2.00_02.01 o superior.

Nota
El ciclo de la CPU no se puede modificar en RUN, ya que provocaría un STOP. Puede evitarlo desactivando la función de
ahorro de energía.

Nota
Asignación de las direcciones PROFIsafe para módulos F conectados a PROFIBUS en IPC con controladores por software
S7-1500 F anteriores a la versión V2.5
Si desea asignar direcciones PROFIsafe a módulos F conectados mediante PROFIBUS a un IPC con un controlador por
software S7-1500 F, asigne las direcciones PROFIsafe a los módulos F y a continuación realice un Power Off/On de la
estación PROFIBUS.

Nota
Cargar el programa de seguridad o activar el modo de seguridad para controladores por software S7-1500 F anteriores a la
versión V2.5
Después de cargar el programa de seguridad o de activar el modo de seguridad, cierre el panel y ábralo de nuevo para que
se actualice la imagen en el panel.

Nota
Si en S7-1500 F Software Controller con versión 2.0 se actualiza a una versión > 2.0 y este controlador ya contiene un
programa de seguridad, el valor "Última modificación de seguridad" se ajustará a la hora de la instalación.

Nota
La funcionalidad "Archivo de configuración exportación" requiere el paquete opcional STEP 7 Safety a partir de la versión
V15 y un controlador por software S7-1500 F a partir de la versión V2.5.

Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
ALEMANIA

CPU F CPU F
A5E35635424-AG,
28 11/2018 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
SIMATIC
S7-1200/S7-1500
CPU F
Informazioni sul prodotto

Indicazioni di sicurezza
Siemens commercializza prodotti e soluzioni dotati di funzioni Industrial Security che contribuiscono al funzionamento sicuro
di impianti, soluzioni, macchine e reti.
La protezione di impianti, sistemi, macchine e reti da minacce cibernetiche, richiede l'implementazione e la gestione
continua di un concetto globale di Industrial Security che corrisponda allo stato attuale della tecnica. I prodotti e le soluzioni
Siemens costituiscono parte integrante di questo concetto.
E' responsabilità dei clienti prevenire accessi non autorizzati ai propri impianti, sistemi, macchine e reti. Tali sistemi,
macchine e componenti dovrebbero essere connessi unicamente a una rete aziendale o a internet se e nella misura in cui
detta connessione sia necessaria e solo quando siano attive appropriate misure di sicurezza (ad es. firewall e
segmentazione della rete).
Per ulteriori informazioni relative a misure di Industrial Security implementabili potete visitare il sito
(https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
I prodotti e le soluzioni Siemens vengono costantemente perfezionati per incrementarne la sicurezza. Siemens raccomanda
espressamente che gli aggiornamenti dei prodotti siano effettuati non appena disponibili e che siano utilizzate le versioni più
aggiornate. L’utilizzo di versioni di prodotti non più supportate ed il mancato aggiornamento degli stessi incrementa il rischio
di attacchi cibernetici.
Per essere informati sugli update dei prodotti, potete iscrivervi a Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed al sito
(https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Contenuto
Introduzione
Le presenti Informazioni sul prodotto contengono importanti avvertenze sulle CPU F trattate al paragrafo Ambito di validità.
Le informazioni sul prodotto sono parte integrante del prodotto oggetto della fornitura e hanno, in caso di dubbio, priorità su
qualsiasi altra affermazione.

Ambito di validità
Le affermazioni contenute nella presente informazioni sul prodotto hanno validità per le CPU F elencate nel seguito:
CPU F S7-1200 CPU F S7-1500
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN • CPU 1510SP F-1 PN S7-1500 F Software
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1513F-1 PN • CPU 1512SP F-1 PN Controller
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN • CPU 1516proF-2 PN • CPU 1505SP (T)F
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1507S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1508S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
• CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
(MFP/ODK)

© Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. Tutti i diritti riservati

A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 29
Campi di impiego
I principali campi di impiego delle CPU F S7-1200/1500 consistono nella protezione del personale e delle macchine nonché
nel comando di bruciatori. Oltre al programma di sicurezza si possono programmare anche applicazioni standard.
Le CPU F S7-1200/1500 possono essere impiegate sia nel funzionamento di sicurezza, sia nel funzionamento standard.
Per il funzionamento di sicurezza è richiesta l'installazione del pacchetto opzionale STEP 7 Safety . In assenza del
pacchetto opzionale STEP 7 Safety installato, le CPU F S7-1200/1500 possono essere impiegate nel funzionamento
standard. Nel funzionamento standard le CPU F S7-1200/1500 si comportano come le CPU S7-1200/1500.
Informazioni sull'impiego delle CPU F S7-1200/1500 nel funzionamento di sicurezza sono reperibili nel Manuale di
programmazione e d'uso SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126)
Informazioni sull'impiego delle CPU F S7-1200 nel funzionamento standard sono reperibili nel Manuale di sistema "Sistema
di automazione S7-1200 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/it/view/109478121)".
Informazioni sull'impiego delle CPU F S7-1500 nel funzionamento standard sono reperibili nei rispettivi manuali del prodotto
delle CPU standard S7-1500 e delle T-CPU standard S7-1500 accessibili dai seguenti link:
● CPU 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/it/67295862/133300)
● CPU 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/it/ps/22057/man)
● CPU 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/90466439/133300)
● CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/it/ps/13906/man)
● S7-1500 Software Controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/it/109740725)
La ricerca dei firmware aggiornati, disponibili per il download, delle rispettive CPU F, avviene alla sezione Industy Online
Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com) indicando il numero dell'articolo interessato.

Nota
Osservare i requisiti specifici dell'applicazione per quanto concerne ad es. il superamento di cadute di rete negli alimentatori
o nelle apparecchiature di rete.

Valori PFDavg e PFH nelle CPU F

Nel seguito sono riportati i valori inerenti le probabilità di guasto (valori PFDavg e PFH) per le CPU F sopra indicate, riferiti ad
una durata di utilizzo ventennale e a interventi di riparazione pari a 100 ore:
Funzionamento a bassa richiesta della funzione di Funzionamento ad alta richiesta o modalità continua
sicurezza high demand/continuous mode
low demand mode ai sensi della Norma IEC 61508:2010:
ai sensi della Norma IEC 61508:2010: PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1]
PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on
demand
< 2E-05 < 1E-09

Confronto della memoria di lavoro delle CPU F rispetto alle CPU standard.
CPU Memoria di lavoro CPU F Memoria di lavoro
CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 kbyte CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 kbyte
CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC 100 kbyte CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 Kbyte
CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC 125 Kbyte CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC 150 kbyte
CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1511-1 PN 150 kbyte CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 kbyte
CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 kbyte CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 kbyte
CPU 1513-1 PN 300 kbyte CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 kbyte
CPU 1515-1 PN 500 kbyte CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 kbyte

CPU F
30 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
CPU Memoria di lavoro CPU F Memoria di lavoro
CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 kbyte CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 kbyte
CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 Mbyte CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte
CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1,5 Mbyte
CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 Mbyte CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte
CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 Mbyte
CPU 1518-4 PN/DP 4 Mbyte CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP 6 Mbyte
(MFP/ODK) (MFP/ODK)
CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 kbyte CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 kbyte
CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 kbyte CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 kbyte
CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 Mbyte CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1,5 Mbyte
CPU 1505SP (T) 1 Mbyte CPU 1505SP (T)F 1,5 Mbyte
CPU 1507S 5 Mbyte CPU 1507S F 7,5 Mbyte
CPU 1508S 10 Mbyte CPU 1508S F 12,5 Mbyte

Supporto di PROFIsafe V2
Le interfacce che supportano PROFINET IO supportano anche PROFIsafe V2.

Limitazione per le istruzioni "CREAT_DB" e "DELETE_DB"

I DB F non possono essere creati né cancellati.

Limitazione per le istruzioni "READ_DBL" e "WRIT_DBL"

L'indirizzo di destinazione non può puntare a un DB F.

Limitazione per la progettazione del comportamento di ritenzione dei blocchi dati

La progettazione della ritenzione dei blocchi dati non è supportata per i DB F. In altri termini, in caso di RETE OFF/ON e
nuovo avvio (STOP-RUN) della CPU F, i valori attuali dei DB F non sono a ritenzione. I DB F ricevono i valori iniziali dalla
memoria di caricamento.
Nei DB F la casella di controllo "Ritenzione" è grigia per tutte le variabili.

Controllo di configurazione (ampliamenti futuri) in una CPU F S7-1200

Il controllo di configurazione (ampliamenti futuri) nelle CPU F S7-1200 con moduli centrali può essere effettuato con le
seguenti limitazioni:
● I moduli fail safe S7-1200 non devono essere scambiati e devono essere sempre fisicamente inseriti nel posto
connettore appositamente previsto.
Collocare i moduli fail safe S7-1200 direttamente a fianco della CPU F. Collocare i moduli standard a destra accanto ai
moduli fail safe S7-1200.

Procedura di caricamento delle progettazione del firmare < V2.0 per le CPU F S7-1500
Se una CPU F S7-1500 è stata caricata con una progettazione per firmware a partire da V2.0, con livello di protezione
"Accesso completo incl. fail safe (senza protezione)", e successivamente, nella stessa CPU, si intende caricare una nuova
progettazione per firmware <= V1.8, osservare quanto segue:
La password richiesta ed inserita al momento del caricamento della progettazione con firmware <= V1.8, nella CPU F, viene
segnalata come non valida.
Per ovviare a quest'inconveniente formattare la SIMATIC Memory Card come descritto nella Guida in linea a STEP 7, alla
sezione "Formattazione di una S7-1500-Memory Card". In seguito è possibile caricare la progettazione per il firmware <=
V1.8 nella CPU F.

CPU F
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 31
Impiego di OB (F): Allarme di sincronismo di clock
Il numero degli OB (F) utilizzabili dipende dalla CPU F impiegata. Per informazioni sull'argomento consultare i dati tecnici
della CPU.
Se la somma degli OB di allarme di sincronismo di clock e degli OB F di allarme di sincronismo di clock supera il numero
indicato nei dati tecnici della CPU, non sarà più possibile caricare in RUN il programma utente standard.

Display (nelle CPU F S7-1500 con display o pannello operatore)

Nel menu "Sommario" delle CPU F S7-1500 con display, alla voce "Fail safe", viene visualizzato quanto segue:
● Funzionamento di sicurezza attivato/disattivato
● Codice generale F
● Ultima modifica fail-safe
● La versione con STEP 7 Safety, con la quale è stato compilato il programma di sicurezza.
● Informazioni sui gruppo di esecuzione F
– Nome del gruppo di esecuzione F
– Firma dei gruppi di esecuzione F
– Tempo di ciclo attuale
– Tempo di ciclo max.
– Tempo di esecuzione attuale
– Tempo di esecuzione max.
Alla voce "Parametri fail-safe" viene visualizzato quanto segue per ogni periferia F:
● Codice parametri F (con indirizzo)
● Funzionamento di sicurezza
● Tempo di controllo F
● Indirizzo di origine F
● Indirizzo di destinazione F
Inoltre, nel menu "Impostazioni", alla voce "Protezione", viene visualizzata la seguente voce di menu:
● Abilita/inibisci password F
L'accesso in scrittura ai blocchi F non è consentito.

Nota
Il comando di ingressi e uscite fail-safe può causare uno STOP della CPU F.

Nota
Con il firmare del display V2.5, dopo il caricamento delle modifiche del programma il display non viene aggiornato per alcuni
minuti e non può essere utilizzato. Successivamente viene riavviato.

CPU F
32 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Server web
Sulla pagina iniziale del server web delle CPU F S7-1200/1500 è visualizzato quanto segue:
● Funzionamento di sicurezza attivato/disattivato
● Codice generale F
● Ultima modifica fail-safe
● La versione con STEP 7 Safety, con la quale è stato compilato il programma di sicurezza.
● Informazioni sui gruppo di esecuzione F
– Nome del gruppo di esecuzione F
– Firma dei gruppi di esecuzione F
– Tempo di ciclo attuale
– Tempo di ciclo max.
– Tempo di esecuzione attuale
– Tempo di esecuzione max.
Sulla pagina web "Stato dell'unità", nella scheda "Fail safe", per ogni periferia F viene visualizzato quanto segue:
● Codice parametri F (con indirizzo)
● Funzionamento di sicurezza
● Tempo di controllo F
● Indirizzo di origine F
● Indirizzo di destinazione F
L'accesso in scrittura ai blocchi F non è consentito.

Nota
Il comando di ingressi e uscite fail-safe può causare uno STOP della CPU F.

I punti elencati nel seguito interessano l'S7-1500 F Software Controller

L'S7-1500 F Software Controller è una CPU software fail safe che trova impiego nei seguenti dispositivi:
S7-1500 F Software Controller Dispositivo
CPU 1505SP (T)F • CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1507S F • IPC 2x7E*
• IPC 4x7D*
• IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
CPU 1508S F • IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
* Impiegabile soltanto con disponibilità NVRAM (assegnazione automatica)
* Impiegabile soltanto con interfaccia PROFIBUS o PROFINET e con disponibilità NVRAM (assegnazione automatica)

CPU F
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 33
Con l'impiego dell'S7-1500 F Software Controller e di STEP 7 Safety, i dispositivi elencati nella tabella in alto mantengono il
comportamento fail safe anche in presenza di elevati disturbi elettromagnetici. Controlli specifici del tipo relativi alla
sicurezza funzionale, quali quelli eseguiti nella periferia F, si rendono superflui per questi dispositivi. Per quanto concerne la
disponibilità, tenere presente i requisiti specifici dell'applicazione, in particolare le norme sul controllo dei bruciatori.
L'adesivo giallo in dotazione con la fornitura, con il marchio di controllo TÜV SÜD della sicurezza funzionale, è destinato
esclusivamente all'S7-1500 F Software Controller (non contenuto nella fornitura della versione di download). L'adesivo può
essere utilizzato per l'identificazione dell'hardware sul quale è stato installato l'S7-1500 F Software Controller. In caso di
disinstallazione dell'S7-1500 F Software Controller, l'adesivo deve essere rimosso.
Backup e ripristino
Il backup e il ripristino dei dati del progetto non vengono supportati.
Password per i livelli di protezione
La stazione PC opera una distinzione tra le password dei due livelli di protezione "Accesso completo incl. fail safe (senza
protezione)" e "Accesso completo (senza protezione)". L'S7-1500 F Software Controller opera una distinzione tra le
password dei due livelli di protezione "Accesso completo incl. fail safe (senza protezione)" e "Accesso completo (senza
protezione)".
Istruzione ENDIS_PW
Con l'impiego dell'istruzione ENDIS_PW sull'IPC, sussiste il rischio di bloccare il proprio accesso al sistema in quando l'IPC
non è provvisto di selettore dei modi operativi. Per evitare quest'inconveniente, procedere come indicato nella Guida in linea
all'istruzione ENDIS_PW, alla sezione "Prevenzione del blocco indesiderato nelle CPU S7-1200".
Per stazioni PC fino alla versione V2.0 compresa, vale: La rimozione di un eventuale blocco accidentale che si sia verificato,
è possibile soltanto disinstallando e reinstallando l'S7-1500 F Software Controller.
Per la stazione PC a partire dalla V2.1 vale: I membri del gruppo utenti di Windows "Failsafe Operators" possono fare uso
della funzione "Delete Configuration" ed evitare il blocco.

Nota
L’utente di Windows "Everyone" non viene considerato se fa parte del gruppo utenti di Windows "Failsafe Operators".

Funzionalità TPM
L'uso della a funzionalità TPM non è consentito per l'S7-1500 F Software Controller in quanto può causare uno STOP.
Utilizzo di EWF o UWF ed EWF o Manager UWF
L'EWF o UWF e il Manager EWF o UWF non possono essere selezionati per il volume della CPU.
Ulteriori particolarità

AVVERTENZA
L'accesso all'S7-1500 F Software Controller deve essere riservato, tramite protezione di accesso, esclusivamente al
personale autorizzato all'installazione e alla disinstallazione del relativo software.

Nota
La funzione "Delete Configuration" viene visualizzata sul pannello della stazione PC dell'S7-1500 F Software Controller con
una stazione PC con versione V2.1 compresa soltanto se nella CPU F non è stata configurata una protezione di accesso
(senza protezione).
Nella stazione PC con versione V2.2 o successiva viene controllato se l'utente Windows è membro del gruppo di utenti
Windows "Failsafe Operators". Se l'utente Windows che ha effettuato il login è membro del gruppo, è autorizzato a eseguire
la funzione "Delete Configuration" anche se è impostata la password F. Se l'utente Windows non è membro del gruppo la
stazione PC si comporta come prima della versione V2.1.

Nota
Se l'S7-1500 F Software Controller è protetto in accesso, non è eliminabile con la funzione "Delete Configuration" e viene
mantenuto.

Nota
Versioni del BIOS richieste per la CPU 1505SP F inferiori alla V2.5
L'impiego della CPU 1505SP F presuppone la disponibilità della versione V2.00_02.01 o superiore del BIOS.

CPU F
34 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
Nota
Il clock della CPU non deve subire variazioni durante il funzionamento in RUN in quanto ciò potrebbe causare uno STOP.
Per prevenire questo comportamento, disattivare la funzione di risparmio energetico.

Nota
Assegnazione degli indirizzi PROFIsafe ai moduli F sul PROFIBUS negli IPC con software controller S7-1500 F inferiori alla
V2.5
Dopo l'assegnazione di indirizzi PROFIsafe ai moduli F operanti, tramite PROFIBUS, su un IPC con un S7-1500 F Software
Controller, eseguire un Rete off/Rete on della stazione PROFIBUS.

Nota
Caricamento del programma di sicurezza e/o attivazione del funzionamento di sicurezza per software controller S7-1500 F
inferiori alla V2.5
Chiudere e riaprire il pannello operatore dopo il caricamento del programma di sicurezza risp. dopo l'attivazione del
funzionamento di sicurezza per aggiornare la visualizzazione del pannello.

Nota
Se l'S7-1500 F Software Controller con versione 2.0 viene aggiornato alla versione > 2.0 e contiene già un programma di
sicurezza, il valore di "Ultima modifica fail safe" viene resettato e impostato sul valore valido al momento dell'installazione.

Nota
La funzionalità "Esporta file di configurazione" richiede il pacchetto opzionale STEP 7 Safety a partire dalla versione V15 e
un software controller S7-1500 F dalla versione V2.5.

Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANIA

CPU F
A5E35635424-AG,
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
11/2018 35
SIMATIC
S7-1200/S7-1500
F-CPU
产品信息

安全信息
Siemens 为其产品及解决方案提供了工业安全功能，以支持工厂、系统、机器和网络的安全运行。
为了防止工厂、系统、机器和网络受到网络攻击，需要实施并持续维护先进且全面的工业安全保护机制。Siemens
的产品和解决方案仅构成此类概念的其中一个要素
客户负责防止其工厂、系统、机器和网络受到未经授权的访问。只有在必要时并采取适当安全措施（例如，使用防火墙和/或
网络分段）的情况下，才能将系统、机器和组件连接到企业网络或 Internet。
关于可采取的工业信息安全措施的更多信息，请访问 (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)。
西门子不断对产品和解决方案进行开发和完善以提高安全性。Siemens
强烈建议您及时更新产品并始终使用最新产品版本。如果所用的产品版本不再支持，或未更新到到最新版本，则会增加客户遭
受网络攻击的风险。
要及时了解有关产品更新的信息，请订阅西门子的工业信息安全 RSS 新闻推送，请访问
(https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)

内容
简介
本产品信息中包含“适用范围”章节中所列 F-CPU
的重要信息。该产品信息随附产品一同提供。任何不确定之处，应以本产品信息中的内容为准。

适用范围
本产品信息中的说明适用于以下所列 F-CPU 型号：
S7-1200 F-CPU S7-1500 F-CPU
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1511(T)F-1 PN • CPU 1510SP F-1 PN S7-1500 F 软件控制器
• CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1513F-1 PN • CPU 1512SP F-1 PN • CPU 1505SP (T)F
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1515(T)F-2 PN • CPU 1516proF-2 PN • CPU 1507S F
• CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1516(T)F-3 PN/DP • CPU 1508S F
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC • CPU 1517(T)F-3 PN/DP
• CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly • CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
• CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP
(MFP/ODK)

© Siemens AG 2015 - 2018. 保留所有权利

36 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
应用领域
S7-1200/1500 F-CPU 主要适用于人机安全和燃烧器控制的应用领域。除了安全程序之外，也可对标准应用程序进行编程。
S7-1200/1500 F-CPU 可在安全模式下运行，也可在标准模式下运行。
运行在安全模式时，需安装 STEP 7 Safety 选件包。如果未安装 STEP 7 Safety 选件包，则 S7-1200/S7-1500 F-CPU
只能运行在标准模式下。在标准模式中，S7-1200/1500 F-CPU 的特性与 S7-1200/1500 标准 CPU 的类似。
有关在安全模式下操作 S7-1200/1500 F-CPU 的更多信息，请参见编程和操作手册《SIMATIC 安全 - 组态和编程
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126)》。
有关在标准模式下操作 S7-1200 F-CPU 的更多信息，请参见《S7-1200 可编程控制器
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/cn/view/109478121)》系统手册。
有关在标准模式下使用 S7-1500 F-CPU 的更多信息，请参见下列链接中 S7-1500 和标准 T-CPU S7-1500 的相关手册：
● CPU 151x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/zh/67295862/133300)
● CPUs 151xT (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/zh/ps/22057/man)
● CPU 151xSP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/zh/90466439/133300)
● CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/zh/ps/13906/man)
● S7-1500 软件控制器 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/zh/109740725)
通过在“工业在线支持 (https://support.industry.siemens.com)”网站中输入相应的文章编号，可搜索到相应 F-CPU
的最新固件文件并进行下载。

说明
取决于应用中的特定要求，如电源/电源组的电源缓冲。

F-CPU 的 PFDavg 和 PFH 值

下面根据请求值给出了上述的使用寿命为 20 年且 MTTR 为 100 小时的 F-CPU 的故障发生率（PFDavg 和 PFH 值）：
低请求模式下的操作 高请求或持续模式下的操作
low demand mode high demand/continuous mode
符合 IEC 61508:2010： 符合 IEC 61508:2010：
PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1]
demand
< 2E-05 < 1E-09

F-CPU 与标准 CPU 的工作存储器对比概述

CPU 工作存储器 F-CPU 工作存储器
CPU 1212C DC/DC/DC 75 KB CPU 1212FC DC/DC/DC 100 KB
CPU 1212C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1212FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1214C DC/DC/DC 100 KB CPU 1214FC DC/DC/DC 125 KB
CPU 1214C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1214FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC 125 KB CPU 1215FC DC/DC/DC 150 KB
CPU 1215C DC/DC/Rly CPU 1215FC DC/DC/Rly
CPU 1511-1 PN 150 KB CPU 1511F-1 PN 225 KB
CPU 1511T-1 PN 225 KB CPU 1511TF-1 PN 225 KB
CPU 1513-1 PN 300 KB CPU 1513F-1 PN 450 KB
CPU 1515-1 PN 500 KB CPU 1515F-1 PN 750 KB
CPU 1515T-1 PN 750 KB CPU 1515TF-1 PN 750 KB
CPU 1516-3 PN/DP 1 MB CPU 1516F-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB
CPU 1516T-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB CPU 1516TF-3 PN/DP 1.5 MB
CPU 1517-3 PN/DP 2 MB CPU 1517F-3 PN/DP 3 MB
CPU 1517T-3 PN/DP 3 MB CPU 1517TF-3 PN/DP 3 MB

F-CPU
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 37
CPU 工作存储器 F-CPU 工作存储器
CPU 1518-4 PN/DP 4 MB CPU 1518F-4 PN/DP 6 MB
(MFP/ODK) (MFP/ODK)
CPU 1510SP-1 PN 100 KB CPU 1510SP F-1 PN 150 KB
CPU 1512SP-1 PN 200 KB CPU 1512SP F-1 PN 300 KB
CPU 1516pro-2 PN 1 MB CPU 1516proF-2 PN 1.5 MB
CPU 1505SP (T) 1 MB CPU 1505SP (T)F 1.5 MB
CPU 1507S 5 MB CPU 1507S F 7.5 MB
CPU 1508S 10 MB CPU 1508S F 12.5 MB

PROFIsafe V2 的支持
支持 PROFINET IO 的接口也支持 PROFIsafe V2。

“CREAT_DB”和“DELETE_DB”指令的使用限制
F-DB 既不能创建也不能删除。

“READ_DBL”和“WRIT_DBL”指令的使用限制
目标地址不能指向 F-DB。

组态数据块保持特性时的限制
F-DB 不支持组态数据块的保持性。这意味着，在 F-CPU 电源关闭/打开和重启 (STOP-RUN) 时，F-DB
的实际值不会被保留。F-DB 中将保留装载存储器中的初始值。
在 F-DB 中，所有变量的“保持性”(Retain) 复选框均为灰显。

S7-1200 F-CPU 的组态控制（选件处理）

S7-1200 F-CPU 上的组态控制可通过中央模块实现，但具有以下条件限制：
● 故障安全 S7-1200 模块无法交换并且必须始终插在为其组态的插槽中。
故障安全 S7-1200 模块需紧挨着 F-CPU 插入，而标准模块需插入在故障安全 S7-1200 模块的右侧。

S7-1500 F-CPU 固件版本 V2.0 及以下版本中组态加载的操作过程

如果 S7-1500 F-CPU 加载有固件版本 V2.0 及以上版本且所组态的保护等级为“完全访问，含故障安全（无保护）”(Full
access with fail-safe (no protection)) 的组态，同时还希望为该 F-CPU 加载固件版本 V1.8
及以下版本的组态，则需注意以下事项：
将固件版本 V1.8 及以下版本的组态加载到 F-CPU 中时，系统将提示用户输入密码并将所输入的密码将标识为无效。
为了进行补救，可按照 STEP 7 在线帮助中“格式化 S7-1500 存储卡”部分内的说明信息，对 SIMATIC
存储卡进行格式化。之后，F-CPU 即可加载固件版本 V1.8 及以下版本的组态。

使用等时同步模式中断 (F-)OB
等时同步模式中断 (F-)OB 的数量取决于所用的 F-CPU。具体信息，请参见 CPU 的技术规范。
如果等时同步模式中断 OB 与等时同步模式中断 F-OB 的总数量大于 CPU 技术规范中所指定的数量，则在 RUN
模式下无法再加载标准用户程序。

F-CPU
38 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
显示屏（S7-1500 F-CPU 带显示屏或面板）
在“总览”(Overview) 菜单中的“故障安全”(Fail-safe) 内，将显示 S7-1500 F-CPU（带显示屏）的以下信息：
● 激活/取消激活安全模式 (Safety mode activated/deactivated)
● 集体 F 签名 (Collective F-signature)
● 上一次故障安全更改 (Last fail-safe change)
● 编译安全程序时的 STEP 7 Safety 版本。
● F 运行组的信息
– F 运行组的名称 (Name of F-runtime group)
– F 运行组签名
– 当前循环时间 (Max. cycle time)
– 最大循环时间 (Max. cycle time)
– 当前运行时间 (Current runtime)
– 最长运行时间 (Max. runtime)
在“故障安全参数”(Fail-safe parameters) 中，将显示每个 F-I/O 的以下信息：
● F 参数签名（带地址）(F-parameter signature (with addresses))
● 安全模式 (Safety mode)
● F 监视时间 (F-monitoring time)
● F 源地址 (F-source address)
● F 目标地址 (F-destination address)
在“设置”(Settings) 菜单的“保护”(Protection) 下，将显示以下附加菜单命令：
● 启用/禁用 F 密码 (Enable/disable F-password)
不允许对 F 块进行写访问。

说明
控制故障安全输入/输出会将 F-CPU 设置为 STOP。

说明
显示屏固件版本为 V2.5 时，加载程序更新后数分钟内，屏幕不刷新也无法操作。之后，显示屏重新启动。

F-CPU
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 39
Web 服务器
在 Web 服务器的起始页面中，将显示 S7-1200/1500 F-CPU 的以下信息：
● 激活/取消激活安全模式 (Safety mode activated/deactivated)
● 集体 F 签名 (Collective F-signature)
● 上一次故障安全更改 (Last fail-safe change)
● 编译安全程序时的 STEP 7 Safety 版本。
● F 运行组的信息
– F 运行组的名称 (Name of F-runtime group)
– F 运行组签名
– 当前循环时间 (Max. cycle time)
– 最大循环时间 (Max. cycle time)
– 当前运行时间 (Current runtime)
– 最长运行时间 (Max. runtime)
在“模块信息”(Module information) Web 页面的“故障安全”(Fail-safe) 选项卡中，将显示每个 F-I/O 的以下信息：
● F 参数签名（带地址）(F-parameter signature (with addresses))
● 安全模式 (Safety mode)
● F 监视时间 (F-monitoring time)
● F 源地址 (F-source address)
● F 目标地址 (F-destination address)
不允许对 F 块进行写访问。

说明
控制故障安全输入/输出会将 F-CPU 设置为 STOP。

下列信息与 S7-1500 F 软件控制器相关

S7-1500 F 软件控制器是用于下列设备的故障安全软件 CPU。
S7-1500 F 软件控制器 设备
CPU 1505SP (T)F • CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1507S F • IPC 2x7E*
• IPC 4x7D*
• IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
CPU 1508S F • IPC 4x7E*
• IPC 627D**
• IPC 677D**
• IPC 827D**
* 仅能在存在 NVRAM 时使用（自动分配）
** 仅能在存在 NVRAM 时才可以与 PROFIBUS 或 PROFINET 接口结合使用（自动分配）

F-CPU
40 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
在上表中指定的设备在使用 S7-1500 F 软件控制器和 STEP 7 Safety
时将以故障安全方法进行响应，甚至在高电磁干扰条件下也采用这种响应方式。因此，这些设备不需要功能安全的特殊类型测
试 - 与 F I/O 相反。然而，就可用性而言，必须遵守应用特定的要求，尤其是燃烧器控制的标准。
带有功能安全 TÜV SÜD 测试标记的黄色不干胶标签包含在供货范围内，专用于与 S7-1500 F
软件控制器结合使用（不包含在产品包的下载版本中）。可用此不干胶标签来标记安装有 S7-1500 F
软件控制器的硬件。在卸载 S7-1500 F 软件控制器时必须移除该不干胶标签。
备份与恢复
不支持项目数据的备份与恢复。
保护等级的密码
PC 站不会区分“故障安全完全访问（无保护）”和“完全访问（无保护）”这两个保护等级的密码。S7-1500 F
软件控制器会区分“故障安全完全访问（无保护）”和“完全访问（无保护）”这两个保护等级的密码。
ENDIS_PW 指令
当对 IPC 使用 ENDIS_PW 指令时，由于 IPC 没有模式选择器，因此系统可能会锁定。作为补救，可以采用与“防止 S7-1200
CPU 的意外锁定”下的 ENDIS_PW 指令在线帮助中所述步骤类似的步骤。
以下内容适用于 V2.0 及以下版本的 PC 站：如果发生意外锁定，仅可以通过卸载并安装 S7-1500 F 软件控制器来进行补救。
以下内容适用于 V2.1 及以上版本的 PC 站：Windows“故障安全操作员”用户组成员可以使用“删除组态”(Delete Configuration)
功能跳过锁定。

说明
即使 Windows 用户“Everyone”包含在“Failsafe Operators”Windows 用户组中，也不具有上述功能。

TPM 功能
TPM 功能无法应用于 S7-1500 F 软件控制器，因为这可能会导致 STOP 状态。
使用 EWF 或 UWF 和 EWF 或 UWF 管理器
使用 EWF 或 UWF 以及 EWF 或 UWF 管理器，无法对 CPU 卷进行管理。
其它特性

警告
必须通过访问保护将 S7-1500 F 软件控制器的访问权限限制为有权安装或卸载 S7-1500 F 软件控制器的软件的人员。

说明
使用带有 PC 站 V2.1 及以下版本的 S7-1500 F 软件控制器时，仅当 F-CPU 中未设置访问保护（无保护）时，PC
站的面板中才能使用“删除组态”(Delete Configuration) 功能。
使用 PC 站 V2.2 及以上版本时，系统将检查 Windows 用户是否为 Windows 用户组“故障安全操作员”(Failsafe Operators)
的组成员。如果登录的 Windows 用户为该组成员，即使设置了 F 密码，也可执行“删除组态”(Delete Configuration)
功能。如果登录的 Windows 用户不在该组中，则该 PC 站仅支持版本 V2.1 及以下版本的功能。

说明
如果 S7-1500 F 软件控制器设置了访问保护，则无法使用“删除组态”功能进行删除，组态将保留不变。

说明
CPU 1505SP F V2.5 以下版本所需的 BIOS 版本
若要使用 CPU 1505SP F，需要 BIOS V2.00_02.01 或更高版本。

说明
处于 RUN 状态时不得修改 CPU 时钟，因为这会导致进入 STOP 状态。可通过禁用节能功能防止这种情况事件发生。

说明
使用 S7-1500 F 软件控制器 V2.5 以下版本通过 IPC 的 PROFIBUS 为 F 模块分配 PROFIsafe 地址
如果想要使用 S7-1500 F 软件控制器为通过 IPC 的 PROFIBUS 操作的 F 模块分配 PROFIsafe 地址，将 PROFIsafe
地址分配给 F 模块，然后执行 PROFIBUS 站通电和断电。

F-CPU
A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018 41
说明
为 S7-1500 F 软件控制器 V2.5 以下版本加载安全程序或激活安全模式
加载安全程序或激活安全模式后，关闭面板并随后重新将其打开以更新面板上的显示屏。

说明
如果将 S7-1500 F 软件控制器 V2.0 的版本升级为 V2.0 以上版本，且 S7-1500 F
软件控制器上安装有安全程序，则“上一次故障安全更改”(Last fail-safe change) 值将设置为该程序的安装时间。

说明
“组态文件导出”(Configuration file export) 功能需要 STEP 7 Safety 附加包 V15 及以上版本和 S7-1500 F 软件控制器 V2.5
以下版本。

Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
德国

F-CPU F-CPU
A5E35635424-AG,
42 11/2018 A5E35635424-AG, 11/2018
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Guide to documentation 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Connecting 3
ET 200SP
Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF ___________________ 4
Parameters/address space
(6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

___________
Interrupts, error messages,
Manual 5
diagnostics and system
alarms

___________________
Compatibility 6

___________________
Technical specifications 7

___________________
Dimension drawing A

10/2018
A5E03916550-AD
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03916550-AD Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified
electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable
regulations in your country.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

4 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................12
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................14
2.2.1 Functions ................................................................................................................................14
2.2.2 Configuration control ...............................................................................................................16
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 17
3.1 Terminal assignment...............................................................................................................17
3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................19
3.3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address .......................................................................................20
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 21
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................21
4.2 Description of parameters .......................................................................................................22
4.2.1 Configuration control ...............................................................................................................22
4.2.2 Startup when expected/actual config differ .............................................................................23
4.2.3 Diagnostic interrupt .................................................................................................................23
4.2.4 Hardware interrupt ..................................................................................................................23
4.2.5 Insert/remove module interrupt ...............................................................................................23
4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................24
5 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 25
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................25
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................29
5.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................29
5.2.2 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200SP ..........................................................................................38
5.2.3 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt .......................................................................................38
5.2.4 Triggering a hardware interrupt ..............................................................................................38
5.2.5 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt .........................................................................38
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................39
5.3.1 Slave diagnostics ....................................................................................................................40
5.3.2 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................41
5.3.3 Master PROFIBUS address ....................................................................................................42
5.3.4 Identifier-related diagnostics ...................................................................................................43
5.3.5 Module status ..........................................................................................................................44
5.3.6 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................45
5.3.7 H status ...................................................................................................................................46
5.3.8 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP ...........................................47
5.3.9 Load voltage failure on the BaseUnit BU...D ..........................................................................48

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 5
Table of contents

6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 49
6.1 Compatibility of modules ........................................................................................................ 49
7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 52
7.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 52
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 55

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

6 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
Guide to documentation 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 7
Guide to documentation

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

8 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Guide to documentation

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 9
Guide to documentation

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

10 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Guide to documentation

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0
Article number 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0 contains the following components:
● Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BU01-0CN0)
● Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)
● PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector (6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0)

View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the 155-6 DP HF interface module with supplied accessories

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

12 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFIBUS DP
● Power supply 1 L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV)
● Bus connection via RS485 interface
The module supports the following functions (Page 14):

Maximum configuration
● 244 bytes I/O data
● 32 I/O modules and 16 ET 200AL modules

Accessories
You order the following accessories separately:
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Server module
The server module is included in the product package of the interface module and available
separately as an accessory.
The server module has the following properties:
● Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
● Features a support for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm)
● Provides station functions, e.g., status bytes
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3

Note
You need to configure the server module in the configuration software.
To do so, place the server module with the required length of status bytes at the last slot of
the configuration. When there are 32 I/O modules, the server module is inserted at slot 33.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 13
Product overview
2.2 Functions

PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector

The PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector is included in the product package of the
interface module and also available separately as an accessory.
You can find additional information on the PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector in the
corresponding product information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58648998).

Configuration with more than 244 bytes of parameter data

With a configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP 3 with HSP 242, you have the option of operating
the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module as of 6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0 in DPV1 mode with more
than 244 bytes of parameter data. Configuration with the GSD file does not offer this option.

Reference
You can find additional information on identification data in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

2.2 Functions

2.2.1 Functions

Introduction
The interface module supports the following functions:
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3
● PROFIBUS DP
● Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP
● Configuration control by means of the user program
● Operation as DPV1 slave
● Operation after Y-link (not with F-modules)
● Station extension via ET-Connection
● F-direct data exchange

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

14 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Requirements
The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the
IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions

Function Product version Firmware version Configuration software

of the module of the module as Configuration STEP 7 as of STEP 7 (TIA
as of of with GSD file V5.5 SP3 with Portal) as of
(http://support.a HSP0242 V13
utoma-
tion.siemens.co
m/WW/view/en/
19698639/1300
00) / software
from a third-
party manufac-
turer1
Operation after Y-link (not with 1 V1.1.0 X - -
F-modules)
Hot-swapping 1 V1.0.0 X X X
Station extension via ET- 1 V3.0.0 X X (as of -
Connection HSP0242 V2)
F-direct data exchange 1 V3.1.0 - X (as of -
HSP0242 V3)
Interface module; article num- 1 V4.2 - X2 X (as of V15.1)
ber: 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0
1 Systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system
2 Configure the module as version 6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0 FW V3.1 (as of HSP0242 V3)

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 15
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.2 Configuration control

Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions
or options. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner
by means of the user program.

Reference
You can find more information on configuration control
● in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual
● on the Internet under the following link: Application collection
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270)
● in the STEP 7 online help.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

16 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
Connecting 3
3.1 Terminal assignment

24 V DC supply voltage
The table below shows the signal names and descriptions of the pin assignment of the
24 V DC supply voltage.

Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage

View Signal name1) Description

Connector IM connection
1L+ 24 V DC
2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2
1M Ground
2M Ground (for looping through)2

1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are internally bridged.

2 Maximum 10 A permitted.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 17
Connecting
3.1 Terminal assignment

PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface

The following table shows the signal names and descriptions of the terminal assignment of
the PROFIBUS DP interface.

Table 3- 2 Terminal assignment PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface

View Signal name Description

1 - -
2 - -
3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
4 RTS Request To Send
5 M5V2 DP data reference potential (from sta-
tion)
6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)
7 - -
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
9 - -

Reference
You can find additional information on connecting the interface module and on the
accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

18 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Connecting
3.2 Block diagram

3.2 Block diagram

The following figure show the block diagram of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module.

① ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics L+ 24 V DC supply voltage

② Backplane bus M Ground
③ Internal power supply RN RUN/STOP LED (green)
X80 24 Feed supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red)
V DC
PB PROFIBUS interface MT MAINT LED (yellow)
PWR POWER LED (green)
DP PROFIBUS DP LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 19
Connecting
3.3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

3.3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

Introduction
On the interface module (PROFIBUS), set the PROFIBUS DP address for PROFIBUS DP
using the DIP switch. By setting the PROFIBUS DP address, you specify where the
ET 200SP is to be addressed on the PROFIBUS DP.

Requirements
● Each PROFIBUS DP address may be assigned only once on the PROFIBUS DP.
● Valid PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 125.
● The set PROFIBUS DP address must match the PROFIBUS DP address specified for the
ET 200SP in the configuration software.

Required tools
Screwdriver 3 - 3.5 mm

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

1. Slide the window of the interface module upwards.
2. Use a screwdriver to set the required PROFIBUS address via the DIP switch.
3. Close the window.

Figure 3-2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

Changing the PROFIBUS DP address

You can change the PROFIBUS DP address in exactly the same way as you set it. A change
in the PROFIBUS DP address only becomes valid for the ET 200SP after a POWER ON of
the interface module.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

20 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for IM 155-6 DP HF interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module.

Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default3 Effective range

Configuration control 1 Disable/enable Disable ET 200SP
Startup when preset/actual configura- Yes/No No ET 200SP
tion differ
Diagnostics interrupt Yes/No Yes ET 200SP
Hardware interrupt Yes/No Yes ET 200SP
Pull/plug module interrupt2 Yes/No No ET 200SP
1 Note that the "Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" parameter is
always activated when you use configuration control.
2 The “Pull/plug” parameter is always activated in the GSD file.
3 The defaults apply to the default startup. If no other parameters are specified by the DP master,
the IM 155-6 DP HF starts up with these parameters.

Note
Only for configuration using the PROFIBUS GSD file, does not affect configuration with
STEP 7 via HSP:
Not all parameters of an I/O module are provided by the GSD file with GSD configuration,
because the PROFIBUS standard limits the number of parameters to 244 bytes per
ET 200SP. These parameters can be configured later using data record 128, if necessary.
The description is available in the respective manual of the employed I/O module.

Note
PROFIBUS GSD configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP3
The universal module must not be configured.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 21
Parameters/address space
4.2 Description of parameters

4.2 Description of parameters

4.2.1 Configuration control

You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.

Note
Configuration control
The "Configuration control" function can only be used if you set the parameter "Startup if
preset configuration does not match actual configuration" to yes at the same time.

Note
Configuring the enable
If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires control data record
196 from the user program so that the ET 200SP distributed I/O system can operate the I/O
modules.

Reference
You can find additional information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the
STEP 7 online help.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

22 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Description of parameters

4.2.2 Startup when expected/actual config differ

If the parameter is enabled and
● modules are removed and inserted during operation, this does not lead to a station failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
● If the preset configuration does not match the actual configuration, the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system continues to exchange data with the DP master.
If the parameter is disabled and
● modules are removed and inserted during operation, this leads to a station failure of the
ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
● If the preset configuration does not match the actual configuration, data exchange does
not take place between the DP master and the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

4.2.3 Diagnostic interrupt

You can use this parameter to enable or disable diagnostic interrupts.

4.2.4 Hardware interrupt

You can use this parameter to enable or disable hardware interrupts.

4.2.5 Insert/remove module interrupt

You can use this parameter to enable or disable insert/remove module interrupts.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 23
Parameters/address space
4.3 Substitute value behavior

4.3 Substitute value behavior

The substitute value behavior is implemented by the DP master per slot in the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.
The respective output reacts according to its configured substitute value behavior:
● Current-free/voltage-free
● Keep last value
● Output substitute value
The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases:
● STOP DP master
● DP master failure (connection interruption)
● Firmware update
● Station stop, for example, due to:
– No server module
– At least one I/O module installed on an incorrect BaseUnit
● Deactivate DP slave

Note
Reducing a configuration
If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the
new configuration to the CPU, the modules no longer configured but still present retain
their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage on the
BaseUnit BU...D or on the interface module is switched off.

The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior takes effect in the following cases:

● Firmware update
● Configuration control: receipt of a new control data record
● Incorrectly configured module
● Module with incorrect parameter assignment

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

24 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system
alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED display on the interface module:

① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ DP (green)
⑤ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 25
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

RN/ER/MT LEDs on the interface module

Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of RN/ER/MT LEDs

LEDs Meaning Remedy

RN ER MT
(RUN) (ERROR) (MAINT)
No or too little supply voltage at inter- Check the supply voltage or switch it
Off Off Off face module on at the interface module.1
Test of LEDs during startup: The three -
On On On LEDs light up simultaneously for ap-
proximately 0.25 s.
Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the
Off Off configuration software or the user
Flashes
program.
Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with
the configuration software.
ET 200SP starts up. -
ET 200SP is being assigned parame-
ters.
Not relevant Not relevant ET 200SP is currently exchanging -
On data with the DP master.
Not relevant Not relevant Group error and group error channels Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate
the error.
Flashes
The preset configuration does not Check the configuration of the
match the actual configuration of the ET 200SP to see whether a module is
ET 200SP. missing or faulty, or whether a non-
configured module is inserted.
Invalid configuration states See the Invalid configuration states of
the ET 200SP on PROFINET DP
(Page 47) section.
Parameter assignment error in the I/O Evaluate the display of the module
module status in STEP 7 and correct the error
in the corresponding I/O module.
Not relevant Not relevant Maintenance is demanded. Perform maintenance
On
Hardware or firmware faulty.2 Run a firmware update. If the error
persists, contact Siemens Industry
Flashes Flashes Flashes
Online Support.
Replace the interface module.
1 PWR LED On (on interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short-circuit.
2 DP LED Off

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

26 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

PWR LED on the interface module

Table 5- 2 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning Remedy

No or too little supply voltage Check the supply voltage.
Off
Supply voltage present -
On

LED DP on the RS485 interface

Table 5- 3 Status display of the DP LED

LED DP Meaning Remedy

There is no connection between the PROFIBUS Check whether the bus cable to the DP master is
Off interface of your PROFIBUS device and a commu- broken.
nication partner (for example, DP master).
There is a connection between the PROFIBUS -
On interface of your PROFIBUS device and a commu-
nication partner (for example, DP master).

LED display of configuration errors

Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the interface
module by the ERROR (red) and MAINT (yellow) LEDs.
The following configuration errors are signaled by the LEDs:
● No server module
● Interruptions or short-circuit on the backplane bus

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 27
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Operating principle
The LED error display provides information on the cause of the error. After a notification by
means of a flashing signal, the error type and then the error location/error code are displayed
in each case.
The LED error display:
● Is activated during POWER ON and during operation
● Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ERROR- and MAINT-
LED
● Remains on until the cause of the error has been eliminated

Table 5- 4 Display of error type and error location

Sequence Description
1 ERROR- and MAINT-LED flash 3x with 0.5 Hz Indication of the error type
2 MAINT-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of error type (decimal)
3 ERROR- and MAINT-LED flash 3x with 2 Hz Indication of error location/error code
4 ERROR-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the tens position (decimal) of the
error location/error code
5 MAINT-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the units position (decimal) of the
error location/error code
6 Repetition of 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been eliminated.

Error display
The following table shows the possible causes of error that can occur.

Table 5- 5 Error display

Error type Error location Cause of error Solution

(MAINT) (ERROR/MAINT)
1 33* • No server module Check the con-
figuration of the
• Interruptions on the backplane bus
ET 200SP.
• Short-circuit on the backplane bus

* Slot

Note
The following LEDs indicate a short-circuit in the backplane bus supply or in the bus
connection supply:
• PWR-LED: On
• RN-, ER- and MT-LED: Off

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

28 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts

5.2.1 Introduction

Definition
The interrupt section of the slave diagnostics indicates the interrupt type and the event that
led to an interrupt being triggered. The interrupt section comprises 62 bytes including an
interrupt header.

Position in the diagnostics frame

The interrupt section is located after the channel diagnostics.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 29
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Data record
The diagnostic data of a module are located in the data records 0 and 1:
● Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that describe the current status of the
distributed I/O system. DS0 is part of the header information of OB 82 (local data bytes 8
to 11).
● Data record 1 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that are also available in data record 0.
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1:

Figure 5-2 Structure of data record 1

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

30 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Reading data records

DS0 and DS1 can be read with SFC 59 (RD_REC) or SFB 52 (RDREC). The data length of
DS 1 can be up to 240 bytes. In this case, DS1 includes up to 38 channel error entries.
Note the figures below in this section.

Content
The contents of the interrupt information depend on the interrupt type:
● In the case of diagnostic interrupts, diagnostic data record 1 (up to 58 bytes) is sent as
interrupt status information (starting from byte x+4).
● The length of the interrupt status information for hardware interrupts is 4 bytes.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 31
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Structure of interrupts
The figure below shows the structure of the interrupt section for the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system:

Figure 5-3 Structure of the interrupt status of the interrupt section

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

32 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Diagnostic interrupt, byte x+4 to x+7

The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt:

Figure 5-4 Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 33
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Diagnostic interrupt from the modules, starting at byte x+8

The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+8:

Figure 5-5 Structure starting at byte x+8

Diagnostic interrupt from the modules, starting at byte x+14

The channel error entries start from byte x+14. A channel error entry is 6 bytes long and can
follow 8 times starting from byte x+14.
If you read the channel error entries using an SFB or SFC, 38 channel diagnostics are
possible.
The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+14:

Figure 5-6 Structure starting from byte x+14

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

34 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

The following table is used to explain the channel error entries:

Description
Channel number 0 to 63: Channel number for channel error
0x8000: Entire submodule
Channel properties Bit 0 to 7 00H: Free data type
01H: bit
02H: 2 bit
03H: 4 bit
04H: byte
05H: word
06H: Double word
07H bis FFH: Reserve
Bit 8 0: Channel
1: Channel group
Bit 9, 10 00H: Diagnostics
01H: Maintenance demanded
02H: Maintenance required
03H: Reserve
Bit 11, 12 00H: Channel error-free
01H: Incoming diagnostics
02H: Outgoing diagnostics
03H: Outgoing diagnostics, but other diagnostics are also
pending on this channel
Bit 13 to 15 00H: Reserve
01H: Input channel
02H: Output channel
03H: Input/output channel
Channel error type Refer to respective manual for explanation.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 35
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Example of a diagnostic interrupt

The figure below shows an example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 1):

Figure 5-7 Example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 1)

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

36 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

The figure below shows an example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 2):

Figure 5-8 Example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 2)

Hardware interrupt of digital and analog input modules

The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+4 for the hardware interrupt:

Figure 5-9 Structure starting at byte x+4 for hardware interrupt

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 37
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2.2 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200SP

Introduction
With certain process statuses/errors, the DP slave in each case creates an interrupt block
with the corresponding information in the diagnostics frame (DPV1 interrupt mechanism).
Regardless of this, the diagnostic status of the DP slave is displayed in the identifier-related
diagnostics, in the module status, and in the channel diagnostics.

Interrupts in DPV1 mode

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts:
● Diagnostic interrupts
● Hardware interrupts
● Insert/remove module interrupts

5.2.3 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

When an event comes or goes (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the module
triggers a diagnostics interrupt if "Enable: diagnostic interrupt" is set.
The CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the diagnostic interrupt OB
(OB 82). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the
diagnostic interrupt OB.

5.2.4 Triggering a hardware interrupt

When a hardware interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and
processes the hardware interrupt OB, for example OB 40. The event that triggered the
interrupt is entered in the start information of the hardware interrupt OB.

Note
Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module)
Do not use hardware interrupts for technological purposes (e.g., cyclical generation of
hardware interrupts).
If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the
number of I/O modules and the communication load.

5.2.5 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt

When an insert/remove module interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user
program and processes the insert/remove module interrupt OB (OB 83). The event that
triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the insert/remove module interrupt
OB.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

38 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3 Alarms

Actions after a diagnostics alarm in DPV1 mode

The error is entered in the channel diagnostics in the diagnostics frame:
● In DPV1 mode, diagnostics can be reported as diagnostic interrupts.
● After a diagnostics alarm, this is
– entered in the diagnostics frame as diagnostic interrupt block (always for one interrupt
only).
– Stored in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU.
● The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes.
● OB 82 is called. If OB 82 does not exist, the CPU changes to STOP mode.
● Acknowledgment of diagnostic interrupt (a new interrupt is then possible)

Length of the diagnostics frame

● The maximum frame length for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with IM155-6 DP HF
interface module (DPV1 mode) is 244 bytes.
● The minimum frame length is 6 bytes.

Reading out the diagnostics data

Table 5- 6 Reading out the diagnostics data with STEP 7

Automation system Application See...

with DP master
SIMATIC S7/M7 Slave diagnostics data as plain text in "Diagnosing hardware" in the STEP 7
the "DP slave diagnostics" tab in the online help
STEP 7 user interface
Instruction "DP NRM_DG" (SFC 13) SFC, see STEP 7 online help
Reading out slave diagnostics (store
in the data area of the user program)
Instruction "RD_REC" (SFC 59) See System and Standard Functions
Reading out data records of the S7 reference manual
diagnostics data (store in the data
area of the user program)
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) SFB, see STEP 7 online help (system
Reading data records from the DP functions/function blocks)
slave
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) SFB, see STEP 7 online help (system
Receiving interrupts from the interrupt functions/function blocks)
OBs

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 39
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.1 Slave diagnostics

The figure below shows the structure of the slave diagnostics.

Figure 5-10 Structure of the slave diagnostics

Note
The length of the diagnostics frame varies with the IM 155-6 DP HF (depending on
parameter assignment) between 6 and 244 bytes in DPV1 mode.
You can identify the length of the last received diagnostics frame in STEP 7 from the
RET_VAL parameter of the SFC 13.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

40 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.2 Station statuses 1 to 3

Station statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave.

Structure of station status 1 (byte 0)

Table 5- 7 Structure of station status 1 (byte 0)

Bit Meaning Cause/Remedy

0 1: The DP slave is not responding to the DP • Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on
master. the DP slave?
• Is the bus connector plugged in?
• Is the DP slave connected to the voltage
supply?
• Is the RS485 repeater properly config-
ured?
1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready to ex- • Wait; the DP slave is currently starting
change data. up.
2 1: The configuration data transferred from • Has the correct station type or the cor-
the DP master to the DP slave does not rect DP slave configuration been en-
match the DP slave configuration. tered in the configuration software?
3 1: External diagnostics is available. (Group • Evaluate the ID-specific diagnostics, the
diagnostics display) module status, and/or the channel diag-
nostics. As soon as all errors have been
eliminated, bit 3 is reset. The bit is set
again when there is a new diagnostics
alarm in the bytes of the aforementioned
diagnostics.
4 1: The required function is not supported by • Check the configuration.
the DP slave (for example, changing the
PROFIBUS address by means of software).
5 1: The DP master cannot interpret the re- • Check the bus configuration.
sponse of the DP slave.
6 1: The DP slave type does not match the • Has the correct station type been en-
software configuration. tered in the configuration software?
7 1: Parameters have been assigned to the • The bit is always 1, for example, if you
DP slave by a different DP master (not the access the DP slave with the program-
one that currently has access to the DP ming device or another DP master.
slave).
• The PROFIBUS address of the DP mas-
ter that assigned parameters to the DP
slave is located in the "Master
PROFIBUS address" diagnostics byte.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 41
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

Structure of station status 2 (byte 1)

Table 5- 8 Structure of station status 2 (byte 1)

Bit Meaning
0 1: The DP slave parameters need to be reassigned.
1 1: A diagnostics alarm is present. The DP slave will not operate until the problem is
eliminated (static diagnostics alarm).
2 1: The bit on the DP slave is always "1".
3 1: The watchdog is activated for this DP slave.
4 1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command.1
5 1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command.1
6 0: Bit is always "0".
7 1: The DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been removed from the processing in pro-
gress.
1 The bit is updated only if another diagnostics alarm also changes.

Structure of station status 3 (byte 2)

Table 5- 9 Structure of station status 3 (byte 2)

Bit Meaning
0 to 6 0: Bits are always set to "0".
7 1: • There are more diagnostic alarms pending than the DP slave is able to store.
• The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostics alarms sent by the DP slave in its
(channel) diagnostics buffer.

5.3.3 Master PROFIBUS address

The master PROFIBUS address diagnostics byte contains the PROFIBUS address of the DP
master:
● That assigned parameters to the DP slave
● That has read and write access to the DP slave
The master PROFIBUS address is located in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

42 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.4 Identifier-related diagnostics

The identifier-related diagnostics indicates whether modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system have errors or not. Identifier-related diagnostics start at byte 6 and comprise 8 bytes.
The figure below shows how the identifier-related diagnostics for the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system is structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:

Figure 5-11 Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 43
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.5 Module status

The module status indicates the status of the configured modules and provides more
information on the identifier-related diagnostics with respect to the configuration. The module
status begins after the identifier-related diagnostics and comprises 17 bytes.
The following figure shows how the module status for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is
structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:

Figure 5-12 Module status structure

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

44 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.6 Channel diagnostics

Channel diagnostics provides information about channel errors in modules and details of the
identifier-related diagnostics. Channel diagnostics begins after the module status. Channel
diagnostics does not affect the module status.
The following figure shows how the channel diagnostics for the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system is structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:

Figure 5-13 Structure of channel diagnostics

When a BaseUnit is incorrectly configured, mapping is made to channel diagnostics. The slot
is then apparent from the first byte. In this case, the error type is coded with 0x10 -
parameter error. All other fields are set to "0".

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 45
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.7 H status

Requirements
The H status in the diagnostics frame supplies the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module only
when operated behind a Y link (e.g. IM 157) in DPV1 mode. This block can be passed over
during the evaluation of the diagnostics frame. The configuration is described in the following
section.

Structure of the H status

The following figure shows the structure of the H status of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface
module.

Figure 5-14 Structure of the H status

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

46 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.8 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP

Incorrect configuration states

The following incorrect configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to a
failure of the DP slave or prevent the start of data exchange.
● Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration.
● Faulty backplane bus (e.g., defective BaseUnit). No interrupt is generated when the
ET 200SP backplane bus is interrupted
● No server module
● Configuration exceeds maximum length of 1 m
● Configuration of an incorrect BaseUnit

Note
All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) at a
station stop. However, the interface module will continue to exchange data.
Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart.

Diagnostics
The table below shows the incorrect configurations and their diagnostics:

Table 5- 10 Diagnostics

Identifier-related diag- Module status Cause Response

nostics
Slot 33 set, remaining Slot 33 with 11B: “"No • No server module All I/O modules and
slots not relevant module; invalid user interface modules fail
• More than 32 I/O
data" set
modules
• Defective backplane
bus
All 33 bits set 01B: "Module error; • Configuration > 1 m All I/O modules and
invalid user data" for all interface modules fail
modules

If the BaseUnit is configured incorrectly, the channel diagnostics "Parameter assignment

error" is signaled for the respective slot. Check the parameter "Potential group“ in the
parameters of the I/O module.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 47
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.9 Load voltage failure on the BaseUnit BU...D

Load voltage failure

If supply voltage fails on the BaseUnit BU...D, the I/O modules react as follows:
● A remove module interrupt is generated if an I/O module is removed during the failure of
the supply voltage.
● An insert module interrupt is generated if an I/O module is inserted during the failure of
the supply voltage.

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

48 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
Compatibility 6
6.1 Compatibility of modules

Valid firmware versions

The table below lists the valid firmware versions and their field of application for the I/O
modules.

I/O modules Firmware version Comment

DI 8x24VDC ST V1.0.1 As of this version, you have the option to oper-
DI 16x24VDC ST ate I/O modules after an IM 155-6 DP HF
(6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0) interface module.
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST
AI 4xI 2-,4-wire ST
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-,3-,4-wire HF
AQ 4xU/I ST

Status of the supply voltage

Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete
configuration.
● For modules without parameter assignment in the following table, the status of the supply
voltage (status byte of the server module) is always signaled as "1" regardless of the
actual status of the supply voltage.
● When a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment
from the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this
potential group.

Modules Article number

DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
DQ 4x24VC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 49
Compatibility
6.1 Compatibility of modules

Plugging and pulling (hot-swapping) of ET 200SP I/O modules

NOTICE
Pulling and plugging (hot swapping) of ET 200SP I/O modules during operation on S7-300
via PROFIBUS DP
ET 200SP I/O modules can be pulled and plugged:
• As of STEP7 V5.5 SP3 HSP 242 and
• If "Operation if preset configuration <> actual configuration" parameter is enabled.
Note the following when operating the ET 200SP with S7-300 via PROFIBUS DP: Plugging
of ET 200SP I/O modules results in a brief station failure of the ET 200SP.

Note
ET 200SP I/O modules can be pulled and plugged without restrictions for all other DP master
systems if you enable the "Pull/plug module (OB83)" parameter.

Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link

Note
Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link
Operation of the CM 4xIO-Link IO-Link Master communication module with the IM 155-
6 DP HF interface module is supported as of S7-PCT V3.1 and an updated module firmware
version/GSD file.

Reaction times for fail-safe modules

The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account
when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: Maximum reaction time = 2.3 ms

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

50 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Compatibility
6.1 Compatibility of modules

First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration

The interface modules support plugging a dark-colored BaseUnit in slot 1. This means that
modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2 can now also be
configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following modules:
● AI EnergyMeter ST (6ES7134-6PA00-0BD0)
● DI 4x120 … 230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)
● DQ 4x24 … 230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Note
First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration
Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O
module manuals.
The 24 V DC supply voltage is fed in via an external fuse.
The 24 V DC supply voltage is provided by a light-colored BaseUnit.

Requirement for configuration of these modules in slot 1:

● Configuration via GSD or GSDML
● Configuration as of STEP7 V5.5 SP4 as of
– HSP0242 V2.0 for IM155-6 DP HF
● Configuration as of STEP7 V13 SP1
See also: Functions (Page 14)

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 51
Technical specifications 7
7.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 DP HF

The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You can find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0/td?dl=de).

Article number 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0

General information
Product type designation IM 155-6DP HF with PROFIBUS connector and
server module
Firmware version V4.2
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

• Module swapping during operation (hot Yes; Multi-hot swapping

swapping)
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15 SP1
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- As of V5.5 SP4, only up to FW V3.1

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion
Configuration control
via dataset Yes
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 10 ms

Input current
Current consumption, max. 335 mA
Inrush current, max. 1.6 A
I²t 0.038 A²·s
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.5 W

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

52 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
 Technical specifications
7.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0

Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 32 byte; per input / output

Address space per station

• Address space per station, max. 244 byte; per input / output

Hardware configuration
Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 32; + 16 ET 200AL modules

Interfaces
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
1. Interface
Interface types
• RS 485 Yes

• Output current of the interface, max. 90 mA

Protocols
• PROFIBUS DP slave Yes

RS 485
• Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s

PROFIBUS DP
Services
– SYNC capability Yes
– FREEZE capability Yes
– DPV0 Yes
– DPV1 Yes
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Status indicator Yes
Alarms Yes
Diagnostics function Yes
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN LED Yes; Green LED

• ERROR LED Yes; Red LED

• MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED

LED)

• Connection display DP Yes; Green DP LED

Potential separation

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 53
Technical specifications
7.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0

between backplane bus and electronics No
between PROFIBUS DP and all other circuit Yes
components
between supply and all other circuits No
Permissible potential difference
between different circuits Safety extra low voltage SELV
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation relating to sea level

• Installation altitude above sea level, max. 2 000 m; On request: Installation altitudes greater
than 2 000 m
Connection method
ET-Connection
• via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules

Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 150 g

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

54 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD
Dimension drawing A
This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module installed on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc.

Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (front and side view)

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03916550-AD 55
IM 155-6 PN BA interface module ___________________
Preface

(6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) ___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
IM 155-6 PN BA interface module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
(6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)
Interrupts, error messages,
Manual ___________
5
diagnostics and system
alarms

___________________
Compatibility 6

___________________
Technical specifications 7

___________________
Dimension drawing A

03/2015
A5E34934425-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E34934425-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 03/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................10
2.2.1 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 13
3.1 Terminal assignment...............................................................................................................13
3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................15
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.2.1 Enabling configuration control ................................................................................................16
4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................17
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ................................................................17
5 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 18
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................23
5.2.1 Triggering a diagnostics interrupt ...........................................................................................23
5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt ..............................................................................................24
5.2.3 Triggering a pull/plug interrupt ................................................................................................24
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................25
5.3.1 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................26
5.3.2 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................27
5.3.3 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ....................................................................27
5.3.4 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device .......................................................28
6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 29
7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 30
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 33

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-
simatic/en/manual-overview/tech-doc-controllers/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Documentation guide

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

My Documentation Manager
The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to
your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Application examples
Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

CAx Download Manager

The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe
systems.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0 (IM 155-6 PN BA interface module and server module)

View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the IM 155-6 PN BA interface module and the server module

Properties
The module has the following properties:
● Technical properties
– Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO
– Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the
scope of delivery of the interface module.
● Supported functions (Page 10)

Maximum configuration
● 12 I/O modules

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Maximum amount of I/O data

The maximum amount of I/O data is 32 bytes input/output data.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label
A detailed list of the available accessories can be found in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Server module
The server module (V1.1.1 and higher) is included in the scope of delivery of the interface
module and also available separately as an accessory. The server module has the following
properties:
● Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
● Features a support for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm)
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3
● Retentive storage of the device name for device replacement without topological
configuration

Note
You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration
software.
To do this, place the server module in the last configuration slot and enable the parameter
Group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+. If there are 12 I/O modules, the server module is
plugged in slot 13.

You can find more information in the Server module

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 9
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2 Functions

Introduction
The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions:
● Integrated switch with 2 ports
● Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP: MIB2, LLDP-MIP
and MRP-MIB)
● Port diagnostics
● Deactivating of ports
● Minimum update time 1 ms
● Media redundancy MRP
● Device replacement without programming device
● Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO
● Firmware update via PROFINET IO
The interface module supports additional functions:
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3
● Device replacement with and without topological configuration
● Configuration control (option handling)

Requirements
Configuration takes place with GSDML or STEP 7 V13/HSPxyz.

Cabling with fixed connection setting

If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you must also disable
"Autonegotiation/Autocrossover".
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en)
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Device replacement without topological configuration

In addition to the interface module, the device name is also saved on the server module
(V1.1.1 and higher). A device name saved on the server module is the requirement for
device replacement without topological configuration.
Storing the name on the server module and the interface module produces a range of
scenarios for using the device name when the interface module is replaced.

Table 2- 1 Scenarios for using the device name

Interface module empty Interface module with device name

Server module empty No device name available. The device name from the interface
module is used and copied to the serv-
er module.
Server module with device name The device name from the server mod- The device name from the server mod-
ule is used and copied to the interface ule is used and copied to the interface
module. module if this has a different device
name.

Be aware of the following constraints:

● Resetting to factory settings deletes the device name in both the interface module and the
server module. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the server module, you
can remove the server module from the interface module before resetting to factory
settings.
● When a server module is replaced, a device name stored in the server module is applied
to the interface module after a POWER ON.
● Do not pull/plug the server module while under voltage. If you pull/plug the server module
while under voltage, the interface module restarts.
● If you use a server module with an invalid firmware version (< V1.1.1), channel-specific
diagnostics is generated with the error number 27 (general error). To correct this error,
you need to replace the server module or update the server module firmware.
IO devices that have already been used in another configuration should be reset to their
factory settings before reuse (see system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)).
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en)
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Replacement of an IM 155-6 PN BA
If a spare part is required, any IO devices in operation must be reset to their delivery state
via "Reset to factory settings" (see the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)).

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 11
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Media redundancy (MRP)

Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. A ring topology ensures that
an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en)
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

2.2.1 Configuration control (option handling)

Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions
or changes. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner
by means of the user program.

Reference
You can find more information on configuration control
● in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual
● on the Internet under the following link Application collection
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270)
● in the STEP 7 online help.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Wiring 3
3.1 Terminal assignment

24 V DC supply voltage
The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the terminal assignment
for a 24 V DC supply voltage.

Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment 24 V DC supply voltage

View Signal name1 Description

Connector IM connection
1L+ 24 V DC
2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2
1M Ground
2M Ground (for looping through)2

1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally.

2 Maximum 10 A permitted.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 13
Wiring
3.1 Terminal assignment

PROFINET IO
The following table shows the signal name and description of the terminal assignment.

Table 3- 2 PROFINET IO terminal assignment

View Signal name Description

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data -
3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 RD_N Receive data -
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

Reference
You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in
the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Wiring
3.2 Block diagram

3.2 Block diagram

The following figure shows the block diagram of the interface module IM 155-6 PN BA.

① Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage

② ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics M Ground
③ Backplane bus LK 1,2 LED Link TX/RX
④ Internal power supply RN LED RUN/STOP (green/yellow)
X80 24 V Infeed of supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red)
DC
P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT MAINT LED (yellow)
P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 PWR POWER LED (red)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of IM 155-6 PN BA interface module

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 15
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for IM 155-6 PN BA interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 BA interface module.

Table 4- 1 Parameters for interface module IM 155-6 PN BA (GSD file)

Parameters Range of values Default Efficiency range

Configuration control Disable/enable Disable ET 200SP

4.2 Explanation of the parameters

4.2.1 Enabling configuration control

You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.

Note
If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data
record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to
operate the I/O modules.

Reference
You can find more information on the control data record in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and
in the STEP 7 online help.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Substitute value behavior

4.3 Substitute value behavior

The substitute value behavior in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is executed by the IO
controller for each slot.
The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior:
● Current-free/voltage-free
● Output substitute value
● Keep last value
The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases:
● STOP controller
● Controller failure (connection interrupted)
● Station stop, for example, due to:
– Missing server module
– Removing more than one I/O module at a time
– At least one I/O module installed on an incorrect BaseUnit
● Deactivating the IO device

Note
Reducing a configuration
If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the
configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present
retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is
switched off at the interface module.

The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior takes effect in the following cases:

● Firmware update
● Reset to factory settings
● Configuration control: receipt of a new control data record
● Incorrectly configured module
● Module with incorrect parameter assignment

4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules

Configurations
The "Status of supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules" is configured in the IM 155-6 PN BA on
the server module. The input data can then be read out on the server module. You will find
the relevant description in the Server module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 17
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system
alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

Introduction
Diagnostics by means of LEDs is an initial tool for error localization. In order to localize
errors still further, you usually evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7 or the
diagnostics buffer of the CPU. The buffer contains plain text information on the error that has
occurred. For example, you will find the number of the relevant error OB in the plain text
information.

LED display
The following diagram shows the LED display on the interface module and the BusAdapter.

① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ LK1 (green)
⑥ LK2 (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display on the interface module

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables describe the meanings of the status and error displays.

RN/ER/MT LED on the interface module

Table 5- 1 RN/ER/MT status and error displays

LEDs Meaning Solution

RN ER MT
(RUN) (ERROR) (MAINT)
No or insufficient supply voltage on Check the supply voltage or turn it on
Off Off Off interface module. at the interface module. *
Test of LEDs during startup: The three -
On On On LEDs light up simultaneously for ap-
proximately 0.25 s.
Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the
Off Off configuration software or the user pro-
Flashes
gram.
Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the
configuration software.
ET 200SP starts up. -
ET 200SP is being assigned parame-
ters.
ET 200SP is being reset to factory
settings.
Not rele- Not rele- ET 200SP is currently exchanging data
On vant vant with the IO controller.
Not rele- Not rele- Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate
vant vant the error.
Flashes
The preset configuration does not cor- Check the structure of the ET 200SP to
respond to the actual configuration of see whether a module is missing or
the ET 200SP . defective, or whether a non-configured
module is plugged.
Invalid configuration states. Refer to section Invalid configuration
states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET
IO (Page 27)
Parameter error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module
status in STEP 7 and eliminate the
error in the respective I/O module.
The "Node flash test" is running (the -
LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET
Flashes Flashes Flashes
interface also flash).
Hardware or firmware defective (the Run a firmware update. If the error
LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET persists, contact Siemens Industry
interface do not flash). Online Support.
Replace the interface module.

* PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short circuit.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 19
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

PWR LED on the interface module

Table 5- 2 PWR status display on the interface module

PWR LED Meaning Solution

No or insufficient supply voltage Check the supply voltage.
Off
Supply voltage present -
On

LK1/LK2 LED on the interface module

Table 5- 3 LK1/LK2 status display on the interface module

LEDs LK1/LK2 Meaning Solution

There is no Ethernet connection between the Check whether the bus cable to the switch/IO con-
Off PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device troller is interrupted.
and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller).
There is an Ethernet connection between the -
On PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device
and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller).
The "Node flash test" is running (the RN/ER/MT -
LEDs also flash).
Flashes

LED display of configuration errors

Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the
interface
module by the ERROR (red) and MAINT (yellow) LEDs.
The following configuration errors are indicated by the LEDs:
● More than one I/O module pulled
● Missing server module
● Interruptions or short circuit on the backplane bus

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Operating principle
You determine the information for cause of the error with the LED error display. After
notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error
code.
The LED error display
● is active during POWER ON as well as during operation.
● has priority before all other states displayed by the ERROR and MAINT LED.
● remains turned on until the cause of the error has been corrected.

Table 5- 4 Display of error type and error location

Sequence Description
1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at Signaling of error type
0.5 Hz
2 MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of the error type (decimal)
3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code
4 The ERROR LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
5 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been corrected.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 21
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Error display
The following table shows the possible causes of error that can occur.

Table 5- 5 Error display

Error type Error location Cause of error Remedy

(MAINT) (ERROR/MAINT)
1 02 to 12* The number of pulled I/O modules is Check the configuration
displayed. The diagnostics data is gen- of the ET 200SP.
erated starting with two pulled I/O mod-
ules.
65* • Missing server module
• Interruptions at the backplane bus
• Short circuit of communication on
the backplane bus

* Slot

Note
A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the
following LEDs:
• PWR LED: On
• RN, ER and MT LED: Off

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts

Introduction
The I/O device generates interrupts as a reaction to specific error events. Interrupts are
evaluated based on the I/O controller used.

Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts:
● Diagnostics interrupts
● Hardware interrupts
● Pull/plug module interrupts
● Maintenance events
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO
controller.
Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB
number and start information.
Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction
"RALRM" (read additional interrupt information).

System diagnostics
STEP 7 (TIA portal) offers innovative system diagnostics for the devices of the S7-1500 (IO
controller CPU S7-1500) and the ET 200SP (IO device) automation system. Independent of
the cyclic user program, alarms are made available on the display of the CPU S7-1500, the
CPU web server and the HMI device.
For more information on system diagnostics, refer to the System Diagnostics function
manual. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926).

5.2.1 Triggering a diagnostics interrupt

Triggering a diagnostics interrupt

For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the
module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if this is configured accordingly.
The CPU interrupts the user program and processes the diagnostics block OB 82. The
interrupt triggering event is logged in the start information of OB 82.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 23
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt

Triggering a hardware interrupt

If there is a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes
the hardware interrupt block OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the
start information of the hardware interrupt block.

Note
Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module)
Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically.
If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the
number of I/O modules and the communication load.

5.2.3 Triggering a pull/plug interrupt

Triggering a pull/plug interrupt

If there is a pull/plug interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the
hardware interrupt block OB 83. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start
information of OB 83.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3 Alarms

Actions after a diagnostics alarm

There can be more than one diagnostic alarm at a given time. Actions initiated by
diagnostics alarms:
● The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes.
● Diagnostic data is reported as diagnostic interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and
can be read via data records.
● Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller.
● OB 82 is called.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help.

Reading out the diagnostics data

Table 5- 6 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7

Automation system with Application See...

IO controller
SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 online help
STEP 7 in online and diagnos-
• As of STEP 7 V13, function manual
tics view
PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) (http://support.automation.siemens.
Read data records from the IO com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en)
device
• As of STEP 7 V5.5 system manual
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54)
PROFINET System Description
Receive interrupts from the IO
device (http://support.automation.siemens.
com/WW/view/en/19292127)

Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO

The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the
programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Application example
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238).

Causes of error and corrective measures

The causes of error and corrective measures for the diagnostics alarms are described in the
manuals for I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the chapter,
"Interrupts/diagnostics alarms".

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 25
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

See also
Channel diagnostics (Page 26)
PROFINET with STEP 7 V11
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)

5.3.1 Channel diagnostics

Function
Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records.
The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC".

Structure of the diagnostics data records

The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the
PROFINET IO standard - Application Layer Service Definition V2.2 or higher.
You can download the standard PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com)
from the homepage of the PROFIBUS User Organization free of charge.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.2 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO

Invalid configuration states

The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the
failure of the IO device or prevent the exchange of user data with the I/O modules.
● Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration
● Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do
not trigger an interrupt.
● Missing server module
● At least one I/O module is installed in a different BaseUnit than the one configured in the
parameters.

Note
If you remove more than one I/O module or the server module, this results in a station stop.
All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but
the interface module is still exchanging data.
Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart.

See also
Status and error displays (Page 18)
Channel diagnostics (Page 26)

5.3.3 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D

Failure of the supply voltage L+

The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D:
● If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull interrupt is
generated.
● If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, a plug interrupt is
generated.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 27
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.4 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device

STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller

Diagnostics frames received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not
initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. You must
read the data record E00CH with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 100. This record contains all
diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

Recovery of the SIMATIC IO device

If you want to read the diagnostics of a station after its return, you have to read the E00CH
data record with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 86. This record contains all diagnostics for
the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Compatibility 6
Status of the supply voltage
Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete
configuration.
● For modules in the following table without a parameter assignment, the status of the
supply voltage is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply
voltage.
● If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from
the table below, no group diagnostics "No supply voltage L+" is signaled for this potential
group.

Module Order number

DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
DQ 4x24VC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 29
Technical specifications 7
Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN BA

Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN BA

6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0
Product type designation IM 155-6 PN BA with 2xRJ45 ports and server
module
General information
Hardware version FS01
Firmware version V3.2
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 or higher
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / -
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Power and voltage failure backup
Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 0.1 A
Current consumption, max. 300 mA
I²t 0.09 A²s
Power
Incoming power to the backplane bus 1.7 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.7 W
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 32 byte; per input/output
Address space per station
Address space per station, max. 32 byte; per input/output

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
 Technical specifications

6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0
Hardware configuration
Rack
Modules per rack, max. 12
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
1st interface
Interface hardware
• Number of ports 2

• Integrated switch Yes

• RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; 2 integrated RJ45 ports

• BusAdapter (PROFINET) No

Protocols
• PROFINET IO device Yes

• Open IE communication Yes

Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex
(100BASE-TX)
Transmission method PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex (100BASE-
TX)
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Protocols
PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO Yes
PROFINET IO device
Services
• Isochronous mode No

• Open IE communication Yes

• IRT No

• PROFIenergy No

• Prioritized startup No

• Shared Device No

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 31
Technical specifications

6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Status display Yes
Interrupts
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
RUN LED Yes; green LED
ERROR LED Yes; red LED
MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes; 2x green LED
Electrical isolation
Between backplane bus and electronics No
Between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes
Between supply and all other circuits No
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
Horizontal installation, max. 55 °C
Vertical installation, min. 0 °C
Vertical installation, max. 60 °C
Connection technology
ET-Connection
Via BU/BA-Send No
Dimensions
Width 35 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 125 g; IM 155-6 PN BA with 2xRJ45 ports and
server module

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

32 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Dimension drawing A
This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc.

Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (front and side view)

IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 33
IM 155-6 PN HS interface module ___________________
Preface

(6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0) ___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Connecting 3
ET 200SP
IM 155-6 PN HS interface module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
(6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)
___________________
Interrupts, diagnostics, error,
and system messages 5
Manual

___________________
Compatibility 6

___________________
Technical specifications 7

___________________
Dimensional drawing A

09/2016
A5E34928647-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E34928647-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2016.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 08/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Conventions
Please also observe notes labeled as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product, or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

4 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Preface

Siemens Industry Online Support

You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here:
● Product support
All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications,
FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals.
● Application examples
Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks – as well as function blocks,
performance information and videos.
● Services
Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and
training offers.
● Forums
For answers and solutions concerning automation technology.
● mySupport
Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries,
and configurable documents.
This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 11
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................ 15
2.2.1 PROFIenergy ......................................................................................................................... 23
2.2.2 Configuration control (option handling) .................................................................................. 23
2.2.3 Use of fail-safe modules ........................................................................................................ 24
2.2.4 Multi Hot Swap ....................................................................................................................... 24
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 25
3.1 Terminal assignment .............................................................................................................. 25
3.2 Schematic circuit diagram ...................................................................................................... 31
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 32
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 32
4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 32
4.2.1 Configuration control .............................................................................................................. 32
4.3 Substitute value behavior ....................................................................................................... 33
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ............................................................... 33
5 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages ............................................................................. 34
5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 34
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 38
5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt....................................................................................... 39
5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt.............................................................................................. 39
5.2.3 Triggering a swapping interrupt ............................................................................................. 40
5.3 Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 40
5.3.1 Maintenance events ............................................................................................................... 42
5.3.2 Channel diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 43
5.3.3 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................ 44
5.3.4 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ................................................................... 44
5.3.5 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device ...................................................... 45
6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 46
7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 47
A Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................................. 57

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

6 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

8 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

10 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0 (interface module IM 155-6 PN HS and server module)

View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module and the server module

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following properties:
● Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO
● High-speed applications as of 125 µs
● Isochronous mode according to PROFINET V2.3
● Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV).
● The connection plugs for the 24 V DC supply voltage and the server module are included
in the scope of delivery of the interface module.
● PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapters
– For RJ45 bus connection plug (BA 2×RJ45)
– For direct connection of the bus cable (BA 2×FC)
– For POF/PCF fiber-optic cable (BA 2xSCRJ)
– As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 plug (BA
SCRJ/RJ45)
– As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus
cable (BA SCRJ/FC)
– For glass fiber-optic cable (BA 2xLC)
– As media converter for glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 plug (BA LC/RJ45)
– As media converter for glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus cable (BA
LC/FC)
The module supports the following PROFINET IO functions (see (Page 15))

Maximum configuration
● 30 I/O modules
● 0.5 m backplane bus (without interface module but with server module)

Maximum amount of I/O data

The maximum amount of I/O data without user data qualifier is 968 bytes.

Note
• In the case of a shared device configuration, the 968 bytes apply to the total I/O data of
all controllers that share the device.
• If more than two (max. four) controllers share the device, the maximum amount of I/O
data including user data qualifier is limited to 360 bytes per controller.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

12 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Accessories
You order the following accessories separately:
● BA 2×RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA 2×FC BusAdapter
● BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter
● BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter
● BA 2×LC BusAdapter
● BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA LC/FC BusAdapter
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label
A detailed list of the available accessories can be found in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Server module
The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and is
available separately as a spare part. The server module has the following properties:
● Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
● Features a support for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm)
● Provides station functions, for example, group load diagnostics, status bytes.
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3

Note
You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration
software.
To do this, place the server module in the last configuration slot and enable the parameter
Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+. When there are 30 I/O modules, the server
module is inserted in slot 31.

You can find more information in the Server module

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 13
Product overview
2.1 Properties

First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration

The interface modules support dark-colored BaseUnits in slot 1. This means that modules
without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2 can be configured starting
with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following modules:
● AI EnergyMeter
● DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)
● DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
● RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1)
● RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Note
First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station may be a dark-colored one if an AC I/O module or
AI Energy Meter is plugged. Please observe the information on limiting the overvoltage and
power rating in the AC I/O module manuals.
A light-colored BaseUnit must be plugged into the slot of the first 24 V DC I/O module to
supply the 24 V DC supply voltage.
Pay attention to the type of the BaseUnits during the configuration.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

14 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2 Functions

PROFINET IO
The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions:
● Integrated switch with 2 ports
● Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/MIB-2, LLDP-MIB
and MRP-MIB
● Port diagnostics
● Disabling ports
● Minimum update time 125 μs
● Device replacement without programming device, also without topological configuration
● Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO
● Firmware update via PROFINET IO
● Isochronous real-time communication
● Prioritized startup
● Media redundancy (MRP)
● Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD)
● Shared device
● Module division of I/O modules (submodules)
● Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
● Isochronous mode as of 125 μs
● Performance upgrade PROFINET V2.3
● Freely selectable connection method and connection technology over SIMATIC
BusAdapter for PROFINET copper, POF, PCF or fiber-optic cables.
The interface module supports additional functions:
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3
● Oversampling
● PROFIenergy
● Configuration control (option handling)
● Value status of I/O modules
● Use of fail-safe modules
● Multi Hot Swap (removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation)
● Reset to factory settings via RESET button

Note
Docking unit
The use of the IM155-6 PN HS interface module as a docking unit (function: IO device
changing in operation) in a docking system is not supported.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 15
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Requirements
The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the
IM 155-6 PN HS interface module:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions

Function Product version Firmware version Configuration software

of the module of the module as Configuration STEP 7 as of STEP 7 (TIA
as of of with GSD V5.5 SP4 with Portal) as of
file/software HSP0238 V14
from a third-
party manufac-
turer 1
Real-time communication 1 V4.0.0 X X X
Isochronous real-time com- 1 V4.0.0 X X X
munication according to
PROFINET
Prioritized startup 1 V4.0.0 X X X
Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V4.0.0 X X X
Shared device 1 V4.0.0 X X X
Multi Hot Swap 1 V4.0.0 X X X
Media redundancy with 1 V4.0.0 X X X
planned duplication (MRPD)
Isochronous mode ≥ 250 μs 1 V4.0.0 --- X X
Isochronous mode ≥ 1 V4.0.0 --- --- X
125 μs/187.5 μs
Device replacement without 1 V4.0.0 X X X
programming device
Module-internal Shared In- 1 V4.0.0 X X X
put/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
Module division of I/O mod- 1 V4.0.0 X X X
ules (submodules)
PROFIenergy 1 V4.0.0 X X X
Value status 1 V4.0.0 X X X
Use of fail-safe modules 1 V4.0.0 --- X X
Oversampling 1 V4.0.0 --- X X
BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X
BA 2xFC BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X
BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X
BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X
BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X
BA 2xLC BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X
BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X
BA LC/FC BusAdapter 1 V4.0.0 X X X
1 systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

16 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Cabling with fixed connection setting

If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you should also disable
"Autonegotiation/Autocrossover".
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual

Real-time communication
A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on cyclic data exchange with a provider-
consumer model.

Isochronous real-time communication

Synchronized communication protocol for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET
devices. A reserved bandwidth is available in the send cycle for IRT data. The reserved
bandwidth ensures that the IRT data can also be transferred with another high network load
(e.g. TCP/IP communication or additional real time communication) at reserved,
chronologically synchronized intervals.
A topological configuration is required for IRT.

Note
IO controller as sync master with IRT communication
We recommend also operating the IO controller as a sync master when configuring the IRT
communication.
Otherwise, IO devices with IRT and RT configuration could fail as a result of sync master
failure.

You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in
sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 17
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Isochronous mode of I/O data

I/O data, transmission cycle via PROFINET IO, and the user program are synchronized to
achieve maximum deterministics. The input and output data of distributed I/O modules in the
system is simultaneously collected and simultaneously output. The constant PROFINET IO
cycle forms the corresponding clock generator. The interface module supports isochronous
mode of I/O data for the modules starting at 125 µs. The IO device can exchange
isochronous process data with a maximum of one IO controller.

Note
If the IO controller cannot access a module (for example, module pulled, activated
configuration control without written control data record), cycle time violations may occur with
activated isochronous mode in the synchronous cycle interrupt OB (OB61). The time error
OB (OB80) is called in the event of a cycle time violation.
This behavior is associated with updating the process image by means of the "SYNC_PI"
(SFC126) and "SYNC_PO" (SFC127) instructions and depends, among other things, on the
set cycle time and the configuration limits.

Note
Isochronous mode restrictions with IM 155-6 PN HS
Isochronous mode of I/O data in combination with the following functions is not possible with
the interface module IM 155-6 PN HS:
• PROFIenergy

You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

18 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Prioritized startup
Prioritized startup describes the PROFINET IO functionality for accelerating the startup of IO
devices in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT communication.
The function reduces the time that the appropriately configured IO devices require in order to
return to cyclic user data exchange in the following cases:
● After the supply voltage has returned
● After a station has returned
● After IO devices have been activated

Note
Dependency on the startup time
The startup time depends on the number and type of modules.

The interface module permits startup times from 0.5 s.

You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 19
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Device replacement

Device replacement without topological configuration

The device name is also stored on the BusAdapter in addition to the interface module. A
device name saved on the BusAdapter is the requirement for device replacement without
topological configuration.
Storing the name on the BusAdapter and the interface module produces a range of
scenarios for using the device name when the interface module is replaced.

Table 2- 2 Scenarios for using the device name

Interface module empty Interface module with device name

BusAdapter empty No device name available The device name from the interface
module is used and copied to the
BusAdapter.
BusAdapter with device name The device name from the BusAdapter The device name from the BusAdapter
is used and copied to the interface is used and copied to the interface
module. module if this has a different device
name.

Be aware of the following constraints:

● Resetting to factory settings via the RESET button deletes the device name in both the
interface module and the BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in
the BusAdapter, you can remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before
resetting to factory settings.
● When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the
interface module after a POWER ON.
● Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage. If you pull/plug the BusAdapter
while under voltage, the interface module restarts.

Device replacement with topological configuration

IO devices having this function can be replaced in a simple manner:
● The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device.
The replaced IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the
programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring
relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must
support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology
must match the actual topology.
IO devices that were already operated in a different configuration should be reset to their
factory settings before reuse (see system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)).
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

20 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Replacement scenario of an IM 155-6 PN HS or of a BusAdapter

In a replacement scenario, any IO device or BusAdapter in operation must be reset to its
delivery state via "Reset to factory settings" (see the system manual ET 200SP distributed
I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)).

Media redundancy (MRP)

Function for safeguarding communication and system availability. A ring topology ensures
that an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual

Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD)

If bumpless media redundancy is to be reached with short update times (together with IRT),
you must use the MRP extension "Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD)".
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual

Shared device
IO device which makes its data available to multiple IO controllers.
The interface module supports shared device at submodule level.
Notes on configuring:
● Always load hardware changes to all affected IO controllers.
● Set the same send clocks in the projects.
● Limit the I/O data including user data qualifier to 360 bytes per IO controller.
● Use the same station name and the same IP address for each shared configuration.
● Assign each module or submodule to only one IO controller.
● In the case of an incorrect configuration, you may need to perform a power OFF/ON on
the interface module.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 21
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Submodules
The IM 155-6 PN HS interface module supports the module division of I/O modules into up to
4 submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and assigned
parameters.
It is possible to assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers.
The functions
● Firmware update
● Write I&M data
● Calibration
● PROFIenergy
can only be executed if you have configured submodule 1 during configuration.

Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)

The module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data
available to up to three additional IO controllers. Each controller has read access to the
same channels.
The module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to make the status of
its output data available to up to three additional IO controllers. These additional IO
controllers can read the status of the channels as input data.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V14, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual

Value status
The IM 155-6 PN HS interface module supports I/O modules with value status.
You can find more information on the value status in the manuals for the I/O modules.

Oversampling
The IM 155-6 PN HS interface module supports the oversampling mode of HS modules.
With oversampling, the modules reduce the respective PROFINET send clocks in
isochronous mode.
You can find more information on oversampling in the manuals for the I/O modules.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

22 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.1 PROFIenergy

Properties
PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy
commands during production-free periods.

Reference
You can find more information on PROFIenergy in the
● I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)
manual
● PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual
● PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product
information.
● Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy;
Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802.

2.2.2 Configuration control (option handling)

Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions
or changes. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner
by means of the user program.

Reference
You can find more information on configuration control
● in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual
● on the Internet under the following link Application collection
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270)
● in the STEP 7 online help.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 23
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.3 Use of fail-safe modules

Properties
The interface module IM 155-6 PN HS supports the use of fail-safe modules.

Reference
You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

2.2.4 Multi Hot Swap

Properties
You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules during operation. The interface
module and the inserted I/O modules remain in operation.

Note
The IM 155-6 PN HS interface module does not support the removal and insertion of the
server module, the interface module and BusAdapter during operation.

Reference
You can find more information on the removal/insertion of modules in the system manual
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

24 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
Connecting 3
3.1 Terminal assignment

24 V DC supply voltage
The table below shows the signal names and descriptions of the pin assignment of the
24 V DC supply voltage.

Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage

View Signal name1 Description

Connector IM connection
1L+ 24 V DC
2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2
1M Ground
2M Ground (for looping through)2

1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally.

2 Maximum 10 A permitted.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 25
Connecting
3.1 Terminal assignment

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the
BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45.

Table 3- 2 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

View Signal name Description

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data -
3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 RD_N Receive data -
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×FC

The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the
BusAdapter BA 2×FC.

Table 3- 3 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×FC

View Signal name Description

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data -
3 RD Receive data +
4 RD_N Receive data -

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

26 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Connecting
3.1 Terminal assignment

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter.

Table 3- 4 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

View Signal Description

name
① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×LC

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the BA
2×LC BusAdapter.

Table 3- 5 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×LC

View Signal Description

name
① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 27
Connecting
3.1 Terminal assignment

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter.

Table 3- 6 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

View Signal name Description

① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data –
3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 RD_N Receive data –
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

28 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Connecting
3.1 Terminal assignment

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter.
The pin assignment for the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter is shown individually for a clearer
overview.

Table 3- 7 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

View Signal name Description

① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data –
3 RD Receive data +
4 RD_N Receive data -

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter.

Table 3- 8 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45

View Signal name Description

① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data –
3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 RD_N Receive data –
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 29
Connecting
3.1 Terminal assignment

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA LC/FC

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA LC/FC BusAdapter.
The pin assignment for the BA LC/FC BusAdapter is shown individually for a clearer
overview.

Table 3- 9 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/FC

View Signal name Description

① Receiver/Receive data

② Sender/Transmit data

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data –
3 RD Receive data +
4 RD_N Receive data -

Reference
You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in
the System Manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

30 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Connecting
3.2 Schematic circuit diagram

3.2 Schematic circuit diagram

The following figure shows the block diagram of the interface module IM 155-6 PN HS.

① Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage

② ET 200SP backplane bus interface and M Ground
electronics
③ Backplane bus LK 1,2 Link TX/RX LED (green)
④ Internal power supply MT 1,2 MAINT FiberOptic LED (SCRJ port) (yellow)
X80 24 V Feed supply voltage RN RUN/STOP LED (green/yellow)
DC
X5 BusAdapter ER ERROR LED (red)
P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT MAINT LED (yellow)
P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 PWR POWER LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 31
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for IM 155-6 PN HS interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module.

Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default Efficiency range

Configuration control Disable/enable Disable ET 200SP

4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2.1 Configuration control

You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.

Note
If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data
record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to
operate the I/O modules.

Reference
You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the
STEP 7 online help.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

32 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Substitute value behavior

4.3 Substitute value behavior

Substitute value behavior

The substitute value behavior in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is defined through the
configuration.
The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior:
● Current-free/voltage-free
● Output substitute value
● Keep last value
The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases:
● STOP controller
● Controller failure (connection interrupted)
● Parameter assignment phase during startup
● Deactivating the IO device
● Station stop:
– Missing server module
– At least one I/O module installed on an incorrect BaseUnit

Note
Reducing a configuration
If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the
configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present
retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is
switched off at the interface module.

The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior becomes effective in the following cases:

● Firmware update
● Reset to factory settings
● Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet.
● Incorrectly configured module
● Module with incorrect parameter assignment

4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules

The status of the supply voltage L+ of the ET 200SP I/O modules is mapped to the server
module with the interface module IM 155-6 PN HS.
You can find information on the status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules in the
Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 33
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The following figure shows the LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter.

① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ MT2 (yellow) (SCRJ port)
⑥ LK2 (green)
⑦ MT1 (yellow) (SCRJ port)
⑧ LK1 (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

34 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.1 Status and error displays

RN/ER/MT LEDs on the interface module

Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of RN/ER/MT LEDs

LEDs Meaning Remedy

RN ER MT
(RUN) (ERROR) (MAINT)
Missing or insufficient supply voltage on Check the supply voltage or turn it on at the
Off Off Off interface module. interface module.*
Test of LEDs during startup: The three ---
On On On LEDs light up simultaneously for ap-
proximately 0.25 s.
Not relevant Not rele- Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the con-
Flashes vant figuration software or the user program.
Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the
configuration software.
ET 200SP starts up. ---
ET 200SP is being assigned parame-
ters.
Not relevant Not rele- ET 200SP is currently exchanging data ---
On vant with the IO controller.
Not rele- Not rele- Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics data and remedy
vant Flashes vant the error.
The configured structure does not cor- Check the structure of the ET 200SP to see
respond to the actual structure of the whether a module is missing or defective,
ET 200SP . or whether a non-configured module is
plugged.
Invalid configuration states. See section Invalid configuration states of
the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO (Page 44)
Parameter error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module status in
STEP 7 and eliminate the error in the re-
spective I/O module.
Not rele- Not relevant Maintenance See section Maintenance events (Page 42)
vant On
Not rele- Invalid BusAdapter Check the BusAdapter.
Flashes Flashes vant
The "Node flash test" is run (the LEDs ---
Flashes Flashes Flashes LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET inter-
face also flash).
Hardware or firmware defective (the Run a firmware update. If the error persists,
LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET contact Siemens Industry Online Support.
interface do not flash). Replace the interface module.
Not rele- Configuration error on backplane bus Insert the server module as bus termination
vant Flashes Flashes or check the number of inserted modules.

* PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short circuit.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 35
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.1 Status and error displays

PWR LED on the interface module

Table 5- 2 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning Remedy

Supply voltage not present or too small Check the supply voltage.
Off
Supply voltage present ---
On

LK1/LK2 and MT1/MT2 LEDs on the BusAdapter

Table 5- 3 Status and error displays of LK1/LK2 and MT1/MT2 LEDs

LED Meaning Remedy

LK1/LK2 MT1/MT2*
Not relevant There is no Ethernet connection Check whether the bus cable to the switch/IO
Off between the PROFINET IO interface controller is interrupted.
of your PROFINET device and a
communication partner (e.g. IO con-
troller).
Not relevant There is an Ethernet connection ---
On between the PROFINET IO interface
of your PROFINET device and a
communication partner (e.g. IO con-
troller).
Not relevant The "Node flash test" is run (the ---
RN/ER/MT LEDs also flash).
Flashes
Not relevant No error ---
Off
Not relevant • Fiber-optic error Causes and measures for the transmission
On route:
• Maintenance demanded: Attenua-
tion through the fiber-optic cable • Replacement of fiber-optic cable if dam-
is so high that operation will soon aged or aged
no longer be possible. • Correct installation of the PROFINET
connector/PROFINET connections
• Adherence to maximum length of 50 m
for POF cable or 100 m for PCF cable.
• Secure fit of the FOC connector

* Available only on BA 2×SCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45 and BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapters

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

36 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.1 Status and error displays

LED display of configuration errors

Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the interface
module by the ER (red) and MT (yellow) LEDs.
The following configuration errors are indicated by the LEDs:
● Missing server module
● Interruptions or short circuit on the backplane bus

Principle of operation
You determine the information for cause of the error with the LED error display. After
notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error
code.
The LED error display
● is active during POWER ON as well as during operation.
● Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ER and MT LEDs.
● remains turned on until the cause of the error has been corrected.

Table 5- 4 Display of error type and error location

Sequence Description
1 ER and MT LEDs flash 3x with 0.5 Hz Signaling of error type
2 MT LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the error type (decimal)
3 ER and MT LEDs flash 3x with 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code
4 ER LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
5 MT LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been corrected.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 37
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.2 Interrupts

Error display
The following table shows the possible causes of error that can occur.

Table 5- 5 Error display

Error type Error location Cause of error Remedy

(MT) (ER/MT)
1 65* • Missing server module Check the configuration
of the ET 200SP.
• Interruptions at the backplane bus
• Short circuit of communication on
the backplane bus

* Slot

Note
A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the
following LEDs:
• PWR LED: On
• RN-, ER and MT LED: Off

5.2 Interrupts

Introduction
The I/O device generates interrupts as a reaction to specific error events. Interrupts are
evaluated based on the I/O controller used.

Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts:
● Diagnostics interrupts
● Hardware interrupts
● Swapping interrupts
● Maintenance events
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO
controller.
Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB
number and start information.
Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction
"RALRM" (read additional interrupt information).

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

38 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.2 Interrupts

System diagnostics
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) offers innovative system diagnostics for the devices of the S7-1500 (IO
controller CPU S7-1500) and the ET 200SP (IO device) automation system. Independent of
the cyclic user program, messages are made available on the display of the CPU S7-1500,
the CPU web server and the HMI device.
For more information on system diagnostics, refer to the System Diagnostics function
manual. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926).

5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the
module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if this is configured accordingly.
The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the diagnostics
interrupt (OB 82). The event which led to the interrupt is entered in the start information of
the diagnostics interrupt (OB 82).

5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt

Triggering a hardware interrupt

During a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and
processes the hardware interrupt block (e.g., OB 40). The event that triggered the interrupt is
entered in the start information of the hardware interrupt block.

Note
Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module)
Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically.
If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the
number of I/O modules and the communication load.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 39
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

5.2.3 Triggering a swapping interrupt

Triggering a remove/insert interrupt

In the event of a remove/insert interrupt, the CPU interrupts processing of the user program
and processes the remove/insert interrupt (OB 83). The event which led to the interrupt is
entered in the start information of the remove/insert interrupt (OB 83).

Note
Parameter assignment error after removal/insertion
If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make
sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can do this by evaluating the
remove/insert interrupt (OB83). After inserting a module, the remove/insert interrupt (OB83)
is not called until the module has started up and its parameters are assigned. This ensures
that data record operations can be executed without errors.

5.3 Alarms

Actions after a diagnostics alarm

There can be more than one diagnostic alarm at a given time. Actions initiated by
diagnostics alarms:
● The ER LED on the interface module flashes.
● Diagnostic data is reported as diagnostic interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and
can be read via data records.
● Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller.
● The diagnostics interrupt (OB 82) is called. If the diagnostics interrupt (OB 82) is not
available, the I/O controller goes into STOP mode.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

40 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

Reading out the diagnostics data

Table 5- 6 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7

Automation system with Application See...

IO controller
SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 online help
STEP 7 in online and diagnos-
• As of STEP 7 V14, function
tics view
manual PROFINET with
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) STEP 7 V14
Read data records from the IO (http://support.automation.si
device
emens.com/WW/view/en/49
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) 948856)
Receive interrupts from the IO
device • As of STEP 7 V5.5, system
manual PROFINET System
Description
(http://support.automation.si
emens.com/WW/view/en/19
292127)

Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO

The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the
Programming Manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238).

Causes of error and troubleshooting

The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostics alarms are described in the product
manuals for I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the section
"Interrupts/diagnostics alarms".

See also
Channel diagnostics (Page 43)

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 41
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

5.3.1 Maintenance events

Triggering of a maintenance event

The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and
maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158-6-10 standard. The goal
is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible.
For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a network component
must be checked or replaced.
The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the diagnostics
interrupt (OB 82). The event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start
information of the diagnostics interrupt (OB 82).
At the following events:
● The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system
● The I/O module signals a maintenance event.

Table 5- 7 Triggering of a maintenance event

Maintenance alarm Event Meaning

Maintenance demand- Synchronization • No synchronization telegram received
ed (maintenance de- loss
manded) No synchronization telegram was received by the
MT LED is lit sync master within the timeout period after parame-
ter assignment or during operation.
• Successive synchronization telegrams are located
outside permitted limits (jitter)
Critical FOC The received light intensity at the FOC port is critical.
attenuation The FOC should be replaced.
Maintenance An I/O module signals a maintenance event that is sent
request from I/O and displayed by the interface module
module

System alarms in STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 with the following system alarms:
● Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon in the
device view or in the hardware configuration.
You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

42 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

5.3.2 Channel diagnostics

Function
Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records.
The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC".

Structure of the diagnostics data records

The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the
standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.3.
You can download the standard PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com)
from the homepage of the PROFIBUS User Organization.

Codes of the extended channel diagnostics

With the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are
reported:

Slot number ChannelError- ExtendedChannel- Associated value Diagnostics

Type (CET) ErrorType (ECET) AddValue
Module slot 0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Poten-
tial group" faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in
actual slot (AddValue)
Slot 0 0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module
0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too long
0x0602 0x0699 Slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configura-
tion
0x0602 0x069C 0x00 Diagnostics with incorrectly plugged
BusAdapter
Server module slot 0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply volt-
age L+ for the potential groups
Note: The slot in which the light-colored
BaseUnit of the respective load module is
located is coded in the "ChannelNumber"
element.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 43
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

5.3.3 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO

Invalid configuration states

The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the
failure of the IO device or prevent the exchange of user data with the I/O modules.
● Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration
● Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do
not trigger an interrupt.
● At least one I/O module is installed in a different BaseUnit than the one configured in the
parameters.
● Missing server module
● Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter.

Note
Removal of the server module will trigger a station stop. All I/O modules of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the interface module is still
exchanging data.
Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart.

See also
Status and error displays (Page 34)
Channel diagnostics (Page 43)

5.3.4 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D

Failure of the supply voltage L+

The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D:
● If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull alarm is generated.
● If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, an insert alarm is
generated.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

44 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

5.3.5 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device

STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller

Diagnostics frames received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not
initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. You must
read the data record E00CH with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 100. This record contains all
diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices

If you want to read the diagnostics of a station after its return, you have to read the E00CH
data record with the "RDREC" instruction in the rack interrupt (OB 86). This record contains
all diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 45
Compatibility 6
Status of the supply voltage
Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete
configuration.
● For modules in the following table without a parameter assignment, the status of the
supply voltage is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply
voltage.
● If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from
the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this
potential group.

Modules Order number

DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF 6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0

Reaction times for fail-safe modules

The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account
when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules:
maximum reaction time = configured update time + 400 μs (but at least 1.4 ms)

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

46 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
Technical specifications 7
Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN HS

6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, IM 155-6 PN HS with server module
Firmware version V4.0
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated As of STEP 7 V14
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 or higher
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision - / V2.3
Configuration control
Via data record Yes
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage DC
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power and voltage failure backup
Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption, max. 700 mA
Inrush current, max. 3.7 A
I²t 0.09 A²s
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.4 W
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 32 bytes; for both input and output data
Address space per station
Address space per station, max. 968 bytes each for input data and output data

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 47
Technical specifications

6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0
Hardware configuration
Racks
Modules per rack, max. 30
Submodules
Number of submodules per station, max. 125
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch)
1st interface
Interface hardware
Number of ports 2
Integrated switch Yes
BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; usable BusAdapters: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x
FC, BA 2x SCRJ, BA SCRJ / RJ45, BA SCRJ /
FC, BA 2x LC, BA LC / RJ45, BA LC / FC
Protocols
PROFINET IO device Yes
Open IE communication Yes
Media redundancy Yes; as MRP or MRPD client, max. 50 or 30
devices in the ring
Interface hardware
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
Transmission method PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex (100BASE-
TX)
10 Mbps Yes; for Ethernet services
100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex
(100BASE-TX)
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Protocols
PROFINET IO device
Services
• S7 communication Yes
• Isochronous mode Yes; bus cycle time min. 125 µs
• IRT Yes; 125 μs, 250 μs, 500 µs, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms
additionally with IRT with high performance: 250
µs to 4 ms in 125 µs intervals
• MRP Yes
• MRPD Yes
• PROFINET system redundancy No
• PROFIenergy Yes
• Prioritized startup Yes
• Shared device Yes
• Number of IO controllers with shared device, 4
max.

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

48 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Technical specifications

6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0
Open IE communication
TCP/IP Yes
SNMP Yes
LLDP Yes
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes
terminal)
Constant bus cycle time Yes
Shortest clock pulse 125 µs
Longest clock pulse 4 ms
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 125 µs
Jitter, max. 0.25 µs
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Status display Yes
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostic functions Yes
Diagnostic indicator LED
RUN LED Yes; green LED
ERROR LED Yes; red LED
MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes; 2x green Link LED on BusAdapter
Electrical isolation
Between backplane bus and electronics No
between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes
Standards, approvals, certificates
Network loading class 3
Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
Horizontal installation, max. 60 ℃
Vertical installation, min. 0 °C
Vertical installation, max. 50 ℃
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 147 g; without BusAdapter

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 49
Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
RJ45 Yes; 2 x
FC (FastConnect) No
SCRJ 0
LC 0
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 46 g

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC

Table 7- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC

6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 2 x
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 53 g

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

50 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

Table 7- 3 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) SCRJ FO
RJ45 No
FC (FastConnect) No
SCRJ 2
LC 0
Cable length
• PCF 100 m

• Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m

• PCF-GI 300 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 51
Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

Table 7- 4 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + RJ45)
RJ45 Yes; 1x
FC (FastConnect) No
SCRJ 1
LC 0
Cable length
• PCF 100 m

• Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m

• PCF-GI 300 m

• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

52 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

Table 7- 5 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + FC)
RJ45 No
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1x
SCRJ 1
LC 0
Cable length
• PCF 100 m

• Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m

• PCF-GI 300 m

• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 53
Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×LC

Table 7- 6 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×LC

6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC multimode glass-fiber
PROFINET IO
RJ45 No
FC (FastConnect) No
SCRJ 0
LC 2
Cable length
• Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 µm 3 km

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 μm 3 km

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. 60 ℃
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 40 g

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

54 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45

Table 7- 7 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45

6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC / RJ45
PROFINET IO
RJ45 Yes; 1x
FC (FastConnect) No
SCRJ 0
LC 1
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 µm 3 km

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 μm 3 km

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. 60 ℃
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 32 g

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 55
Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC

Table 7- 8 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC

6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
PROFINET IO
RJ45 No
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1x
SCRJ 0
LC 1
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 µm 3 km

• Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 μm 3 km

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. 60 ℃
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

56 Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA
Dimensional drawing A
This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module installed on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc.

Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (front and side view)

IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)

Manual, 09/2016, A5E34928647-AA 57
 Manual

SIMATIC

ET 200SP
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module
(6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Edition 04/2017 support.industry.siemens.com

 ___________________
Preface

1
___________________
Guide

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
(6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)
___________________
Interrupts, diagnostics, error,
and system messages 5
Manual

___________________
Compatibility 6

___________________
Technical specifications 7

___________________
Dimension drawing A

04/2017
A5E03576904-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03576904-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 04/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

4 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 10
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................10
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................13
2.2.1 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................19
2.2.2 Use of fail-safe modules .........................................................................................................20
2.2.3 Use of technology modules ....................................................................................................20
2.2.4 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................20
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.1 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................21
3.2 Schematic circuit diagram .......................................................................................................24
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 25
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................25
4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................25
4.2.1 Configuration control ...............................................................................................................25
4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................26
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ................................................................27
5 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages ............................................................................. 28
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................28
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................33
5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt .......................................................................................33
5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt ..............................................................................................34
5.2.3 Triggering a swapping interrupt ..............................................................................................34
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................35
5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................35
5.3.2 Maintenance events ................................................................................................................36
5.3.3 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................37
5.3.4 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................41
5.3.5 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ....................................................................41
5.3.6 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device .......................................................42
6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 43
7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 45
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 50

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 5
Guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

6 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 7
Guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

8 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 9
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0 (IM 155-6 PN ST interface module and server module)
6ES7155-6AA01-0BN0 (IM 155-6 PN ST interface module with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45 and
server module)

View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module and the server module

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO
● Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope
of delivery of the interface module.
● PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapter for RJ45 bus connector
(BA 2×RJ45) or for direct connection of the bus cable (BA 2×FC)
● Use of fail-safe modules
● As of firmware version V 3.0, you can plug a light-colored or a dark-colored BaseUnit into
slot 1.
The module supports the following functions (Page 13)

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

10 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Maximum configuration
● 32 I/O modules
● 512 bytes I/O data
● 1 m backplane bus (without interface module)

Accessories
The following accessories can be ordered separately:
● BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter
● BA 2xFC BusAdapter
● 24 V DC connector
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label

Note
The interface module is also available as a bundle with the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (and the
server module). The article number is 6ES7155-6AA01-0BN0.

A detailed list of the available accessories can be found in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Server module
The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and available
separately as an accessory.
The server module has the following properties:
● Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
● Features a holder for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm)
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3

Note
You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration
software.
To do this, place the server module in the last configuration slot and enable the parameter
Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+. When there are 32 I/O modules, the server
module is inserted in slot 33.

You can find more information in the Server module

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration (as of V3.0)

Note
First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station may be a dark-colored one if an AC I/O module or
AI Energy Meter ST is plugged. Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and
power rating in the AC I/O module manuals.
A light-colored BaseUnit must be plugged into the slot of the first 24 V DC I/O module in
order to route the 24 V DC supply voltage via a fuse.
Pay attention to the type of the BaseUnits during the configuration.

As of firmware V3.x, the interface modules support plugging dark-colored BaseUnits in slot
1. This means that modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2
can now also be configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following
modules:
● AI EnergyMeter
● DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)
● DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
Requirement for configuration of these modules in slot 1:
● Configuration via GSD or GSDML
● Configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 with
– HSP0241 V2.0 for IM155-6 PN ST
– HSP0242 V2.0 for IM155-6 DP HF
– HSP0255 V3.0 for IM155-6 PN HF
● Configuration as of STEP 7 V13 SP1

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

12 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2 Functions

Introduction
The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions:
● Integrated switch with 2 ports
● Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/MIB-2, LLDP-MIB
and MRP-MIB
● Port diagnostics
● Disabling ports
● Isochronous real-time communication
● Minimum update time 1 ms
● Prioritized startup
● Media redundancy (MRP)
● Shared device
● Support of submodules on suitable I/O modules
● Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
● Device replacement without PG and without topological configuration
● Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO
● Firmware update via PROFINET IO
● Station extension via ET-Connection
● The BusAdapter provides the connection system for PROFINET IO. The following
versions are available for the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module:
– For standard RJ45 connector: BA 2×RJ45
– For direct connection of the bus cable: BA 2×FC
The interface module supports additional functions:
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3
● PROFIenergy
● Use of fail-safe modules
● Configuration control (option handling)
● Value status (quality information, QI) of I/O modules

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 13
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Requirements
The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions

Function Product version Firmware version Configuration software

of the module of the module as Configuration STEP 7 as of STEP 7
as of of with GSD file V5.5 SP3 with (TIA Portal), as
(http://support.a HSP241 of V11 SP2
utoma-
tion.siemens.co
m/WW/view/en/
19698639/1300
00)/software
from a third-
party manufac-
turer 1
Real-time communication 1 V1.0.0 X X X
Isochronous real-time com- 1 V1.0.0 X X X
munication
Prioritized startup 1 V1.0.0 X X X
Device replacement without 1 V1.0.0 X X X
programming device
Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V1.0.0 X X X
Shared device 1 V1.0.0 X X X (as of V13
SP1)
PROFIenergy 1 V1.0.0 --- X X
Use of fail-safe modules 1 V1.0.1 X X X (as of V13
SP1)
Module-internal Shared In- 1 V3.1.0 X X X (as of V13
put/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) SP1)
Station extension via ET- 5 V3.1.0 X X X (as of V13
Connection SP1)
User data 512 bytes 1 V3.1.0 X X X (as of V13
SP1)
Distribution of module chan- 1 V3.3.0 X X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
nels to multiple submodules SP4, HSP0241 SP1, Update 6)
V3)
Interface module; 1 V4.1 X X (as of V5.5 X (as of V14
article number: 6ES7155- SP4, HSP241 HSP205)
6AU01-0BN0 V4)
1 Systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

14 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Cabling with fixed connection setting

If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you should also disable
"Autonegotiation/Autocrossover".
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)

Isochronous real-time communication

Synchronized transmission method for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET
devices. A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is available for IRT data. The reserved
bandwidth ensures that the IRT data can also be transferred without being affected by
another high network load (e.g. TCP/IP communication or additional real time
communication) at reserved, chronologically synchronized intervals.
A topological configuration is required for IRT.

Note
IO controller as sync master with IRT communication
We recommend also operating the IO controller as a sync master when configuring the IRT
communication.
Otherwise, IO devices with IRT and RT configuration could fail as a result of sync master
failure.

You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in
sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 15
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Prioritized startup
Prioritized startup describes the PROFINET IO functionality for accelerating the startup of IO
devices in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT communication.
The function reduces the time that the appropriately configured IO devices require in order to
return to cyclic user data exchange in the following cases:
● After the supply voltage has returned
● After a station has returned
● After IO devices have been activated

Note
Dependency of the startup time
The interface module permits startup times from 0.9 s.
The startup time depends on the number and type of modules.

You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)

Device replacement

Device replacement without topological configuration

The device name is also stored on the BusAdapter in addition to the interface module. A
device name saved on the BusAdapter is the requirement for device replacement without
topological configuration.
Storing the name on the BusAdapter and the interface module produces a range of
scenarios for using the device name when the interface module is replaced.

Table 2- 2 Scenarios for using the device name

Interface module empty Interface module with device

name
BusAdapter empty No device name available The device name from the inter-
face module is used and copied
to the BusAdapter.
BusAdapter with device name The device name from the The device name from the
BusAdapter is used and copied BusAdapter is used and copied
to the interface module. to the interface module if this
has a different device name.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

16 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Be aware of the following constraints:

● Resetting to factory settings deletes the device name in both the interface module and the
BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the BusAdapter, you can
remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before resetting to factory settings.
● When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the
interface module after a POWER ON.
● Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage. If you pull/plug the BusAdapter
while under voltage, the interface module restarts.

Device replacement with topological configuration

IO devices with this function can be replaced in a simple manner:
● The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device.
The replacement IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the
programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring
relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must
support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology
must match the actual topology.
IO devices that have already been used in another configuration should be reset to their
factory settings before reuse (see system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)).
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)

Replacement of an IM 155-6 PN ST
In a replacement scenario, any IO devices in operation must be reset to their as-delivered
state via "Reset to factory settings" (see the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)).

Media redundancy (MRP)

Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. A ring topology ensures that
an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 17
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Shared device
IO device which makes its data available to multiple IO controllers.
The interface module supports shared device at submodule level.
If there is no validity check of the shared device projects by the Engineering System, note
the following:
● Make sure the configurations are consistent. In particular, modules or submodules may
only be assigned to one controller. Multiple assignment will result in an error; the module
or submodule will only be available in the first controller.
● If you reconfigure the shared device configurations without the validity check mentioned
above, you must commission the ET 200SP once again. This means that you have to
reload the projects of all involved IO controllers to the specific CPU after reconfiguration
and, if necessary, switch the interface module POWER OFF/POWER ON.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) system manual

Note
In the case of a shared device application, make sure that all controllers work with the same
send clock. If controllers do not have the same send clock, the differing send clock can result
in communication relationships that are not set up.
If you set up all controllers in one project, the same send clock is ensured. Set the same
send clock for engineering in separate projects.

Submodules
The IM 155-6 PN ST interface module supports the division of I/O modules into up to 4
submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and
parameterized.
It is possible to assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers.
The functions:
● Firmware update
● Write I&M data
● Calibration
● PROFIenergy
can only be executed if you have configured submodule 1 during configuration.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

18 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)

The Module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data
available to up to two IO controllers (for ET 200SP PN ST). Each controller has read access
to the same channels.
The Module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to make its output data
available to up to two IO controllers. One IO controller has write access. A second IO
controller can have read access to the same channels.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)

Value status
The IM 155-6 PN ST interface module supports I/O modules with value status.
Additional information on the value status can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules.

2.2.1 PROFIenergy

Properties
PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy
commands during production-free periods.

Reference
You can find more information on PROFIenergy in the:
● Product manual I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)
● PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual.
● System manual PROFINET system description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)
● PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product
information.
● Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy;
Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 19
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.2 Use of fail-safe modules

Properties
The IM 155-6 PN ST interface module as of firmware V1.0.1 supports the use of fail-safe
modules.

Reference
You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

2.2.3 Use of technology modules

Technology modules
As of firmware version V3.1, the interface module IM 155-6 PN ST supports the "Position
input for Motion Control" mode of the technology modules TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-
6AA00-0BA0) and TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0).

2.2.4 Configuration control (option handling)

Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions
or changes. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner
by means of the user program.

Reference
You can find more information on configuration control
● in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual
● on the Internet under the following link: Application collection
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270)
● in the STEP 7 online help.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

20 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment

24 V DC supply voltage
The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the pin assignment for a
24 V DC supply voltage.

Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage

View Signal name1 Description

Connector IM connection
1L+ 24 V DC
2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2
1M Ground
2M Ground (for looping through)2

1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally.

2 Maximum 10 A permitted.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 21
Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the
BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45.

Table 3- 2 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

View Signal name Description

1 TD Transmit data +
2 TD_N Transmit data -
3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 RD_N Receive data -
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

Note
PROFINET interface X1 Port 2
If autonegotiation is disabled, the RJ-45 socket (X1 Port 2) has the switch assignment (MDI-
X).

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

22 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×FC

The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the
BusAdapter BA 2×FC.

Table 3- 3 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×FC

View Signal name Description

1 TD Transmit data +
2 RD Receive data +
3 TD_N Transmit data -
4 RD_N Receive data -

Reference
You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in
the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 23
Wiring
3.2 Schematic circuit diagram

3.2 Schematic circuit diagram

The following figure shows a block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module.

① Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage

② ET 200SP backplane bus interface and M Mass
electronics
③ Backplane bus LK 1,2 TX/RX Link LED
④ Internal power supply RN RUN LED (green)
X80 24 V Supply voltage infeed ER ERROR LED (red)
DC
X5 BusAdapter MT MAINT LED (yellow)
P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 PWR POWER LED (green)
P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

24 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for IM 155-6 PN ST interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module.

Table 4- 1 Parameters for interface module IM 155-6 PN ST (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default Efficiency range

Configuration control Disable/enable Disable ET 200SP

4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2.1 Configuration control

You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.

Note
If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data
record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to
operate the I/O modules.

Reference
You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the
STEP 7 online help.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 25
Parameters/address space
4.3 Substitute value behavior

4.3 Substitute value behavior

The substitute value behavior in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is executed by the IO
controller for each slot.
The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior:
● Current-free/voltage-free
● Output substitute value
● Keep last value
The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases:
● STOP controller
● Controller failure (connection interrupted)
● Firmware update
● Reset to factory settings
● Station stop, for example, due to:
– Missing server module
– Removing more than one I/O module at a time.
– At least one I/O module installed on an incorrect BaseUnit
● Deactivating the IO device

Note
Reducing a configuration
If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the
configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present
retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is
switched off at the interface module.

The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior takes effect in the following cases:

● Firmware update
● Reset to factory settings
● Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet.
● Incorrectly configured module
● Module with incorrect parameter assignment

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

26 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules

4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules

Introduction
The "Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules" is configured on the server module
as of IM 155-6 PN ST V1.1.x and GSD file 04/2013. The input data can then be read out on
the server module. You will find the relevant description in the Server module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) device manual.

Configurations
You can select two configurations for the IM 155-6 PN ST or the server module of the
IM 155-6 PN ST in the configuration software:
● Configuration without input data
● Configuration with input data

Input data
You can read out the status of the supply voltage L+ for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in
the input data (byte 0 to 3).

Figure 4-1 Status of the supply voltage L+

Note
An inserted or missing server module always signals "bit = 0" for the slot.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 27
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED display
The following diagram shows the LED display on the interface module and the BusAdapter.

① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ LK1 (green)
⑥ LK2 (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display on the interface module and BusAdapter

Meaning of the LEDs

The meaning of the status and error messages is described in the following tables.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

28 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.1 Status and error displays

RN/ER/MT LED on the interface module

Table 5- 1 RN/ER/MT status and error displays

LEDs Meaning Remedy

RN ER MT
(RUN) (ERROR) (MAINT)
Missing or insufficient supply voltage Check the supply voltage or turn in on
Off Off Off on interface module. at the interface module. *
Test of LEDs during startup: The three -
On On On LEDs light up simultaneously for ap-
proximately 0.25 s.
Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the
Flashes Off Off configuration software or the user pro-
gram.
Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the
configuration software.
ET 200SP starts up. -
ET 200SP is configured.
ET 200SP is reset to factory settings.
Not rele- Not rele- ET 200SP is currently exchanging data
On vant vant with the IO controller.
Not rele- Not rele- Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics data and
vant Flashes vant remedy the error.
The configured structure does not cor- Check the structure of the ET 200SP to
respond to the actual structure of the see whether a module is missing or
ET 200SP . defective, or whether a non-configured
module is plugged.
Invalid configuration states. See section Invalid configuration states
of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO
(Page 41)
Parameter error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module
status in STEP 7 and eliminate the
error in the respective I/O module.
Not rele- Not rele- Maintenance See section Maintenance events
vant vant On (Page 36)
The "Node flash test" is run (the LEDs -
Flashes Flashes Flashes LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET inter-
face also flash).
Hardware or firmware defective (the Run a firmware update. If the error
LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET persists, contact Siemens Industry
interface do not flash). Online Support.
Replace the interface module.

* PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short circuit.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 29
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.1 Status and error displays

PWR LED on the interface module

Table 5- 2 PWR status display on the interface module

PWR LED Meaning Remedy

Supply voltage not present or too small Check the supply voltage.
Off
Supply voltage present -
On

LK1/LK2 LED on the BusAdapter

Table 5- 3 LK1/LK2status display on the BusAdapter

LEDs LK1/LK2 Meaning Remedy

There is no Ethernet connection between the Check whether the bus cable to the switch/IO con-
Off PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device troller is interrupted.
and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller).
There is an Ethernet connection between the -
On PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device
and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller).
The "Node flash test" is run (the RN/ER/MT LEDs -
also flash).
Flashes

LED display of configuration errors

Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the
interface
module by the ERROR (red) and MAINT (yellow) LEDs.
The following configuration errors are indicated by the LEDs:
● More than one I/O module pulled
● Missing server module
● Interruptions or short circuit on the backplane bus

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

30 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.1 Status and error displays

Principle of operation
You determine the information for cause of the error with the LED error display. After
notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error
code.
The LED error display
● is active during POWER ON as well as during operation.
● has priority before all other states displayed by the ERROR and MAINT LED.
● remains turned on until the cause of the error has been corrected.

Table 5- 4 Display of error type and error location

Sequence Description
1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at Signaling of error type
0.5 Hz
2 MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of the error type (decimal)
3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code
4 The ERROR LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
5 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been corrected.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 31
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.1 Status and error displays

Error display
The following table shows the possible causes of error that can occur.

Table 5- 5 Error display

Error type Error location Cause of error Remedy

(MAINT) (ERROR/MAINT)
1 02 to 32* The number of pulled I/O modules is Check the configuration
displayed. The diagnostics data is gen- of the ET 200SP.
erated starting with two pulled I/O mod-
ules.
65* • Missing server module
• Interruptions at the backplane bus
• Short circuit of communication on
the backplane bus

* Slot

Note
A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the
following LEDs:
• PWR LED: On
• RN-, ER and MT LED: Off

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

32 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts

Introduction
The I/O device generates interrupts as a reaction to specific error events. Interrupts are
evaluated based on the I/O controller used.

Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts:
● Diagnostics interrupts
● Hardware interrupts
● Swapping interrupts
● Maintenance events
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO
controller.
Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB
number and start information.
Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction
"RALRM" (read additional interrupt information).

System diagnostics
In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), the updated system diagnostics is available for the devices of the
S7-1500 automation system (IO controller S7-1500 CPU) and ET 200SP (IO device).
Independent of the cyclic user program, messages are made available on the display of the
CPU S7-1500, the CPU web server and the HMI device.
You will find more information on system diagnostics in the Diagnostics
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual.

5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the
module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if this is configured accordingly.
The CPU interrupts the user program and processes the diagnostics block OB 82. The
interrupt triggering event is logged in the start information of OB 82.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 33
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.2 Interrupts

5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt

Triggering a hardware interrupt

If there is a process interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the
process interrupt block OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start
information of the hardware interrupt block.

Note
Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module)
Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically.
If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the
number of I/O modules and the communication load.

5.2.3 Triggering a swapping interrupt

Triggering a swapping interrupt

If there is a swapping interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes
the process interrupt block OB 83. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start
information of OB 83.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

34 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

5.3 Alarms

5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms

Actions after a diagnostics alarm

There can be more than one diagnostic alarm at a given time. Each diagnostics alarm
initiates the following actions:
● The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes.
● Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic error interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and
can be read via data records.
● Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller.
● OB 82 is called. If OB 82 is not available, the I/O controller goes into STOP mode.
You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help.

Reading the diagnostics

Table 5- 6 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7

Automation system with IO Application See...

controller
SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 STEP 7 online help
using Online and Diagnostics view
• as of STEP 7 V12 function
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) manual PROFINET with
Read data records from the IO STEP 7 V13
device (http://support.automation.siem
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) ens.com/WW/view/en/4994885
Receive interrupts from the IO 6)
device
• as of STEP 7 V5.5 system
manual PROFINET System
Description
(http://support.automation.siem
ens.com/WW/view/en/1929212
7)

Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO

The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the
programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238).

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 35
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

Causes of error and troubleshooting

The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostics alarms are described in the Product
Manuals for I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the section,
"Interrupts/diagnostics alarms".

See also
Channel diagnostics (Page 37)

5.3.2 Maintenance events

Triggering of a maintenance event

The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and
maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158-6-10 standard. The goal
is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible.
For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a network component
must be checked or replaced.
The CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the diagnostic block OB 82. The
event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the OB 82.
The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system in
the case of the following events:

Table 5- 7 Triggering of a maintenance event

Maintenance alarm Event Meaning

Maintenance demand- Synchronization • No synchronization frame received
ed (maintenance de- loss
manded) No synchronization frame was received by the sync
LED MAINT is lit. master within the timeout period after parameter as-
signment or during operation.
• Successive synchronization frames are located out-
side permitted limits (jitter)

System events in STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 with the following system events:
● Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon in the
device view or in the hardware configuration.
You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

36 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

5.3.3 Channel diagnostics

Function
Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records.
The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC".

Structure of the diagnostics data records

The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the
standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.3.
You can purchase the standard from the PROFIBUS User Organization on the Internet
(http://www.profibus.com).

Coding of the extended channel diagnostics (as of firmware version V3.3.0)

With the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are
reported:

Slot number ChannelError- ExtendedChannel- Associated value Diagnostics

Type (CET) ErrorType (ECET) AddValue
Module slot 0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Poten-
tial group" faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in
actual slot (AddValue)
Slot 0 0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module
0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too long
0x0602 0x0699 Slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configura-
tion
0x0602 0x069C 0x00 Diagnostics with incorrectly plugged
BusAdapter
Server module slot 0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply volt-
age L+ for the potential groups
Note: The slot in which the light-colored
BaseUnit of the respective load module is
located is coded in the "ChannelNumber"
element.

Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records (firmware version < V3.3.0)
The structure of the diagnostics data records is differentiated by the BlockVersion. The
following BlockVersion applies to the IM 155-6 PN ST interface modules:

Table 5- 8 Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module BlockVersion

6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0 W#16#0101

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 37
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the User Structure Identifier (USI)

The following manufacturer-specific diagnostics are signaled in the USI with the
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module:

Table 5- 9 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the USI

USI no. W#16#... Diagnostics

0003 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups *
0004 Diagnostics with missing server module
0005 Diagnostics when more than one I/O module has been pulled
0006 Diagnostics with incorrect BaseUnit
0007 Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration

* As of IM 155-6 PN ST V1.1.x and GSD file 04/2013, this diagnostics is only signaled if the "Group
diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+" parameter has been activated.

USI structure = W#16#0003

Table 5- 10 USI structure = W#16#0003

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0003 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with failure of supply 2
voltage L+ as of slot x
Followed by the slot as of which the supply voltage L+ has failed.
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0020 Bit 0 to 7 1
Followed by 2 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

38 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

USI structure = W#16#0004

Table 5- 11 USI structure = W#16#0004

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0004 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with missing server 2
module
Result: Station stop
• The I/O modules fail → substitute value behavior
• The interface module continues to exchange data with
the IO controller.
Followed by 4 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

USI structure = W#16#0005

Table 5- 12 USI structure = W#16#0005

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0005 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if more than one I/O 2
module has been pulled. The number of pulled I/O mod-
ules is displayed.
Result: Station stop
• The I/O modules fail → substitute value behavior
• The interface module continues to exchange data with
the IO controller.
The number of pulled I/O modules follows
Quantity W#16#0002 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0020 Bit 0 to 7 1
Followed by 2 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 39
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

USI structure = W#16#0006

Table 5- 13 USI structure = W#16#0006

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0006 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if an I/O module is in- 2
stalled on an incorrect BaseUnit.
Result: Station stop
• The I/O modules fail → substitute value behavior
• The interface module continues to exchange data with
the IO controller.
Followed by the slot for the I/O module:
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0020 Bit 0 to 7 1
Followed by 2 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

USI structure = W#16#0007

Table 5- 14 USI structure = W#16#0007

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0007 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if operation is not possi- 2
ble with existing bus configuration
Result: Station stop
• The I/O modules fail → substitute value behavior
• The interface module continues to exchange data with
the IO controller
Followed by the slot for the I/O module:
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0040 Bit 0 to 7 1
If slot 0 is specified, check the width of the station configuration (maximum 1 m).
Followed by 2 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

40 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

5.3.4 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO

Invalid configuration states

The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the
failure of the IO device or prevent the exchange of user data with the I/O modules.
● Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration
● Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do
not trigger an interrupt.
● At least one I/O module is installed in a different BaseUnit than the one configured in the
parameters.
● Missing server module
● Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter

Note
If you drag more than one I/O module or the server module the node will stop. All I/O
modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the
interface module is still exchanging data.
Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart.

See also
Status and error displays (Page 28)
Channel diagnostics (Page 37)

5.3.5 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D

Failure of the supply voltage L+

The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D:
● If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull alarm is generated.
● If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, an insert alarm is
generated.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 41
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
5.3 Alarms

5.3.6 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device

STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller

Diagnostics frames received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not
initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. You must
read the data record E00CH with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 100. This record contains all
diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices

If you want to read the diagnostics of a station after its return, you have to read the E00CH
data record with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 86. This record contains all diagnostics for
the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

42 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
Compatibility 6
Compatibility between the versions of the IM 155-6 PN ST
The table below describes which version you can use in the configuration for which actually
plugged version of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module. The table also describes the
functional differences of the versions of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module.

IM 155-6 PN ST IM 155-6 PN ST plugged Changes compared to previous version

configured V1.0.x V1.1.x V3.1.x V3.3.x V4.1.x
V1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ---
V1.1 --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ • The "Group diagnostics: Missing supply
voltage L+" parameter can be set on the
server module
• "Status of supply voltage L+ of the I/O mod-
ules" can be configured on the server mod-
ule
V3.1 --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ • User data 512 bytes
• Station extension via ET-Connection
V3.3 --- --- --- ✓ ✓ • Support of submodules
V4.1 --- --- --- --- ✓ ---

Note
IM 155-6 PN ST (6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0) with firmware version V4.1
You can upgrade the previous version of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-
6AU00-0BN0) to the firmware version V4.1. In this case configure the module as IM 155-6
PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0) with firmware version V4.1.

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 43
Compatibility

Status of the supply voltage

Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete
configuration.
● For modules in the following table without a parameter assignment, the status of the
supply voltage is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply
voltage.
● If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from
the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this
potential group.

Modules Article number

DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
DQ 4x24VC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0

Reaction times for fail-safe modules

The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account
when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules:
maximum reaction time = configured update time + 400 μs (but at least 1.4 ms)

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

44 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
Technical specifications 7
Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN ST

Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0

General information
Product type designation IM 155-6 PN ST with server module
HW functional status FS01
Firmware version V4.1
Vendor identification (VendorID) 002AH
Device identifier (DeviceID) 0313H
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V13 SP1
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP4 and higher

sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- V2.3 / -

sion
Configuration control
via dataset Yes
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 10 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 450 mA
Current consumption, max. 550 mA
Inrush current, max. 3.7 A
I²t 0.09 A²·s
Power
Infeed power to the backplane bus 4.5 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.9 W

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 45
Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0

Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 256 byte; per input / output

Address space per station

• Address space per station, max. 512 byte; Dependent on configuration

Hardware configuration
Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 32; + 16 ET 200AL modules

Submodules
• Number of submodules per station, max. 256

Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch)
1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2

• integrated switch Yes

• BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; Applicable BusAdapter: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x

FC
Functionality
• PROFINET IO Device Yes

• Open IE communication Yes

• Media redundancy Yes; PROFINET MRP

Interface types
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
• Transmission procedure PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex
(100BASE-TX)
• 10 Mbps Yes; for Ethernet services

• 100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex

(100BASE-TX)
• Autonegotiation Yes

• Autocrossing Yes

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

46 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0

PROFINET IO Device
Services
– Isochronous mode No
– Open IE communication Yes
– IRT Yes; with send cycles of between 250 µs and 4
ms in increments of 125 µs
– MRP Yes
– MRPD No
– PROFINET system redundancy No
– PROFIenergy Yes
– Prioritized startup Yes
– Shared device Yes
– Number of IO Controllers with shared 2
device, max.
Open IE communication
• TCP/IP Yes

• SNMP Yes

• LLDP Yes

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Status indicator Yes
Alarms Yes
Diagnostic functions Yes
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN LED Yes; Green LED

• ERROR LED Yes; Red LED

• MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED

LED)

• Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes; 2x green link LEDs on BusAdapter

Potential separation
between backplane bus and electronics No
between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes; 1500 V AC
between supply and all other circuits No
Permissible potential difference
between different circuits Safety extra low voltage SELV
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 47
Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0

Standards, approvals, certificates
Network loading class 2
Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Connection method
ET-Connection
• via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules

Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 147 g; without BusAdapter

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
RJ45 Yes; 2 x
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 46 g

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

48 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC

Table 7- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC

6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 2 x
Cable length
• Copper cables 100 m

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 53 g

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE 49
Dimension drawing A
This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module installed on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc.

Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (front and side view)

IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU01-0BN0)

50 Manual, 04/2017, A5E03576904-AE
 ___________________
Preface

1
___________________
Guide

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF ___________________ 4
Parameters/address space
(6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

___________
Interrupts, error messages,
Manual 5
diagnostics and system
alarms

___________________
Compatibility 6

___________________
Technical specifications 7

___________________
Dimension drawing A

10/2018
A5E03915895-AH
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03915895-AH Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Conventions
Please also observe notes labeled as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product, or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified
electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable
regulations in your country.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

4 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................12
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................16
2.2.1 Device replacement ................................................................................................................20
2.2.2 Real-time communication .......................................................................................................21
2.2.3 Isochronous real-time communication ....................................................................................21
2.2.4 Prioritized startup ....................................................................................................................22
2.2.5 Submodules ............................................................................................................................22
2.2.6 Media redundancy (MRP) .......................................................................................................23
2.2.7 Shared device .........................................................................................................................23
2.2.8 Isochronous mode ..................................................................................................................24
2.2.9 Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) ......................................................24
2.2.10 System redundancy S2 ...........................................................................................................25
2.2.11 Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") .................................................25
2.2.12 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................25
2.2.13 Value status ............................................................................................................................26
2.2.14 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................26
2.2.15 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................27
2.2.16 Use of fail-safe modules .........................................................................................................27
2.2.17 Multi Hot Swap ........................................................................................................................27
2.2.18 Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) ..............................................................................28
2.2.19 Setting the time .......................................................................................................................29
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 30
3.1 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................30
3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................31
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 32
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................32
4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................32
4.2.1 Enable configuration control ...................................................................................................32
4.2.2 Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage ...............................................................................33
4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................33
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ................................................................34

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 5
Table of contents

5 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 35

5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 35
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 38
5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt....................................................................................... 39
5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt.............................................................................................. 39
5.2.3 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt ...................................................................... 40
5.3 Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 41
5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 41
5.3.2 Maintenance events ............................................................................................................... 42
5.3.3 Channel diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 43
5.3.4 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................ 46
5.3.5 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ................................................................... 47
5.3.6 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device ...................................................... 47
6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 48
6.1 Compatibility of modules ........................................................................................................ 48
7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 52
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 56

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

6 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
Guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 7
Guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

8 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 9
Guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the
TIA Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

10 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0

View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the AS interface module 155-6 PN/2 HF with included accessory (24 V DC
connector and server module) and optional accessories (labeling strips and reference
identification label)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

12 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO.
● Power supply 1 L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope
of delivery of the interface module and is available as replacement part.
● PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapters
– BA 2×RJ45 for RJ45 bus connector
– BA 2×FC for direct connection of the bus cable
– BA 2xLC for glass fiber-optic cable
– BA 2xSCRJ for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable
– BA SCRJ/RJ45 as media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45
connector
– BA SCRJ/FC as media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of
the bus cable
– BA LC/RJ45 as media converter for glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 connector
– BA LC/FC as media converter for glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of the
bus cable

Maximum configuration
● 64 ET 200SP I/O modules + 16 ET 200AL modules
● 1 m backplane bus (without interface and server module)

Maximum amount of I/O data

Gross data length (for input data and output data):

Without system redundancy S2:
● 1440 bytes
● 1440 bytes for shared device with 2 IOC (in total for both IOC)
● 360 bytes for shared device with more than 2 IOC (per IOC)
With system redundancy S2:
● 1000 bytes
● 360 bytes for system redundancy S2 and shared device with min. 1 additional IOC (per
IOC)
The number of maximum net data length for input data and output data depends on the
number and type of I/O modules used including ET 200AL modules.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 13
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Net data length (for input data and output data):

The following minimum lengths can be applied without shared device and without explicit
calculation of the maximum net data length.
● 933 bytes without system redundancy S2
● 493 bytes with system redundancy S2

Calculation of the max. net data length:

Max. net data length = Max. gross length - number of I/O submodules (no user data, input or
output data) - number of I/O mixed modules (input and output data) - 5 bytes for interface
module and server module without ET-Connection (6 bytes for interface module with
ET-Connection)
The result of the calculation of the maximum net data length applies equally to input and
output data.

Accessories
You order the following accessories separately:
● BA 2×RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA 2×FC BusAdapter
● BA 2×LC BusAdapter
● BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter
● BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter
● BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA LC/FC BusAdapter
● Strain relief for PROFINET cable
● 24 V DC connector (one included in the scope of delivery)
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label
Information on the BusAdapters is available in the BusAdapter
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751716) manual.
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Server module
The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and available
separately as an accessory.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

14 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

The server module has the following properties:

● Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
● Includes a holder for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm).
● Provides station functions, e.g., group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+, status bytes.
● Identification data I&M 0 to 4

Note
You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration
software.
Place the server module in the last slot of the configuration. If there are 64 I/O modules, the
server module is plugged in slot 65.

You can find more information in the Server module

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration

The interface modules support plugging a dark-colored BaseUnit in slot 1. This means that
modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2 can now also be
configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following modules:
● AI Energy Meter ST
● DI 4 x 120…230 V AC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)
● DQ 4 x 24…230 V AC/2 A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Note
First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration
Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O
module manuals.
You route the infeed of the 24 V DC supply voltage over an external fuse.
The 24 V DC supply voltage is provided by a light-colored BaseUnit.

Requirement for configuration of these modules in slot 1:

● Configuration via GSD or GSDML
● Configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 with
– HSP0255 V3.0 for IM155-6 PN HF
● Configuration as of STEP 7 V13 SP1

See also
Functions (Page 16)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 15
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2 Functions

Introduction
The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions:
● Integrated switch with 2 ports
● Supported Ethernet services: PING, ARP, SNMP, LLDP
● Port diagnostics
● Disabling ports
● Minimum update time 250 µs
● Device replacement without programming device, also without topological configuration
● Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO or RESET button
● Firmware update via PROFINET IO
● Isochronous real-time communication
● Prioritized startup
● Media redundancy (MRP)
● Shared device
● Distribution of module channels to a maximum of 4 submodules
● Module-internal or submodule-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
● Isochronous mode
● System redundancy S2
● Station extension via ET-Connection
● Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems")
– Docking station
– Docking unit
● Supports BusAdapter for different connection technologies to PROFINET IO.
The interface module supports additional functions:
● Identification data I&M 0 to I&M 4
● PROFIenergy
● Configuration control (option handling)
● Use of fail-safe modules
● Removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation (Multi Hot Swap)
● Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

16 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Requirements
The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the
IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the module functions

Function Functional Firmware Configuration software

status of version of Configuration with STEP 7 as of STEP 7 as of STEP 7 (TIA
the module the module GSD file V5.5 SP3 V5.5 SP4 with Portal) as of
as of as of (http://support.auto with HSP 233 HSP 250/255 V12.0.1 with
mation.siemens.co HSP 0058
m/WW/view/en/19
698639/130000)/s
oftware from a
third-party manu-
facturer 1
Real-time communication 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Isochronous real-time 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
communication
Prioritized startup 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Device replacement with- 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
out programming device
Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Shared device 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Value status 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
PROFIenergy 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Multi Hot Swap 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Use of fail-safe modules 1 V2.0.0 --- X X X
Oversampling 1 V2.1.0 X X X X
Isochronous mode 1 V2.1.0 --- X X X
Module-internal Shared 1 V2.2.0 X --- X X
Input/Shared Output
(MSI/MSO)
BusAdapter for fiber-optic 3 V2.2.0 X --- X X (as of V13
cable FOC: BA 2xSCRJ SP1)
System redundancy S2 to 1 V3.0.0 X --- X ---
S7-400H
System redundancy S2 1 V4.2.0 X --- --- ---
IEC-compliant
System redundancy S2 to 1 V4.2.0 X --- --- X (as of
S7-1500R/H V15.1)
Station extension via ET- 1 V3.0.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
Connection SP4) SP1)
Maximum user data length 1 V3.1.0 X X (as of V5.5 X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
per module: 288 bytes SP4) SP4) SP1)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 17
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Function Functional Firmware Configuration software

status of version of Configuration with STEP 7 as of STEP 7 as of STEP 7 (TIA
the module the module GSD file V5.5 SP3 V5.5 SP4 with Portal) as of
as of as of (http://support.auto with HSP 233 HSP 250/255 V12.0.1 with
mation.siemens.co HSP 0058
m/WW/view/en/19
698639/130000)/s
oftware from a
third-party manu-
facturer 1
BA SCRJ/RJ45 3 V3.1.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
BusAdapter SP4, SP1,
HSP0250 V3) HSP0129
V1.0)
BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter 3 V3.1.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
SP4, SP1,
HSP0250 V3) HSP0129
V1.0)
BA 2xLC BusAdapter 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0250/255 6)
V4)
BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0250/255 6)
V4)
BA LC/FC BusAdapter 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0250/255 6)
V4)
Distribution of module 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
channels to multiple sub- SP4, SP1, Update
modules HSP0255 V4) 6)
Maintenance interrupts of 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
I/O modules SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0255 V4) 6)
Extended Channel Diag- 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
nostics SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0255 V4) 6)
Module-to-Module Com- 1 V4.2.0 X --- --- X (as of
munication (MtM) V15.1)
1 Systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system

Cabling with fixed connection setting

If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you must also disable
"Autonegotiation/Autocrossover".

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

18 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Compatibility with the IM 155-6 PN interface module

In an existing plant, the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF replaces the IM 155-6 PN ST without
reconfiguration. When the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF replaces the IM 155-6 PN ST, it is possible to
insert and remove several I/O modules during operation.
For more information on compatibility, refer to section: Compatibility (Page 48)

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)
PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 19
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.1 Device replacement

Device replacement

Device replacement without topological configuration

The device name is also stored on the BusAdapter in addition to the interface module. A
device name saved on the BusAdapter is the requirement for device replacement without
topological configuration.
Replacing the interface module produces a range of scenarios for using the device name.

Table 2- 2 Scenarios for using the device name

Interface module empty Interface module with device name

BusAdapter without device name No device name available The device name from the interface
module is used and copied to the
BusAdapter.
BusAdapter with device name The device name from the BusAdapter The device name from the BusAdapter
is used and copied to the interface is used and copied to the interface
module. module if this has a different device
name.

Be aware of the following constraints:

● Resetting to factory settings deletes the device name in both the interface module and the
BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the BusAdapter, you can
remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before resetting to factory settings.
● When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the
interface module after a POWER ON.
● Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage.

Device replacement with topological configuration

IO devices with this function can be replaced in a simple manner:
● The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device.
The replacement IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the
programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring
relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must
support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology
must match the actual topology.
If the IO devices were already used in another configuration, reset them to factory settings
before reusing them. You can find information on this in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

20 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.2 Real-time communication

Real-time communication
A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on cyclic data exchange with a provider-
consumer model.

2.2.3 Isochronous real-time communication

Isochronous real-time communication

A synchronized transmission method for cyclic exchange of IO data between PROFINET
devices. A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is available for the transmission. The
reserved bandwidth ensures that the IRT data is also transmitted in reserved, time-
synchronized intervals, unaffected by other high network load (e.g. TCP/IP communication or
additional real time communication).
A topology configuration is required for IRT.

Note
IO controller as sync master with IRT communication
We recommend operating the IO controller also as a sync master when configuring the IRT
communication. Otherwise, IRT- and RT-configured IO devices may fail if the sync master
fails.

You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in
sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 21
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.4 Prioritized startup

Prioritized startup
Prioritized startup is a PROFINET IO function in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT
communication. It reduces the time needed for correspondingly configured IO devices to
return to cyclic user data exchange.
The function accelerates the startup of IO devices in the following cases:
● After recovery of supply voltage
● After station recovery
● After activation of IO devices

Note
Dependency of the startup time
The interface module permits startup times from 0.5 s.
The startup time depends on the number and type of modules.

You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

2.2.5 Submodules

Submodules
The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module supports the division of I/O modules into up to 4
submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and
parameterized.
A maximum of 256 submodules is supported, whereby 4 submodules are used for the
interface module and one submodule for the server module.
You can assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers.
The following functions are only executed if you have configured submodule 1 during
configuration:
● Firmware update
● Write I&M data
● Calibration
● PROFIenergy

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

22 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.6 Media redundancy (MRP)

Media redundancy (MRP)

Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. A ring topology ensures that
an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

2.2.7 Shared device

Shared device
IO device that makes its data available to up to four IO controllers.
The interface module supports shared device at submodule level.
If there is no validity check of the shared device projects by the Engineering System, note
the following:
● Make sure the configurations are consistent. Assign each module or submodule to only
one IO controller. Multiple assignment will result in an error as the module or submodule
will only be available in the first controller.
● If you reconfigure the shared device configurations without the validity check mentioned
above, you must commission ET 200SP again. This means you must download the
projects of all involved IO controllers to the respective CPU again after reconfiguration. If
necessary, perform a POWER OFF/POWER ON of the interface module.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Note
In the case of a shared device application, make sure that all controllers work with the same
send clock. If the controller does not have the same send clock, this results in
communication relationships not being set up.
If you set up all controllers in one project, the same send clock is ensured. Set the same
send clock for engineering in separate projects.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 23
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.8 Isochronous mode

Isochronous mode
The input and output data of distributed I/O modules in the system is simultaneously
acquired and simultaneously output. For this purpose, the I/O data, the transmission cycle
via PROFINET IO, and the user program are synchronized. The constant PROFINET IO
cycle forms the corresponding clock generator. The interface module supports isochronous
mode of I/O data for the modules starting at 250 µs. The IO device can exchange
isochronous process data with a maximum of one IO controller.

Note
When the module is pulled or no written control data record has been written with activated
configuration control, the IO controller cannot access a module. In this case, cycle time
violations may occur with activated isochronous mode in the synchronous cycle interrupt OB
(OB61). The time error OB (OB80) is called in the event of a cycle time violation.
This behavior is associated with updating the process image by means of the "SYNC_PI"
(SFC126) and "SYNC_PO" (SFC127) instructions. It depends on the set cycle time and the
configuration limits.

You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual.
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

2.2.9 Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)

Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)

The Module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data
available to up to four IO controllers. Each controller has read access to the same channels.
The Module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to be operated by up to
four IO controllers. One IO controller has write access. Up to three additional IO controllers
can have read access to the same channels.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

24 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.10 System redundancy S2

System redundancy S2
An IO device with S2 system redundancy supports redundant ARs.
In a redundant system, an IO device with system redundancy S2 has a redundant AR for
each of the two CPUs (IO controllers). If one CPU fails, the IO device with S2 system
redundancy remains accessible to the remaining IO controller via the AR.
The interface module supports system redundancy S2 on CPUs S7-400H (from firmware
version V3.0) and on CPUs S7-1500R/H (from firmware version V4.2).
You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)

2.2.11 Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems")

Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems")

● Docking station
● Docking unit
You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual

2.2.12 Oversampling

Oversampling
The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module supports the oversampling mode of HS modules.
With oversampling, the modules reduce the respective PROFINET send clocks in
isochronous mode.
Additional information on oversampling can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 25
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.13 Value status

Value status
The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module supports I/O modules with value status.
Additional information on the value status can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules.

2.2.14 PROFIenergy

Properties
PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy
commands during production-free periods.

Reference
You will find additional information on PROFIenergy in the following manuals:
● Manual I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)
● Function manual PROFINET as of STEP 7 V12
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)
● System manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)
● PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product
information
● Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy;
Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

26 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.15 Configuration control (option handling)

Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your automation system for future expansions or
changes. Configuration control means you can configure the planned maximum expansion of
your automation system in advance and flexibly vary it later by means of the user program.

Reference
You can find more information on configuration control:
● In the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)
● On the Internet under the following link: Application collection
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270).
● In the STEP 7 online help.

2.2.16 Use of fail-safe modules

Properties
The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module supports the use of fail-safe modules.

Reference
You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

2.2.17 Multi Hot Swap

Properties
You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules during operation. The interface
module and the inserted I/O modules remain in operation.

Note
The IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module does not support removal and insertion of the
server module, interface module and BusAdapter during operation.

Reference
You can find more information on the removal/insertion of modules in the system manual ET
200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 27
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.18 Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)

Introduction
Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) offers the following advantages:
● Improved performance during transmission of data by bypassing the IO controller.
● Deterministic cycle times
● Cost-effective, high-performance solutions for applications where the performance of a
specific technology module is not required.

Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)

Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) enables direct exchange of data between specific
IO modules within a station via the interface module. This enables you to move small and/or
time-critical tasks to the IO module. You achieve better performance while reducing the load
on the CPU.
With Module-to-Module Communication (MtM), the interface module copies the input data of
an IO module directly to a different IO module via the ET 200SP backplane bus. The IO
module (data sink) carries out application-specific processing of the data.

You configure the data source and data sink for Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) in
the hardware configuration of the respective output module. Programming of the user
program is not required in the variant for Module-to-Module Communication (MtM).

Note
The preparation of the input data in the output module (mapping) and the output of the data
to the outputs are application- and technology-specific.
Example: The DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports
• the application cam control with Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) under the
designation DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS MCC MtM

Additional information can be found in the manuals of the corresponding IO modules.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

28 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.19 Setting the time

The interface module supports time setting, for example with AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT
HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0).
We show you how to set the time in an application example
(https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109754890).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 29
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment

24 V DC supply voltage
The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the pin assignment for a
24 V DC supply voltage.

Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage

View Signal name1 Description

Connector IM connection
1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV)
2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2
1M Ground
2M Ground (for looping through)2

1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally.

2 Maximum 10 A permitted.

Reference
You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in
the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

30 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Wiring
3.2 Block diagram

3.2 Block diagram

Block diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module.

① Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage

② ET 200SP backplane bus interface and elec- M Ground
tronics
③ Backplane bus LK 1,2 Link TX/RX LED (green)
④ Internal power supply MT MAINTENANCE FiberOptic LED (SCRJ port, yellow)
1,2
X80 Feed supply voltage RN RUN LED (green)
24 V DC
X5 BusAdapter ER ERROR LED (red)
P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT MAINTENANCE LED (yellow)
P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 PWR POWER LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 31
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF.

Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default Effective range

Enable configuration control Yes/No No ET 200SP
Diagnostics (maintenance) un- Yes/No No ET 200SP
dervoltage

4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2.1 Enable configuration control

Enable configuration control

You use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.

Note
If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data
record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to
operate the I/O modules.

Reference
You can find more information on the control data record in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and
in the STEP 7 online help.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

32 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Substitute value behavior

4.2.2 Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage

Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage

Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage is triggered if the supply voltage falls below the
value 19.2 V DC. When the supply voltage then exceeds 20.4 V DC, the diagnostics alarm
is reported as outgoing.

See also
Channel diagnostics (Page 43)

4.3 Substitute value behavior

Substitute value behavior

The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior:
● Zero current or zero voltage
● Output substitute value
● Keep last value
The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases:
● STOP controller
● Controller failure (connection interrupted)
● Parameter assignment phase during startup
● Deactivating the IO device
● Station stop
– Missing server module
– Insertion of invalid I/O modules
– At least one I/O module is installed on an incorrect BaseUnit

Note
Reducing a configuration
If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the
configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present
retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is
switched off at the interface module.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 33
Parameters/address space
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules

The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior becomes effective in the following cases:

● Firmware update
● Reset to factory settings
● Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet
● Incorrectly configured module
● Module with incorrect parameter assignment

Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal Shared Input
(MSI)
Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal
Shared Input (MSI) corresponds to the behavior described above.

4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules

The status of the supply voltage L+ of the ET 200SP I/O modules can be mapped to the
server module with the interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF.
You can find information on the status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules in the
Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

34 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system
alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The following figure shows the LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter.

① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ MT2 (yellow), SCRJ port
⑥ LK2 (green)
⑦ MT1 (yellow), SCRJ port
⑧ LK1 (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 35
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

RN/ER/MT LEDs on the interface module

Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of RN/ER/MT LEDs

LEDs Meaning Solution

RN ER MT
(RUN) (ERROR) (MAINT)
Missing or insufficient supply voltage on Check the supply voltage or turn it on at the
Off Off Off interface module. interface module.*
Test of LEDs during startup: The three -
On On On LEDs light up simultaneously for ap-
proximately 0.25 s.
Not relevant Not rele- Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the con-
Flashes vant figuration software or via the user program.
Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the
configuration software.
ET 200SP starts up. -
ET 200SP is being assigned parame-
ters.
ET 200SP is being reset to factory
settings.
Not relevant Not rele- ET 200SP is currently exchanging data -
On vant with the IO controller.
Not rele- Not rele- Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate the
vant Flashes vant error.
The preset configuration does not Check the configuration of the ET 200SP to
match the actual configuration of the see whether a module is missing, faulty or
ET 200SP. not configured.
Invalid configuration states. For additional information, see section
Invalid configuration states of the ET
200SP on PROFINET IO (Page 46)
Parameter assignment error in the I/O Evaluate the display of the module status in
module. STEP 7. Eliminate the error in the corre-
sponding I/O module.
Not rele- Not relevant Maintenance For additional information, see section
vant On Maintenance events (Page 42)
The "Node flash test" is run (LEDs LK1 -
Flashes Flashes Flashes and LK2 of the PROFINET interface
also flash).
Hardware or firmware defective (LEDs Run a firmware update. If the error persists,
LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET inter- contact Siemens Industry Online Support.
face do not flash). Replace the interface module.

* PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short-circuit.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

36 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

PWR LED on the interface module

Table 5- 2 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning Solution

Supply voltage not present or too small. Check the supply voltage.
Off
Supply voltage present. -
On Observe the maintenance messages if the
MAIN LED is lit

LED display of configuration errors

Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed IO system are indicated on the interface
module via the red ERROR LED and the yellow MAINT LED.
The following configuration errors are signaled by the LEDs:
● No server module
● Interruptions or short-circuit on the backplane bus

Operating principle
The LED error display provides information on the cause of the error. After notification by the
flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error code.
The LED error display:
● Is activated during POWER ON and during operation.
● Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ERROR and MAINT
LED.
● Remains on until the cause of the error has been eliminated.

Table 5- 3 Display of error type and error location

Sequence Description
1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x Indication of the error type
at 0.5 Hz
2 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of error type (decimal)
3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x Signaling of error location/error code
at 2 Hz
4 The ERROR LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error location/error
code
5 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
6 Repetition of 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been eliminated.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 37
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Error display

Table 5- 4 Error display

Error type Error location Cause of error Solution

(MAINT) (ERROR/ MAINT)
1 65 • No server module Check the configuration
of the ET 200SP.
• Interruptions on the backplane bus
• Short circuit of communication on
the backplane bus

Note
A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the
following LEDs:
• PWR LED: On
• RN, ER and MT LED: Off

5.2 Interrupts

Introduction
The I/O device triggers interrupts as a reaction to specific errors. Interrupts are evaluated
based on the I/O controller used.

Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts:
● Diagnostic error interrupts
● Hardware interrupts
● Pull/plug interrupts
● Maintenance events
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO
controller.
Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB
number and start information.
Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction
"RALRM" (read additional interrupt information).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

38 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

System diagnostics
In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), the innovated system diagnostics is available for the devices of the
S7-1500 automation system (IO controller S7-1500 CPU) and ET 200SP (IO device).
Independent of the cyclic user program, alarms are made available on the display of the S7-
1500 CPU, the CPU web server and the HMI device.
You will find more information on system diagnostics in the Diagnostics
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192926) function manual.

5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the
module triggers a diagnostic error interrupt if this is configured accordingly.
The CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the diagnostic error
interrupt OB (OB 82). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information
of the diagnostic error interrupt OB.

5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt

Triggering a hardware interrupt

If there is a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes
the hardware interrupt block OB, e.g., OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added
to the start information of the hardware interrupt OB.

Note
Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module)
Do not use hardware interrupts for functional purposes (e.g. the cyclic generation of
hardware interrupts).
If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the
number of I/O modules and the communication load.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 39
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2.3 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt

Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt

In the event of a remove/insert module interrupt, the CPU interrupts processing of the user
program and processes the remove/insert module OB, e.g. OB 83. The event that triggered
the interrupt is entered in the start information of the remove/insert module OB.

Note
Parameter assignment error after removal/insertion
If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make
sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can do this by evaluating
OB83. After inserting a module, OB83 is not called until the module has started up and its
parameters are assigned. This ensures that data record operations can be executed without
errors.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

40 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3 Alarms

5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms

Actions after a diagnostics alarm

There can be more than one diagnostics alarm at the same time. Each diagnostics alarm
initiates the following actions:
● The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes.
● Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic error interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and
can be read via data records.
● Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller.
● (S7-300/400) The diagnostic interrupt OB is called. If the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB 82)
is not available, the IO controller goes into STOP mode.
You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help.

Reading the diagnostics

Table 5- 5 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7

Automation system with IO Application See...

controller
SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 online help
STEP 7 using Online and Diag-
• as of STEP 7 V12, function
nostics view
manual PROFINET with
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) STEP 7 as of V12
Read data records from the IO (http://support.automation.si
device
emens.com/WW/view/en/49
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) 948856)
Receive interrupts from the IO
device • as of STEP 7 V5.5, system
manual PROFINET System
Description
(http://support.automation.si
emens.com/WW/view/en/19
292127)

Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO

The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the
programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 41
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

Causes of error and troubleshooting

The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostic alarms are described in the manuals for
I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the
section, "Interrupts, error messages, and system events".

See also
Channel diagnostics (Page 43)

5.3.2 Maintenance events

Triggering of a maintenance event

The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and
maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158 Type 10 standard. The
goal is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible.
For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a plant component
must be checked or replaced.
The CPU interrupts user program execution and executes the diagnostic error interrupt OB.
The event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the
diagnostic error interrupt OB.
The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system in
the case of the following event:

Table 5- 6 Triggering of a maintenance event

Maintenance alarm Event Alarm/Meaning

Maintenance demanded Synchronization • No synchronization frame received.
LED MAINT is lit. loss
No synchronization frame was received by the sync master within the
timeout period after parameter assignment or during operation.
• Successive synchronization frames are located outside permitted
limits (jitter).
Undervoltage • Diagnostics Undervoltage

If the supply voltage of the interface falls below the value 19.2 V DC,
this diagnostics is reported as incoming Maintenance demanded.

System alarms in STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) with the following system
alarms:
● Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon in the
device view or in the hardware configuration.
You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

42 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.3 Channel diagnostics

Function
Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records.
The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC".

Structure of the diagnostics data records

The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the
standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.2.
If required, you can find the standard on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com) on the
PROFIBUS user organization home page.

Codes of the extended channel diagnostics

With the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are
reported:

ChannelErrorType ExtendedChannelError- Associated value Diagnostics

(CET) Type (ECET) AddValue
0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Potential group"
faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in actual slot
(AddValue)
0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module
0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too large
0x0602 0x0699 Slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration
0x0602 0x069C 0x00 Diagnostics with incorrectly plugged BusAdapter
0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for
the potential groups
Note: The slot in which the light-colored BaseUnit
of the respective load module is located is coded
in the "ChannelNumber" element.
0x0610 0x06B4 0x00 Diagnostics "Undervoltage power supply"
Note: This diagnostics is not supported by the
hardware IM 155-6 PN HF (6ES7155-6AU00-
0CN0).
If the supply voltage of the interface falls below the
value 19.2 V DC, this diagnostics is reported as
incoming Maintenance demanded.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 43
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records (IM 155-6 PN HF Version < V3.3)
The structure of the diagnostics data records is differentiated by the BlockVersion. The
following BlockVersion applies to the IM 155-6 PN HF interface modules:

Table 5- 7 Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records

IM 155-6 PN HF interface module BlockVersion

6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0 W#16#0101

Note
Manufacturer-specific diagnostics are not reported as of version V3.3 for the interface
module IM 155-6 PN HF.

Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the User Structure Identifier (USI)

The following manufacturer-specific diagnostics are signaled in the USI with the
IM 155-6 PN HF interface module:

Table 5- 8 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the USI

USI no. W#16#... Diagnostics

0003 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups
0004 Diagnostics with missing server module
0006 Diagnostics with incorrect BaseUnit
0007 Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration

USI structure = W#16#0003

Table 5- 9 USI structure = W#16#0003

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0003 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with failure of supply 2
voltage L+ as of slot x of the ET 200SP module
Followed by the slot as of which the supply voltage L+ has failed.
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0040 Bit 0 to 7 1
Followed by 2 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

44 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

USI structure = W#16#0004

Table 5- 10 USI structure = W#16#0004

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0004 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with missing server 2
module
Result: Station stop
• The I/O modules fail → substitute value behavior
• The interface module continues to exchange data with
the IO controller
Followed by 4 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

USI structure = W#16#0006

Table 5- 11 USI structure = W#16#0006

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0006 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if an ET 200SP I/O mod- 2
ule is installed on an incorrect BaseUnit.
Result: Station stop
• The I/O modules fail → substitute value behavior
• The interface module continues to exchange data with
the IO controller
Followed by the slot for the I/O module:
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0040 Bit 0 to 7 1
Followed by 2 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 45
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

USI structure = W#16#0007

Table 5- 12 USI structure = W#16#0007

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0007 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if operation is not possi- 2
ble with existing bus configuration
Result: Station stop
• The I/O modules fail → substitute value behavior
• The interface module continues to exchange data with
the IO controller
Followed by the slot for the I/O module:
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0040 Bit 0 to 7 1
If slot 0 is specified, check the width of the station configuration (maximum 1 m).
Followed by 2 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

5.3.4 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO

Invalid configuration states

The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the
failure of the IO device or prevent data exchange:
● Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration.
● Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do
not trigger an interrupt.
● At least one I/O module is plugged into a different BaseUnit as the one configured in the
parameters.
● No server module.
● Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter.

Note
Removal of the server module will trigger a station stop. All I/O modules of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the interface module continues to
exchange data.
Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

46 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

See also
Status and error displays (Page 35)
Channel diagnostics (Page 43)

5.3.5 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D

Failure of the supply voltage L+

The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D:
● If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull interrupt is
generated.
● If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, a plug interrupt is
generated.

5.3.6 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device

STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller

Diagnostics received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not initiate a
call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. Read the E00CH data
record in startup OB using the instruction "RDREC". This record contains all diagnostics for
the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices

If you want to read the occurring diagnostics in the STOP state of the IO controller, you have
to read the E00CH data record with the "RDREC" instruction. This record contains all
diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 47
Compatibility 6
6.1 Compatibility of modules

Compatibility with the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module

If you exchange or replace an interface module, the following table shows the compatibilities:
● Between the interface modules IM 155-6 PN/2 HF and IM 155-6 PN ST
● Between the various firmware versions

Interface module configured

Interface IM IM IM IM IM IM IM IM IM IM IM IM
module 155-6 155-6 155-6 155-6 155-6 155-6 155-6 155-6 155-6 155-6 155-6 155-6
plugged PN ST PN ST PN ST PN ST PN ST PN HF PN HF PN HF PN HF PN HF PN HF PN HF
V1.0 V1.1 V3.1 V3.3 V4.1 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V3.0 V3.1 V3.3 V4.2
IM 155-6 Yes* --- --- --- --- Yes --- --- --- --- --- ---
PN HF
V2.0
IM 155-6 Yes* Yes* --- --- --- Yes Yes --- --- --- --- ---
PN HF
V2.1
IM 155-6 Yes* Yes* --- --- --- Yes Yes Yes --- --- --- ---
PN HF
V2.2
IM 155-6 Yes* Yes* --- --- --- Yes Yes Yes Yes --- --- ---
PN HF
V3.0
IM 155-6 Yes* Yes* Yes* --- --- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --- ---
PN HF
V3.1
IM 155-6 Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* --- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ---
PN HF
V3.3
IM 155-6 Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
PN/2 HF
V4.2

* The interface module IM 155-6 PN HF only supports the transmission rate 100 Mbps for Ethernet services.

Station configuration with more than 32 I/O modules

Certain I/O modules with functional status 001 and 002 do not support a station configuration
with more than 32 I/O modules.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

48 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Compatibility
6.1 Compatibility of modules

The table below shows all modules that do not support a station configuration with more than
32 I/O modules:

Table 6- 1 Incompatible modules with functional status

Modules Article number Up to functional status

Analog modules
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1 002
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST 6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1 002
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 002
AI 4xU/I ST 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 002
Digital modules
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 002
DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 002
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 002
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 002
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 002

Status of the supply voltage

Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete
configuration.
● For modules without parameter assignment in the following table, the status of the supply
voltage (status byte of the server module) is always signaled as "1" regardless of the
actual status of the supply voltage.
● If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from
the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this
potential group.

Modules Article number

DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0

Resetting an interface module to factory settings via the RESET button

There is a special operation for interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF to reset it to the factory
settings using the Reset button.

Requirements
The supply voltage to the interface module must be switched on.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 49
Compatibility
6.1 Compatibility of modules

Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (for resetting via the RESET button)

Procedure
1. Remove the interface module from the mounting rail and swivel it downwards.
2. The RESET button is located on the back of the interface module behind a small opening:
Push a screwdriver into the small opening, thus pressing the RESET button.
3. Release the RESET button.
4. Press the RESET button for another 3 seconds.
5. Look at the LED display of the interface module to see whether the reset was successful:
RUN LED flashes for 3 seconds, ERROR and MAINT LED are off.
6. Install the interface module back on the mounting rail.
7. Assign parameters to the interface module again.

AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module

Note
For operation of the AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module, firmware version V1.0 (6ES7135-
6HD00-0BA1) with the interface module, you need to set the "Reaction to CPU STOP"
parameter to "Turn off" with a PROFINET send clock < 1 ms.

Reaction times for fail-safe modules

The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account
when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: Maximum reaction time =
configured update time + 400 μs (but at least 1.4 ms)

Operation with activated system redundancy S2

Note
Restrictions in operation with activated system redundancy S2
You cannot use the following functions during operation of the IM155-6 PN/2 HF, firmware
version V4.2 with activated system redundancy S2:
• Configuration control (option handling)
• Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

50 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Compatibility
6.1 Compatibility of modules

Interface module IM 155-6 PPN HF (6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0) with version V4.2

Note
You cannot use the following functions during operation of the IM 155-6 PN HF
(6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0) with firmware version V4.2:
• Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)
• Setting the time
• Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 51
Technical specifications 7
Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0/td?dl=en).

Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0

General information
Product type designation IM 155-6 PN/2 HF with server module
Firmware version V4.2
• FW update possible Yes

Number of MtM communication relation- 16

ships/connections, max.
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

• Module swapping during operation (hot Yes; Multi-hot swapping

swapping)

• Tool changer Yes; Docking station and docking unit

• Local coupling, IO data No

• Local coupling, data records No

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated STEP 7 V15.1 or higher
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- Configurable via GSD file

sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Configuration control
via dataset Yes
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 10 ms

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

52 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0

Input current
Current consumption, max. 700 mA
Inrush current, max. 4.5 A
I²t 0.25 A²·s
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.4 W
Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 288 byte; For input and output data respectively

Address space per station

• Address space per station, max. 1 440 byte; Dependent on configuration

Hardware configuration
Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; + 16 ET 200AL modules

Submodules
• Number of submodules per station, max. 256

Time stamping
Accuracy 10 ms
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch)
1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 2; via BusAdapter

• integrated switch Yes

• BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; Compatible BusAdapter: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x

FC, BA 2x SCRJ, BA SCRJ / RJ45, BA SCRJ /
FC, BA 2x LC, BA LC / RJ45, BA LC / FC
Protocols
• PROFINET IO Device Yes

• Open IE communication Yes

• Media redundancy Yes; PROFINET MRP

Interface types
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
• Transmission procedure PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex
(100BASE-TX)
• 10 Mbps No

• 100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex

(100BASE-TX)
• Autonegotiation Yes

• Autocrossing Yes

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 53
Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0

Protocols
PROFINET IO Device
Services
– Isochronous mode Yes; Bus cycle time: min. 250 µs
– Open IE communication Yes
– IRT Yes; 250 μs, 500 μs, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms additional-
ly with IRT with high performance: 250 µs to 4 ms
in 125 µs frame
– PROFIenergy Yes
– Prioritized startup Yes
– Shared device Yes
– Number of IO Controllers with shared 4
device, max.
Redundancy mode
– MRP Yes
– MRPD No
– PROFINET system redundancy (S2) Yes; NAP S2
– Redundant PROFINET configuration No
(R1)
– H-Sync forwarding Yes
Open IE communication
• TCP/IP Yes

• SNMP Yes

• LLDP Yes

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- Yes
nized up to terminal)
Equidistance Yes
shortest clock pulse 250 µs
max. cycle 4 ms
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 250 µs
Jitter, max. 1 µs
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Status indicator Yes
Alarms Yes
Diagnostic functions Yes
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN LED Yes; Green LED

• ERROR LED Yes; Red LED

• MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

54 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Connection to network LINK (green) Yes; 2x green link LEDs on BusAdapter

Potential separation
between backplane bus and electronics No
between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes
between supply and all other circuits No
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Standards, approvals, certificates
Network loading class 3
Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation relating to sea level

• Installation altitude above sea level, max. 2 000 m; On request: Installation altitudes greater
than 2 000 m
Connection method
ET-Connection
• via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules

Mechanics/material
Strain relief Yes; Optional
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 120 g; without BusAdapter

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH 55
Dimension drawing A
This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc.

Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN/2 HF interface module, front and side views

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)

56 Manual, 10/2018, A5E03915895-AH
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF ___________________ 4
Parameters/address space
(6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

___________
Interrupts, error messages,
Manual 5
diagnostics and system
alarms

___________________
Compatibility 6

___________________
Technical specifications 7

___________________
Dimension drawing A

10/2018
A5E44899355-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E44899355-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Conventions
Please also observe notes labeled as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product, or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified
electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable
regulations in your country.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

4 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................12
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................16
2.2.1 Device replacement ................................................................................................................19
2.2.2 Real-time communication .......................................................................................................20
2.2.3 Isochronous real-time communication ....................................................................................20
2.2.4 Prioritized startup ....................................................................................................................21
2.2.5 Submodules ............................................................................................................................21
2.2.6 Media redundancy (MRP) .......................................................................................................22
2.2.7 Shared device .........................................................................................................................22
2.2.8 Isochronous mode ..................................................................................................................23
2.2.9 Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) ......................................................23
2.2.10 System redundancy S2 ...........................................................................................................24
2.2.11 Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems") .................................................24
2.2.12 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................24
2.2.13 Value status ............................................................................................................................25
2.2.14 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................25
2.2.15 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................25
2.2.16 Use of fail-safe modules .........................................................................................................26
2.2.17 Multi Hot Swap ........................................................................................................................26
2.2.18 Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) ..............................................................................27
2.2.19 Setting the time .......................................................................................................................28
2.2.20 Interface local coupling of IO data ..........................................................................................28
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 30
3.1 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................30
3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................31
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 33
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................33
4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................33
4.2.1 Enable configuration control ...................................................................................................33
4.2.2 Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage ...............................................................................34
4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................34
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ................................................................35

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 5
Table of contents

5 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 36

5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 36
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 39
5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt....................................................................................... 40
5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt.............................................................................................. 40
5.2.3 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt ...................................................................... 41
5.3 Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 42
5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 42
5.3.2 Maintenance events ............................................................................................................... 43
5.3.3 Channel diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 44
5.3.4 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................ 45
5.3.5 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ................................................................... 45
5.3.6 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device ...................................................... 46
6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 47
6.1 Compatibility of modules ........................................................................................................ 47
7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 49
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 53

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

6 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
Guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 7
Guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

8 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 9
Guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

10 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0 (interface module 155-6 PN/3 HF and server module)

View of the module

Figure 2-1 View AS interface module 155-6 PN/3 HF with included accessory (24 V DC connector
and server module) and optional accessories (strain-relief for PROFINET cable, labeling
strips and reference identification label)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

12 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Integrated switch with 3 ports
● Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO.
● Supply voltage 1 L+ DC 24 V (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope
of delivery of the interface module and available as replacement part.
● PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapters
– BA 2×RJ45 for RJ45 bus connector
– BA 2×FC for direct connection of the bus cable
– BA 2xSCRJ for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable
– BA SCRJ/RJ45 as media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45
connector
– BA SCRJ/FC as media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of
the bus cable
– BA 2xLC for glass fiber-optic cable
– BA LC/RJ45 as media converter for glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 connector
– BA LC/FC as media converter for fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus
cable

Maximum configuration
● 64 ET 200SP I/O modules + 16 ET 200AL modules
● 1 m backplane bus (without interface module and server module)

Maximum amount of I/O data

Gross data length (for input and output data):

Without system redundancy S2:
● 1440 bytes
● 1440 bytes for shared device with 2 IOCs (in total for both IOCs)
● 360 bytes for shared device with more than 2 IOCs (per IOC)
With system redundancy S2:
● 1000 bytes
● 360 bytes with system redundancy S2 and shared device with at least 1 additional IOC
(per IOC)
The number of the max. net data length for input and output data depends on the number
and type of I/O modules used, including ET 200AL modules and virtual modules.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 13
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Net data length (for input and output data):

Without explicit calculation of the maximum net data length, the following minimum lengths
can be used without shared device.
● 933 bytes (without system redundancy S2)
● 493 bytes (with system redundancy S2)

Calculation of the max. net data length:

Max. length net data = max. gross length - number of I/O submodules (input or output data,
without user data) - number of mixed I/O modules (input and output data) - 5 bytes for
interface module and server module without ET connection (6 bytes for interface module with
ET connection)
The result of the calculation of the maximum net data length applies equally to input and
output data.

Accessories
You order the following accessories separately:
● BA 2×RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA 2×FC BusAdapter
● BA 2×LC BusAdapter
● BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter
● BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter
● BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA LC/FC BusAdapter
● Strain relief for PROFINET cables
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label
Information on the BusAdapters is available in the BusAdapter
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751716) manual.
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

14 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Server module
The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and available
separately as an accessory.
The server module has the following properties:
● Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
● Includes a holder for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm).
● Provides station functions, e.g., group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+, status bytes.
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3

Note
You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration
software.
Place the server module in the last slot of the configuration. If there are 64 I/O modules, the
server module is plugged in slot 65.

You can find more information in the Server module

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration

The interface modules support plugging dark-colored BaseUnits in slot 1. This means that
modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2 can now also be
configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following modules:
● AI Energy Meter ST
● DI 4 x 120..230V AC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)
● DQ 4 x 24..230V AC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Note
First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration
Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O
module manuals.
The 24 V DC supply voltage is fed in via an external fuse.
The DC 24 V supply voltage is supplied via a light-colored BaseUnit.

See also
Functions (Page 16)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 15
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2 Functions

Introduction
The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions:
● Integrated switch with 3 ports
● Supported Ethernet services: PING, ARP, SNMP, LLDP
● Port diagnostics
● Disabling ports
● Minimum update time 250 µs
● Device replacement without programming device, also without topological configuration
● Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO
● Firmware update via PROFINET IO
● Isochronous real-time communication
● Prioritized startup
● Media redundancy (MRP)
● Shared device
● Distribution of module channels to a maximum of 4 submodules
● Module-internal or submodule-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
● Isochronous mode
● System redundancy S2
● Station extension via ET-Connection
● Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems")
– Docking station
– Docking unit
● Supports BusAdapter for different connection technologies to PROFINET IO.
The interface module supports additional functions:
● Interface local coupling of IO data (configuration only via GSDML)
● Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)
● Identification data I&M 0 to I&M 3
● PROFIenergy
● Configuration control (option handling)
● Use of fail-safe modules
● Removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation (Multi Hot Swap)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

16 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal), in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).

Requirements
The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the module functions

Function Functional Firmware Configuring with GSD Configuration software

status of the version of the file STEP 7 as of STEP 7 (TIA
module as of module as of (http://support.automa V5.5 SP4 Portal) as of
tion.siemens.com/W V15.1
W/view/en/19698639/
130000)1
Real-time communication 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
Isochronous real-time com- 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
munication
Prioritized startup 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
Device replacement without 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
programming device
Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
Shared device 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
Value status 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
PROFIenergy 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
Multi Hot Swap 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
Use of fail-safe modules 1 V4.2.0 --- --- X
Oversampling 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
Isochronous mode 1 V4.2.0 --- --- X
Module-internal Shared In- 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
put/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
BusAdapter for fiber-optic 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
cable FOC: BA 2xSCRJ
System redundancy S2 to 1 V4.2.0 X --- ---
S7-400H
System redundancy S2 IEC 1 V4.2.0 X --- ---
compliant
System redundancy S2 on 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
S7-1500R/H
Station extension via 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
ET-Connection
Maximum user data length per 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
module: 288 bytes
BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter 1 V4.2.0 X --- X

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 17
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Function Functional Firmware Configuring with GSD Configuration software

status of the version of the file STEP 7 as of STEP 7 (TIA
module as of module as of (http://support.automa V5.5 SP4 Portal) as of
tion.siemens.com/W V15.1
W/view/en/19698639/
130000)1
BA 2xLC BusAdapter 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
BA LC/FC BusAdapter 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
Distribution of module chan- 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
nels to multiple submodules
Maintenance interrupts of I/O 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
modules
Extended Channel Diagnos- 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
tics
Module-to-Module Communi- 1 V4.2.0 X --- X
cation (MtM)
Interface local coupling of IO 1 V4.2.0 X --- ---
data
1 Systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system

Cabling with fixed connection setting

If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you must also disable
"Autonegotiation/Autocrossover".
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

See also
Compatibility of modules (Page 47)
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)
PROFINET with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

18 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.1 Device replacement

Device replacement

Device replacement without topological configuration

The device name is also stored on both BusAdapters in addition to the interface module. A
device name stored in both BusAdapters is required for device replacement without topology
configuration.
Replacing the interface module produces a range of scenarios for using the device name.
● The interface module generally starts with the device name of the left BusAdapter. In the
case of different device names, the device name is distributed (stored) from the left
BusAdapter to the right Bus Adapter and to the interface module.
● If the left BusAdapter is missing or does not yet have a device name, the device name is
taken from the right BusAdapter and, if there are differences, distributed (stored)
accordingly.
● If only BusAdapters without device names are connected, the device name is taken from
the interface module and stored on both BusAdapters.
Be aware of the following constraints:
● Resetting to factory settings deletes the device name in both the interface module and the
BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the BusAdapter, you can
remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before resetting to factory settings.
● When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the
interface module after a POWER ON.
● Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage.

Device replacement with topological configuration

IO devices with this function can be replaced in a simple manner:
● The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device.
The replacement IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the
programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring
relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must
support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology
must match the actual topology.
If the IO devices were already used in another configuration, reset them to factory settings
before reusing them. You can find information on this in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 19
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.2 Real-time communication

Real-time communication
A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on cyclic data exchange with a provider-
consumer model.

2.2.3 Isochronous real-time communication

Isochronous real-time communication

Is a synchronized communication protocol for cyclic exchange of data between PROFINET
devices. A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is available for the transfer. The
reserved bandwidth ensures that the IRT data is also transmitted in time-synchronized
intervals, unaffected by other high network loading (e.g. TCP/IP communication or additional
real time communication).
A topology configuration is required for IRT.

Note
For IRT, both BusAdapters must be plugged in.

Note
IO controller as sync master with IRT communication
We recommend operating the IO controller also as a sync master when configuring the IRT
communication.
Otherwise, IRT and RT configured IO devices may fail if the sync master fails.

You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in
sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

20 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.4 Prioritized startup

Prioritized startup
Prioritized startup is a PROFINET IO function in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT
communication. It reduces the time needed for correspondingly configured IO devices to
return to cyclic user data exchange.
The function accelerates the start-up of IO devices in the following cases:
● After recovery of supply voltage
● After station recovery
● After activation of IO devices

Note
Dependency of the startup time
The interface module permits startup times from 1.2 s.
The startup time depends on the number and type of modules.

You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

2.2.5 Submodules

Submodules
The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module supports the division of I/O modules into up to 4
submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and
parameterized.
A maximum of 256 submodules is supported, whereby 4 submodules are used for the
interface module and one submodule for the server module.
You can assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers.
The following functions are only executed if you have configured submodule 1 during
configuration:
● Firmware update
● Write I&M data
● Calibration
● PROFIenergy

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 21
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.6 Media redundancy (MRP)

Media redundancy (MRP)

Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. A ring topology ensures that
an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

2.2.7 Shared device

Shared device
IO device that makes its data available to up to four IO controllers.
The interface module supports shared device at submodule level.
If there is no validity check of the shared device projects by the Engineering System, note
the following:
● Make sure the configurations are consistent. Assign each module or submodule to only
one IO controller. Multiple assignment will result in an error as the module or submodule
will only be available in the first controller.
● If you reconfigure the shared device configurations without the validity check mentioned
above, you must commission ET 200SP again. This means you must download the
projects of all involved IO controllers to the respective CPU again after reconfiguration. If
necessary, perform a POWER OFF/POWER ON of the interface module.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Note
In the case of a shared device application, make sure that all controllers work with the same
send clock. If the controller does not have the same send clock, this results in
communication relationships not being set up.
If you set up all controllers in one project, the same send clock is ensured. Set the same
send clock for engineering in separate projects.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

22 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.8 Isochronous mode

Isochronous mode
The input and output data of distributed I/O modules in the system is simultaneously
acquired and simultaneously output. The I/O data, the transmission cycle via PROFINET IO,
and the user program are synchronized for this purpose. The constant PROFINET IO cycle
forms the corresponding clock generator. The interface module supports isochronous mode
of I/O data for the modules starting at 250 µs. The IO device can exchange isochronous
process data with a maximum of one IO controller.

Note
If the module is pulled or if no control data record was written with activated configuration
control, then the IO controller cannot access a module. In this case, cycle time violations
may occur with activated isochronous mode in the synchronous cycle interrupt OB (OB61).
The time error OB (OB80) is called in the event of a cycle time violation.
This behavior is associated with updating the process image by means of the "SYNC_PI"
(SFC126) and "SYNC_PO" (SFC127) instructions. It depends on the set cycle time and the
configuration limits.

You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual.
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

2.2.9 Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)

Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)

The Module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data
available to up to four IO controllers. Each controller has read access to the same channels.
The Module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to be operated by up to
four IO controllers. One IO controller has write access. Up to three additional IO controllers
can have read access to the same channels.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 23
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.10 System redundancy S2

System redundancy S2
An IO device with S2 system redundancy supports redundant ARs.
In a redundant system, an IO device with system redundancy S2 has a redundant AR for
each of the two CPUs (IO controllers). If one CPU fails, the IO device with S2 system
redundancy remains accessible to the remaining IO controller via the AR.
The interface module supports system redundancy S2 on S7-400H CPUs and on S7-
1500R/H CPUs.
You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)

2.2.11 Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems")

Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems")

● Docking station
● Docking unit
You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual

2.2.12 Oversampling

Oversampling
The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module supports the oversampling mode of HS modules.
With oversampling, the modules reduce the respective PROFINET send clocks in
isochronous mode.
Additional information on oversampling can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

24 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.13 Value status

Value status
The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module supports I/O modules with value status.
Additional information on the value status can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules.

2.2.14 PROFIenergy

Properties
PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy
commands during production-free periods.

Reference
You will find additional information on PROFIenergy in the following manuals:
● Manual I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)
● Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V12 and higher
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856)
● System manual PROFINET System Description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)
● PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product
information
● Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy;
Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802

2.2.15 Configuration control (option handling)

Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your automation system for future expansions or
changes. Configuration control means you can configure the planned maximum expansion of
your automation system in advance and flexibly vary it later by means of the user program.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 25
Product overview
2.2 Functions

Reference
You can find more information on configuration control:
● In the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)
● On the Internet under the following link: Application collection
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29430270).
● In the STEP 7 online help.

2.2.16 Use of fail-safe modules

Properties
The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module supports the use of fail-safe modules.

Reference
You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

2.2.17 Multi Hot Swap

Properties
You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules during operation. The interface
module and the inserted I/O modules remain in operation.

Note
The IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module does not support the removal and insertion of the
server module, the interface module and BusAdapter during operation.

Reference
You can find more information on the removal/insertion of modules in the system manual ET
200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

26 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.18 Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)

Introduction
Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) offers the following advantages:
● Improved performance during transmission of data by bypassing the IO controller.
● Deterministic cycle times
● Cost-effective, high-performance solutions for applications where the performance of a
specific technology module is not required.

Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)

Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) enables direct exchange of data between specific
IO modules within a station via the interface module. This enables you to move small and/or
time-critical tasks to the IO module. You achieve better performance while reducing the load
on the CPU.
With Module-to-Module Communication (MtM), the interface module copies the input data of
an IO module directly to a different IO module via the ET 200SP backplane bus. The IO
module (data sink) carries out application-specific processing of the data.

For Module-to-Module Communication (MtM), configure the data source and the data sink in
the hardware configuration of the respective output module. Programming of the user
program is not required in the variant for Module-to-Module Communication (MtM).

Note
The preparation of the input data in the output module (mapping) and the output of the data
to the outputs are application- and technology-specific.
Example: The DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports
• the application cam control with Module-to-Module Communication (MtM) under the
designation DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS MCC MtM

Additional information can be found in the manuals of the corresponding IO modules.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 27
Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2.19 Setting the time

The interface module supports time-setting, for example with AI Energy Meter 480VAC/CT
HF (6ES7134-6PA00-0CU0).
In an Application example
(https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109754890) we show you how to set
the time of day.

2.2.20 Interface local coupling of IO data

Module-internal Shared Output is transferred to other controllers

In this example, IO data are transferred from one controller to other controllers over the
PROFINET interface X1 by means of the Module-internal Shared Output.

Figure 2-2 I/O data are transferred to other controllers in the same PROFINET network

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

28 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Configuration

Table 2- 2 Example of the configuration

Virtual slot Type I-length Q-length Access

1 MSO Local - - -
1.1 MSO Local OUT - 4 bytes CPU 1
1.2 MSO Local IN 5 bytes incl. 1 byte DS - CPU 2
1.3 MSO Local IN 5 bytes incl. 1 byte DS - CPU 3
1.4 MSO Local IN 5 bytes incl. 1 byte DS - CPU 4

Editing in the user program

The controller CPU 1 writes I/O data to the MSO Local OUT module with the virtual slot 1.1
of the interface module. The data is available to CPUs 2 to 4 for reading with the remaining
MSO Local IN modules. The validity of the provided user data is displayed by the data status
byte (DS) of the MSO Local IN modules.
You can also use this example:
● with fewer controllers and
● configure it with other virtual modules.

Note
Virtual IO modules
The use of virtual IO modules increases the communication load. This increases the data
update time of all IO data accordingly.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 29
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment

24 V DC supply voltage
The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the pin assignment for a
24 V DC supply voltage.

Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage

View Signal name1 Description

Connector IM connection
1L+ 24 V DC
2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2
1M Ground
2M Ground (for looping through)2

1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally.

2 Maximum 10 A permitted.

Reference
You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in
the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

30 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Wiring
3.2 Block diagram

3.2 Block diagram

Block diagram
The following figure shows a block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module.

① Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage

② ET 200SP backplane bus interface and elec- M Ground
tronics
③ Backplane bus LK 1, Link TX/RX LED (green)
2, 3
④ Internal power supply MT MAINTENANCE FiberOptic LED (SCRJ port, yellow)
1,2,3
X80 Feed supply voltage RN RUN LED (green)
24 V DC
X300, BusAdapter ER ERROR LED (red)
X301
P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT LED MAINTENANCE (yellow)
P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 PWR POWER LED (green)
P3 PROFINET interface X1 Port 3
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 31
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram

Note
To set up a ring topology, use only the P1 R and P2 R ports.

Note
Operation with only one BusAdapter
If you operate the interface module with only one BusAdapter, then provide the free bus
adapter interface with a cover for the BusAdapter interface.

Note
For IRT operation, both bus adapters must be plugged in.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

32 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF.

Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default Effective range

Enable configuration control Yes/No No ET 200SP
Diagnostics (maintenance) un- Yes/No No ET 200SP
dervoltage

4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2.1 Enable configuration control

Enable configuration control

You use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.

Note
If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data
record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to
operate the I/O modules.

Reference
You can find more information on the control data record in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and
in the STEP 7 online help.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 33
Parameters/address space
4.3 Substitute value behavior

4.2.2 Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage

Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage

The diagnostics alarm (maintenance) for undervoltage is triggered (incoming) if the supply
voltage falls below the value 19.2 V DC. When the supply voltage then exceeds 20.4 V DC,
the diagnostics alarm is reported as outgoing.

4.3 Substitute value behavior

Substitute value behavior

The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior:
● Zero current or zero voltage
● Output substitute value
● Keep last value
The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases:
● STOP controller
● Controller failure (connection interrupted)
● Parameter assignment phase during startup
● Deactivating the IO device
● Station stop
– Missing server module
– Insertion of invalid I/O modules
– At least one I/O module is installed on an incorrect BaseUnit

Note
Reducing a configuration
If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the
configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present
retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is
switched off at the interface module.

The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior becomes effective in the following cases:

● Firmware update
● Reset to factory settings
● Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet
● Incorrectly configured module
● Module with incorrect parameter assignment

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

34 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules

Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal Shared Input
(MSI)
Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal
Shared Input (MSI) corresponds to the behavior described above.

4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules

You can find information on the status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules in the
Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 35
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system
alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays on the interface module and on the BusAdapters:

① RN (green) ⑦ LK2 (green)

② ER (red) ⑧ MT2 (yellow), SCRJ port
③ MT (yellow) ⑨ LK3 (green)
④ PWR (green) ⑩ MT3 (yellow), SCRJ port
⑤ LK1 (green)
⑥ MT1 (yellow), SCRJ port

Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter 2xSCRJ

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

36 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

RN/ER/MT LEDs on the interface module

Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of RN/ER/MT LEDs

LEDs Meaning Solution

RN ER MT
(RUN) (ERROR) (MAINT)
Missing or insufficient supply voltage on Check the supply voltage or turn it on at the
Off Off Off interface module. interface module.*
Test of LEDs during startup: The three -
On On On LEDs light up simultaneously for ap-
proximately 0.25 s.
Not relevant Not rele- Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the con-
Flashes vant figuration software or the user program.
Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the
configuration software.
ET 200SP starts up. -
ET 200SP is being assigned parame-
ters.
ET 200SP is being reset to factory
settings.
Not relevant Not rele- ET 200SP is currently exchanging data -
On vant with the IO controller.
Not rele- Not rele- Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate the
vant Flashes vant error.
The preset configuration does not Check the configuration of the ET 200SP to
match the actual configuration of the see whether a module is missing, faulty or
ET 200SP. not configured.
Invalid configuration states. For additional information, see section
Invalid configuration states of the ET
200SP on PROFINET IO (Page 45)
Parameter assignment error in the I/O Evaluate the display of the module status in
module. STEP 7. Eliminate the error in the corre-
sponding I/O module.
Not rele- Not relevant Maintenance For additional information, see section
vant On Maintenance events (Page 43)
The "Node flash test" is run (LEDs LK1 -
Flashes Flashes Flashes and LK2 of the PROFINET interface
also flash).
Hardware or firmware defective (LEDs Run a firmware update. If the error persists,
LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET inter- contact Siemens Industry Online Support.
face do not flash). Replace the interface module.

* PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short-circuit.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 37
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

PWR LED on the interface module

Table 5- 2 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning Solution

Supply voltage not present or too small. Check the supply voltage.
Off
Supply voltage present. -
On Observe the maintenance messages if the
MAIN LED is lit

LED display of configuration errors

Configuration errors of the distributed IO system ET 200SP are indicated on the interface
module via the red LED ERROR and the yellow LED MAINT.
The following configuration errors are signaled by the LEDs:
● No server module
● Interruptions or short-circuit on the backplane bus

Operating principle
The LED error display provides information on the cause of the error. After notification by the
flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error code.
The LED error display:
● Is activated during POWER ON and during operation.
● Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ERROR and MAINT
LED.
● Remains on until the cause of the error has been eliminated.

Table 5- 3 Display of error type and error location

Sequence Description
1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x Indication of the error type
at 0.5 Hz
2 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of error type (decimal)
3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x Signaling of error location/error code
at 2 Hz
4 The ERROR LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error location/error
code
5 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
6 Repetition of 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been eliminated.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

38 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Error display

Table 5- 4 Error display

Error type Error location Cause of error Solution

(MAINT) (ERROR/ MAINT)
1 65 • No server module Check the configuration
of the ET 200SP.
• Interruptions on the backplane bus
• Short circuit of communication on
the backplane bus

Note
A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the
following LEDs:
• PWR LED: On
• RN, ER and MT LED: Off

5.2 Interrupts

Introduction
The I/O device triggers interrupts as a reaction to specific errors. Interrupts are evaluated
based on the I/O controller used.

Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts:
● Diagnostic error interrupts
● Hardware interrupts
● Pull/plug interrupts
● Maintenance events
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO
controller.
Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB
number and start information.
Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction
"RALRM" (read additional interrupt information).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 39
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

System diagnostics
In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), the innovated system diagnostics is available for the devices of the
S7-1500 automation system (IO controller S7-1500 CPU) and ET 200SP (IO device).
Independent of the cyclic user program, alarms are made available on the display of the S7-
1500 CPU, the CPU web server and the HMI device.
You will find more information on system diagnostics in the Diagnostics
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192926) function manual.

5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the
module triggers a diagnostic error interrupt if this is configured accordingly.
The CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the diagnostic error
interrupt OB (OB 82). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information
of the diagnostic error interrupt OB.

5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt

Triggering a hardware interrupt

If there is a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes
the hardware interrupt block OB, e.g., OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added
to the start information of the hardware interrupt OB.

Note
Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module)
Do not use hardware interrupts for functional purposes (e.g. the cyclic generation of
hardware interrupts).
If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the
number of I/O modules and the communication load.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

40 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2.3 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt

Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt

In the event of a remove/insert module interrupt, the CPU interrupts processing of the user
program and processes the remove/insert module OB, e.g. OB 83. The event that triggered
the interrupt is entered in the start information of the remove/insert module OB.

Note
Parameter assignment error after removal/insertion
If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make
sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can do this by evaluating
OB83. After inserting a module, OB83 is not called until the module has started up and its
parameters are assigned. This ensures that data record operations can be executed without
errors.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 41
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3 Alarms

5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms

Actions after a diagnostics alarm

There can be more than one diagnostics alarm at the same time. Each diagnostics alarm
initiates the following actions:
● The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes.
● Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic error interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and
can be read via data records.
● Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller.
● (S7-300/400) The diagnostic interrupt OB is called. If the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB 82)
is not available, the IO controller goes into STOP mode.
You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help.

Reading the diagnostics

Table 5- 5 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7

Automation system with IO Application See...

controller
SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 online help
STEP 7 using Online and Diag-
• as of STEP 7 V12 function
nostics view
manual PROFINET with
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) STEP 7 as of V12
Read data records from the IO (http://support.automation.si
device
emens.com/WW/view/en/49
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) 948856)
Receive interrupts from the IO
device • as of STEP 7 V5.5, system
manual PROFINET System
Description
(http://support.automation.si
emens.com/WW/view/en/19
292127)

Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO

The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the
programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238).

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

42 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

Causes of error and troubleshooting

The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostic alarms are described in the manuals for
I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the
section, "Interrupts, error messages, and system events".

See also
Channel diagnostics (Page 44)

5.3.2 Maintenance events

Triggering of a maintenance event

The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and
maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158 Type 10 standard. The
goal is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible.
For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a plant component
must be checked or replaced.
The CPU interrupts user program execution and executes the diagnostic error interrupt OB.
The event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the
diagnostic error interrupt OB.
The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system in
the case of the following event:

Table 5- 6 Triggering of a maintenance event

Maintenance alarm Event Alarm/Meaning

Maintenance demanded Synchronization • No synchronization frame received.
LED MAINT is lit. loss
No synchronization frame was received by the sync master within the
timeout period after parameter assignment or during operation.
• Successive synchronization frames are located outside permitted
limits (jitter).
Undervoltage • Diagnostics Undervoltage

If the supply voltage of the interface falls below the value 19.2 V DC,
these diagnostics are reported as incoming Maintenance demanded.

System alarms in STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) with the following system
alarms:
● Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon in the
device view or in the hardware configuration.
You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 43
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.3 Channel diagnostics

Function
Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records.
The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC".

Structure of the diagnostics data records

The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the
standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.2.
If required, you can find the standard on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com) at the home
page of the PROFIBUS user organization.

Codes of the extended channel diagnostics

With the IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are
reported:

ChannelErrorType ExtendedChannelError- Associated value Diagnostics

(CET) Type (ECET) AddValue
0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Potential group"
faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in actual slot
(AddValue)
0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module
0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too large
0x0602 0x0699 Slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration
0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for
the potential groups
Note: The slot in which the light-colored BaseUnit
of the respective load module is located is coded
in the "ChannelNumber" element.
0x0610 0x06B4 0x00 Diagnostics "Undervoltage power supply"
If the supply voltage of the interface falls below the
value 19.2 V DC, these diagnostics are reported
as incoming Maintenance demanded.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

44 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.4 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO

Invalid configuration states

The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the
failure of the IO device or prevent data exchange:
● Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration.
● Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do
not trigger an interrupt.
● At least one I/O module is plugged into a different BaseUnit as the one configured in the
parameters.
● No server module.
● Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter.

Note
Removal of the server module will trigger a station stop. All I/O modules of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the interface module continues to
exchange data.
Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart.

See also
Status and error displays (Page 36)
Channel diagnostics (Page 44)

5.3.5 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D

Failure of the supply voltage L+

The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D:
● If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull interrupt is
generated.
● If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, a plug interrupt is
generated.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 45
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
5.3 Alarms

5.3.6 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device

STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller

Diagnostics received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not initiate a
call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. Read the E00CH data
record in startup OB using the instruction "RDREC". This record contains all diagnostics for
the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices

If you want to read the occurring diagnostics in the STOP state of the IO controller, you have
to read the E00CH data record with the "RDREC" instruction. This record contains all
diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

46 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
Compatibility 6
6.1 Compatibility of modules

Station configuration with more than 32 I/O modules

Certain I/O modules with functional status 001 and 002 do not support a station configuration
with more than 32 I/O modules.
The table below shows all modules that do not support a station configuration with more than
32 I/O modules:

Table 6- 1 Incompatible modules with functional versions

Modules Article number up to functional status

Analog modules
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1 002
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST 6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1 002
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 002
AI 4xU/I ST 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 002
Digital modules
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 002
DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 002
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 002
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 002
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 002

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 47
Compatibility
6.1 Compatibility of modules

Status of the supply voltage

Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete
configuration.
● For modules without parameter assignment in the following table, the status of the supply
voltage (status byte of the server module) is always signaled as "1" regardless of the
actual status of the supply voltage.
● If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from
the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this
potential group.

Modules Article number

DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0

AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module

Note
For operation of the AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module, firmware version V1.0 (6ES7135-
6HD00-0BA1) with the interface module, you need to set the "Reaction to CPU STOP"
parameter to "Turn off" with a PROFINET send clock < 1 ms.

Reaction times for fail-safe modules

The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account
when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: Maximum reaction time =
configured update time + 400 μs (but at least 1.4 ms)

Operation with activated system redundancy S2

Note
Restrictions in operation with activated system redundancy S2
You cannot use the following functions during operation of the IM155-6 PN/3 HF, firmware
version V4.2 with activated system redundancy S2:
• Configuration control (option handling)
• Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)
• Interface local coupling of IO data

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

48 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
Technical specifications 7
Technical specifications of IM 155-6 PN/3 HF
The following table shows the technical specifications as of 08/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0/td?dl=en).

Article number 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0

General information
Product type designation IM 155-6 PN/3 HF with server module
Firmware version V4.2
• FW update possible Yes

Number of MtM communication relation- 16

ships/connections, max.
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

• Module swapping during operation (hot Yes; Multi-hot swapping

swapping)

• Tool changer Yes; Docking station and docking unit

• Local coupling, IO data Yes

– Number of coupling modules 16

– Number of coupling submodules per 4
module
• Local coupling, data records No

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15.1
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- Configurable via GSD file

sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Configuration control
via dataset Yes
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 49
Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0

Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 10 ms

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 175 mA; At 24 V, 2 slots 2x RJ45 BusAdapter, no
I/O modules
Current consumption, max. 950 mA
Inrush current, max. 9A
I²t 0.34 A²·s
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 4.9 W
Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 288 byte; For input and output data respectively

Address space per station

• Address space per station, max. 1 440 byte; Dependent on configuration

Hardware configuration
Rack
• Modules per rack, max. 64; + 16 ET 200AL modules

Submodules
• Number of submodules per station, max. 256

Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 3 ports (switch)
1. Interface
Interface types
• Number of ports 3; Via 2 BusAdapter slots

• integrated switch Yes

• BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; Compatible BusAdapter: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x

FC, BA 2x SCRJ, BA SCRJ / RJ45, BA SCRJ /
FC, BA 2x LC, BA LC / RJ45, BA LC / FC
Protocols
• PROFINET IO Device Yes

• Open IE communication Yes

• Media redundancy Yes; PROFINET MRP

Interface types
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
• Transmission procedure PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex
(100BASE-TX)
• 10 Mbps No

• 100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex

(100BASE-TX)
• Autonegotiation Yes

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

50 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0

• Autocrossing Yes

Protocols
PROFINET IO Device
Services
– Isochronous mode Yes; Bus cycle time: min. 250 µs
– Open IE communication Yes
– IRT Yes; 250 μs, 500 μs, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms additional-
ly with IRT with high performance: 250 µs to 4 ms
in 125 µs frame
– PROFIenergy Yes
– Prioritized startup Yes
– Shared device Yes
– Number of IO Controllers with shared 4
device, max.
Redundancy mode
– MRP Yes
– MRPD No
– PROFINET system redundancy (S2) Yes; NAP S2
– Redundant PROFINET configuration No
(R1)
– H-Sync forwarding Yes
Open IE communication
• TCP/IP Yes

• SNMP Yes

• LLDP Yes

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- Yes
nized up to terminal)
Equidistance Yes
shortest clock pulse 250 µs
max. cycle 4 ms
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 250 µs
Jitter, max. 1 µs
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Status indicator Yes
Alarms Yes
Diagnostics function Yes
Diagnostics indication LED
• RUN LED Yes; Green LED

• ERROR LED Yes; Red LED

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 51
Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0

• MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED

LED)

• Connection to network LINK (green) Yes; 2x green link LEDs on BusAdapter

Potential separation
between backplane bus and electronics No
between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes
between supply and all other circuits No
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Standards, approvals, certificates
Network loading class 3
Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation relating to sea level

• Installation altitude above sea level, max. 2 000 m; On request: Installation altitudes greater
than 2 000 m
Connection method
ET-Connection
• via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules

Mechanics/material
Strain relief Yes; Optional
Dimensions
Width 100 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 220 g; without BusAdapter

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

52 Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA
Dimension drawing A
This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc.

Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN/3 HF interface module, front and side views

Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)

Manual, 10/2018, A5E44899355-AA 53
Server module ___________________
Preface

(6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) ___________________
Documentation guide 1

2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
___________________
Parameters/address space 3
ET 200SP
Server module 4
___________________
Diagnostics alarms
(6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)
___________________
Technical specifications 5
Manual

___________________
Parameter data record 6

___________________
Dimensional drawing A

03/2015
A5E03575337-AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03575337-AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 03/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Conventions
Please also observe notes labeled as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product, or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Parameters/address space ..................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 9
3.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................10
3.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................10
3.3.1 Input data for interface modules with maximum 12 I/O modules ...........................................12
3.3.2 Input data for interface modules with maximum 32 I/O modules ...........................................13
3.3.3 Input data for CPU/interface modules with maximum 64 I/O modules ...................................14
3.3.4 Evaluating feedback voltage ...................................................................................................15
4 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................................ 17
5 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 18
5.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................18
6 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 19
6.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................19
A Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................................. 21
A.1 Server module .........................................................................................................................21

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
 Documentation guide

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

My Documentation Manager
The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to
your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Application examples
Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

CAx Download Manager

The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe
systems.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0

View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the server module

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Closes off the backplane bus of the ET 200SP
● Contains a support for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm)
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Reconfiguration in RUN
● Representation of the statuses of supply voltage L+ and the feedback voltage (Page 15)
per slot.
● Retentive storage of device name for device replacement without topological
configuration of the IM 155-6 PN BA.
You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.

Function and properties Product version of the module Firmware version of the module
as of as of
Support of the IM 155-6 PN BA 1 V1.1.1

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Parameters/address space 3
3.1 Parameters

Parameters for the server module

The effective range of the configurable parameter depends on the type of configuration.
Possible configuration: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system.
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameter to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment
and structure of parameter data record (Page 19).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 3- 1 Configurable parameter and its default (GSD file)

Parameters Range of values Default Reconfiguration in Effective range with configuration

RUN software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Group diagnostics: No • Disable No Yes ET 200SP ---
supply voltage L+
• Enable

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 9
Parameters/address space
3.2 Explanation of the parameters

3.2 Explanation of the parameters

Group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

When you enable this parameter, the ET 200SP generates one diagnostic per potential
group (as group information) when the supply voltage L+ fails.
This function does not depend on enabling the parameter "Diagnostics: No supply voltage
L+" of the I/O modules.
The diagnostics is formed from the states of the supply voltage of the installed I/O modules
within the potential group.
Requirements
● All I/O modules must be inserted, i.e. the current configuration must not have any empty
slots.
● If no I/O modules are inserted on light-colored BaseUnits BU..D, the beginning of this
potential group is not recognized. The I/O modules of this potential group are therefore
part of the previous potential group.
If the I/O module is installed on the light-colored BaseUnit, the potential group is
detected, the diagnostics is reevaluated according to the potential group arrangement
and new diagnostics may be reported. The position of the light-colored BaseUnit remains
stored in the structure until the supply voltage 1L+ of the CPU/interface module is turned
off.

3.3 Address space

Introduction
You can read out the status of the supply voltage L+ and the feedback voltage of I/O
modules via the address space of the server module:
● All I/O modules:
No supply voltage L+ or no I/O module available
● Additional digital output module HF:
feedback voltage present

Requirements
● The I/O module used must support monitoring of the supply voltage.
● The I/O module used must support monitoring of a feedback voltage.

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
 Parameters/address space
3.3 Address space

Length of input data

The length of the input data depends on the CPU/interface module:
● Interface module with 12 I/O modules maximum configuration: 2/4 bytes
● Interface module with 32 I/O modules maximum configuration: 4/8 bytes
● CPU/interface module with 64 I/O modules maximum configuration: 8/16 bytes

Configurations
In the configuration software, you can select 3 configurations for the server module for
operation on the CPU/interface module:
● Configuration with disabled "Status of the supply voltage L+" and disabled "Status of the
feedback voltage":
– The server module only has one diagnostics address.
● Configuration with enabled "Status of the supply voltage L+" and disabled "Status of the
feedback voltage":
– The server module has 2/4/8 bytes of input data for the display of the status of the
supply voltage L+ of the inserted I/O modules.
– Display in the input data of the server module:
Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available
● Configuration with enabled "Status of the supply voltage L+" and enabled "Status of the
feedback voltage":
– The server module has 4/8/16 bytes of input data for the display of the status of the
supply voltage L+ and the status of the feedback voltage of the inserted I/O modules.
– Display in the input data of the server module:
Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available
Feedback voltage present/missing

Table 3- 2 Data length depending on configuration and maximum configuration

Maximum configuration "Status supply voltage" deactivated Activated Activated

"Status feedback voltage" deactivated Deactivated Activated
12 slots 0 2 4
32 slots 0 4 8
64 slots 0 8 16

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 11
Parameters/address space
3.3 Address space

3.3.1 Input data for interface modules with maximum 12 I/O modules

Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (2 bytes of input data)
You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data
(byte 0 to 1):
● Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (2 bytes)

Figure 3-1 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (2 bytes)

Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of
the feedback voltage (4 bytes of input data)
You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data
(byte 0 to 3).
● Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (2 bytes)
● Feedback voltage present/missing (2 bytes)

Figure 3-2 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status
detection of the feedback voltage (4 bytes of input data)

Note
• An inserted or missing server module always signals bit=0 for the slot.
• If the server module is missing, the input data is invalid.
• For I/O modules without feedback voltage monitoring, the bit for the feedback voltage is
the same as the bit for the missing supply voltage L+.

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
 Parameters/address space
3.3 Address space

3.3.2 Input data for interface modules with maximum 32 I/O modules

Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (4 bytes of input data)
You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data
(byte 0 to 3):
● Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (4 bytes)

Figure 3-3 Supply voltage L+ missing or I/O module not available (4 bytes); feedback voltage not
available

Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of
the feedback voltage (8 bytes of input data)
You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data
(byte 0 to 7).
● Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (4 bytes)
● Feedback voltage present/missing (4 bytes)

Figure 3-4 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled
status detection of the feedback voltage (8 bytes of input data)

Note
• An inserted or missing server module always signals bit=0 for the slot.
• If the server module is missing, the input data is invalid.
• For I/O modules without feedback voltage monitoring, the bit for the feedback voltage is
the same as the bit for the missing supply voltage L+.

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 13
Parameters/address space
3.3 Address space

3.3.3 Input data for CPU/interface modules with maximum 64 I/O modules

Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (8 bytes of input data)
You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data
(byte 0 to 7):
● Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (8 bytes)

Figure 3-5 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (8 bytes)

Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of
the feedback voltage (16 bytes of input data)
You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data
(byte 0 to 15):
● Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (8 bytes)
● Feedback voltage present/missing (8 bytes)

Figure 3-6 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status
detection of the feedback voltage (16 bytes of input data)

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
 Parameters/address space
3.3 Address space

Note
• An inserted or missing server module always signals bit=0 for the slot.
• If the server module is missing, the input data is invalid.
• For I/O modules without feedback voltage monitoring, the bit for the feedback voltage is
the same as the bit for the missing supply voltage L+.

3.3.4 Evaluating feedback voltage

Ranges of error

Figure 3-7 Ranges of error of the supply voltage L+ and the feedback voltage

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 15
Parameters/address space
3.3 Address space

Feedback voltage
A feedback may occur, for example, due to a crossover in a cable of a digital output module
and depends on the target status of the supply voltage L+:
If the supply voltage L+ of the I/O module is greater than 6 V, this is entered in the input data
in the respective bit.
● Byte 2 and 3 (for 12 I/O modules and 4 bytes of input data)
● Byte 4 to 7 (for 32 I/O modules and 8 bytes of input data)
● Byte 8 to 15 (for 64 I/O modules and 16 bytes of input data)
The feedback voltage can be evaluated via the user program in the following cases:

Table 3- 3 Under what circumstances can the feedback voltage be evaluated via the user program?

Supply voltage L+ Status detection of supply Status detection of feed- Explanation

safely disconnected1 voltage L+ (input data) back voltage (input data)
Yes Not available: Bit = 0 Available: Bit = 1 The feedback voltage detected is in the
range 6 to 12 V (e.g. in the event of a
fault in the system)
Yes Available: Bit = 1 Available: Bit = 1 The feedback voltage detected is > 12 V
(e.g. in the event of a fault in the system)
1 This does not refer to the supply voltage applied to the BaseUnit, but, for example, to the status information of a safety
relay.

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Diagnostics alarms 4
A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event. The diagnostics alarms can, for
example, be read out in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes
with the user program.

Table 4- 1 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Server module with invalid 1BH General error • Replace the server module.
firmware version (< V1.1.1)
• Firmware update of the server module.

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 17
Technical specifications 5
5.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the server module

6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
Dimensions
Width 7 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 36 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 19 g

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Parameter data record 6
6.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN.

Changing parameters in RUN

The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.

STATUS output parameter

The module ignores errors that occurred during the transfer of parameters with the WRREC
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a
corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
The description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Structure of data record 128

Figure 6-1 Structure of data record 128

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 19
Parameter data record
6.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Header information
The following diagram shows the structure of the header information.

Figure 6-2 Header information

Parameters
The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter in byte 2.
Enable the parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure 6-3 Structure of byte 2

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Dimensional drawing A
A.1 Server module

Dimensional drawing of the server module

① Contact plating of mounting rail

Figure A-1 Dimensional drawing of the server module

Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 21
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring
ET 200SP
Digital input module 4
___________________
Parameters/address space
DI 8x24VDC BA
(6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E34941724-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E34941724-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2015 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0 to 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17
4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 19
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21
5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 21
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 28

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the SIMATIC
ET 200MP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems, e.g. diagnostics, communication, motion control, Web
server, OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815).

Manual Collection S7-1500/ET 200MP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC S7-1500
automation system and the ET 200MP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384).

SIMATIC S7-1500 comparison list for programming languages

The comparison list contains an overview of which instructions and functions you can use for
which controller families.
You can find the comparison list on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86630375).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx data

In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx
or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance
activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of
the TIA Portal.
General function overview:
● Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network.
● Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device
● Downloading of addresses (IP, subnet, gateway) to a device
● Downloading the PROFINET name (station name) to a device
● Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode
● Setting the time in a CPU to the current time of your PG/PC
● Downloading a new program to a CPU or an HMI device
● Downloading from CPU, downloading to CPU or deleting recipe data from a CPU
● Downloading from CPU or deleting data log data from a CPU
● Backup/restore of data from/to a backup file for CPUs and HMI devices
● Downloading service data from a CPU
● Reading the diagnostics buffer of a CPU
● Performing a CPU memory reset
● Resetting devices to factory settings
● Downloading a firmware update to a device
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the PROFINET
network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET network and all connected
components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0 (Number in package unit: 1 unit)
6ES7131-6BF01-2AA0 (Number in package unit: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8×24VDC BA module

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital input module with 8 inputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Sink input (PNP, sinking input)
● Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms (per channel)
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1, 2
and 3
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW version FW version STEP 7 GSD file

Function TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 and V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
I&M0 to I&M3 higher with HSP 0222 higher with
HSP 0229 V7.0
Configuration in FS01 V0.0.0 and V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
RUN higher with HSP 0222 higher with
HSP 0229 V7.0

You can configure the module with STEP 7 and with a GSD file.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification labels
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC BA module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
The input channels provide values even without connected supply voltage L+. The
characteristic type 2 is only maintained with connected supply voltage L+.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection

The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the
digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1-
wire and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n

② 2-wire connection 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit
only)
④ Input electronics M Ground
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
colored BaseUnit is present)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses PWR Power LED (green)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 15
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 3-wire connection

The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the
digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire
connection).

① 3-wire connection
② Color identification labels CCxx (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present)
DIn Input signal, channel n
24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n
L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only)
M Ground
1 A to 10 A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)

Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

DI 8x24VDC BA parameters
Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the parameters that can be set depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module by means of data records; see section Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Reconfigura- Scope with configuration soft-

tion in RUN ware, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 17
Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameter Value range Default Reconfigura- Scope with configuration soft-

tion in RUN ware, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Input delay • None 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module 1
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (module group of the
plugged into a dark- left module
colored BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged in-
to light-colored BaseUnit)

1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP: The parame-
ter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maxi-
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record
128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is
16 bytes.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Input delay
This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are only
detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of DI 8x24VDC BA

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC BA V0.0 V14, SP1 or high- X X
er with HSP 0222

Address space
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DI 8x24VDC BA.

Figure 4-1 Address space of DI 8x24VDC BA

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC BA.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status LED Meaning

Process signal = 0
Off
Process signal = 1
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Supply voltage L+ missing
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DI 8×24VDC BA digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
error for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+. • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 23
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DI 8×24VDC BA

Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0

General information
Product type designation DI 8x24 VDC BA
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC01
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3 / -

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DI Yes

• Counter No

• Oversampling No

• MSI No

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 70 mA; All channels are supplied from the en-
coder supply

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0

Encoder supply
Number of outputs 8
Output voltage encoder supply, min. 19.2 V
Short-circuit protection Yes; per module
24 V encoder supply
• 24 V Yes

• Short-circuit protection Yes

Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.6 W; 24 V, 8 inputs supplied via encoder supply
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs 1 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 8
Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes
Source/sink input P-reading
Input characteristic curve in accordance with Yes
IEC 61131, type 2
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage DC

• Rated value (DC) 24 V

• for signal "0" -30 to +5V

• for signal "1" +11 to +30V

Input current
• for signal "1", typ. 6.8 mA

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
for standard inputs
– parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms
(in each case + delay of 30 to 500 µs, depending
on line length)
– at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms
– at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms
– at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes

– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 2 mA

sensor), max.
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

– parameterizable Yes

• Monitoring of encoder power supply No

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit No

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation based on sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 28 g

Dimension drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 27
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected
channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

STATUS output parameter

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS
output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter
in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E34941724-AC 31
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DI 8x24VDC HF
(6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

12/2017
A5E03576305-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03576305-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 12/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Number in pack: 10 units (6ES7131-BF00-2CA0)

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

4 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................17
4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................19
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................22
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 28
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................28
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................30
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................32
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 33
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................33
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 37
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................37

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

6 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 7
Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

8 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 9
Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

10 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0 (number in pack: 1 unit)
6ES7131-6BF00-2CA0 (number in pack: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8x24VDC HF module

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital input module with 8 inputs
● Sink input (PNP, active high)
● Supply voltage L+
● Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms (per channel)
● Configurable diagnostics (per channel)
● Configurable hardware interrupts (per channel)
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1
and 3
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW ver- FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Pulse stretching FS01 V1.0.0 or V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
higher higher with HSP
0229 V1.0 or
higher
Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
higher higher with HSP
0229 V1.0 or
higher
Identification data FS01 V1.0.0 or V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
I&M0 to I&M3 higher higher with HSP
0229 V1.0 or
higher
Reconfiguration in FS01 V1.0.0 or V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
RUN higher higher with HSP
0229 V1.0 or
higher
Value status FS01 V1.1.0 or V12, SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
higher with HSP 0057 higher with HSP
0229 V2.0 or
higher
Isochronous mode FS01 V1.1.0 or V12, SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
higher with HSP 0057 higher with HSP
0229 V2.0 or
higher

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

12 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

HW ver- FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Module-internal FS01 V1.2..0 or V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
shared input (MSI) higher higher with HSP
0229 V3.1 or
higher
Configurable sub- FS01 V2.0.0 or V13 SP1 Update 4 V5.5 SP3 or X X
module/submodules higher or higher with HSP higher with HSP
for shared device 0163 0229 V6.0 or
higher

Accessories
The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification labels
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual Distributed
I/O System ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagrams
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC HF module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection in the DI operating mode. You can
use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual ET 200SP distributed
I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622).

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

14 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagrams

Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input module DI 8×24VDC HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1- and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection L+n Encoder supply, channel n

② 2-wire connection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
③ Backplane bus interface DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
④ Input electronics .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
⑤ Color-coded label with color code CC01 (option- PWR Power LED (green)
al)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with F0 to F7 Channel fault LED (red)
light BaseUnit)
M Ground P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
DIn Input signal, channel n
Figure 3-1 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 15
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagrams

Wiring: 3-wire connection

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module
DI 8×24VDC HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).

① 3-wire connection
② Color-coded labels with color code CC01 and CC73 (optional)
③ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit)
DIn Input signal, channel n
L+n Encoder supply, channel n
DC 24 V Supply voltage L+ (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
M Ground
1A ... 10A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit)

Figure 3-2 Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

16 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters of the DI 8x24VDC HF

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 37)).

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Scope with configuration soft-

in RUN ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
wire break1
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 17
Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Scope with configuration soft-

in RUN ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Input delay • None 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module 2
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Pulse stretching • None None Yes Channel 2

• 0.05 s
• 0.1 s
• 0.2 s
• 0.5 s
• 1s
• 2s
Hardware interrupt • Disable Disable Yes Channel 2

rising edge
• Enable
Hardware interrupt • Disable Disable Yes Channel 2

falling edge
• Enable
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (module group of the
plugged into a dark- left module
colored BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged in-
to light-colored BaseUnit)

1 If you use a floating switch, you need to connect a resistor in parallel so that the wire break diagnostics is enabled in the
open state (sensor resistance for the wire break diagnostics: 25 kΩ to 45 kΩ).
2 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 6 bytes with
PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter, however, with data records 0 to 7 or data rec-
ord 128, see Appendix "Parameter data record".

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

18 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling diagnostics if the line to the encoder is interrupted.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Input delay
This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are only
detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.
In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for reading the input
data). The read-in time Ti refers to the channel for which no input delay time was configured.
For input channels with longer input delays, the read-in time is moved accordingly. This
means individual channels can be assigned input delays, if necessary, without having a
negative impact on the possible cycle time.
Isochronous configuration is only possible if there is no input delay configured for at least
one channel.

Pulse stretching
Pulse stretching is a function used to change a digital input signal. A pulse on a digital input
is stretched to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the
configured length, the pulse is not changed.
In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at time Ti (time for reading in the input
data), i.e. smaller pulses than T_DC (data cycle) are not recognized in certain cases.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 19
Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

Principle of pulse stretching

The figure below uses examples to show whether and how input pulses are changed.

T1 Pulse stretching parameter

Figure 4-1 Principle of pulse stretching

Hardware interrupt, rising edge

Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated by a rising edge.

Hardware interrupt, falling edge

Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated by a falling edge.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

20 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 21
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image input.

Configuration options of DI 8x24VDC HF

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7, as of
V13, SP1
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.0 X X X
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.1 X X X
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.1, QI X X ---
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.2 X X X
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.2, MSI X X ---
for module-internal Shared Input
with up to 4 submodules
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.2, QI X X ---
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0 --- X X
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, MSI --- X ---
for module-internal Shared Input
with up to 4 submodules
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, QI --- X ---
2 x 4-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 --- X ---
2 x 4-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 --- X ---
QI
4 x 2-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 --- X ---
4 x 2-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 --- X ---
QI

Note
The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and
the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the IO
device.
• Firmware update
• I&M identification data
• PROFIenergy

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

22 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

2 x 4- / 4 x 2-channel configuration
For the configuration, the channels of the module are divided into submodules. The
submodules can be assigned to different IO controllers when the module is used in a shared
device.
The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Read the
information in the manual for the particular interface module.

Value status (Quality Information, QI)

The value status is always activated for the following module names:
● DI 8x24VDC HF QI,
● DI 8x24VDC HF MSI
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The value status bit
indicates if the read in digital value is valid. (0 = value is incorrect).

Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 8-channel
module without value status.

Figure 4-2 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF without value status

Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF, QI

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as a
8-channel module with value status. You can freely assign the start address for the module.
The addresses of the channels are derived from the start address.

Figure 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF QI with value status

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 23
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF MSI

The channels 0 to 7 of the module are copied in up to four submodules with configuration
1 x 8-channel module (Module-internal shared input, MSI). Channels 0 to 7 are then
available with identical input values in various submodules. These submodules can be
assigned to up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. Each
IO controller has read access to the same channels.
The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Please
observe the information in the manual for the particular interface module.

Value status (Quality Information,QI)

The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs.
For the 1st submodule (=basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is
incorrect.
For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSI submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value
is incorrect or the basic submodule has not yet been configured (not ready).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

24 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with submodule 1, 2, 3 and
4 and the value status.

Figure 4-4 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF MSI with value status

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 25
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 4-channel
module without value status.

Figure 4-5 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 without
value status

Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 QI

Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address.

Figure 4-6 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 QI with
value status

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

26 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 4 x 2-channel
module without value status.

Figure 4-7 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 without
value status

Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 QI

Each of the four submodules has a freely assignable start address.

Figure 4-8 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 QI with value status

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 27
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC HF.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ Channel error (red)
④ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 28
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 32).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned)
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics
Flashes

LED channel status/channel error

Table 5- 2 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error

LED channel LED channel Meaning

status error
Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off
 Off

• No supply voltage present or
On Off
 • Process voltage > 11 V is present regardless of whether or
not the channel is activated and regardless of whether diag-
nostics was detected
Supply voltage is available and process voltage < 11V is pre-
Off
 On sent regardless of whether or not the channel is activated and
regardless of whether diagnostics was detected
Channel activated and diagnostics enable was recognized
On On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Missing supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 29
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The digital input module DI 8×24VDC HF supports hardware and diagnostics alarms.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing
● Hardware interrupt lost
● Channel temporarily unavailable

Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller

The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events:
● At positive edge (signal change from 0 to 1)
● At negative edge (signal change from 1 to 0)
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the
IO controller.
You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block
with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

30 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double
word 8 in local data.

Figure 5-2 Start information of the organization block

Structure of the additional interrupt information

Table 5- 4 Structure of USI = W#16#0001

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0001 User Structure Identifier: Additional interrupt 2
information for hardware interrupts of the I/O
module
The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows.
Channel B#16#00 to B#16#07 Channel 0 to 7 of the I/O module 1
It follows the error event that triggered the hardware interrupt.
Error event B#16#01 Positive edge 1
B#16#02 Negative edge

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 31
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at sensor supply Correct the process wiring
Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or
modify the wiring, for example, use
cables with larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect in parallel a resistor of
25 kOhm to 45 kOhm to the en-
coder contacts
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
error for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage missing 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Hardware interrupt lost 16H The module cannot trigger an interrupt be- • Change interrupt processing in
cause the previous interrupt was not the CPU and, if necessary, edit
acknowledged; possible configuration error the module parameters.
• The error persists until the mod-
ule is assigned new parameters
Channel/component 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or • Wait for firmware update.
temporarily unavailable has been canceled. The module does not
• Restart the firmware update.
read in process values in this state.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

32 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DI 8×24VDC HF

Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0

General information
Product type designation DI 8x24 V DC HF
Firmware version V2.0
• FW update possible Yes

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC01
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V13 SP1 / -
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 / -

sion

• PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DI Yes

• Counter No

• Oversampling No

• MSI Yes

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

33 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0

Encoder supply
Number of outputs 8
Output voltage encoder supply, min. 19.2 V
Short-circuit protection Yes
24 V encoder supply
• 24 V Yes

• Short-circuit protection Yes; per channel, electronic

Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.5 W; 24 V, 8 inputs supplied via encoder supply
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Submodules
• Number of configurable submodules, max. 4

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 8
Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes
Source/sink input P-reading
Input characteristic curve in accordance with Yes
IEC 61131, type 3
Pulse extension Yes; Pulse duration from 4 µs
• Length 2 s; 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s

Edge evaluation Yes; rising edge, falling edge, edge change

Input voltage
• Type of input voltage DC

• Rated value (DC) 24 V

• for signal "0" -30 to +5V

• for signal "1" +11 to +30V

Input current
• for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

34 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
for standard inputs
– parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms
(in each case + delay of 30 to 500 µs, depending
on line length)
– at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms
– at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms
– at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes

– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 1.5 mA

sensor), max.
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- Yes
nized up to terminal)
Filtering and processing time (TCI), min. 420 µs
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 500 µs
Jitter, max. 8 µs
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes; channel by channel

• Hardware interrupt Yes; Parameterizable, channels 0 to 7

Diagnostic messages
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

– parameterizable Yes

• Monitoring of encoder power supply Yes; channel by channel

• Wire-break Yes; Channel by channel, optional protective

circuit for preventing wire-break diagnostics in the
case of simple encoder contacts: 25 kOhm to 45
kOhm
• Short-circuit Yes; channel by channel

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 35
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0

Diagnostics indication LED
• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation relating to sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Negative ambient temperature down
sure-altitude to -30 °C (without condensation), installation
altitudes between 2 000 m and 5 000 m
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 28 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

36 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.
With data records 0 to 7, you can reconfigure individual channels.

Operation of the module behind a PROFIBUS DP interface module

If the module is operated behind a PROFIBUS DP interface module, the parameter data
records 0 and 1 cannot be read back. You obtain the diagnostics data records 0 and 1 with
the read back parameter data records 0 and 1. You can find additional information in the
Interrupts section of the PROFIBUS DP interface module manual on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/78324181).

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected
channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128 or data records 0 to 7. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU,
which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.
If you reconfigure a module and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these
diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing".

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS
output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

37 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Data record structure

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 and data records 0 to 7

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

38 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameter
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+2 for channels 0 to 7

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE 39
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transmitting the data record

The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there
are errors in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in the STATUS pa- Meaning Solution

rameter
(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record
length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine whether
the module is plugged or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parame-
ters of the WREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header in- Correct the version, length and number of
formation parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

40 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576305-AE
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Operating mode DI 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module Counting operating mode
___________________
(CNT) 4
DI 8x24VDC HS
(6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)
___________________
Oversampling (OVS)
operating mode 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data records A

09/2018
A5E35243810-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E35243810-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2015 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 09/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This device manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that relate generally to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you
when commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Changes compared to the previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Parameters and value range are harmonized in "Counting" mode (GSD file and TIA Portal).

Conventions
Please pay particular attention to notes highlighted as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................12
3 Operating mode DI ................................................................................................................................ 15
3.1 Wiring up .................................................................................................................................15
3.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................15
3.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................18
3.2.1 High-speed inputs ...................................................................................................................18
3.2.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................18
3.2.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................20
3.2.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................24
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................25
3.3.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................25
3.3.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................27
3.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................29
4 Counting operating mode (CNT)............................................................................................................ 30
4.1 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................30
4.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................30
4.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................33
4.2.1 Counting ..................................................................................................................................33
4.2.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................34
4.2.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................36
4.2.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................40
4.2.4.1 Assignment of the control interface ........................................................................................40
4.2.4.2 Assignment of the feedback interface.....................................................................................41
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ..............................................................................................45
4.3.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................45
4.3.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................47
4.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................48
5 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode .................................................................................................... 49
5.1 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................49
5.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................49
5.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................52
5.2.1 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................52
5.2.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................53
5.2.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................55
5.2.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................56

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 5
Table of contents

5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................. 57

5.3.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 57
5.3.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 59
5.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 60
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 61
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 61
A Parameter data records ........................................................................................................................ 65
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode ........ 65
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating
mode ...................................................................................................................................... 69
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling
operating mode ...................................................................................................................... 74

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the
system - separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the
TIA Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ LED for supply voltage

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Function class
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Color coding module type
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Function and firmware version
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑥ LEDs for operating mode ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8×24VDC HS module

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital input module with 8 high-speed inputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Sink input (PNP)
● Module-specific configurable diagnostics for supply voltage and short-circuit to M
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131,
type 1 and 3
● Three operating modes:

Table 2- 1 Operating modes of the DI 8×24VDC HS

Property Operating mode

DI (Page 15) Counting (CNT) Oversampling (OVS)
Without value status With value status (Page 30) (Page 49)
(QI) (QI)
Number of channels 8 8 4 8
Isochronous mode Yes, optional Yes, optional Yes, optional Yes, required
• Shortest send clock 125 µs 125 µs 125 µs 250 µs

Oversampling No No No Yes
• Number of oversampling — — — 2 ... 32
levels
(sampling rate)

• Shortest sub-cycle — — — 7.8125 μs

(= shortest sampling time)
Counter length, max. counting — — 32-bit, 10 kHz * —
frequency
Configurable input delay 0 ms ... 20 ms 0 ms ... 20 ms 0.05 ms - 20 ms 0 ms ... 20 ms
Configurable hardware inter- × × — —
rupts; rising edge and/or falling
edge (per channel)
Data length Inputs 1 byte 2 bytes 25 bytes 32 bytes
Outputs 0 bytes 0 bytes 20 bytes 0 bytes

* If a diagnostic event occurs, the maximum counting frequency is reduced to 9 kHz.

The module supports the following functions:

● Isochronous mode
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Reconfiguration in RUN
● PROFIenergy

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 13
Product overview
2.1 Properties

The module can be configured with HSP or a GSD file. The configurations for the operating
modes can be found under various codes / module names:

Table 2- 2 Codes / module names for the configuration options

Operating mode Configuration software

HSP0127 for STEP 7 HSP0229 for STEP 7 GSD file GSD file
(TIA Portal) PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
DI Without QI DI 8×24VDC HS DI 8×24VDC HS DI 8×24VDC HS DI 8×24VDC HS
With QI DI/OVS DI 8×24VDC HS QI —
Counting (CNT) DI 8×24VDC HS CNT DI 8×24VDC HS CNT DI 8×24VDC HS CNT
Oversampling DI 8×24VDC HS — —
(OVS) * DI/OVS
* The interface module or CPU with which the module is used must support isochronous mode.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
Operating mode DI 3
3.1 Wiring up

3.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams

This section contains the block diagram for the DI 8x24VDC HS with the pin assignments for
1, 2 and 3-wire connection in DI operating mode. You may use and combine the different
wiring options for all channels.
Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP Distributed
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
The module's load group must start with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the
configuration.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 15
Operating mode DI
3.1 Wiring up

Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection

The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of pin assignment for the
DI 8×24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1 and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection L+n Encoder supply, channel n

② 2-wire connection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
③ Backplane bus interface DIAG LED error or diagnostics (green, red)
④ Input electronics .0 to .7 LED channel status (green)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) PWR LED power (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available CNT LED operating mode Count (green)
with light BaseUnit)
M Ground OVS LED operating mode Oversampling (green)
DIn Input signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
Figure 3-1 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Operating mode DI
3.1 Wiring up

Wiring: 3-wire connection

The figure below shows an example of pin assignment for the DI 8×24VDC HS digital input
module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).

① 3-wire connection
② Color-coded labels CCxx (optional)
③ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit)
DIn Input signal, channel n
L+n Encoder supply, channel n
DC 24 V Supply voltage L+ (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
M Ground
1A ... 10A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit)

Figure 3-2 Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 17
Operating mode DI
3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2.1 High-speed inputs

Function
In operating mode DI, use all eight channels as digital high-speed inputs. High-speed inputs
make sense when rapid reactions to input signals are needed (reaction time < 2 ms).

Requirement
Low reaction times require a cycle time of less than 750 µs.

3.2.2 Parameters
The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
In addition to configuration via the configuration software, you can also configure parameters
in RUN mode (dynamic) via the user program. When assigning parameters in the user
program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the
data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data
record for DI operating mode (Page 65).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Operating mode DI
3.2 Parameters/address space

The following parameter settings are possible for each operating mode:

Table 3- 1 Configurable parameters in DI operating mode

Parameters Value range Default Reconfigu- Effective range with configuration soft-
ration in ware
RUN HSP0127 for GSD file
STEP 7 PROFIBUS DP
(TIA Portal);
HSP0229 for
STEP 7;
PROFINET
IO GSD file
Operating mode1 • DI / Oversampling — no Module Module
• Counting
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Input delay • None 3.2 ms yes Channel Module 2
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Pulse stretching • None None yes Channel —3
• 0.05 s
• 0.1 s
• 0.2 s
• 0.5 s
• 1s
• 2s
Hardware interrupt: • Disable Disable yes Channel —3
rising edge
• Enable

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 19
Operating mode DI
3.2 Parameters/address space

Parameters Value range Default Reconfigu- Effective range with configuration soft-
ration in ware
RUN HSP0127 for GSD file
STEP 7 PROFIBUS DP
(TIA Portal);
HSP0229 for
STEP 7;
PROFINET
IO GSD file
Hardware interrupt: • Disable Disable yes Channel —3
falling edge
• Enable
Potential group • Use potential group of Use poten- No Module Module
the left module tial group of
the left
• Enable new potential module
group

1 When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module
name.
2 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record"
function, you can set this parameter via data record 128.
3 If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record" function, you can set this parameter for each channel
via data record 128.

3.2.3 Explanation of parameters

Operating mode
At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are
operated:
● DI / Oversampling (Page 49)
● Counting (Page 30)
When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is
specified by selecting the module name.

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Operating mode DI
3.2 Parameters/address space

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. If a digital input is disabled, the
module ignores its signals.

Pulse stretching
Pulse stretching is a function used to change a digital input signal. A pulse on a digital input
is stretched to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the
configured length, the pulse is not changed. With Pulse stretching, you can reliably detect
very short input signals without having to use a correspondingly short cycle time.
In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for reading the input
data). In some cases, pulses that are shorter than the cycle time (send clock) are not
detected.
If you want to detect short signals isochronously, the Oversampling operating mode is
recommended. Oversampling also provides more precise information about the time at
which a signal occurs.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 21
Operating mode DI
3.2 Parameters/address space

Principle of pulse stretching

The figure below uses examples to show whether and how input pulses are changed.

Figure 3-3 Principle of pulse stretching

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Operating mode DI
3.2 Parameters/address space

Input delay
This parameter can be used to avoid signal faults. Changes to the signal are only detected if
they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.
Isochronous configuration is only possible if there is no input delay configured for at least
one channel. In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for
reading the input data). The read time Ti refers to the channel for which no input delay time
was configured.
For input channels with longer input delays, the read time is moved accordingly. This means
individual channels can be assigned input delays, if necessary, without having a negative
impact on the possible cycle time.

Note
If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option for the input delay, you have to use shielded
cables for connection of the digital inputs.

Hardware interrupt: rising edge

Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated for a rising edge.

Hardware interrupt: falling edge

Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated for a falling edge.

Potential group
Specifies whether a light-colored BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage is located on this
slot (see ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 23
Operating mode DI
3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2.4 Address space

Address space with value status (Quality Information, QI)

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space with value status (Quality
Information (QI)). "IB x" represents the start address of input byte x.
The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 3-4 Address space with value status

Evaluating the value status

An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the digital module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are each assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Operating mode DI
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

3.3.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED display of the DI 8×24VDC HS.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ CNT (green)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ OVS (green)

Figure 3-5 LED display

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 25
Operating mode DI
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures
for dealing with diagnostic interrupts can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms
(Page 29).

DIAG LED

Table 3- 2 DIAG LED fault/error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 3- 3 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Process signal = 0
Off

Process signal = 1
On

CNT LED

Table 3- 4 Status display of the CNT LED

CNT LED Meaning

Counting operating mode disabled
Off

Counting operating mode enabled
On

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

26 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Operating mode DI
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

OVS LED

Table 3- 5 Status display of the OVS LED

OVS LED Meaning

Oversampling operating mode disabled
Off

Oversampling operating mode enabled
On

PWR LED

Table 3- 6 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

3.3.2 Interrupts
The digital input module DI 8×24VDC HS supports hardware and diagnostics alarms in the
DI mode.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events:
● Channel temporarily unavailable
● Short-circuit
● Parameter assignment error
● No load voltage
● Hardware interrupt lost

Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller

The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events:
● At rising edge (signal change from 0 to 1)
● At falling edge (signal change from 1 to 0)
If an interrupt occurs, a corresponding interrupt OB is called in the CPU of the IO controller.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 27
Operating mode DI
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

S7-1500
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.
The block interface is shown here with optimized block access, which is set in the TIA Portal
by default.

Name Data type Comment

LADDR HW_IO Hardware identifier of the module triggering the interrupt
USI WORD USI (High/Low)
IChannel USInt Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt
EventType Byte Error event

S7-300/400 or a different CPU

The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events:
● At rising edge (signal change from 0 to 1)
● At falling edge (signal change from 1 to 0)
If an interrupt occurs, a corresponding interrupt OB is called in the CPU of the IO controller.
You will find detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block
with the "RALRM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online
help.
The channel of the module that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start
information of OB40 in the OB40_POINT_ADDR tag. The following figure shows the
assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data.

Figure 3-6 OB40_POINT_ADDR tag

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Operating mode DI
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Structure of the additional interrupt information

Table 3- 7 Structure of USI = W#16#0001

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0001 User Structure Identifier: Additional interrupt 2
info for hardware interrupts of the I/O module
The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows.
Channel B#16#00 to B#16#07 Channel 0 to 7 of the I/O module 1
It follows the error event that triggered the hardware interrupt.
Error event B#16#01 Rising edge 1
B#16#02 Falling edge

3.3.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostic interrupt is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module
flashes. The diagnostic interrupts can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of
the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 3- 8 Diagnostic interrupts, their meaning and how to deal with them

Diagnostic interrupt Error code Meaning Remedy

Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct process wiring
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel/module.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Hardware interrupt 16H • Module cannot send an interrupt be- Change interrupt processing in the CPU
lost cause a previous interrupt has not and re-assign module parameters corre-
been processed spondingly

• Possible cause: Too many hardware

interrupts in too short a time
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable has been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module reads no process values in
this state.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 29
Counting operating mode (CNT) 4
4.1 Connecting

4.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams

This section contains the block diagram for the DI 8×24VDC HS module with the pin
assignments for 1, 2 and 3-wire connection in counting operating mode. You may use and
combine the different wiring options for all channels.
Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP Distributed
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
The module's load group must start with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the
configuration.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.1 Connecting

Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection

The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of pin assignment for the
DI 8×24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1 and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection DIAG LED error or diagnostics (green, red)

② 2-wire connection .0 to .7 LED channel status (green)
③ Backplane bus interface PWR LED power (green)
④ Input electronics CNT LED operating mode Count (green)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) OVS LED operating mode Oversampling (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available DI0 - DI3 Counter input, channels 0-3
with light BaseUnit)
M Ground DI4 Direction input or gate input for DI0, channel 4
L+n Encoder supply, channel n DI5 Direction input or gate input for DI1, channel 5
L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) DI6 Direction input or gate input for DI2, channel 6
P1, Internal self-configuring voltage buses DI7 Direction input or gate input for DI3, channel 7
P2, Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
AUX Connection to the left interrupted (light Ba-
seUnit)
Figure 4-1 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 31
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.1 Connecting

Wiring: 3-wire connection

The figure below shows an example of pin assignment for the DI 8×24VDC HS digital input
module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).

① 3-wire connection
② Color-coded labels CCxx (optional)
③ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit)
DIn Input signal, channel n
L+n Encoder supply, channel n
DC 24 V Supply voltage L+ (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
M Ground
1A ... 10A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit)

Figure 4-2 Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

32 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2.1 Counting

Function
Counting refers to the detection and summation of events. The respective counters of the
module detect encoder signals and pulses and evaluate them accordingly, for example:
● For counting general piece goods up to a maximum limit
● For applications with recurring counting processes
You can count with DI0 through DI3. You can specify each counter's characteristics using the
functions described below.

Counter limits
The counting limits define the counter value range used. The counter limits are configurable
and can be modified during runtime using the user program.
The maximum possible counting limit is 2147483647 (231–1). The minimum possible
counting limit is –2147483648 (–231).
You can continue or stop counting upon violation of a counting limit (automatic gate stop)
Upon high and low limit violations of the counter value, an event bit is set in the feedback
interface (Page 41) in each case.

Start value
You can configure a start value within the counter limits. The start value can be modified
during runtime with the user program.

Gate control
Opening and closing the hardware gate and software gate defines the period of time during
which the counting signals are recordd.
The control of the hardware gate takes place externally via the digital inputs DI4 through DI7.
The software gate is controlled via the user program. Use of the hardware gate can be
enabled through parameter assignment.

Count direction
The counting direction is specified either via suitable external pulse signals at the each
counter's control input or via the configuration.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 33
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

Comparison values
You define two comparison values that can control the STS_DQ feedback bit, independent of
the user program. If the current counter value meets the configured comparison condition,
the STS_DQ reset bit is set. You can use the STS_DQ reset bit in order to control a digital
output module's digital output.
The comparison values are configurable and can be modified during runtime with the user
program. When a comparison event occurs, in each case an event bit is set in the feedback
interface (Page 41).

4.2.2 Parameters
The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
In addition to configuration via the configuration software, you can also configure parameters
in RUN mode (dynamic) via the user program. When assigning parameters in the user
program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the
data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data
record for Counting operating mode (Page 69).
The following parameter settings are possible for each operating mode:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters in Counting operating mode

Parameters Value range Default Reconfig- Effective range with configuration soft-
uration in ware
RUN HSP0127 for GSD file
STEP 7 PROFIBUS DP
(TIA Portal);
HSP0229 for
STEP 7;
PROFINET
IO GSD file
Operating mode1 • DI / Oversampling — No Module Module
• Counting
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage
• Enable
L+
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Short-circuit to
• Enable
ground
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

Parameters Value range Default Reconfig- Effective range with configuration soft-
uration in ware
RUN HSP0127 for GSD file
STEP 7 PROFIBUS DP
(TIA Portal);
HSP0229 for
STEP 7;
PROFINET
IO GSD file
Input delay • 0.05 ms 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module 2
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Reaction to viola- • Stop counting Stop counting Yes Channel Channel
tion of a counting
• Continue counting
limit
Edge selection • At rising edge At rising edge Yes Channel Channel
• At falling edge
Count direction • Up Up Yes Channel Channel
• Down
Set output • Off (DQ = 0) Off (DQ = 0) Yes Channel Channel
• Off (DQ = 1)
• Between comparison
value 0 and 1
• Not between compari-
son value 0 and 1
Set function of DI • Digital input Digital input Yes Channel Channel
• Gate start/stop
• Count direction
High counting limit -2147483648...2147483647 2147483647 Yes Channel Channel
Low counting limit -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel —3
Start value -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel —3
Comparison value -2147483648...2147483647 10 Yes Channel Channel
1

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 35
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

Parameters Value range Default Reconfig- Effective range with configuration soft-
uration in ware
RUN HSP0127 for GSD file
STEP 7 PROFIBUS DP
(TIA Portal);
HSP0229 for
STEP 7;
PROFINET
IO GSD file
Comparison value -2147483648...2147483647 0 Yes Channel —3
0
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module group of the left
module
• Enable new potential
group

1 When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module
name.
2 If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record" function, you can set this parameter for each channel
via data record 128.
3 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record"
function, you can set this parameter via data record 128.

4.2.3 Explanation of parameters

Operating mode
Selection of the operating mode in which all of the module's channels are operated.
● DI (Page 15) / Oversampling (Page 49)
● Counting
When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is
specified by selecting the module name.

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. If a digital input is disabled, the
module ignores its signals.

Input delay
You use this parameter to suppress signal interferences. The module only detects changes
to the signal if the changed signal is constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.

Note
If you select the "0.05 ms" value range for the input delay, you have to use shielded cables
for connection of the digital inputs.

Reaction to violation of a counting limit

Selection of the reaction to violation of the counter high limit in the upward direction or the
counter low limit in the downward direction:
● Stop counting:
After a counting limit is violated, the internal gate is closed. This stops the counting
process. The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit. To restart counting, you
must close and reopen the software/hardware gate.
● Continue counting:
After a counting limit is violated, the counter value is set to the opposite counting limit and
counting continues.

Edge selection
Selects the edge that is counted:
● At rising edge:
The respective counter counts all rising edges at the digital input.
● At falling edge:
The respective counter counts all falling edges at the digital input.

Note
If the "Reverse direction" option is selected in "Set function of DI" and the counting direction
in the process changes, the counting edge is automatically adjusted (opposite edges).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 37
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

Count direction
Count direction selection:
● Up:
The respective counter counts up.
● Down:
The respective counter counts down.

Note
This parameter has no effect if the "Reverse direction" option is selected in "Set function of
DI".

Set output
Selects the function that controls the response of the STS_DQ feedback bit (Page 41): You
use the feedback bit STS_DQ to control a digital output of a digital output module.
● Off (DQ = 0):
STS_DQ is independent of the counter value and permanently not set.
● Off (DQ = 1):
STS_DQ is independent of the counter value and permanently set.
● Between comparison value 0 and 1:
STS_DQ is set if counter value ≥ comparison value 0 and counter value ≤ comparison
value 1.
● Not between comparison value 0 and 1:
STS_DQ is set if counter value < comparison value 0 or counter value > comparison
value 1.

Set function of DI
Selects the function of DIn+4, which controls the assigned counter input DIn:
● Digital input:
No function is assigned to DIn+4. The signal status of DIn+4 is read by the CPU using the
feedback interface (Page 41).
● Gate start/stop:
Setting DIn+4 opens the hardware gate for DIn. Resetting DIn+4 closes the hardware gate
for DIn.
● Count direction:
DIn+4 reverses the counting direction at DIn, in order to adjust it to the process. If DIn+4 is
not set, DIn counts up. If DIn+4 is set, DIn counts down.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

38 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

Counter high limit

Sets counter high limit.
The following applies:
● Counter high limit > counter low limit
● Counter high limit ≤ 2147483647 (231 - 1)

Counter low limit

Sets the counter low limit.
The following applies:
● Counter low limit < counter high limit
● Counter low limit ≥ -2147483648 (-231)

Start value
Sets the start value.
The following applies:
● Start value ≥ counter low limit
● Start value ≤ counter high limit

Comparison value 1
Sets the second comparison value.
The following applies:
● Comparison value 1 > comparison value 0
● Comparison value 1 ≤ counter high limit

Comparison value 0
Sets the first comparison value.
The following applies:
● Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1
● Comparison value 0 ≥ counter low limit

Potential group
Specifies whether a light-colored BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage is located on this
slot (see ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 39
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2.4 Address space

4.2.4.1 Assignment of the control interface

Control interface
The user program uses the control interface to influence the behavior of the module's
counter. The figure below shows the address space allocation for the control interface in the
process image of the outputs.
"QB x" represents the start address of output byte x.

Figure 4-3 Assignment of the control interface

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

40 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

Notes on the control bits

Control bit Notes

SLOT This value is used to specify the loaded value for each channel. Use the LD_SLOT load re-
quest to evaluate the loaded value.
LD_SLOT This load request is used to specify the meaning of the SLOT (loaded value) value for each
channel. The user program performs the respective action, as soon as LD_SLOT changes.
When the loading request LD_SLOT = 011B is entered and the software gate is opened, each
counting operation begins with the start value. If another load request is entered and the soft-
ware gate is opened, counting continues with the current count at each start of the counting
operation. These two situations are also in effect when the hardware gate is configured and
the software gate is closed.
SW_GATE With this bit, you open and close the software gate of the respective channel. Together, the
software gate and the hardware gate form the internal gate. The module only counts if the
internal gate is open.
0 means: Software gate closed
1 means: Software gate open
RES_EVENT_UFLW Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_UFLW feedback bit for
the respective channel.
RES_EVENT_OFLW Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_OFLW feedback bit for
the respective channel.
RES_EVENT_CMP0 Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_CMP0 feedback bit for
the respective channel.
RES_EVENT_CMP1 Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_CMP1 feedback bit for
the respective channel.

4.2.4.2 Assignment of the feedback interface

Feedback interface
The user program receives current values and status information from the module via the
feedback interface. The figure below shows the address space allocation for the feedback
interface in the process image of the inputs.

Note
In isochronous mode, current values and the status information in the feedback interface is
updated at the time Ti (time for reading the input data).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 41
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

"IB x" represents the start address of input byte x.

Figure 4-4 Assignment of the feedback interface

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

42 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

Notes on the feedback bits

Feedback bit Notes

STS_DIn This bit indicates the status of the respective digital input DIn.
COUNT_VALUE This value returns the current counter value for the respective channel.
STS_DQ This bit depends on the "Set output" parameter of the respective channel. You can use
STS_DQ in each case, in order to control a digital output module's digital output.
STS_GATE Together, the software gate and the hardware gate form the internal gate. This bit indicates
the status of the internal gate for the respective channel. The module only counts if the
internal gate is open.
0 means: Gate closed
1 means: Gate open
Note:
If you change a channel parameter in RUN mode via data record 128, all of the changed
channel's values are retransferred to the module. In doing so, the internal gate of the re-
spective channel is closed and the counter value is set to the start value. To restart count-
ing, you need to close and reopen the software gate in each case.
LD_STS_SLOT This bit indicates for the respective channel, by mean of a status change (toggling), that
the load request for SLOT (LD_SLOT) has been detected and executed.
LD_ERROR This bit indicates for the respective channel that an error occurred (latching) during loading
via the control interface. The loaded value was not applied. One of the following conditions
has not been met:
• Counter low limit ≤ counter value
(If this condition is not met, the start value is loaded as the current counter value.)
• Counter low limit ≤ start value
• Counter low limit ≤ comparison value 0/1
• Counter high limit ≥ counter value
(If this condition is not met, the start value is loaded as the current counter value.)
• Counter high limit ≥ start value
• Counter high limit ≥ comparison value 0/1
• Counter low limit < counter high limit
• Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1
• Do not write a reserved load request in LD_SLOT
EVENT_UFLW For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved state which shows that there was a
counter value underflow (a violation of the counter low limit). You reset the status by ac-
knowledgment with RES_EVENT_UFLW.
EVENT_OFLW For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved state which shows that there was a
counter value overflow (a violation of the counter high limit). You reset the status by ac-
knowledgment with RES_EVENT_OFLW.
EVENT_CMP0 For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved status which shows that a compari-
son event with comparison value 0 has occurred. You reset the status by acknowledgment
with RES_EVENT_CMP0.
The EVENT_CMP0 bit is not set when you set the counter value to the start value.
EVENT_CMP1 For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved status which shows that a compari-
son event with comparison value 1 has occurred. You reset the status by acknowledgment
with RES_EVENT_CMP1.
The EVENT_CMP1 bit is not set when you set the counter value to the start value.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 43
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.2 Parameters/address space

Feedback bit Notes

RES_EVENT_UFLW_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_UFLW is
active.
RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_OFLW is
active.
RES_EVENT_CMP0_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_CMP0 is
active.
RES_EVENT_CMP1_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_CMP1 is
active.

Complete acknowledgment principle

Saving bits are acknowledged according to the complete acknowledgment principle.
The figure below shows an example of the sequence of the complete acknowledgment
principle in the event of an overflow:

① The EVENT_OFLW feedback bit is set as a saving event upon overflow.

② You set the RES_EVENT_OFLW control bit to trigger EVENT_OFLW reset.
③ The RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK feedback bit is set when reset of EVENT_OFLW is detected.
④ You then rest the control bit RES_EVENT_OFLW .
⑤ The RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK feedback bit is reset.

Figure 4-5 Acknowledgment principle

Note
If you have initiated the reset of an event bit, you must wait for the respective feedback bit.
Then you can initiate another reset.

Note
Opening the software gate or hardware gate (0-1 transition) resets all event bits.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

44 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

4.3.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED display of the DI 8×24VDC HS.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ CNT (green)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ OVS (green)

Figure 4-6 LED display

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 45
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures
for dealing with diagnostic interrupts can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms
(Page 48).

DIAG LED

Table 4- 2 DIAG LED fault/error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 4- 3 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Process signal = 0
Off

Process signal = 1
On

CNT LED

Table 4- 4 Status display of the CNT LED

CNT LED Meaning

Counting operating mode disabled
Off

Counting operating mode enabled
On

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

46 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

OVS LED

Table 4- 5 Status display of the OVS LED

OVS LED Meaning

Oversampling operating mode disabled
Off

Oversampling operating mode enabled
On

PWR LED

Table 4- 6 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

4.3.2 Interrupts
The digital input module DI 8×24VDC HS supports diagnostics alarms in the Counting mode.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events:
● Channel temporarily unavailable
● Short-circuit
● Parameter assignment error
● No load voltage

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 47
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

4.3.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostic interrupt is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module
flashes. The diagnostic interrupts can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of
the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 4- 7 Diagnostic interrupts, their meaning and how to deal with them

Diagnostic interrupt Error code Meaning Remedy

Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct process wiring
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable has been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module reads no process values in
this state.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

48 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5
5.1 Connecting

5.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams

This section contains the block diagram for the DI 8×24VDC HS module with the pin
assignments for 1, 2 and 3-wire connection in Oversampling operating mode. You may use
and combine the different wiring options for all channels.
Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP Distributed
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
The module's load group must start with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the
configuration.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 49
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.1 Connecting

Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection

The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of pin assignment for the
DI 8×24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1 and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection L+n Encoder supply, channel n

② 2-wire connection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
③ Backplane bus interface DIAG LED error or diagnostics (green, red)
④ Input electronics .0 to .7 LED channel status (green)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) PWR LED power (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available CNT LED operating mode Count (green)
with light BaseUnit)
M Ground OVS LED operating mode Oversampling (green)
DIn Input signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
Figure 5-1 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

50 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.1 Connecting

Wiring: 3-wire connection

The figure below shows an example of pin assignment for the DI 8×24VDC HS digital input
module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).

① 3-wire connection
② Color-coded labels CCxx (optional)
③ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit)
DIn Input signal, channel n
L+n Encoder supply, channel n
DC 24 V Supply voltage L+ (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
M Ground
1A ... 10A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit)

Figure 5-2 Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 51
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

5.2 Parameters/address space

5.2.1 Oversampling

Function
Oversampling is the acquisition of data in constant bus cycle segments (sub-cycles),
whereby n sub-cycles correspond to one PROFINET bus cycle.
Oversampling is useful whenever you require acquisition of data with high time resolution but
without using an extremely short PROFINET bus cycle and thus fast CPU cycles.
With the oversampling function, a PROFINET bus cycle is divided into constant bus sub-
cycles:
● Each subcycle detects an 8-bit value.
● A subcycle is at least 7.8125 μs in length.
● Subcycles are possible in steps from 2 to 32 (sampling rate).

Requirement
Oversampling is only possible when isochronous mode is set.

Configuration
You configure oversampling with the following parameter:
● Sampling rate

Note
Do not use a reduction ratio for blocks in the case of configuration with oversampling in the
runtime groups of your user program. This will ensure that the data processing in the user
program of the CPU is synchronized with the acquisition on the module.

Sampling interval
The duration of a subcycle is the sampling interval. The cycle time T (send clock) for
isochronous mode is specified in the configuration software. This time, divided by the
configured sampling rate nSample, yields the sampling interval tSample of the module.
Example calculation:

Figure 5-3 Example of calculating the sampling interval

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

52 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

Chronological sequence
The figure below shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The detected input
data of a data cycle (send clock) is copied to the interface module in the next cycle data and
are available to the CPU in the data cycle after the next one.

n Detected value from cycle n

Sub- 8 bits apiece x 32 (max.) = max. 32 bytes of input data per data cycle
cycle

Figure 5-4 Oversampling

Note
Do not use a reduction ratio for the send clock in this operating mode for blocks in your user
program (for example, OB61). This will ensure that the data processing in the user program
of the CPU is synchronized with the acquisition on the module.

5.2.2 Parameters
In distributed mode, you can use the Oversampling operating mode on the PROFINET IO in
an ET 200SP system.
In addition to configuration via the configuration software, you can also configure parameters
in RUN mode (dynamic) via the user program. When assigning parameters in the user
program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the
data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data
record for Oversampling operating mode (Page 74).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 53
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 5- 1 Configurable parameters in the Oversampling operating mode

Parameters Value range Default Reconfigu- Effective range with con-

ration in figuration software
RUN HSP0127 for STEP 7
(TIA Portal);
HSP0229 for STEP 7
Operating mode1 • DI / Oversampling — no Module
• Counting
Sampling rate • 2 values / cycle — yes Module
• 3 values / cycle
• ...
• 32 values / cycle
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable yes Channel
• Enable
Input delay • None None yes Channel
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module
left module group of the left
module
• Enable new potential group

1 When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module name.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

54 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

5.2.3 Explanation of parameters

Operating mode
At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are
operated.
● DI (Page 15) / Oversampling
● Counting (Page 30)
When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7, the operating mode is specified by selecting
the module name.

Sampling rate
Specifies the number of subcycles per isochronous data cycle.

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. If a digital input is disabled, the
module ignores its signals.

Input delay
This parameter can be used to avoid signal faults. Changes to the signal are only detected if
they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.
Isochronous configuration is only possible if there is no input delay configured for at least
one channel. In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for
reading the input data). The read time Ti refers to the channel for which no input delay time
was configured.
For input channels with longer input delays, the read time is moved accordingly. This means
individual channels can be assigned input delays, if necessary, without having a negative
impact on the possible cycle time.

Note
If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option for the input delay, you have to use shielded
cables for connection of the digital inputs.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 55
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

Potential group
Specifies whether a light-colored BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage is located on this
slot (see ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual).

5.2.4 Address space

Address space
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space. "IB x" represents the start
address of input byte x.
In the respective bit, the subcycles are counted from left to right. Up to 32 subcycles are
possible. If fewer than 32 subcycles are configured, the bits that are consequently unused
are set to 0.

Figure 5-5 Address space for oversampling

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

56 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

Note
While you are changing parameters in RUN mode, corruption of input data can occur.

5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

5.3.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED display of the DI 8×24VDC HS.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ CNT (green)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ OVS (green)

Figure 5-6 LED display

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 57
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures
for dealing with diagnostic interrupts can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms
(Page 60).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 2 DIAG LED fault/error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Process signal = 0
Off

Process signal = 1
On

CNT LED

Table 5- 4 Status display of the CNT LED

CNT LED Meaning

Counting operating mode disabled
Off

Counting operating mode enabled
On

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

58 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

OVS LED

Table 5- 5 Status display of the OVS LED

OVS LED Meaning

Oversampling operating mode disabled
Off

Oversampling operating mode enabled
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 6 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

5.3.2 Interrupts
The digital input module DI 8×24VDC HS supports diagnostics alarms in the Oversampling
mode.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit
● Parameter assignment error
● No load voltage
● Channel temporarily unavailable

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 59
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages

5.3.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostic interrupt is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module
flashes. The diagnostic interrupts can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of
the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 7 Diagnostic interrupts, their meaning and how to deal with them

Diagnostic interrupt Error code Meaning Remedy

Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct process wiring
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable has been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module reads no process values in
this state.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

60 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VDC HS

The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0/td?dl=en)

Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0

General information
Product type designation DI 8x24 V DC HS
Firmware version V1.0.2
• FW update possible Yes

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC01
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V13 SP1
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3 / -

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSD Revision 5

sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DI Yes

• Counter Yes

• Oversampling Yes

• MSI No

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 61
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0

Input current
Current consumption, max. 70 mA; without sensor supply
24 V encoder supply
• 24 V Yes

• Short-circuit protection Yes; per module, electronic

• Output current, max. 700 mA

Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.5 W
Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 45 byte

• Inputs 32 byte; 1 byte + 1 byte for QI information in DI

mode; 32 bytes in Oversampling mode; 25 bytes
in Counter mode
• Outputs 20 byte; In count mode

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + external terminals

Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 8
Source/sink input P-reading
Pulse extension Yes
• Length 2 s; 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s

Digital input functions, parameterizable

• Gate start/stop Yes

• Freely usable digital input Yes

• Counter Yes

– Number, max. 4
– Counting frequency, max. 10 kHz
– Counting width 32 bit
– Counting direction up/down Yes

• Digital input with oversampling Yes

– Number, max. 8
– Values per cycle, max. 32
– Resolution, min. 7.8125 µs

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

62 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0

Input voltage
• Type of input voltage DC

• Rated value (DC) 24 V

• for signal "0" -30 to +5V

• for signal "1" +11 to +30V

Input current
• for signal "1", typ. 6 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)

for standard inputs
– parameterizable Yes; none / 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 /
20 ms
for interrupt inputs
– parameterizable Yes
for technological functions
– parameterizable Yes
Cable length
• shielded, max. 50 m

• unshielded, max. 50 m

Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes
– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 1.5 mA
sensor), max.
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- Yes
nized up to terminal)
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 125 µs
Jitter, max. 5 µs
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

• Hardware interrupt Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

– parameterizable Yes
• Monitoring of encoder power supply Yes; Module-wise

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit Yes; Module-wise

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 63
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0

Diagnostics indication LED
• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 28 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

64 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
Parameter data records A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for
DI operating mode

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Note
Changing parameters in RUN
A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment
can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus
cycle.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You can find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 65
Parameter data records
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode

Structure of data record 128 for the complete module

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for the complete module

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

66 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Parameter data records
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Structure of the header information

Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.

Figure A-3 Module header information

Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 7. You
enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-4 Module parameter block

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 67
Parameter data records
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode

Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.

Figure A-5 Channel header information

Channel parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. You enable a
parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-6 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

68 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for

Counting operating mode

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Note
Changing parameters in RUN
A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment
can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus
cycle.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You can find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 69
Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode

Structure of data record 128 for the complete module

Figure A-7 Structure of data record 128 for the complete module

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-8 Structure of the header information

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

70 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode

Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.

Figure A-9 Module header information

Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3. You
enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-10 Module parameter block

Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.

Figure A-11 Channel header information

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 71
Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode

Channel parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3. You enable a
parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

72 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode

Figure A-12 Structure byte x to x+25 for the channels 0 to 3

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 73
Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode

A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for

Oversampling operating mode

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Note
Changing parameters in RUN
If you change parameters in RUN mode, falsifications can occur in the input data.
A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment
can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus
cycle.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You can find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

74 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode

Structure of data record 128 for the complete module

Figure A-13 Structure of data record 128 for the complete module

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 75
Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-14 Structure of the header information

Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.

Figure A-15 Module header information

Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 7. You
enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-16 Module parameter block

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

76 Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC
 Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode

Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.

Figure A-17 Channel header information

Channel parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7. You enable a
parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-18 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E35243810-AC 77
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DI 8x24VDC SRC BA
(6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E32855511-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E32855511-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0 to 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17
4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 19
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21
5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 21
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 28

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Part number
6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8×24VDC SRC BA module

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 8 digital inputs
● Source input (NPN, M reading)
● Supply voltage L+
● Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms (per channel)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1
and 3
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW ver- FW STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion version TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M0 to I&M3 and with HSP 0222 with HSP 0229 V7.0
higher
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and with HSP 0222 with HSP 0229 V7.0
higher

Accessories
The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC SRC BA module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
The input channels provide values even without connected supply voltage L+. The
characteristic type 2 is only maintained with connected supply voltage L+.

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX
terminals (1-wire and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n

② 2-wire connection 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit
only)
④ Input electronics M Ground
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Filter connection supply voltage (only when .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
light-colored BaseUnit is present)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses PWR Power LED (green)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 15
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 3-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input DI 8x24VDC SRC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-
wire connection).

① 3-wire connection
② Color identification labels CCxx (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present)
DIn Input signal, channel n
24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n
L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only)
M Ground
1 A to 10 A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

DI 8×24VDC SRC BA parameters

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28)).

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Reconfig- Scope with configuration software,

uration in e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 17
Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameter Value range Default Reconfig- Scope with configuration software,

uration in e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Input delay • None 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module (mod- group of the left
ule plugged into a module
dark-colored BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged
into light-colored Ba-
seUnit)

1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The parame-
ter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maxi-
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record
128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is
16 bytes.

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Input delay
This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are only
detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of DI 8x24VDC SRC BA

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC SRC BA V0.0 V14, SP1 or high- X X
er with HSP 0222

Address space of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DI 8x24VDC SRC BA.

Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital input module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DI 8x24VDC SRC BA.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LED displays

The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Remedial measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23).

LED DIAG

Table 5- 1 Error display of the LED DIAG

LED DIAG Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashes

LED channel status

Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED channel status

LED channel Meaning

status
Process signal = 0
Off
Process signal = 1
On

LED PWR

Table 5- 3 Status display of the LED PWR

LED PWR Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DI 8×24VDC SRC BA digital input module supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following event:
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy

Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
error for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 23
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DI 8×24VDC SRC BA

Article number 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0

General information
Product type designation DI 8x24 VDC SRC BA
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC02
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3 / -

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DI Yes

• Counter No

• Oversampling No

• MSI No

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Encoder supply
Short-circuit protection No
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.5 W

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0

Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs 1 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants
• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 8
Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes
Source/sink input m-reading
Input characteristic curve in accordance with Yes
IEC 61131, type 1
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage DC

• Rated value (DC) 24 V

• for signal "0" 30 V to -5 V (reference potential is L+)

• for signal "1" -11 V to -30 V (reference potential is L+)

Input current
• for signal "1", typ. 6 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)

for standard inputs
– parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms
(in each case + delay of 30 to 500 µs, depending
on line length)
– at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms
– at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms
– at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 200 m

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0

Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes

– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 1.5 mA

sensor), max.
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

– parameterizable Yes

• Monitoring of encoder power supply No

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit No

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Altitude during operation based on sea level
• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0

Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 28 g

Dimensional drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 27
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via
PROFIBUS-GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected
channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a
corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter
in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module.

Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855511-AC 31
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DI 8x24VDC ST
(6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E03574157-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03574157-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 to 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 19
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21
5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 28

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the SIMATIC
ET 200MP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems, e.g. diagnostics, communication, motion control,
Web server, OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815).

Manual Collection S7-1500/ET 200MP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC S7-1500
automation system and the ET 200MP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384).

SIMATIC S7-1500 comparison list for programming languages

The comparison list contains an overview of which instructions and functions you can use for
which controller families.
You can find the comparison list on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86630375).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx data

In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx
or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance
activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of
the TIA Portal.
General function overview:
● Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network.
● Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device
● Downloading of addresses (IP, subnet, gateway) to a device
● Downloading the PROFINET name (station name) to a device
● Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode
● Setting the time in a CPU to the current time of your PG/PC
● Downloading a new program to a CPU or an HMI device
● Downloading from CPU, downloading to CPU or deleting recipe data from a CPU
● Downloading from CPU or deleting data log data from a CPU
● Backup/restore of data from/to a backup file for CPUs and HMI devices
● Downloading service data from a CPU
● Reading the diagnostics buffer of a CPU
● Performing a CPU memory reset
● Resetting devices to factory settings
● Downloading a firmware update to a device
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the PROFINET
network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET network and all connected
components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit)
6ES7131-6BF01-2BA0 (number in package unit: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module DI 8×24VDC ST

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital input module with 8 inputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Sink input (PNP)
● Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms (per channel)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131,
type 1 and 3
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW ver- FW version STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 and V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
I&M0 to I&M3 higher with HSP 0222 er with HSP 0229
V7.0
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
higher with HSP 0222 er with HSP 0229
V7.0
PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 and V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
higher with HSP 0222 er with HSP 0229
V7.0
Value status FS01 V0.0.0 and V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
higher with HSP 0222 er with HSP 0229
V7.0

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 13
Wiring up 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC ST module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1-wire and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n

② 2-wire connection 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit
only)
④ Input electronics M Ground
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
colored BaseUnit is present)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses PWR Power LED (green)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 15
Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 3-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input DI 8x24VDC ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire
connection).

① 3-wire connection
② Color identification labels CCxx (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present)
DIn Input signal, channel n
L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only)
M Ground
1 A to 10 A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)

Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for DI 8x24VDC ST

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Settable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default Configuration Scope with configuration software,

in RUN e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 2
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
wire break1
• Enable
Channel enabled • Disable Enable yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 17
Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameters Value range Default Configuration Scope with configuration software,

in RUN e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 2
Input delay • none 3.2 ms yes Channel Module
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Potential group • Use potential group Use potential no Module Module
of the left module group of the left
(module plugged into module
a dark-colored Ba-
seUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module
plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 If you use a simple switch, you need to connect a resistor in parallel so that the wire break diagnostics is enabled in the
open state (sensor resistance for the wire break diagnostics: 25 kΩ to 45 kΩ).
2 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 16 bytes.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of the parameters

4.2 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics no supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs.

Diagnostics wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be
measured at the relevant input.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled.

Input delay
This parameter can be used to avoid signal faults. Changes to the signal are only detected if
they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of DI 8x24VDC ST

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or high- X X
er with HSP 0222
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC ST V0.0, QI V14, SP1 or high- X ---
er with HSP 0222

Evaluating the value status

An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the digital module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DI 8×24VDC ST with
value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available
if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-1 Address space of the DI 8×24VDC ST with value status

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing
with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned
on
Module diagnostics is available
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Process signal = 0
off

Process signal = 1
on

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
off

Supply voltage L+ present
on

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DI 8×24VDC ST digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupt
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events:
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy

Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct the process wiring
Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify
the wiring, for example, using cables with
larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and sen- Connect the cable
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect a resistor of 25 kilohms to
45 kilohms to the encoder contacts
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 23
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DI 8×24VDC ST

Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0

General information
Product type designation DI 8x24 VDC ST
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC01
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3 or higher

sion

• PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DI Yes

• Counter No

• Oversampling No

• MSI No

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0

Input current
Current consumption, max. 50 mA; All channels are supplied from the en-
coder supply
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 8
Output voltage encoder supply, min. 19.2 V
Short-circuit protection Yes; per module
24 V encoder supply
• 24 V Yes

• Short-circuit protection Yes

Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1 W; 24 V, 8 inputs supplied via encoder supply
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Submodules
• Number of configurable submodules, max. 4

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 8
Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes
Source/sink input P-reading
Input characteristic curve in accordance with Yes
IEC 61131, type 3
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage DC

• Rated value (DC) 24 V

• for signal "0" -30 to +5V

• for signal "1" +11 to +30V

Input current
• for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
for standard inputs
– parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms
(in each case + delay of 30 to 500 µs, depending
on line length)
– at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms
– at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms
– at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes

– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 1.5 mA

sensor), max.
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

– parameterizable Yes

• Monitoring of encoder power supply Yes; Module-by-module, optional protective cir-

cuit for preventing wire-break diagnostics in the
case of simple encoder contacts: 25 kOhm to 45
kOhm
• Wire-break Yes; Module-wise

• Short-circuit Yes; Module-wise

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation based on sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 28 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 27
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via
PROFIBUS-GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected
channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter
in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module.

Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574157-AE 31
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Connecting 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DI 16x24VDC ST
(6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E03573442-AF
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03573442-AF Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 to 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16
4.2 Declaration of parameters ...................................................................................................... 18
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19
5 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 21
5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23
5.3 Diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 23
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 28

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit)
6ES7131-6BH01-2BA0 (number in package unit: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module DI 16×24VDC ST

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital input module with 16 inputs
● Sink input, (PNP, P-reading)
● Supply voltage L+
● Configurable input delay 0.05 to 20 ms (per channel)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131,
type 3
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function version sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M0 to I&M3 and higher HSP 0222 with HSP 0229
V7.0
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and higher HSP 0222 with HSP 0229
V7.0
Value status FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and higher HSP 0222 with HSP 0229
V7.0

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 13
Connecting 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 16x24VDC ST module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire connection.
Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP distributed
I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
Make sure that you only use digital modules with BaseUnit type A0 during commissioning.

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Connecting
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 1-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n

② Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored
BaseUnit)
③ Input electronics M Ground
④ Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- .0 to .15 Channel status LED (green)
colored BaseUnit is present)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses PWR Power LED (green)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 15
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for DI 16x24VDC ST

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment
and structure of parameter data record (Page 28).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration software,

reassignment e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 2
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
wire break1
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration software,

reassignment e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 2
Input delay • None 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module (mod- group of the left
ule plugged into a module
dark-colored Ba-
seUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module
plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 If you use a floating switch, you need to connect a resistor in parallel so that the wire break diagnostics is enabled in the
open state (sensor resistance for the wire break diagnostics: 25 kΩ to 45 kΩ).
2 Due to the limited number of parameters with a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station for a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 32 bytes.

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 17
Parameters/address space
4.2 Declaration of parameters

4.2 Declaration of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling diagnostics if the line to the encoder is interrupted.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Input delay
This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are only
detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
ET 200SP manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622)

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image input.

Configuration options of DI 16x24VDC ST

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 16-channel without value DI 16x24VDC ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or high- X X
status er with HSP 0222
1 x 16-channel with value status DI 16x24VDC ST V0.0, QI V14, SP1 or high- X ---
er with HSP 0222

Evaluating the value status

An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value
status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 15 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They
provide information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module.
If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DI 16x24VDC ST
with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only
available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-1 Address space of the DI 16×24VDC ST with value status

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DI 16x24VDC ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 21
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostic messages (Page 23).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Process signal = 0
Off

Process signal = 1
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Missing supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DI 16×24VDC ST digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Wire break
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing

5.3 Diagnostic messages

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify
the wiring, for example, use cables with
larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and sen- Connect the cable
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect a resistor of between 25 and
45 kOhms to the encoder contacts
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage miss- 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
ing seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 23
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DI 16×24VDC ST

Article number 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0

General information
Product type designation DI 16x24 VDC ST
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC00
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3

sion

• PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DI Yes

• Counter No

• Oversampling No

• MSI No

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0

Input current
Current consumption, max. 90 mA
24 V encoder supply
• 24 V No

Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.7 W
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs 2 byte; + 2 bytes for QI information

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Submodules
• Number of configurable submodules, max. 4

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 16
Digital inputs, parameterizable Yes
Source/sink input P-reading
Input characteristic curve in accordance with Yes
IEC 61131, type 3
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage DC

• Rated value (DC) 24 V

• for signal "0" -30 to +5V

• for signal "1" +11 to +30V

Input current
• for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
for standard inputs
– parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms
(in each case + delay of 30 to 500 µs, depending
on line length)
– at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms
– at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms
– at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes

– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 1.5 mA

sensor), max.
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

– parameterizable Yes

• Monitoring of encoder power supply No

• Wire-break Yes; Module-by-module, optional protective cir-

cuit for preventing wire-break diagnostics in the
case of simple encoder contacts: 25 kOhm to 45
kOhm
• Short-circuit No

• Group error Yes

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0

Diagnostics indication LED
• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation based on sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 28 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 27
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected
channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 15.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 15

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter
in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module.

Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03573442-AF 31
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual

Edition 02/2014

Answers for industry.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module ___________________
Preface

(6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) ___________________
Guide to documentation 1

2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
DI 8xNAMUR HF ___________________
Parameters/address space 4
digital input module
(6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) ___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

02/2014
A5E03894478-01
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03894478-01 Copyright © Siemens AG 2014.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 02/2014 Technical data subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally
relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 3
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 5
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 7
3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Pin assignment .............................................................................................................................. 9
3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................. 10
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 11
4.2 Explanation of parameters .......................................................................................................... 13
4.3 Pulse stretching ........................................................................................................................... 16
4.4 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 18
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 19
5.1 Status and fault displays ............................................................................................................. 19
5.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 22
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ...................................................................................................................... 24
5.4 Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type ........................................................................ 25
5.5 Chatter monitoring ....................................................................................................................... 26
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 29
6.1 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................. 29
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 32
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD files ......................................................................... 32
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ................................................. 33

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

4 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Guide to documentation 1
Introduction
This modular documentation of the SIMATIC products covers diverse topics concerning your
automation system.
The complete documentation for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system consists of a system
manual, function manuals and product manuals.
The STEP 7 information system (online help) also supports you during the configuration and
programming of your automation system.

Overview of documentation for digital input module DI 8×NAMUR HF

The following table shows additional documentation that you need for using the
DI 8×NAMUR HF digital input module.

Table 1- 1 Documentation for the DI 8×NAMUR HF digital input module

Topic Documentation Key contents

System description System manual ET 200SP distributed • Application planning
I/O system
• Installation
(http://support.automation.siemens.co
m/WW/view/en/58649293) • Wiring
• Commissioning
Designing interference- Function manual Designing • Basics
free controllers interference-free controllers
• Electromagnetic compatibility
(http://support.automation.siemens.co
m/WW/view/en/59193566) • Lightning protection
System diagnostics Function manual • Overview
Diagnostics
• Diagnostics evaluation of
(http://support.automation.siemens.co
m/WW/view/en/59192926) hardware/software

BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits Technical specifications

(http://support.automation.siemens.co
m/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)
Amendments and special ET 200SP Product information Current information not yet
features of the (http://support.automation.siemens.co documented in the system
ET 200SP I/O system m/WW/view/en/73021864) manuals, function manuals, or
product manuals.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 5
Guide to documentation

SIMATIC manuals
All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available to download free of charge on the
Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

6 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Order number
6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0

View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8×NAMUR HF module

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 7
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 8 digital inputs each with a value status (quality information)
● 8.2 VDC sensor supply for individual connection and disconnection (PROFIenergy)
● Selectable diagnostics (per channel)
● Suitable for connecting NAMUR sensors and connected and unconnected mechanical
contacts
The module supports the following technology functions:
● Pulse stretching
● Chatter monitoring
● Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification data I&M0 to I&M3
● Reconfiguration in RUN
You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.

Accessories
The following accessories can be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connection
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

See also
ET 200SP Product information
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864)

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

8 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment

General pin assignment

Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for DI 8×NAMUR HF

Pin assignment for DI 8×NAMUR HF (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Terminal Assign- Terminal Assign- Description BaseUnit1 Color identification label
ment ment (terminals 1 to 16)
1 DI0 2 DI1 • DIn: Input signal, channel n A0
3 DI2 4 DI3 • USn: Sensor supply, channel n
5 DI4 6 DI5
7 DI6 8 DI7
9 US0 10 US1
11 US2 12 US3
CC01
13 US4 14 US5
6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0
15 US6 16 US7
L+ 24 VDC M M
The figures below show the connections for input signal DI0 for all sensor types.
NAMUR sensors / IEC 60947-5-6 NAMUR changeover contacts / Single contact connected with 10 kΩ
sensors IEC 60947-5-6 changeover contacts (mechanical normally open contact)

Changeover contact connected with Single contact, unconnected Changeover contact, unconnected
10 kΩ (mechanical changeover (mechanical normally open contact with (mechanical changeover contact)
contact) single contact)

1 BaseUnit types that can be used are identified by the last two digits of the order number. See also "ET 200SP
distributed I/O system" system manual.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 9
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram

Note
The first BaseUnit of a station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also
during the configuration.

Firmware update
When updating the firmware, the L+ supply voltage must be applied to the module at the
start and during the firmware update.

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

3.2 Block diagram

Block diagram

Figure 3-1 Block diagram DI 8×NAMUR HF

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

10 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

DI 8xNAMUR HF parameters
The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable
parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible:
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter assignment
and structure of parameter data record (Page 33)).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default Changing Effective range with configuration

parameter software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA-Portal)
settings in RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Missing supply
• Enable
voltage L+
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Short-circuit to
• Enable
ground
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Wire break
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Changeover error
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
Chatter error
• Enable
Chatter monitoring: • 0.5 s 0.5 s Yes Channel -
Monitoring window
• 1 s to 100 s (can be
set in 1 s-increments)
Chatter monitoring: • Deactivated Deactivated Yes Channel -
Number of signal
• 2 to 32
changes

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 11
Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameters Value range Default Changing Effective range with configuration

parameter software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA-Portal)
settings in RUN
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Hardware interrupts • Deactivated Deactivated Yes Channel -
• Rising edge
• Falling edge
• Falling and rising
edge
Sensor type • Channel deactivated NAMUR Yes Channel Channel
sensor
• NAMUR sensor
• Single contact,
unconnected
• Single contact,
connected with 10 kΩ
• NAMUR changeover
contact
• Changeover contact,
unconnected
• Changeover contact,
connected with 10 kΩ
Pulse stretching • None None Yes Channel -
• 0.5 s
• 1s
• 2s
Inverted • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module group of the
left module
• Enable new potential
group

Changing parameter settings and effects on the technology functions

Reconfiguring a technology function resets its responses. Reconfiguring one technology
function has no effect on other technology functions. Exception: Signal inversion and chatter
monitoring, because an additional edge change is generated when signal inversion is
disabled/enabled.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

12 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

Technology functions
All technology functions, such as
● Pulse stretching
● Chatter monitoring
● Changeover errors
● Hardware interrupts
are executed only when there is an error-free signal (QI = 1). In other words, there is no
diagnostics information on the channel (see also section Address space (Page 18)).

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+

The diagnostics alarm is enabled for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+.
Tip: To avoid a diagnostics overload, you should only enable "Diagnostics: Missing supply
voltage" for an active channel.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

The diagnostics alarm is enabled if there is a short-circuit of the sensor supply to ground.
"Short-circuit to ground" diagnostics is available with the following sensor setting:
● NAMUR sensor
● NAMUR changeover contact

Diagnostics: Wire break

The diagnostics alarm is enabled if the line to the sensor is interrupted.
"Wire break" diagnostics is available with the following sensor setting:
● NAMUR sensor
● Single contact with 10 kΩ
● NAMUR changeover contact
● Changeover contact with 10 kΩ

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 13
Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: Changeover error

The diagnostics alarm is enabled when a changeover error occurs.
"Changeover error" diagnostics is available with the following sensor setting:
● NAMUR changeover contact
● Changeover contact, unconnected
● Changeover contact with 10 kΩ

Diagnostics: Chatter error

The diagnostics alarm is enabled when a chatter error occurs.
Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports
signal changes that are unexpected in process engineering, for example when an input
signal fluctuates too often between "0" and "1". If signal characteristics like these occur, it is
a sign that the sensors are faulty or that there are instabilities from a process engineering
viewpoint.

Chatter monitoring: Monitoring window

Chatter monitoring: Setting of the monitoring window
Each input channel has a configurable monitoring window. The monitoring window is started
the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal changes within the monitoring
window more often than the configured number of signal changes, this is recognized as a
chatter error. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the window is
restarted at the next signal change.

Chatter monitoring: Number of signal changes

Chatter monitoring: Setting of the signal change
Settings for the tolerated number of signal changes during chatter monitoring within the
monitoring window.
Number of signal changes = 0 deactivates the chatter monitoring function.

Hardware interrupts
Specifies whether the rising or falling edge or both edges trigger a hardware interrupt.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

Sensor type
Specifies which sensor type is connected (see Table 3-1 Pin assignment for
DI 8×NAMUR HF (Page 9)).
For the following sensor types
● NAMUR changeover contact
● Changeover contact, unconnected
● Changeover contact with 10 kΩ
the following applies: The normally open contact channel must be set according to the
sensor type. The normally closed contact channel must be deactivated.
If "Channel deactivated" is shown, this means that the channel is not activated.

Pulse stretching
Sets whether and for how long pulse stretching is to take place.
Pulse stretching is a function for changing a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is
extended to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the
configured length, then the pulse will not be changed.

Inverted
Specifies whether or not the input signal is to be inverted.
Inversion is only possible with the following sensor types:
● NAMUR sensor
● Single contact, unconnected
● Single contact with 10 kΩ

Potential group
Specifies that a BaseUnit with an incoming supply voltage is located in this slot (see
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual).

See also
Pin assignment (Page 9)
Pulse stretching (Page 16)
Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type (Page 25)

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 15
Parameters/address space
4.3 Pulse stretching

4.3 Pulse stretching

Description
Pulse stretching is a function for changing a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is
extended to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the
configured length, then the pulse will not be changed.
The pulse-stretched signal is the input signal for the hardware interrupt.

Principle of pulse stretching

The following figure uses examples to show if and how input pulses are changed.

Figure 4-1 Principle of pulse stretching

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Pulse stretching

Note
If you set pulse stretching for an input channel, this will also affect the chatter monitoring that
is enabled for this channel. The "pulse-stretched" signal is the input signal for the chatter
monitoring. You should therefore match the parameter settings for pulse stretching and
chatter monitoring to one another. By selecting the appropriate values for the parameters
you can adjust the functions optimally to your process.

Note
Pulse stretching in progress is reset in the event of an error in the value status (QI = 0, e.g.
wire break).

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 17
Parameters/address space
4.4 Address space

4.4 Address space

Configuration options of the DI 8×NAMUR HF

Configuration with value status:
● DI 8×NAMUR HF QI

Evaluating the value status

As a result of configuration with value status (QI), an additional byte is allocated in the input
address space. Each bit in this byte is assigned to a channel and returns information about
the validity of the digital value.
Deactivated channels or channels that are not operating correctly return a value status
of QI = 0.
With changeover contacts, the value status of a normally closed contact channel is always
QI = 0. The validity of the signal must be checked on the normally open contact channel.

Address space of the digital input module DI 8×NAMUR HF

The following figure shows the assignment of address space for the DI 8×NAMUR HF with
value status (Quality Information (QI)).

Figure 4-2 Address space of the DI 8×NAMUR HF digital input module with value status

Technology functions
All technology functions, such as
● Pulse stretching
● Chatter monitoring
● Changeover error
● Hardware interrupt
require a valid input signal that returns QI = 1 (no diagnostics detected). Otherwise, they will
not run.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

18 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and fault displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and fault displays) of the DI 8×NAMUR HF.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ Channel fault (red)
④ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and fault displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the status and fault displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in chapter Diagnostics alarms (Page 24).

LED DIAG

Table 5- 1 LED DIAG fault display

LED DIAG Meaning

Supply voltage of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module not ready for operation (no parameters or invalid parameters assigned)
Flashing
Module configured and no module diagnostics
On
Module configured and module diagnostics
Flashing

LED channel status/channel fault

The channel status LED shows the signal state of the user data of an input. If inversion is
enabled, the channel status LED shows the inverted status of the signal applied to the
terminal.
If there is a diagnostics event on the channel, the channel status LED is always off if
diagnostics is enabled and therefore does not indicate the signal state of the user data of the
input.

Table 5- 2 Channel status/channel fault LED status and fault display

LED Meaning
Channel status Channel fault
Input returns "0" signal and no channel diagnostics or channel
Off Off deactivated

Input returns "1" signal and no channel diagnostics

On Off
Channel activated and channel diagnostics
Off On
Not permitted (fault)
On On

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and fault displays

LED PWR

Table 5- 3 LED PWR status display

LED PWR Meaning

Supply voltage L+ is missing, is too low or polarity reversed
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
Digital input module DI 8×NAMUR HF supports the following diagnostics and hardware
interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupt
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit to ground
● Wire break
● Supply voltage missing
● Changeover error
● Chatter error

Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller

The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events:
● Upon a rising edge (signal change from 0 to 1)
● Upon a falling edge (signal change from 1 to 0)
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs run automatically in the CPU of the IO controller.
You will find detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block
with the "RALRM" instruction (read additional interrupt info) and in the STEP 7 online help.
The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double
word 8 in local data.

Figure 5-2 Organization block start information

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

22 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Structure of the additional interrupt information

Table 5- 4 Structure of USI = W#16#0001

Data block name Contents Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0001 Additional interrupt information for hardware 2
(User Structure Identifier) interrupts of the I/O module
The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows.
Channel B#16#00 to B#16#07 Channel 0 to 7 of the I/O module 1
The event that triggered the hardware interrupt follows.
Event B#16#01 Rising edge 1
B#16#02 Falling edge

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 23
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the LED DIAG flashes on the
module. Diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the fault codes with the user program.

Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Fault code Meaning Remedy

Short-circuit (NAMUR 1H Short-circuit in the signal line to the sensor Correct the process wiring
changeover contact and Sensor defective Replace the sensor
NAMUR sensor only)
Wrong sensor type configured Correct the parameter assignment
Tip: Check the normally
open and normally Load impedance too low Use a sensor with a higher
closed contact channels impedance
of the NAMUR
changeover contact.
Wire break (only NAMUR 6H Signal line to a sensor interrupted Correct the process wiring
changeover contact, Sensor defective Replace the sensor
NAMUR sensor, sensor
connected with 10 kΩ Wrong sensor type configured Correct the parameter assignment
and single contact Load impedance too high Use a different sensor type or
connected with 10 kΩ) modify the wiring, for example, using
Tip: Check the normally cables with a larger cross-section
open and normally Channel not connected (open) Disable diagnostics, connect sensor
closed contact channels contacts
of the NAMUR
changeover contact
Fault 9H Sensor supply defective Replace the module
Hardware failure
No load voltage 11H Supply voltage L+ missing or too low Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
Check BaseUnit type
External fault 1AH Changeover error: Check process wiring, change
(changeover sensors Validity check between normally closed and sensor
only) normally open contact channel negative
Fault 1 in 1DH Chatter error: Verify the chatter monitoring
actuator/sensor = signal Signal chatters: too many signal changes parameters
chatters within the monitoring window Check process wiring, if necessary
If no further chattering of the input signal is change sensor
detected within three monitoring windows,
an outgoing diagnostics alarm is triggered.
The status of the value of the current signal
in the process image is set to "valid".
Channel/component 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or Connect the supply voltage
temporarily unavailable was canceled while running Restart the firmware update

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

24 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.4 Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type

5.4 Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type

Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type

With the changeover error diagnostics, the switchover between two input channels is
checked. If there is a signal change in a changeover contact channel and there is no signal
change at the other contact changeover channel after the tolerated switchover time, the
diagnostics module returns a changeover error.
The tolerated switchover time between the two channels is set to the fixed value of 300 ms.
Changeover sensors are always assigned to two adjacent channels: The normally open
contact channel should be set in accordance with the sensor type to channel 0, 2, 4, 6, and
the respective corresponding normally closed contact channel 1, 3, 5, 7 deactivated.

Principle of changeover contact diagnostics

If the digital inputs of a channel group are configured as "changeover contacts", the module
for this channel group carries out diagnostics for the changeover contact sensor type.
If the validity check is negative, the following applies:
● The module identifies the value status of the normally open contact channel as "invalid"
(QI = "0"),
● The module creates a diagnostics entry for the normally open contact channel and
● A diagnostics interrupt is triggered if changeover error diagnostics is enabled.
The digital input signal and the value status are only updated for the normally open contact
channel (channels 0, 2, 4, 6). The digital input signal is 0 and the value status is "invalid
(QI = "0") for the normally closed contact channel (channels 1, 3, 5, 7). This channel is only
used for a validity check of the sensor.
Please note the following special features for changeover contact diagnostics:
● If the normally open and normally closed contact signals are not plausible after 300 ms, a
changeover error is output as diagnostics information.
● If there is already a fault (QI = 0, e.g. a wire break), the module will no longer perform
diagnostics for changeover errors.
● There are different diagnostics options depending on the type of changeover contact
(Dependencies when configuring with GSD files (Page 32)). Depending on the sensor
type, a changeover error can have different causes.
– In the case of connected changeover contacts, a changeover error may also be the
result of a short-circuit (sensor is not defective; there is a short-circuit).
– In the case of unconnected changeover contacts, a changeover error may also be the
result of a wire break.
– If a wire break or short-circuit can be detected with the particular sensor type but its
diagnostics is not enabled, instead of the wire break or short-circuit diagnostics
information, the changeover error diagnostics information is displayed if this is
enabled.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 25
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.5 Chatter monitoring

Tip: Data records 0 to 7 and changeover sensor

Using the data records 1, 3, 5 and 7, you can configure a changeover sensor on an even
channel (normally closed contact channel).
The corresponding normally open contact channel can be configured with the data records 0,
2, 4 and 6.
An even changeover contact channel must be followed by an odd, deactivated channel.
Otherwise:
● you receive a parameter assignment error or
● the parameter assignment is rejected and the current parameter assignment retained.
Remedy: First, send data records 1, 3, 5 and 7 with deactivated, and then send data records
0, 2, 4 and 6 with changeover contact.

5.5 Chatter monitoring

Description
Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports
signal changes that are unexpected in process engineering, for example when an input
signal fluctuates too often between "0" and "1". This period is known as the "monitoring
window". If signal characteristics like these occur, it is a sign that the sensors are faulty or
that there are instabilities from a process engineering viewpoint.

Activating chatter monitoring

You activate chatter monitoring by specifying a permitted number of input signal changes
between "0" and "1" within the monitoring window. The number 0 deactivates the chatter
monitoring function.
A chatter error detected by the chatter monitoring has a direct effect on the value status (QI).

Detecting a chatter error

Each input channel has a monitoring window that has been assigned parameters. The
monitoring window is started the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal
changes within the monitoring window more often than the configured number of signal
changes, this is recognized as a chatter error. If no chatter error is detected within the
monitoring window, the window is restarted at the next signal change.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

26 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.5 Chatter monitoring

Reporting a chatter error

If a chatter error occurs, the current signal status is entered in the process image and the
value status of the signal is set to "invalid" (QI = 0). If "Chatter error" diagnostics is enabled,
"Chatter error" is also entered as diagnostic information, triggering an incoming diagnostics
interrupt.
You can evaluate and process the value status (QI) and the diagnostics information in the
user program.

Resetting a chatter error

If no further chattering of the input signal is detected within three monitoring windows, an
outgoing diagnostics interrupt is triggered. The status of the value of the current signal in the
process image is set to "valid".

Note
Active chatter monitoring is reset if there is an error in the input signal (value status QI =0 ).

Principle
The following figure gives you another graphic illustration of the principle of chatter
monitoring.

Figure 5-3 The principle of chatter monitoring

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 27
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.5 Chatter monitoring

Chatter monitoring and "settling time" if a chatter error occurs

Does the monitoring time in the event of a fault restart as three monitoring windows if the
signal continues to change?

The signal changes... Result

once more often than set in the "Number of signal changes". Monitoring time is restarted.
less often than set in the "Number of signal changes". The monitoring time is not started again, in other words, the
monitoring time runs once after a chatter error is detected.
Even a change just before the time is up is tolerated.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

28 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

DI 8×NAMUR HF technical specifications

6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0
Product type designation DI 8xNAMUR HF
General information
Usable BaseUnits BU type A0
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 / V13
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / V5.5 SP4
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 20.4 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Sensor supply
Number of outputs 8
Output current
Short-circuit protection Yes
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.5 W
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
Digital inputs, configurable Yes
Type NAMUR
Pulse stretching Yes; 0.5 s, 1 s, 2 s
Edge evaluation Yes, rising edge, falling edge, edge change
Signal change chatter Yes, 2 to 32 signal changes
Chatter monitoring window Yes, 0.5 s, 1 s to 100 s in 1 s increments

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 29
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0
Input voltage
Type of input voltage DC
Rated value, DC 8.2 V
Input current
For 10 k connected contact
• For signal "0" 0.35 mA to 1.2 mA

• For signal "1" 2.1 to 7 mA

For unconnected contact

• For signal "0", max. (permissible quiescent 0.5 mA
current)

• For signal "1" typ. 8 mA

For NAMUR sensors

• For signal "0" 0.35 mA to 1.2 mA

• For signal "1" 2.1 to 7 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)

Tolerated switchover time for changeover contacts 300 ms
For NAMUR inputs
• with "0" to "1", max. 12 ms

• with "1" to "0", max. 12 ms

Cable length
Cable length shielded, max. 200 m
Sensors
Connectable sensors
NAMUR sensor / changeover contact according to Yes
EN 60947
Single contact / changeover contact unconnected Yes
Single contact / changeover contact connected Yes
with 10 kΩ
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt Yes; channel-based
Hardware interrupt Yes, selectable, channels 0 to 7
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics information can be read Yes
Monitoring of supply voltage Yes
Wire break Yes
Short-circuit Yes
Group error Yes

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

30 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0
Diagnostics indicator LED
Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation
Electrical isolation of channels
Between channels No
Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and the supply voltage of Yes
the electronics
Permissible potential difference
Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 VDC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 32 g

NAMUR sensors and connected contacts

Monitoring for short-circuit and wire break only for NAMUR sensors and connected contacts.
The response ranges of the diagnostics correspond to IEC 60947-5-6.

Dimension drawing
See manual BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 31
Parameter data record A
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD files
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other, see the tables below.

Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the diagnostics information and its dependencies on the sensor types for
PROFINET.

Sensor type Diagnostics information

Missing Short-circuit Wire break Chatter Changeover Inversion
supply to ground error error
voltage L+
NAMUR sensor × × × × - ×
Single contact, unconnected × - - × - ×
Single contact, connected with 10 kΩ × - × × - ×
NAMUR changeover contact × × × × × -
Changeover contact, unconnected × - - × × -
Changeover contact, connected with × - × × × -
10 kΩ

Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the diagnostics information and its dependencies on the sensor types for
PROFIBUS.

Sensor type Diagnostics information

Missing Short-circuit Wire break Changeover Inversion
supply to ground error
voltage L+
NAMUR sensor × × × - ×
Single contact, unconnected × - - - ×
Single contact, connected with 10 kΩ × - × - ×
NAMUR changeover contact × × × × -
Changeover contact, unconnected × - - × -
Changeover contact, connected with 10 kΩ × - × × -

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 32
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

The data record 128 of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
change the parameter assignment of the module in your user program regardless of its
configuration. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you
configured it using PROFIBUS GSD.
With data records 0 to 7, you can configure the individual channels.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN (e.g. switch diagnostics on can be
changed in RUN).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128 or data records 0 to 7. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU,
which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.
If you reconfigure a module and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these
diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing".

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding
error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 33
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128 and data records 0 to 7

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 and data records 0 to 7

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 DR 128 or DR 0 to 7: Bytes 0 and 1; header information

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

34 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for a channel. This structure also
applies to channels 0 to 7.

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 35
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Figure A-3 DR 128 or DR 0 to 7: Byte x to x+5: Structure for channels 0 to 7

See also
Parameters (Page 11)

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

36 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Guide to documentation 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DI 4x120..230VAC ST
(6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E32043398-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E32043398-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1 to 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17
4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 17
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 18
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 19
5.1 Status and fault displays ........................................................................................................ 19
5.2 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 21
5.3 Load voltage status ................................................................................................................ 21
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 22
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 26
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 26

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
Guide to documentation 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system and the SIMATIC
ET 200MP distributed I/O system is arranged into three areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 7
Guide to documentation

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
S7-1500 and ET 200MP systems, e.g. diagnostics, communication, motion control, Web
server, OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815).

Manual Collection S7-1500/ET 200MP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC S7-1500
automation system and the ET 200MP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384).

SIMATIC S7-1500 comparison list for programming languages

The comparison list contains an overview of which instructions and functions you can use for
which controller families.
You can find the comparison list on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86630375).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
 Guide to documentation

"mySupport" - CAx data

In the CAx data area in "mySupport", you can access the current product data for your CAx
or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx data on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 9
Guide to documentation

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance
activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of
the TIA Portal.
General function overview:
● Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network.
● Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device
● Downloading of addresses (IP, subnet, gateway) to a device
● Downloading the PROFINET name (station name) to a device
● Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode
● Setting the time in a CPU to the current time of your PG/PC
● Downloading a new program to a CPU or an HMI device
● Downloading from CPU, downloading to CPU or deleting recipe data from a CPU
● Downloading from CPU or deleting data log data from a CPU
● Backup/restore of data from/to a backup file for CPUs and HMI devices
● Downloading service data from a CPU
● Reading the diagnostics buffer of a CPU
● Performing a CPU memory reset
● Resetting devices to factory settings
● Downloading a firmware update to a device
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the PROFINET
network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET network and all connected
components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
 Guide to documentation

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Order number
6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module DI 4x120..230VAC ST

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 4 digital inputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131,
type 3
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW version FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M0 to I&M3 and with with HSP 0229 V7.0
higher HSP 0222
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and with with HSP 0229 V7.0
higher HSP 0222
Value status FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and with with HSP 0229 V7.0
higher HSP 0222

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O
System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 4x120..230VAC ST module with the
terminal assignments for a 2-wire, 3-wire and 4-wire connection.
Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

NOTICE
Hazardous voltage, risk of fatal or serious injury
Always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before commencing
work.

Note
Limiting overvoltage
You must ensure overvoltage is limited to 1 kV for the encoder supply.

Note
Power limitation
To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping
current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 2-wire and 3-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1 without
AUX terminals (2-wire and 3-wire connection).

① 2-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n

② 3-wire connection L1 Encoder supply, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface 1L / 2L Infeed 120 ... 230 V AC
④ Input electronics 1N / 2N N-conductor connection
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses PWR Power LED (green)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
.0 to .3 Channel status LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 15
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 4-wire connection:

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input DI 4x120..230VAC ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1 with AUX terminals
(4-wire connection).

① 4-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n

② Backplane bus interface L1 Encoder supply, channel n
③ Input electronics 1L / 2L Infeed 120 ... 230 V AC
④ Color identification label CCxx (optional) 1N / 2N N-conductor connection
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
.0 to .3 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 4-wire connection of encoders.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters of the DI 4x120..230VAC ST

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to
transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 26)).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default Configuration in Scope with configuration software,

RUN e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 17
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of DI 4x120..230VAC ST

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:
Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 4-channel without value DI 4x120..230VAC ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or high- X X
status er with HSP 0222
1 x 4-channel with value status DI 4x120..230VAC ST V14, SP1 or high- X ---
V0.0, QI er with HSP 0222

Evaluating the value status

An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value
status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They
provide information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space of the digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
DI 4x120..230VAC ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
value status are only available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-1 Address space of the DI 4x120..230VAC ST digital input module with value status

Note
Value status
The value status is independent of the connected supply voltage 120 ... 230 V AC.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and fault displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and fault displays) of the
DI 4x120..230VAC ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

19 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and fault displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and fault displays.

LED DIAG

Table 5- 1 LED DIAG fault display

LED DIAG Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashing
Module parameters assigned
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashing

LED channel status

Table 5- 2 Channel status LED status and fault display

LED channel Meaning

status
Process signal = 0
Off

Process signal = 1
On

LED PWR

Table 5- 3 LED PWR status display

LED PWR Meaning

Supply voltage L+ missing
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Diagnostics alarms

5.2 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostic alarm, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can analyze the error code with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostic alarm, meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
error for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.

5.3 Load voltage status

Load voltage status

The firmware of the module cannot detect the status of the load voltage.
If the "Load voltage status" function tied to the server module is used, a "1" is always
displayed in the status bit for a slot with the DI 4×120..230VAC ST. Even when the load
voltage is not applied.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 21
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

DI 4×120..230VAC ST technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1

General information
Product type designation DI 4x120 … 230 V AC ST
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type B1

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC41
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DI Yes

• Counter No

• Oversampling No

• MSI No

Supply voltage
Rated value (AC) 230 V
Reverse polarity protection No
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 10 mA

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 22
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1

Encoder supply
Number of outputs 4
Short-circuit protection No; when using BU type B1, a fuse with 10 A
tripping current must be provided
Output current
• up to 60 °C, max. 10 A

Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1 W; Active power, load voltage 230 V, all inputs
connected with 230 V, 50 Hz
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type B1

• 2-wire connection BU type B1

• 3-wire connection BU type B1

• 4-wire connection BU type B1 + potential distributor module

Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 4
Input characteristic curve in accordance with Yes
IEC 61131, type 3
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage 120/230V AC (47 Hz to 63 Hz)

• Rated value (AC) 230 V

• for signal "0" 0V AC to 40V AC

• for signal "1" 74 V AC to 264 V AC

Input current
• for signal "1", typ. 10.8 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)

for standard inputs
– parameterizable No
– at "0" to "1", min. 1.5 ms
– at "0" to "1", max. 4 ms
– at "1" to "0", min. 10 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 10 ms

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 23
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1

Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm No

• Hardware interrupt No

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage No

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit No

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 2 545 V DC/2 s (routine test)
Altitude during operation based on sea level
• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1

Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 36 g

Dimensional drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 25
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module parameters can be reassigned in RUN without affecting the other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a
corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 26
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC 27
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter
in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module.

Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32043398-AC
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Guide to documentation 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module Parameter
___________________
assignment/addressing 4
DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA
(6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

07/2018
A5E42285997-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E42285997-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 06/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified
electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable
regulations in your country.

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

4 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 13
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................13
4 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 15
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15
4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 18
5.1 Status and fault displays .........................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................20
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 21
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 24
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................24

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 5
Guide to documentation 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

6 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
 Guide to documentation

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 7
Guide to documentation

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

8 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
 Guide to documentation

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the
TIA Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 9
Guide to documentation

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

10 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑧ Replaceable fuse

② LED for diagnostics ⑨ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑩ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑪ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑫ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑬ Article number
⑦ Function class

Figure 2-1 View of the module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Note
Replace the fuse
1. Remove the module from the station.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the slotted top face of the fuse holder.
3. Lift out the fuse holder.
4. Replace the fuse.
5. Slide the fuse holder back into the module.

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 8 digital inputs
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131,
type 1
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW version FW version STEP 7 GSD file

Function TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 and as of V15 with as of V5.5 SP3 X X
I&M0 to I&M3 higher HSP 0254 with HSP 0229
V8.0
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 and as of V15 with as of V5.5 SP3 X X
higher HSP 0254 with HSP 0229
V8.0

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O
System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

12 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection.
Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
Hazardous voltage, risk of fatal or serious injury
Always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before commencing work.

Note
Limiting overvoltage
You must ensure overvoltage is limited to 1 kV for the encoder supply.

Note
Power limitation
To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping
current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse.

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 13
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital output module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA on the BaseUnit BU type U0 (1-wire and
2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n

② 2-wire connection L1 Encoder supply, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface L Supply 24 V AC / 48 V UC
④ Input electronics N N-conductor connection
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
.0 to .7 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green)

Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

14 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
Parameter assignment/addressing 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters of DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA
During configuration of the module with STEP 7, define the properties of the module via
various parameters. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective
range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to
transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 24)).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default Configuration in Effective range with configuration

RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics, No • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
supply voltage L
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Potential group • Use potential group Use potential No Module Module
of the left module group of the
(module plugged into left module
a dark-colored Ba-
seUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module
plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 The parameter length of the I/O module is 3 bytes.

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 15
Parameter assignment/addressing
4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics No supply voltage L

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which is followed by a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

16 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
 Parameter assignment/addressing
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image input.

Configuration options of DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA as of V15 with X X
HSP 0254

Address space of the digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA.

Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 17
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and fault displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

18 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and fault displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and fault displays.

LED DIAG

Table 5- 1 LED DIAG fault display

LED DIAG Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashing
Module parameters assigned
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashing

LED channel status

Table 5- 2 Channel status LED status and fault display

LED channel Meaning

status
Process signal = 0
Off

Process signal = 1
On

LED PWR

Table 5- 3 LED PWR status display

LED PWR Meaning

No supply voltage L
Off

Supply voltage L present
On

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA digital input module supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy

Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L • Check supply voltage L at the Ba-
seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

20 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
Technical specifications 6
Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VAC ... 48VUC BA

Article number 6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0

General information
Product type designation DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA
Firmware version
• FW update possible No
usable BaseUnits BU type U0
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V15
as of version
• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- Configurable via GSD file
sion
• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSD Revision 5
sion
• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3
sion
Operating mode
• DI Yes

• Counter No

• Oversampling No

• MSI No

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 48 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 40.8 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 57.6 V
Rated value (AC) 48 V; 24 V/48 V; 50 Hz/60 Hz
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 70 mA; without sensor supply
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 8
Short-circuit protection Yes; Per module, 5x 20 mm fuse, 2 A/250 V,
quick-response, replaceable
Output current
• up to 60 °C, max. 1A

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 21
Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0

24 V encoder supply
• 24 V No

Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.5 W
Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 1 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type U0

• 2-wire connection BU type U0

• 3-wire connection BU type U0 + Potential isolation module

• 4-wire connection BU type U0 + Potential isolation module

Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 8
Source/sink input P-reading
Input characteristic curve in accordance with Yes
IEC 61131, type 1
Input characteristic curve in accordance with No
IEC 61131, type 2
Input characteristic curve in accordance with No
IEC 61131, type 3
Pulse extension No
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage AC/DC

• for signal "0" AC/DC < 10 V

• for signal "1" AC > 14 V, DC > 34 V

Input current
• for signal "1", typ. 3.5 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)

for standard inputs
– parameterizable No
– at "0" to "1", max. 15 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

22 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0

Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Monitoring of encoder power supply Yes

• Group error Yes

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)
• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 1 200 V DC between supply voltage and back-
plane bus
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 40 g

Dimensional drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 23
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module parameters can be reassigned in RUN without affecting the other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a
corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

24 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA 25
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter
in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 07 Invalid coding for input filter time. Check the parameters of the module.

Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)

26 Manual, 07/2018, A5E42285997-AA
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

___________________
2
SIMATIC Product overview

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA
(6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E36107249-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E36107249-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2015 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0 to 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 19
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21
5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 29
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 29

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit)
6ES7132-6BF01-2AA0 (number in package unit: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 8 outputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 0.5 A (per channel)
● Source output (PNP, P-switching)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Safety-related shutdown
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW version FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M0 to I&M3 and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0230
V7.0
Configuration in FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
RUN and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0230
V7.0

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual Distributed I/O
System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System
ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and
2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored Ba-

seUnit only)
② 2-wire connection M Ground
③ Backplane bus interface P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
④ Output electronics DQn Output signal, channel n
⑤ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- PWR Power LED (green)
colored BaseUnit is present)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 15
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire
connection).

① 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
CC71 (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored Ba-
light-colored BaseUnit is present) seUnit only)
DQn Output signal, channel n M Ground
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment
and structure of parameter data record (Page 29).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration software,

reassign- e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
ment in GSD file GSD file
RUN PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 17
Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration software,

reassign- e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
ment in GSD file GSD file
RUN PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (module group of the
plugged into a dark- left module
colored BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged in-
to light-colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 16 bytes.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of the parameters

4.2 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A BA

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 8-channel without value DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A BA V0.0 V14, SP1 or high- X X
status er with HSP 0222

Address space of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A BA

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA

Figure 4-1 Address space of DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
Off

Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Missing supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage miss- 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
ing seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 23
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA

Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0

General information
Product type designation DQ 8x24 VDC/0.5 A BA
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC02
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function No

• PWM No

• Oversampling No

• MSO No

Redundancy
• Redundancy capability Yes

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0

Input current
Current consumption, max. 45 mA; without load
Output voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area
Address space per module
• Outputs 1 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital outputs
Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing)
Number of digital outputs 8
Current-sourcing Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes; per channel, electronic
• Response threshold, typ. 1A

Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V)

Controlling a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of the outputs
• with resistive load, max. 0.5 A

• on lamp load, max. 5W

Load resistance range

• lower limit 48 Ω

• upper limit 100 kΩ

Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A

• for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.5 A

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 10 µA

Output delay with resistive load

• "0" to "1", max. 100 µs; at rated load

• "1" to "0", max. 150 µs; at rated load

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0

Parallel switching of two outputs
• for uprating No

• for redundant control of a load Yes

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 100 Hz

• with inductive load, max. 2 Hz

• on lamp load, max. 10 Hz

Total current of the outputs

• Current per channel, max. 0.5 A

• Current per module, max. 4A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 4A
– up to 40 °C, max. 4A
– up to 50 °C, max. 4A
– up to 60 °C, max. 4A
vertical installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions
– up to 40 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions
– up to 50 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit No

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0

Diagnostics indication LED
• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Standards, approvals, certificates
Suitable for safety-oriented group deactivation Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C; in all other mounting positions

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; in all other mounting positions

Altitude during operation relating to sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 27
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Safety-related shutdown

Note
The digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA supports safety-related shutdown in
connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST:
• SIL according to IEC 61508: 2
• Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN
ISO 13849-1: d

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC 31
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS"
parameter in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value Check the parameters of the module.
behavior.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)

32 Manual, 09/2017, A5E36107249-AC
Digital output module ___________________
Preface

DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST ___________________
Documentation guide 1
(6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST
(6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

12/2015
A5E03574516-AD
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03574516-AD Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 12/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 11
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 14
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 18
5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................20
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................22
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................27

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 Documentation guide

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 7
Documentation guide

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 (packaging unit: 1 unit)
6ES7132-6BD20-2BA0 (packaging unit: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Article number
⑥ LED for supply voltage

Image 2-1 View of the module DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 4 outputs
● Source output (PNP, P-switching)
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 2 A (per channel)
● Total current 8 A (per module) (see derating: Technical specifications (Page 22))
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Safety-related shutdown
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Configuration in RUN
● PROFIenergy

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions

Function Product version of the module Firmware version of the

as of module as of
Value status 1 V1.1.0

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Wiring up 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can use and combine the
different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnits in the system manual Distributed
I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
• The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
The fuse integrated in BaseUnit type A1 may be triggered in the digital output module,
rendering the terminals unusable.

Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 11
Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1- and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n

② 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored
BaseUnit only)
③ Backplane bus interface M Ground
④ Output electronics P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
⑤ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- PWR Power LED (green)
colored BaseUnit is present)
Image 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals
(3-wire connection).

① 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
and CC71 (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored
light-colored BaseUnit is present) BaseUnit only)
DQn Output signal, channel n M Ground
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
Image 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 13
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST

The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 27).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Effective range with configuration

reassignment software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics: • Enable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Disable
Diagnostics: • Enable Disable Yes Module Module
Short-circuit to
• Disable
ground
Diagnostics: • Enable Disable Yes Module Module
Short-circuit to L+
• Disable
Diagnostics: • Enable Disable Yes Module Module
Wire break
• Disable
Channel activated • Enable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Disable

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Effective range with configuration

reassignment software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (module group of the
plugged into a dark-colored left module
BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential group
(module plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 4 bytes.

Note
If one of the two parameters "Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+" or "Diagnostics: Wire break" is
enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off to avoid
triggering an undefined load. Note that a diagnostic interrupt can only be generated when
diagnostics are enabled. 1

1 as of module revision 06

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 15
Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of the parameters

4.2 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+
Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP / substitute value

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input.

Configuration options of DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7, as of V13,
SP1
1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST V1.0 X X X
1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST V1.1 X X X
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST V1.1, QI X X ---

Evaluating the value status

An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module.
If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST
with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only
available if the value status is enabled.

Image 4-1 Address space of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST with value status

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 17
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Image 5-1 LED display

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing
with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 20).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
on
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
off

Channel activated and process signal = 1
on

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
off

Supply voltage L+ present
on

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing
● Channel temporarily unavailable

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.
The diagnostics of the two actuators influenced each other in the case of duplicate wiring.
This means:
• a wire break is only signaled if both actuators are affected
• a single short-circuit affects both actuators

Note
Parallel connection of two outputs
For parallel connection of two outputs for redundant control of a load, the channel
diagnostics "Short-circuit to L+" and "Wire break" must be deactivated.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit 1H • Short-circuit of actuator supply to Correct the process wiring
ground
• Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify the
wiring, e.g. use cables with larger cross-
section
Wire break between the module and Connect the cable
actuator
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect a resistor to the actuator con-
tacts in the load resistance range
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
missing BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable or has been canceled. The module does
• Restart the firmware update.
not output any process or substitute
values in this state.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 21
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST

6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST, PU 1
Firmware version V1.1
• FW update possible Yes

Usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identification CC02
label
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V11 SP2 / V13
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / -
PCS 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3
Operating mode
DQ Yes
DQ with energy-saving function No
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 60 mA; no load
Output voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Sinking output No
Sourcing output Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 2.8 ... 5.2 A

Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V)

Control of a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of outputs
With resistive load, max. 2A
With lamp load, max. 10 W
Load resistance range
Low limit 12 Ω
High limit 3400 Ω
Output current
For signal "1" rated value 2A
For signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA
Output delay with resistive load
"0" to "1", typ. 50 µs
"0" to "1", max. 50 µs
"1" to "0", typ. 100 µs
"1" to "0", max. 100 µs
Parallel connection of two outputs
For increased performance No
For redundant control of a load Yes
Switching frequency
With resistive load, max. 100 Hz
With inductive load, max. 2 Hz
With lamp load, max. 10 Hz
Total current of the outputs
Current per channel, max. 2A
Current per module, max. 8A

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 23
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
Total current of the outputs (per module)
Horizontal installation
• Up to 30 °C, max. 8A

• Up to 40 ℃, max. 8A

• Up to 50 ℃, max. 6A

• Up to 60 ℃, max. 4A
Vertical installation
• Up to 30 °C, max. 8A

• Up to 40 ℃, max. 6A

• Up to 50 ℃, max. 4A

• Up to 60 ℃, max. 4A
Cable length
Shielded, max. 1000 m
Unshielded, max. 600 m
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No
terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Substitute values can be applied Yes
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt Yes
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes
Wire break Yes; module by module
Short-circuit Yes; module by module
Group error Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics No
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels No
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Permitted potential difference
Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic insulation)
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Safety-related shutdown

Note
The digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST supports safety-related shutdown in
connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST:
• SIL according to IEC 61508: 2
• Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to
EN ISO 13849-1: d

Residual current for signal state "0"

Note
Residual current for signal state "0"
Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0"
signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker.
This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break
parameter.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Derating trend
The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting
positions.

Image 6-1 Load current for mounting position

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 27
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Image A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Image A-2 Header information

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Image A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Error transmitting the data record

The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there
are errors in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in the STATUS pa- Meaning Solution

rameter
(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine whether the
module is plugged in or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parameters of
the WREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header Correct the version, length and number of pa-
information rameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST
(6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E03574575-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03574575-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 to 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 19
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 21
5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 29
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 29

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit)
6ES7132-6BF01-2BA0 (number in package unit: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 8 outputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 0.5 A per channel
● Source output (PNP)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Safety-related shutdown
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function version sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M0 to I&M3 and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0230 V7.0
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0230 V7.0
PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0230 V7.0
Value status FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0230 V7.0

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 13
Wiring up 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System
ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1-wire
and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored

BaseUnit only)
② 2-wire connection M Ground
③ Backplane bus interface P1, P2, Internal self-assembling voltage buses
AUX Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
④ Output electronics DQn Output signal, channel n
⑤ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored PWR Power LED (green)
BaseUnit is present)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 15
Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire
connection).

① 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
CC71 (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored Ba-
colored BaseUnit is present) seUnit only)
DQn Output signal, channel n M Ground
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment
and structure of parameter data record (Page 29).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 17
Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Settable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Value range Default Configura- Scope with configuration software,

tion in RUN e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
Short-circuit to L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
Wire break
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off yes Channel Module
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential no Module Module
left module (module group of the
plugged into a dark- left module
colored BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged in-
to light-colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 16 bytes.

Note
If both parameters "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" and "Diagnostics: wire break" are
enabled and one of these diagnostic events occurs, the affected channel is switched off to
avoid triggering an undefined load and the corresponding diagnostic alarm.
If both parameters "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" and "Diagnostics: wire break" are
enabled and one of these diagnostic events occurs, the affected channel is switched off to
avoid triggering an undefined load and the corresponding diagnostic alarm.
If the parameter "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" is enabled and "Diagnostics: wire break" is
disabled, the signal status is retained at the affected channel when "Diagnostics: short-circuit
to L+" occurs. A diagnostic alarm is triggered only for 0 signal.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of the parameters

4.2 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics no supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.

Diagnostics short-circuit to L+
Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs.

Diagnostics wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Specifies the behavior of the module if the CPU changes to STOP.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A ST

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in hardware GSD file GSD file
catalog STEP 7 PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
1 x 8-channel without value DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A ST V14, SP1 or higher with X X
status V0.0 HSP 0222
1 x 8-channel with value DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A ST V14, SP1 or higher with X ---
status V0.0, QI HSP 0222

Evaluating the value status

An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the digital module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
value status are only available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-1 Address space of the DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST with value status

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing
with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned
on
Module diagnostics is available
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
off

Channel activated and process signal = 1
on

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
off

Supply voltage L+ present
on

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The digital output module DQ 8x24...24VDC/0.5A ST supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupt
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events:
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy

Short-circuit 1H • Short-circuit of actuator supply to Correct the process wiring
ground
• Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high. Use a different actuator type or wire
differently, e.g. use cables with a larger
cross-section
Wire break between the module and actu- Connect the cable
ator
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect a resistor to the actuator
contacts in the load resistance range
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 23
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST

Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0

General information
Product type designation DQ 8x24 VDC/0.5 A ST
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC02
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3 or higher

sion

• PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function No

• PWM No

• Oversampling No

• MSO No

Redundancy
• Redundancy capability Yes

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 35 mA; without load
Output voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs + 1 byte for QI information

• Outputs 1 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Submodules
• Number of configurable submodules, max. 4

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital outputs
Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing)
Number of digital outputs 8
Current-sourcing Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 1A

Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V)

Controlling a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of the outputs
• with resistive load, max. 0.5 A

• on lamp load, max. 5W

Load resistance range

• lower limit 48 Ω

• upper limit 12 kΩ

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0

Output voltage
• for signal "1", min. L+ (-0.8 V)

Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A

• for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.5 A

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA

Output delay with resistive load

• "0" to "1", max. 50 µs; at rated load

• "1" to "0", max. 100 µs; at rated load

Parallel switching of two outputs

• for uprating No

• for redundant control of a load Yes

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 100 Hz

• with inductive load, max. 2 Hz

• on lamp load, max. 10 Hz

Total current of the outputs

• Current per channel, max. 0.5 A

• Current per module, max. 4A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 4A
– up to 40 °C, max. 4A
– up to 50 °C, max. 4A
– up to 60 °C, max. 4A
vertical installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions
– up to 40 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions
– up to 50 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break Yes; Module-wise

• Short-circuit to M Yes; Module-wise

• Short-circuit to L+ Yes; Module-wise

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Standards, approvals, certificates
Suitable for safety-oriented group deactivation Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C; in all other mounting positions

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; in all other mounting positions

Altitude during operation based on sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 27
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0

Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Safety-related shutdown

Note
The digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST supports safety-related shutdown in
connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST:
• SIL according to IEC 61508: 2
• Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN ISO
13849-1: d

Residual current for signal state "0"

Note
Residual current for signal state "0"
Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0"
signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker.
This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break
parameter.

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE 31
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS"
parameter in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value Check the parameters of the module.
behavior.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)

32 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574575-AE
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF
(6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

12/2017
A5E03576680-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03576680-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 12/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Number in pack: 10 units (6ES7132-6BF00-2CA0)

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

4 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................17
4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................19
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................20
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 27
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................27
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................29
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................30
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 31
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................31
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 35
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................35

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

6 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 7
Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

8 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 9
Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

10 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0 (Number in pack: 1 unit)
6ES7132-6BF00-2CA0 (Number in pack: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 8 outputs
● Source output (PNP, P-switching)
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 0.5 A (per channel)
● Configurable diagnostics (per channel)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Safety-related shutdown
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW version FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or V14 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or X X
higher higher higher
Identification data I&M0 to FS01 V1.0.0 or V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
I&M3 higher higher with
HSP 0230
V1.0 or higher
Configuration in RUN FS01 V1.0.0 or V12 or higher V5.5 SP3 or X X
higher higher
PROFIenergy FS01 V1.0.0 or V14 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or X X
higher higher higher
Value status FS01 V1.1.0 or V14 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or X X
higher higher higher with
HSP 0230
V2.0 or higher
Isochronous mode FS01 V1.1.0 or V14 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or X X
higher higher higher
Module-internal shared FS01 V1.2.0 or V14 SP1 V13 V5.5 SP3 or X X
input (MSI) higher or higher higher
Configurable submod- FS01 V2.0.0 or V14 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or X X
ule/submodules for shared higher higher higher
device

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

12 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Accessories
The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual Distributed I/O
System ET 200SP.

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System
ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
• The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

14 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and
2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit

only)
② 2-wire connection M Ground
③ Backplane bus interface P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
④ Output electronics DQn Output signal, channel n
⑤ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC02 (op- .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
tional)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when F0 to F7 Channel fault LED (red)
light-colored BaseUnit is present)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 15
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

PWR Power LED (green)

Figure 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators

Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire
connection).

① 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
CC71 (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored Ba-
light-colored BaseUnit is present) seUnit only)
DQn Output signal, channel n M Ground
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

16 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 35)).

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Scope with configuration software,

in RUN e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Channel 1
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel
Short-circuit to L
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Wire break
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 17
Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Scope with configuration software,

in RUN e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Reaction to CPU STOP • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module 1
• Keep last value
• Output substi-
tute value 1
Potential group • Use potential Use potential No Module Module
group of the left group of the left
module (module module
plugged into a
dark-colored
BaseUnit)
• Enable new
potential group
(module plugged
into light-colored
BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes with
PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter, however, with data records 64 to 71 or data
record 128, see Appendix "Parameter data record".

Note
If one of the two parameters "Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+" or "Diagnostics: Wire break" is
enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off to avoid
triggering an undefined load. Note that a diagnostic interrupt can only be generated when
diagnostics are enabled. *

* as of module revision 05

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

18 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+
Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
See system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input.

Configuration options of DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:
Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in the hardware GSD file GSD file
catalog STEP 7, as of V13, PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
SP1
1 x 8-channel without value DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF X X X
status V1.0
1 x 8-channel without value DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF X X X
status V1.1
1 x 8-channel with value sta- DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1. X X ---
tus 1, QI
1 x 8-channel without value DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF X X X
status V1.2
1 x 8-channel with value sta- DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1. X X ---
tus 2, QI
1 x 8-channel with value sta- DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1. X X ---
tus for module-internal 2, MSO
Shared Output with up to 4
submodules
1 x 8-channel without value DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF --- X X
status V2.0
1 x 8-channel with value sta- DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2. --- X ---
tus 0, QI
1 x 8-channel with value sta- DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2. --- X ---
tus for module-internal 0, MSO
Shared Output with up to 4
submodules
2 x 4-channel without value DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF --- X ---
status V2.0, S.2
2 x 4-channel with value sta- DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF --- X ---
tus V2.0, S.2 QI
4 x 2-channel without value DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF --- X ---
status V2.0, S.4
4 x 2-channel with value sta- DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF --- X ---
tus V2.0, S.4 QI

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

20 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Note
The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and
the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the
IO device.
• Firmware update
• I&M identification data
• PROFIenergy

2 x 4- / 4 x 2-channel configuration
For the configuration, the channels of the module are divided into multiple submodules. The
submodules can be assigned to different IO controllers when the module is used in a Shared
Device.
The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Read the
information in the manual for the particular interface module.

Value status (Quality Information, QI)

The value status is always activated for the following module names:
● DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF QI
● DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF MSO
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status
indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module
terminal (0 = value is incorrect).

Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 1 x 8-channel
module without value status

Figure 4-1 Address space for configuration as 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, QI without value
status

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 21
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, QI

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as
1 x 8-channel module with value status. You can freely assign the start address for the
module. The addresses of the channels are derived from the start address.

Figure 4-2 Address space for configuration as 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, QI with value
status

Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, MSO

For the configuration as a 1 x 8-channel module (module-internal Shared Output, MSO),
channels 0 to 7 of the module are copied to up to four submodules. Channels 0 to 7 are then
available with identical values in various submodules. These submodules can be assigned to
up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device:
● The IO controller to which submodule 1 is assigned has write access to outputs 0 to 7.
● The IO controllers to which submodule 2, 3, or 4 is assigned have read access to outputs
0 to 7.

Value status (Quality Information,QI)

The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs.
For the 1st submodule (=basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is
incorrect or that the IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP state.
For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSO submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value
is incorrect or one of the following errors has occurred:
● The basic submodule is not yet configured (not ready).
● The connection between the IO controller and the basic submodule has been interrupted.
● The IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP or POWER OFF state.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

22 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for submodules 1, 2, 3, and
4 and the value status.

Figure 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF MSO with value
status

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 23
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 4-channel
module without value status.
Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address.

Figure 4-4 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2
without value status

Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 QI

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 4-channel
module with value status.
Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address.

Figure 4-5 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 QI
with value status

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

24 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 4 x 2-channel
module without value status.
Each of the four submodules has a freely assignable start address.

Figure 4-6 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4
without value status

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 25
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 QI

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 4 x 2-channel
module with value status.
Each of the four submodules has a freely assignable start address.

Figure 4-7 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 QI
with value status

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

26 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF:

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ Channel error (red)
④ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 27
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 30).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned)
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics
Flashes

LED channel status/channel error

Table 5- 2 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error

LED channel LED channel Meaning

status error
Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off
 Off
 and no channel diagnostics
Channel activated and process signal = 1
On Off
 and no channel diagnostics
Channel activated and channel diagnostics
Off
 On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Missing supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

28 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A HF digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing
● Channel temporarily unavailable
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 29
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Note
Parallel connection of two outputs
For parallel connection of two outputs for redundant control of a load, the channel
diagnostics "Short-circuit to L+" and "Wire break" must be deactivated.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit 1H • Short-circuit of actuator supply to ground 1 Correct the process wiring
• Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+ 2
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or
modify the wiring, for example,
use cables with larger cross-
section
Wire break between the module and actuator Connect the cable
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect a resistor to the actu-
ator contacts in the load re-
sistance range
Parameter as- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters for Correct the parameter assignment
signment error the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on
missing the BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Chan- 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or has • Wait for firmware update.
nel/component been canceled. The module does not output any
• Restart the firmware update.
temporarily una- process or substitute values in this state.
vailable
1 only in switched state (output value 1)
2 only in non-switched state (output value 0)

Note
In case of a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ at the activated channel, load
distributions can occur which result in wire break diagnostics.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

30 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF

Article number 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0

General information
Product type designation DQ 8x24 V DC/0.5 A HF
Firmware version V2.0
• FW update possible Yes

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC02
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V13 SP1 / -
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 / -

sion

• PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function No

• PWM No

• Oversampling No

• MSO Yes

Redundancy
• Redundancy capability Yes

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

31 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Output voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 8 byte; 2 channels per submodule + QI infor-
mation
Digital outputs
Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing)
Number of digital outputs 8
Current-sinking No
Current-sourcing Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 0.7 to 1.3 A

Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V)

Controlling a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of the outputs
• with resistive load, max. 0.5 A

• on lamp load, max. 5W

Load resistance range

• lower limit 48 Ω

• upper limit 12 kΩ

Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA

Output delay with resistive load

• "0" to "1", typ. 50 µs

• "1" to "0", typ. 100 µs

Parallel switching of two outputs

• for uprating No

• for redundant control of a load Yes

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

32 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 100 Hz

• with inductive load, max. 2 Hz

• on lamp load, max. 10 Hz

Total current of the outputs

• Current per channel, max. 0.5 A

• Current per module, max. 4A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 60 °C, max. 4A
vertical installation
– up to 50 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- Yes
nized up to terminal)
Execution and activation time (TCO), min. 48 µs
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 500 µs
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break Yes; channel by channel

• Short-circuit Yes; channel by channel

• Group error Yes

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 33
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Safety-related shutdown

Note
The digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF supports safety-related shutdown in
connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST:
• SIL according to IEC 61508: 2
• Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN ISO
13849-1: d

Residual current for signal state "0"

Note
Residual current for signal state "0"
Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0"
signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker.
This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break
parameter.

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

34 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.
With data records 64 to 71, you can configure individual channels.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128 or data records 64 to 71. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU,
which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.
If you reconfigure a module and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these
diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing".

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the
STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

35 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Data record structure

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 or data records 64 to 71

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

36 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameter
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+2 for channels 0 to 7

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE 37
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transmitting the data record

The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there
are errors in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in the STATUS pa- Meaning Solution

rameter
(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record
length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine whether
the module is plugged or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parame-
ters of the WREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header in- Correct the version, length and number of
formation parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

38 Manual, 12/2017, A5E03576680-AE
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA
(6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E32855878-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E32855878-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0 to 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16
4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 18
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 20
5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 20
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 22
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 23
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 27

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Part number
6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA module

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 8 outputs
● Sink output (NPN, M switching)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 0.5 A (per channel)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW ver- FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M0 to I&M3 and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0230
V7.0
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0230
V7.0

Accessories
The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O
System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection.
Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without
AUX terminals (1-wire and 2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n

② 2-wire connection 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit
only)
④ Output electronics M Ground
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
colored BaseUnit is present)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses PWR Power LED (green)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 15
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA parameters

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 27)).

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Reconfigu- Scope with configuration software,

ration in e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameter Value range Default Reconfigu- Scope with configuration software,

ration in e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Reaction to CPU STOP • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value
1
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module (module group of the left
plugged into a dark- module
colored BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged
into light-colored Ba-
seUnit)

1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The parame-
ter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maxi-
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record
128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is
16 bytes.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 17
Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A SNK BA

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 8-channel without value DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA V14, SP1 or high- X X
status V0.0 er with HSP 0222

Address space of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA

Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LED displays

The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Remedial measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22).

LED DIAG

Table 5- 1 Error display of the LED DIAG

LED DIAG Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashes

LED channel status

Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED channel status

LED channel Meaning

status
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
Off
Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

LED PWR

Table 5- 3 Status display of the LED PWR

LED PWR Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA digital output module supports diagnostics alarms.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following event:
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy

Parameter as- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
signment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA

Article number 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0

General information
Product type designation DQ 8x 24 V DC/0.5 A SNK BA, PU 1
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC01
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function No

• PWM No

• Oversampling No

• MSO No

Redundancy
• Redundancy capability Yes

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 23
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0

Output voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.5 W
Address area
Address space per module
• Outputs 1 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Digital outputs
Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing)
Number of digital outputs 8
Current-sinking Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 1.5 A

Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. 47 V

Controlling a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of the outputs
• with resistive load, max. 0.5 A

• on lamp load, max. 5W

Load resistance range

• lower limit 48 Ω

• upper limit 3 400 Ω

Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A

• for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.5 A

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 5 µA

Output delay with resistive load

• "0" to "1", max. 300 µs

• "1" to "0", max. 600 µs

Parallel switching of two outputs

• for uprating No

• for redundant control of a load Yes

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 100 Hz

• with inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz

• on lamp load, max. 10 Hz

Total current of the outputs

• Current per channel, max. 0.5 A

• Current per module, max. 4A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 60 °C, max. 4A
vertical installation
– up to 50 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit No

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0

Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C; in all other mounting positions

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; in all other mounting positions

Altitude during operation based on sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Dimensional drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have the option to re-configure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a
corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 27
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS"
parameter in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value Check the parameters of the module.
behavior.

Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855878-AC
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Guide to documentation 1

2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
DQ mode
ET 200SP
DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF 4
___________________
PC mode
digital output module
(6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)
___________________
Technical specifications 5
Manual

___________________
Parameter data record A

02/2018
A5E42404845-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E42404845-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 02/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

4 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 10
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................10
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................13
3 DQ mode .............................................................................................................................................. 16
3.1 Wiring ......................................................................................................................................16
3.1.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................16
3.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................18
3.2.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................18
3.2.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................21
3.2.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................24
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................26
3.3.1 Status and fault displays .........................................................................................................26
3.3.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................27
3.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................28
4 PC mode............................................................................................................................................... 29
4.1 Wiring ......................................................................................................................................29
4.1.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................29
4.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................31
4.2.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................31
4.2.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................34
4.2.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................38
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................41
4.3.1 Status and fault displays .........................................................................................................41
4.3.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................42
4.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................43
5 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 44
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 51
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................51
A.2 Error transferring the data record DQ .....................................................................................55

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 5
Guide to documentation 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

6 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Guide to documentation

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 7
Guide to documentation

In doing so you can select:

● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

8 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Guide to documentation

● Reset to factory settings

● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 9
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

10 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 4 outputs (TRIAC)
● Output current 2 A per channel (max. 4 A), total current max. 8 A
(see derating: Technical specifications (Page 44))
● Power rating max. 900 W
● Configurable diagnostics (per channel)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for power control of heating systems or infrared sources in drying processes
● Wave packet control to prevent harmonic components
● Startup delay per channel to reduce system loads
● Output filter per channel for soft start or soft stop
● Two operating modes:
– DQ
– PC (PowerControl)
● with one of four control types each:
– Phase control - phase-angle proportional (default)
– Phase control - power-proportional
– Wave packet control - half waves
– Wave packet control - full waves

Table 2- 1 Operating modes of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF

Property Operating mode

DQ PC (PowerControl)
Without value status With value status Without value status With value status
(QI) (QI) (QI) (QI)
Number of channels 4
Control type selection Yes
Configurable temperature Yes
shutdown
Configurable startup delay 0 ms ... 10 s
Configurable output filter 0 ms ... 60 s
down/up
Data length Inputs 0 bytes 1 byte 0 bytes 1 byte
Outputs 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 8 bytes

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 2 Version dependencies of the functions

HW FW STEP 7 GSD file

Function version version TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP
Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher HSP 0240 with HSP 0230
V8.0 or higher
Identification data I&M0 FS01 V1.0.0 or V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
to I&M3 higher HSP 0240 with HSP 0230
V8.0 or higher
Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V1.0.0 or V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher HSP 0240 with HSP 0230
V8.0 or higher
PROFIenergy FS01 V1.0.0 or V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher HSP 0240 with HSP 0230
V8.0 or higher
Value status FS01 V1.0.0 or V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher HSP 0240 with HSP 0230
V8.0 or higher

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

12 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

2.2 Functions

Introduction
Two operating mode are available for the module DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF:
● DQ mode
● PC mode (PowerControl)
In PC mode, control of the module outputs is analog. The value range is 0..1000D (= 0.1%
increments). The resolution of the process value is 16 bits per channel.
In DQ mode, output control is binary.
You configure the channels with the functions described below.

Control types
In PC mode, you can assign one of four control types to all channels of the module; you use
these control types to control different processes in your plant.
The control the power in the control types:
● Phase control - power-proportional
● Wave packet control (half waves)
● Wave packet control (full waves)
You can use these control types, for example, for power control of heating systems or
infrared sources in drying processes.
You control the average switch-on duration in the control type:
● Phase control - phase-angle proportional
You can use this control type, for example, to dim lamps that offer this feature.
You also assign the control types in DQ mode. The resolution of the process value here is
only 1 bit per channel.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 13
Product overview
2.2 Functions

PC mode (PowerControl) operating principles

Phase control
The load voltage is reduced through phase control and raised from the starting voltage up to
mains voltage in the zero crossing.
Depending on the application, phase control offers advantages compared to wave packet
control, such as even heating or prevention of radiation source flickering in case of low
setpoints.
You can configure the following during each half wave:
● For phase control - phase-angle proportional: The switch-on duration in proportion to the
process value.
● For phase control - power-proportional: The output power.
The following graphic schematically shows the principle of phase control:

① Average power 80%, corresponds to a process value of 800 (power proportional)

② Average switch-on duration 67%, corresponds to a process value of 670 (phase angle propor-
tional)

Figure 2-2 Principle of phase control

Note
Use of filters
To observe the EMC guidelines, you must filter the faults caused by phase control in the
plant. A suitable filter, for example, is EPCOS SIFI-C B84113C.
For additional information about electromagnetic compatibility of the module, see the section
Technical specifications (Page 44).

Phase control - power-proportional

This control type enables you to control the output power in the phase control in proportion to
the maximum power.
This means, for example, that a 500 W heating element ideally consumes about 50 W of its
maximum power at a process value of 10.0%.
Note that infrared sources may consume more power. The deviation from the setpoint is at
its lowest in case of a linear and purely ohmic load.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

14 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Product overview
2.2 Functions

Wave packet control

In case of wave packet control, the module connects the load voltage through to the load for
entire half or full waves starting at the zero crossing.
The wave packets to be output are calculated dynamically. Unlike with fixed wave packet
patterns, the changes of the output value are taken into consideration faster while ensuring
the absence of direct voltage in the output voltage at the same time. This allows for the
implementation of controllers with shorter dead times.
The process value hereby refers to the average switch-on duration over multiple alternating
voltage periods of the load voltage.
The graphics below show you how basic wave packet control for half waves or full waves
works.

Figure 2-3 Principle of wave packet control - half waves

Figure 2-4 Principle of wave packet control - full waves

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 15
DQ mode 3
3.1 Wiring

3.1.1 Wiring and block diagram

This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection.
You can use the different connection options for all channels and combine them at random.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

DANGER
Dangerous voltage. Risk of death or serious injury.
You must always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before
commencing work.

Note
Limiting overvoltage
You must ensure overvoltage of the encoder supply is limited to 1 kV.

Note
Power limitation
To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping
current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse.

Note
Three-phase loads
Do not connect any three-phase loads to the module. The digital output is not suitable for
three-phase loads.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

16 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 DQ mode
3.1 Wiring

Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type U0.

① 1-wire connection 24..230 V AC Supply voltage L (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit

only)
② 2-wire connection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
③ Backplane bus interface N Neutral
④ Output electronics DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Polarity reversal protection .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑥ Color-coded label CC20 (optional) F0 to F3 Channel fault LED (red)
DQn Output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 17
DQ mode
3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2.1 Parameters

Parameters of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF

The following table lists the configurable parameters in DQ mode.
The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to
transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 51)).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 3- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration Effective range with configuration

in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP1
Module parameters
Control type • Phase control - Phase control - Yes Module Module
phase-angle propor- phase-angle
tional proportional

• Phase control -
power-proportional
• Wave packet control
- half waves
• Wave packet control
- full waves

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

18 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 DQ mode
3.2 Parameters/address space

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration Effective range with configuration

in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP1
Channel parameters
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module
No supply voltage L
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module
Overtemperature
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module
Wire break2
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Temperature shut- • Output active even Output active Yes Channel Module
down under overtempera- even under
ture conditions overtempera-
ture conditions
• Output disabled
under overtempera-
ture conditions
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute
value 1
Channel startup • No delay No delay Yes Channel -
delay
• 100 ms
• 1s
• 2s
• 3s
• 4s
• 5s
• 10 s
Channel output • No filter No filter Yes Channel -
filter down
• 500 ms
• 1s
• 5s
• 10 s
• 30 s
• 60 s

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 19
DQ mode
3.2 Parameters/address space

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration Effective range with configuration

in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP1
Channel output • No filter No filter Yes Channel -
filter up
• 500 ms
• 1s
• 5s
• 10 s
• 30 s
• 60 s
Potential group
Potential group • Use potential group Use potential No Module Module
of the left module group of the
(module plugged in- left module
to a dark BaseUnit)
• Enable new poten-
tial group (module
plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes with
PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix
"Parameter data set".
2 For physical reasons, a wire break cannot be detected for actuators with two inputs and shared reference point. In this
case, deactivate the diagnostics.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

20 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 DQ mode
3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2.2 Explanation of parameters

Control type
At the module level, specifies the control type in which the module's channels are operated.
● Phase control - phase-angle proportional (default)
● Phase control - power-proportional
● Wave packet control - half waves
● Wave packet control - full waves

Diagnostics No supply voltage L

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L.

Diagnostics Overtemperature
Diagnostics enabled when overtemperature occurs in the module.
When you enable the Overtemperature diagnostics and the module detects that the
maximum permissible module temperature is exceeded, the Overtemperature diagnostics is
output.

Diagnostics Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled.

Temperature shutdown
Determines whether a channel remains activate or is deactivated in case of
overtemperature.
When the module has detected that the maximum permissible module temperature has been
exceeded, the channel is either deactivated or remains active depending on the
configuration.
To prevent damage to the module, the channel is automatically deactivated when
temperature shutdown is configured.
You cannot control the channel until the temperature is once again in the valid range.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 21
DQ mode
3.2 Parameters/address space

Channel startup delay

Specifies the duration of the startup delay of a channel.
You can set startup delays with values ranging from 100 ms to 10 s. This means the
channels cannot be controlled before the set startup delay has expired.
Configure different startup delays for each channel to decouple the starting currents and thus
reduce the network load.
Startup delays are also in effect when the module is to output substitute values. The startup
delay starts after the module was started and when the load voltage returns.
This means that depending on your process, the initial switch on of lamps is always delayed
by the configured time.

Channel output filter down/up

Specifies the down or up output filter of a channel.
For smooth operation or to increase the interference immunity of your application, use down
or up output filters with values from 500 ms to 60 s.
Quick changes of the filter input values are converted into smoother signal changes at the
filter output. This means, for example, that extreme currents in the heating phase of infrared
sources are limited.
In addition, you can also use output filters to reduce shifts in the zero crossings of the power
supply that can occur in isolating transformers.
This increases the accuracy of the module.
When you have configured a startup delay, the output filter is held at the reset state during
this delay.
Once the startup delay has expired, the output filter starts its linear ramp directly at the value
that was held during the startup delay.
Note that the configured filter times always refer to the process value jumps from 0% to
100% or from 100% to 0%.
This means the settling time of the filter is shorter for smaller jumps.

① Power without output filter

② Power with output filter (max. slope according to Output filters parameter)
③ Startup delay

Figure 3-2 Power trend or average switch-on duration in case of phase control phase-angle
proportional with and without output filter

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

22 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 DQ mode
3.2 Parameters/address space

Each channel has its own output filters. These output filters always work with maximum
resolution.
Output filters are also in effect when the module is to output substitute values, for example,
after CPU STOP or in case of a communication failure.
This means all transitions are still smooth and infrared sources for hot gluing spots do not fail
immediately, for example, but are shut down slowly to ensure that the surface of the gluing
spots does not tear due to sudden cooling.
If you do not want to use output filters, use the parameter setting "No filter".

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 23
DQ mode
3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input.

Configuration options of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF in DQ mode

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. When you
configure the module by means of the GSD file, the configuration is available under different
short designations/module names. The following configurations are possible:

Table 3- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

name in the GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7, V14 or
higher
1 x 4-channel without value DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF X X X
status V1.0
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF X X ---
V1.0, QI

Note
The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and
the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the IO
device.
• Firmware update
• I&M identification data
• PROFIenergy

Value status (quality information, QI)

The value status is always activated for the following module names:
● DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0, QI
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status
indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module
terminal (0 = value is incorrect).

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

24 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 DQ mode
3.2 Parameters/address space

Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0

The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration without value
status in DQ mode (DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0).

Figure 3-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0 without
value status

Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0, QI

The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with value status
in DQ mode (DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0, QI).

Figure 3-4 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF V1.0 with
value status

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 25
DQ mode
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

3.3.1 Status and fault displays

LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ Channel error (red)
④ PWR (green)

Figure 3-5 LED displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays.

DIAG LED

Table 3- 3 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics
Flashes

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

26 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 DQ mode
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

LED channel status/channel error

Table 3- 4 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error

Channel status LED channel Meaning

LED error
Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off
 Off
 and no channel diagnostics
Channel activated and process signal = 1
On Off
 and no channel diagnostics
Channel activated and channel diagnostics
Off
 On

PWR LED

Table 3- 5 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L
Off

Supply voltage L present
On

3.3.2 Interrupts
The digital output module DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A HF supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
In DQ mode, the module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events:
● Overtemperature
● Wire break
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing
● Channel/component temporarily unavailable
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 27
DQ mode
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

3.3.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.
In DQ mode, the module outputs the following diagnostic alarms:

Table 3- 6 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarms Error Meaning Solution

code
Overtemperature 5H Possible causes: • Correct the process wiring
• Short-circuit or overload at the digital • Improve cooling
outputs • Check controlled loads
• Ambient temperature outside the spec-
ification
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify
the wiring, for example, use cables with
larger cross-section
Wirebreak between the module and ac- Connect the cable
tuator
Channel not connected (open) Disable diagnostics
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage missing 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L • Check supply voltage L at the Ba-
seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel/component 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
temporarily unavailable or has been canceled. The module does
• Restart the firmware update.
not output any process or substitute val-
ues in this state.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

28 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
PC mode 4
4.1 Wiring

4.1.1 Wiring and block diagram

This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection.
You can use the different connection options for all channels and combine them at random.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

DANGER
Dangerous voltage. Risk of death or serious injury.
You must always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before
commencing work.

Note
Limiting overvoltage
You must ensure overvoltage of the encoder supply is limited to 1 kV.

Note
Power limitation
To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping
current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse.

Note
Three-phase loads
Do not connect any three-phase loads to the module. The digital output is not suitable for
three-phase loads.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 29
PC mode
4.1 Wiring

Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type U0.

① 1-wire connection 24..230 Supply voltage L (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only)
V AC
② 2-wire connection P1, P2, Internal self-assembling voltage buses
AUX Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
③ Backplane bus interface N Neutral
④ Output electronics DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Polarity reversal protection .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑥ Color-coded label CC20 (optional) F0 to Channel fault LED (red)
F3
DQn Output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 4-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of actuators.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

30 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2.1 Parameters

Parameters of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF

The following table lists the configurable parameters in PC mode.
The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to
transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 51)).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration Effective range with configuration

in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP1
Module parameters
Control type • Phase control - Phase control - Yes Module Module
phase-angle propor- phase-angle
tional proportional

• Phase control -
power-proportional
• Wave packet control
- half waves
• Wave packet control
- full waves

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 31
PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration Effective range with configuration

in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP1
Channel parameters
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module
No supply voltage L
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module
Overtemperature
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module
Wire break2
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module
Overflow 3
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Temperature shut- • Output active even Output active Yes Channel Module
down under overtempera- even under
ture conditions overtempera-
ture conditions
• Output disabled
under overtempera-
ture conditions
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute
value
Channel startup • No delay No delay Yes Channel -
delay
• 100 ms
• 1s
• 2s
• 3s
• 4s
• 5s
• 10 s
Channel output • No filter No filter Yes Channel -
filter down
• 500 ms
• 1s
• 5s
• 10 s
• 30 s
• 60 s

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

32 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfiguration Effective range with configuration

in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP1
Channel output • No filter No filter Yes Channel -
filter up
• 500 ms
• 1s
• 5s
• 10 s
• 30 s
• 60 s
Channel substitute 0...1000 0 Yes Channel Channel
value [0.1%] 2
Potential group
Potential group • Use potential group Use potential No Module Module
of the left module group of the
(module plugged in- left module
to a dark BaseUnit)
• Enable new poten-
tial group (module
plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 7 bytes with
PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix
"Parameter data set".
2 For physical reasons, a wire break cannot be detected for actuators with two inputs and shared reference point. In this
case, deactivate the diagnostics.
3 The Overflow and Channel substitute value [0.1%] diagnostics are only available if you configured the module in PC
mode.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 33
PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2.2 Explanation of parameters

Control type
At the module level, specifies the control type in which the module's channels are operated.
● Phase control - phase-angle proportional (default)
● Phase control - power-proportional
● Wave packet control - half waves
● Wave packet control - full waves

Diagnostics No supply voltage L

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L.

Diagnostics Overtemperature
Diagnostics enabled when overtemperature occurs in the module.
When you enable the Overtemperature diagnostics and the module detects that the
maximum permissible module temperature is exceeded, the Overtemperature diagnostics is
output.

Diagnostics Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken.

Diagnostics overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the permitted value range of the process value is
exceeded.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled.

Temperature shutdown
Determines whether a channel remains activate or is deactivated in case of
overtemperature.
When the module has detected that the maximum permissible module temperature has been
exceeded, the channel is either deactivated or remains active depending on the
configuration.
To prevent damage to the module, the channel is automatically deactivated when
temperature shutdown is configured.
You cannot control the channel until the temperature is once again in the valid range.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

34 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Channel startup delay

Specifies the duration of the startup delay of a channel.
You can set startup delays with values ranging from 100 ms to 10 s. This means the
channels cannot be controlled before the set startup delay has expired.
Configure different startup delays for each channel to decouple the starting currents and thus
reduce the network load.
Startup delays are also in effect when the module is to output substitute values. The startup
delay starts after the module was started and when the load voltage returns.
This means that depending on your process, the initial switch on of lamps is always delayed
by the configured time.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 35
PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

Channel output filter down/up

Specifies the down or up output filter of a channel.
To increase the interference immunity of your application, use down or up output filters with
values from 500 ms to 60 s.
Quick changes of the filter input values are converted into smoother signal changes at the
filter output. This means, for example, that extreme currents in the heating phase of infrared
sources are limited.
In addition, you can also use output filters to reduce shifts in the zero crossings of the power
supply that can occur in isolating transformers.
This increases the accuracy of the module.
When you have configured a startup delay, the output filter is held at the reset state during
this delay.
Once the startup delay has expired, the output filter starts its linear ramp directly at the value
that was held during the startup delay.
Note that the configured filter times always refer to the process value jumps from 0% to
100% or from 100% to 0%.
This means the settling time of the filter is shorter for smaller jumps.

① Power without output filter

② Power with output filter (max. slope according to Output filters parameter)
③ Startup delay

Figure 4-2 Power trend or average switch-on duration in case of phase control phase-angle
proportional with and without output filter

Each channel has its own output filters. These output filters always work with maximum
resolution.
Output filters are also in effect when the module is to output substitute values, for example,
after CPU STOP or in case of a communication failure.
This means all transitions are still smooth and infrared sources for hot gluing spots do not fail
immediately, for example, but are shut down slowly to ensure that the surface of the gluing
spots does not tear due to sudden cooling.
If you do not want to use output filters, use the parameter setting "No filter".

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

36 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

Channel substitute value [0.1%]

Defines the substitute value that is output when a CPU STOP occurs and the setting "Output
substitute value" is selected in the "Reaction to CPU STOP" parameter.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 37
PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input.

Configuration options of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF in PC mode

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. When you
configure the module by means of the GSD file, the configuration is available under different
short designations/module names. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

name in the GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7, V14 or
higher
1 x 4-channel without value DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF X X X
status PC V1.0
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF X X ---
PC V1.0, QI

Note
The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and
the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the IO
device.
• Firmware update
• I&M identification data
• PROFIenergy

Value status (quality information, QI)

The value status is always activated for the following module names:
● DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0, QI
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status
indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module
terminal (0 = value is incorrect).

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

38 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0

The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration without value
status in PC mode (DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0).

Figure 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0

without value status

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 39
PC mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0, QI

The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with value status
in PC mode (DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0, QI).

Figure 4-4 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF PC V1.0

with value status

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

40 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 PC mode
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

4.3.1 Status and fault displays

LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A HF.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ Channel error (red)
④ PWR (green)

Figure 4-5 LED displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays.

DIAG LED

Table 4- 3 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics
Flashes

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 41
PC mode
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

LED channel status/channel error

Table 4- 4 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error

Channel status LED channel Meaning

LED error
Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off
 Off
 and no channel diagnostics
Channel activated and process signal = 1
On Off
 and no channel diagnostics
Channel activated and channel diagnostics
Off
 On

PWR LED

Table 4- 5 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L
Off

Supply voltage L present
On

4.3.2 Interrupts
The digital output module DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A HF supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
In PC mode, the module generates a diagnostic interrupt for the following events:
● Overtemperature
● Wire break
● High limit violated
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing
● Channel/component temporarily unavailable
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

42 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 PC mode
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

4.3.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.
In PC mode, the module outputs the following diagnostic alarms:

Table 4- 6 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarms Error Meaning Solution

code
Overtemperature 5H • Short-circuit or overload at the digital • Correct the process wiring
outputs • Improve cooling
• Ambient temperature outside the spec- • Check controlled loads
ification
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify
the wiring, for example, use cables with
larger cross-section
Wirebreak between the module and ac- Connect the cable
tuator
Channel not connected (open) Disable diagnostics
High limit violated 7H The permitted value range of the process Correct the output value (0 to 1000)
value is exceeded.
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage missing 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L • Check supply voltage L at the Ba-
seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel/component 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
temporarily unavailable or has been canceled. The module does
• Restart the firmware update.
not output any process or substitute val-
ues in this state.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 43
Technical specifications 5
Technical specifications of the DQ 4×24...230VAC/2A HF

Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0

General information
Product type designation DQ 4x24 ... 230 V AC/2 A HF, PU 1
Firmware version V1.0
• FW update possible Yes

usable BaseUnits BU type U0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC20
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- STEP 7 V5.5 or higher

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSD as of Revision 5

sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function Yes

• PWM No

• Oversampling No

• MSO No

• Phase control Yes; Control area: 8.5 ... 100% of the phase
angle
• Trailing-edge phase No

• Half-wave Yes

• Full-wave Yes

Supply voltage
Rated value (AC) 230 V; 47 ... 63 Hz, max. rate of change of fre-
quency 1 mHz/s

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

44 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 8 mA; without load
Output voltage
Rated value (AC) 230 V; 24V AC to 230V AC
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 9 W; Active power, load voltage 230 V, all outputs
loaded with 2 A, 50 Hz
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs + 1 byte for QI information

• Outputs 8 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type U0

• 2-wire connection BU type U0

• 3-wire connection BU type U0 + Potential isolation module

Digital outputs
Number of digital outputs 4
Current-sinking No
Current-sourcing Yes
Short-circuit protection No; external fusing necessary
Open-circuit detection Yes; channel by channel
• Response threshold, typ. 1 mA; 40 V AC or more

Overload protection No; A miniature fuse with 10 tripping current and

tripping characteristic "quick response" must be
provided in the module supply
Controlling a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of the outputs
• with resistive load, max. 2 A; Max. 4 A, see additional description in man-
ual
• with inductive load, max. 2A

• on lamp load, max. 100 W; Tungsten rating in accordance with UL;

for thermistors with higher power ratings, see the
notes in the manual
Output voltage
• for signal "1", min. 20.4 V

Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 2A

• for signal "1" permissible range, min. 10 mA

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 45
Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0

• for signal "1" permissible range, max. 4 A; Note derating data in the manual

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 3 mA

Output delay with resistive load

• "0" to "1", max. 40 ms; 2 AC cycles

• "1" to "0", max. 20 ms; 1 AC cycle

Parallel switching of two outputs

• for logic links No

• for uprating No

• for redundant control of a load Yes

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 10 Hz; Applies to DQ mode; limited by line fre-
quency in PC mode
• with inductive load (acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, 10 Hz; Applies to DQ mode; limited by line fre-
AC15), max. quency in PC mode

• on lamp load, max. 1 Hz; Applies to DQ mode; limited by line fre-

quency in PC mode
Total current of the outputs
• Current per channel, max. 2 A; Max. 4 A, see additional description in man-
ual
• Current per module, max. 8A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 40 °C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A.
For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note
derating data in the manual
– up to 50 °C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A.
For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note
derating data in the manual
– up to 60 °C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A.
For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note
derating data in the manual
vertical installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A.
For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note
derating data in the manual
– up to 40 °C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A.
For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note
derating data in the manual
– up to 50 °C, max. 8 A; Applicable for current channels up to 2 A.
For current channels between 2 A and 4 A, note
derating data in the manual
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

46 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break Yes; channel by channel

• Short-circuit No

• Group error Yes

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics Yes; red Fn LED

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- No

ply of the electronics
Isolation
Isolation tested with 2 545 V DC/2 s (routine test)
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 47
Technical specifications

Derating
The figures below show the maximum permissible total current for the derating, depending
on the ambient temperature for horizontal and vertical mounting position, with channel
currents of 2 A or 4 A.
The following values apply to channel currents up to 2 A for the utilization category AC-15
(IEC 60947-5-1).

Figure 5-1 Derating depending on ambient temperature - channel current 2 A

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

48 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Technical specifications

The following values apply to channel currents of 2 A to 4 A for the utilization category AC-12
(IEC 60947-5-1):

Figure 5-2 Derating depending on ambient temperature - channel current 4 A

Note that the rms values are in effect for the channel and total currents.

Note
Loads with PTC thermistor properties
For PTC thermistors up to 4 A continuous current and power ratings above 100 W (e.g.
infrared sources), you must observe the significantly higher inrush current.
Ensure that the switch-on peak current does not exceed 15 A.
To reduce the inrush current, preheat the load or use the function "Output filter with phase
control".
This slowly increases the switch-on duration of the load and the inrush current of the load
being heated is limited.
Use an output filter time of 5 s or a preheating with 25 ° phase control, for example, for a
PTC thermistor with a power rating of 900 W and an estimated factor 10 of the inrush current
overshoot.
If you want to connect multiple PTC thermistors per module at the same time, use the
"Startup delay" function.
By doing so, you connect the channels at different times so that the inrush current
overshoots do not overlap and the fuse is not overloaded.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 49
Technical specifications

Electromagnetic compatibility
The control of loads in the control types phase control power-proportional or phase-angle
proportional results in strong electromagnetic effects on the power supply network.
To observe the limits in accordance with EMC Directives, you must filter the load supply of
the module with phase control in PC mode or when using the function "Output filter with
phase control" in DQ mode.
Conformity was measured with filters of the type "EPCOS SIFI-C B84113C". Use this type of
filter or a filter with the same characteristic curve or with a characteristic curve with greater
damping.
You must ensure conformity with the values in the tables below.
Interference emission in accordance with EN 61000-6-4:2007 + A1:2011 and IEC 61131-2:

Table 5- 1 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields

Frequency Interference emission

Test environment OATS or SAC
(measured at a distance of 10 m)
• 30 MHz to 230 MHz • <40 dB (µV/m) Q
• 230 MHz to 1000 MHz • <47 dB (µV/m) Q
Test environment FAR
(measured at a distance of 3 m)
• 30 MHz to 230 MHz • 45 to 52 dB (µV/m) Q
• 230 MHz to 1000 MHz • <52 dB (µV/m) Q
Test environment OATS, SAC or FAR
(measured at a distance of 3 m)
• 1 GHz to 3 GHz • <76 dB (µV/m) P / <56 dB (µV/m) M
• 3 GHz to 6 GHz • <80 dB (µV/m) P / <60 dB (µV/m) M

Table 5- 2 Interference emission via the AC power supply

Frequency Interference emission

0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz <79 dB (µV/m) Q
<66 dB (µV/m) M
0.5 MHz to 30 MHz <73 dB (µV/m) Q
<60 dB (µV/m) M

Dimension drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

50 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have the option to re-configure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a
corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 51
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

52 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.

Figure A-3 Module header information

Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 7. You
enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-4 Module parameter block

Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.

Figure A-5 Channel header information

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 53
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-6 Structure byte x up to x+5 for the channel 0 to 3

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

54 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA
 Parameter data record
A.2 Error transferring the data record DQ

A.2 Error transferring the data record DQ

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS"
parameter in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 01 At least one reserved bit is set to Set all reserved bits to "0".
"1".
DF 80 E1 02 Overflow diagnostics is enabled Block all Overflow diagnostics or switch to PC
even though DQ mode is active. mode.
DF 80 E1 05 Invalid coding for operating mode. Check module parameters.
DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value Check all channel parameters.
behavior.
DF 80 E1 20 Invalid coding for startup delay. Check all channel parameters.
DF 80 E1 21 Invalid coding for output filter up or Check all channel parameters.
down.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404845-AA 55
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Guide to documentation 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital Parameter
___________________
assignment/addressing 4
output module
(6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

03/2015
A5E32043575-AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E32043575-AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 12/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................10
4 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 12
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................12
4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................13
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................14
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 15
5.1 Status and fault displays .........................................................................................................15
5.2 Load voltage status .................................................................................................................17
5.3 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................17
5.4 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................17
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 18
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................18
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 21
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................21

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 5
Guide to documentation 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB
 Guide to documentation

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

My Documentation Manager
The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to
your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Application examples
Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find application examples on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/ae).

CAx Download Manager

The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe
systems.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Article number
⑥ LED for supply voltage

Figure 2-1 View of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST module

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 4 digital outputs each with a value status (quality information)
● Supply voltage L+
● Switches in zero point
● Output current 2 A per channel
● Total current 8 A (per module)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, AC contactors, and indicator lights
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification data I&M0 to I&M3
● Reconfiguration in RUN
● PROFIenergy
You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 9
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST module with the
terminal assignments for 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
system manual.

NOTICE
Dangerous voltage. Risk of death or serious injury.
Always disconnect the system and module from the power supply before commencing
work.

Note
Limiting overvoltage
You must ensure overvoltage is limited to 1 kV for the encoder supply.

Note
Power limitation
To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping
current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse.

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 2-wire and 3-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the digital input module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1.

① 2-wire connection N Neutral

② 3-wire connection 1L, 2L Supply voltage 120 V AC to 230 V AC
③ Backplane bus interface 1N, 2N Neutral conductor supply voltage
④ Output electronics PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Diagnostics LED (red/green)
DQn Output signal, channel n .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
L1 Encoder supply PWR Power LED (green)
P1, Internal self-assembling voltage buses
P2, Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
AUX
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 2-wire and 3-wire connection of actuators

No connection for three-phase loads

The digital output is not suitable for three-phase loads.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 11
Parameter assignment/addressing 4
4.1 Parameters

DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST parameters
The table below lists the parameters that can be set. The effective range of the configurable
parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to
transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 21)).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Recon- Effective range with configuration software, e.g.
figuration STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in RUN GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP1
Operating mode • Channel activated Channel Yes Channel Channel
activated
• Channel deactivated
Reaction to • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
CPU STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1

1 Only for configuration using the PROFIBUS GSD file; does not affect configuration with STEP 7 using HSP: As the
number of parameters with PROFIBUS GSD configuration is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station,
the configuration options are limited. If required, however, you can still set this parameter using data record 128 as de-
scribed in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see the table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 3
bytes.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 12
 Parameter assignment/addressing
4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Operating mode
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 13
Parameter assignment/addressing
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

Configuration options of DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST

The following configurations are possible:
● Configuration 1: Without value status
● Configuration 2: With value status

Evaluating the value status

An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit =1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit =0: Channel is deactivated or there is an error on the module.
If an error on a channel occurs with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space of the digital output module DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
value status are only available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-1 Address space of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module with value status

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and fault displays

LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables explain the meaning of the status and error displays.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

15 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and fault displays

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
Off

Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Load voltage status

5.2 Load voltage status

Load voltage status

The firmware of the module cannot detect the status of the load voltage.
If the "Load voltage status" function tied to the server module is used, a "1" is always
displayed in the status bit for a slot with the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST. Even when the load
voltage is not applied.
The state of the load voltage at the terminal does not impact the PROFIenegy behavior.

5.3 Interrupts
The DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A ST digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Channel temporarily unavailable
● Parameter assignment error

5.4 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED flashes on the
module. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
error for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Channel/component 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or • Wait for firmware update
temporarily unavailable has been canceled. The module does not
• Restart the firmware update
read in process values in this state.

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 17
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DQ 4×24...230VAC/2A ST

6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1
Product type designation DQ 4x24 ... 230VAC/2A
General information
Firmware version V1.0
• FW update possible Yes

Usable BaseUnits BU type B1

Color code for module-specific color identification CC41
label
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 / V13
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / -
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3
Operating mode
DQ Yes
DQ with energy-saving function No
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Rated value (AC) 230 V
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 11.5 mA
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 9 W; active power, load voltage 230 V, all outputs
loaded with 2 A, 50 Hz
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information
Input 1 byte; with QI
Output 1 bytes

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 18
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Sinking output No
Sourcing output Yes
Short-circuit protection No; install a fuse with 10A trigger current when
using a type B1 BU
Switching capacity of outputs
With resistive load, max. 2A
With lamp load, max. 100 W
Output voltage
For signal "1", min. 20.4 V
Output current
For signal "1" rated value 2A
For signal "1" permitted range, min. 10 mA
For signal "1" permitted range, max. 2A
For signal "0" residual current, max. 460 µA
Output delay with resistive load
"0" to "1", max. 10 ms
"1" to "0", max. 10 ms
Parallel switching of 2 outputs
For logic operations No
For increased performance No
For redundant control of a load Yes
Switching frequency
With resistive load, max. 10 Hz
With inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz
With lamp load, max. 1 Hz
Total current of outputs
Current per channel, max. 2A
Current per module, max. 8A
Total current of outputs (per module)
Horizontal installation
• up to 40 °C, max. 8A

• up to 50 °C, max. 6A

• up to 60 °C, max. 4A
Vertical installation
• up to 30 °C, max. 8A

• up to 40 °C, max. 6A

• up to 50 °C, max. 4A
Output current per channel
Horizontal installation
• up to 60 °C, max. 2A
Vertical installation
• up to 50 °C, max. 2A

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 19
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1
Triac outputs
Size of motor starter according to NEMA, max. 5
Cable length
Shielded, max. 1000 m
Unshielded, max. 600 m
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No
terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Substitute values can be applied Yes
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt No
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics No
Monitoring of supply voltage No
Diagnostics indicator LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels No
Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and the supply voltage of No
the electronics
Insulation
Insulation tested with DC 2545 V 2 s (routine test)
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

Dimension drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a
corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Structure of data record 128

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 21
Index

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB
 Index

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E32043575-AB 23
Digital output module ___________________
Preface

DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF ___________________
Documentation guide 1
(6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF
(6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

12/2015
A5E32855695-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E32855695-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 12/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 14
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................22
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................24
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................24
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 26
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................26
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 31
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................31

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
 Documentation guide

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 7
Documentation guide

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status/channel fault ⑪ Article number
⑥ LED for supply voltage

Image 2-1 View of the module DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 4 outputs
● Source output (PNP, P-switching)
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 2 A (per channel)
● Configurable diagnostics (per channel)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Safety-related shutdown
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Configuration in RUN
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
● Isochronous mode
● Module-internal Shared Output (MSO)

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions

Product version of the module Firmware version of the module

Function as of as of
Configurable submodules/ 1 V2.0.0
submodules for shared device

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.

Accessories
The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manualET 200SP
distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can use and combine the
different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnits in the system manual Distributed
I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
• The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

11 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and
2-wire connection).

① 1-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit

only)
② 2-wire connection M Ground
③ Backplane bus interface P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
④ Output electronics DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Polarity reversal protection .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC02 F0 to F3 Channel fault LED (red)
(optional)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when PWR Power LED (green)
light-colored BaseUnit is present)
DQn Output signal, channel n
Image 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire
connection).

① 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
CC71 (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored
light-colored BaseUnit is present) BaseUnit only)
DQn Output signal, channel n M Ground
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
Image 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 13
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 31)).

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration soft-

reassignment ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel
Short-circuit to L+
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Wire break
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 14
 Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameter Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration soft-

reassignment ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module (module group of the left
plugged into a dark Ba- module
seUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged
into light-colored Ba-
seUnit)

1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The parame-
ter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maxi-
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign the parameters using data records 64 to
67 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is
7 bytes.

Note
If one of the two parameters "Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+" or "Diagnostics: Wire break" is
enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off to avoid
triggering an undefined load. Note that a diagnostic interrupt can only be generated when
diagnostics are enabled. 1

1 as of module revision 04

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 15
Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+
Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input.

Configuration options of DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. When you
configure the module by means of the GSD file, the configuration is available under different
abbreviations/module names. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Abbreviation/module Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

name in the GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7, as of
V13, SP1
1 x 4-channel without value DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF X X X
status V1.0
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF X X ---
V1.0, QI
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF X X ---
for module-internal Shared V1.0, MSO
Output with up to 4 submodules
1 x 4-channel without value DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF --- X ---
status V2.0
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF --- X X
V2.0, QI
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V2. --- X ---
for module-internal Shared 0, MSO
Output with up to 4 submodules
2 x 2-channel without value DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF --- X ---
status V2.0, S.2
2 x 2-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF --- X ---
V2.0, S.2 QI

Note
The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and
the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the
IO device.
• Firmware update
• I&M identification data
• PROFIenergy

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 17
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

2 x 2-channel configuration
For the configuration, the channels of the module are divided into multiple submodules. The
submodules can be assigned to different IO controllers when the module is used in a Shared
Device.
The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Read the
information in the manual for the particular interface module.

Value status (quality information, QI)

The value status is always activated for the following module names:
● DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF QI
● DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF MSO
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status
indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module
terminal (0 = value is incorrect).

Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V1.0

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 4-channel
module without value status.

Image 4-1 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, QI without value
status

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V1.0, QI

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as a
4-channel module with value status. You can freely assign the start address for the module.
The addresses of the channels are derived from the start address.

Image 4-2 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, QI with value
status

Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V1.0, MSO

For the configuration as a 1 x 4-channel module (module-internal shared output, MSO),
channels 0 to 3 of the module are copied to up to four submodules. Channels 0 to 3 are then
available with identical values in various submodules. These submodules can be assigned to
up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device:
● The IO controller to which submodule 1 is assigned has write access to outputs 0 to 3.
● The IO controller to which submodule 2, 3, or 4 is assigned has read access to outputs 0
to 3.

Value status (Quality Information,QI)

The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs.
For the 1st submodule (= basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is
incorrect or that the IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP state.
For the 2nd to 4th submodule (= MSO submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the
value is incorrect or one of the following errors has occurred:
● The basic submodule is not yet configured (not ready).
● The connection between the IO controller and the basic submodule has been interrupted.
● The IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP or POWER OFF state.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for submodules 1, 2, 3, and
4 and the value status.

Image 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, MSO with value
status

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, S.2

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 2-channel
module without value status.
Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address.

Image 4-4 Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, S.2 without
value status

Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, S.2 QI

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 2-channel
module with value status.
Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address.

Image 4-5 Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V2.0, S.2 QI with
value status

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ Channel error (red)
④ PWR (green)

Image 5-1 LED display

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 22
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Remedial measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 24).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics
Flashes

LED channel status/channel error

Table 5- 2 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error

Channel status LED channel Meaning

LED error
Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off
 Off

Channel activated and no channel diagnostics
On Off

Channel activated and channel diagnostics
Off
 On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Missing supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 23
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing
● Channel temporarily unavailable
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.
The diagnostics of the two actuators influenced each other in the case of duplicate wiring.
This means:
• a wire break is only signaled if both actuators are affected
• a single short-circuit affects both actuators

Note
Parallel connection of two outputs
For parallel connection of two outputs for redundant control of a load, the channel
diagnostics "Short-circuit to L+" and "Wire break" must be deactivated.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit 1H • Short-circuit of actuator supply to Correct the process wiring
ground 1
• Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+ 2
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify
the wiring, for example, use cables with
larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and actu- Connect the cable
ator
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect a resistor to the actuator
contacts in the load resistance range
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage miss- 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
ing seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel/component 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
temporarily unavail- or has been canceled. The module does
• Restart the firmware update.
able not output any process or substitute val-
ues in this state.
1 only in switched state (output value 1)
2 only in non-switched state (output value 0)

Note
In case of a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ at the activated channel, load
distributions can occur which result in wire break diagnostics.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 25
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF

6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF, PU 1
Firmware version V2.0
• FW update possible Yes

Usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identification CC02
label
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 SP1 / -
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 / -
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3
Operating mode
DQ Yes
DQ with energy-saving function No
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO Yes
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Output voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 26
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 4 bytes; 2 channels per submodule + QI infor-
mation
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Sinking output No
Sourcing output Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 2.8 ... 5.2 A

Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to L+ -(37 to 41V)

Control of a digital input Yes; minimum current consumption 7 mA
Switching capacity of outputs
With resistive load, max. 2A
With lamp load, max. 10 W
Load resistance range
Low limit 12 Ω
High limit 3400 Ω
Output current
For signal "1" rated value 2A
For signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA
Output delay with resistive load
"0" to "1", typ. 50 µs
"1" to "0", typ. 100 µs
Parallel connection of two outputs
For increased performance No
Switching frequency
With resistive load, max. 100 Hz
With inductive load, max. 2 Hz
With lamp load, max. 10 Hz
Total current of the outputs
Current per channel, max. 2A
Current per module, max. 8A
Total current of the outputs (per module)
Horizontal installation
• Up to 40 ℃, max. 8A

• Up to 50 ℃, max. 6A

• Up to 60 ℃, max. 4A

Vertical installation
• Up to 30 °C, max. 8A

• Up to 40 ℃, max. 6A

• Up to 50 ℃, max. 4A

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 27
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
Cable length
Shielded, max. 1000 m
Unshielded, max. 600 m
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes
terminal)
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 500 µs
Jitter, max. 8 µs
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Substitute values can be applied Yes
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt Yes
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes
Wire break Yes; channel-based
Short-circuit Yes; channel-based
Group error Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels No
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Permitted potential difference
Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic insulation)
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Safety-related shutdown

Note
The digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF supports safety-related shutdown in
connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST:
• SIL according to IEC 61508: 2
• Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to
EN ISO 13849-1: d

Residual current for signal state "0"

Note
Residual current for signal state "0"
Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0"
signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker.
This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break
parameter.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 29
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Derating trend
The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting
positions.

Image 6-1 Load current for mounting position

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via
PROFIBUS-GSD.
You can configure the individual channels with data records 64 to 67.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can reassign the module parameters in RUN (e.g. "Switch on diagnostics" can be
changed in RUN).

Changing parameters in RUN

The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128 or data records 64 to 67. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU,
which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.
If you reconfigure a module and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these
diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing".

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the
STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

31 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Data record structure

Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 or data records 64 to 67

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Image A-2 Header information

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Image A-3 Structure of byte x to x+2 for channels 0 to 3

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 33
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transmitting the data record

The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there
are errors in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in the STATUS pa- Meaning Solution

rameter
(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine whether
the module is plugged in or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parame-
ters of the WREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header in- Correct the version, length and number of
formation parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
DQ operating mode DQ
___________________
(valve control) 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module Oversampling operating
___________________
mode 4
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS
(6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)
___________________
Pulse width modulation
operating mode 5
Manual

___________________
Cam control operating mode 6

___________________
Technical specifications 7

___________________
Parameter data records A

06/2018
A5E32855695-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E32855695-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2015 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 08/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in the system manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in the following, it applies to the central processing units
of the S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the
ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
STEP 7: To designate the configuring and programming software, we use "STEP 7" in this
documentation as a synonym for all versions of "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Recycling and disposal

For ecologically sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certified
disposal service for electronic scrap and dispose of the device in accordance with the
regulations in your country.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

4 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................12
3 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) .................................................................................................. 18
3.1 Wiring ......................................................................................................................................18
3.1.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................18
3.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................21
3.2.1 Normal operation/Valve control ..............................................................................................21
3.2.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................23
3.2.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................25
3.2.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................26
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................27
3.3.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................27
3.3.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................29
3.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................29
4 Oversampling operating mode .............................................................................................................. 31
4.1 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................31
4.1.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................31
4.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................34
4.2.1 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................34
4.2.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................35
4.2.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................37
4.2.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................38
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................39
4.3.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................39
4.3.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................41
4.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................41
5 Pulse width modulation operating mode ................................................................................................ 43
5.1 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................43
5.1.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................43
5.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................46
5.2.1 Pulse width modulation ...........................................................................................................46
5.2.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................49
5.2.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................52
5.2.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................54

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 5
Table of contents

5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................. 55

5.3.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 55
5.3.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 57
5.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 57
6 Cam control operating mode ................................................................................................................. 59
6.1 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 59
6.1.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 59
6.2 Parameters/address space .................................................................................................... 62
6.2.1 Cam control ............................................................................................................................ 62
6.2.2 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 70
6.2.3 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 74
6.2.3.1 Parameters in cam control operating mode ........................................................................... 74
6.2.3.2 Parameters for module to module communication (MtM) ...................................................... 78
6.2.4 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 79
6.2.4.1 Assignment of the control interface........................................................................................ 79
6.2.4.2 Notes on the control interface ................................................................................................ 80
6.2.4.3 Assignment of the feedback interface .................................................................................... 82
6.2.4.4 Notes on the feedback interface ............................................................................................ 84
6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................. 86
6.3.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 86
6.3.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 88
6.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 89
7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 90
7.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 90
7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS ..................................................................................... 95
A Parameter data records ........................................................................................................................ 98
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating
mode ...................................................................................................................................... 98
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling
operating mode .................................................................................................................... 104
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width
modulation operating mode ................................................................................................. 110
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control
operating mode .................................................................................................................... 116

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

6 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

8 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

10 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑧ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑨ Color coding of module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑩ Function and firmware version
④ Terminal diagram ⑪ Color code for selection of the color coding labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑫ BU type
⑥ LEDs for operating mode ⑬ Article number
⑦ LED for supply voltage

Figure 2-1 View of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS module

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

12 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 4 outputs (push-pull)
● Source output (PNP, sourcing output)
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 2 A (per channel)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW FW STEP 7 GSD file

Function version version TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Firmware update FS01 or V1.0.0 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
higher or high- higher with er with HSP 0230
er HSP 0127 V5.0
Identification data I&M FS01 or V1.0.0 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
higher or high- higher with er with HSP 0230
er HSP 0127 V5.0
Configuration in RUN FS01 or V1.0.0 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
higher or high- higher with er with HSP 0230
er HSP 0127 V5.0
PROFIenergy FS01 or V1.0.0 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or high- X -
higher or high- higher with er with HSP 0230
er HSP 0127 V5.0
Value status FS01 or V1.0.0 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or high- X -
higher or high- higher with er with HSP 0230
er HSP 0127 V5.0
Isochronous mode FS01 or V1.0.0 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or high- - -
higher or high- higher with er with HSP 0230
er HSP 0127 V5.0
Oversampling FS01 or V1.0.0 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or high- - -
higher or high- higher with er with HSP 0230
er HSP 0127 V5.0
Valve control FS01 or V1.0.0 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
higher or high- higher with er with HSP 0230
er HSP 0127 V5.0
Pulse width modulation FS01 or V1.0.0 V13 SP1 or V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
(PWM) higher or high- higher with er with HSP 0230
er HSP 0127 V5.0

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 13
Product overview
2.1 Properties

HW FW STEP 7 GSD file

Function version version TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Cam control (MCC - FS01 or V2.0.0 - - V5.6 HF4 or -
Modular CAM Control- higher or high- higher
ler) er
Module to module com- FS01 or V2.0.0 - - V5.6 HF4 or -
munication (MtM) higher or high- higher
er

Overview of operating modes, functions and parameters

The table below provides an overview of:
● The dependencies between the operating modes of the module and associated technical
functions
● The required parameter assignment for the respective operating mode

Table 2- 2 Operating modes, functions and parameters of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS

Function/Parameter as- Operating mode

signment Normal operation Valve Pulse width Oversampling Cam
control in normal modulation control
operation
Function
Isochronous mode 1 Yes, optional Yes, optional No Yes, required Yes
• Shortest send clock 125 µs 125 µs - 250 µs -

Oversampling No No No Yes No
• Number of over- - - - 2 to 32 -
sampling levels
(output rate)

• Shortest sub-cycle - - - 100 μs -

(= shortest sample
time)
Cam control - - - - Yes
• Maximum number of - - - - 4
cam tracks

• Maximum number of - - - - 16
cams per track
Value status (QI) x x - - x
Data length 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 16 bytes 14 bytes
input data
7 bytes
output data

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

14 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Function/Parameter as- Operating mode

signment Normal operation Valve Pulse width Oversampling Cam
control in normal modulation control
operation
Parameter assignment
Holding time valve control - x - - -
Pulse width modulation - x - - -
duty cycle
Pulse width modulation - x x - -
time period
Substitute value duty cycle - - x - -
Pulsed cam output duty - - - - x
cycle
Pulsed cam output period - - - - x
Modulo activated - - - - x
Hysteresis - - - - x
Axis reference position - - - - x
Encoder value - - - - x
minimum/maximum
Cam - - - - x
start position/end position
Cam effective direction - - - - x
Cam channel assignment - - - - x
1 Isochronous mode is not configurable using a GSD file.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 15
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Configuration options
You can configure the module with STEP 7 or with a GSD file. When you configure the
module using a GSD file, you can find the configuration under various short
designations/module names. Depending on the configuration, additional/different addresses
are assigned in the process image output/input.
The following configurations are possible:

Table 2- 3 Configuration options with GSD file of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7

name in the GSD file Can be integrated GSD file GSD file
in the hardware PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
catalog of STEP 7
(TIA Portal) V13
SP1 or higher
1 x 4-channel normal operation DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS x x x
without value status
1 x 4-channel normal operation DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS QI x x -
with value status
1 x 4-channel with pulse width DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS x x x
modulation PWM
1 x 4-channel with oversampling - x - -
1 x 4-channel with DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS - x -
cam control and MtM MCC MtM
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS - x -
MCC (16 Byte) MtM
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS - x -
MCC (6 Byte) MtM

Value status (quality information, QI)

The value status is always activated for the following module names in the GSD file:
● DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS QI (...)
● DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS MCC MtM (...)

Evaluating the value status

If you enable the value status function for the digital module, a byte in the input address
space is additionally assigned. Bits 0 to 3 of this byte are each assigned to one channel.
They provide information about the validity of the digital value.
● Bit = 1: No error is present on the channel.
● Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is an error in the module.
If an error occurs on a channel of this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

16 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

See also
Technical specifications (Page 90)

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 17
DQ operating mode DQ (valve control) 3
3.1 Wiring

3.1.1 Wiring and block diagram

In this section, you can find the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module showing
the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection in DQ operating mode.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.

Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Note
• The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also
during the configuration.
• The connection of actuators with 1-wire connection is not permitted.

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
Outputs DQn- must not be connected with ground.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

18 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.1 Wiring

Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (2-wire
connection).

① 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit

only)
② Backplane bus interface M Ground
③ Control unit P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light
BaseUnit)
④ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light PWM Pulse width modulation LED (green)
BaseUnit is present)
DQn+ Output signal, channel n OVS Oversampling LED (green)
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 19
DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.1 Wiring

Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).

① 3-wire connection 1 A ... 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
③ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit
BaseUnit is present) only)
DQn+ Output signal, channel n M Ground
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light Ba-
seUnit)
Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

20 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2.1 Normal operation/Valve control

Normal operation
"Normal operation" refers to the function of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS as digital output
module.
Valve control is a special function of normal operation.

Valve control function

You can use the valve control function to switch to a lower "holding current" after operating
the valve (inrush current). You do this by activating a pulse width modulation (see section
Pulse width modulation (Page 46)).
At a 0 → 1 change of the digital channel, the configured hold time is started. After the hold
time elapses, the pulse duty cycle becomes "modulated upon" in the form of a pulse width
modulation. The actuating signal is output digitally as a pulse train of on and off pulses.

Configuration
You configure valve control with the following parameters:
● "Normal operation" operating mode
● Holding time valve control
● Pulse width modulation duty cycle
● Pulse width modulation time period

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 21
DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.2 Parameters/address space

Chronological sequence
The figure below shows the chronological sequence for valve control. The pulse width
modulation is activated in the next possible data cycle.

① Data cycle
② Holding time valve control
Figure 3-3 Valve control

"Pulse width modulation time period" parameter

You use the "Pulse width modulation time period" parameter to specify the frequency of the
pulse width modulation "modulated upon" for the valve control (see section Pulse width
modulation (Page 46)).
Note: When this is parameter is set to "Off", the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS is in normal operation
without valve control.

"Pulse width modulation duty cycle" parameter

You use the "Pulse width modulation duty cycle" parameter (0 ... 1000) to specify the pulse
duty cycle of the "modulated upon" pulse width modulation within the configured period.
Note: Unlike in the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode, the duty factor cannot be
updated cyclically as a function of an output value from the user program in normal operation
with valve control.

Derating
Read the information on derating of the module in section Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A
HS (Page 95).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

22 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2.2 Parameters

DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS parameters
The effective range of the assignable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the
parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning the
parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the
module using data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the
parameter data record for DQ operating mode (Page 98).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 3- 1 Assignable parameters in DQ operating mode (valve control) (GSD file) 3

Parameter Value range Default Configura- Effective range with configura-

tion tion software
in RUN HSP0127 for GSD file
STEP 7 PROFIBUS
(TIA Portal); DP 1
HSP0230 for
STEP 7;
GSD file
PROFINET IO
Operating mode 4 • Normal operation DQ No Module Module 1
(valve control) 2
• Oversampling
• Pulse width modulation
• Cam control
Output rate • 1 value/cycle 1 value/cycle No Module Module1

Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1

No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1
Short circuit to L+/G
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel 1
• Enable
Reaction to • Shutdown Shutdown Yes Channel Module 1
CPU STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 23
DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.2 Parameters/address space

Parameter Value range Default Configura- Effective range with configura-

tion tion software
in RUN HSP0127 for GSD file
STEP 7 PROFIBUS
(TIA Portal); DP 1
HSP0230 for
STEP 7;
GSD file
PROFINET IO
Holding time • 10 ms 500 ms Yes Channel Channel 1
valve control
• 20 ms
• ...
• 10 s
Pulse width modulation • 0% 50% Yes Channel Channel 1
duty cycle
• 0.1%
• 0.2%
• ...
• 100%
Pulse width modulation • Off Off Yes Channel Channel 1
time period
• 0.20 ms
• 0.40 ms
• 0.93 ms
• 1.33 ms
• 4.27 ms
• 10.67 ms
• 21.33 ms
• 34.13 ms
• 59.73 ms
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module 1
left module (dark Ba- group of the left
seUnit) module

• Enable new potential

group (light BaseUnit)

1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station when configuring with a
PROFIBUS GSD, the possible parameter assignments are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters
using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length
of the I/O module is 15 bytes.
2 Valve control is a special function of normal operation.
3 Oversampling is not supported with GSD files.
4 When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the
module name.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

24 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.2 Parameters/address space

3.2.3 Explanation of parameters

Operating mode
At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are
operated. When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the
operating mode when you select the module name.
● Normal operation as digital output module
– Valve control is a special function of normal operation, see section Normal
operation/Valve control (Page 21).
● Pulse width modulation, see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46)
● Oversampling, see section Oversampling (Page 34)
● Cam control, see section Cam control (Page 62)

Output rate
Specifies the number of subcycles per isochronous data cycle.
See section Oversampling (Page 34).

Diagnostics No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G

Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs.

Channel activated
Specifies whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Holding time valve control

Specifies the time which must expire before the pulse width modulated output signal is
output in the next possible data cycle.
See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 25
DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.2 Parameters/address space

Pulse width modulation duty cycle

Specifies the pulse duty cycle for the "modulated upon" pulse width modulation for the valve
control.
See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21).

Pulse width modulation time period

Specifies the frequency of the pulse width modulation.
See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21) and section Pulse width modulation
(Page 46).

Potential group
With the "Potential group" parameter, you specify whether the module is plugged into a light
or dark BaseUnit.
A potential group always begins with an I/O module that is plugged into a light BaseUnit. All
modules inserted to the right of this that are plugged into dark BaseUnits belong to the same
potential group, because the dark BaseUnits are supplied via the light BaseUnits.
The potential group ends at a new light BaseUnit or the end of the station.

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

3.2.4 Address space

Address space for configuration as a 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as a
4-channel module with value status (normal operation without/with valve control). The
addresses for the value status are only available if the value status was enabled.

Figure 3-4 Address space for configuration as a 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS with value status

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

26 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Evaluating the value status

If you enable the value status for the digital module, a byte in the input address space is
additionally assigned. Bits 0 to 3 of this byte are each assigned to one channel. They provide
information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No error is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is an error in the module.
If an error occurs on a channel of this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

3.3.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the location of the LED displays of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ OVS (green)
④ PWM (green)
⑤ PWR (green)

Figure 3-5 LED displays

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 27
DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms.

DIAG LED

Table 3- 2 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 3- 3 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status LED Meaning

Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off
Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

OVS LED and PWM LED

Table 3- 4 Status display of the oversampling LED

OVS LED PWM LED Meaning

DQ operating mode (valve control) active
Off Off
Oversampling operating mode active
On Off
Pulse width modulation operating mode active
Off On
Cam control (MCC) operating mode active
On On

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

28 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

PWR LED

Table 3- 5 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

3.3.2 Interrupts
The DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short circuit
● Excess temperature
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage
● Communication error
● Channel temporarily not available
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

3.3.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is output and the DIAG LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics
event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.
The diagnostics of the two actuators influence each other in the case of duplicate wiring.
This means that a single short-circuit affects both actuators.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 29
DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Table 3- 6 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Solution

Short circuit 1 2 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring
Excess temperature 5H The module has detected that the maxi- Correct the process wiring
mum permitted module temperature has
been exceeded. All channels of the mod-
ule are switched to high resistance. The
module is then restarted.
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
voltage seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Communication 13H Module is defective. Replace the module.
error
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
not available or was canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module does not output any process
values or substitute values in this state.
1 The channels 0 and 1 or 2 and 3 each form a load group. Within a load group, a short-circuit can have an effect on the
adjacent channel. The load groups do not have an effect on each other in the case of a short-circuit.
2 If the short-circuit persists, the module heats up. This may trigger temperature monitoring with excess temperature
diagnostic interrupt.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

30 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
Oversampling operating mode 4
4.1 Connecting

4.1.1 Wiring and block diagram

In this section, you can find the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module showing
the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection in oversampling operating
mode.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.

Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Note
• The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also
during the configuration.
• The connection of actuators with 1-wire connection is not permitted.

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
Outputs DQn- must not be connected with ground.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 31
Oversampling operating mode
4.1 Connecting

Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (2-wire
connection).

① 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit

only)
② Backplane bus interface M Ground
③ Control unit P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
④ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light PWM Pulse width modulation LED (green)
BaseUnit is present)
DQn+ Output signal oversampling, channel n OVS Oversampling LED (green)
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 4-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

32 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Oversampling operating mode
4.1 Connecting

Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).

① 3-wire connection 1 A ... 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
③ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit
BaseUnit is present) only)
DQn+ Output signal oversampling, channel n M Ground
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
Figure 4-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 33
Oversampling operating mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2.1 Oversampling

Function
Oversampling is the output of data in constant bus cycle segments (sub-cycles), whereby n
sub-cycles correspond to one PROFINET bus cycle. A data packet is transmitted from the
controller to the module, which outputs the packet in n constant bus sub-cycles.
Oversampling is useful whenever you require output of data with high time resolution but
without using an extremely short PROFINET bus cycle and thus fast CPU cycles.
With oversampling, a PROFINET bus cycle is divided into constant bus sub-cycles:
● Each sub-cycle returns a 4-bit output value.
● A sub-cycle is at least 100 μs long.
● Sub-cycles are possible in increments of 2 to 32 (only even numbers). The following
applies here: Isochronous data cycle / number of sub-cycles ≥ permitted sub-cycle
duration (100 μs).

Requirement
Oversampling is only possible when isochronous mode is set.

Configuration
You configure oversampling with the following parameters:
● "Oversampling" operating mode
● Output rate

Note
When oversampling is configured, do not use any reduction ratio of blocks in the runtime
groups of your user program. Make sure that the output of data in the module is
synchronized with the user program of the CPU.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

34 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Oversampling operating mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

Chronological sequence
The figure below shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The output data
present in the CPU is output in the data cycle after the next one, distributed across the sub-
cycles which are generated on the actual module.

n Output values from bus cycle n

Sub- 4 bit x 32 (max) each = max. 16 bytes output data per data cycle
cycle

Figure 4-3 Oversampling

Derating
Read the information on derating of the module in section Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A
HS (Page 95).

4.2.2 Parameters

DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS parameters
The effective range of the assignable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the
parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning the
parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the
module using data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the
parameter data record for oversampling operating mode (Page 104).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 35
Oversampling operating mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Assignable parameters in oversampling operating mode

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Effective range

in RUN with configuration
software
HSP0127 for
STEP 7 (TIA
Portal);
HSP0230 for
STEP 7
Operating mode 1 • Normal operation DQ (valve No Module
control) 2
• Oversampling
• Pulse width modulation
• Cam control
Output rate • 2 values/cycle No Module
• 4 values/cycle
• ...
• 32 values/cycle
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module
No supply
• Enable
voltage L+
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module
Short circuit to L+/G
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel
• Enable
Reaction to • Shutdown Shutdown Yes Channel
CPU STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1
Potential group • Use potential group of the left Use potential No Module
module (dark BaseUnit) group of the left
module
• Enable new potential group
(light BaseUnit)

1 When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name.
2 Valve control is a special function of normal operation.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

36 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Oversampling operating mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2.3 Explanation of parameters

Operating mode
At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are
operated. When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7, you determine the operating mode
when you select the module name.
● Normal operation as digital output module
– Valve control is a special function of normal operation, see section Normal
operation/Valve control (Page 21).
● Pulse width modulation, see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46)
● Oversampling, see section Oversampling (Page 34)
● Cam control, see section Cam control (Page 62)

Output rate
Specifies the number of subcycles per isochronous data cycle.
See section Oversampling (Page 34).

Diagnostics No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G

Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs.

Channel activated
Specifies whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
With the "Potential group" parameter, you specify whether the module is plugged into a light
or dark BaseUnit.
A potential group always begins with an I/O module that is plugged into a light BaseUnit. All
modules inserted to the right of this that are plugged into dark BaseUnits belong to the same
potential group, because the dark BaseUnits are supplied via the light BaseUnits.
The potential group ends at a new light BaseUnit or the end of the station.

See also
Distributed I/O System ET 200SP
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293)

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 37
Oversampling operating mode
4.2 Parameters/address space

4.2.4 Address space

Address space for configuration with oversampling

The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with
oversampling.

Figure 4-4 Address space of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS with oversampling

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

38 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Oversampling operating mode
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

4.3.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the location of the LED displays of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ OVS (green)
④ PWM (green)
⑤ PWR (green)

Figure 4-5 LED displays

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 39
Oversampling operating mode
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms.

DIAG LED

Table 4- 2 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 4- 3 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status LED Meaning

Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off
Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

OVS LED and PWM LED

Table 4- 4 Status display of the oversampling LED

OVS LED PWM LED Meaning

DQ operating mode (valve control) active
Off Off
Oversampling operating mode active
On Off
Pulse width modulation operating mode active
Off On
Cam control (MCC) operating mode active
On On

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

40 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Oversampling operating mode
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

PWR LED

Table 4- 5 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

4.3.2 Interrupts
The DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short circuit
● Excess temperature
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage
● Communication error
● Channel temporarily not available
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

4.3.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is output and the DIAG LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics
event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.
The diagnostics of the two actuators influence each other in the case of duplicate wiring.
This means that a single short-circuit affects both actuators.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 41
Oversampling operating mode
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Table 4- 6 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Solution

Short circuit 1 2 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring
Excess temperature 5H The module has detected that the maxi- Correct the process wiring
mum permitted module temperature has
been exceeded. All channels of the mod-
ule are switched to high resistance. The
module is then restarted.
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
voltage seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Communication 13H Module is defective. Replace the module.
error
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
not available or was canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module does not output any process
values or substitute values in this state.
1 The channels 0 and 1 or 2 and 3 each form a load group. Within a load group, a short-circuit can have an effect on the
adjacent channel. The load groups do not have an effect on each other in the case of a short-circuit.
2 If the short-circuit persists, the module heats up. This may trigger temperature monitoring with excess temperature
diagnostic interrupt.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

42 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
Pulse width modulation operating mode 5
5.1 Connecting

5.1.1 Wiring and block diagram

In this section, you can find the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module showing
the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection in pulse width modulation
operating mode.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.

Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Note
• The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also
during the configuration.
• The connection of actuators with 1-wire connection is not permitted.

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
Outputs DQn- must not be connected with ground.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 43
Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.1 Connecting

Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (2-wire
connection).

① 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit

only)
② Backplane bus interface M Ground
③ Control unit P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
④ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light PWM Pulse width modulation LED (green)
BaseUnit is present)
DQn+ Output signal pulse width modulation, channel n OVS Oversampling LED (green)
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 5-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

44 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.1 Connecting

Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).

① 3-wire connection 1 A ... 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
③ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit
BaseUnit is present) only)
DQn+ Output signal pulse width modulation, channel n M Ground
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light Ba-
seUnit)
Figure 5-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 45
Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

5.2 Parameters/address space

5.2.1 Pulse width modulation

Function
In the "pulse width modulation" operating mode, the four outputs only provide a pulse width
modulated output signal.
The digital channel is activated with a pulse duty cycle that is updated cyclically as a function
of the output value from the user program. The actuating signal is output digitally as a pulse
train of on and off pulses.

① Time period T; frequency of the pulse width modulation: f = 1/T

② Pulse duration (duty factor)

Figure 5-3 Pulse width modulation

Configuration
You configure the pulse width modulation with the following parameters:
● "Pulse width modulation" operating mode
● Pulse width modulation time period
● Substitute value duty cycle

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

46 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

Chronological sequence
The output value (0 ... 1000) is written from the user program to the output word of the
channel. The module maps this value by means of the output characteristic and the values
for minimum pulse duration and minimum pulse pause to the configured time period and thus
determines the pulse duty cycle (the pulse duration) of the pulse width modulation.

① Time period T
② Minimum pulse duration
③ Minimum pulse pause

Figure 5-4 Minimum pulse duration and minimum pulse pause

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 47
Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

The minimum pulse duration and the minimum pulse pause are at least 2 μs each, which
means:
● Any pulse duration that is shorter than the minimum pulse duration will be suppressed
● Any pulse duration that is longer than the time period minus minimum pulse duration is
reduced to 100% (≙ output value 1000)

① Minimum pulse pause

② Output characteristic
③ Minimum pulse duration
Figure 5-5 Output characteristic of the pulse duration

The following values apply when determining the pulse duty cycle of the pulse width
modulation:

Table 5- 1 Determining the pulse duty cycle of the pulse width modulation

Time period parameter Frequency Output value in the user Pulse duty cycle at output
program (‰) terminal DQn (‰)
0.20 ms 5000 Hz 0...9 0
10...990 10...990
991...1000 1000
0.40 ms 2500 Hz 0...4 0
5...995 5...995
996...1000 1000
0.93 ms 1071 Hz 0...2 0
3...997 3...997
998...1000 1000
1.33 ms 750 Hz 0, 1 0
2...998 2...998
999, 1000 1000
4.27 ms 234 Hz 0...1000 0...1000

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

48 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

Time period parameter Frequency Output value in the user Pulse duty cycle at output
program (‰) terminal DQn (‰)
10.67 ms 94 Hz 0...1000 0...1000
21.33 ms 47 Hz 0...1000 0...1000
34.13 ms 29 Hz 0...1000 0...1000
59.73 ms 17 Hz 0...1000 0...1000

Example
When you configure a channel with 5000 Hz (≙ 200 μs) and the user program writes the
value 3 to the output word of the channel, this value is converted to 0 by the module: The
channel is permanently 0.

"Diagnostics Overflow" parameter

You use the "Diagnostics Overflow" parameter to enable the diagnostics for the case that the
permitted value range of the duty factor is exceeded, i.e. an output value > 1000 from the
user program is written to the output word of the channel.

"Substitute value duty cycle" parameter

You use the "Substitute value duty cycle" parameter (0 ... 1000) to specify the pulse duty
cycle of the pulse width modulation in the case of a CPU STOP.

Derating
Read the information on derating of the module in section Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A
HS (Page 95).

5.2.2 Parameters

Parameters
The effective range of the assignable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the
parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning the
parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the
module using data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the
parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode (Page 110).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 49
Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

The following parameter settings are possible for the respective operating mode:

Table 5- 2 Assignable parameters in pulse width modulation operating mode (GSD file) 3

Parameter Value range Default Configura- Effective range with configura-

tion tion software
in RUN HSP0127 for GSD file
STEP 7 (TIA PROFIBUS
Portal); DP 1
HSP0230 for
STEP 7;
GSD file
PROFINET IO
Operating mode 4 • Normal operation DQ No Module Module 1
(valve control) 2
• Oversampling
• Pulse width modulation
• Cam control
Output rate • 1 value/cycle 1 value/cycle No Module Module1

Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1

No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1
Short circuit to L+/G
• Enable
Diagnostics Overflow • Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel 1
• Enable
Reaction to • Shutdown Shutdown Yes Channel Module 1
CPU STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value
Substitute value • 0% 0% Yes Channel Channel 1
duty cycle
• 0.1%
• 0.2%
• ...
• 100%

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

50 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

Parameter Value range Default Configura- Effective range with configura-

tion tion software
in RUN HSP0127 for GSD file
STEP 7 (TIA PROFIBUS
Portal); DP 1
HSP0230 for
STEP 7;
GSD file
PROFINET IO
Pulse width modulation • Off 0.93 ms Yes Channel Channel 1
time period
• 0.20 ms
• 0.40 ms
• 0.93 ms
• 1.33 ms
• 4.27 ms
• 10.67 ms
• 21.33 ms
• 34.13 ms
• 59.73 ms
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module 1
left module (dark Ba- group of the left
seUnit) module

• Enable new potential

group (light BaseUnit)

1 Because the number of parameters is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station when configuring with a
PROFIBUS GSD, the possible parameter assignments are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters
using the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length
of the I/O module is 15 bytes.
2 Valve control is a special function of normal operation.
3 Oversampling is not supported with GSD files.
4 When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the
module name.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 51
Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

5.2.3 Explanation of parameters

Operating mode
At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are
operated. When configuring with HSP0230 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, you determine the
operating mode when you select the module name.
● Normal operation as digital output module
– Valve control is a special function of normal operation, see section Normal
operation/Valve control (Page 21).
● Pulse width modulation, see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46)
● Oversampling, see section Oversampling (Page 34)
● Cam control, see section Cam control (Page 62)

Output rate
Specifies the number of subcycles per isochronous data cycle.
See section Oversampling (Page 34).

Diagnostics No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G

Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs.

Diagnostics Overflow
You use the "Diagnostics Overflow" parameter to enable the diagnostics for the case that the
permitted value range of the duty factor is exceeded, i.e. an output value > 1000 from the
user program is written to the output word of the channel. See section Pulse width
modulation (Page 46).

Channel activated
Specifies whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

52 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

Substitute value duty cycle

You use the "Substitute value duty cycle" parameter (0 ... 1000) to specify the pulse duty
cycle of the pulse width modulation in the case of a CPU STOP. See section Pulse width
modulation (Page 46).

Pulse width modulation time period

Specifies the frequency of the pulse width modulation.
See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 21) and section Pulse width modulation
(Page 46).

Potential group
With the "Potential group" parameter, you specify whether the module is plugged into a light
or dark BaseUnit.
A potential group always begins with an I/O module that is plugged into a light BaseUnit. All
modules inserted to the right of this that are plugged into dark BaseUnits belong to the same
potential group, because the dark BaseUnits are supplied via the light BaseUnits.
The potential group ends at a new light BaseUnit or the end of the station.

Derating
Read the information on derating of the module in section Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A
HS (Page 95).

See also
Distributed I/O System ET 200SP
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293)

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 53
Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.2 Parameters/address space

5.2.4 Address space

Address space for configuration with pulse width modulation

The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with pulse width
modulation.

Figure 5-6 Address space of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS with pulse width modulation

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

54 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

5.3.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the location of the LED displays of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ OVS (green)
④ PWM (green)
⑤ PWR (green)

Figure 5-7 LED displays

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 55
Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms.

DIAG LED

Table 5- 3 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 4 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status LED Meaning

Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off
Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

OVS LED and PWM LED

Table 5- 5 Status display of the oversampling LED

OVS LED PWM LED Meaning

DQ operating mode (valve control) active
Off Off
Oversampling operating mode active
On Off
Pulse width modulation operating mode active
Off On
Cam control (MCC) operating mode active
On On

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

56 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

PWR LED

Table 5- 6 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

5.3.2 Interrupts
The DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short circuit
● Excess temperature
● High limit violated
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage
● Communication error
● Channel temporarily not available
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

5.3.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is output and the DIAG LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics
event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.
The diagnostics of the two actuators influence each other in the case of duplicate wiring.
This means that a single short-circuit affects both actuators.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 57
Pulse width modulation operating mode
5.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Table 5- 7 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Solution

Short circuit 1 2 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring
Excess temperature 5H The module has detected that the maxi- Correct the process wiring
mum permitted module temperature has
been exceeded. All channels of the mod-
ule are switched to high resistance. The
module is then restarted.
High limit violated 7H The permitted value range of the duty Correct the output value (0 to 1000)
factor has been exceeded.
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
voltage seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Communication 13H Module is defective. Replace the module.
error
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
not available or was canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module does not output any process
values or substitute values in this state.
1 The channels 0 and 1 or 2 and 3 each form a load group. Within a load group, a short-circuit can have an effect on the
adjacent channel. The load groups do not have an effect on each other in the case of a short-circuit.
2 If the short-circuit persists, the module heats up. This may trigger temperature monitoring with excess temperature
diagnostic interrupt.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

58 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
Cam control operating mode 6
6.1 Connecting

6.1.1 Wiring and block diagram

In this section, you can find the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module showing
the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection in cam control operating mode.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.

Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Note
• The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also
during the configuration.
• The connection of actuators with 1-wire connection is not permitted.

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
Outputs DQn- must not be connected with ground.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 59
Cam control operating mode
6.1 Connecting

Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (2-wire
connection).

① 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit

only)
② Backplane bus interface M Ground
③ Control unit P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
④ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light PWM Pulse width modulation LED (green)
BaseUnit is present)
DQn+ Output signal cam control, channel n OVS Oversampling LED (green)
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
MCC Oversampling LED (green) and
Power LED (green)
Figure 6-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

60 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.1 Connecting

Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).

① 3-wire connection 1 A ... 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels CCxx (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
③ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light BaseUnit
BaseUnit is present) only)
DQn+ Output signal cam control, channel n M Ground
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
Figure 6-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 61
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

6.2 Parameters/address space

6.2.1 Cam control

Function
In "Cam control" operating mode, switching signals are generated dependent on an encoder
value.
The axis can be executed as:
● Linear axis
● Rotary axis with modulo function
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system determines the current actual position value of the axis
using an encoder that is connected to an encoder module, e.g. I/O module or TM Count
1x24V/TM PosInput 1 technology module. In doing so, the encoder signals are evaluated,
e.g. the pulses, which are proportional to the distance covered, are counted. The digital
outputs (cams) switch on or off depending on the actual position value. However, the output
value can be overruled by the control interface, PROFIenergy or CPU STOP.
A maximum of 16 cams can be configured for each DQ4HS module. These 16 cams can be
distributed among the 4 outputs of the module as desired.
You realize a cam control with more than 4 cam tracks with the help of several DQ4HS
modules, whereby each DQ4HS module can represent up to 4 cam tracks. All the DQ4HS
modules of this cam control unit are supplied from a single encoder source but have their
own input/output area. Each DQ4HS module has its own control/feedback interface and can
operate independent of the other DQ4HS module in the multi-track cam control unit.
The DQ4HS module can also be used in mixed operation. In mixed operation, a portion of
the outputs can be used as cam track and the rest of the outputs can be controlled directly
by the CPU.

Requirement
The cam control function can only be used in combination with an interface module that
supports module to module communication (MtM). For example, interface module
IM 155-6 PN/2 HF V4.1 or higher.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

62 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Configuration
You configure the cam control with the following parameters:
● "Cam control" operating mode
● Modulo activated
● Encoder module
● Hysteresis
● Axis reference position
● Minimum encoder value/Maximum encoder value
● Cam start position and end position
● Cam effective direction
● Cam channel assignment
● Pulsed cam output duty cycle
● Pulsed cam output period

Note
Pulsed cam output
You can activate/deactivate the pulsed cam output via the control interface.

Encoder data
"Cam control" operating mode requires an external encoder that is connected to a separate
encoder module. The encoder module must be in the same station. The interface module
uses module to module communication (MtM) to transfer the encoder data from the encoder
module to the DQ4HS module where the encoder data is processed. The module to module
communication (MtM) must be appropriately configured in the configuration.
The encoder value contains the axis position within the encoder data. Multiple electronic
cams (switching points as a function of the encoder value) can be configured in the DQ4HS
module. Through these cams, the digital outputs exhibit a defined switching behavior in
relation to the encoder value. In "Cam control" operating mode, the digital output is the cam
track. Mechanical vibrations of the encoder can be compensated using a configurable
hysteresis.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 63
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

The configured range of the cam (cam start and end positions and effective direction) is
compared with the encoder value, and the switching state (0/1) of the digital output (cam
track) is generated based on the result of the comparison.

Note
Incorrect switching operation due to increment jumps
Increment jumps can occur if, due to the system, an encoder value is not transferred to the
digital output module at each increment of the sensor, e.g. a value is transferred at only
every fourth increment. As a result, the output can be switched on and off incorrectly.
If increment jumps are possible in your system, ensure that the maximum increment jump is
less than 1/2 x (maximum encoder value - minimum encoder value).

Note
Direction detection
If no direction information is included with the supplied encoder data, two valid different
encoder values are needed for the direction detection (SYNC = 1). The two values allow a
subtraction to be performed and the direction to be derived from the result.

Cam start position and end position

The switch-on range of cams is basically defined by a start position and end position.

Figure 6-3 Cam start position and end position

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

64 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Effective direction
A cam can be switched as a function of the motion direction.
The following effective directions are possible for the cams:

None:
The cam is not evaluated.

Positive:
Switching behavior for effective direction "Positive"
● The cam switches on when the start position is reached in the positive motion direction
①.
● The cam switches off when the end position is crossed in the positive motion direction ②.
● At a direction reversal within the switch-on range from the positive to negative effective
direction, the cam is switched off ③.
● At a direction reversal within the switch-on range from the negative to positive effective
direction, the cam is switched on ④.

Figure 6-4 Cam with effective direction "Positive"

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 65
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Negative:
Switching behavior for effective direction "Negative":
● The cam switches on when the end position is reached in the negative motion direction
①.
● The cam switches off when the start position is crossed in the negative motion direction
②.
● At a direction reversal within the switch-on range from the negative to positive effective
direction, the cam is switched off ③.
● At a direction reversal within the switch-on range from the positive to negative effective
direction, the cam is switched on ④.

Figure 6-5 Cam with effective direction "Negative"

Both:
Switching behavior for effective direction "Both":
● The cam switches on when the encoder value is within the switch-on range ①.

Figure 6-6 Cam with effective direction "Both"

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

66 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Hysteresis
Fluctuations of the position value of an axis can cause unwanted switching on and off in the
cam control. Such unwanted switching states can be suppressed by configuring a hysteresis
(> 0).
The hysteresis is a position tolerance within which the position values may vary without
changing the switching state of the cam. Changes of direction detected within the hysteresis
are ignored.

Behavior when hysteresis is activated:

● The status of the hysteresis is indicated in the feedback interface (HYS).
● The configured hysteresis width is in effect for all cams.
● The hysteresis boundary points can be read out on the HYS-START and HYS-END
registers. They represent the hysteresis range spanned by the firmware.
● The hysteresis is always reevaluated by the firmware if no hysteresis range is currently
activated on the cam (HYS=0) at the time of a direction reversal.
● The hysteresis range extends in the positive and negative directions around the detected
direction reversal point. The hysteresis range thus extends over double the configured
hysteresis.
● The following applies within the hysteresis:
– The switching state of the cam is not changed.
● After the hysteresis range is exited, the output is set according to the cam settings.

① Actual position
② Effective position
③ Effective hysteresis

Figure 6-7 Hysteresis range - Detail

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 67
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

The following example shows the effects of the hysteresis on the switching behavior of the
cam with positive effective direction. The hysteresis keeps the output stable when the
encoder value signals a small direction reversal. For better orientation, lines are shown for
the signal changes.

① Hysteresis range
② Encoder value

Figure 6-8 Cam with hysteresis

Channel assignment
You use the channel assignment to specify the assignment of output channel to cam. You
can assign an output channel to each cam. All cams that are assigned to the same output
channel must not overlap.

Note
Effective direction
Cams with configured effective direction "None" are disabled.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

68 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Pulsed cam output

It is possible to pulse the cams. This function can be activated via a control interface and is
active while a cam has state 1. You configure the pulsed cam output with the "Pulsed cam
output duty cycle" and "Pulsed cam output period" parameters.
You use the "Pulsed cam output duty cycle" parameter (0 ... 1000) to specify the pulse duty
cycle of the "modulated upon" pulse within the configured period.

Note
In contrast to the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode, the duty cycle cannot be
updated cyclically as a function of an output value from the user program.

You use the "Pulsed cam output period" parameter to specify the frequency of the pulse
"modulated upon" for the cam control.

Note
The edges of the pulsed output cam are not synchronized with the cam start or end.
If the interpulse period is currently active, the first rising edge can come later at the cam start
and the last falling edge can come earlier at the cam end.

① TON
② Period
Duty cycle = TON / Period * 100%
Figure 6-9 Pulsed cam output

Example of the application of the pulsed cam output:

A glue trace is to be applied to a box for adhesion. To save glue, glue dots will be placed
instead of a continuous trace in the switch-on range (cam).

See also
Pulse width modulation (Page 46)

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 69
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

6.2.2 Parameters

Parameters
The effective range of the assignable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the
parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning the
parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the parameters to the
module using data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the
parameter data record for cam control operating mode (Page 116).
The module to module communication (MtM) must also be configured for the cam control
operating mode. You can find additional information regarding module to module
communication (MtM), e.g. in manual Interface Module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF.
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 6- 1 Assignable parameters in cam control operating mode (GSD file) 2

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Effective range

in RUN with configuration
software
GSD file
PROFINET IO
Operating mode 3 • Normal operation DQ (valve No Module
control) 1
• Oversampling
• Pulse width modulation
• Cam control
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module
Short circuit to L+/G
• Enable
Encoder source diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module
• Enable
Modulo activated • Disable Disable Yes Module
• Enable

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

70 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Effective range

in RUN with configuration
software
GSD file
PROFINET IO
Encoder module • DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.0 DI 8x24VDC HS, No Module
Count, Ch.0
• DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.1
• DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.2
• DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.3
• AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, Ch.0
• AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, Ch.1
• AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, QI, Ch.0
• AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, QI, Ch.1
• TM Count 1x24VDC, Ch.0 4
• TM Count 1x24VDC Fastmode,
Ch.0
• TM PosInput 1, Ch.0 4
• TM PosInput 1 Fastmode, Ch.0
• AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS, Ch.0 4
• AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS, Ch.1 4
Hysteresis • 0 = Not activated 0 = Not activated Yes Module
• 1 to 65535
Axis reference position • -2,147,483,648 to 0 Yes Module
2,147,483,647
Minimum encoder value • -2,147,483,648 to 0 Yes Module
2,147,483,647
Maximum encoder value • -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,646 Yes Module
2,147,483,647
Cam 0 start position to • -2,147,483,648 to 0 Yes Module
Cam 15 start position 2,147,483,647
Cam 0 end position to Cam • -2,147,483,648 to 0 Yes Module
15 end position 2,147,483,647
Cam 0 effective direction to • None None Yes Module
Cam 15 effective direction
• Positive
• Negative
• Both
Cam 0 channel assignment • Channel 0 Channel 0 Yes Module
to Cam 15 channel
• Channel 1
assignment
• Channel 2
• Channel 3

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 71
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Effective range

in RUN with configuration
software
GSD file
PROFINET IO
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel
• Enable
Reaction to CPU STOP • Shutdown Shutdown Yes Channel
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1
Pulsed cam output duty • 0% 50% Yes Channel
cycle
• 0.1%
• 0.2%
• ...
• 100%
Pulsed cam output period • Off 0.93 ms Yes Channel
• 0.20 ms
• 0.40 ms
• 0.93 ms
• 1.33 ms
• 4.27 ms
• 10.67 ms
• 21.33 ms
• 34.13 ms
• 59.73 ms
Potential group • Use potential group of the left Use potential No Module
module (dark BaseUnit) group of the left
module
• Enable new potential group
(light BaseUnit)

1 Valve control is a special function of normal operation.

2 Oversampling is not supported with GSD files.
3 When configuring with a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you select the module name.
4 Only available in the configuration variant "DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS V2.0, MCC (16 Byte) MtM".

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

72 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

The following parameters are possible for the module to module communication (MtM)

Table 6- 2 Assignable parameters for module to module communication (MtM)

Parameters Value range Default Configura- Effective range

tion with configuration
in RUN software
GSD file
PROFINET IO
Slot of encoder module 1 to 64 1 No Module
Subslot of encoder module 1 1 No Module
Encoder module 1 • DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.0 DI 8x24VDC HS, No Module
Count, Ch.0
• DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.1
• DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.2
• DI 8x24VDC HS, Count, Ch.3
• AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, Ch.0
• AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, Ch.1
• AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, QI, Ch.0
• AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS, QI, Ch.1
• TM Count 1x24VDC, Ch.0 2
• TM Count 1x24VDC Fastmode, Ch.0
• TM PosInput 1, Ch.0 2
• TM PosInput 1 Fastmode, Ch.0
• AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS, Ch.0 2
• AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS, Ch.1 2

1 The parameter must be assigned identical with the "Encoder module" parameter under "Parameters in cam control
operating mode".
2 Only available in the configuration variant "DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS V2.0, MCC (16 Byte) MtM".

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 73
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

6.2.3 Explanation of parameters

6.2.3.1 Parameters in cam control operating mode

Operating mode
At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are
operated. When configuring using a GSD file, you determine the operating mode when you
select the module name.
● Normal operation as digital output module
– Valve control is a special function of normal operation, see section Normal
operation/Valve control (Page 21).
● Pulse width modulation, see section Pulse width modulation (Page 46)
● Oversampling, see section Oversampling (Page 34)
● Cam control, see section Cam control (Page 62)

Diagnostics No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics Short circuit to L+/G

Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs.

Encoder source diagnostics

Enabling of the diagnostics for the following events:
● Invalid encoder value when modulo is deactivated (outside minimum encoder
value/maximum encoder value)
● Value status of the encoder module = 0
● Encoder module removed

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

74 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Modulo activated
When "Modulo" is activated (value = 1), the encoder value is mapped onto a recurring
modulo range. The modulo range is defined by the start value and the length. The start value
corresponds to the "Minimum encoder value" parameter.
The length is calculated using the following formula:
Length = ABS (maximum encoder value - minimum encoder value) +1

Figure 6-10 Modulo calculation

Encoder module
With the help of the "Encoder module" parameter, you specify how the encoder data that is
transferred to the DQ4HS module via module to module communication (MtM) is interpreted.
The selected encoder module/encoder channel must be identical with the configured
encoder module that supplies the encoder data.
Depending on which encoder module is being used, not only the encoder value but also the
value status of the encoder module and/or the direction of the encoder is included in the
supplied encoder data and processed in the cam control.
The following table shows the availability of value status and direction of the encoder
module:

Table 6- 3 Availability of value status and direction of the encoder module:

Encoder module Value status Direction

DI 8x24VDC HS - -
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS x 1 -
TM Count 1x24VDC x x
TM PosInput 1 x x
AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS x -
1 In the configuration variant with QI.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 75
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

The value status of the encoder module affects the value status of the DQ4HS module. If the
value status of the encoder module is invalid, the value status of the DQ4HS module is set to
0.
For encoder modules that do not provide a direction in the encoder data, it must be kept in
mind that only 2 valid different encoder values have to be available in the cam control before
the internal direction detection can evaluate the encoder value and the associated
configured cam. With the first valid encoder value, INP_OK = 1 is set, and with the second
valid value, SYNC = 1 is additionally set.

Hysteresis
With the help of a hysteresis, fluctuations (minimal direction reversal in the encoder value)
that affect the encoder value can be compensated.
The hysteresis setting must satisfy the following conditions:
● Hysteresis < ABS ((maximum encoder value - minimum encoder value) / 4)
● Hysteresis < Cami end position - Cami start position [i = 0 to 15]

Axis reference position

With the help of the axis reference position, the encoder value can be adapted or corrected,
e.g. for taking the zero position of the sensor into account. The axis reference position is
subtracted from the encoder value before further processing of the encoder value.

Encoder value minimum/maximum

● "Minimum encoder value" is the low value of the valid encoder range. When "Modulo" is
activated, this value is the start value for the modulo operation.
● "Maximum encoder value" is the high value of the valid encoder range. When "Modulo" is
activated, this value is used for calculating the length for the modulo operation.
The difference of "Maximum encoder value" and "Minimum encoder value" must be at least
2.
When "Modulo" is deactivated, a check is made to determine whether the encoder value is
less than "Minimum encoder value" and greater than "Maximum encoder value".
When "Modulo" is activated, the result of "Maximum encoder value" - "Maximum encoder
value" must not exceed the value 2,147,483,646.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

76 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Cam 0 start position/end position to Cam 15 start position/end position

The position values are used to specify the switching range of the cam that, in combination
with the effective direction and channel assignment, leads to the switching action at the
output.
When modulo is deactivated, the following applies:
● Minimum encoder value <= Cam start position < Cam end position <= Maximum encoder
value
When modulo is activated, the following applies:
● Minimum encoder value < Maximum encoder value
● Minimum encoder value <= Cam start position <= Maximum encoder value
● Minimum encoder value <= Cam end position <= Maximum encoder value
● Cam start position <> Cam end position
See section Cam control (Page 62).

Cam 0 effective direction to Cam 15 effective direction

With this parameter, you specify the effective direction of the cam.
See section Cam control (Page 62).

Cam 0 channel assignment to Cam 15 channel assignment

With this parameter, you specify the assignment of the output channel for a cam. You can
assign an output channel to each cam.

Channel activated
Specifies whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Specifies the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP and for all channels in the
cam control in the event of invalid encoder values.

Note
With "Output substitute value 1" or "Keep last value", a pulsed cam output continues to act.

Pulsed cam output duty cycle

This parameter indicates the percentage of switching state "1" for the time specified in the
"Pulsed cam output period" parameter.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 77
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Pulsed cam output period

This parameter specifies the period of the pulsed cam output.

Potential group
With the "Potential group" parameter, you specify whether the module is plugged into a light
or dark BaseUnit.
A potential group always begins with an I/O module that is plugged into a light BaseUnit. All
modules inserted to the right of this that are plugged into dark BaseUnits belong to the same
potential group, because the dark BaseUnits are supplied via the light BaseUnits.
The potential group ends at a new light BaseUnit or the end of the station.

See also
Distributed I/O System ET 200SP
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293)

6.2.3.2 Parameters for module to module communication (MtM)

Slot of encoder module

Specifies the slot of the encoder module for the module to module communication (MtM)

Subslot of encoder module

This value is permanently preset to 1.

Encoder module
Specifies the module that is used as an encoder module for the module to module
communication (MtM)

Note
Parameter assignment of the encoder module
The parameter must be assigned identical with the "Encoder module" parameter under
Parameters in cam control operating mode (Page 74).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

78 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

6.2.4 Address space

6.2.4.1 Assignment of the control interface

Control interface
The user program uses the control interface to influence the behavior of the cam control. The
figure below shows the address space allocation for the control interface in the process
image output.
"QB x" represents the start address of output byte x.

Figure 6-11 Assignment of the control interface

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 79
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

6.2.4.2 Notes on the control interface

Notes on the control bits

Table 6- 4 Details for the control interface

Control bit Notes

SLOT You use this value to specify the write accesses for the registers addressable with LD_SLOT.
ACCESS_SLOT • RD/WR = 0: Read access to the addressed register.
• RD/WR = 0 --> 1: Writing is enabled at a transition from "0" to "1".
Note:
After a successful write operation, the addressed register is read.
• LD_SLOT
You use this value to select the register, see Notes on the control interface (Page 80).
CTRL_DQ.CHx You use this bit to specify how channel X is controlled.
• 0 = Direct channel writing by the CPU.
• 1 = Take channel value from the cam track.
SET_DQ.CHx Values for the direct channel writing by the CPU.
The bit is processed in combination with bit CTRL_DQ.x = 0.
• 0 = Channel X outputs the value 0.
• 1 = Channel X outputs the value 1.

Table 6- 5 Addressable register in LD_SLOT

Value of Register Notes

LD_SLOT
0x00 CAM_Ctrl- Version of the software module and the user ID
Version
• Bits 0 to 7: Version-Low of SW module CAM_Ctrl
• Bits 8 to 15: Version-High of SW module CAM_Ctrl
• Bits 16 to 31: User ID
0x01 CAM_Ctrl- Static module configuration
Config
• Bits 0 to 7: Number of channels
• Bits 8 to 15: Number of cams
• Bits 16 to 23: Number of internal registers
• Bits 24 to 31: Reserved
0x02 ENC_RAW Raw copied encoder value
0x03 HYS_START When hysteresis is active (STS_REG.HYS = 1), the HYS_START and HYS_END
0x04 HYS_END registers contain the boundary points of the hysteresis.

0x05 ENC_ERRORS Read: Number of detected errors in the encoder data (change from 1 to 0 of bit
INP_OK in byte STS_REG of the feedback interface).
Write: Resetting the counter

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

80 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Value of Register Notes

LD_SLOT
0x06 DIFF_MEDIAN 1 Read:
Averaged difference value of the incoming encoder values (indicator for update rate)
The evaluation is directly coupled to the raw value (encoder data).
• Only the differences between the encoder values as a moving average are evalu-
ated.
Write: Resetting the counter
0x07 PWM_WRITE Read: Status of the currently activated pulsed cam output
Write: Activation/deactivation of the pulsed cam output
• Deactivate pulsed cam output for channel X:
SLOT.Bitx = 0
• Activate pulsed cam output for channel X:
SLOT.Bitx = 1
0x08 CAM_ON-INFO Bit string with the switching state of the 16 cams of the cam pool
1 You can use the DIFF_MEDIAN value, for example, to evaluate the increment jumps

occurring in the application during the commissioning phase.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 81
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

6.2.4.3 Assignment of the feedback interface

Feedback interface
The user program receives current values and status information from the module via the
feedback interface. The figure below shows the address space allocation for the feedback
interface in the process image input.
"IB x" represents the start address of input byte x.

Figure 6-12 Assignment of the feedback interface, part 1

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

82 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

Figure 6-13 Assignment of the feedback interface, part 2

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 83
Cam control operating mode
6.2 Parameters/address space

6.2.4.4 Notes on the feedback interface

Notes on the feedback bits

Table 6- 6 Details for the feedback interface

Feedback bit Notes

ACT_INP Internal encoder value
This value is used by the cam control unit of the digital output module for evaluating the
configured cams.
RD_REG_VALUE Register value that was requested via the control interface, see table "Addressable regis-
ters in LD_SLOT".
ACCESS_SLOT Feedback in response to the SLOT request via the control interface.
LAST_DIR • 0 = Backward motion of last motion
• 1 = Forward motion of last motion
INP_P • 0 = No forward motion
• 1 = Forward motion (current encoder value)
INP_M • 0 = No backward motion
• 1 = Backward motion (current encoder value)
HYS • 0 = Hysteresis is not active
• 1 = Hysteresis is active
SYNC • 0 = No encoder direction available
Note:
If no encoder direction is available, the configured substitute values are output for all chan-
nels that operate as a cam track (CTRL_DQ.CHx = 1).
• 1 = Encoder data can be used for cam output
INP_OK • 0 = Encoder data is invalid
Note:
When the encoder data is invalid, the value status is set to 0.
• 1 = Encoder data detected as invalid
LD_STS_SLOT This bit changes its value following a successful write operation.
STS_PWM Status for pulsed cam output of channels 0 to 3
• Bit 0 for channel 0: 0 = No pulsed cam output, 1 = Pulsed cam output activated
• Bit 1 for channel 1: 0 = No pulsed cam output, 1 = Pulsed cam output activated
• Bit 2 for channel 2: 0 = No pulsed cam output, 1 = Pulsed cam output activated
• Bit 3 for channel 3: 0 = No pulsed cam output, 1 = Pulsed cam output activated
• Bits 4 to 7: Reserved

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

84 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Feedback bit Notes

STS_CAM Signal status of the cam tracks
• Bit 0 for channel 0: 0 = Cam track off, 1 = Cam track on
• Bit 1 for channel 1: 0 = Cam track off, 1 = Cam track on
• Bit 2 for channel 2: 0 = Cam track off, 1 = Cam track on
• Bit 3 for channel 3: 0 = Cam track off, 1 = Cam track on
• Bits 4 to 7: Reserved
STS_DQ Signal status of the digital outputs
• Bit 0 for channel 0: 0 = DQ channel off, 1 = DQ channel on (pulse output is possible)
• Bit 1 for channel 1: 0 = DQ channel off, 1 = DQ channel on (pulse output is possible)
• Bit 2 for channel 2: 0 = DQ channel off, 1 = DQ channel on (pulse output is possible)
• Bit 3 for channel 3: 0 = DQ channel off, 1 = DQ channel on (pulse output is possible)
• Bits 4 to 7: Reserved

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 85
Cam control operating mode
6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

6.3.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the location of the LED displays of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ OVS (green)
④ PWM (green)
⑤ PWR (green)

Figure 6-14 LED displays

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

86 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms.

DIAG LED

Table 6- 7 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 6- 8 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status LED Meaning

Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off
Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

OVS LED and PWM LED

Table 6- 9 Status display of the oversampling LED

OVS LED PWM LED Meaning

DQ operating mode (valve control) active
Off Off
Oversampling operating mode active
On Off
Pulse width modulation operating mode active
Off On
Cam control (MCC) operating mode active
On On

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 87
Cam control operating mode
6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

PWR LED

Table 6- 10 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

6.3.2 Interrupts
The DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short circuit
● Excess temperature
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage
● Communication error
● Invalid encoder data
● Encoder module removed or not ready to operate
● Channel temporarily not available
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

88 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Cam control operating mode
6.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms

6.3.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is output and the DIAG LED flashes on the module for each diagnostics
event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.
The diagnostics of the two actuators influence each other in the case of duplicate wiring.
This means that a single short-circuit affects both actuators.

Table 6- 11 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Solution

Short circuit 1 2 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring
Excess temperature 5H The module has detected that the maxi- Correct the process wiring
mum permitted module temperature has
been exceeded. All channels of the mod-
ule are switched to high resistance. The
module is then restarted.
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
voltage seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Communication 13H Module is defective. Replace the module.
error
Error 1 in actua- 1DH The encoder data is invalid. • Check encoder module and connect-
tor/sensor ed sensor.
• Check messages about encoder
modules and eliminate any errors.
Error 2 in actua- 1EH The encoder module is removed or not • Insert encoder module
tor/sensor ready to operate
• Insert server module
• Check connection to the controller
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
not available or was canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module does not output any process
values or substitute values in this state.
1 The channels 0 and 1 or 2 and 3 each form a load group. Within a load group, a short-circuit can have an effect on the
adjacent channel. The load groups do not have an effect on each other in the case of a short-circuit.
2 If the short-circuit persists, the module heats up. This may trigger temperature monitoring with excess temperature
diagnostic interrupt.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 89
Technical specifications 7
7.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS

Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0

General information
Product type designation DQ 4x24 V DC/2 A HS
Firmware version V2.0
• FW update possible Yes

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC00
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated STEP 7 V15.1 or higher
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- Via GSD as of V5.6 HF4

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.33

sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function Yes; Valve control

• PWM Yes

• Cam control (switching at comparison val- Yes; Via MtM (module-to-module communication)
ues)

• Oversampling Yes

• MSO No

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 90
 Technical specifications
7.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0

Input current
Current consumption, max. 50 mA; without load
Output voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.5 W; at 24 V, 25 °C, DQ mode, 2 A per channel
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs 1 byte; Max. 14 bytes in the cam control operat-
ing mode
• Outputs 1 byte; Max. 16 bytes in the oversampling operat-
ing mode
Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals or potential dis-

tributor module
• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital outputs
Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing)
Number of digital outputs 4
Current-sinking No
Current-sourcing Yes; Push-pull output
Short-circuit protection Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 6A

Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to M (-1 V)

Controlling a digital input No

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 91
Technical specifications
7.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0

Digital output functions, parameterizable
• Switching tripped by comparison values Yes

– Number of cam tracks, max. 4

– Number of cams per module, max. 16
– Number of cams per track, max. 16
– Supported axis types Linear axes and rotary axes with modulo function
– Hysteresis Yes
– Pulsed cam output Yes
– Range of values for comparison values, -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (user-specific
max. within this range)

• Freely usable digital output Yes

• PWM output Yes

– Number, max. 4
– Cycle duration, parameterizable Yes; 0 ms, 0.2 ms, 0.4 ms, 0.93 ms, 1.33 ms,
4.27 ms, 10.67 ms, 21.33 ms, 34.13 ms, 59.73
ms
– Resolution of the duty cycle 0.1 %

• Digital output with oversampling Yes

– Number, max. 4
– Values per cycle, max. 32
– Resolution, min. 100 µs
Switching capacity of the outputs
• with resistive load, max. 2A

• on lamp load, max. 10 W

Load resistance range

• lower limit 12 Ω

• upper limit 3 400 Ω

Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 2A

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA

Output delay with resistive load

• "0" to "1", max. 1 µs

• "1" to "0", max. 1 µs

Parallel switching of two outputs

• for uprating No

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

92 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Technical specifications
7.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 5 kHz

• with inductive load, max. 5 kHz

• on lamp load, max. 5 kHz

Total current of the outputs

• Current per channel, max. 2A

• Current per module, max. 8A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 8 A; DQ mode
– up to 40 °C, max. 6.9 A; DQ mode
– up to 50 °C, max. 4.7 A; DQ mode
– up to 60 °C, max. 2.5 A; DQ mode
vertical installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 7.2 A; DQ mode
– up to 40 °C, max. 5.6 A; DQ mode
– up to 50 °C, max. 4 A; DQ mode
Cable length
• shielded, max. 50 m

• unshielded, max. 50 m

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- Yes; Operating modes DQ and OVS only
nized up to terminal)
Execution and activation time (TCO), min. 40 µs
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 125 µs
Jitter, max. 1 µs
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostic functions Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit Yes; Module-wise

• Group error Yes

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 93
Technical specifications
7.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0

Diagnostics indication LED
• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Standards, approvals, certificates
Suitable for safety-related tripping of standard No
modules
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C; On request: Ambient temperatures lower
than 0 °C (without condensation)
• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C; On request: Ambient temperatures lower

than 0 °C (without condensation)
• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 31 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

94 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Technical specifications
7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS

7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS

Maximum permitted output current depending on the frequency

The figure below shows the maximum permitted output current per channel depending on
the frequency.
You must take this characteristic into consideration for all operating modes of the module.

Figure 7-1 Derating of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS depending on the frequency

Maximum permitted output current depending on the ambient temperature

In addition to the dependency of the maximum permitted output current on the frequency,
you also have to take into consideration the dependency on the ambient temperature.
Depending on the configured operating mode, there is an additional "DQ" or "PWM"
derating. The table below shows the dependencies of derating version and module operating
mode:

Table 7- 1 Additional derating versions of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS

Derating version Operating mode

Normal operation Valve Pulse width Oversampling Cam
control in modulation control
normal operation
DQ derating x - - x -
PWM derating - x x - x

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 95
Technical specifications
7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS

DQ derating
The figure below shows the maximum permitted total current depending on the ambient
temperature for the DQ derating.

① Horizontal installation position

② Vertical installation position

Figure 7-2 Additional DQ derating depending on the ambient temperature

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

96 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Technical specifications
7.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS

PWM derating
The figure below shows the maximum permitted total current depending on the ambient
temperature for the PWM derating.

① Horizontal installation position

② Vertical installation position

Figure 7-3 Additional PWM derating depending on the ambient temperature

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 97
Parameter data records A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
for DQ operating mode

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the reaction to CPU
STOP of individual channels can be changed in RUN without this having an effect on the
other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.

Note
Changing parameters in RUN
A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment
can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus
cycle.

Note
Changing parameters in RUN
When parameters are reassigned in RUN, a brief signal failure can occur at the output. For
this reason, reassignment of parameters in RUN should be done when a 0 is being output at
the output.

STATUS output parameter

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS
output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 98
 Parameter data records
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode

Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 99
Parameter data records
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode

Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.

Figure A-3 Module header information

Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-4 Module parameter block

Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.

Figure A-5 Channel header information

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

100 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode

Channel parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 101
Parameter data records
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode

Codes for time period of the pulse width modulation

The following table contains the codes for the time period of the pulse width modulation of
the digital output module. You must enter these codes in bytes x+6 and x+7 of the channel
parameter block of data record 128 (see previous figure).

Table A- 1 Codes for the period

Value Time period Code

0 Off 0000 0000
4 0.20 ms 0000 0100
7 0.40 ms 0000 0111
12 0.93 ms 0000 1100
14 1.33 ms 0000 1110
21 4.27 ms 0001 0101
26 10.67 ms 0001 1010
30 21.33 ms 0001 1110
33 34.13 ms 0010 0001
36 59.73 ms 0010 0100

Errors when transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module take over the values from the data record.
In case of errors, the WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error
codes in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the
STEP 7 online help.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for data record
128. The error codes are supported starting from firmware version V2.0.0.

Table A- 2 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures

Error code in the

STATUS parameter (hexadeci- Meaning Solution
mal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record.
DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record
length.
DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible • Check station.
• Plug the module in correctly.
• Check parameters of the WRREC
block.
DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct the version number of the parame-
ter block, see Figure A-2 Header infor-
mation (Page 99).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

102 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode

Error code in the

STATUS parameter (hexadeci- Meaning Solution
mal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DFH 80H E0H 02H Error in the header, length or number of Correct the length and number of parame-
parameter blocks ter blocks, see Figure A-2 Header infor-
mation (Page 99) and Figure A-3 Module
header information (Page 100).
DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits.
DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for oper- Correct the diagnostics enables according
ating mode to the operating mode, see Figure A-4
Module parameter block (Page 100).
DFH 80H E1H 06H Code for behavior with substitute value Use valid code for reaction to CPU STOP,
invalid see Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+7
for channels 0 to 3 (Page 101).
DFH 80H E1H 0DH Code for output rate invalid Use valid code for output rate, see Figure
A-4 Module parameter block (Page 100).
DFH 80H E1H 21H Set operating mode invalid Adapt operating mode according to the
configuration, see Figure A-4 Module pa-
rameter block (Page 100).
DFH 80H E1H 22H Value for holding time valve control invalid Adapt holding time valve control to valid
value, see Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to
x+7 for channels 0 to 3 (Page 101).
DFH 80H E1H 23H Value for pulse width modulation duty Adapt pulse width modulation duty cycle to
cycle invalid valid value, see Figure A-6 Structure of
byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3
(Page 101).
DFH 80H E1H 24H Code for pulse width modulation time peri- Use valid code for pulse width modulation
od invalid time period, see Figure A-6 Structure of
byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3
(Page 101).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 103
Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

for oversampling operating mode

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the reaction to CPU
STOP of individual channels can be changed in RUN without this having an effect on the
other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.

Note
Changing parameters in RUN
A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment
can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus
cycle.

STATUS output parameter

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS
output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

104 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode

Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Figure A-7 Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-8 Header information

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 105
Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode

Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.

Figure A-9 Module header information

Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-10 Module parameter block

Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.

Figure A-11 Channel header information

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

106 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode

Channel parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-12 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 107
Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode

Codes for the output rate

The table below contains the codes for the output rate of the digital output module. You must
enter these codes in byte 4 of the module parameter block of data record 128 (see figure).

Table A- 3 Codes for the output rate

Value Output rate Code

1 2 values/cycle 000001
3 4 values/cycle 000011
5 6 values/cycle 000101
7 8 values/cycle 000111
9 10 values/cycle 001001
11 12 values/cycle 001011
13 14 values/cycle 001101
15 16 values/cycle 001111
17 18 values/cycle 010001
19 20 values/cycle 010011
21 22 values/cycle 010101
23 24 values/cycle 010111
25 26 values/cycle 011001
27 28 values/cycle 011011
29 30 values/cycle 011101
31 32 values/cycle 011111

Errors when transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module take over the values from the data record.
In case of errors, the WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error
codes in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the
STEP 7 online help.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

108 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode

The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for data record
128. The error codes are supported starting from firmware version V2.0.0.

Table A- 4 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures

Error code in the

STATUS parameter (hexadeci- Meaning Solution
mal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record.
DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record
length.
DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible • Check station.
• Plug the module in correctly.
• Check parameters of the WRREC
block.
DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct the version number of the parame-
ter block, see Figure A-8 Header infor-
mation (Page 105).
DFH 80H E0H 02H Error in the header, length or number of Correct the length and number of parame-
parameter blocks ter blocks, see Figure A-8 Header infor-
mation (Page 105), figure Figure A-9
Module header information (Page 106)
and Figure A-11 Channel header infor-
mation (Page 106).
DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits.
DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for oper- Correct the diagnostics enables according
ating mode to the operating mode, see Figure A-10
Module parameter block (Page 106).
DFH 80H E1H 06H Code for behavior with substitute value Use valid code for reaction to CPU STOP,
invalid see Figure A-12 Structure of byte x to x+7
for channels 0 to 3 (Page 107).
DFH 80H E1H 0DH Code for output rate invalid Use valid code for output rate, see Figure
A-10 Module parameter block (Page 106).
DFH 80H E1H 21H Set operating mode invalid Adapt operating mode according to the
configuration, see Figure A-10 Module
parameter block (Page 106).

See also
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling
operating mode (Page 104)

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 109
Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating
mode

A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

for pulse width modulation operating mode

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, you can change the
period of individual channels in "Pulse width modulation" operating mode in RUN without this
having an effect on the other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.

Note
Changing parameters in RUN
A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment
can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus
cycle.

STATUS output parameter

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS
output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

110 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode

Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Figure A-13 Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-14 Header information

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 111
Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating
mode

Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.

Figure A-15 Module header information

Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-16 Module parameter block

Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.

Figure A-17 Channel header information

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

112 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode

Channel parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-18 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 113
Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating
mode

Codes for time period of the pulse width modulation

The following table contains the codes for the time period of the pulse width modulation of
the digital output module. You must enter these codes in bytes x+6 and x+7 of the channel
parameter block of data record 128 (see previous figure).

Table A- 5 Codes for the period

Value Time period Code

0 Off 0000 0000
4 0.20 ms 0000 0100
7 0.40 ms 0000 0111
12 0.93 ms 0000 1100
14 1.33 ms 0000 1110
21 4.27 ms 0001 0101
26 10.67 ms 0001 1010
30 21.33 ms 0001 1110
33 34.13 ms 0010 0001
36 59.73 ms 0010 0100

Errors when transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module take over the values from the data record.
In case of errors, the WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error
codes in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the
STEP 7 online help.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for data record
128. The error codes are supported starting from firmware version V2.0.0.

Table A- 6 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures

Error code in the

STATUS parameter (hexadeci- Meaning Solution
mal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record.
DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record
length.
DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible • Check station.
• Plug the module in correctly.
• Check parameters of the WRREC
block.
DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct the version number of the parame-
ter block, see Figure A-14 Header infor-
mation (Page 111).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

114 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode

Error code in the

STATUS parameter (hexadeci- Meaning Solution
mal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DFH 80H E0H 02H Error in the header, length or number of Correct the length and number of parame-
parameter blocks ter blocks, see Figure A-14 Header infor-
mation (Page 111) and Figure A-17
Channel header information (Page 112).
DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits.
DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for oper- Correct the diagnostics enables according
ating mode to the operating mode, see Figure A-16
Module parameter block (Page 112).
DFH 80H E1H 06H Code for behavior with substitute value Use valid code for reaction to CPU STOP,
invalid see Figure A-18 Structure of byte x to x+7
for channels 0 to 3 (Page 113).
DFH 80H E1H 0AH Value for substitute value invalid Adapt substitute value to valid value, see
Figure A-18 Structure of byte x to x+7 for
channels 0 to 3 (Page 113).
DFH 80H E1H 0DH Code for output rate invalid Use valid code for output rate, see Figure
A-16 Module parameter block (Page 112).
DFH 80H E1H 21H Set operating mode invalid Adapt operating mode according to the
configuration, see Figure A-16 Module
parameter block (Page 112).
DFH 80H E1H 24H Code for pulse width modulation time peri- Use valid code for pulse width modulation
od invalid time period, see Figure A-18 Structure of
byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3
(Page 113).

See also
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation
operating mode (Page 110)

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 115
Parameter data records
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode

A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

for cam control operating mode

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, you can change the
period of individual channels in RUN without this having an effect on the other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.
If a parameter is changed in the module parameter block or in the internal cam control block,
the direction information is nullified (SYNC = 0) until it can be detected again. As long as no
direction information is available, the configured substitute values are output for the cam
control channels.

Note
Direction detection
If no direction information is included with the supplied encoder data, two valid different
encoder values are needed for the direction detection (SYNC = 1). The two values allow a
subtraction to be performed and the direction to be derived from the result.

STATUS output parameter

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS
output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

116 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode

Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Figure A-19 Structure of data record 128 for entire module with cam control operating mode

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-20 Header information

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 117
Parameter data records
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode

Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.

Figure A-21 Module header information in cam control operating mode

Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-22 Module parameter block in cam control operating mode

Internal layout block

The figure below shows the structure of the internal layout block.

Figure A-23 Internal layout block in cam control operating mode

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

118 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode

Internal block cam control (Modular CAM Controller)

The figure below shows the structure of the internal block cam control (Modular CAM
Controller).

Figure A-24 Internal block cam control (Modular CAM Controller), part 1

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 119
Parameter data records
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode

Figure A-25 Internal block cam control (Modular CAM Controller), part 2

Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.

Figure A-26 Channel header information in cam control operating mode

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

120 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode

Channel parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-27 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 in cam control operating mode

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 121
Parameter data records
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode

Codes for pulsed cam output period

The table below contains the codes for the pulsed cam output period of the digital output
module. You must enter these codes in bytes x+6 and x+7 of the channel parameter block of
data record 128 (see previous figure).

Table A- 7 Codes for the period

Value Time period Code

0 Off 0000 0000
4 0.20 ms 0000 0100
7 0.40 ms 0000 0111
12 0.93 ms 0000 1100
14 1.33 ms 0000 1110
21 4.27 ms 0001 0101
26 10.67 ms 0001 1010
30 21.33 ms 0001 1110
33 34.13 ms 0010 0001
36 59.73 ms 0010 0100

Errors when transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module take over the values from the data record.
In case of errors, the WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error
codes in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter in the
STEP 7 online help.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for data record
128. The error codes are supported starting from firmware version V2.0.0.

Table A- 8 Error messages, their meaning and corrective measures

Error code in the

STATUS parameter (hexadeci- Meaning Solution
mal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DFH 80H B0H 00H Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record.
DFH 80H B1H 01H Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record
length.
DFH 80H B2H 00H Module not accessible • Check station.
• Plug the module in correctly.
• Check parameters of the WRREC
block.
DFH 80H E0H 01H Incorrect version in header Correct the version number of the parame-
ter block, see Figure A-20 Header infor-
mation (Page 117).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

122 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 Parameter data records
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode

Error code in the

STATUS parameter (hexadeci- Meaning Solution
mal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DFH 80H E0H 02H Error in the header, length or number of Correct the length and number of parame-
parameter blocks ter blocks, see Figure A-20 Header infor-
mation (Page 117) and Figure A-21
Module header information in cam control
operating mode (Page 118).
DFH 80H E1H 01H Reserved bit set Write 0 to all reserved bits.
DFH 80H E1H 02H Invalid diagnostics enable bit set for oper- Correct the diagnostics enables according
ating mode to the operating mode, see Figure A-22
Module parameter block in cam control
operating mode (Page 118).
DFH 80H E1H 06H Code for behavior with substitute value Use valid code for reaction to CPU STOP,
invalid see Figure A-27 Structure of byte x to x+7
for channels 0 to 3 in cam control operat-
ing mode (Page 121).
DFH 80H E1H 21H Set operating mode invalid Adapt operating mode according to the
configuration, see Figure A-22 Module
parameter block in cam control operating
mode (Page 118).
DFH 80H E1H 23H Value for pulsed cam output duty cycle Adapt pulsed cam output duty cycle to
invalid valid value, see Figure A-27 Structure of
byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3 in cam
control operating mode (Page 121).
DFH 80H E1H 24H Code for pulsed cam output period invalid Use valid code for pulsed cam output peri-
od, see Figure A-27 Structure of byte x to
x+7 for channels 0 to 3 in cam control
operating mode (Page 121).
DFH 80H E1H 42H Difference of maximum encoder value and Difference of maximum encoder value and
minimum encoder value invalid minimum encoder value invalid must not
exceed 2,147,483,646.
DFH 80H E1H 43H Format of encoder value invalid Read back data record 128 and apply the
values/codes of the internal layout block
unchanged.
DFH 80H E1H 44H Difference of maximum encoder value and The difference of maximum encoder value
minimum encoder value invalid and minimum encoder value must be at
least 2.
DFH 80H E1H 45H Specifications in the layout of encoder Read back data record 128 and apply the
data invalid values/codes of the internal layout block
unchanged.
DFH 80H E1H 46H Value of hysteresis invalid The hysteresis setting must satisfy the
following conditions:
• Hysteresis < ABS ((maximum encoder
value - minimum encoder value) / 4)
DFH 80H E1H 47H Value for channel assignment of a cam For the channel assignment of a cam, only
invalid values 0 to 3 may be used, see Figure A-
24 Internal block cam control (Modular
CAM Controller), part 1 (Page 119).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC 123
Parameter data records
A.4 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode

Error code in the

STATUS parameter (hexadeci- Meaning Solution
mal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DFH 80H E1H 48H Difference of cam end position and cam The hysteresis setting must satisfy the
start position invalid following conditions:
• Hysteresis < Cami end position - Cami
start position [i = 0 to 15]
or
Cam end position and cam start position
must satisfy the following conditions:
When modulo is deactivated:
• Cam end position > Cam start position
When modulo is activated:
• Cam end position <> Cam start posi-
tion
DFH 80H E1H 49H Overlapping of cams The switch-on range of all cams that are
assigned to a cam track must not overlap.
DFH 80H E1H 4AH Cam start position or cam end position Cam end position and cam start position
invalid or outside of encoder range must satisfy the following conditions:
When modulo is deactivated:
• Minimum encoder value <= Cam start
position < Cam end position <= Maxi-
mum encoder value
When modulo is activated:
• Minimum encoder value <= Cam start
position <= Maximum encoder value
• Minimum encoder value <= Cam end
position <= Maximum encoder value
DFH 80H E1H 4BH Structure version invalid Write 0 to structure version, see Figure A-
24 Internal block cam control (Modular
CAM Controller), part 1 (Page 119).

Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

124 Manual, 06/2018, A5E32855695-AC
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Connecting
ET 200SP
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA 4
___________________
Parameters/address space
digital output module
(6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

02/2018
A5E42404662-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E42404662-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 02/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Recycling and disposal

For ecologically sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certified
disposal service for electronic scrap and dispose of the device in accordance with the
regulations in your country.

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

4 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 10
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................10
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................12
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15
4.2 Declaration of parameters ......................................................................................................17
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................18
5 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 19
5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................19
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21
5.3 Diagnostic messages ..............................................................................................................21
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 26
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................26

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

6 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Documentation guide

You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 7
Documentation guide

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

8 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Documentation guide

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 9
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A BA

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

10 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 16 outputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 0.5 A (per channel), total current max. 8 A
● Source output (PNP, P-switching)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW FW STEP 7 GSD file

Function version version TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET I PROFIBUS
O DP
Identification data I&M0 FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
to I&M3 and HSP 0240 with HSP 0230
higher V8.0 or higher
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and HSP 0240 with HSP 0230
higher V8.0 or higher

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manualET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 11
Connecting 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A BA module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire and 2-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit as well as information on wiring your system
with potential distribution modules in the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200SP
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293).

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
The fuse integrated in BaseUnit type A1 may be triggered in the digital output module,
rendering the terminals unusable.
Make sure that you only use digital output modules with BaseUnit type A0 during
commissioning.

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

12 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Connecting
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 1-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the digital output module DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 (1-wire
connection).

① 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n

② Backplane bus interface 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only)
③ Output electronics M Ground
④ Polarity reversal protection P1, P2, Internal self-assembling voltage buses
AUX Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
⑤ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
with light BaseUnit )
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC00 .0 to .15 Channel status LED (green)
(optional)
PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire connection of actuators

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 13
Connecting
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Example: 2-wire connection of actuators with potential distribution module

The following figure shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 (2-wire connection) in
combination with a potential distribution module.

Figure 3-2 Example: 2-wire connection of actuators with potential distribution module

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

14 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment
and structure of parameter data record (Page 26).

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 15
Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration software, e.g.
reassignment STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute
value 1
Potential group • Use potential group Use po- No Module Module
of the left module tential
(module plugged in- group of
the left
to a dark-colored
module
BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module
plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 6 bytes.

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

16 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Declaration of parameters

4.2 Declaration of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 17
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input.

Configuration options of DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g., with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in hard- GSD file GSD file
ware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 16-channel without value DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA V0.0 V14 or higher with X X
status HSP 0230

Address space
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA.

Figure 4-1 Address space DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A BA

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

18 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial
measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in chapter Diagnostic messages (Page 21).

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 19
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
5.1 Status and error display

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module not configured
Flashing
Module parameters assigned
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashing

LED channel status

Table 5- 2 LED channel status display

LED channel Meaning

status
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
Off

Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Supply voltage L+ missing
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

20 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing

5.3 Diagnostic messages

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error Meaning Solution

code
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- • Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 21
Technical specifications 6
Technical specifications of the DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A BA

Article number 6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0

General information
Product type designation DQ 16x 24 V DC/0.5 A BA, PU 1
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC00
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- STEP 7 V5.5 or higher

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function No

• PWM No

• Oversampling No

• MSO No

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 55 mA; without load
Output voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

22 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0

Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area
Address space per module
• Outputs 2 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital outputs
Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing)
Number of digital outputs 16
Current-sinking No
Current-sourcing Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 1.4 A; 0.7 to 1.9 A

Open-circuit detection No
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-53 V)
Controlling a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of the outputs
• with resistive load, max. 0.5 A

• on lamp load, max. 5W

Load resistance range

• lower limit 48 Ω

• upper limit 100 kΩ

Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 30 µA

Output delay with resistive load

• "0" to "1", typ. 80 µs; at rated load

• "0" to "1", max. 150 µs; at rated load

• "1" to "0", typ. 100 µs; at rated load

• "1" to "0", max. 200 µs; at rated load

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 23
Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0

Parallel switching of two outputs
• for uprating No

• for redundant control of a load Yes

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 100 Hz

• with inductive load, max. 2 Hz

• on lamp load, max. 10 Hz

Total current of the outputs

• Current per channel, max. 0.5 A

• Current per module, max. 8A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 60 °C, max. 8A
vertical installation
– up to 50 °C, max. 8A
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit No

• Group error Yes

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

24 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0

Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation relating to sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 25
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

26 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 27
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 15.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 15

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

28 Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS"
parameter in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E0 06 Invalid coding for substitute value Check the parameters of the module.
behavior.

DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2018, A5E42404662-AA 29
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Connecting 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST
(6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E03574420-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03574420-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 to 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16
4.2 Declaration of parameters ...................................................................................................... 18
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19
5 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 21
5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 21
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23
5.3 Diagnostic messages ............................................................................................................. 24
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 25
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 25
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 31
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 31

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0 (number in package unit: 1 unit)
6ES7132-6BH01-2BA0 (number in package unit: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 16 outputs
● Source output (PNP, P-switching)
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 0.5 A (per channel), total current max. 8 A
(see derating: Technical specifications (Page 25))
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Safety-related shutdown
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW ver- FW STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion version TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
I&M0 to I&M3 and HSP 0222 er with HSP 0230
higher V7.0
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
and HSP 0222 er with HSP 0230
higher V7.0
PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
and HSP 0222 er with HSP 0230
higher V7.0
Value status FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher with V5.5 SP3 or high- X X
and HSP 0222 er with HSP 0230
higher V7.0

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manualET 200SP
distributed I/O system. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 13
Connecting 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System
ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Note
The fuse integrated in BaseUnit type A1 may be triggered in the digital output module,
rendering the terminals unusable.
Make sure that you only use digital output modules with BaseUnit type A0 during
commissioning.

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Connecting
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 1-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the digital output module DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 (1-wire
connection).

① 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n

② Backplane bus interface 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only)
③ Output electronics M Ground
④ Polarity reversal protection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
⑤ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
with light BaseUnit )
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC00 .0 to .15 Channel status LED (green)
(optional)
PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 15
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment
and structure of parameter data record (Page 31).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration software,

reassign- e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
ment in GSD file GSD file
RUN PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Short-circuit to L+
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Wire break
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration software,

reassign- e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
ment in GSD file GSD file
RUN PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Reaction to CPU STOP • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
• Keep last value
• Output substitute
value 1
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module (mod- group of the left
ule plugged into a module
dark-colored Ba-
seUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module
plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 32 bytes.

Note
• If both parameters "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" and "Diagnostics: wire break" are
enabled and one of these diagnostic events occurs, the affected channel is switched off.
This prevents undefined load switching and the corresponding diagnostic alarm is
triggered.
• If both parameters "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" and "Diagnostics: wire break" are
enabled and one of these diagnostic events occurs, the affected channel is switched off.
This prevents undefined load switching and the corresponding diagnostic alarm is
triggered.
• If the parameter "Diagnostics: short-circuit to L+" is enabled and "Diagnostics: wire break"
is disabled, the signal status is retained at the affected channel when "Diagnostics: short-
circuit to L+" occurs. A diagnostic alarm is triggered only for 0 signal.

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 17
Parameters/address space
4.2 Declaration of parameters

4.2 Declaration of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+
Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input.

Configuration options of DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in hard- GSD file GSD file
ware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 16-channel without value DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST V0.0 V14, SP1 or higher X X
status with HSP 0222
1 x 16-channel with value DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST V0.0, V14, SP1 or higher X ---
status QI with HSP 0222

Evaluating the value status

An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value
status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 15 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They
provide information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module.
If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
value status are only available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-1 Address space of DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST with value status

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 21
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial
measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in chapter Diagnostic messages (Page 24).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module not configured
Flashing
Module parameters assigned
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashing

LED channel status

Table 5- 2 LED channel status display

LED channel Meaning

status
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
Off

Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Supply voltage L+ missing
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The digital output module DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 23
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
5.3 Diagnostic messages

5.3 Diagnostic messages

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Note
Parallel connection of two outputs
For parallel connection of two outputs for redundant control of a load, the channel
diagnostics "Short-circuit to L+" and "Wire break" must be deactivated.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit 1H • Short-circuit of actuator supply to Correct the process wiring
ground
• Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify
the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger
cross-section
Wire break between the module and actu- Connect the cable
ator
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect a resistor to the actuator
contacts in the load resistance range
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- • Correct the parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage miss- 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
ing seUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST

Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0

General information
Product type designation DQ 16x24 VDC/0.5 A ST
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC00
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3

sion

• PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function No

• PWM No

• Oversampling No

• MSO No

Redundancy
• Redundancy capability Yes

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 60 mA; without load
Output voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs + 2 bytes for QI information

• Outputs 2 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 1-wire connection BU type A0

• 2-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

• 3-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

• 4-wire connection BU type A0 + Potential isolation module

Digital outputs
Type of digital output Source output (PNP, current-sourcing)
Number of digital outputs 16
Current-sinking No
Current-sourcing Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 1A

Open-circuit detection Yes

Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V)
Controlling a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of the outputs
• with resistive load, max. 0.5 A

• on lamp load, max. 5W

Load resistance range

• lower limit 48 Ω

• upper limit 12 kΩ

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0

Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA

Output delay with resistive load

• "0" to "1", typ. 50 µs

• "1" to "0", typ. 100 µs

Parallel switching of two outputs

• for uprating No

• for redundant control of a load Yes

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 100 Hz

• with inductive load, max. 2 Hz

• on lamp load, max. 10 Hz

Total current of the outputs

• Current per channel, max. 0.5 A

• Current per module, max. 8A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 8A
– up to 40 °C, max. 8A
– up to 50 °C, max. 6A
– up to 60 °C, max. 4A
vertical installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 8 A; in all other mounting positions
– up to 40 °C, max. 6 A; in all other mounting positions
– up to 50 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 600 m

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 27
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0

Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break Yes; Module-wise

• Short-circuit to M Yes; Module-wise

• Short-circuit to L+ Yes; Module-wise

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Standards, approvals, certificates
Suitable for safety-oriented group deactivation Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C; in all other mounting positions

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; in all other mounting positions

Altitude during operation based on sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0

Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Safety-related shutdown

Note
The digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST supports safety-related shutdown in
connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST:
• SIL according to IEC 61508: 2
• Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to EN ISO
13849-1: d

Residual current for signal state "0"

Note
Residual current for signal state "0"
Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0"
signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker.
This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break
parameter.

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 29
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Derating trend
The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting
positions.

Figure 6-1 Load current for mounting position

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 31
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

32 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 15.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 15

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE 33
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS"
parameter in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value Check the parameters of the module.
behavior.

Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)

34 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03574420-AE
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST
(6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E32855952-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E32855952-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0 to 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16
4.2 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 18
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 20
5.1 Status and error displays ....................................................................................................... 20
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 22
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 23
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ............................................ 27

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Part number
6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST module

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 4 digital outputs with floating relay changeover contacts
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current per output 2 A
● Normally open contact (NO: normally open) and normally closed contact (NC: normally
closed)
● Assignable substitute values (per channel)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Suitable for resistive load
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW ver- FW STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion version TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M0 to I&M3 and with HSP 0222 with HSP 0232
higher V7.0
Configuration in RUN FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and with HSP 0222 with HSP 0232
higher V7.0
PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and with HSP 0222 with HSP 0232
higher V7.0
Value status FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and with HSP 0222 with HSP 0232
higher V7.0

Accessories
The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O
System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST module with the
terminal assignments for a 3-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The relay contacts of the module can only switch identical voltage potential. The AUX
terminals can only be used with an associated identical voltage or PE.

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0.

① 2-wire connection 11.n Common contact

② Backplane bus interface 12.n Normally closed contact
③ Polarity reversal protection 14.n Normally open contact
④ Color identification label CCxx (optional) n Channel
⑤ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
colored BaseUnit is present)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit) BaseUnit)
.0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green) PWR Power LED (green)
M Ground
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 15
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST parameters
Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 27)).

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Reconfig- Scope with configuration software,

uration in e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.1 Parameters

Parameter Value range Default Reconfig- Scope with configuration software,

uration in e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Reaction to CPU STOP • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (module group of the
plugged into a dark- left module
colored BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged in-
to light-colored BaseUnit)

1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The parame-
ter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maxi-
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record
128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8
bytes.

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 17
Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of parameters

4.2 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in hard- GSD file GSD file
ware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7
1 x 4-channel without value RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST V14, SP1 or higher X X
status V0.0 with HSP 0222
1 x 4-channel with value RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST V0. V14, SP1 or higher X ---
status 0, QI with HSP 0222

Evaluating the value status

An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value
status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They
provide information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the RQ 4x24VUC/2A
CO ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are
only available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LED displays

The tables below explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22).

LED DIAG

Table 5- 1 Error display of the LED DIAG

LED DIAG Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned)
Flashes
Module parameters assigned
On
Module diagnostics is available
Flashes

LED channel status

Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED channel status

LED channel Meaning

status
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
Off
Channel activated
On

LED PWR

Table 5- 3 Status display of the LED PWR

LED PWR Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST digital output module supports diagnostics alarms.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following event:
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy

Parameter assign- 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters for • Incorrect parameter assignment
ment error the channel
• Correct the parameter assign-
ment
No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
potential group
• Check BaseUnit

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST

Article number 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0

General information
Product type designation RQ CO 4x 24 V DC/2 A ST, PU 1
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No

usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC00
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function No

• PWM No

• Oversampling No

• MSO No

Redundancy
• Redundancy capability Yes

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 23
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 50 mA
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.2 W
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs + 1 byte for QI information

• Outputs 1 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Digital outputs
Type of digital output Relays
Number of digital outputs 4
Current-sinking Yes
Current-sourcing Yes
Short-circuit protection No
Parallel switching of two outputs
• for logic links Yes

• for uprating No

• for redundant control of a load Yes

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 2 Hz

Total current of the outputs

• Current per channel, max. 2A

• Current per module, max. 8A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 40 °C, max. 8A
– up to 50 °C, max. 6A
– up to 60 °C, max. 4A
vertical installation
– up to 30 °C, max. 8A
– up to 40 °C, max. 6A
– up to 50 °C, max. 4 A; in all other mounting positions

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0

Relay outputs
• Number of relay outputs 4

• Rated supply voltage of relay coil L+ (DC) 24 V

• Current consumption of relays (coil current 40 mA

of all relays), max.
Switching capacity of contacts
– with resistive load, max. 2A
– Thermal continuous current, max. 2A
– Switching current, min. 1 mA; 5 V DC
– Rated switching voltage (DC) 24 V
– Rated switching voltage (AC) 24 V
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 200 m

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit No

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels Yes

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- Yes

ply of the electronics

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0

Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Altitude during operation based on sea level
• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g

Derating trend
The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting
positions.

Figure 6-1 Load current for mounting position

Dimensional drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have the option to re-configure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a
corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 27
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters in data record 128.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS"
parameter in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value Check the parameters of the module.
behavior.

Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E32855952-AC
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST
(6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

09/2017
A5E03576775-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03576775-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Due to the change in hardware, the article number of the module has been changed from
6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1 to 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1. Both modules are compatible, except for
the firmware-update function.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

4 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 5
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 12
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram ...................................................................................................... 14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 18
4.3 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 19
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 20
5.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 20
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 22
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23
6.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 23
6.2 Switching cycles ..................................................................................................................... 28
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 29
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 29

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

6 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 7
Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

8 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 9
Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

10 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources

You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 11
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1 (number in package unit: 1 unit)
6ES7132-6HD01-2BB1 (number in package unit: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST module

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

12 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 4 floating relay outputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current per output 5 A
● Normally open contact (NO: normally open)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW version FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Identification data FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M0 to I&M3 and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0232
V7.0
Configuration in FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
RUN and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0232
V7.0
PROFIenergy FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0232
V7.0
Value status FS01 V0.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
and higher with HSP 0222 with HSP 0232
V7.0

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 13
Wiring up 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST module
with the terminal assignments for 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The relay contacts of the module can only switch identical voltage potential. The AUX
terminals can only be used with an associated identical voltage or PE.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

14 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 3-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST on the BaseUnit BU type B0.

① 3-wire connection RES Reserve, must remain unused for fu-

ture function extensions
② Backplane bus interface 1A to 4A AUX terminals (freely usable up to
230 V AC)
③ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
④ Color identification label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
RQn+, RQn- Channel n PWR Power LED (green)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 15
Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1.

① 2-wire connection 1L, 2L Supply voltage 24 V DC

② Backplane bus interface 1N, 2N Neutral conductor supply voltage
③ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
RQn+, Channel n .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
RQn-
RES Reserve, must remain unused for future PWR Power LED (green)
function extensions
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

16 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 29).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Settable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Configura- Scope with configuration software,

tion in RUN e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Channel enabled • Disable Enable yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Reaction to CPU STOP • Turn off Turn off yes Channel Module
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1

1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 8 bytes.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 17
Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of the parameters

4.2 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics no supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Specifies the behavior of the module if the CPU changes to STOP.

See also
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

18 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module using a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module name in Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
the GSD file Integrated in hard- GSD file GSD file
ware catalog STEP 7 PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
1 x 4-channel without RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO V14, SP1 or higher X X
value status ST V0.0 with HSP 0222
1 x 4-channel with value RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO V14, SP1 or higher X ---
status ST V0.0, QI with HSP 0222

Evaluating the value status

An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The
addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-1 Address space of RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST with value status

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the RQ 4x120VDC-
230VAC/5A NO ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

20 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing
with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
off

Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned)
Flashes
Module parameters assigned
on
Module diagnostics is available
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
off

Channel activated and process signal = 1
on

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
off

Supply voltage L+ present
on

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupt
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events:
● Parameter assignment error
● No supply voltage

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostic alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
ment error for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

22 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST

Article number 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1

General information
Product type designation RQ 4x120 VDC … 230 VAC/5 A NO ST
Firmware version V0.0
• FW update possible No
usable BaseUnits BU type B0, B1
Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC40
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14
as of version
• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3
sion
• PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1
• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion
• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3
sion
Operating mode
• DQ Yes

• DQ with energy-saving function No

• PWM No

• Oversampling No

• MSO No

Redundancy
• Redundancy capability Yes

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 23
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1

Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 55 mA; without load
Output voltage
Rated value (AC) 230 V
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.5 W
Address area
Address space per module
• Inputs + 1 byte for QI information

• Outputs 1 byte

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding Yes
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Digital outputs
Type of digital output Relays
Number of digital outputs 4
Current-sinking Yes
Current-sourcing Yes
Short-circuit protection No
Parallel switching of two outputs
• for logic links Yes

• for uprating No

• for redundant control of a load Yes

Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 2 Hz

• with inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz

• on lamp load, max. 2 Hz

Total current of the outputs

• Current per channel, max. 5A

• Current per module, max. 20 A

Total current of the outputs (per module)

horizontal installation
– up to 50 °C, max. 20 A
– up to 60 °C, max. 16 A
vertical installation
– up to 40 °C, max. 20 A
– up to 50 °C, max. 16 A; in all other mounting positions

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

24 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1

Relay outputs
• Number of relay outputs 4

• Rated supply voltage of relay coil L+ (DC) 24 V

• Current consumption of relays (coil current 40 mA

of all relays), max.

• external protection for relay outputs Yes, with 6A

• Number of operating cycles, max. 7 000 000; see additional description in the man-
ual
Switching capacity of contacts
– with inductive load, max. 2 A; see additional description in the manual
– with resistive load, max. 5 A; see additional description in the manual
– Thermal continuous current, max. 5 A; Max. 1 385 VA, 150 W
– Switching current, min. 100 mA; 5 V DC
– Rated switching voltage (DC) 24 V DC to 120 V DC
– Rated switching voltage (AC) 24V AC to 230V AC
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

• unshielded, max. 200 m

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break No

• Short-circuit No

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels Yes

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- Yes

ply of the electronics
Permissible potential difference
between channels and backplane bus/supply 240 V AC
voltage
Isolation
Isolation tested with 2 500 V DC (type test)
tested with
• between channels and backplane 2500 V DC
bus/supply voltage

• between backplane bus and supply voltage 707 V DC (type test)

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. 0 °C

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. 0 °C; in all other mounting positions

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C; in all other mounting positions

Altitude during operation based on sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- On request: Ambient temperatures lower than 0
sure-altitude °C (without condensation) and/or installation
altitudes greater than 2 000 m
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 40 g

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

26 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Technical specifications
6.2 Switching cycles

Derating trend
The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting
positions.

Figure 6-1 Load current and mounting position

Dimension drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 27
Technical specifications
6.2 Switching cycles

6.2 Switching cycles

Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table.
This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts:
Table 6- 1 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts

Resistive load Voltage Current Switching cycles (typical)

For resistive load 24 VDC 5.0 A 0.1 million
4.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.5 million
1.0 A 1.6 million
0.5 A 4 million
0.1 A 7 million
60 VDC 0.5 A 1.6 million
120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 million
48 VAC 2.0 A 1.6 million
60 VAC 2.0 A 1.2 million
120 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million
3.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.4 million
1.0 A 0.8 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
230 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million
3.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.4 million
1.0 A 0.8 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
For inductive load in 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.1 million
accordance with 1.0 A 0.2 million
IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/
AC15 0.5 A 0.5 million
60 VDC 0.5 A 0.2 million
120 VDC 0.2 A 0.5 million
48 VAC 1.0 A 0.7 million
60 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million
120 VAC 2.0 A 0.1 million
1.0 A 0.3 million
0.5 A 1 million
0.1 A 2 million
For inductive load in 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.1 million
accordance with 1.0 A 0.3 million
IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/
AC15 0.5 A 1 million

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

28 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via
PROFIBUS-GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have the option to reconfigure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

29 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

30 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters in data record 128.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE 31
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter. (See also the description of the "STATUS"
parameter in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
parameter data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 06 Invalid coding for substitute value Check the parameters of the module.
behavior.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)

32 Manual, 09/2017, A5E03576775-AE
Digital output module ___________________
Preface

RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST ___________________
Documentation guide 1
(6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________ 4
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST Parameters/address space
(6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

12/2015
A5E36107692-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E36107692-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 12/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 19
5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................19
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................21
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................22
6.2 Switching cycles ......................................................................................................................26
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 28
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................28

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
 Documentation guide

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 7
Documentation guide

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Toggle/jog switch for manually controlling
the relay
③ JOG (switch position up: jog) ⑨ Color coding module type
AUT (switch position "middle": Automatic mode
ON (switch position down: Manual mode
(MANUAL ON))
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Function and firmware version
⑤ LEDs for channel status and manual mode ⑪ Color code for selecting the color identifica-
tion labels
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Image 2-1 View of the module RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Digital output module with 4 floating relay outputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Output current 5 A (per output)
● Normally open contact (NO: normally open)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● 4 toggle/jog switches (jog, automatic or manual mode (MANUAL ON)) for controlling the
relay
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Configuration in RUN
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.

Note
When load voltage is present, the relays of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST can
also be activated via a manual switch even when they are in a non-configured state.
When an output is set to manual control, the relay remains active during a firmware update.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST
module with the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual ET 200SP distributed
I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Note
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The relay contacts of the module can only switch identical voltage potential. The AUX
terminals can only be used with an associated identical voltage or PE.

Note
The switch position of the toggle/jog switch is stored in the process image input (PII) and can
be read there.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 11
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST on the BaseUnit BU type
B0.

① 3-wire connection RES Reserve, must remain unused for fu-

ture function extensions
② Backplane bus interface 1A to 4A AUX terminals (freely usable up to
230 V AC)
③ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
④ Color-coded label with color codes CC40 and MA .0 .. .3 LED MANUAL ON and automatic
CC83 (optional)
RQn+, RQn- Channel n .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses PWR Power LED (green)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST on the BaseUnit BU type
B1.

① 2-wire connection 1N, 2N Neutral conductor supply voltage

② Backplane bus interface DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
③ Polarity reversal protection MA .0 .. .3 LED MANUAL ON and automatic
④ Color-coded label with color code CC40 .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
(optional)
RQn+, RQn- Channel n PWR Power LED (green)
RES Reserve, must remain unused for future P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
function extensions Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
1L, 2L Supply voltage 24 V DC
Image 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 2-wire connection of actuators

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 13
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Toggle/jog switch for controlling the relay

You can switch the relay using the toggle/jog switch to jog, MANUAL ON (manual mode) or
automatic mode for each channel. In manual mode, the state set by the output data is
ignored.
The 4 toggle/jog switches are located on the front of the electronic module.
● JOG (switch position "up": job mode): Short-term manual operation (MANUAL ON), while
jogged.
● AUT (switch position "middle" or "not activated": Automatic mode): Each channel is
activated via the user program (normal operation).
● ON (switch position "down": Manual mode (MANUAL ON) permanently): Each channel is
switched on ("1" signal) independent of the activation of the user program (and substitute
values).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Parameters

Parameters for RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST

The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Parameter Effective range with configuration

reassign- software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
ment in GSD file GSD file
RUN PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics: • Enable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage
• Disable
L+
Channel activated • Enable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Disable
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module group of the
(module plugged into a left module
dark-colored BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged in-
to light-colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 4 bytes.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 15
Parameters/address space
4.2 Explanation of the parameters

4.2 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Channel activated
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.

Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.

Potential group
The load or supply voltage is fed module by module. The voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX are
looped through the module from the left to the right neighboring module without tap.

See also
You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input.

Configuration options of RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module name in the Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7, as of
V13, SP1
1 x 4-channel without RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST X X X
value status
1 x 4-channel with RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST, X X -
value status QI

Evaluating the value status

An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module.
If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 17
Parameters/address space
4.3 Address space

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The
addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled.

Image 4-1 Address space of RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST with value status

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA
ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② MA .0 .. .3 (yellow)
③ Channel status (green)
④ PWR (green)

Image 5-1 LED display

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 21).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned)
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

LED MA 1..4

Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED MA .0 .. .3 (manual mode)

Channel status Meaning

LED
Automatic
Off

Manual ON (toggle/jog switch) = Manual mode
On Output enabled at specific channel

Channel status LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
Off

Channel activated and process signal = 1
On

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

PWR LED

Table 5- 4 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Missing supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

5.2 Interrupts
The digital output module RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST supports diagnostics
interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing
● Channel temporarily unavailable

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
ment error for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage miss- 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
ing BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or • Wait for firmware update
unavailable has been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update
The module does not output any process or
substitute values in this state.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 21
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST

6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA
ST
Firmware version V1.0
• FW update possible Yes

Usable BaseUnits BU type B0, B1

Color code for module-specific color identification CC00
label
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / -
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3
Operating mode
DQ Yes
DQ with energy-saving function No
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 100 mA; no load
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.5 W

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information
Inputs 1 byte; with QI
Outputs 1 byte
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Short-circuit protection No
Switching frequency
With resistive load, max. 2 Hz
With inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz
With lamp load, max. 2 Hz
Total current of the outputs
Current per channel, max. 5A
Current per module, max. 20 A
Total current of the outputs (per module)
Horizontal installation
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 20 A

• Up to 60 ℃, max. 16 A

Vertical installation
• Up to 40 ℃, max. 20 A

• Up to 50 ℃, max. 16 A

Relay outputs
Number of relay outputs 4
Rated input voltage of relay coil L+ (DC) 24 V
Current consumption of relays (coil current of all 40 mA
relays), max.
External fuse for relay outputs Yes, with 6 A
Number of switching cycles, max. 7000000; see additional description in the manual
Switching capacity of the contacts
• With inductive load, max. 2 A; see additional description in the manual

• With resistive load, max. 5 A; see additional description in the manual

• Thermal continuous current, max. 5A

• Switched current, min. 100 mA; 5 V DC

• Rated switching voltage (DC) 24 V DC to 120 V DC

• Rated switching voltage (AC) 24 V AC to 230 V AC

Cable length
Shielded, max. 1000 m
Unshielded, max. 200 m

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 23
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No
terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Substitute values can be applied Yes
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt Yes
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes
Wire break No
Short-circuit No
Group error Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics No
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels Yes
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and voltage supply of the Yes
electronics
Permitted potential difference
Between channels and backplane bus/supply 240 V AC
voltage
Insulation
Insulation tested with 2 500 V DC (type test)
Tested with
Between channels and backplane bus/supply 2500 V DC
voltage
Between backplane bus and supply voltage 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 45 g

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Note
External fuse for relay outputs
The outputs have to be protected by an external fuse.
When installed in a danger area according to the National Electric Code (NEC), the fuse
must only be removed with the correct tool when the module is not in an explosion-proof
zone.

Derating trend
The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting
positions.

Image 6-1 Load current for mounting position

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 25
Technical specifications
6.2 Switching cycles

6.2 Switching cycles

Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table.
This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts:

Table 6- 1 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts

Resistive load Voltage Current Switching cycles (typi-

cal)
For resistive load 24 V DC 5.0 A 0.1 million
4.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.5 million
1.0 A 1.6 million
0.5 A 4 million
0.1 A 7 million
60 VDC 0.5 A 1.6 million
120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 million
48 VAC 2.0 A 1.6 million
60 VAC 2.0 A 1.2 million
120 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million
3.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.4 million
1.0 A 0.8 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
230 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million
3.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.4 million
1.0 A 0.8 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
For inductive load in 24 V DC 2.0 A 0.1 million
accordance with 1.0 A 0.2 million
IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/
AC15 0.5 A 0.5 million
60 VDC 0.5 A 0.2 million
120 VDC 0.2 A 0.5 million
48 VAC 1.0 A 0.7 million
60 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million
120 VAC 2.0 A 0.1 million
1.0 A 0.3 million
0.5 A 1 million
0.1 A 2 million

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
 Technical specifications
6.2 Switching cycles

Resistive load Voltage Current Switching cycles (typi-

cal)
For inductive load in 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.1 million
accordance with 1.0 A 0.3 million
IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/
AC15 0.5 A 1 million

Note
Tests of mechanical environmental conditions
Shock tested according to IEC 60068-2-27. Shock intensity: 100 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms
duration

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 27
Parameter data record A
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
 Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Image A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Image A-2 Header information

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 29
Parameter data record
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters in data record 128.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Image A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 3

Error transmitting the data record

The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there
are errors in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in the STATUS pa- Meaning Solution

rameter
(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine whether
the module is plugged in or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parame-
ters of the WREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header in- Correct the version, length and number of
formation parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module

Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Analog input module AI 8xU BA ___________________
Preface

(6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) ___________________
Documentation guide 1

2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring up
ET 200SP
Analog input module AI 8xU BA 4
___________________
Parameters/address space
(6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A
Representation of analog
___________________
values B

03/2015
A5E34941660-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E34941660-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 03/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................10
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 12
4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................12
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................15
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 18
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................20
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 21
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................21
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 24
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................24
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................25
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 29
B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................30
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................31

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Documentation guide

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

My Documentation Manager
The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to
your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Application examples
Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find application examples on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/ae).

CAx Download Manager

The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe
systems.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Article number
⑥ LED for supply voltage

Figure 2-1 View of the AI 8×U BA module

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 8 inputs (single-ended)
● Input ranges for voltage measurement:
– ±10 V, resolution 16 bits including sign
– 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bits
● Cycle time of the module (all channels) 10 ms
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Reconfiguration in RUN
You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 9
Wiring up 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 8xU BA module with the terminal
assignments for a 2-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: Voltage measurement 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 8xU BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for voltage measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n
② Backplane bus interface MANA Ground of the analog inputs
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
④ Current limitation M Ground
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) P1, P2, Internal self-assembling voltage buses
AUX Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
⑥ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
(function cannot be used for this module)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when AI0 to AI7 Channel status LED (green)
light-colored BaseUnit is present)
PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 11
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Measuring types and ranges
The analog input module AI 8xU BA has the following measuring ranges:

Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges

Measurement type Measuring range Resolution

Voltage 0 to 10 V 15 bits
±10 V 16 bits including sign

You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the
section Representation of analog values (Page 29).

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

4.2 Parameters

AI 8xU BA parameters
The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning the parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the
parameters to the module using data records, see section Parameter assignment and
structure of the parameter data record (Page 25)).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfigura- Effective range with configura-

tion in RUN tion software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS DP
IO
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1
Overflow
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module
Underflow
• Enable
Type/range of meas- • Deactivated Voltage (+/- 10 Yes Channel Channel
urement V)
• Voltage +/- 10 V
• Voltage 0 to 10 V
Smoothing • None None Yes Channel Channel
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 13
Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfigura- Effective range with configura-

tion in RUN tion software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS DP
IO
Interference frequency • 60 Hz (50 ms) 50 Hz (60 ms) Yes Channel Module
suppression
• 50 Hz (60 ms) 2
• 16.6 Hz (180 ms)
• 4800 Hz (0.625 ms)
• 60 Hz (18.75 ms) 3
• 50 Hz (22.5 ms) 2 3
• 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 3
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (dark-colored group of the
BaseUnit) left module

• Enable new potential

group (light-colored Ba-
seUnit)

1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP: The parame-
ter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maxi-
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign this parameter using the data record 128
as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8
bytes.
2 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.
3 By selecting this interference frequency suppression with shorter integration time, the attenuation of the interference
frequency that can be achieved is reduced (see Technical specifications).

Note
Unused channels
Disable unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.
A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.

Diagnostics: Underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.

Type/range of measurement
See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 12).

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in
4 levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) × cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This is valid for all signal
changes at the analog input.

① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)

Figure 4-1 Smoothing for AI 8xU BA

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 15
Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Interference frequency suppression

Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency
of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the alternating voltage network may negatively affect the measured value,
in particular when measuring in the low voltage range. With this parameter, the user
specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant.

Potential group
You can use the "Potential group" parameter to specify whether the module is inserted in a
light-colored or dark-colored BaseUnit.
A potential group always starts with an I/O module that is inserted on a light-colored
BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this on dark-colored BaseUnits belong to the
same potential group, because the dark-colored BaseUnits are supplied via the light-colored
BaseUnits.
The potential group ends with a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station.

See also
ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.4 Address space

4.4 Address space

Address space
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for AI 8×U BA.

Figure 4-2 Address space of AI 8×U BA

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 17
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 8xU BA.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 20).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel deactivated
Off
Channel activated
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 8×U BA supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupt
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Channel temporarily unavailable
● Low limit violated
● High limit violated
● Error
● Parameter assignment error
● No load voltage

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED flashes on the
module. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

High limit violated 7H Value is above overrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Low limit violated 8H Value is below underrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has • Wait for firmware update
unavailable been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update
The module does not read any process
values in this state.

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the AI 8×U BA

6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1
Product type designation ET 200SP, 8xU Basic
General information
Firmware version V1.0
• FW update possible Yes

Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1

Color code for module-specific color identification CC02
label
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Scalable measuring range No
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / -
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / -
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSI No
CiR Configuration in RUN
Reconfiguration in RUN possible Yes
Calibration in RUN possible No
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 25 mA
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.7 W

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 21
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 16 bytes
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 8; single-ended
Maximum permitted input voltage for voltage input 30 V
(destruction limit)
Cycle time (all channels), min. 1 ms; per channel
Input ranges (rated values), voltages
0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 100 kΩ
-10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bits including sign
Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 100 kΩ
Cable length
Shielded, max. 200 m
Formation of analog values for the inputs
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), 16 bits
max.
Integration time configurable Yes
Interference voltage suppression for interference 16.67 / 50 / 60 / 4 800 (16.67 / 50 / 60)
frequency f1 in Hz
Conversion time (per channel) ms; 180 / 60 / 50 / 0.625 (67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75)
Measured value smoothing
Number of steps 4; none; 4/8/16 times
Configurable Yes
Encoders
Connection of the signal transmitters
For voltage measurement Yes
For current measurement as 4-wire transducer No
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.01%
Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.005%
Crosstalk between inputs, min. 50 dB
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in rela- ± 0.05%
tion to input range), (+/-)
Operational limit in the entire temperature range
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.5%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.3%
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-
1%), f1 = interference frequency
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB; with conversion time 67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75
< rated value of the input range), min. ms: 40 dB

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No
terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes
Limit interrupt No
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of supply voltage Yes
Wire break No
Short-circuit No
Group error Yes
Overflow/underflow Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes, green PWR LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics No
For module diagnostics Yes; green / red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels No
Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and the supply voltage of No
the electronics
Permitted potential difference
Between different circuits 75 V DC/60 V AC (basic insulation)
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 31 g

Dimension drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 23
Parameter data record A
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other.

Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFINET.

Measurement type Measuring range Diagnostics

No supply voltage L+ Overflow Underflow
Deactivated * * *
Voltage ±10 V x x x
0 to 10 V x x x

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFIBUS.

Measurement type Measuring range Diagnostics

No supply voltage L+ Overflow/underflow
Deactivated * *
Voltage ±10 V x x
0 to 10 V x x

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module can be re-configured in RUN (for example, the voltage or current values of
selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.

STATUS output parameter

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 25
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 27
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channels 0 to 7

Codes for measurement types

The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input
module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).

Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types

Measurement type Code

Deactivated 0000 0000
Voltage 0000 0001

Codes for measuring ranges

The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure).

Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges

Measuring range Code

±10 V 0000 1001
0 to 10 V 0000 1011

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Representation of analog values B
Measured value resolution
The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its
parameter assignment.
Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values

Resolution in bits Values Analog value

including sign
Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 29
Representation of analog values
B.1 Representation of input ranges

B.1 Representation of input ranges

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar
input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

Table B- 2 Bipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range

-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table B- 3 Unipolar input ranges

Dec. val- Measured Data word Range

ue value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range

-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
 Representation of analog values
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage
measuring ranges.

Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range ±10 V

Values Voltage measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V
32767 7FFF >11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range
20736 5100 7.5 V
1 1 361.7 µV
0 0 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V
-27648 9400 -10 V
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -11.759 V
-32768 8000 <-11.759 V Underflow

Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range 0 to 10 V

Values Voltage measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 10 V
32767 7FFF >11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range
20736 5100 7.5 V
1 1 0 V + 361.7 µV
0 0 0V
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -1.759 V
-32768 8000 < -1.759 V Underflow

Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 31
Analog input module ___________________
Preface

AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA ___________________

Documentation guide 1
(6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring up
ET 200SP
Analog input module 4
___________________
Parameters/address space
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA
(6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A
Representation of analog
___________________
values B

03/2015
A5E34941201-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E34941201-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 03/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................10
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 13
4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................13
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................18
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 19
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................19
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................22
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................23
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................27
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................28
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 32
B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................33
B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................34

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Documentation guide

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

My Documentation Manager
The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to
your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Application examples
Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

CAx Download Manager

The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe
systems.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Article number
⑥ LED for supply voltage

Figure 2-1 View of the AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA module

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 8 inputs (single-ended)
● For 2-wire and 4-wire transducers
● Input ranges for current measurement:
– 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
– 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
– ±20 mA, resolution 16 bits including sign
● Cycle time of the module (all channels) 10 ms
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Reconfiguration in RUN
You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 9
Wiring up 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA module with the terminal
assignments for 2-wire and 4-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: Current measurement 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for current measurement In + Input signal, channel n

② Backplane bus interface UV Infeed voltage
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
④ Current limitation M Ground
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
⑥ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
(function cannot be used for this module)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when AI0 to AI7 Channel status LED (green)
light-colored BaseUnit is present)
PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 11
Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Connection: Current measurement 4-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals.

① 4-wire connection for current measurement

② Connection AUX terminals to ground
③ Color identification labels CCxx (optional)
④ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present)
In + Input signal, channel n
UV Infeed voltage
L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
M Ground
1 A to 10 A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 4-wire connection

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Measuring types and ranges
The analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA has the following measuring ranges:

Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges

Measurement type Measuring range Resolution

Current (2-wire or 4-wire con- 0 to 20 mA 15 bits
nection) 4 to 20 mA 15 bits
Current (4-wire connection) ± 20 mA 16 bits including sign

You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the
section Representation of analog values (Page 32).

4.2 Parameters

AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA parameters

The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28).

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 13
Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfigura- Effective range with configura-

tion in RUN tion software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS
DP
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1
Overflow
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module
Underflow
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Wire break
• Enable
Type/range of meas- • Deactivated Current (4-wire Yes Channel Channel
urement connection)
• Current (4-wire connec-
4 to 20 mA
tion) 0 to 20 mA
• Current (4-wire connec-
tion) 4 to 20 mA
• Current (4-wire connec-
tion) +/-20 mA
• Current (2-wire connec-
tion) 0 to 20 mA
• Current (2-wire connec-
tion) 4 to 20 mA
Smoothing • None None Yes Channel Channel
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

Parameter Range of values Default Reconfigura- Effective range with configura-

tion in RUN tion software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS
DP
Interference frequency • 60 Hz (50 ms) 50 Hz (60 ms) Yes Channel Module
suppression
• 50 Hz (60 ms) 2

• 16.6 Hz (180 ms)

• 4800 Hz (0.625 ms)
• 60 Hz (18.75 ms) 3
• 50 Hz (22.5 ms) 2 3
• 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 3
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (dark-colored group of the
BaseUnit) left module

• Enable new potential

group (light-colored Ba-
seUnit)

1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP: The parame-
ter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maxi-
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign this parameter using the data record 128
as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8
bytes.
2 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.
3 By selecting this interference frequency suppression with shorter integration time, the attenuation of the interference
frequency that can be achieved is reduced (see Technical specifications).

Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.
A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 15
Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs.

Diagnostics: Overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.

Diagnostics: Underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be
measured at the relevant input.
The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the Diagnostics: Wire break is output.

Measurement type/measuring ranges

See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 13).

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in
4 levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) × cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This is valid for all signal
changes at the analog input.

① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)

Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA

Interference frequency suppression

Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency
of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the alternating voltage network may negatively affect the measured value,
in particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this
parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant.

Potential group
You can use the "Potential group" parameter to specify whether the module is inserted in a
light-colored or dark-colored BaseUnit.
A potential group always starts with an I/O module that is inserted on a light-colored
BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this on dark-colored BaseUnits belong to the
same potential group, because the dark-colored BaseUnits are supplied via the light-colored
BaseUnits.
The potential group ends with a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station.

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 17
Parameters/address space
4.4 Address space

See also
ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

4.4 Address space

Address space
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA.

Figure 4-2 Address space of AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 8xU/I 2-/4-wire BA.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel deactivated
Off
Channel activated
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupt
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Channel temporarily unavailable
● Short-circuit (2-wire and 4-wire connection, current)
● Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA)
● Low limit violated
● High limit violated
● Error
● Parameter assignment error
● No load voltage

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED flashes on the
module. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit * 1H Encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify
the wiring, for example, using cables
with a larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and sen- Connect the cable
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Deactivate channel
• Connect the encoder contacts
High limit violated 7H Value is above overrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Low limit violated 8H Value is below underrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel. (diagnostics wire break set only with
the permitted measuring ranges).
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has • Wait for firmware update
unavailable been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update
The module does not read any process
values in this state.
* Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground has an effect on all channels.

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA

6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 8xI 2-/4-wire Basic
General information
Firmware version V1.0
• FW update possible Yes

Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1

Color code for module-specific color identification CC01
label
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Scalable measuring range No
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / -
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / -
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSI No
CiR Configuration in RUN
Reconfiguration in RUN possible Yes
Calibration in RUN possible No
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 25 mA; without encoder supply

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 23
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
Output current, max. 0.7 A; total current of all encoders/channels
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.7 W; without encoder supply voltage
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 16 bytes
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 8; single-ended
Maximum permitted input current for current input 50 mA
(destruction limit)
Cycle time (all channels), min. 1 ms; per channel
Input ranges (rated values), currents
0 to 20 mA Yes
Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 100 Ω; 15 bits
-20 mA to +20 mA Yes
Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 100 Ω; 16 bits including sign
4 mA to 20 mA Yes
Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 100 Ω; 15 bits
Cable length
Shielded, max. 200 m
Formation of analog values for the inputs
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), 16 bits
max.
Integration time configurable Yes
Interference voltage suppression for interference 16.67 / 50 / 60 / 4 800 (16.67 / 50 / 60)
frequency f1 in Hz
Conversion time (per channel) ms; 180 / 60 / 50 / 0.625 (67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75)
Measured value smoothing
Number of steps 4; none; 4/8/16 times
Configurable Yes
Encoders
Connection of the signal transmitters
For voltage measurement No
For current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes
• Load of 2-wire transducer, max. 650 Ω

For current measurement as 4-wire transducer Yes

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.01%
Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.005%/K
Crosstalk between inputs, min. 50 dB
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in rela- ± 0.05%
tion to input range), (+/-)
Operational limit in the entire temperature range
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.5%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.3%
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-
1%), f1 = interference frequency
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB; with conversion time 67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75
< rated value of the input range), min. ms: 40 dB
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No
terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes
Limit interrupt No
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of supply voltage Yes
Wire break Yes; for 4 to 20 mA
Short-circuit Yes; encoder supply to ground; module-based
Group error Yes
Overflow/underflow Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics No
For module diagnostics Yes; green / red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels No
Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and the supply voltage of No
the electronics

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
Permitted potential difference
Between different circuits 75 V DC/60 V AC (basic insulation)
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 31 g

Dimension drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Parameter data record A
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other.

Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range with PROFINET.

Measurement Measuring Diagnostics

type range No supply volt- Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow Wire break
age L+ ground
Deactivated * * * * *
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x x -
(4-wire connec- 4 to 20 mA x x x x x
tion)
±20 mA x x x x -
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x - -
(2-wire connec- 4 to 20 mA x x x x x
tion)

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range with PROFIBUS.

Measurement type Measuring range Diagnostics

No supply voltage Short-circuit to Over- Wire break
L+ ground flow/underflow
Deactivated * * * *
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x -
(4-wire connection) 4 to 20 mA x x x x
±20 mA x x x -
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x -
(2-wire connection) 4 to 20 mA x x x x

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 27
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module can be re-configured in RUN (for example, the voltage or current values of
selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.

STATUS output parameter

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 29
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channels 0 to 7

Codes for measurement types

The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input
module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).

Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types

Measurement type Code

Deactivated 0000 0000
Current, 4-wire connection 0000 0010
Current, 2-wire connection 0000 0011

Codes for measuring ranges

The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure).

Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges

Measuring range Code

0 to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 to 20 mA 0000 0011
±20 mA 0000 0100

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 31
Representation of analog values B
Measured value resolution
The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its
parameter assignment.
Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values

Resolution in bits Values Analog value

including sign
Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

32 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 Representation of analog values
B.1 Representation of input ranges

B.1 Representation of input ranges

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar
input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

Table B- 2 Bipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range

-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table B- 3 Unipolar input ranges

Dec. val- Measured Data word Range

ue value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range

-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 33
Representation of analog values
B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
measuring ranges.

Table B- 4 Current measuring range ±20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
32767 7FFF >23.52 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 <-23.52 mA Underflow

Table B- 5 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF >23.52 mA >22.81 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underflow

* For measurement type "2-wire connection", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20
mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

34 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
Analog Input Module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST
(6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

___________________
Representation of analog
values B

09/2018
A5E03572832-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03572832-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 09/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Wiring and block diagram has been modified.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in the following, it applies to the CPUs of the
S7-1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the
ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................16
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................19
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................21
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 22
5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................22
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................24
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................25
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 26
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................26
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 31
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................31
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................32
A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input ...................................................................36
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 37
B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................38
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................39
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................40

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 7
Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 9
Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1 (number in pack: 1 unit)
6ES7134-6HD01-2BA1 (number in pack: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification
labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 4 inputs
● Measuring type voltage and current for 2-wire transducer (can be set for each channel)
● Input ranges for voltage measurement:
– ±10 V, resolution 16 bits including sign
– ±5 V, resolution 16 bits including sign
– 1 to 5 V, resolution 15 bits
– 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bits
● Input ranges for current measurement:
– 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
– 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
● Electrically isolated from the supply voltage L+ (only for voltage measuring type)
● Permitted common mode voltage: 10 Vss
● Configurable diagnostics per module
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW ver- FW ver- STEP 7 GSD file

Function sion sion TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP
Firmware update FS01 V2.0.0 or V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227 V7.0
or higher
Identification data I&M0 to FS01 V2.0.0 or V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M3 higher with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227 V7.0
or higher
Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V2.0.0 or V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227 V7.0
or higher
PROFIenergy FS01 V2.0.0 or V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227 V7.0
or higher
Value status FS01 V2.0.0 or V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227 V7.0
or higher

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 13
Wiring up 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST module with the terminal
assignments.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during
the configuration.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: Voltage and current measurement 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for current measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n
(2-wire transducer)
② 2-wire connection for voltage measurement Un- Voltage input negative, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface Uvn Supply voltage, channel n
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) In + Current input positive, channel n
⑤ Short-circuit protection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
⑥ Current limitation M Ground
⑦ Color-coded label with color code CC03 P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
(optional) Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
⑧ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
(function cannot be used for this module)
⑨ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light AI0, AI1, AI2, Channel status LED (green)
BaseUnit is present) AI3
PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage and current measurement

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 15
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Measuring types and ranges
The analog input module AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST has the following measuring ranges:

Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges

Measuring type Measuring range Resolution

Voltage ±5V 16 bits including sign
±10 V 16 bits including sign
1 to 5 V 15 bits
0 to 10 V 15 bits
Current (2-wire transducer) 0 mA to 20 mA 15 bits
4 to 20 mA 15 bits

You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the
section Representation of analog values (Page 37).

4.2 Parameters

Parameters of the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 32).

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Configura- Effective range with configuration

tion in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Overflow
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Underflow
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Wire break
• Enable
Measuring type/range • deactivated Current (2-wire Yes Channel Channel
transducer)
• Voltage +/- 5 V
4..20 mA
• Voltage +/- 10 V
• Voltage 1..5 V
• Voltage 0..10 V
• Current (2-wire trans-
ducer) 0..20 mA
• Current (2-wire trans-
ducer) 4..20 mA
Smoothing • None None Yes Channel Channel
• weak
• medium
• strong

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 17
Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

Parameter Value range Default Configura- Effective range with configuration

tion in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Interference frequency • 60 Hz 50 Hz Yes Channel Module 3
suppression 2
• 50 Hz1
• 16.6 Hz
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module (module group of the
plugged into a dark Ba- left module
seUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged
into light BaseUnit)

1 ...Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.
2 The settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a direct effect on the conversion time of the
channel. The analog value is therefore also affected by additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter.
2 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 5 bytes with
PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix
"Parameter data set".

Note
Unused channels
Disable unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.
A disabled channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics no supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or
of an input to the encoder supply. Short-circuit is also detected in the range 1 to 5 V, when
both input signals are short-circuited.
The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, however, the short-circuit diagnostics suppresses
the underflow diagnostics. Short-circuit is output as the diagnostics event.

Diagnostics overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.

Diagnostics underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.

Diagnostics Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be
measured at the relevant input.
The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics info is output.

Type/range of measurement
Refer to the section Measuring types and ranges (Page 16).

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in
4 levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal
change at the analog input.

① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)

Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST

Interference frequency suppression

Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency
of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in
particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this
parameter, the user specifies the supply frequency that is predominant in the plant.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.4 Address space

4.4 Address space

Configuration options
The following configurations are possible:
● Configuration 1: Without value status
● Configuration 2: With value status

Evaluating the value status

If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the
input address space. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the analog value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST
with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only
available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-2 Address space of the AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST with value status

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing
with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 25).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel disabled
Off

Channel activated
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 23
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupt
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events:
● Channel temporarily unavailable
● Short-circuit (current, voltage 1..5 V)
● Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA)
● Low limit violated
● High limit violated
● Error
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit (current)* 1H Sensor supply to ground Correct the module/encoder tuning
Input to sensor supply
Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short-circuit of input signal Correct the module/encoder tuning
** Open input Connect input
Wire break (current) ** 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify
the wiring, for example, using cables
with a larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and sen- Connect the cable
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect the sensor contacts
High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning
Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning
Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage missing 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module does not read any process
values in this state.
* Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground and/or of the input signal to the encoder supply of a channel can have a
temporary effect on other channels (duration < 0.5 s). This means the short-circuit diagnostics can also be reported for
unaffected channels and/or the measured value can be affected temporarily.
** In case of activated smoothing the module calculates the measured values across several module cycles. The module
only generates the short circuit or wire break diagnosis if the smoothed measured value is stable. After the short-circuit
or wire break has been eliminated, the module supplies stable measured values again depending on the set smoothing
level.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 25
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST

The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1/td?dl=en).

Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1

General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 4x U/I 2-wire, P. unit 1
Firmware version V2.0
• FW update possible Yes

usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC03
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

• Measuring range scalable No

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14 / -
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.6 and higher

sion

• PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• Oversampling No

• MSI No

CiR – Configuration in RUN

Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes
Calibration possible in RUN No

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

26 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 37 mA; without sensor supply
24 V encoder supply
• 24 V Yes

• Short-circuit protection Yes

• Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration <
10 s
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.85 W; Without encoder supply voltage
Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 8 byte; + 1 byte for QI information

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 2-wire connection BU type A0, A1

Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 4; Differential inputs
permissible input voltage for voltage input 30 V
(destruction limit), max.
permissible input current for current input (de- 50 mA
struction limit), max.
Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional
processing times (depending on the parameteri-
zation of the active channels)
Input ranges (rated values), voltages
• 0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bit

• Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 120 kΩ

• 1 V to 5 V Yes; 15 bit

• Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 120 kΩ

• -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign

• Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 120 kΩ

• -5 V to +5 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign

• Input resistance (-5 V to +5 V) 120 kΩ

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 27
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1

Input ranges (rated values), currents
• 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit

• Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 100 Ω; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage

• 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit

• Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 100 Ω; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage

Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m; 200 m for voltage measurement

Analog value generation for the inputs

Measurement principle integrating (Sigma-Delta)
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
• Resolution with overrange (bit including 16 bit
sign), max.

• Integration time, parameterizable Yes

• Interference voltage suppression for inter- 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz

ference frequency f1 in Hz

• Conversion time (per channel) 180 / 60 / 50 ms

Smoothing of measured values

• Number of smoothing levels 4; None; 4/8/16 times

• parameterizable Yes

Encoder
Connection of signal encoders
• for voltage measurement Yes

• for current measurement as 2-wire trans- Yes

ducer
– Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. 650 Ω

• for current measurement as 4-wire trans- No

ducer
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.01 %
Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.005 %/K
)
Crosstalk between the inputs, min. 50 dB
Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (rela- 0.05 %
tive to input range), (+/-)
Operational error limit in overall temperature
range
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.5 %

• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.5 %

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %

• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-

1 %), f1 = interference frequency
• Series mode interference (peak value of 70 dB
interference < rated value of input range),
min.

• Common mode voltage, max. 10 V

• Common mode interference, min. 90 dB

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

• Limit value alarm No

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break Yes; at 4 to 20 mA

• Short-circuit Yes; with 1 to 5 V or 2-wire mode: Short-circuit of

the encoder supply to ground or of an input to the
encoder supply
• Group error Yes

• Overflow/underflow Yes

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; Green LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; Green/red LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels Yes; channel group-specific between 2-wire cur-
rent input group and voltage input group
• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- Yes; only for voltage inputs
ply of the electronics

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 29
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1

Permissible potential difference
between the inputs (UCM) 10 V DC
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

• Vertical installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• Vertical installation, max. 50 °C

• Horizontal installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• Horizontal installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation relating to sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- Up to max. 5 000 m, at installation height > 2 000
sure-altitude m additional restrictions, see manual for details

Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 32 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
Parameter data record A
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other.

Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring
range for PROFINET.

Measuring type Measuring Diagnostics

range No supply volt- Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow Wire break
age L+ M
deactivated * * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x - x x -
±10 V x - x x -
1..5 V x x x x -
0..10 V x - x x -
Current 0..20 mA x x x x -
(2-wire trans- 4..20 mA x x x x x
ducer)

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring
range for PROFIBUS.

Measuring type Measuring range Diagnostics

No supply voltage Short-circuit to M Overflow/ Wire break
L+ Underflow
deactivated * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x - x -
±10 V x - x -
1..5 V x x x -
0..10 V x - x -
Current 0..20 mA x x x -
(2-wire transducer) 4..20 mA x x x x

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 31
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can reassign the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the voltage or current
values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other
channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

32 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 33
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameter
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channels 0 to 3

Codes for the measuring type

The following table contains the codes for the measuring types of the analog input module.
You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).

Table A- 1 Codes for the measuring type

Measuring type Coding

Deactivated 0000 0000
Voltage 0000 0001
Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011

Codes for the measuring range

The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure).

Table A- 2 Codes for the measuring range

Measuring type Coding

Voltage
±5 V 0000 1000
±10 V 0000 1001
1 to 5 V 0000 1010
0 to 10 V 0000 1011
Current
0 to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 to 20 mA 0000 0011

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 35
Parameter data record
A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input

A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter
in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station to determine whether
the module is plugged or pulled.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bit set Check the parameters of the module.
DF 80 E1 02 Invalid diagnostics enable bit set Check the parameters of the module.
for operating mode.
DF 80 E1 05 Invalid coding set for measuring Check the parameters of the module.
range / measurement type.
DF 80 E1 08 Invalid coding set for interference Check the parameters of the module.
frequency suppression / integration
time.
DF 80 E1 09 Invalid coding for smoothing. Check the parameters of the module.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
Representation of analog values B
This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the
analog module.

Measured value resolution

The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its assigned
parameters.
The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated
decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values.
Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values

Resolution in bits Values Analog value

including sign
Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 37
Representation of analog values
B.1 Representation of input ranges

B.1 Representation of input ranges

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar
input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

Table B- 2 Bipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range

-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table B- 3 Unipolar input ranges

Dec. val- Measured Data word Range

ue value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range

-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

38 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
 Representation of analog values
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage
measuring ranges.

Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range ±10 V and ±5 V

Values Voltage measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V ±5 V
32767 7FFF >11.759 V >5.879 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V
-32768 8000 <-11.759 V <-5.879 V Underflow

Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V

Values Voltage measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
32767 7FFF >5.704 V >11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 5V 10 V Nominal range
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 0 V + 361.7 µV
0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Underrange **
-4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V *
-32768 8000 <0.296 V <-1.759 V * Underflow **

* negative values are only possible if the module (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1) with FW version V2.0.0 and
higher is configured.
** no underrange/underflow if the predecessor module (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1) is configured.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE 39
Representation of analog values
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
measuring ranges.

Table B- 6 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF >23.52 mA >22.81 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underflow

* For measuring type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA".
Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)

40 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03572832-AE
Analog input module AI 2xU ST ___________________
Preface

(6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) ___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog input module AI 2xU ST
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
(6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

___________________
Representation of analog
values B

12/2015
A5E36104728-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E36104728-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 12/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 13
4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................13
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................19
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 20
5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................20
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................22
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................22
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 23
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................23
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 27
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................27
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................28
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 32
B.1 Representation of analog values ............................................................................................32
B.2 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................33
B.3 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................34

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 Documentation guide

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the
system - separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 7
Documentation guide

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Article number
⑥ LED for supply voltage

Image 2-1 View of the module AI 2×U ST

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 2 inputs
● Voltage measurement type (can be set per channel)
● Input ranges for voltage measurement:
– ±5 V, resolution 16 bits including sign
– ±10 V, resolution 16 bits including sign
– 1 to 5 V, resolution 15 bits
– 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bits
● Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+
● Permitted common mode voltage: 10 Vss
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Configuration in RUN
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 2xU ST module with the terminal
assignments.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 11
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: Voltage measurement 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 2xU ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for voltage measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n
② Backplane bus interface Un- Voltage input negative, channel n
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function
extensions
④ Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored
BaseUnit)
⑤ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (func- P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
tion cannot be used for this module) Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
⑥ Filter connection supply voltage (only when DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
light-colored BaseUnit is present)
AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
PWR Power LED (green)
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Measuring types and ranges
The analog input module AI 2×U ST has the following measuring ranges:

Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges

Measurement type Measuring range Resolution

Voltage ±5V 16 bits incl. sign
± 10 V 16 bits incl. sign
1 to 5 V 15 bits
0 to 10 V 15 bits

You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the
section Representation of analog values (Page 32).

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 13
Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

4.2 Parameters

Parameters of the AI 2xU ST

The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 28).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Parameter Effective range with configuration

reassign- software, e.g. STEP 7
ment in (TIA Portal)
RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1
Overflow 1
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module
Underflow 1
• Enable
Measurement • Deactivated Voltage +/- 10 Yes Channel Channel
type/measuring range V
• Voltage +/- 5 V
• Voltage +/- 10 V
• Voltage 0..10 V
• Voltage 1..5 V
Smoothing • None None Yes Channel Channel
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

Parameter Range of values Default Parameter Effective range with configuration

reassign- software, e.g. STEP 7
ment in (TIA Portal)
RUN GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Interference frequency • 60 Hz (50 ms) 50 Hz (60 ms) Yes Channel Module
suppression
• 50 Hz (60 ms) 2

• 16.6 Hz (180 ms)

• None
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
group of the
left module (module left module
plugged into a dark Ba-
seUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged in-
to light-colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data
record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the
I/O module is 4 bytes.
2 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.

Note
Unused channels
Disable the unused channels in the parameter assignment.
A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 15
Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Diagnostics are enabled when both input signals are short-circuited in the range 1 to 5 V.
The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, however, the short-circuit diagnostics suppresses
the underflow diagnostics. Short-circuit is output as the diagnostics event.

Diagnostics: Overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.

Diagnostics: Underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.

Measurement type/measuring range

Refer to the section Measuring types and ranges (Page 13).

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in
4 levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) × cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal
change at the analog input.

① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)

Image 4-1 Smoothing for AI 2xU ST

Interference frequency suppression

Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency
of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in
particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this
parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant.

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 17
Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 Parameters/address space
4.4 Address space

4.4 Address space

Configuration options
The following configurations are possible:
● Configuration 1: Without value status
● Configuration 2: With value status

Evaluating the value status

If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the
input address space. Bits 0 and 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the analog value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module.
If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 2×U ST with
value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available
if the value status is enabled.

Image 4-2 Address space of the AI 2×U ST with value status

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 19
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 2xU ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Image 5-1 LED display

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error display

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 22).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel disabled
Off

Channel activated
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

Missing supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The AI 2×U ST analog input module supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit (voltage 1 V to 5 V)
● High limit violated
● Low limit violated
● Error
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing
● Channel temporarily unavailable

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short-circuit of input signal Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Open input Connect input
High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage miss- 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
ing BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable or has been canceled. The module does
• Restart the firmware update.
not read process values in this state.

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the AI 2×U ST

6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 2xU Standard
Firmware version V1.0
• FW update possible Yes

Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1

Color code for module-specific color identification CC00
label
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Scalable measuring range No
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / -
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSI No
CiR Configuration in RUN
Configuration in RUN possible Yes
Calibration in RUN possible No
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 37 mA
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V No
Additional 24 V encoder supply
24 V No

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 23
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.9 W
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 4 bytes; + 1 byte for QI information
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2
Maximum permissible input voltage for voltage 30 V
input (destruction limit)
Cycle time (all channels), min. 500 µs
Input ranges (rated values), voltages
0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 180 kΩ
1 V to 5 V Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 180 kΩ
-10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 180 kΩ
-5 V to +5 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (-5 V to +5 V) 180 kΩ
Cable length
Shielded, max. 200 m
Formation of analog values for the inputs
Measuring principle Sigma Delta
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), 16 bits
max.
Integration time configurable Yes
Interference voltage suppression for interference 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz / off
frequency f1 in Hz
Conversion time (per channel) 50 ms @ 60 Hz, 60 ms @ 50 Hz, 180 ms @ 16.6
Hz, 250 µs without filter
Measured value smoothing
Number of levels 4
Configurable Yes
Setting: None Yes; 1 x cycle time
Setting: Weak Yes; 4 x cycle time
Setting: Medium Yes; 8 x cycle time
Setting: Strong Yes; 16 x cycle time

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
Encoders
Connection of the signal transmitters
For voltage measurement Yes
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01%
Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.005%/K
Crosstalk between inputs, min. -50 dB
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in 0.05%
relation to input range), (+/-)
Operational limit in the entire temperature range
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.5%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.3%
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x
(f1 +/-1%), f1 = interference frequency
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB
< rated value of the input range), min.
Common mode voltage, max. 10 V
Common mode interference, min. 90 dB
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No
terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt Yes
Limit interrupt No
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes
Wire break No
Short-circuit Yes; with 1 to 5 V
Group error Yes
Overflow/underflow Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics No
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
Electrical isolation
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels No
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and voltage supply of the Yes
electronics
Permitted potential difference
Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic isolation)
Between the inputs (UCM) 10 Vss
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 31 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Parameter data record A
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other.

Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFINET.

Measurement type Measuring range Diagnostics

No supply voltage Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow
L+ ground
Deactivated * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x - x x
±10 V x - x x
1 V to 5 V x x x x
0 V to 10 V x - x x

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFIBUS.

Measurement type Measuring range Diagnostics

No supply voltage Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow
L+ ground
Deactivated * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x - x x
±10 V x - x x
1 V to 5 V x x x x
0 V to 10 V x - x x

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 27
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values
of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Image A-1 Structure of data record 128

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Image A-2 Header information

Parameters
The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 29
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Image A-3 Structure of bytes x to x+17 for channels 0 and 1

Codes for measurement types

The following table contains the codes for the measuring types of the analog input module.
You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).

Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types

Measurement type Code

Deactivated 0000 0000
Voltage 0000 0001

Codes for measuring ranges

The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure).

Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges

Measurement type Code

Voltage
±5 V 0000 1000
±10 V 0000 1001
1 to 5 V 0000 1010
0 to 10 V 0000 1011

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Error transmitting the data record

The module always checks all values of the transmitted data record. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error codes if there
are errors in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in the STATUS pa- Meaning Solution

rameter
(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine if the
module is plugged in or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parame-
ters of the WREC instruction.
DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the header Correct the version, length and number of
information parameter blocks.
DF 80 I1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module.

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 31
Representation of analog values B
B.1 Representation of analog values
This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the
analog input module.

Measured value resolution

The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its assigned
parameters.
The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated
decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values.
Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values

Resolution in bits Values Analog value

including sign
Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 Representation of analog values
B.2 Representation of input ranges

B.2 Representation of input ranges

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar
input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

Table B- 2 Bipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range

-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table B- 3 Unipolar input ranges

Dec. val- Measured Data word Range

ue value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range

-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 33
Representation of analog values
B.3 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

B.3 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

Voltage measuring range ±10 V to ±5 V

Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range ±10 V to ±5 V

System Voltage measuring range Range

dec hex ±10 V ±5 V
32767 7FFF >11.759 V >5.879 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V
-32768 8000 <-11.759 V <-5.879 V Underflow

Voltage measuring ranges 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V

Table B- 5 Voltage measuring ranges 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V

System Voltage measuring range Range

dec hex 1 V to 5 V 0 V to 10 V
32767 7FFF >5.704 V >11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 5V 10 V Nominal range
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 0 V + 361.7 µV
0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V
-32768 8000 <0.296 V <-1.759 V Underflow

Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST
(6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

___________________
Representation of analog
values B

04/2018
A5E36104399-AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E36104399-AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2015 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 05/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to the previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following changes:
● Connection diagram has been updated
● Technical specifications have been updated:
● Comments on the previous version of this manual were included in the current edition.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified
electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable
regulations in your country.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

4 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................16
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................17
4.3 Description of parameters .......................................................................................................19
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................22
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 23
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................23
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................25
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................26
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 27
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................27
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 31
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................31
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................32
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 36
B.1 Representation of analog values for analog inputs ................................................................36
B.2 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................37
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................38

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

6 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 7
Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

8 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the
TIA Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 9
Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

10 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification
labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 2 inputs
● Measuring type current for 2- and 4-wire transducers
● Input ranges for current measurement:
– 0 mA to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
– 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
– ± 20 mA, resolution 16 bit incl. sign
● Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+
● Permitted common mode voltage: 10 Vpp/3.5 Vrms
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Constant cycle time for processing measured values
– 500 μs, regardless of the number of channels used and the configuration
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW version FW version STEP 7 GSD file

Function TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or V13 SP1 or as of V5.5 SP4 X X
higher higher with HSP 0227
V6.0 or higher
Identification data I&M0 to FS01 V1.0.0 or V13 SP1 or as of V5.5 SP4 X X
I&M3 higher higher with HSP 0227
V6.0 or higher
Configuration in RUN FS01 V1.0.0 or V13 SP1 or as of V5.5 SP4 X X
higher higher with HSP 0227
V6.0 or higher
Value status FS01 V1.0.0 or V13 SP1 or as of V5.5 SP4 X
higher higher with HSP 0227
V6.0 or higher
PROFIenergy FS01 V1.0.0 or V13 SP1 or as of V5.5 SP4 X X
higher higher with HSP 0227
V6.0 or higher

You can configure the module with STEP 7 and with GSD file.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

12 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST module with the various
terminal assignments for a 2- und 4-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

14 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer)
The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for current measurement (2-wire In + Current input positive, channel n
transducer)
② 4-wire connection for current measurement (4-wire In - Current input negative, channel n
transducer)
③ Backplane bus interface 1UVn Supply voltage (2-wire transducer), channel n
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 2UVn Supply voltage (4-wire transducer), channel n
⑤ Current limitation 2Mn Reference potential (4-wire transducer)
⑥ Switchover 2-wire / 4-wire RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function
extensions
⑦ Color-coded label with color code CC05 (optional) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
⑧ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (func- P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
tion cannot be used for this module) Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
⑨ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
colored BaseUnit is present)
AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire
transducer)

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 15
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges
The analog input module AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST has the following measuring ranges:

Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges

Measurement type Measuring range Resolution

Current (2-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA 15 bits
4 mA to 20 mA 15 bits
Current (4-wire transducer) 0 mA to 20 mA 15 bit
4 mA to 20 mA 15 bits
± 20 mA 16 bits incl. sign

You can find the tables of measuring ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the section
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges (Page 38) and the
"Analog value processing" function manual.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 16
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

4.2 Parameters

Parameters of AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST

During configuration of the module with STEP 7, define the properties of the module via
various parameters. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective
range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 32).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Configuration in Effective range with configuration

RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Short-circuit to
• Enable
ground
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel 1
Overflow 1
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel
Underflow 1
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Wire break
• Enable

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 17
Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

Parameter Range of values Default Configuration in Effective range with configuration

RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Measurement • Deactivated Current (4- Yes Channel Channel
type/measuring wire trans-
• Current (4-wire trans-
range ducer) 4 to
ducer) 0 to 20 mA 20 mA
• Current (4-wire trans-
ducer) 4 to 20 mA
• Current (4-wire trans-
ducer) +/- 20 mA
• Current (2-wire trans-
ducer) 0 to 20 mA
• Current (2-wire trans-
ducer) 4 to 20 mA
Smoothing • None None Yes Channel Channel
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong
Interference fre- • 60 Hz (50 ms) • 50 Hz (60 Yes Channel Module
quency suppression ms)
2 • 50 Hz (60 ms) 3
• 16.6 Hz (180 ms)
• None
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module (mod- group of the
ule plugged into a left module
dark-colored BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module
plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 4 bytes for PROFIBUS
GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix "Parameter
data record".
2 The settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a direct effect on the conversion time of the
channel. The analog value is therefore also affected by additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter.
3 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

18 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Description of parameters

Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" the unused channels in the parameter assignment.
A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

4.3 Description of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics alarm for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or
of an input to the encoder supply.
The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics is output.

Diagnostics: Overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.

Diagnostics: Underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or has too little current for the
measurement in the range of 4 mA to 20 mA.
The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics is output.

Measurement type/measuring range

See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 16).

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Description of parameters

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in
4 levels.
Smoothing time = Number of conversion cycles (k) x conversion time (≙ of the integration
time set in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter) of the channel.
The following figure shows how many conversion cycles it takes for the smoothed analog
value to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every
signal change at the analog input.

① No smoothing
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)

Figure 4-1 Smoothing for AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST

Interference frequency suppression

Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency
of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in
particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this
parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant.

Note:
The interference frequency suppression works parallel to the sampling of channels 0 and 1.
The cycle time of the module is 500 μs regardless of the number of channels used and the
configured interference frequency suppression.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

20 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Description of parameters

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 21
Parameters/address space
4.4 Address space

4.4 Address space

Configuration options
The following configurations are possible:
● Configuration 1: Without value status
● Configuration 2: With value status

Evaluating the value status

If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the
input address space. Bits 0 to 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the analog value.
Bit = 1: There are no errors on the module.
Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module.
If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST
with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only
available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-2 Address space of the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST with value status

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

22 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED displays

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

23 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 26).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG Meaning
Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

Channel disabled
Off

Channel activated
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR Meaning
Missing supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

24 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST analog input module supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit (encoder supply)
● Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA)
● High limit violated
● Low limit violated
● Error
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing
● Channel temporarily unavailable

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 25
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit (encoder 1H Encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and
supply) 1 Input after encoder supply encoder

Wire break (current 4 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify
to 20 mA) the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger
cross-section
Wire break between the module and sen- Connect the cable
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Deactivate channel
• Connect the encoder contacts
High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diag- Replace the module
nostics alarm on channel 0 applies for the
entire module).
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel. (wire break diagnostics set only with
the permitted measuring ranges).
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module does not read any process
values in this state.
1 Since the module has no encoder supply for separate channels, a short-circuit in a channel has a permanent effect on
the other channel.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

26 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST

Article number 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1

General information
Product type designation AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST
Firmware version V1.0
• FW update possible Yes

usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC05
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

• Measuring range scalable No

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V13 SP1
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP3

sion

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSD Revision 5

sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- V2.3 / -

sion
Operating mode
• Oversampling No

• MSI No

CiR – Configuration in RUN

Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes
Calibration possible in RUN No
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 45 mA; without sensor supply

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

27 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1

24 V encoder supply
• 24 V Yes

• Short-circuit protection Yes

• Output current, max. 50 mA; Total current for both channels (two-wire)

Additional 24 V encoder supply

• 24 V Yes

• Short-circuit protection Yes; Module-wise

• Output current, max. 200 mA; Total current for both channels (four-
wire)
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.1 W
Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 4 byte; + 1 byte for QI information

Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2
• For current measurement 2

permissible input current for current input (de- 50 mA

struction limit), max.
Cycle time (all channels), min. 500 µs
Input ranges (rated values), currents
• 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit

• Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 130 Ω; 90 ohms with two wires

• -20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign

• Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 130 Ω

• 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit

• Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 130 Ω; 90 ohms with two wires

Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

Analog value generation for the inputs

Measurement principle Sigma Delta
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
• Resolution with overrange (bit including 16 bit
sign), max.

• Integration time, parameterizable Yes

• Interference voltage suppression for inter- 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz / off

ference frequency f1 in Hz

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

28 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1

Smoothing of measured values
• Number of smoothing levels 4

• parameterizable Yes

• Step: None Yes; 1x conversion time

• Step: low Yes; 4x conversion time

• Step: Medium Yes; 8x conversion time

• Step: High Yes; 16x conversion time

Encoder
Connection of signal encoders
• for current measurement as 2-wire trans- Yes
ducer
– Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. 650 Ω

• for current measurement as 4-wire trans- Yes

ducer
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.01 %
Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.005 %/K
)
Crosstalk between the inputs, min. -50 dB
Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (rela- 0.05 %
tive to input range), (+/-)
Operational error limit in overall temperature
range
• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.5 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)

• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-

1 %), f1 = interference frequency
• Series mode interference (peak value of 70 dB
interference < rated value of input range),
min.

• Common mode voltage, max. 10 V

• Common mode interference, min. 90 dB

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 29
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1

Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

• Limit value alarm No

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break Yes; at 4 to 20 mA

• Short-circuit Yes; Short-circuit of the encoder supply

• Group error Yes

• Overflow/underflow Yes

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- Yes

ply of the electronics
Permissible potential difference
between the inputs (UCM) 10 Vpp
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 32 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

30 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
Parameter data record A
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other.

Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFINET.

Measurement type Measuring Diagnostics

range No supply volt- Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow Wire break
age L+ ground
Deactivated * * * * *
Current 0 mA to x x x x -
(4-wire transducer) 20 mA
4 mA to x x x x x
20 mA
±20 mA x x x x -
Current 0 mA to x x x - -
(2-wire transducer) 20 mA
4 mA to x x x x x
20 mA

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFIBUS.

Measurement type Measuring Diagnostics

range No supply voltage Short-circuit to Overflow/underflow Wire break
L+ ground
Deactivated * * * *
Current 0 mA to 20 mA x x x -
(4-wire transducer) 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x
+/- 20 mA x x x -
Current 0 mA to 20 mA x x x -
(2-wire transducer) 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

31 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values
of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS
output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

32 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Parameters
The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 33
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Figure A-3 Structure of bytes x to x+17 for channels 0 and 1

Codes for measurement types

The following table contains the codes for the measuring types of the analog input module.
You must enter these codes in byte x (see channel parameter block figure).

Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types

Measurement type Code

Deactivated 0000 0000
Current, 4-wire transducer 0000 0010
Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011

Codes for measuring ranges

The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You must enter these codes in byte x+1 (see channel parameter block figure).

Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges

Measuring range Coding

Current
0 mA to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 mA to 20 mA 0000 0011
±20 mA 0000 0100

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

34 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Error transmitting the data record

The module always checks all values of the transmitted data record. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error codes if there
are errors in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in the STATUS pa- Meaning Solution

rameter
(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine if the
module is plugged in or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parame-
ters of the WREC instruction.
DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the header Correct the version, length and number of
information parameter blocks.
DF 80 I1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 35
Representation of analog values B
B.1 Representation of analog values for analog inputs
This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the
analog module.

Measured value resolution

The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its
parameter assignment.
The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated
decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values.
Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values

Resolution in bits Values Analog value

including sign
Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 36
 Representation of analog values
B.2 Representation of input ranges

B.2 Representation of input ranges

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar
input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

Table B- 2 Bipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range

-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table B- 3 Unipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB 37
Representation of analog values
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
measuring ranges.

Table B- 4 Current measuring range ±20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 < -23.52 mA Underflow

Table B- 5 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA* 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA > 22.81 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 < -3.52 mA < 1.185 mA Underflow

* For measurement type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to
20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

38 Manual, 04/2018, A5E36104399-AB
 Preface
___________________
Documentation Guide 1
___________________
2
SIMATIC Product overview
___________________
3
ET 200SP ___________________
Connecting

Analog input module 4

AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS ___________________
Parameters/address space

(6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Interrupts/diagnostics
interrupts 5
Manual

6
___________________
Technical specifications

A
___________________
Parameter data record

Representation of analog
values B

09/2018
A5E03576060-AF
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03576060-AF Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection has been
changed.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in the following, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified
electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable
regulations in your country.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation Guide ............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 10
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................10
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 13
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................13
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................16
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.3 Description of parameters .......................................................................................................19
4.4 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................21
4.5 Address space ........................................................................................................................24
5 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts............................................................................................................. 26
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................26
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................28
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................30
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 32
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................32
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 37
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................37
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................39
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 45
B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................46
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................47
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................48

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 5
 Documentation Guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 6
 Documentation Guide

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 7
Documentation Guide

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(https://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Documentation Guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 9
 Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Article number
⑥ LED for supply voltage
Figure 2-1 View of the AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS module

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 2 inputs
● Measurement types voltage and current for 2-/4-wire transducers
● Input ranges for voltage measurement:
– ±10 V, resolution 16 bit including sign
– ±5 V, resolution 15 bit incl. sign
– 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bit
– 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bit
● Input ranges for current measurement:
– ±20 mA, resolution 16 bit incl. sign
– 4 to 20 mA, resolution 14 bit
– 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bit
● Electrically isolated between the channels
● Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+
● Permitted common mode voltage: 100 Vpp/35 Vrms
● Configurable diagnostics (per channel)
● Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel (two high and two low limits
per channel)
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Reconfiguration in RUN
● PROFIenergy

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions

Function Product version of Firmware version of

the module as of the module as of
Basic version 1 V1.0.0
Isochronous mode with send clock up to 250 µs 2 V1.1.0
Value status 2 V1.1.0
Oversampling channel 0 2 V1.1.0
Oversampling channel 0 and 1 2 V2.0.0
Isochronous mode with send clock up to 125 µs 2 V2.0.1

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Connecting 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section contains the block diagram of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS module with the various
terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 4-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during
the configuration.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 13
Connecting
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: Voltage measurement 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for voltage measurement UVn Supply voltage, channel n

② Backplane bus interface RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function
extensions
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Mn Reference ground to UVn, channel n
④ Current limitation L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) M Ground
⑥ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
(function cannot be used for this module) Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
⑦ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
BaseUnit is present)
Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
Un- Voltage input negative, channel n F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red)
In + Current input positive, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
In - Current input negative, channel n
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Connecting
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for current measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n
② 4-wire connection for current measurement Un- Voltage input negative, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface UVn Supply voltage, channel n
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) RES Reserve, must remain unused for future func-
tion extensions
⑤ Current limitation Mn Reference ground to UVn, channel n
⑥ Color identification label CCxx (optional) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
⑦ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
(function cannot be used for this module) Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
⑧ Supply voltage filter circuit (only when light DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
BaseUnit is present)
Uext Encoder supply external AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
In + Current input positive, channel n F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red)
In - Current input negative, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 15
 Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges
The analog input module AI 2×U/I 2/4-wire HSF has the following measuring ranges:

Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges

Measurement type Measuring range Resolution

Voltage ±10 V 16 bit incl. sign
±5 V 15 bit incl. sign
0 to 10 V 15 bit
1 to 5 V 13 bit
Current (2-/4-wire transducers) ±20 mA 1 16 bit incl. sign
0 to 20 mA 15 bit
4 to 20 mA 14 bit

You can find the tables of measuring ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the section
Representation of analog values (Page 45) and the "Analog Value Processing" function
manual.
1 Measuring range "+/-20 mA" is only possible with the measurement type "Current (4-wire
transducer)".

4.2 Parameters

Parameters of the AI 2xU/I 2/4-wire HS

The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation on an ET 200SP CPU or on an ET 200SP Open Controller
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
In addition to assigning parameters with the configuration software, you can also set the
parameters in RUN mode (dynamically) using the user program. When assigning parameters
in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module
by means of data records; see section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter
data record (Page 39).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 16
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Reconfigura- Effective range with configurati-

tion in RUN on software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Sampling rate 1 value/cycle 1 value/cycle No Module Module
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel 1
Overflow
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel
Underflow
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Wire break
• Enable
Type/range of measu- • Deactivated Current (4- Yes Channel Channel
rement wire trans-
• Voltage 1 to 5 V
ducer) 4 to
• Voltage +/- 5 V 20 mA
• Voltage +/- 10 V
• Voltage 0 to 10 V
• Current (4-wire transducer)
0 to 20 mA
• Current (4-wire transducer)
+/- 20 mA
• Current (4-wire transducer)
4 to 20 mA
• Current (2-wire transducer)
0 to 20 mA
• Current (2-wire transducer)
4 to 20 mA
Smoothing • None None Yes Channel Channel
• 2 times
• 4 times
• 8 times
• 16 times
• 32 times
• 64 times

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 17
Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

Parameter Value range Default Reconfigura- Effective range with configurati-

tion in RUN on software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Hardware interrupt high • Disable Disable Yes Channel -1
limit 1
• Enable
Hardware interrupt low • Disable Disable Yes Channel
limit 1
• Enable
Hardware interrupt high • Disable Disable Yes Channel
limit 2
• Enable
Hardware interrupt low • Disable Disable Yes Channel
limit 2
• Enable
High limit 1 • Value 27648 Yes Channel Channel 1

Low limit 1 • Value 0 Yes Channel

High limit 2 • Value 27648 Yes Channel

Low limit 2 • Value 0 Yes Channel

Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (dark-colored group of the
BaseUnit) left module

• Enable new potential group

(light-colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using
the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the
I/O module is 4 bytes.

Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" the unused channels in the parameter assignment.
A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Description of parameters

4.3 Description of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics alarm for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or
of an input to the encoder supply. A short-circuit is also detected in the range of 1 to 5 V if
the input signal is short-circuited or the input is not connected.
The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics is output.

Diagnostics: Overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.

Diagnostics: Underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or has too little current for the
measurement in the range of 4 mA to 20 mA.
The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics is output.

Measurement type/measuring range

See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 16).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Description of parameters

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in
7 levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) × cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This is valid for all signal
changes at the analog input.

① No smoothing
② 2x smoothing
③ 4x smoothing
④ 8x smoothing
⑤ 16x smoothing
⑥ 32x smoothing
⑦ 64x smoothing
Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS

Potential group
You can use the "Potential group" parameter to specify whether the module is inserted in a
light-colored or dark-colored BaseUnit.
A potential group always starts with an I/O module that is inserted on a light-colored
BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this on dark-colored BaseUnits belong to the
same potential group, because the dark-colored BaseUnits are supplied via the light-colored
BaseUnits.
The potential group ends with a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station.

See also
ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Parameters/address space
4.4 Oversampling

4.4 Oversampling

Function
Oversampling is the acquisition of data in constant bus cycle segments (sub-cycles). The
configured number n of sub-cycles corresponds to one PROFINET bus cycle.
Oversampling is useful whenever you require acquisition of data with high time resolution but
without using an extremely short PROFINET bus cycle and thus fast CPU cycles.
With oversampling, a PROFINET bus cycle is divided into constant bus sub-cycles:
● One measured value is acquired in each sub-cycle.
● The minimum PROFINET bus cycle is 250 µs. Only a subset of functions is available for
shorter sub-cycles.
● The shortest possible sub-cycle is 50 μs.
● You can configure oversampling:
– For channel 0 (1-channel operation)
– For channel 0/1 (2-channel operation)
● The number of sub-cycles can be set as follows:
– From 2 to 16 for one channel
– From 2 to 8 for two channels

Requirement
Oversampling is only possible when isochronous mode is set.

Configuration
You configure oversampling with the following parameter:
● Sampling rate

Note
Do not use a reduction ratio for blocks in the case of configuration with oversampling in the
runtime groups of your user program. This will ensure that the data processing in the user
program of the CPU is synchronized with the acquisition on the module.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 21
Parameters/address space
4.4 Oversampling

Overview of the operating modes

Function Normal operation Oversampling in normal operation Oversampling in high-speed

1-channel ope- 2-channel opera- 1-channel ope- 2-channel ope-
ration tion ration ration
Isochronous mode Yes, optional Yes, required Yes, required
• Shortest send clock 125 µs 500 µs 250 μs

Oversampling No Yes Yes

• Number of over- - 2 to 16 2 to 8 2 to 16 2 to 8
sampling levels
(sampling rate)

• Shortest sub-cycle - 250 μs 50 μs

(= shortest sampling
time)
Hardware interrupt x - -
Smoothing x x -
±10 V x x x
0 to 10 V x x -
±5 V x x -
1 to 5 V x x -
±20 mA x x x
0 to 20 mA x x -
4 to 20 mA x x -
Overflow/underflow x x x1)
Wire break 4 to 20 mA x x -
Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) x x -
Short-circuit encoder x x x
supply with current
measuring ranges
Load voltage diagnos- x x x
tics
Value status (QI) x - -
Address space 4 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes
1 For product version 1, the result must be present for at least one fieldbus cycle + 250 μs for a reliable detection of the
diagnostics (overflow/underflow) as of firmware version 1.x.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Parameters/address space
4.4 Oversampling

Sampling interval
The duration of a subcycle is the sampling interval. The cycle time T (send clock) for
isochronous mode is specified in the configuration software. This time, divided by the
configured sampling rate nSample, yields the sampling interval tSample of the module.
Example calculation:

Figure 4-2 Example of calculating the sampling interval

Chronological sequence
The figure shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The acquired measured
vales of a data cycle with oversampling are only copied to the interface module in the
subsequent bus cycle and are then available to the processing CPU one bus cycle later.

① n = measured values from bus cycle n

Figure 4-3 Oversampling

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 23
Parameters/address space
4.5 Address space

4.5 Address space

Configuration options
The following configurations are possible:
● Configuration 1: Without value status
● Configuration 2: With value status

Evaluating the value status

An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the analog module. Bits 0 to 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the analog value.
Bit =1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit =0: The wiring, the value created on the channel, or similar is incorrect.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
value status are only available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-4 Address space of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS with value status

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Parameters/address space
4.5 Address space

Address space of the AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with one channel
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for oversampling with one
channel. Writing always starts from IB x. If fewer than 16 sub-cycles are set, the addresses
that are then unused are filled with 7FFFH.

Figure 4-5 Address space of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with one channel

Address space of the AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with two channels
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for oversampling with two
channels. Writing always starts from IB x. Only a maximum of 8 sub-cycles are possible. If
fewer than 8 sub-cycles are set, the addresses that are then unused are filled with 7FFFH.

Figure 4-6 Address space of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with two channels

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 25
 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ Channel fault (red)
④ PWR (green)
Figure 5-1 LED displays

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 26
 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 30).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED

DIAG Meaning
Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Channel status/channel fault LED

Table 5- 2 Status/error display of the channel status/channel fault LED

Channel status Channel fault Meaning

Channel deactivated or no load voltage L+
Off Off
Channel activated and no channel diagnostics
On Off
Channel activated and channel diagnostics
Off On
Not permitted (error)
On On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR Meaning
No supply voltage L+
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 27
Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts.

Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller

The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events:
● Low limit 1 violated
● High limit 1 violated
● Low limit 2 violated
● High limit 2 violated
If an interrupt occurs, a corresponding interrupt OB is called in the CPU of the IO controller.

S7-1500
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.
The block interface is shown here with optimized block access, which is set in the TIA Portal
by default.

Name Data type Comment

LADDR HW_IO Hardware identifier of the module triggering the interrupt
USI WORD USI (High/Low)
IChannel USInt Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt
EventType Byte Error event

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts
5.2 Interrupts

S7-300/400 or a different CPU

You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block
with the instruction "RALARM" (read additional interrupt info) and in the STEP 7 online help.
The channel of the module that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start
information of OB4x in the OB4x_POINT_ADDR tag. The following figure shows the
assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data.

Figure 5-2 OB4x_POINT_ADDR tag

Structure of the additional interrupt information

Table 5- 4 Structure of USI = W#16#0001

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0001 User Structure Identifier: Additional interrupt 2
info for hardware interrupts of the I/O module
The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows.
Channel B#16#00 to B#16#01 Channel 0 and 1 of the I/O module 1
The error event that triggered the hardware interrupt follows.
Error event B#16#03 Low limit 1 violated 1
B#16#04 High limit 1 violated
B#16#05 Low limit 2 violated
B#16#06 High limit 2 violated

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 29
Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics interrupt
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit (current and voltage 1 to 5 V)
● Wire break (current)
● High limit violated
● Low limit violated
● Error
● Parameter assignment error
● No load voltage
● Channel temporarily unavailable

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit (current) 1H Encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and
Input after encoder supply encoder

Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short circuit of input signal Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Open input Connect input
Wire break (current) 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify
the wiring, for example, using cables
with larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and sen- Connect the cable
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Deactivate diagnostics
• Connect the encoder contacts
High limit violated 7H Value is above overrange. Correct the output value
Low limit violated 8H Value is below underrange. Correct the output value
Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diag- Replace the module
nostics alarm on channel 0 applies for the
entire module).
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel. (wire break diagnostics set only with
the permitted measuring ranges).
• Incorrect parameter assignment.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has • Wait for firmware update
unavailable been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update
The module does not read any process
values in this state.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 31
 Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS

The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1/td?dl=en).

Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1

General information
Product type designation AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS
Firmware version V2.0.1
• FW update possible Yes

usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC00
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

• Measuring range scalable No

• Scalable measured values No

• Adjustment of measuring range No

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V13 SP1
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of versi- V5.5 SP3 / -

on

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revisi- GSD Revision 5

on

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revisi- GSDML V2.3

on
Operating mode
• Oversampling Yes; 2 channels per module

• MSI No

CiR – Configuration in RUN

Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes
Calibration possible in RUN No

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 32
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 39 mA; without sensor supply
24 V encoder supply
• 24 V Yes; For current measurement

• Short-circuit protection Yes

• Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration <
10 s
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.95 W; without sensor supply
Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 4 byte; + 1 byte for QI information (32 bytes in the
oversampling operating mode)
Hardware configuration
Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants
• 2-wire connection BU type A0, A1

• 4-wire connection BU type A0, A1

Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2; Differential inputs
• For current measurement 2

• For voltage measurement 2

permissible input voltage for voltage input 30 V

(destruction limit), max.
permissible input current for current input (de- 50 mA
struction limit), max.
Cycle time (all channels), min. 125 µs
Analog input with oversampling Yes
• Values per cycle, max. 16

• Resolution, min. 50 µs

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 33
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1

Input ranges (rated values), voltages
• 0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bit

• Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 75 kΩ

• 1 V to 5 V Yes; 13 bit

• Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 75 kΩ

• -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign

• Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 75 kΩ

• -5 V to +5 V Yes; 15 bit incl. sign

• Input resistance (-5 V to +5 V) 75 kΩ

Input ranges (rated values), currents

• 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit

• Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 130 Ω

• -20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign

• Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 130 Ω

• 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 14 bit

• Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 130 Ω

Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m; 200 m for voltage measurement

Analog value generation for the inputs

Measurement principle Actual value encryption (successive approximati-
on)
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
• Resolution with overrange (bit including 16 bit
sign), max.

• Interference voltage suppression for inter- No

ference frequency f1 in Hz

• Conversion time (per channel) 10 µs

Smoothing of measured values

• Number of smoothing levels 7; none; 2-/4-/8-/16-/32-/64-fold

• parameterizable Yes

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1

Encoder
Connection of signal encoders
• for voltage measurement Yes

• for current measurement as 2-wire trans- Yes

ducer
– Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. 650 Ω

• for current measurement as 4-wire trans- Yes

ducer
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.03 %
Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.01 %/K
)
Crosstalk between the inputs, min. -50 dB
Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (rela- 0.1 %
tive to input range), (+/-)
Operational error limit in overall temperature ran-
ge
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %

• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)

• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.2 %

• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.2 %

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-

1 %), f1 = interference frequency
• Common mode voltage, max. 35 V

• Common mode interference, min. 90 dB

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- Yes
nized up to terminal)
Filtering and processing time (TCI), min. 80 µs
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 125 µs; Starting from firmware Version V2.0.1
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

• Limit value alarm Yes; two upper and two lower limit values in each
case

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 35
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1

Diagnostic messages
• Wire-break Yes; channel-by-channel, at 4 to 20 mA only

• Short-circuit Yes; channel-by-channel, at 1 to 5 V or for cur-

rent measuring ranges short-circuit in encoder
supply
• Group error Yes

• Overflow/underflow Yes

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; green PWR LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics Yes; Red LED

• for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels Yes

• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power supp- Yes

ly of the electronics
Permissible potential difference
between the inputs (UCM) 75 V DC/60 V AC
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 32 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
Parameter data record A
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other.

Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFINET.

Measurement Measuring Diagnostics Hardware

type range No supply Short-circuit Overflow Underflow Wire break interrupts
voltage L+ to ground
Deactivated * * * * * *
Voltage 1 to 5 V x x x x - x
±5 V x - x x - x
±10 V x - x x - x
0 to 10 V x - x x - x
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x x - x
(4-wire trans- ±20 mA x x x x - x
ducer)
4 to 20 mA x x x x x x
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x - - x
(2-wire trans- 4 to 20 mA x x x x x x
ducer)

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

37 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
Parameter data record
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file

Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFIBUS.

Measurement Measuring Diagnostics Hardware inter-

type range No supply vol- Short-circuit to Over- Wire break rupts
tage L+ ground flow/underflow
Deactivated * * * * *
Voltage 1 to 5 V x x x - -
+/- 5 V x - x - -
+/- 10 V x - x - -
0 to 10 V x - x - -
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x - -
(4-wire trans- +/- 20 mA x x x - -
ducer)
4 to 20 mA x x x x -
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x - -
(2-wire trans- 4 to 20 mA x x x x -
ducer)

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

38 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameter assignment in the user program

The module can be re-configured in RUN (for example, the voltage or current values of
selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

Note
Following a firmware update, you need to re-configure the I/O module before you can use
the new functions.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.

Note
Changing parameters in RUN
A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment
results in a brief exit from clocked measuring mode and renewed synchronization with the
fieldbus cycle. The slowest channel provides the "internal" measuring cycle.

STATUS output parameter

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS
output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 39
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.

Figure A-3 Module header information

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

40 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-4 Module parameter block

Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.

Figure A-5 Channel header information

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 41
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Channel parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

42 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+19 for channels 0 and 1

Codes for measurement types

The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input
module. You must enter these codes in byte x (see channel parameter block figure).

Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types

Measurement type Code

Deactivated 0000 0000
Voltage 0000 0001
Current, 4-wire transducer 0000 0010
Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 43
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Codes for measuring ranges

The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You must enter these codes in byte x+1 (see channel parameter block figure).

Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges

Measuring range Code

Voltage
±5 V 0000 1000
±10 V 0000 1001
1 to 5 V 0000 1010
0 to 10 V 0000 1011
Current
±20 mA 0000 0100
0 to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 to 20 mA 0000 0011

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

44 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
Representation of analog values B
This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the
analog module.

Measured value resolution

The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its
parameter assignment.
The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated
decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values.
Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values

Resolution in bits Values Analog value

including sign
Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
13 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx
14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

45 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
Representation of analog values
B.1 Representation of input ranges

B.1 Representation of input ranges

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar
input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

Table B- 2 Bipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range

-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table B- 3 Unipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

46 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
 Representation of analog values
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage
measuring ranges.

Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range ±10 V and ±5 V

Values Voltage measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V ±5 V
32767 7FFF > 11.759 V > 5.879 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V
-32768 8000 < -11.759 V < -5.879 V Underflow

Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V

Values Voltage measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
32767 7FFF > 5.704 V > 11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 5V 10 V Nominal range
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 361.7 µV
0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V
-32768 8000 < 0.296 V < -1.759 V Underflow

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF 47
Representation of analog values
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
measuring ranges.

Table B- 6 Current measuring range ±20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 < -23.52 mA Underflow

Table B- 7 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA* 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA** > 22.81 mA** Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 < -3.52 mA < 1.185 mA Underflow

* For measurement type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to
20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.
** For measurement type "2-wire transducer", the behavior described here is supported for overflow
up to max. 35 mA.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

48 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03576060-AF
Analog input module ___________________
Preface

AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF ___________________

Guide to documentation 1
(6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF
(6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

___________________
Representation of analog
values B

12/2015
A5E33062495-AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E33062495-AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 12/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................11
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 14
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................14
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15
4.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................18
4.4 Measuring range adjustment ..................................................................................................21
4.5 Scaling of measured values ....................................................................................................24
4.6 Address space ........................................................................................................................27
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 31
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................31
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................33
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................35
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 36
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 40
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................40
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................42
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 52
B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................52
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................53
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................54

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 5
Guide to documentation 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Guide to documentation

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the
system - separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 7
Guide to documentation

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Article number
⑥ LED for supply voltage

Image 2-1 View of the module AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 2 inputs
● Resolution: Up to 16 bits including sign
● Single channel electrical isolation
● Voltage measurement type can be set per channel
● Current measuring type can be set per channel (for 2-wire or 4-wire transducer)
● Configurable diagnostics (per channel)
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Configuration in RUN
● PROFIenergy
● Calibration in runtime
● Isochronous mode (PROFINET IO only)
● Value status (PROFINET IO only)

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions

Function Product version of the Firmware version of the module

module as of as of
Measuring range adjustment 1 V2.0.0
Scaling of measured values 1 V2.0.0
Module-internal shared input (MSI) 1 V2.0.0

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file 1.
1 Version required for STEP 7: V5.5 SP4 HF7

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system system manual.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF module with the various
terminal assignments for a 2- und 4-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 11
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: Voltage measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for voltage measurement In + Current input positive, channel n

② 4-wire connection for voltage measurement In - Current input negative, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface UVn Supply voltage, channel n
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Mn Reference ground to UVn, channel n
⑤ Current limitation (4-wire) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored
BaseUnit)
⑥ Current limitation (2-wire) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
⑦ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (func- DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
tion cannot be used for this module)
⑧ Color-coded label with color code CC05 (optional) AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
⑨ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red)
colored BaseUnit is present)
Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Un- Voltage input negative, channel n
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer)
The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for current measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n
(2-wire transducer)
② 4-wire connection for current measurement Un- Voltage input negative, channel n
(4-wire transducer)
③ Backplane bus interface UVn Supply voltage, channel n
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Mn Reference ground to UVn, channel n
⑤ Current limitation (4-wire) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
⑥ Current limitation (2-wire) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
⑦ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
(function cannot be used for this module)
⑧ Color-coded label with color code CC05 AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
(optional)
⑨ Filter connection supply voltage (only when F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red)
light-colored BaseUnit is present)
In + Current input positive, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
In - Current input negative, channel n
Image 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire
transducer)

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 13
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges
The following table shows the measurement types and the respective measuring range.

Table 4- 1 Measurement types and measuring ranges

Measurement Measuring range Resolution

type
Voltage ±5V 16 bits incl. sign
± 10 V 16 bits incl. sign
1 to 5 V 15 bits
0 to 10 V 15 bits
Current 0 to 20 mA (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) 15 bits
4 to 20 mA (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) 15 bits
± 20 mA (only with 4-wire transducer) 16 bit including sign

You can find the tables of measuring ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the appendix
Representation of analog values (Page 52) and the "Analog value processing" function
manual.

Measuring range adjustment

See Measuring range adjustment (Page 21).

Scaling of measured values

See Scaling of measured values (Page 24).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 14
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

4.2 Parameters

Parameters of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF

The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable
parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the WRREC instruction to transfer the
parameters to the module by means of data records; refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 42).
The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Range of values Default Configura- Scope with configuration soft-

tion in RUN ware, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
No supply voltage
• Enable
L+
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Short-circuit to
• Enable
ground
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Overflow
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Underflow
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
Wire break
• Enable

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 15
Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

Parameter Range of values Default Configura- Scope with configuration soft-

tion in RUN ware, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Measurement • Deactivated Current (4-wire Yes Channel Channel
type/measuring transducer)
• Voltage
range 4..20 mA
– ±5 V
– ±10 V
– 1 V to 5 V
– 0 V to 10 V
• Current (4-wire transducer)
– 0 to 20 mA
– 4 to 20 mA
– ±20 mA
• Current (2-wire transducer)
– 0 to 20 mA
– 4 to 20 mA
Smoothing • None None Yes Channel Channel
• 2 times
• 4 times
• 8 times
• 16 times
• 32 times
Interference fre- • 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 50 Hz (22.5 ms) Yes Channel Channel
quency suppres-
• 50 Hz (22.5 ms)
sion 2
• 60 Hz (18.75 ms)
• 300 Hz (10 ms)
• 600 Hz (5 ms)
• 1.2 kHz (2.5 ms)
• 2.4 kHz (1.25 ms)
• 4.8 kHz (0.625 ms)
Measuring range • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
adjustment 1
• Enable
Measuring range Value within the nominal range 0 Yes Channel -
adjustment high of the measuring range in mV
limit 1 or µA
Measuring range Value within the nominal range 0 Yes Channel -
adjustment low of the measuring range in mV
limit 1 or µA
Scaled high nomi- REAL 20.0 Yes Channel -
nal range limit 3
Scaled low nomi- REAL 4.0 Yes Channel -
nal range limit 3

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

Parameter Range of values Default Configura- Scope with configuration soft-

tion in RUN ware, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Hardware inter- • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
rupt high limit 1 1
• Enable
Hardware inter- • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
rupt low limit 1 1
• Enable
Hardware inter- • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
rupt high limit 2 1
• Enable
Hardware inter- • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
rupt low limit 2 1
• Enable
Hardware inter- • Value (INT) • 27648 Yes Channel -
rupt high limit 1 1
• Value (REAL) 3 • 0.0 3
Hardware inter- • Value (INT) • 0 Yes Channel -
rupt low limit 1 1
• Value (REAL) 3 • 0.0 3

Hardware inter- • Value (INT) • 27648 Yes Channel -

rupt high limit 2 1
• Value (REAL) 3 • 0.0 3
Hardware inter- • Value (INT) • 0 Yes Channel -
rupt low limit 2 1
• Value (REAL) 3 • 0.0 3

Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential group No Module Module
left module (module of the left module
plugged into a dark-colored
BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential group
(module plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)

1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 7 bytes.
2 In normal operation, different interference frequency suppression settings can be configured for both channels. These
cause different integration times for the analog-to-digital conversion. The module-internal time for updating the user data
is now based on the longer integration time for both channels.
In isochronous mode, both channels must be configured with the same interference frequency suppression of 4.8 kHz.
3 Only for configuration SCALE.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 17
Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of parameters

Note
Unused channels
Deactivate the unused inputs in the parameter assignment.
A deactivated input always returns the value 7FFFH or 7F800000H with measured value
scaling.

Property of the module in isochronous mode

The permitted interference frequency suppression of both channels for isochronous mode of
the modules is 4.8 kHz (0.625 ms).
Note that no instantaneous value for the time Ti is returned in isochronous mode. The analog
module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF returns a mean value for the range of 0.625 ms starting at Ti.

4.3 Explanation of parameters

Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. A short-
circuit is also detected in the range of 1 to 5 V if the input signal is short-circuited or the input
is not connected.
The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics is output.

Diagnostics: Overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.

Diagnostics: Underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.

Diagnostics: Wire break

Enable the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or has too little current for the
measurement in the range of 4 to 20 mA.
The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics is output.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of parameters

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 5
levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal
change at the analog input.

① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
⑤ Very strong (k = 32)

Image 4-1 Smoothing AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF

Interference frequency suppression

Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency
of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in
particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this
parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant.

Measuring range adjustment

The measuring range adjustment is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the
analog input module. It is available for current and voltage measurements.
A limited measuring range in S7 format is shown, which is defined by the high and low limits
of the measuring range adjustment.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 19
Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of parameters

Scaling of measured values

With measured value scaling, the user data of an analog input module is displayed as REAL
(32-bit floating point) instead of S7 format.
The representation of the measuring range is defined by the scaled high and low limits of
nominal range limit (as REAL).
The measured value scaling can be combined with the measuring range adjustment. In this
case, the measuring range is adjusted first and then the representation of the measuring
range is scaled.

BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage

Specifies that a light-colored BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage is located on this slot
(see ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual).

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

See also
You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameters/address space
4.4 Measuring range adjustment

4.4 Measuring range adjustment

Introduction
The measuring range adjustment is available for current and voltage measuring ranges.
The measuring range adjustment (base measuring range) is valid for the following ranges:
● Nominal range
● Underrange (of the measuring range adjustment)
● Overrange (of the measuring range adjustment)

Note
Live zero measuring ranges are not supported.

Function
The measuring range adjustment is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the
module.
It allows you to increase the resolution for a configurable part of the measuring range in S7
format.
● The function is enabled with the "Measuring range adjustment" parameter
● The "Measuring range adjustment high limit" parameter sets the high limit of the
measuring range in mV or μA.
● The "Measuring range adjustment low limit" parameter sets the low limit of the measuring
range in mV or μA.

Note
The "Measuring range adjustment" function can be used in combination with the "Measured
value scaling" function. See also Scaling of measured values (Page 24).

Note
When the "Measuring range adjustment high limit" and "Measuring range adjustment low
limit" parameters are too close together, resolution may be lost, which means it may no
longer be possible to show every value.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 21
Parameters/address space
4.4 Measuring range adjustment

Rules
● The limits of the measuring range adjustment must be selected within the nominal range
of the base measuring range. They are specified in integers.
● The measuring range adjustment is resolved depending on the base measuring range
from 0H to 6C00H or 9400H to 6C00H.
● Underranges/overranges apply in accordance with the S7 format and the base measuring
range.
Special consideration: Negative values are not possible for "Current (2-wire transducer)
0..20 mA". With a measuring range adjustment, an underrange is offered when possible
and cut off at 0 mA. If the underrange limit (ED00H) is > 0 mA, QI = 0 and the analog
value 8000H are output when it is violated.

Example
The following values result, for example:

Table 4- 3 Example of measuring range adjustment

Measuring range adjustment Measuring range resolution

Bipolar Unipolar
Base measuring range ±10 V 0 V to 10 V
Adjusted measuring range +2 V to +5 V +2 V to +5 V
Measuring range adjustment high limit 5000 mV 5000 mV
(S7: +27648) (S7: +27648)
Measuring range adjustment low limit 2000 mV 2000 mV
(S7: -27648) (S7: 0)

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameters/address space
4.4 Measuring range adjustment

The following example illustrates the effect of a measuring range adjustment:

Image 4-2 Example of a measuring range adjustment

Configuration
The following figure shows an example of a configuration:

Image 4-3 Example of a configuration

In the configuration example, a measuring range adjustment of 2000 mV to 5000 mV is
displayed.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 23
Parameters/address space
4.5 Scaling of measured values

4.5 Scaling of measured values

Introduction
The measured value scaling can be combined with the measuring range adjustment. In this
case, the measuring range is adjusted first and then the representation of the measuring
range is scaled.

Function
With measured value scaling, the user data of an AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF module is displayed
as REAL (32-bit floating point) instead of S7 format.
The representation of the measuring range is defined by the following parameters:
● The "Scaled high nominal range limit" parameter sets the desired display value (in REAL)
for the high nominal range limit of the measuring range.
● The "Scaled low nominal range limit" parameter sets the desired display value (in REAL)
for the low nominal range limit of the measuring range.

Note
With measured value scaling, the substitute value is minus infinity for underflow
(FF800000H) and plus infinity for overflow (7F800000H).

Note
Effects of inversion
It is possible to set the "Scaled high nominal range limit" parameter lower than the "Scaled
low nominal range limit" parameter, whereby the representation of the measuring range will
be inverted compared to the terminal value (V, mA).
Overflow/underflow and hardware interrupts are always based on representation in REAL. A
terminal value of > 11.76 V triggered an underflow for an inverted measured value scaling.
Hardware interrupts react similarly.

Note
When the Parameter "Scaled high nominal range limit" and "Scaled low nominal range limit"
parameters are too close together, resolution may be lost, which means it may no longer be
possible to show every value.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameters/address space
4.5 Scaling of measured values

Example
The following values result, for example:

Table 4- 4 Example of measured value scaling

Low nominal range limit High nominal range limit

Base measuring range -10 V +10 V
S7 format -27648 +27648
Scaling of measured values 1.00 7.00

As shown in the table, -10 V corresponds to 1.00 and +10 V corresponds to 7.00.

Combination with measuring range adjustment

If the measuring range adjustment is enabled in addition to measured value scaling, first the
measuring range is scaled and then the representation of the measuring range. The table
below shows an example of the combination of measured value scaling and measuring
range adjustment.

Table 4- 5 Example for a combination of measured value scaling and measuring range adjustment

Low nominal range limit High nominal range limit

Measuring range adjustment -4000 mV 8000 mV
S7 format -27648 +27648
Scaling of measured values 1.00 7.00

As shown in the table, -4 V corresponds to 1.00 and +8 V corresponds to 7.00.

Configuration
The following figures show examples of a configuration in STEP 7:

Configuration of measured value scaling

Image 4-4 Configuration of measured value scaling

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 25
Parameters/address space
4.5 Scaling of measured values

Configuration with measuring range adjustment and measured value scaling

In the configuration example, a measuring range adjustment of -4000 mV to 8000 mV is
displayed and additionally converted to a scaled high and low nominal range limit of 1.00 to
7.00.

Image 4-5 Configuration with measuring range adjustment and measured value scaling

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameters/address space
4.6 Address space

4.6 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.

Configuration options of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:

Table 4- 6 Configuration options with GSD file

Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7, as of V13,
SP1
1 x 2-channel without value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF X X X
V1.0
1 x 2-channel with value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF X X ---
V1.0, QI
1 x 2-channel without value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF --- X X
V2.0
1 x 2-channel with value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF --- X ---
V2.0, QI
1 x 2-channel with value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF --- X ---
for module-internal Shared Input V2.0, MSI
with up to 4 submodules
1 x 2-channel with value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF --- X ---
and measured value scaling V2.0, SCALE

Value status (Quality Information, QI)

The value status is always activated for the following module names:
● AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF, QI,
● AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF, MSI
● AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF, SCALE
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The value status bit
indicates whether the read in analog value is valid. (0 = value is incorrect).

Evaluating the value status

If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the
input address space. Bits 1 and 0 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the analog value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: The wiring, the value created on the channel, etc. is incorrect.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 27
Parameters/address space
4.6 Address space

Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF, QI

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, QI with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
value status are only available if the value status is enabled.

Image 4-6 Address space of the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, QI with value status

Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF MSI

For the configuration as a 1 x 2-channel module (module-internal shared input, MSI),
channels 0 and 1 of module are copied to up to four submodules. Channels 0 and 1 are then
available with identical input values in various submodules. These submodules can be
assigned to up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. Each
IO controller has read access to the same channels.
The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Please
observe the information in the manual for the particular interface module.

Value status (Quality Information, QI)

The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs.
For the 1st submodule (=basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is
incorrect.
For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSI submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value
is incorrect or the basic submodule has not yet been configured (not ready).

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameters/address space
4.6 Address space

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with submodules 1 and 2.

Image 4-7 Address space for configuration as 1x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF MSI with value
status

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space with submodules 3 and 4.

Image 4-8 Address space for configuration as 1x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF MSI with value
status

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 29
Parameters/address space
4.6 Address space

Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF SCALE

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, SCALE with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The value status
cannot be deselected for this configuration.

Image 4-9 Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF, SCALE with
value status

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ Channel error (red)
④ PWR (green)

Image 5-1 LED display

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

31 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.1 Status and error displays

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for
diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 35).

Table 5- 1 Error display DIAG LED

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Table 5- 2 Status and error display LED channel status / channel error

LEDs Meaning
Channel status Channel error
Channel deactivated or load voltage missing
Off Off
Channel activated and no channel diagnostics
On Off
Channel activated and channel diagnostics
Off On
Not permitted (error)
On On

Table 5- 3 PWR LED status display

PWR LED Meaning

Load voltage missing
Off
Load voltage present
On

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit (current: sensor supply; voltage: 1 to 5 V, encoder supply)
● Wire break (current: 4 to 20 mA)
● High limit violated
● Low limit violated
● Error
● Parameter assignment error
● Hardware interrupt lost
● Supply voltage missing
● Channel temporarily unavailable

Hardware interrupts
The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events:
● Violation of low limit 1
● Violation of high limit 1
● Violation of low limit 2
● Violation of high limit 2

S7-1500
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.
The block interface is represented here with optimized block access, which is set in the
TIA Portal by default.

Name Data type Comment

LADDR HW_IO Hardware identifier of the module triggering the interrupt
USI WORD USI (High/Low)
IChannel USInt Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt
EventType Byte Error event

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 33
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

S7-300/400 or a different CPU

You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block
with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7
online help.
The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double
word 8 in local data.

Image 5-2 OB start information

Structure of the additional interrupt information

Table 5- 4 Structure of the additional interrupt information

Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0001 Additional interrupt information for hardware 2
(User Structure Identifier) interrupts of the I/O module
Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt.
Channel B#16#00 to B#16#01 Channel 0 and 1 of the I/O module 1
Event that triggered the hardware interrupt.
Error event B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1 1
B#16#04 Violation of high limit 1
B#16#05 Violation of low limit 2
B#16#06 Violation of high limit 2

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit (encoder 1H Short-circuit encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and
supply) encoder
Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short-circuit of input signal Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Open input Connect input
Wire break (current 4 to 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify
20 mA) the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger
cross-section
Wire break between the module and Connect the cable
sensor
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect the encoder contacts
High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (di- Replace module
agnostics alarm on channel 0 applies for
the entire module).
Parameter assignment 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters • Correct the parameter assignment
error for the channel: (wire break diagnostics set only with
Incorrect parameter assignment. the permitted measuring ranges).
Supply voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Hardware interrupt lost 16H Error is reported when a hardware inter- • Limits might be assigned twice.
rupt (high/low limit) could not be report-
• If necessary, reduce the bus cycle.
ed.
• If necessary, use higher SFU.
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update
unavailable or has been canceled. The module does
• Restart the firmware update
not read process values in this state.
Switch to user calibration

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 35
Technical specifications 6
Technical specifications of the AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF

6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 2xU/I 2/4-wire High Feature, PU 1
Firmware version V2.0
• FW update possible Yes
Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1
Color code for module-specific color identification CC03
label
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Scalable measuring range No
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 / -
PCS 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSI Yes
CiR Configuration in RUN
Configuration in RUN possible Yes
Calibration in RUN possible Yes
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 39 mA; without sensor supply

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 36
 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration <
10 s (two-wire)
Additional 24 V encoder supply
Short-circuit protection Yes; channel-based
Output current, max. 100 mA; max. 150 mA per channel for a duration
< 10 s (four-wire)
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.95 W; without sensor supply
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 4 bytes; + 1 byte for QI information
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2; Differential inputs
Maximum permissible input voltage for voltage 30 V
input (destruction limit)
Permissible input current for current input (de- 50 mA
struction limit), max.
Input ranges (rated values), voltages
0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 75 kΩ
1 V to 5 V Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 75 kΩ
-10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 75 kΩ
-5 V to +5 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (-5 V to +5 V) 75 kΩ
Input ranges (rated values), currents
0 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 130 Ω
-20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 130 Ω
4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 130 Ω
Cable length
Shielded, max. 1000 m; 200 m for voltage measurement

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 37
Technical specifications

6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
Formation of analog values for the inputs
Measuring principle Sigma Delta
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), 16 bits
max.
Integration time configurable Yes
Interference voltage suppression for interference 16.6 / 50 / 60 / 300 / 600 / 1 200 / 2 400 / 4 800
frequency f1 in Hz
Basic execution time of the module (all channels 1 ms
enabled)
Measured value smoothing
Number of levels 6; none; 2/4/8/16/32 times
Configurable Yes
Encoders
Connection of the signal transmitters
For voltage measurement Yes
For current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes
• Load of 2-wire transducer, max. 650 Ω

For current measurement as 4-wire transducer Yes

Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01%
Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.003%/K
Crosstalk between inputs, min. -50 dB
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in rela- 0.01%
tion to input range), (+/-)
Operational limit in the entire temperature range
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.1%
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.1%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.05%; 0.1% with SFU 4.8 kHz
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.05%; 0.1% with SFU 4.8 kHz
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-
1%), f1 = interference frequency
Common mode voltage, max. 35 V
Common mode interference, min. 90 dB
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes
terminal)
Filtering and processing time (TCI), min. 800 µs
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 1 ms
Jitter, max. 5 µs

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

38 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Technical specifications

6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt Yes
Limit interrupt Yes; two high limits and two low limits each
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes
Wire break Yes, measuring range 4 to 20 mA only
Short-circuit Yes; for 1 to 5 V, and for current measuring rang-
es for short-circuit in sensor supply
Group error Yes
Overflow/underflow Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels Yes
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and voltage supply of the Yes
electronics
Permitted potential difference
Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic isolation)
Between the inputs (UCM) 75 V DC/60 V AC
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 32 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 39
Parameter data record A
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other.

Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFINET.

Measurement Measuring Diagnostics Hardware

type range Underflow Overflow Wire break Short-circuit Missing interrupts
to ground supply
voltage L+
Deactivated * * * * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x x – x 1 x x
±10 V x x – x1 x x
1 V to 5 V x x – x x x
0 V to 10 V x x – x 1 x x
Current 0 mA to x x – x x x
(4-wire trans- 20 mA
ducer) 4 mA to x x x x x x
20 mA
±20 mA x x - x x x
Current 0 mA to x 12 x – x x x
(2-wire trans- 20 mA
ducer) 4 mA to x x x x x x
20 mA

x = property is allowed, – = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant

1 only possible as of firmware V2.0
2 The diagnostics Underflow can always be enabled for "Current (2-wire transducer) 0..20 mA", but it is only reported
when a complete underflow range is created by the measuring range adjustment.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 40
 Parameter data record
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file

Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFIBUS.

Table A- 1 Dependencies of the measurement type and measuring range PB

Measure- Measuring Diagnostics Hardware

ment type range Underflow Overflow Wire break Load Short-circuit Smoothing interrupts
voltage L+ to ground / interfer-
ence fre-
quency
suppres-
sion
Deactivated * * * * * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x x – x x 1 x –
±10 V x x – x x 1 x –
1 V to 5 V x x – x x x –
0 V to 10 V x x – x x1 x –
Current 0 mA to x x – x x x –
(4-wire 20 mA
transducer) 4 mA to x x x x x x –
20 mA
±20 mA x x - x x x –
Current 0 mA to – x – x x x –
(2-wire 20 mA
transducer) 4 mA to x x x x x x –
20 mA

x = property is allowed, – = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant

1 only possible as of firmware V2.0

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 41
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

The data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the measuring range of
selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Note
Changing parameters in RUN
A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment
results in a brief exit from clocked measuring mode and renewed synchronization with the
fieldbus cycle. The slowest channel provides the "internal" measuring cycle.

Note
Changing parameter settings in runtime can cause the process values to freeze for the
duration of the parameter assignment for the module.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

42 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Image A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information (V1.0)

The figure below shows the structure of the header information (V1.0).

Image A-2 Header information (V1.0)

Header information (V2.0)

The figure below shows the structure of the header information (V2.0).

Image A-3 Header information (V2.0)

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 43
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Header information (V2.0 SCALE)

The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Image A-4 Header information (V2.0 SCALE)

Parameter (V1.0)
The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".
* x = 2 + (channel number x 18); channel number is 0 or 1

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

44 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Image A-5 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channel 0 and 1

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 45
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameter (V2.0)
The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".
* x = 2 + (channel number x 22); channel number is 0 or 1

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

46 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Image A-6 Structure of bytes x to x+21 for channels 0 and 1

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 47
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Parameter (V2.0 SCALE)

The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".
* x = 2 + (channel number x 38); channel number is 0 or 1

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

48 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Image A-7 Structure of bytes x to x+37 for channels 0 and 1

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 49
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Codes for measurement types

The following table contains all the measurement types of the analog input module with its
codes. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).

Table A- 2 Codes for measurement types

Measurement type Code

Deactivated 0000 0000
Voltage 0000 0001
Current, 4-wire transducer 0000 0010
Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011

Codes for measuring ranges

The following table contains all codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You must enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure).

Table A- 3 Codes for measuring ranges

Measuring range Code

Voltage
±5 V 0000 1000
±10 V 0000 1001
1 to 5 V 0000 1010
0 to 10 V 0000 1011
Current
0 mA to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 mA to 20 mA 0000 0011
±20 mA 0000 0100

Codes for smoothing and interference frequency suppression

The following table contains all coding for smoothing and interference frequency
suppression. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).

Table A- 4 Codes for smoothing

Smoothing Code
None 0000
2 times 0100
4 times 0001
8 times 0101
16 times 0010
32 times 0011

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

50 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record

Table A- 5 Codes for interference frequency suppression

Interference frequency suppression Code

16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 0100
50 Hz (22.5 ms) 0010
60 Hz (18.75 ms) 0001
300 Hz (10 ms) 0101
600 Hz (5 ms) 0110
1.2 kHz (2.5 ms) 0111
2.4 kHz (1.25 ms) 1000
4.8 kHz (0.625 ms) 1001

Error transmitting the data record

The module always checks all values of the transmitted data record. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error codes if there
are errors in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in the STATUS pa- Meaning Solution

rameter
(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine if the module
is plugged in or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parameters of
the WREC instruction.
DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of pa-
header information rameter blocks.
DF 80 I1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 51
Representation of analog values B
This section shows the analog values for all measuring ranges supported by the analog input
module AI 2xU/I 2-/4wire HF.

Measured value resolution

The digitized analog value is the same for input and output values at the same nominal
range. The analog values are represented as a fixed point number in the two's complement.
The resolutions 15 and 16 bits including sign are displayed. Each analog value is entered in
the ACCU left-justified. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values

Resolution in bits Values Analog value

Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

B.1 Representation of input ranges

The tables below set out the digitized representation of the input ranges by bipolar and
unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

Table B- 2 Bipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 > 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range

-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 < -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 52
 Representation of analog values
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

Table B- 3 Unipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 > 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 < -17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage
measuring ranges.

Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range ±10 V and ±5 V

Values Voltage measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V ±5 V
32767 7FFF > 11.759 V > 5.879 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V
-32768 8000 < -11.759 V < -5.879 V Underflow

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 53
Representation of analog values
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V

Values Voltage measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
32767 7FFF > 5.704 V > 11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 5V 10 V Nominal range
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 361.7 µV
0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V
-32768 8000 < 0.296 V < -1.759 V Underflow

B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
measuring ranges.

Table B- 6 Current measuring range ±20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 < -23.52 mA Underflow

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

54 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
 Representation of analog values
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

Table B- 7 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA* 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA > 22.81 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 < -3.52 mA < 1.185 mA Underflow

* For measurement type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to
20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 55
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Documentation guide 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
Analog Input Module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST
(6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

___________________
Representation of analog
values B

09/2018
A5E03551866-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03551866-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 09/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
Wiring and block diagram has been modified.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in the following, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 13
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................13
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................15
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15
4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................18
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................20
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 21
5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................21
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................22
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................23
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................24
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 29
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................29
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................30
A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input ...................................................................34
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 35
B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................36
B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................37

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 5
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Documentation guide

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 7
Documentation guide

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Documentation guide

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the
TIA Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 9
Documentation guide

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1 (number in pack: 1 unit)
6ES7134-6GD01-2BA1 (number in pack: 10 units)

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 4 inputs
● Current measuring type for 2- and 4-wire transducers adjustable per channel
● Input ranges
– 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
– 0 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
– ±20 mA, resolution 16 bits including sign
● Electrically isolated from the supply voltage L+ (only for input type 4-wire transducer)
● Permitted common mode voltage: 10 VSS
● Configurable diagnostics per module
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW FW STEP 7 GSD file

Function version version TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP
Firmware update FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227
V7.0 or higher
Identification data I&M0 FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
to I&M3 with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227
V7.0 or higher
Reconfiguration in RUN FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227
V7.0 or higher
PROFIenergy FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227
V7.0 or higher
Value status FS01 V2.0.0 V14 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
with HSP 0239 with HSP 0227
V7.0 or higher

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
Wiring up 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST module with the various
terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 4-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.

Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during
the configuration.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

13 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
Wiring up
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer)
The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

① 2-wire connection for current measurement 1In+ Current input positive, channel n
(2-wire transducer)
② 4-wire connection for current measurement 1In- Current input negative, channel n
(4-wire transducer)
③ Backplane bus interface UVn Supply voltage, channel n
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 2In+ Current input positive, channel n
⑤ Short-circuit protection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
⑥ Current limitation M Ground
⑦ Color-coded label with color code CC03 P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
(optional) Connection to left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
⑧ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
(function cannot be used for this module)
Uext Encoder supply external AI0, AI1, AI2, AI3 Channel status LED (green)
PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2- and 4-wire transducer)

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Measuring types and ranges
The analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST has the following measuring ranges:

Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges

Measuring type Measuring range Resolution

Current (2-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA 15 bits
4 to 20 mA 15 bits
Current (4-wire transducer) 0 to 20 mA 15 bits
4 to 20 mA 15 bits
± 20 mA 16 bits including sign

You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the
section Representation of analog values (Page 35).

4.2 Parameters

Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 30).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 15
Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Configura- Scope with configuration soft-

tion in RUN ware, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Overflow
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Underflow
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
Wire break
• Enable
Measuring type/range • deactivated Current (4- Yes Channel Channel
wire trans-
• Current (4-wire transduc-
ducer)
er) 0..20 mA 4..20 mA
• Current (4-wire transduc-
er) 4..20 mA
• Current (4-wire transduc-
er) +/-20 mA
• Current (2-wire transduc-
er) 0..20 mA
• Current (2-wire transduc-
er) 4..20 mA
Smoothing • None None Yes Channel Channel
• weak
• medium
• strong

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

Parameter Value range Default Configura- Scope with configuration soft-

tion in RUN ware, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Interference frequency • 60 Hz 50 Hz Yes Channel Module 3
suppression 2
• 50 Hz1
• 16.6 Hz
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (module group of the
plugged into a dark Ba- left module
seUnit)
• Enable new potential
group (module plugged in-
to light BaseUnit)

1 Interference frequency suppression: Interfering signals at 400 Hz are automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.
2 The settings in the "Interference frequency suppression" parameter have a direct effect on the conversion time of the
channel. The analog value is therefore also affected by additionally set filtering via the "Smoothing" parameter.
3 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. The parameter length of the I/O module is 5 bytes with
PROFIBUS GSD configuration. If necessary, you can set this parameter by using the data record 128, see the appendix
"Parameter data set".

Note
Unused channels
"Disable" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.
A disabled channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 17
Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Diagnostics no supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or
of an input to the encoder supply.

Diagnostics overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.

Diagnostics underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.

Diagnostics Wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be
measured at the relevant input.
The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics info is output.

Type/range of measurement
See the section Measuring types and measuring ranges (Page 15).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.3 Explanation of the parameters

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in
4 levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal
change at the analog input.

① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)

Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST

Interference frequency suppression

Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency
of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in
particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this
parameter, the user specifies the supply frequency that is predominant in the plant.

Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 19
Parameters/address space
4.4 Address space

4.4 Address space

Configuration options
The following configurations are possible:
● Configuration 1: Without value status
● Configuration 2: With value status

Evaluating the value status

If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the
input address space. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the analog value.
Bit = 1: There are no faults/errors on the module.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST
with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only
available if the value status is enabled.

Figure 4-2 Address space of the AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST with value status

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
5.1 Status and error display

LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST.

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)

Figure 5-1 LED display

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing
with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 23).

DIAG LED

Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off

Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 21
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.2 Interrupts

Channel status LED

Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED

Channel status Meaning

LED
Channel disabled
Off

Channel activated
On

PWR LED

Table 5- 3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+
Off

Supply voltage L+ present
On

5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST supports diagnostics interrupts.

Diagnostics interrupt
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events:
● Channel temporarily unavailable
● Short-circuit (current, 2-wire transducer)
● Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA)
● Low limit violated
● High limit violated
● Error
● Parameter assignment error
● Supply voltage missing

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

22 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
5.3 Diagnostics alarms

5.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them

Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit (2-wire 1H Sensor supply to ground Correct the module/encoder tuning
transducer, current)* Input to sensor supply
Wire break (current) ** 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify
the wiring, for example, using cables
with a larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and sen- Connect the cable
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect the sensor contacts
High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning
Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning
Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Supply voltage missing 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable been canceled.
• Restart the firmware update.
The module does not read any process
values in this state.
* Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground and/or of the input signal to the encoder supply of a channel can have a
temporary effect on other channels (duration < 0.5 s). This means the short-circuit diagnostics can also be reported for
unaffected channels and/or the measured value can be affected temporarily.
** In case of activated smoothing the module calculates the measured values across several module cycles. The module
only generates the wire break diagnosis if the smoothed measured value is stable. After the wire break has been elimi-
nated, the module supplies stable measured values again depending on the set smoothing level.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 23
Technical specifications 6
6.1 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST

The following table shows the technical specifications as of 09/2018. You will find a data
sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1/td?dl=en).

Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1

General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST, PU 1
Firmware version V2.0
• FW update possible Yes

usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1

Color code for module-specific color identifica- CC03
tion plate
Product function
• I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3

• Measuring range scalable No

Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated V14 / -
as of version

• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.6 and higher

sion

• PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1

• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- One GSD file each, Revision 3 and 5 and higher
sion

• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3

sion
Operating mode
• Oversampling No

• MSI No

CiR – Configuration in RUN

Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes
Calibration possible in RUN No

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

24 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 37 mA; without sensor supply
24 V encoder supply
• 24 V Yes

• Short-circuit protection Yes

• Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration <
10 s
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.85 W; Without encoder supply voltage
Address area
Address space per module
• Address space per module, max. 8 byte; + 1 byte for QI information

Hardware configuration
Automatic encoding
• Mechanical coding element Yes

Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants

• 2-wire connection BU type A0, A1

• 4-wire connection BU type A0, A1

Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 4; Differential inputs
permissible input current for current input (de- 50 mA
struction limit), max.
Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional
processing times (depending on the parameteri-
zation of the active channels)
Input ranges (rated values), currents
• 0 to 20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign

• Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 100 Ω; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage in

2-wire operation
• -20 mA to +20 mA Yes

• Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 100 Ω

• 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit

• Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 100 Ω; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage in

2-wire operation

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 25
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1

Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m

Analog value generation for the inputs

Measurement principle integrating (Sigma-Delta)
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
• Resolution with overrange (bit including 16 bit
sign), max.

• Integration time, parameterizable Yes

• Interference voltage suppression for inter- 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz

ference frequency f1 in Hz

• Conversion time (per channel) 180 / 60 / 50 ms

Smoothing of measured values

• Number of smoothing levels 4; None; 4/8/16 times

• parameterizable Yes

Encoder
Connection of signal encoders
• for voltage measurement No

• for current measurement as 2-wire trans- Yes

ducer
– Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. 650 Ω

• for current measurement as 4-wire trans- Yes

ducer
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.01 %
Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/- 0.005 %/K
)
Crosstalk between the inputs, min. 50 dB; Applies to up to ±5 V overvoltage in other
channels
Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (rela- 0.05 %
tive to input range), (+/-)
Operational error limit in overall temperature
range
• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.5 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)

• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

26 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-
1 %), f1 = interference frequency
• Series mode interference (peak value of 70 dB
interference < rated value of input range),
min.

• Common mode voltage, max. 10 V

• Common mode interference, min. 90 dB

Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchro- No
nized up to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes

• Limit value alarm No

Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes

• Wire-break Yes; at 4 to 20 mA

• Short-circuit Yes; 2-wire mode: Short-circuit of the encoder

supply to ground or of an input to the encoder
supply
• Group error Yes

• Overflow/underflow Yes

Diagnostics indication LED

• Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR- Yes; Green LED
LED)

• Channel status display Yes; Green LED

• for channel diagnostics No

• for module diagnostics Yes; Green/red LED

Potential separation
Potential separation channels
• between the channels Yes; channel group-specific between 2-wire cur-
rent input group and 4-wire voltage input group
• between the channels and backplane bus Yes

• between the channels and the power sup- Yes; only for 4-wire transducer
ply of the electronics
Permissible potential difference
between the inputs (UCM) 10 V DC
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 27
Technical specifications
6.1 Technical specifications

Article number 6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• horizontal installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• horizontal installation, max. 60 °C

• vertical installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• vertical installation, max. 50 °C

• Vertical installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• Vertical installation, max. 50 °C

• Horizontal installation, min. -30 °C; No condensation

• Horizontal installation, max. 50 °C

Altitude during operation relating to sea level

• Ambient air temperature-barometric pres- Up to max. 5 000 m, at installation height > 2 000
sure-altitude m additional restrictions, see manual for details

Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 31 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

28 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
Parameter data record A
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other.

Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring
range for PROFINET.

Measuring type Measuring Diagnostics

range No supply volt- Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow Wire break
age L+ M
deactivated * * * * *
Current 0..20 mA x - x x -
(4-wire connec- 4..20 mA x - x x x
tion)
±20 mA x - x x -
Current 0..20 mA x x x x -
(2-wire connec- 4..20 mA x x x x x
tion)

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring
range for PROFIBUS.

Measuring type Measuring Diagnostics

range No supply voltage Short-circuit to M Overflow/ Wire break
L+ Underflow
deactivated * * * *
Current 0..20 mA x - x -
(4-wire connec- 4..20 mA x - x x
tion)
±20 mA x - x -
Current 0..20 mA x x x -
(2-wire connec- 4..20 mA x x x x
tion)

x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 29
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.

Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the voltage or current
values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other
channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

30 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Structure of data record 128

Note
Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module.

Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

Figure A-2 Header information

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 31
Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channels 0 to 3

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

32 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Parameter data record
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record

Codes for the measuring type

The following table contains the codes for the measuring types of the analog input module.
You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).

Table A- 1 Codes for the measuring type

Measuring type Coding

Deactivated 0000 0000
Current, 4-wire transducer 0000 0010
Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011

Codes for the measuring range

The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure).

Table A- 2 Codes for the measuring range

Measuring range Coding

0 to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 to 20 mA 0000 0011
±20 mA 0000 0100

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 33
Parameter data record
A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input

A.3 Error in transferring the data record analog input

Error transferring the data record

The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter, see also the description of the "STATUS" parameter
in the STEP 7 online help).
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.

Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record un- Enter a valid number for the data record.
known.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect. Enter a valid value for the data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. • Check the station to determine whether
the module is plugged or pulled.
• Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of
header information. parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bit set Check the parameters of the module.
DF 80 E1 02 Invalid diagnostics enable bit set Check the parameters of the module.
for operating mode.
DF 80 E1 05 Invalid coding set for measuring Check the parameters of the module.
range / measurement type.
DF 80 E1 08 Invalid coding set for interference Check the parameters of the module.
frequency suppression / integration
time.
DF 80 E1 09 Invalid coding for smoothing. Check the parameters of the module.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

34 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
Representation of analog values B
This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the
analog module.

Measured value resolution

The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its assigned
parameters.
The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated
decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values.
Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values

Resolution in bits Values Analog value

including sign
Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 35
Representation of analog values
B.1 Representation of input ranges

B.1 Representation of input ranges

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar
input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

Table B- 2 Bipolar input ranges

Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range

-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table B- 3 Unipolar input ranges

Dec. val- Measured Data word Range

ue value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range

-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

36 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE
 Representation of analog values
B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
measuring ranges.

Table B- 4 Current measuring range ±20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
32767 7FFF >23.52 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 <-23.52 mA Underflow

Table B- 5 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF >23.52 mA >22.81 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underflow

* For measuring type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA".
Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03551866-AE 37
 Preface

Documentation guide 1

Product overview 2
SIMATIC
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4
HART function
4…20mA HART
Parameters 5
Manual

Configuring/address space 6

Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 7

Technical specifications 8

Parameter data records 9

HART operating data records 10

Analog value representation 11

02/2018
A5E35098013-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG A5E35098013-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.

Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 02/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Validity of the documentation

This manual describes the analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART, article number
6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1.
It supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally relate to
the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines, and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are
in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit:
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available
and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer
supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber
threats.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 3
Preface

To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

4 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Table of contents

Preface.........................................................................................................................................................3
1 Documentation guide....................................................................................................................................7
2 Product overview..........................................................................................................................................9
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................9
3 Wiring up....................................................................................................................................................11
3.1 Connection and block diagram...............................................................................................11
4 HART function............................................................................................................................................13
4.1 How HART works...................................................................................................................14
4.2 Use of HART..........................................................................................................................18
4.3 HART communication interface.............................................................................................20
4.4 HART variables......................................................................................................................22
5 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................25
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART...................................................................25
5.1.1 Channel/technology parameters............................................................................................25
5.1.2 Explanation of the channel/technology parameters...............................................................27
5.1.3 HART mapping parameters...................................................................................................30
6 Configuring/address space.........................................................................................................................33
6.1 Configuring.............................................................................................................................33
6.2 Address space.......................................................................................................................34
7 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms......................................................................................................................37
7.1 Status and error displays.......................................................................................................37
7.2 Interrupts................................................................................................................................39
7.3 Diagnostics alarms.................................................................................................................40
8 Technical specifications..............................................................................................................................43
8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART...............................................43
9 Parameter data records..............................................................................................................................47
9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters........................48
9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters..............................51
10 HART operating data records.....................................................................................................................53
10.1 HART directory.......................................................................................................................54
10.2 HART feature data.................................................................................................................55
10.3 HART variable data record.....................................................................................................56

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 5
Table of contents

10.4 HART-specific settings...........................................................................................................57

10.5 HART request and response data records.............................................................................59
11 Analog value representation.......................................................................................................................65
11.1 Representation of input ranges..............................................................................................66
11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges........................................67
Index...........................................................................................................................................................69

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

6 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Documentation guide 1
Introduction
The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and covers diverse topics
relating to your automation system.
The complete documentation for the ET 200SP system consists of the system manual, function
manuals, and manuals for the individual devices.
The STEP 7 information system (online help) also supports you in configuring and
programming your automation system.

Overview of documentation for analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
The following table lists further documentation that you will need when using analog input
module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART.

Table 1-1 Documentation

Topic Documentation Most important contents

System description System Manual ET 200SP distrib‐ ● Application planning
uted I/O system (http://
● Installation
support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/58649293) ● Connecting
● Commissioning
Analog value processing Function Manual Analog value pro‐ ● Basics of analog technology
cessing (http:// (wiring, processing, assembly
support.automation.siemens.com/ system)
WW/view/en/67989094)
● Description/explanation of
meaning, e.g., conversion and
cycle times, basic error limits,
operational limits
System diagnostics Function manual Diagnostics (http:// ● Overview
support.automation.siemens.com/ ● Hardware/software diagnostic
WW/view/en/59192926)
evaluation
BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http:// Technical specifications
support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/59753521)

SIMATIC manuals
The latest manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the
Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 7
Documentation guide

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

8 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1

View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART module

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 4 inputs
● Measurement type current for 2-wire HART transducer
● Input range 4 mA to 20 mA
● Resolution 16 bits including sign
● Configurable diagnostics per channel
The module supports the following functions:
● HART communication (Rev. 5 to Rev. 7)
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties

● Configuration in RUN
● Value status (PROFINET IO only)
● Up to four HART variables directly in the input address space
You can configure the module with STEP 7 in the TIA Portal as well as with HW Config and
with a GSD file.

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connector

See also
You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

10 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Wiring up 3
3.1 Connection and block diagram
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module can be used with all A0 or A1-type BaseUnits.
You connect the transducers to the BaseUnit of the analog module. The infeed of the supply
voltage at the light BaseUnit of the associated potential group supplies the module and the
transducers connected to the encoder supply voltages.
A new potential group always begins with a light BaseUnit.

BaseUnit
The BaseUnit is not included in the product package of the module and must be ordered
separately.
An overview of the BaseUnits that you can use with the analog module can be found in Product
information for documentation of the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864)
Information regarding selection of the suitable BaseUnit can be found in system manual ET
200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
58649293) and in the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/59753521).
Information regarding wiring of the BaseUnit, creating the cable shield, etc., can be found in
system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
view/en/58649293) in the section "Connecting".

Note
The first BaseUnit of a station must be a light BaseUnit. Also keep this in mind during the
configuration.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 11
Wiring up
3.1 Connection and block diagram

General terminal assignment

① Connection of a 2-wire transducer,

',$* at channel 0 in this case
② Optional connection of an external
$,$,$,$, )))) hand-held (secondary master) to
3 the HART test connection terminal
(at channel 0 in this case)
③ Backplane bus connection
④ Analog-digital converter (ADC)
4 ⑤ Current limitation
⑥ Non-isolated 4-wire connection to
+$57 +$57 the HART test connection terminal
(at channel 1 in this case)
230 50 50 230
+$57
⑦ Color-coded label CC03 (optional)
+$57
⑧ Filter circuit supply voltage (only
230 50 50 230 available on light-colored BaseUnit)
Hn+ HART signal "+", channel n
5 3:5 89 Hn- HART signal "-", channel n
+
1A + UVn Supply voltage channel n
 
+ 
2 + 08 6 In+ Input signal "+" channel n

+ 
+ 
L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-col‐

+ 
+ 89
ored BaseUnit)
  M Ground
89 89
  P1,P2, Internal self-assembling voltage
89 7
1 08 89 AUX buses

, 
, Connection to the left (dark-colored

, 
, BaseUnit)
  Connection to the right interrupted
8 8
(light-colored BaseUnit)
/ 0
3 DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
3
$8; AI0 to Channel status LED (green)
AI3
Block diagram AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART F0 to Channel fault LED (red)
F3
PWR Power LED (green)

Supply voltage L+/M

Connect supply voltage (24V DC) to terminals L+ and M. An internal protective circuit protects
the analog module from reverse polarity. The analog module monitors the connection of the
supply voltage.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

12 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
HART function 4
Definition
"HART" stands for "Highway Addressable Remote Transducer".
The HART functionality also enables you to use the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog
module to exchange data with the connected field devices. The HART protocol is generally
accepted as a standard protocol for communication with intelligent field devices: HART is a
registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation (HCF), which owns all the rights
to the HART protocol. You can find detailed information about HART in the HART
specification.

Advantages of HART
Using the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module offers the following advantages:
● Connection compatibility with standard analog modules: Current loop 4 - 20 mA
● Additional digital communication using the HART protocol
● Numerous field devices with HART functions are in use
● The option to use HART is integrated in the S7 system by means of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…
20mA HART analog module.

Use in the system

The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module is used in the distributed I/O connected to
PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.
You can connect a field device to any channel: The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog
module operates as a HART master, monodrop; the field devices operate as HART devices.

Typical applications
The following applications are typical:
● Commissioning of field devices (centralized parameter assignment)
● Online modification of field device parameters
● Information, maintenance and diagnostic displays for the field devices
● Integration of configuration tools for field devices via the HART interface

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 13
HART function
4.1 How HART works

4.1 How HART works

Introduction
The HART protocol describes the physical form of the transfer: transfer procedures, message
structure, data formats and commands.

HART signal
The figure below shows the analog signal with the modulated HART signal (FSK method),
which consists of sine waves of 1200 Hz and 2200 Hz and has a mean value of 0. It can be
filtered out using an input filter so that the original analog signal is available again.

+0,5 mA

-0,5 mA
1200 Hz 2200 Hz
20 mA "1" "0"

1
A K A
K
K A
A
K
4 mA

2
Figure 4-1 The HART signal

① Analog signal
② Time (seconds)
K Command
A Response

HART communication
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module processes the HART communication in
multiplex mode, i.e., consecutively channel-by-channel. As a result, HART commands of the
individual channels influence the speed of the HART processing of the other channels.
When HART mode is enabled, the analog module autonomously sends HART commands to
the connected field devices. This takes place alternatingly on a channel-specific basis with any

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

14 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART function
4.1 How HART works

pending external HART commands that arrive via the command interface of the module, see
section 4.3 "HART command interface".

Commissioning a HART field device

Only HART field devices that are set to the short frame address 0 can be operated. If a HART
field device with a different short frame address is connected or a connected field device is
reconfigured to a short frame address other than 0 during operation, the module starts a scan
of all possible short frame addresses at the next re-establishment of HART communication
(command 0 with short frame addresses 1...63). As soon as the connected field device
responds, it is converted to the short frame address 0 (HART command 6) by the module.
During the scan, the module reports a HART communication error.

HART commands
The assignable properties of the HART field devices (HART parameters) can be set with HART
commands and read by means of HART replies. The HART commands and their parameters
are divided into three groups with the following properties:
● Universal
● Common practice
● Device-specific
Universal commands must be supported by all manufacturers of HART field devices and
common practice commands should be supported. There are also device-specific commands
that apply only to the particular field device.

Examples of HART commands

The following two tables show examples of HART commands:

Table 4-1 Examples of universal commands

Command Function
0 Read manufacturer and device type - only with this command 0 can field devices
be addressed by means of a short frame address
11 Read manufacturer and device type
1 Read primary variable and unit
2 Read current output and percent of range, digitally as floating-point number
(IEEE 754)
3 Read up to four pre-defined dynamic variables (primary variables, secondary
variables, etc.)
13, 18 Read or write tag, descriptor and date (data included in transmission)

Table 4-2 Examples of common practice commands

Command Function
36 Set upper range value

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 15
HART function
4.1 How HART works

37 Set lower range value

41 Perform self-test
43 Set the primary variable to zero
109 Switch burst mode on or off

Structure of the HART protocol

Each HART frame sent from the analog module to the connected field device (request frame)
and each HART frame from the field device (response frame) has the following basic structure.

PREAMBLE STRT ADDR COM BCNT STATUS DATA CHK

PREAMBLE: Bytes (0xFF) for synchronizing.

5 to 20 bytes depending on parameter assignment
STRT: Start character (start delimiter)
ADDR: Address of the field device (1 byte; short address or 5 bytes; long address)
COM: HART command number
BCNT: Byte count, number of bytes to follow without checksum
STATUS: HART device status (1st and 2nd status byte). Only present for a response
frame. For structure of HART device status, see below.
DATA: Transferred user data / parameters, quantity depending on command (0…230
bytes)
CHK: Checksum
With the exception of the preamble bytes, this structure is contained in the communication
data of the HART command interface. See section HART request and response data records
(Page 59).
HART replies always contain data. Status information (HART device status; 1st and 2nd status
bytes) is always sent together with a HART response. You should evaluate these to make sure
the response is correct.

Structure of HART device status (1st and 2nd status bytes).

Table 4-3 1st status byte

When Bit 7 = 1: "Communication error"

Bit 6 = 1 Parity error
Bit 5 = 1 Overflow
Bit 4 = 1 Framing error
Bit 3 = 1 Checksum error
Bit 2 = 0 Reserved
Bit 1 = 1 Overflow in the receive buffer
Bit 0 = 0 Reserved
When bit 7 = 0: "Specific in line with response frame"

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

16 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART function
4.1 How HART works

Table 4-4 2nd status byte

Bit 7 = 1 Device fault

Bit 6 = 1 Configuration changed
Bit 5 = 1 Startup (cold start)
Bit 4 = 1 Additional status information available
Bit 3 = 1 Fixed analog output current setting
Bit 2 = 1 Analog output current saturated
Bit 1 = 1 Secondary variable outside the limits
Bit 0 = 1 Primary variable outside the range

HART-Fast-Mode
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module supports the processing of HART commands
as a SHC sequence ("Successive HART Command").
That is, if the analog module detects a HART command with SHC bit set for a channel, the
complete HART command processing on the HART analog module is reserved for this channel
for approximately 2 s. For all other channels of the analog module, no HART frame processing
occurs during this time, see section HART communication interface (Page 20)

Note
● During the time a HART channel of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module is
processing an SHC sequence, and thus the complete HART processing of the module is
reserved for this channel, the HART variables of all HART channels are no longer updated.
They remain unchanged in terms of value and quality code.
● HART commands for other channels are not processed and are acknowledged
correspondingly.

Burst mode
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module does not support burst mode. HART
commands with set burst bit are ignored and are not forwarded to the connected field device.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 17
HART function
4.2 Use of HART

4.2 Use of HART

System environment for the use of HART

To use an intelligent field device with HART functionality, you require the following system
environment:
● Current loop 4 - 20 mA
Connection of the transducers to the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module
● HART configuration tool "Client":
You can assign the HART parameters using an external hand-held operating device (HART
Handheld) or a HART configuration tool (PDM). Both assume the function of a "client":
The configuration tool goes through the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module
whereas the HART Handheld is connected directly in parallel with the field device. See
terminal assignment "HART test connections (terminals 1 to 8)" in the section 3.1 "Terminal
assignment".
PDM (Process Device Manager) is available as a stand-alone unit or integrated in STEP 7
HW Config.
● HART system connection:
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module assumes the function of a "master" by
forwarding the commands received from the HART configuration tool or as programmed
commands from an S7 user program, for example, to the intelligent field device and sending
back the replies. Data records that are transferred via the ET 200SP I/O bus serve as the
interface of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module. The data records must be
created and interpreted by the client. .
)LHOGGHYLFHZLWK+$57IXQFWLRQDOLW\ +$57DQDORJPRGXOH

,QWHUIDFHWR
P$ 352),%86

/9
6,0$7,&
6HQGUHFHLYH 3'0
0RGHP
WKH+$57VLJQDO

+$57KDQGKHOG $QDORJGLJLWDOFRQYHUVLRQ +$57SDUDPHWHU

$'8
RIWKHF\FOLFPHDVXUHG DVVLJQPHQWWRRO
YDOXH

0&KDVVLVJURXQG

Figure 4-2 System environment for the use of HART

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

18 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART function
4.2 Use of HART

Error management
The two HART status bytes (HART device status) that are transferred with each response of
the field device contain error information about the HART communication, HART command,
and device status.
This is evaluated by the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module and made available in
the system via S7 diagnostic messages.

Configuration/commissioning
You configure the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module in the SIMATIC system with
STEP 7 or the TIA Portal. You assign parameters for the individual channels with respect to
the actual analog value acquisition and the use of HART variables in the input address space
of the module.
You can configure one field device per channel. By means of this configured field device, the
configuration / parameter assignment of the connected field device is then carried out using
PDM or the EDD for the ET 200SP.
It is also possible to configure the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module using a GSD
file for PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO. However, in this case, direct configuration /
parameter assignment of the connected field devices is not possible.

Parameter reassignment of the field devices

The HART analog module generally accepts parameter reassignments for field devices.
Access rights can only be allocated in the configuration tool.
For parameter reassignment of the field devices connected to the HART analog module,
proceed as follows:
1. You start the parameter reassignment of a field device using a HART command that you
enter using the SIMATIC PDM configuration tool or as a programmed command in the
STEP 7 user program.
2. After you have reassigned the parameters of a HART field device, the corresponding bit is
set in the device status of the connected field device (in the 2nd status byte).
3. Because of the parameter reassignment of the field device, the HART analog module
triggers a diagnostic interrupt "Configuration changed", provided this diagnostic interrupts
is enabled. See section 7.3 "Diagnostic alarms". This diagnostic interrupt is to be regarded
as information and not as an error and is automatically deleted again by the analog module
after approximately 1 minute.
A diagnostic interrupt can also be triggered, if enabled, when parameter reassignment is
carried out with the hand-held device.

See also
Connection and block diagram (Page 11)
Diagnostics alarms (Page 40)

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 19
HART function
4.3 HART communication interface

4.3 HART communication interface

Data records
The HART commands are sent as so-called external HART requests from the client (e.g., PDM
or the STEP 7 user program) to the connected field device via data records. The response of
the field device is made available again in the system via data records.
HART communication may only be handled by one client (e.g., PDM) per channel. If a channel
is handled by several clients, the response made available by the module cannot be allocated
to one client with certainty. The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module does not support
client management.
Each client/channel is allocated fixed data records:

Table 4-5 Structure of the data records

Channel Data record number

Request to the field device Response from the field device
0 80 81
1 82 83
2 84 85
3 86 87

The corresponding data records are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction
and read by the module with the "RDREC" instruction.
Errors during the transfer are indicated at output parameter STATUS.
Errors during interpretation of the request data record are signaled in the corresponding
response data record. The faulty request can be read back again using the request data record.

Rules
● After having written a request data record, a client must read the response data record
before it may write another request data record.
● The client can evaluate the "processing status" in the response data record: If the
"processing status" indicates "successful" or "error," the response data record contains
current response data or error displays.
● The response data record must always be read completely because the analog module
may modify the data record after the initial reading with "successful" or "error" status.
If the processing status in the response data record indicates "successful" or "error", the
data record contains current response data or error displays.
● The client may only write a request data record to the module again when it has read the
response to the previously written request data record via the corresponding response data
record. Otherwise, the response from the module is overwritten.
● The STATUS component in the response frame (HART device status in the response data)
provides information on whether errors have occurred and, if so, which errors.
Each request is stored on a channel-specific basis, and the corresponding request data record
is disabled. Another writing of the same request data record is thus not possible and is

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

20 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART function
4.3 HART communication interface

acknowledged with BUSY.

The disable of the request data record is reset after the termination or completion of the
requested HART command.

SHC sequence
If a HART command is sent to the module with a set SHC bit, then this channel is reserved for
HART commands for 2 seconds. This means that no more internal HART commands are sent
to the field device with this channel.
Each time a HART command with a set SHC bit is sent, the module reserves this channel
again for another 2 seconds for HART commands. If a HART command without a set SHC bit
is detected for this channel, or if no further command occurs for this channel within 2 seconds
after the previous HART command, then command 3 or 9 for reading the HART variables is
cyclically sent to the field device for this channel.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 21
HART function
4.4 HART variables

4.4 HART variables

Introduction
Numerous HART field devices make available additional measured quantities (e.g. sensor
temperature).
A maximum of four HART variables supported by the connected field device can be cyclically
read per channel with activated HART functionality. The HART variables are read automatically
with HART command 3 (for field devices with HART rev. 5 and 6) or with command 9 (for field
devices with HART rev. 7 or later).
These four HART variables per channel are always stored in HART variable data record 121
and can be read at any time. See section HART variable data record (Page 56).
In addition, a maximum of 4 HART variables can be configured directly in the input address
space of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module. The HART variables are assigned
to a channel in the properties dialog of the module. The parameter assignment uses parameter
data record 140, see section AUTOHOTSPOT. This makes it easy for you to process measured
values directly from the field device as input data in the automation device.

Address assignment
Provided you map HART variables in the input address space of the module by means of the
configuration tool or selection of the appropriate configuration, 20 bytes are always additionally
allocated for the HART variables.

Configuration of HART variables

You can configure up to 4 HART variables for each channel
● PV (Primary Variable)
● SV (Secondary Variable)
● TV (Tertiary Variable)
● QV (Quaternary)
When HART mode is enabled, the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module autonomously
and cyclically reads the variables supplied by the connected field devices and makes them
available in the input address space according to the configuration.
Each HART variable consists of a 4-byte value and a quality code byte.

Quality code
The quality code describes the process status of the corresponding HART variable.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

22 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART function
4.4 HART variables

Basic structure of the quality code

Bit 7….6 5....2 1…0

Quality Sub-status Limits
0 0: Bad Coded according to "PROFIBUS PA 0 0: OK
0 1: Uncertain Profile for Process Control Devices" 0 1: Low limit
1 0: Good 1 0: High limit
1 1: Good 1 1: Constant

The quality codes generated by the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module are based
on the HART Revision of the utilized field device.

Field devices with HART Revision 5 and 6

The quality code is formed exclusively from the 1st and 2nd Status byte (HART device status)
of the response frames (HART command 3).

Quality code Meaning (process status)

80H Value is okay Applies even when the following bits
are set in the 2nd status byte of the
HART response frame:
● Configuration changed
● Startup (cold start)
● Fixed analog output current setting
78H Value is uncertain Applies even when the following bits
are set in the 2nd status byte of the
HART response frame:
● Additional status information
available
● Analog output current saturated
● Secondary variable outside the
limits
● Primary variable outside the range
84H Response code RC8: Update error
24H Response code RC16: Access restricted Request from field device refused
23H Communication error or HART variable not
present in the field device
37H Initialization value from analog module After module startup
00H Initialization value from S7 system

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 23
HART function
4.4 HART variables

Field devices with HART Revision 7 or higher

The quality code is formed from the 1st status byte (HART device status) and the "Device
variable status" (DVS) of the response frames (HART command 9).

Quality code Meaning (process status)

80H Value is okay
89H "Good" with "Low limit" Process status, formed from the "De‐
8AH "Good" with "High limit" vice variable status" (DVS) of the re‐
sponse frames with corresponding lim‐
28H…2BH "Bad" its (see above).
68H…6BH "Poor accuracy"
78H…7BH "Manual" or "Fixed"
(manually controlled or fixed value)
88H…8BH "More device variable state available"
(additional status information available)
84H Response code RC8: Update error
24H Response code RC16: Access restricted Request from field device refused
23H Communication error or HART variable not
present in the field device
37H Initialization value from analog module After module startup
40H Read alternatively via command 3
00H Initialization value from S7 system

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

24 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Parameters 5
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
You specify how the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module operates using parameters.
The parameters are subdivided into:
● Channel or technology parameters (data record 128)
With PROFIBUS DP GSD configuration, there is a reduced configuration via the startup
configuration (Prm frame).
● Parameters that define the display of HART variables in the address space of the module;
HART mapping parameters (data record 140)
With configuration in the user program, the parameters are transferred to the modules via data
records with the "WRREC" instruction; see section Parameter assignment and structure of the
channel/technology parameters (Page 48).

5.1.1 Channel/technology parameters

Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST

The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system

Table 5-1 Configurable channel/technology parameters and their default settings

Parameter Value range Default Configura‐ Effective range with configura‐

tion in RUN tion software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file PRO‐ GSD file PRO‐
FINET IO FIBUS DP
Diagnostics ● Disable Disable Yes Channel Module 2
No supply voltage L+ ● Enable
Diagnostics ● Disable Disable Yes Channel Module 2
encoder supply ● Enable
Diagnostics ● Disable Disable Yes Channel Module 2
overflow ● Enable
Diagnostics ● Disable Disable Yes Channel Module 2
underflow ● Enable

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 25
Parameters
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Parameter Value range Default Configura‐ Effective range with configura‐

tion in RUN tion software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file PRO‐ GSD file PRO‐
FINET IO FIBUS DP
Diagnostics ● Disable Disable Yes Channel Module 2
wire break ● Enable
Diagnostics HART ● Disable Disable Yes Channel Module 2
● Enable
Measuring type/range ● Disabled Current (2- Yes Channel Channel
wire transduc‐
● Current (2-wire
er) 4..20 mA
transducer) 4..20 mA
HART
● Current (2-wire
transducer) 4..20 mA
HART
Smoothing ● none none Yes Channel Channel
● 4-fold (weak)
● 16-fold (medium)
● 32-fold (strong)
Interference frequency ● 60 Hz (integration time 50 Hz Yes Channel Module 2
suppression 16.6 ms)
● 50 Hz 1 (integration time 20
ms)
● 10 Hz (integration time 100
ms)
Current limit for wire ● 1.185 mA 1.185 mA Yes Channel Cannot be
break diagnostics changed2
● 3.6 mA
Number of HART 5…20 5 Yes Channel Cannot be
preamble bytes changed2
Number of HART repeti‐ 0…255 5 Yes Channel Cannot be
tions changed2
Potential group ● Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module group of the
left module
● Allow new potential group
1
Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.
2
Because the PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP
station, the options for parameter assignment are limited. In this case, the parameter assignment uses data record 245. If
required, you can assign this parameter using data record 128 as described in the "GSD File PROFINET IO" column (see
table above).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

26 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Parameters
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Note
Unused channels
"Disable" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.
A disabled channel always supplies the analog value 7FFFH.

See also
Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters (Page 48)

5.1.2 Explanation of the channel/technology parameters

Diagnostics no supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

Diagnostics encoder supply

Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or
of an input to the encoder supply.
The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be enabled simultaneously. If both diagnostic
events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics information is output.

Diagnostics overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.

Diagnostics underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.

Diagnostics wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics when the module has no current flow at the input or the current
flow at the input is below the configured wire break limit.
The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both diagnostics
events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics information is output.

Diagnostics HART
Enabling of the diagnostics of the HART frame-specific monitoring and the status information
supplied by the connected field device in the HART frame (HART device status).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 27
Parameters
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Current limit for wire break diagnostics

You use this to specify the current limit for detecting wire breaks. If the current falls below the
configured wire break limit, the measured value is declared invalid and, if wire break
diagnostics is enabled, corresponding diagnostics information is generated. When value status
is configured, the analog value is marked as invalid.
With a wire break limit of 3.6 mA, the measured value becomes invalid when the current falls
below 3.6 mA and is marked as valid again when it rises above 3.8 mA.
There is no hysteresis for a wire break limit of 1.185 mA.

Measuring type/range
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog input module has the following measuring ranges:

Table 5-2 Measuring ranges

Measuring type Measuring range Resolution

Disabled - -
Current (2-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA 15 bits + sign
Current (2-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA HART 15 bits + sign

An overview of the measuring range as well as overflow, overrange, etc., can be found in the
section Analog value representation (Page 65) and in Analog Value Processing function
manual.

Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. Smoothing can be set in 4 levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal
change at the analog input.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

28 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Parameters
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

   

 [ [ [ [




    0RGXOHF\FOHVN

① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Figure 5-1 Smoothing of the analog value

Interference frequency suppression

Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency
of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the AC supply system may interfere with the measured value, in particular
in low voltage ranges. .

Number of HART preamble bytes

Specifies the number of preamble bytes that the module prefixes to each HART frame to be
sent (FFH). These bytes are used for synchronizing the frames.

Number of HART repetitions

Specifies the number of HART frame repetitions. If the analog module receives no response
or receives a response with error to a HART frame sent to the field device, the frame is
accordingly repeated, i.e., resent to the field device.
Because HART communication of the individual channels uses multiplex operation, faulty
HART frames affect the other channels when the number of HART repetitions is high. In other
words, the other channels are processed less frequently.

Potential group
Specifies that a BaseUnit with supply voltage infeed is located in this slot (see system manual
ET 200SP Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
58649293)).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 29
Parameters
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

See also
Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART (Page 25)

5.1.3 HART mapping parameters

The HART mapping parameters allow a maximum of 4 HART variables to be configured
(mapped) in the address space of the module.
Each HART variable occupies 5 bytes of input data. As soon as you configure (map) at least
one HART variable in the input address space, the addresses for all four variables are occupied
(20 bytes).
With PROFIBUS DP GSD configuration with HART variables, the HART variables cannot be
directly configured. The four secondary variables are supplied in ascending channel order in
the address space of the module.
When required, this can be changed using data record 140; see section AUTOHOTSPOT.

Parameters

Table 5-3 Configurable HART mapping parameters

Parameter Value range Default Configuration in With GSD file PRO‐

RUN FIBUS DP
Variable Chan‐ 0…3 0 Yes 0
0 nel
Type ● Non / Cir Non / Cir Yes Secondary
● Primary
● Secondary
● Tertiary
● Quartenary
Variable Chan‐ 0…3 0 Yes 1
1 nel
Type ● Non / Cir Non / Cir Yes Secondary
● Primary
● Secondary
● Tertiary
● Quartenary
Variable Chan‐ 0…3 0 Yes 2
2 nel
Type ● Non / Cir Non / Cir Yes Secondary
● Primary
● Secondary
● Tertiary
● Quartenary

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

30 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Parameters
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Parameter Value range Default Configuration in With GSD file PRO‐

RUN FIBUS DP
Variable Chan‐ 0…3 0 Yes 3
3 nel
Type ● Non / Cir Non / Cir Yes Secondary
● Primary
● Secondary
● Tertiary
● Quartenary

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 31
Parameters
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

32 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Configuring/address space 6
6.1 Configuring
You configure the analog module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
● In the TIA Portal V13.0.1 or higher
● With STEP 7 V5.5 + SP4 or higher (HSP0263)
● Using GSD/GSDML
The GSD files for the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System can be downloaded from the Internet:
● GSDML (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/57138621)
● GSD (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 73016883)

Configuration options
The following configurations are possible:
● Without value status and without HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20 mA HART")
● Without value status, with HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20 mA HART, 4 variables")
● With value status and without HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20 mA HART, QI")
● With value status, with HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20 mA HART, 4 variables, QI")
With GSD/GSDML configuration, you must select one of the possible configurations directly.
The configuration for STEP 7 (TIA Portal or HW Config) is made indirectly via the parameters.

Restrictions
● Value status is not available for a PROFIBUS DP station.
● Downstream of a Standard IM (V1.1), the module can be operated only in the "Without
value status and without HART variables" configuration.
● TIA Portal:
– The module behind a standard IM (V1.1) is not available.
– TIA Portal as of V14.0.1
The module can be centrally configured on the following CPU:
- CPU 1510SP-1 (as of V2.1)
- CPU 1512SP-1 PN (as of V2.1)
– TIA Portal as of V15.0.0
The module can be configured as an open controller.
– The module cannot be used behind fail-safe controllers.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 33
Configuring/address space
6.2 Address space

6.2 Address space

The following figure shows the allocation of the address space of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA
HART module for a configuration with value status (Quality Information, QI) and with HART
variables.
The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status has been enabled or
the corresponding configuration has been configured from the GSDML.
The addresses for the HART variables are only available if configuration/parameter
assignment of the HART variables has been carried out or the corresponding configuration
has been configured from the GSD/GSDML.
If the HART variables are configured and there is no value status configuration or parameter
assignment, the HART variables begin directly after the analog values, thus starting from IB x
+ 8.

Table 6-1 Address space of analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

$VVLJQPHQWLQWKHSURFHVVLPDJHLQSXW3,,
,QSXWYDOXH
       
,%[
,%[ &KDQQHO
,%[
,%[ &KDQQHO
,%[
&KDQQHO
,%[
,%[
&KDQQHO
,%[

9DOXHVWDWXV4,
       
,%[     &KDQQHOWRYDOXHVWDWXV4,WR4,

IB x+9 Value Configured HART variable 0

….
IB x+12
IB x+13 Quality code
IB x+14 Value Configured HART variable 1
….
IB x+17
IB x+18 Quality code
IB x+19 Value Configured HART variable 2
….
IB x+22
IB x+23 Quality code
IB x+24 Value Configured HART variable 3
….
IB x+27
IB x+28 Quality code

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

34 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Configuring/address space
6.2 Address space

Evaluating the value status

If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the input
address space. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to the corresponding channel. The provide
information about the validity of the analog value, namely irrespective of the diagnostics
enables.
Bit = 1: There is no error in the analog value or the analog value acquisition of the channel.
Bit = 0: The analog value of the channel cannot be correctly acquired.
The channel is disabled; there is a fault in the wiring or module.

Evaluating HART variables

If you have configured (mapped) HART variables for the analog module, four HART variables
with 5 bytes each are stored in the input address space.
Each HART variable consists of a 4-byte real value and a quality code byte. The quality code
describes the validity of the value; see section HART variables (Page 22) .

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 35
Configuring/address space
6.2 Address space

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

36 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 7
7.1 Status and error displays

LED displays
The figure below shows the status and error displays of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
analog input module.


$, $,
) ) 
$, $

① DIAG (green/red)
② Channel status (green)
③ Channel fault (red)
④ PWR (green)
Figure 7-1 LED displays

Meaning of the LED displays

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing
with diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 40).

Table 7-1 Status display of the channel status/channel fault LEDs

LEDs Meaning
Channel Channel
status fault
Channel disabled or module switched off

Off Off
Channel enabled and no channel diagnostics present

On Off

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 37
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
7.1 Status and error displays

LEDs Meaning
Channel Channel
status fault
Channel enabled and channel diagnostics present

Off On
Channel enabled and only HART channel diagnostics present

On On

Table 7-2 DIAG LED error display

DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP is not OK or switched off
Off
Module parameters not assigned

Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics

On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics, at least one error is currently
present
Flashes

Table 7-3 Status display of the PWR LED

PWR LED Meaning

No supply voltage L+

Off
Supply voltage L+ present

On

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

38 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
7.2 Interrupts

7.2 Interrupts
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog input module supports diagnostic interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupt
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt for the following events:
● Channel/component temporarily unavailable
● Short-circuit / Overload of encoder voltage
● Wire break
● Low limit violated
● High limit violated
● Error
● No supply voltage L+
● HART communication error or HART field device error

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 39
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
7.3 Diagnostics alarms

7.3 Diagnostics alarms

A diagnostic alarm is generated for each detected diagnostic event. The DIAG LED flashes
on the module.
There is additionally a channel-specific display of the diagnostics through the corresponding
channel fault/channel status LEDs.
The diagnostic alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostic buffer of the CPU or be
displayed in STEP 7 using the Online and Diagnostics view. You can evaluate the error codes
with the user program.

Table 7-4 Diagnostic alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them

Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning Remedy

Channel/component 1FH ● Update of the firmware is being
temporarily unavailable performed or has been canceled. The
module does not perform any
measurements during this time.
Short-circuit/overload 10EH ● Short-circuit of the encoder supply to M ● Correct the module/encoder tuning
at external encoder ● Short-circuit of the input to the encoder
supply *
supply
● Overload of the encoder supply
Wire break 6H ● Impedance of encoder circuit too high. ● Use a different encoder type or
● Wire break between the module and modify the wiring, for example,
sensor using cables with a larger cross-
section
● Channel not connected (open)
● Connect the cable
● Disable diagnostics
● Connect the sensor contacts
High limit violated 7H ● The analog value is above the ● Correct the module/encoder tuning
overrange.
Low limit violated 8H ● The analog value is below the ● Correct the module/encoder tuning
underrange.
Error 9H ● Internal module error occurred. ● Replace module
No supply voltage 11H ● No or insufficient supply voltage L+ ● Check wiring of the supply voltage
L+ on the BaseUnit
● Check BaseUnit type
HART communication 141H ● HART field device is not responding ● Check the process wiring
error ● Timing error ● Correct the parameter assignment
● HART field device has not understood ● Set output current of ≥4 mA
the sent command (1st status byte) ● Increase the number of assigned
repetitions

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

40 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
7.3 Diagnostics alarms

Diagnostic alarm Error code Meaning Remedy

HART primary variable 142H ● Incorrect parameters in the HART field ● Check the parameter assignment of
outside range device the HART device
● HART field device is at "Primary ● Correct the simulation
variable outside the limits" in simulation ● Check whether the correct
mode transducer is connected
● Incorrect measuring point
● Primary variable assigned outside the
limits
HART output current of 143H The output current of the HART field device
the field device satura‐ is saturated:
ted ● Incorrect parameters in the HART field
device
● HART field device is set to a measured
value that is too high in simulation mode
● Incorrect measuring point
HART output current of 144H The output current of the HART field device
the field device speci‐ is set to a fixed value:
fied ● Incorrect parameters in the HART field
device
● HART field device is set to a measured
value that is too high in simulation mode
● Incorrect measuring point
HART secondary vari‐ 149H ● Incorrect parameters in the HART field
able outside the limits device
● HART field device is at "Non-primary
variable outside the limits" in simulation
mode
● Incorrect measuring point
● Non-primary variable assigned outside
the limits
HART - more status 145H ● The identifier for "Additional status ● Read status using HART command
available information available" of the HART field 48 and eliminate error/cause, if
device was set in the HART device necessary
status (in the 2nd status byte).
HART configuration 146H ● The identifier for "Parameter ● If you do not want a diagnostic
changed reassignment" of the HART field device interrupt to be triggered for
(reset again automati‐ was set in the HART device status (in parameter reassignment, the
cally by the module af‐ the 2nd status byte). diagnostic interrupt must not be
ter approximately 1 mi‐ enabled.
nute)
HART malfunction in 147H ● The field device signals a malfunction ● Read status using HART command
field device in the HART device status (in the 2nd 48 and eliminate error/cause, if
status byte) necessary
● Replace the field device

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 41
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
7.3 Diagnostics alarms

* Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground and/or of the input signal to the encoder supply of a channel can have a temporary
effect on other channels (duration < 0.5 s). This means the short-circuit diagnostic information can also be signaled on
unaffected channels and/or the measured value can be affected temporarily.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

42 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Technical specifications 8
8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1
Product type designation AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
General information
Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1
HART support Rev. 5 to Rev. 7
Product functions
I&M data Yes, I&M0 to I&M3
Firmware update capability Yes
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of V13 + SP1
version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 + SP4 + HSP0263
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD V3.0
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.31
CiR Configuration in RUN
Configuration in RUN possible Yes
Installation type/mounting
Rack mounting possible Yes
Front installation possible Yes
Rail mounting possible Yes
Wall/direct mounting possible No
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V / 110 mA
Valid range low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Input current
Current consumption, max. 25 mA; without encoder supply
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
Output current per channel (4 channels), max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration
< 10 s
Load resistance of the encoder > 750 Ω for L+ = 24 V
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.65 W; without encoder

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 43
Technical specifications
8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1
Address space per module
Without value status and without HART variables 8 bytes
With value status and without HART variables 9 bytes
Without value status, with HART variables 28 bytes
With value status, with HART variables 29 bytes
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 4
Maximum permitted input current for current input (de‐ 50 mA
struction limit)
Input ranges (rated values), currents
Current 4 mA to 20 mA Yes, 15 bits + sign
Input resistance (4 to 20 mA) 280 Ω; + approx. 0.35 V diode forward voltage
Cable length
Cable length shielded, max. 800 m
Analog value formation
Measuring principle Integrating (sigma-delta)
Integration and conversion time / resolution per channel
Resolution with overrange (bits including sign), max. 16 bits
Interference suppression for interference frequency f1 10 / 50 / 60, channel-by-channel
in Hz
Basic conversion time depending on the interference voltage sup‐
pression:
at 60Hz: 18.75 ms
at 50Hz: 22.5 ms
at 10Hz: 112.5 ms
Measured value smoothing
Configurable Yes (none, weak, medium, strong), channel-
by-channel
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.01 %
Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.005 %
Crosstalk between inputs, min. 60 dB
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in relation to ± 0.05 %
input range), (+/-)
Operational limit in the entire temperature range
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.5 %
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.3 %
Influence of a HART signal modulated on the input signal in relation to input range
Error with integration time 16.6 ms ± 0.05%
Error with integration time 20 ms ± 0.04%
Error with integration time 100 ms ± 0.02%
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/- 1 %), f1 = interference frequency

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

44 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Technical specifications
8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference < 60 dB
nominal value of the input range), min.
Interrupts/diagnostic/status information
Diagnostic interrupt Yes
Diagnostic alarms
Monitoring of supply voltage Yes
Wire break Yes; channel-by-channel
Short-circuit Yes; channel-by-channel, short-circuit of the
encoder supply to ground or short-circuit of an
input to the encoder supply
Underflow/overflow Yes; channel-by-channel
HART Yes; channel-by-channel
Diagnostic display LED
Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics Yes, red LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation
Between the channels No
Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and the supply voltage of the No
electronics
Isolation, designed for basic isolation between chan‐ 60 V AC / 75 V DC
nels and backplane bus
Isolation
Isolation tested with 500 V AC or 707 V DC (type test)
Operating temperature
Horizontal mounting position, min. 0℃
Horizontal mounting position, max. 60℃
Vertical mounting position, min. 0℃
Vertical mounting position, max. 50℃
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 31 g

Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
59753521)

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 45
Technical specifications
8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

46 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Parameter data records 9
Parameter assignment in the user program
You have the option of reassigning parameters for individual channels of the module and for
the mapping of HART variables in RUN without affecting the other channels.

Changing parameters in RUN

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module.
● Channel/technology parameters using data record 128
● The HART mapping using data record 140.
The parameters assigned with STEP 7 are not changed permanently in the CPU, which means
the parameters assigned with STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.

Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output parameter
contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7 online
help.

Parameters
Only the values specified in each case in the following are permitted. Values that are not listed
are rejected by the analog module.
Each parameter data record is checked by the analog module. If an incorrect parameter is
detected, the complete data record is discarded and the parameters of the analog module
remain unchanged.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 47
Parameter data records
9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters

9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology

parameters

Structure of data record 128

Data record 128 has a length of 42 bytes and contains the channel/technology parameters of
all four channels (10 bytes per channel).
The parameters are divided into parameters that influence the actual analog value acquisition,
diagnostic enables, and basic parameters of HART communication.
You can use data records 131 to 134 to assign and change additional parameters and HART-
specific settings. See section HART-specific settings (Page 57).

%\WH +HDGHULQIRUPDWLRQ

%\WH $QDORJYDOXHDFTXLVLWLRQ &KDQQHOSDUDPHWHUV

'LDJQRVWLFVHQDEOH
+$57
%\WH $QDORJYDOXHDFTXLVLWLRQ &KDQQHOSDUDPHWHUV
'LDJQRVWLFVHQDEOH
+$57
%\WH $QDORJYDOXHDFTXLVLWLRQ &KDQQHOSDUDPHWHUV
'LDJQRVWLFVHQDEOH
+$57
%\WH $QDORJYDOXHDFTXLVLWLRQ &KDQQHOSDUDPHWHUV
'LDJQRVWLFVHQDEOH
+$57
Figure 9-1 Structure of data record 128

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

       
%\WH        

0LQRUYHUVLRQ
0DMRUYHUVLRQ

       
%\WH         /HQJWKRISDUDPHWHUGDWDSHUFKDQQHO E\WHV

Figure 9-2 Header information

Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 3.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

48 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Parameter data records
9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters

All unused bits and the bits or bytes marked with "reserved" must be set to zero.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1" or the appropriate value.

        0HDVXULQJW\SH
%\WH[  &KDQQHOGLVDEOHG
 &XUUHQWZLUH

0HDVXULQJUDQJH
         P$
%\WH[  P$ZLWK+$57FRPPXQLFDWLRQ

       
%\WH[ 5HVHUYHG 

       
%\WH[

6PRRWKLQJ
 QRQH
 ZHDN
 PHGLXP
 VWURQJ
,QWHUIHUHQFHIUHTXHQF\VXSSUHVVLRQ
 +]
 +]
 +]

       
%\WH[
:LUHEUHDNWKUHVKROG
 P$
 P$

       
%\WH[ 5HVHUYHG 

       
%\WH[    (QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFV

1RVXSSO\YROWDJH/
(QFRGHUVXSSO\
:LUHEUHDN
8QGHUIORZ
2YHUIORZ

       
%\WH[ (QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFV

+$57GLDJQRVWLFV

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 49
Parameter data records
9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters

       
%\WH[ 1XPEHURI+$57SUHDPEOHE\WHV
GHIDXOW 

       
%\WH[ 1XPEHURI+$57UHWULHV
LQWHUQDOO\OLPLWHGWRPD[LPXPGHIDXOW 

* x = 2 + (channel number * 10); with channel number 0 ….3

Figure 9-3 Structure of bytes x to x+39 for channels 0 to 3

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

50 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Parameter data records
9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters

9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping

parameters

Structure of data record 140

Data block 140 has a total length of 12 bytes.
Using the parameters of data record 140, you can configure/map up to four HART variables
of the individual channels in the input address space of the module if the corresponding
configuration is selected, see "Configuring (Page 33)".

Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.

       
%\WH 9HUVLRQ 

       
%\WH %ORFNOHQJWK E\WHV

       
%\WH %ORFNW\SH 

       
%\WH 5HVHUYHG 

Figure 9-4 Header information

Parameters
The following figure shows the parameter assignment of the four HART variables 0...3.

        &KDQQHOQXPEHU
%\WH[ 

       
9DULDEOHPDUNLQJ
%\WH[  QRQ
 3ULPDU\
 6HFRQGDU\
 7HUWLDU\
 4XDUWHQDU\
 &L5

* x = 4 + (HART variable * 2); with HART variable 0….3

Figure 9-5 Parameters

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 51
Parameter data records
9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters

Note
Memory area
Allocation of the memory area based on the configuration of the HART variables:
● All four HART variables are set to 0 = "none":
No memory area is reserved/allocated for HART variables in the input address range.
● As least one HART variable is set to not equal to 0 = "none":
The entire memory area always allocated to the four HART variables in the input address
space. All remaining HART variables are preset to 15 = "CiR" and 0 = "none" is no longer
allowed.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

52 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
HART operating data records 10
Reading/writing data in RUN
HART operating data records are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction and
read from the module with the "RDREC" instruction.
Errors during the transfer are indicated at output parameter STATUS of the "WRREC" or
"RDREC".
The following HART operating data records are available:

Data record Description Length Writable Readable

number (bytes)
80 HART request Channel 0 240 Yes Yes
81 HART response Channel 0 240 No Yes
80 HART request Channel 1 240 Yes Yes
81 HART response Channel 1 240 No Yes
80 HART request Channel 2 240 Yes Yes
81 HART response Channel 2 240 No Yes
80 HART request Channel 3 240 Yes Yes
81 HART response Channel 3 240 No Yes
121 HART variables 80 No Yes
131 HART parameters Channel 0 8 Yes Yes
132 HART parameters Channel 1 8 Yes Yes
133 HART parameters Channel 2 8 Yes Yes
134 HART parameters Channel 3 8 Yes Yes
148 HART directory 17 No Yes
149 HART feature data 3 No Yes

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 53
HART operating data records
10.1 HART directory

10.1 HART directory

Structure of the HART directory

Byte Meaning Comment

0 Profile Revision Number = 2, 0 (Revision 2.0)
1
2 Index of Client Management = 255 (not relevant)
3 Number of Clients =1
4 Number of Channels =4
5 Write Read Index Offset = 1 (The response to a request data record
is made with the data record number of the
request data record + 1)
6 Index of HMD Feature Parameter = 149
7 Index of HMD Module Parameter = 255 (not relevant)
8 Start Index of Burst Buffer Area = 255 (not relevant)
9+n Index of HMD Channel Parameter (Channel = 131+n
n)
9+n+4 Index of HART Client Channel Message = 80+(2*n)
Data The HART request data records cannot be
configured. Data records starting from data
record number 80 (80, 82, 84, 86) are used.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

54 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART operating data records
10.2 HART feature data

10.2 HART feature data

Structure of the HART feature data

Byte Meaning Comment

0 Byte 0 = 0x62
Bit1 = 1: "Parameter check result is given with a read response"
Bit5 = 1: "Compact format is supported"
1 Byte 1 =0
2 Max Length Da‐ = 240 (maximum length of the HART request data records)
ta Unit

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 55
HART operating data records
10.3 HART variable data record

10.3 HART variable data record

The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module supports a maximum of 4 HART variables
per channel that are read cyclically, provided this is supported by the connected field device.
These 16 HART variables are are made available in a readable manner in HART variable data
record 121.
Each HART variable consists of a 4-byte real value and a quality code byte. See section 4.4.1
"Quality code".

Structure of the HART variable data record

Byte Meaning
Channel 0
0…3 Value Primary Variable (PV)
4 Quality code
5…8 Value Secondary Variable (SV)
9 Quality code
10…13 Value Tertiary (TV)
14 Quality code
15…18 Value Quartenary (QV)
19 Quality code
Channel 1
20…39 HART variables same as for Channel 0
Channel 2
40…59 HART variables same as for Channel 0
Channel 3
60…79 HART variables same as for Channel 0

If HART is not enabled or the respective HART variable is not supplied from the connected
field device, the corresponding variable = 0 and the QC = 0x37 (initialization value from the
analog module).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

56 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART operating data records
10.4 HART-specific settings

10.4 HART-specific settings

The HART communication is available using standard parameter assignment (see section 9.1
"Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters").
Additional HART-specific settings can be specified on a channel-specific basis using data
records 131 to 134.
The parameters assigned with STEP 7 are not changed permanently in the CPU, which means
the parameters assigned with STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.
Each parameter reassignment of the analog module resets the HART-specific settings back
to the initial values from parameter data record 128.
Where there is no supply voltage L+, the module does not assume the HART-specific settings.

Channel Data record number

0 131
1 132
2 133
3 134

Structure of the HART-specific settings

        %LWLVUHVHWDIWHUHYDOXDWLRQRIGDWDUHFRUGE\
%\WH 0XVWEH PRGXOH

        2IIVHWIRUPDQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFSDUDPHWHUVDFFRUGLQJ
%\WH 0XVWEH WR+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ

        1XPEHURI+$57UHWULHVLQWHUQDOO\OLPLWHGWR
%\WH ,QLWLDOYDOXHIURPSDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG

        1XPEHURI+$57SUHDPEOHE\WHV
%\WH ,QLWLDOYDOXHIURPSDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG

        )LHOGGHYLFHPRGHDFFRUGLQJWR+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ
%\WH 0XVWEH

        &OLHQWWLPHRXWLQVV
%\WH ,QLWLDOYDOXH V

       
%\WH       ,QLWLDOYDOXHDFFRUGLQJWR+$57
DFWLYDWLRQIURP
SDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG
 (QDEOH+$57 $OZD\VDVSULPDU\PDVWHU
 'LVDEOH+$57
 3ULPDU\PDVWHU
 6HFRQGDU\PDVWHU

       
%\WH 0XVWEH 5HVHUYHG

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 57
HART operating data records
10.4 HART-specific settings

Figure 10-1 Settings

* When the number of HART preamble bytes = 0, the number of preamble bytes required by
the connected field device are used, but no fewer than 5.
When the number of HART preamble bytes = 255, then 20 preamble bytes are used.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

58 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART operating data records
10.5 HART request and response data records

10.5 HART request and response data records

HART commands are processed on a channel-specific basis via a separate command
interface with one request data record and one response data record in each case.

Channel Data record number

Request to the field device Response from the field device
0 80 81
1 82 83
2 84 85
3 86 87

Structure of request data records 80, 82, 84, 86

Byte Meaning Comment

0 Request control
1 Number of preamble bytes 5....20, 255
2…239 Communication data according to HART specifi‐
cation

Coding "Request control":

Bit 0…1: Reserved = 0

Bit 2: 0 = Parameters are not checked
Bit 3...4: Reserved = 0
Bit 5: 0 = Transparent format *
1 = Compact format
Bit 6: 1 = Enable SHC mode **
Bit 7: 0 = HART Request
* HART commands are processed by the analog module in transparent message format and
in compact message format. However, the response data from the module is always made
available in transparent message format.
** Processing of a sequence of HART commands as an SHC sequence affects all other
channels with HART enabled. See section 4.3 "HART command interface", SHC sequence.

Note
When "Number of Preamble Bytes" = 255, the number of preambles set with the parameters
is used. The default setting is five. You can re-configure the number of preamble bytes using
the parameters and HART-specific settings (see section HART-specific settings (Page 57)).

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 59
HART operating data records
10.5 HART request and response data records

Structure of response data records 81, 83, 85, 87

In case of response error

Byte Meaning Comment

0 Response control
1 HART group error display
2 Protocol error
3…239 Response data according to HART specifica‐ Only present when "Response result" = 6
tion = "Error, with data"

In case of response error

Byte Meaning Comment

0 Response control
1 HART group error display
2…239 Response data according to HART specifica‐ Only present when "Response result" = 4
tion = "Successful, with data"

Coding "Response control":

Bits 0-2: Response result (processing status)

0 = Inactive
1 = Inactive (reserved)
2 = Waiting
3 = Waiting, executing
4 = Successful, with data
5 = Successful, without data
6 = Error, with data
7 = Error, without data
Bit 3: 0 = Burst mode not active;
Bit 4: 0 = Response data come directly from the
HART device
Bit 5: 0 = Response data in transparent message for‐
mat
Bit 6: 0 = SHC mode not active
1 = SHC mode active
Bit 7: 0 = HART response

Coding "HART group error display"

Bit number Meaning Explanation

0 Additional status information (2nd HART status byte) You obtain additional status in‐
available formation, if required, with HART command 48.
1 HART communication error The field device has detected a communication error
when receiving the command. The error information can
be found in the 1st HART status byte.
2 Parameter check 0: HMD parameters unchanged
1: Check HMD parameters

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

60 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART operating data records
10.5 HART request and response data records

Bit number Meaning Explanation

3 Reserved Always 0
4…7 HART protocol error during 0: Unspecified error
response 1: HMD error
2: Channel fault
3: Command error
4: Query error
5: Response error
6: Query rejected
7: Profile query rejected
8: Manufacturer-specific query rejected
9 - 15: Not used

Coding "HART protocol error during response"

HART proto‐ Meaning Explanation

col error dur‐
ing response
0 Unspecified error Always 0
1 HMD error 0: Not specified
1: Internal communication error
2: Parameter assignment error
3: HW fault
4: Wait time expired
5: HART timer expired
6…127: Reserved

128...255: Manufacturer-specific
2 Channel fault 0: Not specified
1: Line fault
2: Short-circuit
3: Open line
4: Low current output
5: Parameter assignment error
6…127: Reserved
128…255: Manufacturer-specific
3 Command error 0-127: HART protocol,
Bit 7 = Always 0
4 Query error Bit 0 = 0: Reserved
Bit 1 = 1: Receive buffer overflow
Bit 2 = 0: Reserved
Bit 3 = 1: Checksum error
Bit 4 = 1: Framing error
Bit 5 = 1: Overflow error
Bit 6 = 1: Parity error
Bit 7 = 1: Reserved

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 61
HART operating data records
10.5 HART request and response data records

HART proto‐ Meaning Explanation

col error dur‐
ing response
5 Response error Bit 0 = 1: GAP timeout
Bit 1 = 1: Receive buffer overflow
Bit 2 = 1: Timeout
Bit 3 = 1: Checksum error
Bit 4 = 1: Framing error
Bit 5 = 1: Overflow error
Bit 6 = 1: Parity error
Bit 7 = 1: Reserved
6 Query rejected 0: Unspecified
1: Compact format not supported
2: SHC not supported
3: Impermissible command
4: No resources
5...127: Reserved

128...255: Manufacturer-specific
7 Profile query rejected 0: Not specified (not supported)
8 Manufacturer-specific query 0: Not specified (not supported)
rejected

Example of HART programming (HART command interface)

For HART channel 0, the command 01 is to be sent in transparent message format to the
HART field device with address "98 CF 38 84 F0".
A positive edge at input 4.0 of a digital input module leads to the writing of the HART command.
The following assumptions are made:
● The module address of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module is 512 (200H).
● The data record is stored in DB80: starting from address 0.0, length of 11 bytes.
● In this example, DB80 (request data record for channel 0) consists of 11 bytes.

STL Explanation
A I 4.0
FP M 101.0
= M 104.0
m2: CALL SFC 58
REQ :=M104.0 Write request
IOID :=B#16#54 Address range ID
LADDR :=W#16#200 Module address
RECNUM :=B#16#50 Data record number 80
RECORD :=P#DB80.DBX0.0 BYTE Data record with length of 11 bytes (must corre-
11 spond to the exact length that is to be transferred)

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

62 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 HART operating data records
10.5 HART request and response data records

RET_VAL :=MW93 RET_VAL of SFC 58 (OK/error/...)

BUSY :=M51.0 Write operation not yet completed
A M 51.0
SPB m2
BE

Table 10-1 DB80: Transparent message format

Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex)

0 00 Req_Control
(00 = Transparent message format.
40 = Transparent message format with SHC sequence)
1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14)
2 82 Start character
(02 = Short Frame with command 0)
(82 = Long Frame with other commands)
3 98 Address
4 CF (with command 0, the address is exactly 1 byte long and
has the value 0.)
5 38
6 84
7 F0
8 01 Command (CMD)
9 00 Length in bytes
10 98 Checksum (CHK)
(calculated starting from byte 2 "Start character" up to the
next to last byte)

A HART command can also be sent in compact message format. In this case, the data that is
transferred via DB 80 is reduced to 4 bytes.

Table 10-2 DB80: Compact message format

Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex)

0 20 Req_Control
(20 = Compact message format.
60 = Compact message format with SHC sequence)
1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14)
2 01 Command (CMD)
3 00 Length in bytes

You can learn when the response from the field device was received by cyclically reading data
record DS81 for HART channel 0. The response is always supplied in transparent message
format.

Table 10-3 FC81: Reading of the response to DB81 with SFC 59

STL Explanation
m3: CALL SFC 59

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 63
HART operating data records
10.5 HART request and response data records

REQ :=1 Read request

IOID :=B#16#54 Address range ID
LADDR :=W#16#200 Module address of the HART-AI
RECNUM :=B#16#51 Data record number 81
RECORD :=P#DB81.DBX0.0 BYTE Data record
75
RET_VAL :=MW100 RET_VAL of SFC 59 (OK/error/...)
BUSY :=M49.1 Read operation not yet completed
A M 49.1
SPB m3
BE

The program part A M 49.1 to SPB m3 is only required if reading is to occur synchronously.
As long as "0x03" is in byte 0 of DB81, the response has not been received from the field
device. Positive response data that you can evaluate is available from the field device as soon
as bit 2 = 1 in byte 0.
If there are errors in the response data, see the "HART group fault display" tables in byte 1 or
"HART protocol error during response" in byte 2 of the field device response.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

64 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Analog value representation 11
Table 11-1 Resolution of the analog values

Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value

Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001
0

Representation / Value range

The table below contains the decimal and hexadecimal values (codings) of the possible current
measuring ranges.

Table 11-2 Current measuring range 4 to 20 mA / 4…20 mA HART

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF > 22.81 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 16 mA
1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 < 1.185 mA Underflow

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 65
Analog value representation
11.1 Representation of input ranges

11.1 Representation of input ranges

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar
input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

Table 11-3 Bipolar input ranges

Dec. value Measured val‐ Data word Range

ue in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range

-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table 11-4 Unipolar input ranges

Dec. value Measured val‐ Data word Range

ue in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range

-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

66 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 Analog value representation
11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
measuring ranges.

Table 11-5 Current measuring range ±20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
32767 7FFF >23.52 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 <-23.52 mA Underflow

Table 11-6 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF >23.52 mA >22.81 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underflow

* For measuring type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA".
Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 67
Analog value representation
11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

68 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
Index
Device status, 16
DIAG LED, 38
A Diagnostic alarm, 40
Diagnostic interrupt, 39
Address assignment, 22
Documentation
Address space, 34
Validity, 3
AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
Accessories, 10
Address space, 34
Channel parameters, 25
E
Commissioning, 19 Error displays, 37
Configuration, 19 Error management, 19
Diagnostic alarm, 40
Diagnostic interrupt, 39
Functions, 9 F
Measuring ranges, 28
Fast mode, 17
Parameters, 25
Feature data, 55
Properties, 9
Field devices
Technical specifications, 43
Parameter reassignment, 19
Technology parameters, 25
Terminal assignment, 11
H
B HART
Applications, 13
BaseUnit, 11
Command, 59
Burst mode, 17
Command interface, 20, 62
Commands, 15
Communication, 14, 57
C Definition, 13
Channel fault LED, 37 Device status, 16
Channel parameters, 25, 48 Directory, 54
Channel status LED, 37 Error management, 19
Command interface, 20, 59 Evaluating variables, 35
Commissioning, 19 Fast mode, 17
Communication, 57 Feature data, 55
Configuration, 19 Mapping parameters, 30
HART variable, 22 Operating data records, 53
Conventions, 3 Parameter assignment tool, 18
Principle of operation, 14
Programming, 62
D Protocol, 13, 16
Settings, 57
Data record 128, 48
Signal, 14
Header information, 48
System environment, 18
Parameters, 48
Variable data record, 56
Data record 140, 51
Variables, 22
Header information, 51
HART variables
Parameters, 51
Configuring, 22
Data records, 20
HCF, 13

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC 69
Index

Terminal assignment, 11

I
Interference frequency suppression, 26, 29
V
Value status
Evaluating, 35
L Variable data record, 56
LED displays, 37

M
Mapping parameters, 30, 51
Measuring range, 28

O
Operating data records, 53

P
Parameter reassignment, 19
Parameters, 25
PWR LED, 38

Q
Quality code, 22
Revision 5, 23
Revision 7, 24

R
Request data record, 59
Response data record, 60
Reverse polarity, 12

S
SHC sequence, 21
SIMATIC PDM configuration tool, 18
Smoothing, 26, 28
Status indications, 37
Supply voltage, 12
System environment, 18

T
Technology parameters, 25, 48

Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART

70 Manual, 02/2018, A5E35098013-AC
 ___________________
Preface

___________________
Guide to documentation 1

SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2

___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF
(6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual

___________________
Technical specifications 6

___________________
Parameter data record A

___________________
Representation of analog
values B

09/2018
A5E03573289-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E03573289-AE Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 09/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of the documentation

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the system.

Changes compared to previous version

Compared to the previous version, this manual contains the following change:
In the "Technical specifications" section, the operational and basic error limits for
thermocouple type C have changed.

Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:

Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.

Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified
electronic waste disposal company and dispose of the equipment according to the applicable
regulations in your country.

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 3
Preface

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

4 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................14
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................17
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................21
4.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................27
4.4 Scalable measuring range ......................................................................................................32
4.4.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................34
4.4.2 Evaluating data record 235 .....................................................................................................35
4.5 Address space ........................................................................................................................38
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 39
5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................39
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................41
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................43
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 45
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................45
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 53
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................53
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................59
A.3 Errors when transferring the data record ................................................................................67
A.4 Switchable wire break check ..................................................................................................68
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 69
B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................70
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................71
B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors ................................................72
B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors ...........................................................73
B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples ..............................................................76

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 5
Guide to documentation 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.

Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.

Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

6 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE
 Guide to documentation

General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).

"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 7
Guide to documentation

"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).

Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

8 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE
 Guide to documentation

SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the
TIA Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300).

PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 9
Guide to documentation

SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

10 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties

Article number
6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1

View of the module

① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ BU type
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number

Figure 2-1 View of the module AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties

Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Analog input module with 4 inputs
● Resolution: Up to 16 bits including sign
● Voltage measurement type can be set per channel
● Resistor measurement type can be set per channel
● Thermal resistor (RTD) measurement type can be set per channel
● Thermocouple (TC) measurement type can be set per channel
● Configurable diagnostics for each channel
● Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel (two high and two low limits
per channel)
● Automatic compensation of the line resistance with 3-wire connection
The module supports the following functions:

Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the functions

HW FW STEP 7 GSD file

Function version version TIA Portal V5.x PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP
Firmware update FS01 V1.0.0 or V11, SP2 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher with HSP 0024 with HSP 0227 V1.0
or higher
Identification data FS01 V1.0.0 or V11, SP2 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
I&M0 to I&M3 higher with HSP 0024 with HSP 0227 V1.0
or higher
Reconfiguration in FS01 V1.0.0 or V11, SP2 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
RUN higher with HSP 0024 with HSP 0227 V1.0
or higher
Value status FS01 V1.1.0 or V12, SP1 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
(PROFINET IO only) higher with HSP 0057 with HSP 0227 V2.0
or higher
Calibration in runtime FS01 V2.0.0 or V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
higher with HSP 0227 V3.0
or higher
Scalable measuring FS01 V2.0.0 or V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
range higher with HSP 0227 V2.0
or higher
Selectable conductor FS01 V2.0.0 or V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
resistance for 2-wire higher with HSP 0227 V3.0
connection or higher
Switchable wire break FS01 V2.0.0 or V13 or higher V5.5 SP3 or higher X X
check higher with HSP 0227 V3.0
or higher

You can configure the module with STEP 7 and with a GSD file.

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

12 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE
 Product overview
2.1 Properties

Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification label
● Shield connection

See also
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 13
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF module with the
terminal assignments.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Note
• The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.
• When using floating sensors, bridge the m- connections and connect to ground / FE. This
increases the immunity of the module.
Bridging and connecting are not necessary for disabled and disconnected inputs.

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

14 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE
 Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

Wiring: 2-wire connection for thermocouples and 4-, 3-, 2-wire connection of resistance-type sensors
or thermal resistors (RTD)
The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 15
Wiring
3.1 Wiring and block diagram

① 2-wire connection of thermocouple / Mn+ Measuring line positive, channel n

voltage connection Mn- Measuring line negative, channel n
② 4-, 3-, 2-wire connection of re- ICn+ Constant current line positive, channel n
sistance-type sensors or thermal ICn- Constant current line negative, channel n
resistors (RTD)
③ Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored
BaseUnit)
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) P1, P2, Internal self-assembling voltage buses
AUX Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
⑤ Constant current power supply DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Multiplexer .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑦ Temperature recording for BU type PWR Power LED (green)
A1 only
⑧ Filter connection supply voltage F0 to F3 Channel fault LED (red)
(available with light-colored
BaseUnit only)
⑨ Color-coded label with color code
CC00 (optional)
Figure 3-1 Connection and block diagram for connection of thermocouples and resistance-type
sensors or thermal resistors (RTD)

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

16 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE
Parameters/address space 4
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges

The following table describes the measuring range and the temperature coefficients you can
configure for each measurement type:

Table 4- 1 Measurement types and measuring ranges

Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient

Deactivated – –
Voltage ±50 mV / ±80 mV /
±250 mV / ±1 V
Resistor (2-wire connection) PTC –
Resistor (2-, 3-, 4-wire connection) 150 Ω / 300 Ω / 600 Ω / –
3 kΩ / 6 kΩ
Thermal resistor RTD Climatic / Standard Cu 0.004271
(3-wire connection) Cu 10
Thermal resistor RTD Climatic / Standard Pt 0.00385 /
(2, 3, 4-wire connection) Pt 100 Pt 0.003916 /
Pt 200 Pt 0.003902 /
Pt 500 Pt 0.00392 /
Pt 1000 Pt 0.00385055
Climatic / Standard Ni 0.00618 /
Ni 100 Ni 0.00672
Ni 120
Ni 200
Ni 500
Ni 1000
Climatic2 / Standard2 Ni 0.005
Ni 1000
Thermocouple (TC) Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, -
B, T, C, U, TXK (acc. to GOST)
1 The preset temperature coefficients are valid for Europe.
2 For sensors LG-Ni 1000 from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stäfa).

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 17
Parameters/address space
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges

Special features when using Cu10 sensors

● Choose "Thermal resistor (3-wire connection)" and "Cu10" in the parameter assignment.
● Wire the Cu10 sensor into the 3-wire connection technology.
● During operation, automatic, internal compensation of the line resistance of the missing
measuring line takes place.

Note
To ensure optimum line compensation with Cu10, please observe the following:
• An accurate measured value is only attained if the cable resistance of the positive
constant current line to the Cu10 sensor and the cable resistance of the negative
measuring line are identical in value.
• Recommendation: Keep the measuring line as short as possible.
• Different resistance values may also occur due to the connection method used.

Special features when using PTC resistors

PTCs are suitable for monitoring temperature and/or as thermal protection devices of
complex drives or transformer windings.
● Choose "Thermal resistor (2-wire)" and "PTC" in the parameter assignment.
● Connect the PTC to the 2-wire connection technology.
● Use the PTC resistors, type A (PTC thermistor) in accordance with DIN/VDE 0660,
part 302.
● If "Underflow" diagnostic is enabled, a "Low limit violated" diagnostic is generated for
resistance values < 18 Ω, indicating a short-circuit.
● Sensor data for the PTC resistor:

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

18 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges

Table 4- 2 Using PTC resistors

Property Technical specifica- Comment

tions
Switching points Behavior with rising temperature
< 550 Ω Normal range:
• SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
550 Ω to 1650 Ω Prewarning range:
• SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII)
> 1650 Ω Response range:
• SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
Behavior with falling temperature
> 750 Ω Response range:
• SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
750 Ω to 540 Ω Prewarning range:
• SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII)
< 540 Ω Normal range:
• SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
Reaction to short-circuit
< 18 Ω • SIMATIC S7: Bit 7 (IB x+1) = "1", Bit 0 = "0" and
Bit 2 = "0"
(RRT-5) °C Max. 550 Ω TNF = Rated response temperature of the sensor
(RRT+5) °C min. 1330 Ω (according to DIN/VDE 0660)
(RRT+15) °C min. 4000 Ω
Measuring voltage/ Max. 7.5 V1
voltage at the PTC
1 Below 23 kΩ

Assignment in the process image input (PII) with SIMATIC S7

Figure 4-1 Assignment in the process image input (PII)

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE 19
Parameters/address space
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges

Notes on programming
● Bits 0+2 are relevant for evaluation in the process image input. You can monitor, for
example, the temperature of a motor using bits 0+2.
● Bits 0+2 in the process image input cannot be saved. During parameter assignment, take
into consideration that a motor, for example, starts up in a controlled manner (via an
acknowledgment).
● Bits 0+2 can never be set at the same time; they are set one after the other.

NOTICE
No measurement is possible in the following cases:
• When I/O modules are pulled out
• When supply voltage to the I/O module fails
• When there is a wire break or short-circuit in the measuring lines
Therefore, always evaluate the diagnostics entries of the AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF for
safety reasons.

Example
The diagram shows the temperature curve and the associated switching points.

Figure 4-2 Temperature curve with prewarning range

See also
Technical specifications (Page 45)

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

20 Manual, 09/2018, A5E03573289-AE
 Parameters/address space
4.2 Parameters

4.2 Parameters

Parameters of the AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the WRREC instruction to transfer the
parameters to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment and
structure of parameter data record (Page 59). The following parameter settings are possible:

Table 4- 3 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)

Parameter Value range Default Reconfigu- Scope with configuration

ration in software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA
RUN Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel 1
Missing supply voltage
• Enable
L+
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module
Reference junction
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Di